DELTA IA-PLC ISPSoft UM EN 20190614 PDF

ISPSoft User Manual
Industrial Automation Headquarters

Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan City,
Taoyuan County 33068, Taiwan
TEL: 886-3-362-6301 / FAX: 886-3-371-6301
Asia
Delta Electronics (Jiangsu) Ltd.
Wujiang Plant 3
1688 Jiangxing East Road,
Wujiang Economic Development Zone
Wujiang City, Jiang Su Province, P.R.C. 215200
TEL: 86-512-6340-3008 / FAX: 86-769-6340-7290
Delta Greentech (China) Co., Ltd.

238 Min-Xia Road, Pudong District,
ShangHai, P.R.C. 201209
TEL: 86-21-58635678 / FAX: 86-21-58630003
Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc.

Tokyo Office
2-1-14 Minato-ku Shibadaimon,
Tokyo 105-0012, Japan
TEL: 81-3-5733-1111 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1211
Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.

1511, Byucksan Digital Valley 6-cha, Gasan-dong,
ISPSoft User Manual

Geumcheon-gu, Seoul, Korea, 153-704
TEL: 82-2-515-5303 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302
Delta Electronics Int’l (S) Pte Ltd.

4 Kaki Bukit Ave 1, #05-05, Singapore 417939
TEL: 65-6747-5155 / FAX: 65-6744-9228
Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd.

Plot No 43 Sector 35, HSIIDC
Gurgaon, PIN 122001, Haryana, India
TEL : 91-124-4874900 / FAX : 91-124-4874945
Americas
Delta Products Corporation (USA)
Raleigh Office
P.O. Box 12173,5101 Davis Drive,
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A.
TEL: 1-919-767-3800 / FAX: 1-919-767-8080
Delta Greentech (Brasil) S.A.

Sao Paulo Office
Rua Itapeva, 26 - 3° andar Edificio Itapeva One-Bela Vista
01332-000-São Paulo-SP-Brazil
TEL: 55 11 3568-3855 / FAX: 55 11 3568-3865
Europe
Deltronics (The Netherlands) B.V.
Eindhoven Office
De Witbogt 20, 5652 AG Eindhoven, The Netherlands
TEL: 31-40-2592850 / FAX: 31-40-2592851
DVP-4949620-06 2019-06-14
*We reserve the right to change the information in this catalogue without prior notice. www.deltaww.com
ISPSoft User Manual
Revision History
Ve r s i o n Revision Date
1st The first version was published. 2013/01/18
2nd ppendix D and Appendix E are added. 2015/03/18
1 . N e w c o n t e n ts c o n c e r n i n g A H x x E M C a n d A S 3 0 0
series are added in Chapter 3.
2 . N e w c o n t e n ts c o n c e r n i n g D a t a U n i t Typ e a r e a d d e d
in Chapter 8.
3 . N e w c o n t e n ts c o n c e r n i n g A x i s a r e a d d e d i n
Chapter 9.
4 . N e w c o n t e n ts c o n c e r n i n g C o n t i n u o u s F u n c t i o n
C h a r ts a r e a d d e d i n C h a p t e r 1 5 .
3rd 2016/05/13
5 . N e w c o n t e n ts c o n c e r n i n g G - C o d e E d i t o r a n d E - C A M
Editor are added in Chapter 21.
6 . N e w c o n t e n ts c o n c e r n i n g W i za r d To o l a r e a d d e d i n
Chapter 22.
7 . N e w c o n t e n ts c o n c e r n i n g A H x x E M C a n d A S 3 0 0
series are added in Appendix B.
8.Appendix D and Appendix E are removed.
9. Update all software images.
1 . N e w c o n t e n ts c o n c e r n i n g s e t t i n g c o m m u n i c a t i o n
pa r a m e t e r s f o r A S 3 0 0 s i m u l a t o r a r e a d d e d i n
Chapter 2.
2. Update information concerning AHxxEMC and
AS300 in Chapter 3.
3 . N e w c o n t e n ts c o n c e r n i n g a x i s a r e u p d a t e d i n
Chapter 9.
4. Update new folding function in the action list for
SFC.
5 . N e w c o n t e n ts c o n c e r n i n g c h a n g e D V P s e r i e s
modules to AS series modules are updated in
Chapter 16.
4th 2017/06/15
6. Update information concerning online monitoring
in Chapter 17.
7 . N e w c o n t e n ts c o n c e r n i n g E C A M e d i t o r a n d
p o l yn o m i a l a r e a d d e d i n C h a p t e r 2 1 .
8 . N e w c o n t e n ts c o n c e r n i n g p l a n n i n g ta b l e , l i s t s ,
d a t a t r a c e r, d a t a l o g g e r a n d d o u b l e v e r t i c a l
measurement lines are added in Chapter 22.
9 . N e w c o n t e n ts c o n c e r n i n g i n s t a l l i n g t h e U S B d r i v e r
i n W i n d o ws X P w i t h S P 3 , W i n d o ws 7 , W i n d o w 8
and W indow 10 are added in Appendix A.
10.The ranges of the S device for AS300 series are
revised in Appendix B.
1 . A d d n e w c o n t e n ts r e g a r d i n g D V P 1 5 M C a n d
i n f o r m a t i o n o n I S P S o f t f o r i n s ta l l i n g / r e m o v i n g i n
Chapter 1.
2. Update backup file number of auto save project
a n d l i m i ta t i o n o n t h e n u m b e r o f A H / D V { / A S
5th s i m u l a t o r s ; n e w c o n t e n ts o n D V P 1 5 M C a n d e d i t e d 2018/06/12
routing mode information are added in Chapter 2.
3 . A d d n e w i n f o r m a t i o n c o n t a i n i n g HW C O N F I G f o r
AH500 redundanc y s ystem series and DVP15MC,
r e d u n d a n t e x t e n s i o n r a c k , n e w ta b - I O i n p u t f i l t e r
c o n t e n t i n HW C O N F I G b a s i c C P U p a r a m e t e r
setting of AHxxEM series. Edit basic CPU
pa r a m e t e r - N a m e a n d C o m m e n t b o x e s , pa r a m e t e r s
of AS series CPU modules in Chapter 3.
4. U p d a t e c o n t e n ts r e g a r d i n g ta s k m a n a g e m e n t f o r
AH500 redundanc y s ystem and DVP15MC in
Chapter 5.
5. E d i t A S s e r i e s d a ta t y p e s a n d a d d i n f o r m a t i o n l i k e
S d e v i c e s u p p o r ts b y A H s e r i e s C P U m o d u l e s a n d
d a t a t yp e s o f D V P 1 5 M C a s w e l l a s s ym b o l c l a s s e s
in Chapter 6.
6. A d d d a t a t yp e s n o t s u p p o r t e d b y t h e f u n c t i o n
blocks in AS series CPU modules, assigning
m em o r y b l o c k s t o f u n c t i o n b l o c k s i n A H
r e d u n d a n c y s ys t e m s e r i e s , e d i t b a s i c
specifications for function blocks and new
c o n t e n ts r e g a r d i n g f u n c t i o n b l o c k s I / O a n d l i b r a r y
for DVP15MC are included in Chapter 7.
7. A d d c o n t e n ts r e g a r d i n g s t r u c t u r e D U T a n d
l i m i ta t i o n o n n u m b e r o f e n u m e r a t i o n s , c h a n g e
structure to enumeration and from enumeration to
structure as well as information for DVP15MC in
Chapter 8.
8. U p d a t e s o n c yc l e t i m e f o r a x i s i n t h e p r o j e c t
m a n a g e m e n t s e c t i o n , i n t r o d u c e ‘ S yn c h r o n i z e w i t h
E C AT B u i l d e r ’ o p t i o n a n d a d d i n f o r m a t i o n o n a x i s
pa r a m e t e r s e t t i n g i n c l u d i n g n o d e a d d r e s s ,
monitoring and test run functions for DVP15MC
and AHxxEMC series in Chapter 9.
9. A d d n e w c o n t e n ts i n c l u d i n g M P S i n s t r u c t i o n a n d
information on DVP15MC; edit ladder diagram
r e g a r d i n g a c t i v a t i n g o r i n a c t i v a t i n g a n e t wo r k i n
Chapter 10.
10. E d i t c o n t e n ts o f p u t t i n g l a b e l s i n C h a p t e r 11
11. Add ST instructions not supported by the AH/AS
series CPU modules and ST instructions supported
b y t h e A S s e r i e s C P U m o d u l e s b u t w i t h l i m i ta t i o n s
in Chapter 13.
12. E d i t c o n t e n ts o f S d e v i c e o c c u p i e d b y t h e S T E P
d a t a t yp e i n t h e P L C a n d a d d A H 5 0 0 r e d u n d a n c y
s ys t e m s e r i e s i n r u n n i n g t h e ‘ F i n a l S c a n ’ a s we l l
a s S F C s ys t e m s t r u c t u r e c o n t e n ts i n C h a p t e r 1 4 .
13. Correct the wording used in warning the operation
t h a t c a u s e s l o s s o f d a ta o r ta s k ; a d d n e w c o n t e n ts
o f D V P 1 5 M C ; e d i t d e v i c e c o m m e n t l i s ts o f
A H / A S / D V P s e r i e s a n d c o n t e n ts i n u s e d d e v i c e
report in Chapter 16.
14. A d d n e w c o n t e n ts i n c l u d i n g D V P 1 5 M C , o n l i n e
editing and update function, DVP simulator
information; edit debugging mode for DVP series,
a n d s ys t e m l o g f u n c t i o n s f o r A H 5 0 0 r e d u n d a n c y
s ys t e m s e r i e s i n C h a p t e r 1 7 .
15. E x pa n d c o n t e n ts r e g a r d i n g D V P 1 5 M C i n C h a p t e r
18.
16. E d i t c o n t e n ts o f NW CO N F I G i n C h a p t e r 1 9 .
17. Add new information regarding CARD Utility for
AH500 redundanc y s ystem series and edit backup
source in card utility for AS series added in
Chapter 20.
18. Correct Chapter 21 of G-code editor to ‘not
supported by the current ISPSoft version’ and edit
E-CAM functions.
1 9 . E d i t c o n t e n ts r e g a r d i n g p o s i t i o n p l a n n i n g ta b l e ,
d a t a t r a c e r, d a t a l o g g e r a n d h i g h s p e e d c o u n t e r i n
Chapter 22.
2 0 . A d d A H 5 6 0 E N 2 m o d u l e t o t h e i n s ta l l a t i o n p a t h i n
Appendix A
2 1 . A d d n e w c o n t e n ts r e g a r d i n g D V P 1 5 M C ,
AHCPU501-EN, AHCPU501-RS2, AHCPU521-RS2,
AHCPU531-RS2, AS200 series; update data
e x c h a n g e s e t u ps a n d NW C O N F G I C ; e d i t t h e
a d d r e s s r a n g e f o r A H C P U 5 11 - E N / A H C P U 5 11 - R S 2
and AHCPU531-EN modules and program
c o m p i l a t i o n & t i m e f o r u p l o a d i n g / d o wn l o a d i n g i n
Appendix B.
1. Modify chapter 1: add DVPxxMC description;
i n f o r m a t i o n o n i n s ta l l i n g I S P S o f t a n d r e m o v e
modified ISPSoft content; installing COMMGR and
remove modified COMMGR content; add language
s u p p o r t e d b y P L C t yp e s i n I S P S o f t a n d f u n c t i o n
support list.
2. Modify chapter 2: ISPSoft first step, window title;
content, function toolbar and icon toolbar; project,
message and edit work content section; project
structure in ISPSoft, single project and group
project; integrate motion module project content;
s ys t e m a n d e n v i r o n m e n t s e t t i n g ; e n a b l e a n d c l o s e
communication COMMGR as well as drive
management; create connection channel, create
ISPSoft and COMMGR connection as well as
connection with host and communication port.
3. Modify chapter 3: DVPxxMC PLC host parameter
s e t t i n g ; A H 5 6 0 r e d u n d a n t s ys t e m pa r a m e t e r
s e t t i n g a n d r e l a t e d c o n t e n t ; HW C O N F I G t o o l s .
4 . M o d i f y c h a p t e r 4 : a d d n e w p r o j e c t a n d h a r d wa r e
configuration and module allocation; host and
6th 2019/06/14
m o d u l e pa r a m e t e r s e t t i n g a n d c r e a t e p r o g r a m
content; basic edit- select ladder diagram section
and increase operation function; basic edit- insert
API instructions, program check and editing;
create connection between testing and debugging,
d o w n l o a d p r o g r a m a n d c o n f i g u r a t i o n pa r a m e t e r,
connection testing examples.
5. Modify chapter 5: the POU structure and task
m a n a g e m e n t i n I S P S o f t ; ta s k i n p r o j e c t s e c t i o n
a n d P O U e x e c u t i o n o r d e r c o n t e n t i n ta s k ; c r e a t e
POU and property setting as well as POU active
s ta t e , d e l e t e a n d c o p y P O U , P O U pa s s w o r d
setting and canceling, export and import POU,
e x p o r t a n d i m p o r t f u n c t i o n b l o c k P O U ; ta s k
m a n a g e m e n t o p e r a t i o n a n d ta s k p r o p e r t y a n d
condition for interrupt, POU allocation, POU order
and content; programming examples of POU and
ta s k , i n t e r r u p t p r o g r a m e x am p l e s o f D V P s e r i e s ,
interrupt program examples of AH500 series.
6. Modify chapter 6: s ymbol variable category and
d a t a t yp e s a s w e l l a s p o s i t i o n a l l o c a t i o n a n d i n i t i a l
v a l u e c o n t e n t ; s ym b o l v a r i a b l e ta b l e a n d a d d
s ym b o l v a r i a b l e a s w e l l a s a r r a y a n d s t r i n g
s ym b o l s , m o d i f i c a t i o n o n s ym b o l v a r i a b l e a n d e d i t
s ym b o l t a b l e , d o w n l o a d i n i t i a l v a l u e o f s ym b o l
variables, device resource allocation setting.
7. Modify chapter 7: s ymbol variable of function
block, input and output of function block; the
function block call or ‘nesting FBs’ and function
b l o c k m em o r y a l l o c a t i o n a n d b a s i c s p e c i f i c a t i o n ;
create program example; add and refer to user
l i b r a r y a s w e l l a s D e l t a l i b r a r y.
8 . M o d i f y c h a p t e r 8 : c r e a t e St r u c t u r e c o n t e n t
9. Modify chapter 9: create axis content in
AHxxEMC; create axis and basic settings in
D V P x x M C ; t h e m a i n s ym b o l a n d a x i s s ym b o l i n
g l o b a l s ym b o l t a b l e ; A H x x E M C a n d D V P x x M C a x i s
pa r a m e t e r s e t t i n g ; A H x x E M C a n d D V P x x M C
monitoring and testing
10.Modify chapter 10: LD edit environment in
I S P S o f t ; u s e d e v i c e s ym b o l v a r i a b l e a n d c o n ta t n
in LD, insert API instruction and function block,
edit section logic command, switching between
s ym b o l m o d e a n d p o s i t i o n m o d e c o n t e n t .
1 1 . M o d i f y c h a p t e r 11 : F B D e d i t e n v i r o n m e n t i n
I S P S o f t , F B D d e v i c e s ym b o l v a r i a b l e a n d
c o n s ta n t ; c o n ta c ts o f A P I c o m pa r i s o n a n d f u n c t i o n
b l o c k c o n t e n t ; s w i t c h i n g b e t w e e n s ym b o l m o d e
and position mode content.
12.Modify chapter 12: edit IL command, insert API
and function block content.
13.Modify chapter 13: ST edit environment in ISPSoft,
edit ST description, insert API and function block,
create program example.
1 4 . M o d i f y c h a p t e r 1 4 : St e p a n d A c t i o n , Tr a n s i t i o n ,
J u m p , c o n d i t i o n f o r A c t i o n m o d if i e r s , c o n d i t i o n
d e f i n e d , i n i t i a l St e p ; i n t e r n a l a t t r i b u t e , St e p
a t t r i b u t e p a r a m e t e r, A c t i o n a n d Tr a n s i t i o n a t t r i b u t e
pa r a m e t e r ; S F C e d i t e n v i r o n m e n t i n I S P S o f t ,
c r e a t e a n d m a n a g e A c t i o n & Tr a n s i t i o n , a s s i g n
St e p a n d Tr a n s i t i o n s y m b o l , a l l o c a t e A c t i o n /
folded Action list; create program example.
15.Modify chapter 15: instruction and function block
content.
1 6 . M o d i f y c h a p t e r 1 6 : a d d m o d i f i e d P L C t yp e s l i s t ,
add project download and upload list, device note
ta b l e a n d d e v i c e u s e s ta t u s f o r D V P s e r i e s ,
content for program alignment.
17.Modify chapter 17: debugging mode in DVP series,
A H 5 0 0 s i m u l a t o r c o n t e n t ; P L C s ys t e m i n f o r m a t i o n ,
P L C Y s ys t e m l o g c o n t e n t .
1 8 . M o d i f y c h a p t e r 1 8 : I S P S o f t p a s s wo r d s t r u c t u r e ,
P O U pa s s w o r d , s u b r o u t i n e p a s s wo r d , a n d o t h e r
pa s s wo r d p r o t e c t i o n f u n c t i o n .
1 9 . M o d i f y c h a p t e r 1 9 : N W CO N F I G b r i e f i n t r o , b a s i c
introduction, communication parameters setting,
ta s k p r o c e d u r e m o d i f i c a t i o n ; d e p l o y n o d e , c o n n e c t
internet, node and internet property setting,
device or hide/show internet, legal internet
s t r u c t u r e , d o w n l o a d r o u t i n g ta b l e , r o u t i n g t a b l e
testing content; choose host device,
communication parameter setting, data exchange
ta b l e , s e c t i o n s e t t i n g , s yn c h r o n i z e d d a ta
exchange for PLCs, management for data
exchange table, PLC Link monitoring function,
setup PLC Link notes; Ether Link brief intro, open
E t h e r L i n k s e t t i n g w i n d o w, c r e a t e a n d m a n a g e
data exchange table, device list and icon
operation, Ether Link operating mode, download
Ether Link device, upload Ether Link device,
d e l e t e n o n s yn c h r o n i z e d d e v i c e , o n l i n e s ta r t / s t o p
E t h e r L i n k , s ys t e m d o w n l o a d , r o u t i n g a p p l i c a t i o n
in ISPSoft.
20.Modify chapter 20: information backup memory
card operation, PLC permanent backup setting,
m em o r y c a r d u t i l i t y s o f t wa r e i n t r o a n d b a c k u p
operation, restore operation content.
21.Modify chapter 21: delete G-Code editor; E-CAM
e d i t o r, a b o u t E - C A M a n d i ts d e ta i l s a s w e l l a s
usage.
22.Modify chapter 22: setup position planning,
position planning simulation, upload and download
p o s i t i o n p l a n n i n g ta b l e ; a x i s c o n t r o l m o d e - p o i n t
to point single axis mode, single axis multiple
section output mode, 2-axis linear interpolation
mode, 2-axis arc interpolation mode; about and
o p e n d a ta t r a c e r, pa r a m e t e r s a m p l e s e t t i n g ,
sample mode, measurement content; About and
o p e n d a ta l o g g e r, s e t t i n g s a m p l e p a r a m e t e r s ,
monitoring and log mode, measurement content;
About high-speed timer wizard.
2 3 . M o d i f y A p p e n d i x A : i n s ta l l U S B d r i v e r i n W in d o ws
10.
2 4 . M o d i f y A p p e n d i x B : D V P x x M C d e v i c e t yp e s a n d
d e v i c e a d d r e s s f o r m a t a s w e l l a s r e ta i n l a t c h e d
device.
ISPSoft User Manual
Table of Contents
Preface ....................................................................................................... I
Chapter 1 Introducing ISPSoft
1.1 Introduction of ISPSoft and System Requirements............................ 1-2
1.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................... 1-2

1.1.2 System Requirements..................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Installing ISPSoft ........................................................................... 1-3
1.1.4 Uninstalling ISPSoft ........................................................................ 1-7
1.2 Introduction of COMMGR ................................................................... 1-8
1.2.1 Operating Mode of COMMGR ............................................................ 1-8

1.2.2 Installing COMMGR ........................................................................ 1-9
1.2.3 Uninstalling COMMGR ................................................................... 1-13
1.3 ISPSoft for PLC Devices ................................................................... 1-14
1.3.1 ISPSoft - List of Programming Languages........................................ 1-14

1.3.2 ISPSoft - List of Functions ............................................................. 1-14
Chapter 2 Starting and Setting ISPSoft
2.1 Guidelines and Environment ............................................................. 2-4

2.1.1 Getting Started ............................................................................ 2-4
2.1.2 Window Title and Status Bar ....................................................... 2-14
2.1.3 Toolbar - Functions.................................................................... 2-16
2.1.4 Toolbar - Icons .......................................................................... 2-18
2.1.5 Project and Compile Message ...................................................... 2-21
2.1.6 Workspace ................................................................................ 2-25
2.2 Project Framework ........................................................................ 2-29
2.2.1 Single Project and Group Project ............................................... 2-29
2.2.2 Integration of Motion Control Modules ....................................... 2-31
2.2.3 Managing a Single Project ........................................................ 2-33
2.2.4 Managing Group Project ........................................................... 2-46
2.2.5 Managing Motion Control Modules ............................................. 2-62
2.3 Basic Configuration ....................................................................... 2-72
2.3.1 System and Environment ......................................................... 2-72
2.3.2 Importing and Exporting User Preference ................................... 2-84
2.4 Communication Settings ............................................................... 2-87
2.4.1 Start/Close COMMGR ............................................................... 2-87
2.4.2 Driver Management for COMMGR .............................................. 2-89
2.4.3 Creating Connection Channel - Add Driver.................................. 2-90
2.4.3.1 Communication Parameter Setting - RS232/422/485................. 2-95
2.4.3.2 Communication Parameter Setting - USB (Virtual COM) ............. 2-96
2.4.3.3 Communication Parameter Setting - DirectLink (USB) ............... 2-98
2.4.3.4 Communication Parameter Setting - Ethernet ........................... 2-99
2.4.3.5 Communication Parameter Setting - DirectLink (Ethernet) ........ 2-100
i
2.4.3.6 Communication Parameter Setting - DVP Simulator ................. 2-102
2.4.3.7 Communication Parameter Setting - AH5x0 & AH5x1 Simulator . 2-102
2.4.3.8 Communication Parameter Setting - AS Simulator ................... 2-103
2.4.4 Creating Connection Channel - Start/Stop a Driver..................... 2-104
2.4.5 Creating Connection Channel - Configure/Delete a Driver ........... 2-108
2.4.6 Creating Connection Channel - Simulator with Operating Panels .. 2-111
2.4.7 Creating Connection between ISPSoft and COMMGR ................... 2-115
2.4.8 Connecting PLC (Host) and Communication Port ........................ 2-119
2.4.9 Practical Connection Test ........................................................ 2-122
Chapter 3 PLC System Configuration & Settings
3.1 Parameter Setting for DVP Series PLC ............................................... 3-4

3.1.1 System Management Tools for DVP Series PLC............................ 3-4
3.1.2 Retentive Range...................................................................... 3-4
3.1.3 Connected Information ............................................................ 3-8
3.1.4 Parameter Setting for DVP-ES3 Series PLC ................................. 3-8
3.2 Hardware Configuration Tool ─ HWCONFIG ..................................... 3-10

3.2.1 HWCONFIG Environment ..............................................................3-11
3.2.2 Module Configuration ...................................................................3-14
3.2.2.1 Add Module ..............................................................................3-14
3.2.2.2 Address Assignment of Modules ..................................................3-19
3.2.2.3 Edit Comment ..........................................................................3-23
3.2.2.4 Delete Module ..........................................................................3-25
3.2.2.5 Replace Module ........................................................................3-27
3.2.2.6 Search/Find and Replace ...........................................................3-28
3.2.2.7 Copy/Paste ..............................................................................3-33
3.2.2.8 Cut/Paste.................................................................................3-35
3.2.2.9 Drag and Drop..........................................................................3-37
3.2.2.10 Add Expansion Backplane and Redundant Expansion Backplane ......3-38
3.2.2.11 Delete Expansion Backplane and Redundant Expansion Backplane ..3-42
3.2.2.12 Replace Backplanes ...................................................................3-44
3.2.2.13 Cut/Copy/Paste Expansion Backplane & Redundant Expansion Rack 3-46
3.2.2.14 Drag an Expansion or Redundant Expansion Backplane..................3-50
3.2.2.15 Rearrange Input/Output Device Range ........................................3-51
3.2.2.16 Show/Hide Module Names..........................................................3-52
3.2.3 Managing the Version of a Module ..................................................3-52
3.3 Parameter Settings for AH500 Series PLC ........................................ 3-54

3.3.1 Open the PLC Host Parameter Setting Page .....................................3-54
3.3.2 Setting CPU Parameters ................................................................3-56
3.3.2.1 CPU Basic Parameter: Name ......................................................3-56
3.3.2.2 CPU Basic Parameter: System ....................................................3-57
3.3.2.3 CPU Basic Parameter: Latched Device Range ................................3-61
3.3.3 Setting COM Port Parameters ........................................................3-62
3.3.4 Setting Ethernet Parameters .........................................................3-63
3.3.5 Setting Advanced Ethernet Parameters ...........................................3-65
3.3.5.1 Ethernet - Advance: Filter ..........................................................3-65
3.3.5.2 Ethernet - Advance: NTP ...........................................................3-67
3.3.5.3 Ethernet - Advance: Email .........................................................3-68
3.3.5.4 Ethernet - Advance: Email Trigger...............................................3-69
3.3.5.5 Ethernet - Advance: Email and Trigger Configuration .....................3-72
3.3.5.6 Ethernet - Advance: Socket........................................................3-73
3.3.5.7 Ethernet - Advance: Web ...........................................................3-75
ii
3.3.5.8 Ethernet - Advance: Data Exchange ........................................... 3-76
3.3.6 Data Exchange Setup - COM & Ethernet......................................... 3-79
3.3.6.1 Data Exchange Setup - COM1/COM2 /COM .................................. 3-81
3.3.6.2 Data Exchange Setup - Ethernet ................................................ 3-82
3.4 Parameter Settings for AHxxEMC Series PLC ................................... 3-82

3.4.1 Open the PLC Host Parameter Setting Page .................................... 3-82
3.4.2 Options...................................................................................... 3-84
3.4.2.1 Options - System Information.................................................... 3-84
3.4.2.2 Option - COM Port Setting ......................................................... 3-89
3.4.2.3 Option- Ethernet Setting ........................................................... 3-89
3.4.2.4 Option- Ethernet Setting (advanced) .......................................... 3-90
3.4.3 Data Exchange - COM2 &Ethernet ................................................. 3-91
3.4.3.1 Data Exchange - COM2 ............................................................. 3-92
3.4.3.2 Data Exchange - Ethernet ......................................................... 3-93
3.5 Parameter Settings for AS Series PLC .............................................. 3-94

3.5.1 Open PLC Host Parameter Setting Page ......................................... 3-94
3.5.2 Options...................................................................................... 3-96
3.5.2.1 Options - System Settings......................................................... 3-96
3.5.2.2 Options - COM1 Port Setting & COM2 Port Setting ....................... 3-103
3.5.2.3 Options - Ethernet Port Basic Setting ......................................... 3-104
3.5.2.4 Ethernet Port Advance Setting .................................................. 3-105
3.5.2.5 Options - Function Card 1 Setting ............................................. 3-113
3.5.2.7 Options - Built-in AD/DA Setting ............................................... 3-117
3.5.2.8 Options - Built-in CAN Communication ....................................... 3-118
3.5.3 Configuring AS-Series Remote Modules ........................................ 3-118
3.5.4 Data Exchange - COM1, COM2 and Ethernet.................................. 3-121
3.5.4.1 Data Exchange - COM1 and Data Exchange - COM2 .................... 3-123
3.5.4.2 Data Exchange - Ethernet ........................................................ 3-124
3.5.5 Data Exchange - FEN02, Function Card 1 and Function Card 2 ......... 3-124
3.5.5.1 Data Exchange - FEN02 ........................................................... 3-126
3.5.5.2 Data Exchange - Function Card 1 & Function Card 2 .................... 3-127
3.6 Parameter Settings for DVPxxMC Series PLC ................................. 3-128

3.6.1 Opening the PLC Parameter Setting Window .................................. 3-128
3.6.2 Options..................................................................................... 3-130
3.6.2.1 Options - System Settings........................................................ 3-130
3.6.2.2 Options - CANopen .................................................................. 3-131
3.6.2.3 Options - CANmotion ............................................................... 3-132
3.6.2.4 Options - RS232 ..................................................................... 3-132
3.6.2.5 Options - RS485 ..................................................................... 3-133
3.6.2.6 Options - Incremental Encoder 1............................................... 3-133
3.6.2.7 Options - Incremental Encoder 2............................................... 3-134
3.6.2.8 Options - Absolute Encoder ...................................................... 3-135
3.6.2.9 Options - Filtration Time Zone of Input Points ............................. 3-135
3.6.2.10 Options - Run/Stop Setting ...................................................... 3-136
3.6.2.11 Options - Ethernet Port Basic Setting ......................................... 3-137
3.7 Parameter Settings for Modules ..................................................... 3-138

3.7.1 Setting Internal Parameters for AH5x0 and AH5x1 Modules ............. 3-138
3.7.2 Parameter Settings for AHxxEMC and AS Series Modules ................ 3-141
3.7.3 Exporting and Importing Parameters for Modules ........................... 3-144
3.7.4 Updating Parameters for Modules ................................................. 3-145
iii
3.7.5 Parameter Settings for Intelligent Modules .................................... 3-146
3.8 HWCONFIG Parameter Management and Online Diagnosis ............ 3-146

3.8.1 Save and Print function .............................................................. 3-147
3.8.2 Purchase Order.......................................................................... 3-147
3.8.3 Rack Information List for AH Series .............................................. 3-148
3.8.4 Download/Upload System Parameters .......................................... 3-149
3.8.5 I/O Scan ................................................................................... 3-151
3.8.6 AH Series Online Diagnosis ......................................................... 3-156
3.8.6.1 Online Mode ........................................................................... 3-156
3.8.6.2 Module Information and Diagnosis ............................................ 3-157
3.8.6.3 Changing the Status of a Module Online .................................... 3-159
3.8.6.4 Monitoring Table ..................................................................... 3-161
3.8.7 AS Series Online Diagnosis ......................................................... 3-161
3.8.7.1 Online Mode ........................................................................... 3-162
3.8.7.3 Changing the Status of a Module Online .................................... 3-163
3.9 Setting a RTC ............................................................................... 3-165
3.10 Setting the Memory in a PLC ........................................................ 3-166
Chapter 4 Quick Start
4.1 Quick Start ........................................................................................ 4-2

4.1.1 Example .......................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Hardware......................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.3 Program .......................................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Procedure for Creating a Project in ISPSoft ....................................... 4-3
4.3 Creating a Project .............................................................................. 4-4

4.4 Hardware Configuration .................................................................... 4-5
4.4.1 Configuring a Module ........................................................................ 4-5
4.4.2 Parameter Setting for PLCs and Modules .............................................. 4-7
4.5 Creating a Program ......................................................................... 4-10

4.5.1 Adding a Ladder Diagram .................................................................4-10
4.5.2 Basic Editing - Creating a Contact and a Coil .......................................4-12
4.5.3 Basic Editing - Inserting a Network and Typing an Instruction ...............4-15
4.5.4 Basic Editing - Selection of a Network and Operation............................4-17
4.5.5 Basic Editing - Connecting a Contact in Parallel ...................................4-19
4.5.6 Basic Editing - Editing a Comment .....................................................4-20
4.5.7 Basic Editing - Inserting an Applied Instruction ....................................4-21
4.5.8 Basic Editing - Creating a Comparison Contact and Typing a Constant ....4-23
4.5.9 Writing a Program ...........................................................................4-24
4.5.10 Checking and Compiling a Program ....................................................4-25
4.6 Testing and Debugging a Program................................................... 4-26

4.6.1 Creating a Connection ......................................................................4-26
4.6.2 Downloading a Program and Parameters.............................................4-29
4.6.3 Connection Test...............................................................................4-31
iv
Chapter 5 POU and Task
5.1 Program Organization Units and Tasks .............................................. 5-2
5.2 Program Organization Units .............................................................. 5-3

5.2.1 Program Architecture and Types ...................................................... 5-3
5.2.2 POUs in ISPSoft ............................................................................. 5-3
5.3 Tasks ................................................................................................. 5-5

5.3.1 Managing the Tasks in ISPSoft ......................................................... 5-5
5.3.2 Tasks in the Project Management Area ........................................... 5-10
5.3.3 Executing the POUs Assigned to a Task ........................................... 5-12
5.4 Managing a POU .............................................................................. 5-14

5.4.1 Creating and Setting a POU ........................................................... 5-14
5.4.2 POU Active State .......................................................................... 5-17
5.4.3 Delete and Copy POU ................................................................... 5-18
5.4.4 Set and Remove POU Password ..................................................... 5-20
5.4.5 Exporting POU Program ................................................................ 5-20
5.4.6 Importing POU Program ................................................................ 5-21
5.4.7 Exporting Function Block POU ........................................................ 5-22
5.4.8 Importing Function Block POU ....................................................... 5-23
5.5 Task Management ............................................................................ 5-24

5.5.1 Setting Task Description and Condition for Interruption .................... 5-26
5.5.2 Configuration of POU .................................................................... 5-31
5.5.3 POU Order .................................................................................. 5-32
5.6 Example ........................................................................................... 5-33

5.6.1 Programming TASK and POU ......................................................... 5-33
5.6.2 Example of an Interrupt Subroutine in a DVP Series PLC ................... 5-38
5.6.3 Examples of AH5x0 Series Interrupt Programs ................................. 5-44
Chapter 6 Symbol Variables
6.1 Introduction of Symbols .................................................................... 6-2

6.1.1 Application of Symbols and Creation of Identifiers .............................. 6-2
6.1.2 Symbol Variable Classification.......................................................... 6-3
6.1.3 Data Types .................................................................................... 6-4
6.1.4 Symbol Variable Address Allocation and Initial Value........................... 6-8
6.1.5 Indirect Assignment and Modification for Register Symbol Variable ..... 6-10
6.1.6 Bit Operation of Symbol Variable (Only AH/AS Series ) ..................... 6-12
6.2 Symbol Variable Management in ISPSoft ......................................... 6-13

6.2.1 Symbol Variable Table .................................................................. 6-13
6.2.2 Adding Symbol Variable ................................................................ 6-15
6.2.3 Principles of ARRAY or STRING Symbol ........................................... 6-19
6.2.4 Modify Symbol Variables and Edit Symbol Table ............................... 6-22
6.2.5 Remove Symbol Variable Allocated Address ..................................... 6-23
6.2.6 Downloading the Initial Values of the Symbols ................................. 6-23
6.2.7 Export Symbol Table .................................................................... 6-24
6.2.8 Importing a Symbol Table ............................................................. 6-26
v
6.2.9 Arranging the symbols ...................................................................6-29
6.2.10 Filtering the Symbols....................................................................6-30
6.2.11 Device Resource Allocation Setting.................................................6-31
6.3 Example .......................................................................................... 6-32

6.3.1 Planning a Symbol Table ................................................................6-32
6.3.2 Writing a Program .........................................................................6-33
Chapter 7 Function Block and Library
7.1 Knowing Function Blocks ............................................................... 7-2

7.1.1 Introduction of Function Blocks ........................................................ 7-2
7.1.2 Characteristics and Advantages of Function Blocks ............................. 7-3
7.2 Structure of the Function Blocks in ISPSoft.................................... 7-3

7.2.1 En Pin of Function Block.................................................................. 7-4
7.2.2 Symbol Variables in Function Block .................................................. 7-4
7.2.3 Input/Output Pins of a Function Block............................................... 7-6
7.2.4 Index Type Symbol Variables ..........................................................7-11
7.2.5 Function Block Definition and Function Block Instance .......................7-14
7.2.6 Calling Relation Between Function Blocks .........................................7-18
7.2.7 Memory Configuration of Function Block ..........................................7-19
7.3 Using a Function Block ................................................................. 7-25

7.3.1 Basic Specifications for Function Blocks ...........................................7-25
7.3.2 Pulse Instructions for Function Blocks (AH/AS Series ONLY) ...............7-27
7.3.3 Monitoring the Program in a Function Block ......................................7-28
7.3.4 Modifying the Program in a Function Block .......................................7-28
7.4 Instance ....................................................................................... 7-29

7.4.1 Planning a Program .......................................................................7-29
7.4.2 Creating the Program ....................................................................7-30
7.5 Knowing the Library ..................................................................... 7-39

7.5.1 Creating the User-defined Library ...................................................7-39
7.5.2 Including the Function Blocks in the User Defined Library ..................7-41
7.5.3 Using Delta Library .......................................................................7-43
Chapter 8 Data Unit Type
8.1 User-defined Data Type/Data Unit Type ............................................. 8-2
8.2 Structure ............................................................................................ 8-2
8.2.1 Definition of a Structure ................................................................. 8-2

8.2.2 Creating a Structure....................................................................... 8-2
8.2.3 Using a Structure Variable .............................................................. 8-4
8.2.4 Applications of Structures ............................................................... 8-5
8.2.5 Change Structure to Enumeration .................................................... 8-7
8.3 Enumeration ....................................................................................... 8-8

8.3.1 Definition of Enumeration ............................................................... 8-8
8.3.2 Creating an Enumeration ................................................................ 8-8
8.3.3 Using an Enumeration Variable .......................................................8-10
8.3.4 Applications of Enumerations .........................................................8-11
vi
8.3.5 Change Enumeration to Structure ................................................. 8-12
Chapter 9 Axis
9.1 Axis ........................................................................................................ 2
9.1.1 The Meaning of Axis ....................................................................... 2
9.1.2 Creating a New Axis ....................................................................... 2
9.1.3 Main Table and Axis Table under Global Symbols................................ 8
9.2 Axis Parameter and Monitor & Test Run ................................................. 9
9.2.1 Axis Parameter .............................................................................. 9
9.2.2 Monitor & Test Run ...................................................................... 17
Chapter 10 Ladder Diagram
10.1 Introduction of a Ladder Diagram ................................................ 10-2

10.1.1 Editing Environment .................................................................. 10-2
10.1.2 Networks in a Ladder Diagram ................................................... 10-4
10.1.3 Selecting Objects ...................................................................... 10-5
10.2 Creating a Ladder Diagram in ISPSoft .......................................... 10-6

10.2.1 Creating a Contact, Coil & MPS ................................................... 10-6
10.2.1.1 Inserting a Contact and Changing a Contact Type .................. 10-6
10.2.1.2 Inserting a Coil and Changing a Coil Type.............................. 10-7
10.2.1.3 Add MPS ........................................................................... 10-8
10.2.2 Use Device, Symbols and Constants in LD.................................... 10-9
10.2.3 Typing Instructions .................................................................. 10-10
10.2.4 Inserting Applied Instructions and Function Blocks ....................... 10-11
10.2.5 Creating a Comparison Contact ................................................. 10-14
10.2.6 Inserting a Block Logic Instruction ............................................. 10-16
10.2.7 Creating Multiple Outputs ......................................................... 10-18
10.2.8 Putting a Label ........................................................................ 10-19
10.2.9 Editing a Comment .................................................................. 10-20
10.2.10 Symbol Mode and Address Mode................................................ 10-22
10.2.11 Bookmark ............................................................................... 10-22
10.2.12 Activating/Inactivating a Network .............................................. 10-23
Chapter 11 Function Block Diagram
11.1 Introduction of Function Block Diagrams ..................................... 11-2

11.1.1 Knowing Function Block Diagrams............................................... 11-2
11.1.3 Networks in a Function Block Diagram ......................................... 11-4
11.2 Creating a Function Block Diagram in ISPSoft .............................. 11-6

11.2.1 Input Nodes and Output Nodes................................................... 11-6
11.2.2 Use Devices, Symbols Constants in FB Diagram........................... 11-10
11.2.3 And and OR Block .................................................................... 11-10
11.2.4 Inverse Logic .......................................................................... 11-13
11.2.5 Rising and Falling edge-triggered Input ...................................... 11-15
11.2.6 Setting an Output and Resetting an Output ................................. 11-17
11.2.7 API, Comparison Contact and Function Block ............................... 11-19
11.2.8 Setting Label ........................................................................... 11-23
11.2.9 Comments and Hints ................................................................ 11-24
vi i
11.2.10 Symbol Mode and Address Mode ............................................... 11-26
11.2.11 Bookmark ............................................................................... 11-27
Chapter 12 Instruction List
12.1 Introduction of Instruction Lists .................................................. 12-2

12.1.1 Structure of an Instruction List ....................................................12-2
12.1.2 Calling a Function Block .............................................................12-4
12.1.3 Important Points About Instruction Lists .......................................12-5
12.2 Create Instruction List in ISPSoft................................................. 12-6

12.2.1 Editing Environment ..................................................................12-6
12.2.2 Edit IL instruction ......................................................................12-7
12.2.3 Insert API and Function Blocks ....................................................12-8
12.2.4 Bookmark .................................................................................12-9
12.2.4.1 Adding Bookmarks ............................................................ 12-10
12.2.4.2 Removing Bookmarks ........................................................ 12-11
12.2.4.3 Going to a Bookmark......................................................... 12-12
Chapter 13 Structured Texts
13.1 Introducing Structured Texts ....................................................... 13-2

13.1.1 Basic Structure of a Structured Text ............................................13-2
13.1.2 Statement ................................................................................13-2
13.1.3 Expression ................................................................................13-3
13.1.4 Operand and Operator ...............................................................13-4
13.1.5 Keyword and Comment ..............................................................13-5
13.1.6 Using Array Symbols in ST..........................................................13-7
13.1.7 Notes on ST Programming ..........................................................13-7
13.2 Structure of a Statement .............................................................. 13-8

13.2.1 Assignment Structure─:= ...........................................................13-8
13.2.2 Conditional Structure - IF ......................................................... 13-11
13.2.3 Conditional Structure─CASE ...................................................... 13-13
13.2.4 Loop Structure - REPEAT .......................................................... 13-15
13.2.5 Loop Structure - WHILE............................................................ 13-16
13.2.6 Loop Structure - FOR ............................................................... 13-17
13.2.7 Applied Instruction Structure .................................................... 13-18
13.2.8 Function Block Structure .......................................................... 13-19
13.2.9 Blank Statement ..................................................................... 13-20
13.2.10 RETURN Statement .................................................................. 13-21
13.2.11 EXIT Statement ....................................................................... 13-21
13.3 Create Structured Text in ISPSoft .............................................. 13-22

13.3.1 ST Editing Environment ............................................................ 13-22
13.3.2 Edit Structured Text ................................................................. 13-23
13.3.3 Insert API and Function Blocks .................................................. 13-24
13.3.4 Bookmark ............................................................................... 13-25
13.4 Example of a Structured Text ..................................................... 13-26

13.4.1 Explanation ............................................................................ 13-26
13.4.2 Planning Hardware .................................................................. 13-26
13.4.3 Planning a Program ................................................................. 13-26
viii
13.4.4 Creating a Program .................................................................. 13-27
Chapter 14 Sequential Function Charts
14.1 Knowing Sequential Function Charts ............................................ 14-2

14.1.1 Structure of a Sequential Function Chart ..................................... 14-2
14.1.2 Principle of a Sequential Function Chart ....................................... 14-2
14.2 Sequential Function Chart in ISPSoft ........................................... 14-4

14.2.1 Steps and Actions ..................................................................... 14-4
14.2.2 Transitions ............................................................................... 14-7
14.2.3 Simultaneous Divergence and Divergence of Sequence Selection .... 14-9
14.2.4 Simultaneous Convergence & Select Convergence ....................... 14-10
14.2.5 Jump ..................................................................................... 14-11
14.2.6 Qualifier of an Action................................................................ 14-14
14.2.6.1 Qualifier Types .................................................................. 14-14
14.2.6.2 Important Points About Qualifying an Action ......................... 14-18
14.2.7 Initial Step .............................................................................. 14-19
14.2.8 Internal Property ..................................................................... 14-20
14.2.8.1 Step Property ................................................................... 14-20
14.2.8.2 Action and Transition Property ............................................ 14-24
14.3 Create SFC in ISPSoft ................................................................. 14-30

14.3.1 Editing Environment ................................................................. 14-30
14.3.2 Creating and Managing Actions and Transitions ........................... 14-33
14.3.3 Adding a Step ......................................................................... 14-35
14.3.4 Connecting a Transition in Parallel ............................................. 14-36
14.3.5 Connecting a Step in Parallel ..................................................... 14-37
14.3.6 Step Structure - Simultaneous Divergence & Select Convergence .. 14-38
14.3.7 Step Structure – Select Divergence & Simultaneous Convergence .. 14-39
14.3.8 Inserting a Jump Point ............................................................. 14-40
14.3.9 Assign Steps and the Transitions ............................................... 14-41
14.3.10 Specifying an Initial Step .......................................................... 14-42
14.3.11 Assigning Actions / Fold the Action Table .................................... 14-42
14.4 Sequential Function Chart Examples .......................................... 14-45

14.4.1 Example Descriptions ............................................................... 14-45
14.4.2 Planning Hardware ................................................................... 14-46
14.4.3 Planning a Program .................................................................. 14-47
Chapter 15 Continuous Function Charts

15.1 Continuous Function Charts (CFC) ..................................................... 15-2
15.1.1 About Continuous Function Charts ................................................ 15-2
15.1.2 Things to Note When Using CFC ................................................... 15-2
15.1.3 CFC Programming in ISPSoft ....................................................... 15-2
15.1.4 CFC Editing Toolbar .................................................................... 15-3
15.1.5 Shortcuts for CFC Programing ...................................................... 15-4
15.2 Creating a CFC in ISPSoft .................................................................. 15-5
ix
15.2.1 Selecting Objects ........................................................................15-5
15.2.2 Input/Output Nodes and Logic Gates .............................................15-5
15.2.2.1 Inserting Nodes or Gates .....................................................15-6
15.2.2.2 Add/Delete a Pin .................................................................15-7
15.2.3 Changing a Pin Type ....................................................................15-8
15.2.4 Connecting objects and Canceling Connections ...............................15-9
15.2.5 Instructions and Function Blocks ...................................................15-9
15.2.5.1 Inserting an Instruction ..................................................... 15-11
15.2.5.2 Inserting a Function Block .................................................. 15-12
15.2.6 Deleting objects ........................................................................ 15-13
15.2.7 Editing Devices or Symbols ........................................................ 15-15
15.2.8 Activating/Inactivating an Object ................................................ 15-16
15.2.9 Inserting a Comment................................................................. 15-16
15.2.10 Changing the Order in Which Objects are Executed ....................... 15-18
15.2.11 Displaying/Hiding Information .................................................... 15-19
Chapter 16 Auxiliary Editing Tools
16.1 ISPSoft Editing Tools and Auxiliary Functions .............................. 16-2

16.1.1 Modify PLC Types ......................................................................16-2
16.1.2 Change DVP Series Modules to AS Series Modules .........................16-2
16.1.3 Download/Upload a Project ....................................................... 16-14
16.1.4 Find/Replace in LD/FBD/ CFC .................................................... 16-16
16.1.5 Find/Replace in IL/ST ............................................................... 16-18
16.1.6 Find/Replace in SFC ................................................................. 16-20
16.1.7 Find Function in Symbol Table ................................................... 16-22
16.1.8 Find/Replace in Project ............................................................. 16-23
16.1.9 Print Function ......................................................................... 16-24
16.2 Devices and Registers ................................................................ 16-27

16.2.1 Device Comment List for a DVP Series PLC ................................. 16-27
16.2.2 AH/AS Series Device Comment List............................................ 16-30
16.2.3 Using Device Report................................................................. 16-36
16.2.4 Edit Register Memory ............................................................... 16-39
16.2.5 Edit Bit Memory....................................................................... 16-45
16.2.6 Edit DVP Series File Register ..................................................... 16-50
16.3 Step Positioning ......................................................................... 16-57

16.3.1 Using Step Positioning.............................................................. 16-57
16.4 Program Comparison.................................................................. 16-57

16.4.1 Introduction to Program Comparison.......................................... 16-57
16.4.2 Compare with File.................................................................... 16-58
16.4.3 Compare with PLC ................................................................... 16-60
Chapter 17 Testing and Debugging Tools
17.1 Online Monitoring Function .......................................................... 17-2

17.1.1 Changing the Operating Status of a PLC .......................................17-2
17.1.2 Online Monitoring Function and Environment ................................17-2
17.1.3 Changing the States of the X Devices in the Online Mode ...............17-7
17.1.4 Monitoring a Program Online .......................................................17-8
17.1.5 Device Monitoring Table ........................................................... 17-15
17.1.6 Online Editing Function and Online Update Function ..................... 17-20
x
17.2 Debugging Mode for DVP Series ................................................. 17-22
17.2.1 Enabling the Debugging Mode for DVP Series .............................. 17-22
17.2.2 Adding and Clearing Breakpoints ............................................... 17-24
17.2.3 Execution of the Program in the Debugging Mode ........................ 17-24
17.3 Debugging Mode for AH/AS Series ............................................. 17-26

17.3.1 Enter Debugging Mode ............................................................. 17-26
17.3.3 Continuous Execution ............................................................... 17-27
17.3.4 Single-Step Execution .............................................................. 17-27
17.4 Checking the Status of a PLC ...................................................... 17-29

17.4.1 System Information ................................................................. 17-29
17.4.2 PLC System Log ...................................................................... 17-31
17.5 3D Chart ..................................................................................... 17-38

17.5.1 Features ................................................................................. 17-38
17.5.2 Creating a 3D Chart ................................................................. 17-38
17.5.3 Creating a Curve ..................................................................... 17-40
17.5.4 Display a 3D Chart ................................................................... 17-42
Chapter 18 Password Management and Data Protection
18.1 Password Protection Mechanisms Provided by ISPSoft ................ 18-2
18.2 Program ID and PLC ID ................................................................ 18-3
18.2.1 Setting and Unlocking a Program ID............................................ 18-3

18.2.2 Setting and Unlocking a PLC ID .................................................. 18-4
18.3 Project Password and PLC Password ............................................ 18-4

18.3.1 Setting and Unlocking a Project Password .................................... 18-5
18.3.2 Setting and Unlocking a PLC Password ........................................ 18-6
18.3.3 Synchronize Project and PLC Password ........................................ 18-8
18.4 POU Password .............................................................................. 18-8
18.5 Subroutine Password ................................................................... 18-9

18.5.1 Introduction of a Subroutine Passwords ....................................... 18-9
18.5.2 Setting and Unlocking a Subroutine Password ............................. 18-10
18.6 Other Password and Data Protection Functions ......................... 18-11

18.6.1 Disable Program Upload ........................................................... 18-11
18.6.2 Setting Read-only Area ............................................................ 18-12
18.6.3 Setting TC-01 Password Key ..................................................... 18-12
Chapter 19 Network Configuration and Data Exchange
19.1 Network Configuration Tool - NWCONFIG ......................................... 19-3

19.1.1 Introduction of NWCONFIG ............................................................. 19-3
19.1.2 Basic Knowledge ........................................................................... 19-4
19.1.3 Communication Setting in NWCONFIG .............................................. 19-5
19.1.3.1 Connection Mechanism in NWCONFIG ........................................ 19-6
xi
19.1.3.2 Setting Communication Parameters .......................................... 19-7
19.1.4 Workflow ..................................................................................... 19-8
19.2 Creating a Network Architecture ..................................................... 19-12
19.2.1 Deploying Nodes.......................................................................... 19-12
19.2.2 Connecting to a Network............................................................... 19-16
19.2.3 Adjusting or Deleting Devices or Networks ...................................... 19-21
19.2.4 Setting the Attributes of a Node/Network ........................................ 19-24
19.2.5 Hiding/Displaying Devices or Networks ........................................... 19-28
19.2.6 Correct Network Architecture......................................................... 19-31
19.2.7 Downloading Routing Tables .......................................................... 19-33
19.2.8 Testing Routing ........................................................................... 19-35
19.3 Constructing a PLC Link .................................................................. 19-37
19.3.1 Opening the PLC Link Table Editor Window ...................................... 19-38
19.3.2 Select Master Station Device (Step 1) ............................................. 19-39
19.3.3 Communication Parameter Settings (Step 2) ................................... 19-40
19.3.4 Create Data Exchange Table (Step 3) ............................................. 19-42
19.3.4.1 Introduction of a Data Exchange Table ..................................... 19-42
19.3.4.2 Setting a Data Exchange Group .............................................. 19-44
19.3.4.3 Device Synchronization in Data Exchange Table ......................... 19-46
19.3.4.4 Managing a Data Exchange Table ............................................ 19-48
19.3.5 Monitoring a PLC Link ................................................................... 19-49
19.3.6 Notifications on PLC Link ............................................................... 19-52
19.4 Constructing an Ether Link .............................................................. 19-53
19.4.1 Introduction of an Ether Link ......................................................... 19-53
19.4.2 Open Ether Link Configuration ....................................................... 19-54
19.4.3 Create and Manage Data Exchange Table ........................................ 19-57
19.4.4 Node List and Display Area............................................................ 19-59
19.4.5 Start Mode of an Ether Link ........................................................... 19-61
19.4.6 Download Ether Link Configuration ................................................. 19-63
19.4.7 Upload Ether Link Configuration ..................................................... 19-65
19.4.8 Deleting Asynchronous Device ....................................................... 19-68
19.4.9 Enable/Disable Online Monitoring Function ...................................... 19-69
19.4.9.1 Enabling a Monitoring Function ............................................... 19-69
19.4.9.2 Monitoring Status ................................................................. 19-71
19.4.9.3 Disabling a Monitoring Function .............................................. 19-71
19.4.10 Online Start/Stop Ether Link (SM Flag) ........................................... 19-72
19.4.10.1 Starting the Execution of an Ether Link .................................... 19-72
19.4.10.2 Stopping the Execution of an Ether Link ................................... 19-74
19.4.11 Monitoring Table and Error Log ...................................................... 19-76
19.5 NWCONFIG Management and Application ....................................... 19-77
19.5.1 Save and Print ............................................................................ 19-77
19.5.2 Downloading ............................................................................... 19-78
19.5.2.1 Downloading Parameters........................................................ 19-78
19.5.2.2 Description of Downloading .................................................... 19-79
19.5.3 ISPSoft Routing Application ........................................................... 19-80
Chapter 20 Data Backup and Data Restoration
20.1 Data Backup Memory Cards .......................................................... 20-2

20.1.1 Introduction of Data Backup Memory Cards......................................20-2
20.1.2 Operating Data Backup by Memory Card ..........................................20-2
20.2 Permanent Data Backup ............................................................... 20-3
20.3 CARD Utility ................................................................................. 20-3
xi i
20.3.1 Introduction of CARD Utility .......................................................... 20-3
20.3.2 Backup ....................................................................................... 20-5
20.3.3 Restoration ................................................................................ 20-10
Chapter 21 G-Code Editor and E-CAM Editor
21.1 G-Code Editor (Not Supported by the Current ISPSoft Version) ........ 21-2
21.1.1 About G-Code .............................................................................. 21-2
21.1.2 G-Code Command Structure .......................................................... 21-2
21.1.3 Using G-Code Editor ..................................................................... 21-4
21.2 E-CAM Editor ..................................................................................... 21-8

21.2.1 About E-CAM (Electronic CAM) ....................................................... 21-8
21.2.2 The Significance and Description of E-CAM ...................................... 21-8
21.2.3 Using E-CAM Editor ...................................................................... 21-9
Chapter 22 Wizard Tool
22.1 Position Planning Table ..................................................................... 22-2

22.1.1 About the Position Planning Table .................................................. 22-2
22.1.2 Setting the Position Planning Table................................................. 22-2
22.1.3 Positioning Table Simulation .......................................................... 22-6
22.1.4 Upload and Download Position Planning Table .................................. 22-8
22.1.5 Control Mode – Single axis point-to-point motion ............................. 22-8
22.1.6 Control Mode – Single axis multi-segment ....................................... 22-9
22.1.7 Control Mode - 2-axis linear interpolation motion ............................ 22-10
22.1.8 Control Mode - 2-axis Arc Interpolation Motion ............................... 22-11
22.2 Data Tracer ..................................................................................... 22-12
22.2.1 About Data Tracer ....................................................................... 22-12
22.2.2 Opening the Data Tracer Window .................................................. 22-12
22.2.3 Sample Parameter Settings .......................................................... 22-14
22.2.4 Sampling Modes ......................................................................... 22-16
22.2.5 Measurement ............................................................................. 22-18
22.3 Data Logger ..................................................................................... 22-21
22.3.1 About Data Logger ...................................................................... 22-21
22.3.2 Opening the Data Logger Window ................................................. 22-22
22.3.4 Watch and Record ....................................................................... 22-26
22.3.5 Measurement ............................................................................. 22-29
22.4 High Speed Counter ......................................................................... 22-32
22.4.1 About High Speed Counter ........................................................... 22-32
22.4.2 Using High Speed Counter............................................................ 22-32
xi i i
Appendix A USB Connection
A.1 Installing the USB Driver for an AS Series CPU module .................. A-2
A.1.1 Installing the USB Driver in Windows XP with SP3 .......................... A-2
A.1.2 Installing the USB Driver in Windows 7 ......................................... A-5
A.1.3 Installing the USB Driver in Windows 8.1 ......................................A-10
A.1.4 Installing the USB Driver in Windows 10 .......................................A-13
A.2 Create USB Driver in COMMGR ..................................................... A-16
A.3 Setting the USB Port on a DVP-SX2 Series PLC............................. A-18
Appendix B Notification for PLC Types
B.1 Device Addresses for PLC Types ........................................................ B-2

B.1.1 AH/AS Series Device Types ............................................................. B-2
B.1.2 The X/Y/D/L Device Address Format in AH/AS Series .......................... B-3
B.1.3 Real-time Access of X/Y Contact in AH/AS Series ............................... B-4
B.1.4 DVPxxMC Device Types .................................................................. B-5
B.1.5 DVPxxMC Series Device Address Format ........................................... B-6
B.1.6 DVPxxMC Retentive Devices ............................................................ B-6
B.2 Device Resources for PLC Types ........................................................ B-7

B.2.1 AHCPU500-EN/AHCPU500-RS2 ........................................................ B-7
B.2.7 AHCPU521-EN/AHCPU521-RS2 ...................................................... B-10
B.2.9 AHCPU560-EN2 ........................................................................... B-11
B.2.10 AHxxEMC .................................................................................... B-11
B.2.11 AS200/AS300 .............................................................................. B-11
B.2.12 DVPxxMC .................................................................................... B-12
B.3 Compile & Uploading/Downloading Time ........................................ B-12
Appendix C Print Management Tool

C.1 Introduction of the Environment ....................................................... C-2
C.2 Introduction of the Setting Area ........................................................ C-3
xi v
Pr ef ac e
Preface
ISPSoft is Delta’s new generation software development tool for programmable logic controllers.
IEC 61131-3, which supports five programming languages and a large number of applied
instructions, is adopted. Besides, ISPSoft manages projects by means of integrating tasks. The
efficient and convenient development environment that ISPSoft provides enables users to apply
PLCs to more complex control systems as well as to small control systems.
About IEC 61131-3

In early days, PLC developers established their own programming languages. These different
programming languages were burdens on users. In view of this, IEC 61131-3, which was published
by the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), appeared. IEC 61131-3 integrated the
characteristics of the programming languages. It considered users’ backgrounds and users’ habits,
and defined programming language standards that manufacturers and users could follow. The
program codes which meet the IEC61131-3 standard are more readable and compatible. The
description of IEC 61131-3 is as follows.
 IEC 61131-3 integrated the programming languages established by PLC developers, and defined
five programming languages for programmable control systems: instruction lists (ILs), structured
texts (STs), ladder diagrams (LDs), sequential function charts (SFCs), and function block
diagrams (FBDs). Besides, continuous function charts (CFCs), derived from function block
diagrams, are also a common PLC programming language.
 The concept related to symbols is adopted. Users can replace a device with a symbol. A program
is more readable, and the time of assigning devices is saved,
 The architecture related to program organization units (POUs) is adopted. A traditional program is
divided into several program organization units which can be developed independently. The
architecture of a program can be more modular and can be maintained more easily be means of
calling functions and function blocks.
 Program organization units are managed and organized through the concept related to tasks. The
development of programs is upgraded to the management of projects. The large-scale
development of programs can be managed more easily.
About the manual

The manual aims to introduce the functions of the software. The related concepts are also
introduced. The slight variations among different models which are not obstacles to the operation of
the software are mentioned briefly. Users have to refer to the related operation manuals or
programming manuals for more information.
The contents of the manual are oriented towards the introduction of the operation of the software.
Users can easily find topics related to the operation of the software in the table of contents, such as
setting communication parameters, inserting a contact in a ladder diagram, monitoring devices
online, and enabling a simulator. If the topic of a chapter is related to a certain concept, the concept
will be introduced in the front part of the chapter. Users who are equipped with basic knowledge, or
who want to know the operation of the software can skip this part, and directly refer to the related
sections. Besides, if parts of the contents of a chapter are related to the contents of other chapters,
the sections to which users have to refer will be noted in the chapter. The brief introduction of the
chapters in the manual is as follows.
 Chapter 1 and chapter 2 introduce the installation of the software, the environment, and the basic
setting.
 Chapter 3 is about configuring and setting a PLC system.
 Chapter 4 provides a simple example, and leads users to create a traditional ladder diagram in
ISPSoft in a short time without using the IEC61131-3 architecture.
 Chapter 5~chapter 8 introduce the concepts related to IEC61131-3, and the ways in which the
concepts are applied to ISPSoft.
 Chapter 9 introduces the relative concepts of motion control and axis and the ways in which the
concepts are applied to ISPSoft.
 Chapter 10~chapter 15 introduce ladder diagrams (LDs), function block diagrams (FBDs),
instruction lists (ILs), structured texts (STs), sequential function charts (SFCs), and continuous
function charts (CFCs) and the ways in which the concepts are applied to ISPSoft.
I
IS P S oft Us e r Ma n ua l
 Chapter 16 introduces the auxiliary tools provided by ISPSoft.

 Chapter 17 is about monitoring a program, testing a program, and debugging a program through
ISPSoft.
 Chapter 18 introduces the password setting, and the data protection mechanism in ISPSoft.
 Chapter 19 is about configuring a network through ISPSoft, and creating a data exchange
mechanism.
 Chapter 20 is about backing up data and restoring data through ISPSoft.
 Chapter 21 introduces the tools used commonly in motion control through ISPSoft.
 Chapter 22 introduces auxiliary tools and wizards provided by ISPSoft for easier programming
and better operation.
Graphic representations
The graphic representations used in the manual are listed in the following table.
Graphic
Description
representation
Clicking the left mouse button
Clicking the right mouse button
Clicking the left mouse button two times in quick succession
Pressing and holding the left mouse button, and then moving the mouse without
releasing the button.
Typing with a keyboard
Operating sequence (The graphic representation is used when an operating
sequence is mentioned. For example, and .)
Number used to describe a figure
Point for attention (The item mentioned may be related to damage to equipment,
property, or a human body.)
Trademark declaration
The products and trademarks which do not belong to Delta Electronics, Inc. belong to the
companies which produce and declare them.
II
Chapter 1 Introducing ISPSoft
Table of Contents
1.1 Introduction of ISPSoft and System Requirements............................ 1-2
1.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 System Requirements..................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Installing ISPSoft ........................................................................... 1-3
1.1.4 Uninstalling ISPSoft ........................................................................ 1-7
1.2 Introduction of COMMGR ................................................................... 1-8
1.2.1 Operating Mode of COMMGR ............................................................ 1-8
1.2.2 Installing COMMGR ........................................................................ 1-9
1.2.3 Uninstalling COMMGR ................................................................... 1-13
1.3 ISPSoft for PLC Devices ................................................................... 1-14
1.3.1 ISPSoft - List of Programming Languages........................................ 1-14
1.3.2 ISPSoft - List of Functions ............................................................. 1-14
1-1
1.1 Introduction of ISPSoft and System Requirements

ISPSoft is a software development tool for Delta’s new generation programmable logic controllers.
IEC 61131-3, which supports six programming languages and adopts a large number of applied
instructions. In addition to basic programming functions, ISPSoft also contains many auxiliary tools.
The multilingual environment and the friendly user interface provide users with a convenient and
efficient development environment.
1.1.1 Characteristics
 It supports the international standard IEC 61131-3 and a large number of applied instructions.
 It supports five programming languages. They are ladder diagrams (LDs), sequential function
charts (SFCs), function block diagrams (FBDs), instruction lists (ILs), and structured texts (STs).
Users can use more than one programming language in one project.
 It supports traditional Chinese, simplified Chinese, and English.
 The Find and Replace functions can be applied to a present window, or a whole project.
 It provides a user-defined operating environment.
 The project management adopts an interface which uses a hierarchical tree structure.
 Users can develop several models in a group of projects.
 It provides many convenient functions such as making comments, creating bookmarks,
activating/inactivating networks, managing devices and symbols, simulation, and etc.
 It supports several types of online operation such as monitoring programs online, editing
programs online, monitoring devices online, debugging programs online, operating/setting a PLC
online, and etc.
 Users can import and export projects by means of the Import and Export functions.
 A file (*.dvp) created with WPLSoft can be opened directly, and can be converted into an ISPSoft
format (*.isp).
 It provides several password setting mechanisms and data protection mechanisms.
 It supports COMMGR, a new generation communication manager.
 There are three built-in configurations.
 HWCONFIG: It is used to configure hardware for a system, and manage parameters.
 NWCONFIG: It is used to configure networks for a PLC system, and manage data exchanges.
 CARD Utility: Users can backup and restore a system through a management wizard and a
memory card.
 It provides various solutions for motion control including PLCopen MC function block, G-code
editor, E-CAM editor, positioning planning chart tool and many more.
 The software can be applied to DVPxxMC series including DVP15MC, DVP15MC-06, DVP50MC
and DVP50MC-06.
1.1.2 System Requirements

Before using ISPSoft, users have to make sure that an operating system meets the requirements
below.
Item System requirement
Operating
Windows XP / 7 / 8 / 10
system
CPU Pentium 1.5 G or above
Memory 256 MB or above (A memory having a capacity of 512 MB or above is
recommended.)
Hard disk drive Capacity : 1000 MB or above
For installing ISPSoft
CD-ROM drive
It is optionally required.
1-2
Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc i n g IS P S oft
Item System requirement

Resolution: 800×600 pixels or above
Monitor
(Recommended setting: 1024x768/96 dpi )
Keyboard/Mouse General keyboard/mouse, or device compatible with Windows
Printer with a driver for Windows
Printer
(It is used to print projects, and is optionally required.)
RS-232 port For connecting to a PLC Users have to select one of them
according to the communication
USB port For connecting to a PLC
interfaces provided by the PLC or the
Ethernet port For connecting to a PLC module used. (*1)
Communication
COMMGR, a communication manager, must be installed on a computer. (*2)
software
AH500 series PLCs/DVP series PLCs (exclusive of DVP-PM series
PLCs)/VFD-C2000 series AC motor drives/VFD-C200 series AC motor
drives/VFD-CP2000 series AC motor drives /VFD-E series AC motor drives
Models which
(*3)
are supported
PLC: all AH series, AS series and DVP series (except DVP-PM series)
AC motor drive: VFD series with PLC built-in
Text panel: TP series with PLC built-in
*1. ISPSoft supports several ways in which a computer is connected to a PLC. Users have to make sure of the ports
and the modes supported by a PLC before a computer is connected to the PLC.
*2. Please refer to section 1.2 for more information about COMMGR.
*3. In addition to ISPSoft, users must use PMSoft version 2.05 or above to develop AH10PM-5A and AH20MC-5A.
*4. The functions and specifications mentioned above are only applicable to ISPSoft version 2.00 or above. The
older versions may not be equipped with complete functions.
1.1.3 Installing ISPSoft

When the previous version of ISPSoft is detected in a computer, that version is advised to be
uninstalled first before the latest ISPSoft can be installed.
(1) Start a computer and enter the operating system. Users have to log on to the system as a
system administrator before installing ISPSoft.
(2) Put an ISPSoft CD in the CD-ROM drive, or download the installation program from the official
Delta website http://www.deltaww.com/ to download ISPSoft. (The installation programs need
to be decompressed if downloaded from the internet.)
(3) Click Start, and Run… to open the Run window. Specify the path denoting the executable file
which is used to install COMMGR in the Open box, and then click OK. Alternatively, users can
double-click the icon which is used to install ISPSoft to execute the installation program.
1-3
(4) When a previous version of the ISPSoft is found, click OK then Yes to uninstall that version
shown in the pop-up windows (see below).
(5) Click Install once Shield Wizard window appears.
(6) Type related information in the User Name box and the Organization box, and then click
Next.
1-4
(7) Choose I accept the terms in the license agreement. Click Next to proceed to the next step.
(8) Then, click Next for the next step.
1-5
(9) Check the installation information, and then click Install.
(10) After installation is complete, click Finish to continue the next step.
1-6
(11) When installation is complete, shortcuts to the software is created on the desktop and Start
menu. Click Close to exit the setup.
1.1.4 Uninstalling ISPSoft

(1) Generally, users can click ISPSoft Uninstall or choose Programs under Control Panel to
remove the ISPSoft; when ISPSoft Uninstall is not found, there are two methods to uninstall
the software:
 Method 1: Choose ISPSoft x.xx from the Windows list, click More then select Open file
location.
 Method 2: Place %ProgramData%\Microsoft\Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Delta
Industrial Automation\PLC\ in the address box and press Enter. Then, double
click ISPSoft x.xx file.
1-7
(2) Remove the software by double-click the ISPSoft UnInstall.
(3) To uninstall ISPSoft, click Yes shown in the pop-up window. The window will automatically
close once the software is removed.
1.2 Introduction of COMMGR

COMMGR is a new generation communication management tool developed by Delta Electronics,
Inc. in 2011. It functions as a communication bridge between Delta software and hardware.
Communication becomes more convenient and more efficient through the management of
COMMGR.
1.2.1 Operating Mode of COMMGR

Users can create communication parameters which must be set on the management list in
COMMGR in advance. The communication parameters which have been created in advance are
called drivers. Users can start or stop a driver in COMMGR. If a driver is started, a connection will be
created automatically. After the users specify a driver which is started in ISPSoft, a communication
will be carried out.
In addition to ISPSoft, other software communicating with hardware through COMMGR can operate
simultaneously. COMMGR automatically manages all communication commands, and makes
software connect to hardware.
1-8
The COMMGR window and the management list in the COMMGR window are shown below. The
drivers which are named by users are displayed in the Name column, parameters related to the
drivers are displayed in the Description column, and the statuses of the drivers are displayed in the
Status column.
1.2.2 Installing COMMGR

COMMGR is a software independent of ISPSoft. It must be installed separately. When the previous
version of COMMGR is detected in a computer, that version is advised to be uninstalled first before
the latest COMMGR can be installed.
(1) Start a computer and enter the operating system. Users have to log on to the system as a
system administrator before they install COMMGR.
(2) Put a COMMGR CD in the CD-ROM drive, or download the installation program from the
official Delta website http://www.deltaww.com/. (The installation programs need to be
decompressed if downloaded from the internet.)
1-9
(3) Click Start, and then click Run… to open the Run window. Specify the path denoting the
executable file which is used to install COMMGR in the Open box, and then click OK.
Alternatively, users can double-click the icon which is used to install COMMGR to execute the
installation program.
(4) When the previous version of COMMGR is installed, click OK to remove that version shown in
the pop-up window (see below) and when uninstall is complete, click OK again.
1-10
(5) Click Next after the Setup window appears.
(6) Use default setup in the destination folder. Click Install to start the installation.
(7) When the installation is complete, the shortcut for COMMGR is created on the Start menu,
click Finish to close the setup.
1 - 11
1-12
1.2.3 Uninstalling COMMGR

(1) Enter the settings of Apps & features in Windows, select COMMGR x.xx and click Uninstall.
(2) Click Yes then OK to complete COMMGR uninstallation.
1-13
1.3 ISPSoft for PLC Devices

The ISPSoft supports a variety of Delta PLC devices with many functions included. This chapter
provides information regarding the ISPSoft that is applied in 8 PLC series: AS200, AS300, AH5x0,
AH5x1, AH560, AHxxEMC, DVP, DVPxxMC series.
1.3.1 ISPSoft - List of Programming Languages

The ISPSoft supports 6 programming languages: ladder diagram (LD), sequential function charts
(SFC), function block diagram (FBD), instruction list (IL), structured text (ST) and continuous
function chart (CFC). The following table lists the PLC device and programming languages
supported.
AS200 AS300 AH5x0 AH5x1 AH560 AHxxEMC DVP DVPxxMC
Ladder
Diagram V V V V V V V V
(LD)
Function
Block
Diagram V V V
(FBD)
Instruction Do Not
List V V V Support
(IL) ES3
Structured Only
Text V V V V V V Supports
(ST) ES3
Sequential
Function
Charts V V V V V V V
(SFC)
Continuous
Only
Function
Chart V V V Supports
ES3
(CFC)
1.3.2 ISPSoft - List of Functions

The following table shows major functions of ISPSoft.
Motion Module V V V V
Supports
HWCONFIG V V V V V V V
ES3 ONLY
HWCONFIG
Printing Function V V V V V V
Ordered List V V V V V V
Custom Library V V V V V V V
Delta Library V V V V V V V V
User-defined V V V V V V V V
1-14
Axis V V
PLC
Modification V V V V V V V V
Device
Comment List V V V V V V V
Status Bar V V V V V V V
Edit Register V V V V V V V
Status Editing V V V V V V V
Supports
SA/SX/SC/E
H/EH2/SV/E
File Registers V V H2-L/ES2/ES
2-E/EX2/SX2
/SA2/EH3/SV
2/EH3-L/ES3
Position-Step V V V V V V V
Alignment V V V V V V V
Supports
EH3/EH3-L/S
Online Editing V V V V V V V2/ES2/ES2-
E/EX2/SA2/S
X2/MC/SS2
Troubleshooting V V V V V V V
Supports
System Log V V V V V V ES3 ONLY V
3D Coordinate V
Identifier V V V V V V V V
Password
(case-sensitive) V V V V V V V V
POU Password V V V V V V V V
Do Not
Subroutine
Support
Password
ES3
Do Not
NWCONFIG V Support
ES3
Data Backup
Supports
Memory Card
EH3/EH2
(Supplementary)
1-15
Supports
PLC Permanent EH2/EH2-L/E
Backup Setting H3/EH3-L/SV
/SV2
CARD Utility V V V V V V
E-CAM Editor V V V V
Position Supports
Planning Table V V ES3 ONLY
Supports
Oscilloscope V V V V ES3 ONLY
Supports
Data Logger V V V ES3 ONLY
High-speed Supports
Counter Setting V V ES3 ONLY
Wizard
Do Not
AIO Wizard
Support
Setting
ES3
Do Not
Temperature Support
Control
ES3
Do Not
Weighing Support
Module
ES3
Do Not
Extension
Support
Module Wizard
ES3
Extension
Do Not
Module-
Support
Monitoring
ES3
Wizard
1-16
Chapter 2 Starting and Setting ISPSoft
Table of Contents
2.1 Guidelines and Environment ............................................................. 2-2
2.1.1 Getting Started ............................................................................ 2-2
2.1.2 Window Title and Status Bar ......................................................... 2-6
2.1.3 Toolbar - Functions...................................................................... 2-7
2.1.4 Toolbar - Icons ............................................................................ 2-9
2.1.5 Project and Compile Message ...................................................... 2-10
2.1.6 Workspace ................................................................................ 2-12
2.2 Project Framework ........................................................................ 2-14
2.2.1 Single Project and Group Project ............................................... 2-14
2.2.2 Integration of Motion Control Modules ....................................... 2-15
2.2.3 Managing a Single Project ........................................................ 2-16
2.2.4 Managing Group Project ........................................................... 2-21
2.2.5 Managing Motion Control Modules ............................................. 2-27
2.3 Basic Configuration ....................................................................... 2-31
2.3.1 System and Environment ......................................................... 2-31
2.3.2 Importing and Exporting User Preference ................................... 2-37
2.4 Communication Settings ............................................................... 2-38
2.4.1 Start/Close COMMGR ............................................................... 2-38
2.4.2 Driver Management for COMMGR .............................................. 2-40
2.4.3 Creating Connection Channel - Add Driver.................................. 2-40
2.4.3.1 Communication Parameter Setting - RS232/422/485................. 2-42
2.4.3.2 Communication Parameter Setting - USB (Virtual COM) ............. 2-43
2.4.3.3 Communication Parameter Setting - DirectLink (USB) ............... 2-44
2.4.3.4 Communication Parameter Setting - Ethernet ........................... 2-45
2.4.3.5 Communication Parameter Setting - DirectLink (Ethernet) ......... 2-46
2.4.3.6 Communication Parameter Setting - DVP Simulator ................... 2-47
2.4.3.7 Communication Parameter Setting - AH5x0 & AH5x1 Simulator .. 2-47
2.4.3.8 Communication Parameter Setting - AS Simulator..................... 2-48
2.4.4 Creating Connection Channel - Start/Stop a Driver ...................... 2-48
2.4.5 Creating Connection Channel - Configure/Delete a Driver ............. 2-49
2.4.6 Creating Connection Channel - Simulator with Operating Panels.... 2-51
2.4.7 Creating Connection between ISPSoft and COMMGR .................... 2-54
2.4.8 Connecting PLC (Host) and Communication Port ......................... 2-56
2.4.9 Practical Connection Test.......................................................... 2-58
2-1
2.1 Guidelines and Environment

2.1.1 Getting Started
After installing ISPSoft, shortcuts is created on your desktop and Start menu for quick access of the
software. In addition, users can install ISPSoft by taking the following steps below .
After the welcome screen image, the Delta ISPSoft window appears with basic functions provided.
Click on the toolbar to create a new project.
2-2
Ch a pt er 2 Star t in g a nd Se tt i n g I S P S oft
In the Create a New Project window, type a project name in the Project Name box and a path in the
Drive/Path box. Also, select a Controller Type and PLC Type from the drop-down lists. After users click
Properties…, they can give a description of this project and click OK.
After the project is created successfully, a Project section appears on the left side of the dialog box with
items listed in a hierarchical tree structure. If the section did not appear, users can click View on the
toolbar, then choose Workspace or click from the icon bar. To view Compile Message section,
select View > Output Window (M) or click .
2-3
When a project is created, the main working area is blank with no editing. To start PLC programming,
users can right-click Programs in the Project section and click New….
In the Create Program window, users can type a program name in the POU Name, and select a
programming language in the Language section. Other parameters in the window use defaults and the
description is provided in section 5.4.
2-4
When a program is added under Programs, an editing area is formed in the new program window.
The ISPSoft main screen is shown below.
 Window title: It displays a project name and a program title.

 Menu bar: There are eight menus.
 Toolbar: There are five toolbars.
 Project: Uses hierarchical tree structure to manage the section.
 Compile Message: Shows compiling result and project search.
 Status bar: Displays current edit or network status.
 Work Edit: Includes program edit section, local symbols, monitoring chart a device table, and etc. are
displayed in this area.
Delta Library: Lists out contents regarding Delta library and user-defined library.
2-5
When using ISPSoft, users can click Help from the toolbar to get help.
Item Description
About… Information about software version and date of release.
Auxiliary Edition Auxiliary edit tools, e.g. communication format < = > parameter code.
Contains software usage information. (Alternatively, users can click

ISPSoft User Index
on the toolbar to view the information.)
PLC Instruction and Information on instructions and registers. Users can click any
Special Registers instruction in the program edit section and press F1 on the keyboard for
Reference explanations.
Revision History Lists out the software version updates or modifications.
2.1.2 Window Title and Status Bar

After a project is created, the window title displays in the format of project name [program title]. If there
is no program title, the project name is shown as the window title. Users can also click Edit (E) and select
Project Properties to view the program title.
2-6
The status bar at the bottom of a window displays all kinds of working status. For example, edit mode
(insertion/replacement), current network, PLC scan time, compiled program size or program capacity,
connection status, PLC status, communication parameters, and PLC model name.
PLC Model Name
Communication Parameters
PLC Status
Connection Status
Compiled Program Size/ Program Capacity
PLC Scan time
Current Network
Insertion/Replacement mode
2.1.3 Toolbar - Functions

The ISPSoft toolbar contains eight functions. The contents of the functions may vary based on the editing
and model selected. This chapter presents a brief introduction of the toolbar. For more explanation,
please view the following chapters concerning the functions.
 File: To save a project as its main function.
 Edit: Lists out the operating tools used for editing.
2-7
 View: Offers information regarding the project and workspace.
 Compile: Check programming syntax or compile programs into executable code.
 PLC: Sets up a PLC connection and functions through ISPSoft.
 Tools: Provides convenient functions to execute ISPSoft.
 Window: Manages the windows regarding the Edit section in workspace.
2-8
 Help: Provides auxiliary functions for ISPSoft.
2.1.4 Toolbar- Icons

There are five icon categories on the toolbar. The icons may also vary based on the editing and model
selected. When a mouse cursor points at an icon for a short while, its function and keyboard shortcuts is
shown; users can select their icons to show or hide under Toolbar by clicking View.
 File toolbar: Provides functions related to managing a project.
 Editing toolbar: Provides functions related to editing work.
 Quick PLC toolbar: Provides functions related to PLC operation.
 Troubleshooting toolbar: Provides functions related to troubleshooting. The icons in the toolbar may
vary based on the model selected.
*. The DVPxxMC currently does not support this function.
AH/AS series:
DVP series:
 Programming toolbar: Provides functions related to programming. Icons may vary based on the
programming language used.
LD:
FBD:
IL:
2-9
ST:
SFC:
CFC:
2.1.5 Project and Compile Message

The Project section contains contents related to project development and uses hierarchical tree structure
to manage its interface. The section includes tools for configuration, device information and instruction
application, user-defined variables, program items and monitoring tables. In addition, the lists in the
section may vary based on the model selected.
On the left of the ISPSoft screen is the default Project section and click on the upper right corner to
close the section. Users can click or select Workspace under View from the toolbar to open or
close the Project window. When users right-click an item in the Project section, a corresponding quick
menu offers items for selection.
In Compile Message section, users can click the tabs referring to the Compile Message and the Find
Result. The Compile Message page shows the results of compiled programs or messages when
checking on the syntax. While the Find Result page lists out the results on the searched projects.
The default Compile Message section designed at the bottom of the ISPSoft main page, users can click
on the toolbar or select Output Window (M) under View from the toolbar to open or close the
section. Click on the upper right corner of the window can also close the window.
2-10
Users can click on the upper right corner of the window to change the display of the Project or
Compile Message section. When the icon changes to , the section is hidden. When the mouse cursor
moves away from the section for a while, the window of the section automatically turns into a tab on the
page, but when the mouse cursor moves to the tab, the tab is opened.
The tab opens when a mouse

cursor points at the Project tab,
When the section is not hidden, users can drag the tab with a left click mouse button to any position or
combine the tab to a different section. If users want to drag the whole section, they have to drag the title
bar.
2 - 11
2.1.6 Workspace
Users can view maximized or minimized windows in this section. To maximize a window, the status
buttons for the window appears on the right side of the toolbar.
 Display windows
 Maximize the window
Select Window on the menu to change the Prog. windows.
Click to change for the

current Prog. Window.
2-12
 Cascade: When selected, all windows will stack on top of each other, and the current window is the
first one displayed.
 Tile Vertically: The windows are displayed like tiles in vertical alignment; the current window is at the
leftmost side.
 Tile Horizontally: The windows are displayed like tiles in horizontal alignment; the current window is
at the topmost.
2-13
2.2 Project Framework

2.2.1 Single Project and Group Project
Two types of project frameworks are described below.
 Single project
This is the basic project type. Each project can only execute one model. The file type of a single
project is *.isp.
 Group project
If several devices are connected on a network, users can create a group of single projects for the
devices without restriction. The number of projects which can be created is unlimited. Users can
make projects according to practical application, and they can carry out network configuration for the
devices in a group of projects through NWCONFIG rapidly and easily.
The filename extension for a group of projects is *.pri, and the filename extension for every project in
the group is *..isp. The isp files are in the folders whose names are the same as the project names.
Users can import a single project which was created previously to a group.
*. Please refer to chapter 19 for more information about NWCONFIG.
2-14
2.2.2 Integration of Motion Control Modules

The AH series include motion control modules such as AH05PM-5A, AH10PM-5A, AH15PM-5A,
AH20MC-5A, AH08EMC, AH10EMC, AH20EMC. Users can write a program regarding AHxxPM and
AHxxMC motion control modules by means of PMSoft, a software developed by Delta Electronics, Inc.
Please refer to PMSoft User Manual for more information about usage. The AHxxEMC can be used as
host or motion control module in ISPSoft.
Users can create projects concerning motion control modules in ISPSoft and configure hardware as well
as parameter settings through HWCONFIG. Each AH series can create more than one motion control
module project whether the project framework is single or in a group, the corresponding motion control
modules also need to be added for hardware configuration in HWCONFIG. Please refer to section 2.2.5
for more information.
The PMSoft projects include AHxxPM and AHxxMC modules, with filename as .ppm. While ISPSoft
project contains AHxxEMC modules, the file name is .isp and is placed in the same path as of single
projects for AH series. Regarding previously created PMSoft or ISPSoft projects, users can import those
to an ISPSoft project.
*1. An imported PM project must use file format that is avilable for PMSoft v2.05 or above, and do not support DVP-PM
series projects.
2-15
2.2.3 Managing a Single Project

 Creating a single project
User can click the File menu, point to New, and click New to create a new project. They can also
create a new project by clicking on the toolbar.
In the Create a New Project window, type a project name in the Project Name box and a path in the
Drive/Path box, and select a Controller Type and PLC Type from the drop-down lists. After users
click Properties…, users can add description of this project. Finally, click OK.
2-16
After a project is successfully created, the ISPSoft window title displays the project name, under the
format of project name [Program Title]. When no program title is setup, the window will display only
the project name. When users want to view or modify the program title, users can click Edit from the
toolbar and select Project Properties to type in the information.
Under Project, users can view the path of the project file and selected model. For AH/AS series
projects, the PLC label name is shown in parentheses next to the selected model, and the project
name is set as default. However, the project name can be reset in HWCONFIG. Users can refer to
section 3.3.2.1 for more information.
*. Only AH/AS and DVPxxMC series have PLC label names, but DVP series do not. The main function of the label name
is to perform device identification, especially for network applications or other online operations. The gathered
information can be used to check whether the object is operating as we expected.
 Save project
When a project is created, the file denoted by a path is not established immediately. Users need to
click ‘Save’ first for the file to exist. To ‘Save’ a project, please refer to the following description.
Select File from the toolbar and click Save. Or click on the icon bar.
2-17
Select Save As from the File menu to save the file using a different file name or save the file denoted
by a path in another location on your computer. After setting a new path and a new file name, click
Save.
*. To ‘Save As’ a file will not change the PLC label name, the name adopts the created project name by default but can
be modified in HWCONFIG.
 Open previous project

If users want to open a previous project, they can click Open on the File menu, or click on the
toolbar. Users can select from the Files of type for the previous file and click Open. The following
table shows the file types that can be opened.
File type Description

This is a single project file. If old file format is opened, the
ISPSoft Files (*.isp)
ISPSoft will automatically change the file into the new format.
This file is created be WPLSoft. When the file is opened and
WPL Files (*.dvp)
saved, it is automatically changed into an ISPSoft file (*.isp).
ISPSoft Group Files (*.pri) It is a group of files in ISPSoft.
2-18
*. WPLSoft is a PLC programming software produced by Delta Electronics, Inc.. Please refer to WPLSoft User Manual
2-19
Users can select File from the menu to open recently edited files.
 Close project
Click Close Project from the File menu once the editing is complete. When the modified project is not
saved, a pop-up window appears to confirm whether the project needs saving or not.
Additional remark
If users do not close the project before leaving ISPSoft and restart the software again next time, the
system will automatically open the file edited from last time by default. (Users can set the function to
enable or disable for opening previous projects. For more details, please refer to section 2.3.1.)
2-20
2.2.4 Managing Group Project

 Creating group project
Click the File menu, choose New then move to Group Project and click on New Group Project.
When creating group project, users also need to create a single project from the group. In the Create a
New Project window, type the Project Name and Drive/Path, select the PLC Type and Controller
Type from the drop-down lists. Users can add information and description related to the project by
clicking Properties; Nevertheless, type Group Name in the box then click OK.
After a group project is created, information related to the first single project will be displayed in the
Project section. Owing to the fact that there is only one single project in the group, so it is displayed
and operated in the same way as creating a single project. The only difference is under the group
project framework, users cannot execute the Save As function.
2-21
 New to group project

Click File from the menu, choose New move to Group Project and click New to Group Project to
add new single project to the group. Or, you can also right-click a Project in the section and select
New to Group Project.
In Group Project, only one project is edited at a time. Therefore, when a new project is added to the
group, the editing project needs to be closed. A window will appear to confirm if this editing project
needs saving or not.
In the Create a New Project window, users can type a project name in the Project Name box, and
select a PLC in the PLC Type drop-down list box. Besides, after users click Properties…, they can
give a description of the project. However, users can not specify a path.
2-22
 Active project
In Group Project, only one project is edited at a time. To edit another project, right-click on the selected
project and choose Active Project. Or, double click to activate on the selected project.
When switching to another project, the selected file can be edited in the Project section, while other
files not activated are in gray colors.
2-23
 Importing single project to a group

When a single project (*.isp) file is not created under a group, users can import it into the group. To
import a single project, you can right-click a project in the Project section, then select Add to Group
Project from the quick menu to select the import file.
Only single project *.isp files are allowed to be imported. When importing a single project, the project
will be copied to the group project file, and the single project is still saved in the original path of your
computer.
2-24
 Remove from group project

When removing a single project from a group, they can right-click the selected file in the Project
section and click Remove from Group Project from the quick menu. However, if there is only one
project in the group, that project cannot be removed.
When removing, the file is removed only from the list of projects in the group project file, and not from its
former path. Users can re-add the project into the group through importing the file.
2-25
 Open a group project

To open previously created group projects, click Open from the File menu, or in the toolbar, then
choose Files of type to select ISPSoft Group Files (*.pri) in the drop-down list box and click Open.
When the group file to be opened has a red cross icon on it, this means the single project saved in the
path used to denote group project appears abnormal and may be either removed, saved in a new path
or using a new file name.
 Close project
Click Close Project from the File menu to close editing projects, but other inactivated single projects
can still be activated. Users can click Close All Project to close the entire project.
2-26
2.2.5 Managing Motion Control Modules

In the Project section of ISPSoft, the Motion Module option is added for AH series. To add AHxxPM and
AHxxMC motion modules, users must install PMSoft version 2.05 or above.
 New Motion Module - AHxxPM and AHxxMC

If users want to create a PMSoft project in ISPSoft, click Motion Module in the Project section and
choose New Motion Module from the quick menu.
Then, type the File Name of the motion module project and select a model Type from the drop-down
list. In addition, choose the Rack No. and Slot No. from the drop-down lists based on HWCONFIG
configuration. Each slot also corresponds to a motion module. If users are uncertain of the mounting
position or may rearrange the slots later, users can select Undefined from the Slot No. drop-down list.
Click OK once the setting is complete.
2-27
 Open AHxxPM and AHxxMC Motion Module Projects

To edit AHxxPM and AHxxMC motion modules, please double-click the project file and PMSoft will
automatically be opened for users to implement software development and programming on motion
modules in PMSoft.
*. Please refer to PMSoft User Manual for more information on the usage. If PMSoft is opened through ISPSoft, users
can only edit motion modules, but must save the edited content in PMSoft to complete the execution.
 Open AHxxEMC Motion Module Projects

To edit an existed project concerning AHxxEMC motion module, please double-click on the file and
ISPSoft will automatically be opened for users to implement software development and programming on
motion modules in ISPSoft.
*. When ISPSoft is opened through the ISPSoft, users can only edit motion modules, but must save the edited content in
ISPSoft to complete the execution.
2-28
 Remove Motion Module

To delete an existed motion module project, users can right-click the selected project and choose
Remove Motion Module from the quick menu; when removing, the module project files (*.ppm) or
(*.isp) is removed only from the list under the Project section, but still saved in its original path.
 Add Existed Motion Module

To add an existed motion module project file (*.ppm) or (*.isp), right-click Motion Module in the Project
section and select Add Existed Motion Module from the quick menu.
Choose the added motion module project based on file name and type in the Open Project window,
then click Open. The slot number is set as undefined.
2-29
When adding a PMSoft project, the file is copied to the path concerning ISPSoft projects, while the
original PMSoft project is saved in the former path. The file format used in PMSoft version 2.05 or
above is applied to the added PMSoft project, but does not apply to DVP-PM projects; when adding an
ISP project file, a file is created and copied to the path concerning ISPSoft projects.
 Change Slot Number

If users want to change the slot and rack number in a motion module project, right-click the selected
project and choose Change Slot No. from the quick menu.
Select the Rack No. and Slot No. from the drop-down list. Please do not select a slot number which is
already occupied, then click OK.
2-30
2.3 Basic Configuration

2.3.1 System and Environment
Select Tools and choose Language from the drop-down list.
Users can click Options in the Tools menu and choose desired settings from corresponding tabs at the
top or listed on the left side of the window.
2-31
 System Configuration - Project Setting
 Open the Previous Project: When starting ISPSoft, the system will automatically open the
previous project that was last edited and not closed.
 Create Backup File & Enable: Creates a backup file when saving.
 Save Time Interval: The system automatically saves the project files according to the selected
Minutes from the drop-down list in the Auto Save Project section. Next, users can choose the
maximum Backup File Number. If the auto-saved files exceeds the maximum backup number, the
earliest saved files will be replaced by the backup files accordingly; if ISPSoft is not closed properly
2-32
and a project file is opened, users will be asked if the last backup file of that project need to be
loaded in or not.
Auto-save before Compiling: Auto-save the edited project file before compiling.
 Allow the same address in symbol table: Allow different symbol variables to assign the same
address.
Allow first character of a symbol in number: Allow the first character of a symbol variable to be
a number.
Old Variable Array Compiling: Supports variable array compiling of previous version.
*Functions may vary based on different PLC models.
 System Configuration - Workspace
 Setup Text related contents i.e. font type, color, size and style.
 Setup a background color for Workspace.
 A preview of the modification.
 System Configuration - Output Window
 A preview of the modification.

 Setup output text.
 Setup a background color for Output.
2-33
 System Configuration - Symbol Table
 A preview of the modification.

 Select an item in the left Item box, then choose the style of display in the right Text box.
 The dialog Add Symbol configuration will close automatically once it is declared.
 Input undefined symbol variables in ladder diagram (LD), function block diagram (FBD), or a
sequential function chart (SFC) environment, click [Enter] when complete and the dialog Add
Symbol configuration appears.
 When copy or paste from symbol tables, select to include comment.
 Select from the icon toolbar to switch between Symbol or Address mode.
 Input symbol variables in the program and a list of created variables are shown. To select, users
can use the mouse or the up and down arrow keys on the keyboard. (See below)
【】OR【】
2-34
 Configuration Editor - LADDER and FBD
 Select an item for setup.

 A preview of the modification.
 Select a display type and color.
 In Ladder and FBD programming editor section, users can choose from the ‘Show Symbol Hint’
box to display selected hints of the device or symbol variable pointed by the mouse cursor.
 Set the Ladder and FBD component width in the box. The setup will affect the word length in FBD
programming.
 Configuration Editor - SFC

 Based on the selected item, select the Text box for display.
 Configuration Editor - IL and ST
2-35

 Based on the selected item, select the Text box for display.
 Configuration Editor - CFC

 Based on the selected item, select the Color Setting for display.
By clicking Default, all settings are restored to defaults. When modification for all setups are complete,
click OK.
2-36
*. When several windows are opened in ISPSoft, each window provides a different setting. However, the software only
remembers the environment setting of the last window closed, so it will automatically apply that setup once
re-started.
2.3.2 Importing and Exporting User Preference

Users can export and import their preference concerning environment settings through ISPSoft.
 Export User Preference

Choose Export from the File menu and select Preferences. Input file name to export from the pop-up
window and click Save.
 Import User Preference
Choose Import from the File menu and click Preferences. Select a file for import from the pop-up
window and click Open.
2-37
Additional remark
Since environment parameters may vary based on different ISPSoft versions, not all import preferences
may be applicable. Users need to check the imported Preference file (*.pfs) to make sure the contents is
desired if unsure which ISPSoft version it is exported from.
2.4 Communication Settings

The following picture shows a communication structure between ISPSoft and a Delta PLC. Unlike
previous ways of connection, the ISPSoft uses Communication Manager- COMMGR as the
communication interface. The section explains how to build communication between ISPSoft and PLCs
with basic tests completed.
*1. Please refer to section 1.2 for information about COMMGR and installation guide.
*2. For ISPSoft version 2.0 or above, COMMGR is used in the communication structure; while earlier versions adopts the
traditional ways of connection.
2.4.1 Start/Close COMMGR
When COMMGR is installed, its shortcut can be found in the Programs of a PC Start menu. Users need
to click the shortcut to start COMMGR only for first-time installation. Afterwards, when starting a
computer, the COMMGR is automatically started and remains in the Windows system; however, when its
icon is not shown, please click the shortcut of COMMGR listed in the Programs.
2-38
To start COMMGR, select its icon and double-click Open or right-click the icon to open the program on
Windows PC.
The following image is a display of the COMMGR status window. In the middle of the window contains
description of drivers established for communication. The ISPSoft assigns a driver from the description
box to form connection with PLCs; on the right are buttons for managing these drivers. For more
information, please read the next section.
2-39
Users can close the COMMGR window by clicking or in the upper right corner, but the
program still exists in Windows; to close COMMGR completely, right-click the COMMGR icon displayed
in the system and choose Close.
2.4.2 Driver Management for COMMGR
The driver in COMMGR act as a channel that connects the program and communication port. When
users add a new driver and has setup the communication parameters, the COMMGR forms a channel
connecting the assigned communication port in the driver and when the computer reboots, the
COMMGR will automatically start the driver. However, when the channel for connecting the driver is not
properly functioning, for instance, the existed network card or USB cable is removed, the COMMGR will
automatically stop the driver and ERROR status is displayed. Meanwhile, a small red ‘X’ appears on the
COMMGR icon of the Windows system tray. When connection restores, the status for the driver also
returns to OK.
2.4.3 Creating Connection Channel - Add Driver

Click Add on the right side of the COMMGR window to start settings concerning communication
parameters.
2-40
Quick steps to set up a driver:
(1) Driver Name Setup

Type the Driver Name in the box. Users can input maximum of 31 characters, and special marks
such as “_” but not *, #, ?, \, %, @ in the name box.
(2) Connection Setup

Select a desired connection Type from the drop-down list. The following is a list of the connection
types supported by COMMGR.
2-41
 RS232/422/485
Uses COM Port to communicate with PLC hosts.
 USB (Virtual COM)
Some PLC hosts provides USB port, so a PC and PLC host can directly connect through USB.
However, before using this connection method, please make sure that the software for the USB
driver is installed in the computer. For more information on methods of installation, please refer to
appendix A or other PLC user manuals.
 Ethernet
Uses Ethernet to communicate with PLC hosts.
 DirectLink (USB) & DirectLink (Ethernet)
Used by Delta human-machine interfaces (HMI) for connection. Under normal connection of PLC
and HMI, a computer uses an USB or Ethernet to connect with the HMI, and indirectly builds
communication with PLC host. Please refer to Delta HMI user manuals for more information on
connection and notifications.
 DVP Simulator& AH5x0 Simulator & AH5x1 Simulator & AS300 Simulator & AS200
Simulator
Serves as virtual channels for simulators regarding all PLC types, but must use corresponding
devices for connection in the ISPSoft.
(3) Communication Protocol Setup

Setup the communication protocol based on the selected connection type. Each type of connection
has its own communication protocol setting. The following section will introduce the different types
of communication parameter settings.
2.4.3.1 Communication Parameter Setting - RS232/422/485
Before starting the setup of RS232/422/485 driver, make sure:
(a) The software for driver installation can be found in the computer.
(b) The PC and PLC hosts has now established connection and is functioning.
2-42
(1) Type the Driver Name. To add special marks, only ‘_’ can be used .
(2) For Connection Setup, select RS232/422/485 from the drop-down list for Type.
(3) For COM Port, select the desired port for communication from the drop-down list. The list contains
complete information regarding COM Port number and device name, which is the same as in
Windows Device Manager. If (a) and (b) mentioned above is confirmed, users will be able to select
the COM Port.
(4) The data format for communication is ASCII or RTU.

(5) The communication protocol setting of the COM Port is the same as its connected device. When
Default is clicked, the communication protocol parameters returns to defaults.
If not sure about the communication protocol of the connected device, click Auto-detect to find out
the parameter. When detection is successful, users can connect the device to a RS232
communication port selected with a RS232 cable, and click to automatically detect the
communication protocol. If the communication protocol is successfully detected, its parameters will
be automatically filled in the corresponding boxes in the section; however, the system will not
auto-detect parameters for COM Port and ASCII / RTU, therefore, please confirm these two
parameters before clicking auto-detect.
(6) To setup parameters concerning responding time. For Connect Retries, users need to setup the
number of retry once connection error occurs, while for Connection Time-Out setting, the
parameter concerns the time interval between retries.
*. When changing a hardware device connected to a PC, users need to close the setting page concerning communication
driver properties and re-start in order to obtain the new hardware communication device.
2.4.3.2 Communication Parameter Setting - USB (Virtual COM)
Before starting the setup of USB type drivers, make sure:
(a) The software for driver installation can be found in the computer.
(b) The PC and PLC hosts has now established connection and is functioning.
2-43
(1) Type the Driver Name. To add special marks, only ‘_’ can be used.
(2) For Connection Setup, select USB (Virtual COM) from the drop-down list for Type.
(3) For COM Port, select the desired port for communication from the drop-down list. If (a) and (b)
mentioned above is confirmed, the list will display the host device name and COM Port number.
*. For more information regarding USB drivers in PLC hosts, please refer to appendix A .
2.4.3.3 Communication Parameter Setting - DirectLink (USB)
(2) For Connection Setup, select DirectLink (USB) from the drop-down list for Type.
(3) Choose from the HMI USB Mode. When selecting CDC Mode, choose the desired COM Port from
the drop-down list. For more methods regarding connection, please refer to Delta HMI user
manuals.
2-44
2.4.3.4 Communication Parameter Setting - Ethernet
(2) For Connection Setup, select Ethernet from the drop-down list for Type.
(3) For Ethernet Card, select the desired network card from the drop-down list. The current IP address
is shown below the description.
(4) In the IP Address Setting, setup the communication device IP address and name.
 Click Search and the result for devices in the same network are shown in the box.
 Click Add for a new IP address and input information regarding each cell.
 IP address: The device IP address.
 Port: Used during communication, default setting is 502.
 Label: The name of the device.
 Type: The device model type that can be found through clicking Search.
 Select an IP address and click Del or press Delete on the keyboard to remove it from the list.
*. When changing an internet device connected to a PC, users need to close the setting page concerning communication
driver properties and re-start in order to obtain the new internet device.
2-45
2.4.3.5 Communication Parameter Setting - DirectLink (Ethernet)
(2) For Connection Setup, select DirectLink (Ethernet) from the drop-down list for Type.
(3) For Ethernet Card, select the desired network card from the drop-down list. The current IP address
is shown below the description.
(4) In the IP Address Setting, setup the communication device IP address and name.
 Click Search and the result for devices in the same network are shown in the box.
 Click Add for a new IP address and input information regarding each cell.
 IP address: The device IP address.
 Port: Used during communication, default setting is 502.
 Label: The name of the device.
 Type: The device model type that can be found through clicking Search.
 Select an IP address and click Del or press Delete on the keyboard to remove it from the list.
*. When changing an internet device connected to a PC, users need to close the setting page concerning communication
driver properties and re-start in order to obtain the new internet device.
2-46
2.4.3.6 Communication Parameter Setting - DVP Simulator
(2) For Connection Setup, select DVP Simulator from the drop-down list for Type.
(3) Input assigned Port Number.
(4) For Device Setting, DVP simulators include EH2/SV/Old Series, EH3/ EH3-L/SV2, ES2/
EX2/SA2/SX2/MC, SE and SS2.
*. When ES, SS, EX, VFD, EC devices download the DVP simulator, these devices will change to EH device once uploaded.
*. Regarding TP devices, please select SS2 series as simulator.
2.4.3.7 Communication Parameter Setting - AH5x0 & AH5x1 Simulator
(2) For Connection Setup, select AH5x0 Simulator or AH5x1 Simulator from the drop-down list for
Type.
2-47
2.4.3.8 Communication Parameter Setting - AS Simulator
(2) For Connection Setup, select AS200 Simulator or AS300 Simulator from the drop-down list for
Type.
Additional remark
(a) To use simulator functions, we suggest using ISPSoft V3.05 or later versions.
(b) When using simulators, users need to be aware that they do not support all functions and
commands.
2.4.4 Creating Connection Channel - Start/Stop a Driver

For USB driver, users do not need to operate because COMMGR will auto-detect for the connection
when a device is properly connected to a PC.
OK(START)
Status Auto-detected
ERROR
Users must enable a simulator first to start execution. By choosing the desired simulator driver from the
list in the COMMGR window and click Start button on the right, you will see START shown in the State
column if the simulator driver is successfully enabled.
2-48
STOP
START
To stop a driver, select the desired driver on the list in COMMGR window and click Stop button on the
right, you will see STOP shown in the State column if the simulator drive is stopped.
START
STOP
2.4.5 Creating Connection Channel - Configure/Delete a Driver

To modify the parameter of a particular driver, please click Configure button on the right or double-click
the selected driver to open a setup window for modification.
2-49
To delete a driver, select the desired driver and click Delete button on the right or press DEL on the
keyboard for removal.
2-50
2.4.6 Creating Connection Channel - Simulator with Operating

Panels
When the state of a simulator shows START, an operating panel (see below) pops-up to demonstrate the
current states of AH5x0 and AH5x1 simulators and provide STOP or RUN mode for users to control.
The IO Module button of a simulator can open an IO module panel. However, modules must be
configured in HWCONFIG and please refer to section 3.8.4 for parameter download to hosts.
Users can switch to RUN mode and view the same HWCONFIG module configuration and state on IO
module panel.
The following chart demonstrates the digital input and output registers area. The Y device offers only
output status but cannot perform any operation; while X device offers users to click and change the
ON/OFF status of each contact for external input simulation.
The following chart shows analog input and output registers area. Each column requires 32-bit floating-
point format and corresponds to every channel of the actual module; for D8 and D10 (see below)
corresponds to analog output channel - D device, the output are for viewing only; while D0, D2, D4 and
D6 corresponds to analog input channel - D device. Users can click to open the setup window (see
below) for analog input value.
2-51
Signal Type Description
Constant A constant signal with fixed value.

Random To assign the maximum and minimum value of random signal.
Sine Wave To assign the maximum or minimum value and signal cycle of sine wave.
To assign the maximum or minimum value, ON and OFF times of cyclic
Square Wave
square wave.
Triangle Wave To assign the maximum or minimum value and signal cycle of triangle wave.
When setting is complete, the column (channel) will continue to send data to COMMGR based on the
signal mode setup. While ISPSoft can conduct related tests when capturing simulator signals through
COMMGR.
2-52
Users can right-click the IO module panel and select Show All IO Module to display all modules. To hide
the modules, click IO Module Visible Settings and choose the module to hide from the list of module
types then click OK. You will be able to view the current state on the right bottom corner of the window.
(See below)
The AH5x0 and AH5x1 simulators also provides backup function which combines parameters and
program backup into an *.asdup file then use this file and restore in other identical simulators. (See
below)
2-53
2.4.7 Creating Connection between ISPSoft and COMMGR
When a driver is created and also enabled in COMMGR, users can assign the driver and use it in ISPSoft.
After the setting is complete, a connection between ISPSoft and COMMGR is formed. For single project
setup, each requires an assigned communication, thus, under the structure of group project, users must
open each single project and complete the setups.
(1) First, please enable the desired project for communication setup, but if under a single project
structure, you can skip this step.
(2) Choose Communication Settings from Tools menu in ISPSoft and its setting window will appear.
2-54
When AH5x0 series is selected as the connection target for group project, the option Routing Mode is
added and used together with NWCONFIG. Please refer to chapter 19 for more information.
(3) Select the desired Driver from the drop-down list in Communication Setting window.
(4) Select the PLC station address from the drop-down list that is to connect with the PC or choose 0
for station address (broadcast).
2-55
(5) When driver type is Ethernet or DirectLink (Ethernet), users can select the desired IP Address to
connect with PLC hosts from the drop-down list.
(6) Click OK once all settings are complete. Meanwhile, the current connected driver information will
appear in the ISPSoft status bar.
Additional remark
If COMMGR setting is modified, then communication settings in ISPSoft must be re-selected for proper
connection.
2.4.8 Connecting PLC (Host) and Communication Port
Users can use communication cables to connect PLC hosts and assigned communication ports. The
following introduces most commonly used connections and useful notes. For more details, please refer to
any types of PLC user manuals.
1. DVP series PLC (RS232)

Adopts Delta communication cable to connect a computer with a PLC host. Select RS232 for
COMMGR driver type.
Note: Before connecting, please confirm that the setups in COMMGR drive concerning RS232
parameters is the same as in PLC hosts.
2-56
2. DVP-SX2 series PLC (USB)

A DVP-SX2 series PLC provides a type B mini USB interface. Users can use the USB cable to
connect a PLC host with a computer. However, since the USB framework in SX2 series contains USB
converting to RS232 (circuit built-in), therefore, the internal function adopts RS232 mode and is also
selected as the COMMGR driver type.
Note:
(a) Please confirm that the USB driver is properly installed in SX2 series. For more details, please
refer to Appendix A.
(b) Before connecting, please confirm that the setups in COMMGR drive concerning RS232
parameters is the same as in PLC hosts.
3. AH/AS series PLC (USB)

Adopts USB cable to connect a computer with a PLC host. The USB port of the host is a type B mini
USB. Select USB (Virtual COM) for COMMGR driver type.
Note: Please confirm that the USB driver is properly installed in AH/AS series. For more information,
please refer to Appendix A.
4. AH series PLC (RS232/422/485)

The COM port for AH series PLC host is a standard type, therefore, please use RS232 communication
of RX and TX lines or an adapter that has jumper function to proceed the connection with a computer.
Please select RS232/422/485 for COMMGR driver type.
Note:
(a) Before connecting, please confirm that the setups in COMMGR drive concerning RS232 parameters
is the same as in PLC hosts.
(b) The COM interface of AH series provides many modes including RS232/RS485/RS422. Before
connecting, please confirm that current desired mode is correct. (Please refer to follow-up
comments.)
5. AH/AS series PLC, DVPxxMC and DVP-SE (Ethernet)

The AHCPU5xx-EN, AHxxEMC, AS series, DVPxxMC and DVP-SE series PLC hosts contain built-in
RJ-45 port (Ethernet) and can connect with a PC through Ethernet. A PC can also connect with a PLC
host to the same domain through the hub or uses direct network cable for connection. Please choose
Ethernet for COMMGR driver type.
Note:
(a) Before connecting, please check the structure of the internet is properly functioning.
(b) Check the accuracy of the Ethernet parameter in host CPU. Please refer to follow-up comments
2-57
Additional remark
For communication parameter defaults regarding all PLC types, please refer to related user manuals.
2.4.9 Practical Connection Test

When all the steps mentioned above are completed, users can conduct a simple test to check on the
connection with a PLC host is properly functioning.
Before connecting, please check on the following:

(a) A PLC host and PC is properly connected through communication cable, while the host power is
turned on and well-functioning.
(b) Provides communication device including PC network cards, internet hub and serial port is properly
functioning.
(c) To use the desired COMMGR driver, please check related parameters to be correct and the driver
state is OK.
(d) Please check the assigned driver, station number and IP address in Communication Setting for
ISPSoft is correct.
After confirming the list above, please select System Information (I) from PLC menu and a pop-up
window will appear. However, if the pop-up window concerning system information did not appear, this
means connection failure, users will need to check the above list (a) to (d) again.
2-58
2-59
MEMO
2-60
Chapter 3 PLC System Configuration &
Settings
Table of Contents
3.1 Parameter Setting for DVP Series PLC ............................................... 3-4
3.1.1 System Management Tools for DVP Series PLC ............................ 3-4
3.1.2 Retentive Range ...................................................................... 3-4
3.1.3 Connected Information............................................................. 3-8
3.1.4 Parameter Setting for DVP-ES3 Series PLC ................................. 3-8
3.2 Hardware Configuration Tool ─ HWCONFIG ..................................... 3-10
3.2.1 HWCONFIG Environment.............................................................. 3-11
3.2.2 Module Configuration................................................................... 3-14
3.2.2.1 Add Module ............................................................................. 3-14
3.2.2.2 Address Assignment of Modules ................................................. 3-19
3.2.2.3 Edit Comment ......................................................................... 3-23
3.2.2.4 Delete Module ......................................................................... 3-25
3.2.2.5 Replace Module........................................................................ 3-27
3.2.2.6 Search/Find and Replace........................................................... 3-28
3.2.2.7 Copy/Paste ............................................................................. 3-33
3.2.2.8 Cut/Paste ................................................................................ 3-35
3.2.2.9 Drag and Drop ......................................................................... 3-37
3.2.2.10 Add Expansion Backplane and Redundant Expansion Backplane ..... 3-38
3.2.2.11 Delete Expansion Backplane and Redundant Expansion Backplane . 3-42
3.2.2.12 Replace Backplanes .................................................................. 3-44
3.2.2.13 Cut/Copy/Paste Expansion Backplane & Redundant Expansion Rack 3-46
3.2.2.14 Drag an Expansion or Redundant Expansion Backplane ................. 3-50
3.2.2.15 Rearrange Input/Output Device Range ........................................ 3-51
3.2.2.16 Show/Hide Module Names ......................................................... 3-52
3.2.3 Managing the Version of a Module ................................................. 3-52
3.3 Parameter Settings for AH500 Series PLC ........................................ 3-54
3.3.2 Setting CPU Parameters ............................................................... 3-56
3.3.2.1 CPU Basic Parameter: Name ...................................................... 3-56
3.3.2.2 CPU Basic Parameter: System ................................................... 3-57
3.3.2.3 CPU Basic Parameter: Latched Device Range ............................... 3-61
3.3.3 Setting COM Port Parameters ....................................................... 3-62
3.3.4 Setting Ethernet Parameters ........................................................ 3-63
3.3.5 Setting Advanced Ethernet Parameters .......................................... 3-65
3.3.5.1 Ethernet - Advance: Filter ......................................................... 3-65
3.3.5.2 Ethernet - Advance: NTP ........................................................... 3-67
3.3.5.3 Ethernet - Advance: Email ........................................................ 3-68
3.3.5.4 Ethernet - Advance: Email Trigger .............................................. 3-69
3.3.5.5 Ethernet - Advance: Email and Trigger Configuration .................... 3-72
3.3.5.6 Ethernet - Advance: Socket ....................................................... 3-73
3.3.5.7 Ethernet - Advance: Web .......................................................... 3-75
3.3.5.8 Ethernet - Advance: Data Exchange ........................................... 3-76
3.3.6 Data Exchange Setup - COM & Ethernet......................................... 3-79
3.3.6.1 Data Exchange Setup - COM1/COM2 /COM .................................. 3-81
3.3.6.2 Data Exchange Setup - Ethernet ................................................ 3-82
3.4 Parameter Settings for AHxxEMC Series PLC ................................... 3-82
3-1
3.4.2 Options ......................................................................................3-84
3.4.2.1 Options - System Information ....................................................3-84
3.4.2.2 Option - COM Port Setting ..........................................................3-89
3.4.2.3 Option- Ethernet Setting ............................................................3-89
3.4.2.4 Option- Ethernet Setting (advanced) ...........................................3-90
3.4.3 Data Exchange - COM2 &Ethernet ..................................................3-91
3.4.3.1 Data Exchange - COM2 ..............................................................3-92
3.4.3.2 Data Exchange - Ethernet ..........................................................3-93
3.5 Parameter Settings for AS Series PLC .............................................. 3-94
3.5.1 Open PLC Host Parameter Setting Page ..........................................3-94
3.5.2 Options ......................................................................................3-96
3.5.2.1 Options - System Settings .........................................................3-96
3.5.2.2 Options - COM1 Port Setting & COM2 Port Setting ....................... 3-103
3.5.2.3 Options - Ethernet Port Basic Setting ........................................ 3-104
3.5.2.4 Ethernet Port Advance Setting .................................................. 3-105
3.5.2.7 Options - Built-in AD/DA Setting ............................................... 3-117
3.5.2.8 Options - Built-in CAN Communication....................................... 3-118
3.5.3 Configuring AS-Series Remote Modules ........................................ 3-118
3.5.4 Data Exchange - COM1, COM2 and Ethernet ................................. 3-121
3.5.4.1 Data Exchange - COM1 and Data Exchange - COM2 .................... 3-122
3.5.4.2 Data Exchange - Ethernet ........................................................ 3-124
3.5.5 Data Exchange - FEN02, Function Card 1 and Function Card 2 ......... 3-124
3.5.5.1 Data Exchange - FEN02 ........................................................... 3-126
3.5.5.2 Data Exchange - Function Card 1 & Function Card 2 .................... 3-127
3.6 Parameter Settings for DVPxxMC Series PLC ................................. 3-128
3.6.1 Opening the PLC Parameter Setting Window ................................. 3-128
3.6.2 Options .................................................................................... 3-130
3.6.2.1 Options - System Settings ....................................................... 3-130
3.6.2.2 Options - CANopen ................................................................. 3-131
3.6.2.3 Options - CANmotion............................................................... 3-132
3.6.2.4 Options - RS232 ..................................................................... 3-132
3.6.2.5 Options - RS485 ..................................................................... 3-133
3.6.2.6 Options - Incremental Encoder 1 .............................................. 3-133
3.6.2.7 Options - Incremental Encoder 2 .............................................. 3-134
3.6.2.8 Options - Absolute Encoder ...................................................... 3-135
3.6.2.9 Options - Filtration Time Zone of Input Points ............................. 3-135
3.6.2.10 Options - Run/Stop Setting ...................................................... 3-136
3.6.2.11 Options - Ethernet Port Basic Setting ........................................ 3-137
3.7 Parameter Settings for Modules .................................................... 3-138
3.7.1 Setting Internal Parameters for AH5x0 and AH5x1 Modules............. 3-138
3.7.2 Parameter Settings for AHxxEMC and AS Series Modules ................ 3-141
3.7.3 Exporting and Importing Parameters for Modules ........................... 3-144
3.7.4 Updating Parameters for Modules ................................................ 3-145
3.7.5 Parameter Settings for Intelligent Modules .................................... 3-146
3.8 HWCONFIG Parameter Management and Online Diagnosis ............ 3-146
3.8.1 Save and Print function .............................................................. 3-147
3.8.2 Purchase Order.......................................................................... 3-147
3.8.3 Rack Information List for AH Series .............................................. 3-148
3.8.4 Download/Upload System Parameters .......................................... 3-149
3.8.5 I/O Scan ................................................................................... 3-151
3.8.6 AH Series Online Diagnosis ......................................................... 3-156
3-2
3.8.6.1 Online Mode ........................................................................... 3-156
3.8.6.3 Changing the Status of a Module Online ..................................... 3-159
3.8.6.4 Monitoring Table ..................................................................... 3-161
3.8.7 AS Series Online Diagnosis.......................................................... 3-161
3.8.7.1 Online Mode ........................................................................... 3-162
3.8.7.3 Changing the Status of a Module Online ..................................... 3-163
3.9 Setting a RTC ............................................................................... 3-165
3.10 Setting the Memory in a PLC ........................................................ 3-166
3-3
Users can adopt ISPSoft built-in functions or tools to execute system configuration and parameter
settings for PLC hosts. This chapter will introduce the steps and setups concerning configuration
and parameter settings.
3.1 Parameter Setting for DVP Series PLC

*. The old DVP series do not support HWCONFIG; however, the new DVP-ES3 supports HWCONFIG. Regarding
parameter setting for DVP-ES3, please refer to section 3.1.4.
3.1.1 System Management Tools for DVP Series PLC

In the project for DVP series, users can find system management tools under the category of the
PLC hosts name where some of the functions need to connect with the host for operation. The
functions are described in the following:
 Retentive Range: Set the PLC retentive device range.
 Device Resource Allocation: Set the device range for auto-configuring symbol variables.
 Connected Information: View the current PLC host system setting and parameters.
Apart from Device Resource Allocation function to be introduced in section 6.2.11, the Retentive
Range and Connected Information function will be explained in the following sections.
3.1.2 Retentive Range

(1) Double-click the Retentive Range and its setting window will appear.
3-4
Ch a pt er 3 P LC S ys t e m Conf i g ur a t io n & S et t in gs
(2) Click on a desired device type for setup.
(3) Since the range for PLC retentive block may be discontinuous, therefore, please first select the
desired setting section.
(4) Users will see a strip graph in the block section, with two values on both ends representing the
setting range limit. The orange color in the strip graph refers to the existed retentive range;
however, when the Block 0 section shows grey content, this means the current section cannot
setup retentive range for the selected PLC model.
For the setup, users need to input values of the Retentive Range, where the beginning point
is the value on the left box and the end point is the value on the right box. When input values,
the beginning point on the left must be smaller than the end point on the right and cannot
exceed the strip graph appearing as the range limit.
.
3-5
(5) Click Clear to remove the retentive function for the devices in that block and the range values
will be from -1 to -1.
(6) Click Default for settings to return to default values and the retentive function for all devices
will return to defaults.
(7) When ISPSoft is connected to a PLC host, click Read from PLC to read the retentive setups
on all devices from the PLC host.
3-6
(8) When all setting is complete and ISPSoft is in connection with a PLC host, click Set in PLC to
write the retentive settings for all devices into PLC hosts. Meanwhile, the system will
automatically close the setting window and the setups are stored, but it will be saved once an
ISPSoft project is saved.
(9) When setting values are not required temporarily, click OK to apply the setting. The setup is
saved once an ISPSoft project is saved.
(10) Besides using the setting window to write the setting values of functions into PLC hosts, the
retentive range in a project setting can also be written into PLC hosts when project program is
downloaded. Users only need to select Retentive Range from the Transfer Setup window
and click OK to download data to PLC hosts. For more details on download, please refer to
section 16.1.3.
3-7
3.1.3 Connected Information

When ISPSoft is in connection with a PLC host, users can double-click Connected Information
from the Project section, with PLC system parameters been captured and placed under Connected
Information file for viewing only.
3.1.4 Parameter Setting for DVP-ES3 Series PLC
Double-click HWCONFIG in the Project section and choose Parameter Setting to open the setting
page of the host CPU.
Before setting PLC parameters, please check the user manuals for all types of PLCs to avoid
any personal loss or system damages due to the effects of the parameter setting for PLCs and
the whole system.
3-8
There will show

Description
In the Device Setting window, parameters are categorized into many pages and users can use the
main category labels at the top of the window or select from the list of items in hierarchy on the left.
On the right, the titles on the page (from left to right) are Parameter Name, Value for user input,
Unit of the setting value as well as Default, Minimum and Maximum value. For more details,
please refer to section 3.5.2.
3-9
DVP-ES3 series requires AIO wizard setting for configuring modules on the right. These parameters
also determines the actual function and characteristics of each modules. For module parameter
settings, please click AIO Wizard Setting to open its setup window and select Upload Module to
upload back the configuration through PLC or select Enter Edit Mode to create modules manually
as shown below.
3.2 Hardware Configuration Tool ─ HWCONFIG

HWCONFIG is one of the tools in ISPSoft for hardware configuration. Its functions include
configuration of module racks, parameter settings for modules, download/upload hardware
parameters and simple on-line detection and diagnosis function. This section will introduce the
functions mentioned above and point out some model types and its unique functions.
Attention! When parameter settings regarding hardware configuration are complete, the
settings are effective once downloaded into PLC hosts.
3-10
3.2.1 HWCONFIG Environment

Users can double-click HWCONFIG from the Project section to open the setting window.
 Product list: Available hardware are listed in the box.

 System configuration area: This is the main work area for system configuration and settings.
 Information: Manages the present system configuration through a list.
In System Configuration, the area uses graphics to demonstrate the current configuration. For AH
series PLC, each module is represented by a graphic and the backplane number of a module is
shown on the left of the graphic; when operating, use the mouse to click on the selected module in
the graphic.
When selecting a backplane, click on the connected port on the left of the graphic.
3 - 11
When using AH560 redundant PLC series, double-click on the CPU and select Enable from the
PLC Parameter Setting window where users will find a redundant CPU appear on the right with
settings that mirror the CPU on the left, but cannot be modified alone.
The CPU on the right

including backplane and
module mirrors with the
CPU on the left, so it
cannot be modified alone.
The system configuration area and Information section will update together in real-time. So, when a
module is chosen from the system configuration area and Information section, the module is
displayed as selected in both places.
The AS series CPU has expansion module with non-backplane design placed on the right and slots
for function cards. Some series has built-in communication port for CANopen. Modules are
configured in the System Configuration area, while expansion cards are configured in the PLC
Parameter Setting page. To configure function cards and built-in CANopen communication port,
pleaser refer to section 3.5. Like other PLC series, the system configuration area and Information
section will update together in real-time.
3-12
Function Card
Expansion modules
The Product List listed out all supported modules on the left of the window. Select a device with
specification shown below.
Some PLC hosts provide exclusive configuration software and requires HWCONFIG to open these
software to execute advanced configuration and parameter settings, for example network planning
for Ethernet/IP or EtherCAT.
To setup advanced parameters for these PLCs, please right-click on the selected PLC graphic in the
System Configuration area. Then, choose Communication Software on the quick menu to open
the configuration software. Users will be unable to edit HWCONFIG window if the configuration
software is not closed. Some configuration software may require installation. If not installed, users
will see a pop-up message for software installation.
For details on starting the configuration software, please refer to the users manuals concerning each
configuration software and modules.
When using DVPxxMC series, a HWCONFIG window is shown below.
3-13
 PLC host image.

 Description: Describes the host functions.
 Comment: Comments concerning the host.
 Version: DDF version.
 Parameter: Click Settings to enter PLC Parameter Settings
 CANopen: Click CANopen Builder to open the software.
3.2.2 Module Configuration
3.2.2.1 Add Module
 Method 1
Select the desired module from the left Product List regarding AH series and drag that module to
the desired vacant slot on the right.
3-14
*. When a selected module is dragged to the system configuration area on the right, the module is placed in a
vacant slot. The system does not allow the selected module be placed in an existed module slot.
The AS series PLC has a non-backplane design with expansion module placed only on the right
(the‘+’position) in the System Configuration area. Users can continue to add modules on the
right‘+’position, while only one power module can be added on the left‘+’position.
3-15
Power Module
Expansion modules
 Method 2
For AH series PLCs, double-click a vacant slot or right-click the slot and choose Add. For AS
series PLCs, double-click on the position or right-click the position and choose Open.
AH Series
AS Series
(2) Double-click on the selected module to add.
3-16
AH series
AS series
 Method 3
(1) In Information, double-click on the blank row of the corresponding slot or right-click and
choose Add to see the Module Selection window.
3-17
(2) By clicking on a selected module from the list, users can view the Specification containing
the module information and double-click to add the module.
AH series PLC
3-18
AS series PLC
3.2.2.2 Address Assignment of Modules
When data updates are constantly required for AH series PLCs, for example, analog input modules
constantly receives analog signals, the system will automatically assign a device address to save
data. The assigned device address is shown in Information containing Input Device Range and
Output Device Range (see below). For AS Series, the group PLC do not support manual settings
for address assignment but provides auto configuration on fixed IP address according to the
installation position of the modules. For RTU, users can only set up the starting device IP of the first
SCM module then the following modules are assigned accordingly. Please refer to section 3.5.3 for
AS series remote module configuration.
 AH16AM10N-5A Module (slot 0)

This is a 16-point digital input module. The system assigns X0.0~X0.15 that is 1 WORD device in
total to store and input module status regarding all points.
3-19
 AH16AN01T-5A Module (slot 1)

This is a 16-point digital output module. The system assigns Y0.0~Y0.15 that is 1 WORD device in
total to store and output module status regarding all points.
 AH04AD-5A Module (slot 2)
This is a 4-channel analog input module. The system assigns D0~D7 which is 8 WORD in total and
the conversion of external analog input signal is stored in D0~D7.
 AH16AP11T-5A Module (slot 3)
This is a 8-point digital input/output module. Since the assigned device requires at least 1 word unit,
the system assigns X1.0~X1.15 (actual range of use: X1.0 ~ X1.7) device to store and input module
status regarding all points; in addition, Y1.0 ~ Y1.15 (actual range of use: Y1.0 ~ Y1.7) is assigned
to store and output module status regarding all points.
 AH20MC-5A Module (slot 4)
This is a motion control module, but since the module does not require constant data updates,
therefore, the system does not assign device address. To obtain the corresponding functions of the
assigned device address, double-click on the graphic module or the row on Information to open the
Parameter Setting window for the module.
If users want to know functions to which devices assigned correspond, they can double-click the
module or the information about the module on the information list to open the Parameter Setting
window.
*. When users double-clicks the row on Information box, please click on either the Slot No., Label, or Description cell
to avoid columns for edit.
Click the Normal Exchange Area tab in the Parameter Setting window to see a list regarding
device address and corresponding descriptions.
3-20
In order to update data constantly, the system uses auto-configuration for the device in storing data.
As for internal parameters not updated frequently in modules, users can define the corresponding
device D and when the system starts operating, the corresponding device D in the host CPU will
align with internal parameters of the assigned module. As a result, users can indirectly save internal
data of the module through corresponding device D. This is more effective than using the traditional
FROM / TO command to save internal data of the module.
For example, the AH04AD-5A module parameter setting window has D3000 defined as the module
parameter – CH0 Average Time of corresponding device D. Thus, after HWCONFIG parameters
are downloaded to the hosts, users can directly modify D3000 content value in the host CPU and
indirectly modify CH0 Average Time of AH04AD-5A module.
In addition, if modules parameters written in corresponding device D are not permitted, the system
will restore the parameters to its original values.
*. Please refer to section 3.7 for more information about internal parameter settings of modules; for FROM/TO
command, please see the instruction manuals for any PLC types.
3-21
The information in Input and Output Device Range is auto-configured by the system, but also
user-defined. Users can choose the selected row listed in Information box and then click , or type
the starting address to open the setting window and click OK once finish input the address.
Whether in Input and Output Device Range from Information or corresponding device D for
defining the internal parameters of the module, the input device range cannot overlap. When the
setting address is in conflict, the system will auto-correct and suggest another available address
based on the current input; for instance, when D3000 device is occupied by another module but is
being assigned again, the system will automatically search for another available address from
D3000.
When Input and Output Device Range is modified and modules need to be added, the default
device address will be based on the last modified device address and skip the used ones for
assignment; even though the number in the last modified address is not the biggest, the new
module address assignment is still based on the last modification.
3-22
The following example shows Input Device Range is modified to D50~D57 for Slot No. 2.
When a new module is added, the Input Device Range is automatically assigned from the last
modified D50~D57 and not based from the system’s biggest D100~D107. As a result, the Input
Device Range of the module is assigned as D58~D65.
AS series does not support the address assignment for every module. For more information on
remote group starting device address assignment, please refer to section 3.5.3.
3.2.2.3 Edit Comment
Click the gray area at the top of the System Configuration area and type comments for the
hardware configuration regarding the Project. When typing the comments, press Shift + Enter to
start a new line and when complete, click Enter.
3-23
For AH5x0, AH5x1 series and AH560 redundant series, users can select the Comment column and
click on the keyboard icon in the Comment window or click to view a pop-up window and input
the comment concerning the module.
For AHxxEMC and AS series, users can select the Comment column and click on the keyboard
icon in the Comment window or click to view a pop-up window and input the comment
concerning the module.
3-24
3.2.2.4 Delete Module
There are two ways to delete a module which has been configured. (The CPU module and
AH-series power supply module cannot be deleted.)
 Method 1
(1) Select a module which will be deleted from the system configuration area or information list.
AH series
AS series
3-25
(2) Click Delete on the Edit menu, click on the toolbar, or press Delete on the keyboard.
AH series
AS series
 Method 2
(1) Right-click a module which will be deleted from the system configuration area or information
list.
AH series
AS series
(2) Click Delete on the context menu.
AH series
AS series
Additional remark
When users select AH560 redundant series and enables Redundancy function, the redundant
backplane module can be deleted only from the left redundant backplane shown in the System
Configuration area, while the redundant backplane configuration on the right mirrors the left so it
cannot be modified.
3-26
3.2.2.5 Replace Module
Users can take the following steps to modify AH series modules in System Configuration area:
(1) Select and right-click an AH series module for modification in System Configuration area or
from Information. (CPU and power module cannot be modified.)
(2) Choose Replace on the quick menu and two ways are shown in the following.
 Same Type
Replace only the selected module to be the same type module. The new module
Input/Output Device Range will be the same, while other parameters may return to system
defaults if it is not corresponding.
 All
Replace selected module to be any type of module. The result is similar to deleting the
original module by adding a new one, so the new module Input/Output Device Range will
be re-configured and other parameter settings will also return to system defaults.
3-27
(3) When selecting on methods to Replace, the Module Selection window appears with modules
available for the selected Replace method; when the replaced module is decided, you can
double-click on that module.
Additional remark
When users select AH560 redundant series and enables Redundancy function, the redundant
backplane module can be deleted only from the left redundant backplane shown in the System
Configuration area, while the redundant backplane configuration on the right mirrors the left so it
cannot be modified.
3.2.2.6 Search/Find and Replace
Users can take the following steps to search or find and replace AH series modules in System
Configuration area:
3-28
(1) Click Search from the Option menu in the HWCONFIG toolbar and an operating window
appears.
(2) Click in the Find and Replace box to search the selected module type from the Module
Selection window and double-click on the module. Or input keywords regarding the module
type in the Find What box and click Find.
(3) When finding is complete, a list of modules that meet the search condition is shown below in
the Find and Replace window; when double-click a selected item from the list, that module is
also selected in the System Configuration area.
3-29
(4) To replace a module, please first select the item to be replaced from the list in the Find and
Replace window (see below) and select the checkbox if to replace as the Same Type.
 Same Type Selected

A module selected is replaced by a same type of module. After the module is replaced, the
input/output devices assigned to the new module are the same as the input/output devices
assigned to the module replaced. Besides, if the parameters in the new module are not the
same as the parameters in the module replaced, the setting of the parameters in the new
module will be restored to the default values.
 Same Type Not Selected

A module selected can be replaced by any type of module. After the module is replaced, the
different input/output devices will be assigned to the new module, and the setting of the
parameters in the new module will be restored to the default values.
(5) Click in the Replace with box, select a module in the Module Selection window, and
double-click the module. Owning to the fact that a module must be replaced by a specific
module, typing a module model or part of a module model in the Replace with box is not
allowed.
*. If the Replace With box is blank, the selected module is deleted once Replace function is executed.
(6) When Find and Replace setting is complete, users can click Replace to replace the module
selected with the new module. The search list is updated once Replace is complete and will
automatically select the next item.
3-30
(7) After filling in the setups in the Find and Replace window, users can click Replace All and new
modules based on the setting will replace the listed items shown in the window.
* When using AH560 redundant system with Redundancy function enabled, only the main redundant backplane on the left in
System Configuration area can perform and replace modules, while the main redundant backplane on the right is
configured to mirror the left and cannot be modified. To execute Find and Replace function, the configuration of the main
redundant backplane on the right is not on the search list.
For AS series PLCs, users can view the following steps to replace modules in the System
Configuration area:
3-31
(1) Right-click one of AS series modules which will be replaced in the system configuration area or
on the information list. (The CPU module and the power module cannot be replaced.)
Or, click on the module to be replaced and then click Replace from the Edit menu on the tool bar.
(2) Click Replace from the quick menu and a Product List window appears.
(3) Select and double-click on the module to be replaced, and a pop-up window appears with a
message indicating that the replaced module setting will be restored to default, choose Yes if
wish to continue to replace. To replace all the same type of modules at once, users can select
Replace All and click on the modules to be replaced as shown below.
3-32
3.2.2.7 Copy/Paste
There are two ways to copy modules (CPU and power modules are not to copy/paste):
 Method 1
Right-click a selected module to copy in the system configuration area or Information, and
choose Copy from the context menu.
 Method 2
(1) Select a module to copy from System Configuration area or Information.
3-33
(2) Click Copy from the Edit menu, or on the toolbar.
There are two ways to paste modules:
 Method 1
Right-click a slot to paste from System Configuration area or Information and choose Paste from
the quick menu.
 Method 2
(1) Select a slot to paste from the System Configuration area or Information.
(2) Choose Paste from Edit in the HWCONFIG toolbar, or click on the toolbar.
The two methods are applicable for AS series as well. Since AS series modules has non-backplane
design, thus, modules can only paste to the far right position for installation or the blank row at the
bottom of the list.
When choosing to paste on an existing module, the module is placed before the existed module. For
example, the image below shows that by selecting 04AD module and click Paste from the quick
menu, the 06XA module is paste before 04AD.
3-34
Additional remark
To copy/paste a module, users can view the following descriptions on module parameters.
 Input/Output device range: The paste module automatically skips to the available device range
number.
 Comment: Comments are copied to the paste module.
 Internal parameters: Parameters are copied the paste module.
 Corresponding device D: An assigned column of the Corresponding device D for internal PLC
paste module, which automatically skips to the available device range number.
 Advanced parameters for intelligent module: The parameters cannot be copied and is referred
to as system defaults. Users will need to reset the parameters.
The following example shows that slot 0 is the copy module, while slot 1 is the paste module.
*. Some intelligent modules can enable exclusive configuration tools to execute settings. Please refer to section
3.7.5 for more information.
*. AHxxEMC and AS series PLCs do not support corresponding device D function.
When using AH560 redundant system with Redundancy function enabled, only the main redundant
backplane on the left in System Configuration area can copy/paste modules, while the main
redundant backplane on the right is configured to mirror the left and cannot be modified.
3.2.2.8 Cut/Paste
There are two ways to cut modules (CPU and power modules are not to cut or paste):
 Method 1
Right-click a selected module to cut in the system configuration area or Information, and choose
Cut from the context menu.
3-35
 Method 2
(1) Select a module to cut from System Configuration area or Information.
(2) Choose Cut from the Edit menu, or click on the toolbar.
There are two ways to paste modules:

 Method 1
Right-click on the selected slot to paste from System Configuration area or Information, and
choose Paste in the context menu.
 Method 2
(1) Select a slot to paste from System Configuration area or Information.
(2) Choose Paste from the Edit menu, or click on the toolbar.
3-36
The two methods are applicable for AS series as well. Since AS series modules has non-backplane
design, thus, modules being cut are added to the end position for installation. For instance, the
04AD module shown below is cut and paste on to the right side of 06XA module.
If the module that is cut and pasted to an existed model, the cut module will be placed before the
existed one. For example, the 04AD module shown below is cut and pasted to the left side of 06XA
module.
Additional remark
When executing Cut/Paste function, modules that are cut can only be paste once. However, the
input/output device range, comment, internal parameters, corresponding device D and
advanced parameters for intelligent modules from modules that are cut is altogether transferred
to the paste module, but AS series will automatically re-arrange input/output device range based
on the positions of module installation.
*. Some intelligent modules can enable exclusive configuration tools to execute settings. Please refer to section
backplane on the left in System Configuration area can cut/paste modules, while the main
3.2.2.9 Drag and Drop
Besides CPU and power modules, all module graphics in System Configuration area can be
dragged by the mouse .
For AH series, there are two dragging and dropping conditions:
 Condition 1
Select a module to drag and drop onto a vacant slot, then the will be moved to a new position.
3-37
 Condition 2
Drag a selected module to a position occupied by another module, the position of the two
modules are changed.
Since the AS series has a non-backplane design, when the module is dragged to a position
occupied by another module, a red arrow mark appears indicating the place to drop the module.
* When executing drag and drop, the input/output device range, comment, internal parameters, corresponding
device D and advanced parameters for intelligent modules are also dragged together with the module, but, AS
series will automatically re-arrange input/output device range based on the positions of module installation.
Additional remark
backplane on the left in System Configuration area can drag and drop modules, while the main
3.2.2.10 Add Expansion Backplane and Redundant Expansion

Backplane
For AH series, there are two ways to add expansion backplanes:
 Method 1
Choose a backplane model from the Product List and drag to System Configuration area; when
the backplane is dropped onto the blank workspace area, the new backplane is placed
underneath the present one.
3-38
When the backplane is dropped onto an existed backplane, the new backplane is placed on top of
the present one.
 Method 2
Right-click the blank in the system configuration area and click Add from the context menu, then
double-click on the selected backplane. The new backplane is placed underneath the selected
backplane.
3-39
Right-click the left side of the selected backplane graphic, choose Add from the context menu
and double-click on the backplane to add. The new backplane is placed underneath the selected
backplane.
To add redundant expansion backplane for AH5x0 and AH5x1 series, redundant expansion
backplane and expansion backplane cannot exist at the same time. For AH560 redundant system
with Redundancy function enabled, please refer to related product manuals on adding redundant
expansion backplane. Here are two ways to add expansion backplanes:
 Method 1
Choose a redundant expansion backplane model from the Product List and drag to System
Configuration area; when the redundant expansion backplane is dropped onto the blank
workspace area, the new backplane is placed underneath the present one.
3-40
When the redundant expansion backplane is dragged to an existed redundant expansion backplane,
the new redundant expansion backplane is placed on top of the existed one.
* A redundant expansion backplane cannot be dropped on top of the main backplane and redundant backplane nor
exist along with expansion backplanes.
 Method 2
Right-click the blank in the system configuration area and click Add from the context menu, then
double-click on the selected redundant expansion backplane. The new redundant expansion
backplane is placed underneath the selected backplane.
3-41
Right-click the left side of the selected backplane graphic, choose Add from the context menu
and double-click on the redundant expansion backplane (rack) to add. The new backplane is
placed underneath the selected backplane.
3.2.2.11 Delete Expansion Backplane and Redundant Expansion

Backplane
There are two ways to delete expansion backplanes (the main backplane cannot be deleted):
 Method 1
(1) Click on the left side of the selected backplane graphic to be deleted.
3-42
(2) Select Delete from the Edit menu or click on the toolbar. Users can press Delete on the
keyboard too.
 Method 2
Right-click the left side of a backplane and choose Delete from the context menu.
*The AHxxEMC and AS series do NOT support expansion backplane function.
There are two ways to delete redundant expansion backplanes (redundant main backplane
cannot be deleted):
 Method 1
(1) Click on the left side of the selected redundant expansion backplane graphic to be deleted.
(2) Choose Delete from the Edit menu in HWCONFIG functions, or click from the toolbar.
Users can press Delete on the keyboard too.
3-43
 Method 2
Right-click on the left side of a redundant expansion backplane to be deleted and choose Delete
from the context menu.
3.2.2.12 Replace Backplanes
To replace backplanes, users can follow these steps:

(1) Right-click on the left side of a backplane to be replaced and choose Replace from the context
menu.
3-44
(2) Double-click on the selected rack (backplane model) to be replaced in the window.
Additional remark
When the slot number of the new backplane is smaller than the original backplane, please be take
note that once replace is executed, modules in the original backplane with slot number exceeding
the new backplane is automatically deleted.
backplane on the left can be replaced, while the main redundant backplane on the right is
configured to mirror the left and cannot be modified.
3-45
3.2.2.13 Cut/Copy/Paste an Expansion Backplane and Redundant

Expansion Rack
There are two ways to copy or cut an expansion backplane (the main backplane cannot
copy/cut/paste):
 Method 1
Right-click the left side of a backplane to copy or cut, and then click Copy or Cut on the context
menu.
 Method 2
Click the left side of the selected backplane to cut or copy.
To copy, users can click Copy from the Edit menu, or click from the toolbar.
To cut, users can click Cut from the Edit menu, or click from the toolbar.
There are two ways to paste an expansion backplane. If an expansion backplane is pasted on the
blank in the system configuration area, it will be under the present racks. If an expansion backplane
is pasted on a present expansion backplane, it will be put above the present expansion backplane.
 Method 1
Right-click on a selected position to paste in System Configuration area and then select Paste
on the context menu.
3-46
 Method 2
Click the selected position in System Configuration area, and click Paste on the Edit menu, or
on the toolbar.
There are two ways to Copy or Cut a redundant expansion backplane (the main backplane cannot
copy/cut/paste)
 Method 1
Right-click the left side of a redundant expansion backplane to copy or cut and then click Copy or
Cut from the context menu.
3-47
 Method 2
Click on the left side of the selected backplane to copy or cut.
To copy, users can click Copy on the Edit menu, or click on the toolbar.
To cut, users can click Cut on the Edit menu, or click on the toolbar.
There are two ways to paste the redundant expansion backplane. If the redundant expansion
backplane is pasted on the selected blank space in System Configuration area, it is placed under
the present backplane. If the redundant expansion backplane is to paste onto an existed redundant
expansion backplane, it is placed on top of the present redundant expansion backplane.
 Method 1
Right-click to select a place to paste in System Configuration area, and then click Paste on the
context menu.
3-48
 Method 2
Click to select the place to paste and then click Paste from the Edit menu, or on the toolbar.
The redundant expansion backplane function is not supported by AHxxEMC and AS series.
3-49
Additional remark
When an extension or redundant type expansion backplane is cut/pasted, the parameters of the
modules are processed as follows.
 Input/output device range: The input/output devices assigned to the modules on the extension
or redundant type expansion backplane cut are automatically
assigned to the modules on the or redundant type expansion
backplane pasted.
 Comments about the modules: The comments about the modules on the extension or
redundant type expansion backplane cut are copied into the
modules on the extension or redundant type expansion
backplane pasted.
 Parameters in the modules: The parameters in the modules on the extension or redundant type
expansion backplane cut are copied into the modules on the
extension or redundant type expansion backplane pasted.
 Data registers: The data registers assigned to the modules on the extension or redundant type
expansion backplane cut are automatically assigned to the modules on the
extension or redundant type expansion backplane pasted.
 Parameters in the intelligent modules: The setting of the parameters in the intelligent modules
is pasted.
When an extension or redundant type expansion backplane is copied/pasted, the parameters in the
module are processed as follows.
 Input/Output device range: The input/output devices assigned to the module on the extension or
redundant type expansion backplane copied will automatically
switch number to the module on the extension or redundant type
copied.
 Comment about the module: The comment about the module is copied into the module pasted.
 Parameters in the module: The parameters in the module cut are copied into the module pasted.
 Data registers: The data registers assigned to the module copied will automatically switch
number to the module copied.
 Parameters in the intelligent module: The setting of the parameters in the intelligent module is
not copied, and is set to default value.
*. Some intelligent modules can be set by means of exclusive configuration tools. Please refer to section 3.7.5 for
more information.
3.2.2.14 Drag an Expansion or Redundant Expansion Backplane
Drag an expansion backplane to another expansion backplane when the left mouse button is held.
The two expansion backplanes will be interchanged. When the expansion backplane is dragged, the
input/output devices assigned to the modules on the expansion backplane, the comments about the
modules on the expansion backplane, the parameters in the modules on the expansion backplane,
the data registers assigned to the modules on the expansion backplane, and the parameters in the
intelligent modules are also dragged. However, the main rack is always at the top of the system
configuration area.
The expansion backplane function is not supported by AHxxEMC and AS series.
3-50
Drag a redundant expansion backplane to another expansion backplane when the left mouse button
is held. The two expansion backplanes will be interchanged. When the redundant expansion
backplane is dragged, the input/output devices assigned to the modules on the redundant
expansion backplane, the comments about the modules on the redundant expansion backplane, the
parameters in the modules on the redundant expansion backplane, the data registers assigned to
the modules on the redundant expansion backplane, and the parameters in the intelligent modules
are also dragged. However, the redundant main rack is always at the top of the system configuration
area.
*The AHxxEMC and AS series do NOT support redundant expansion backplane function.
3.2.2.15 Rearrange Input/Output Device Range
For AH/AS series, since the process of module configuration involves many executions to drag and
drop or copy/cut/paste, the input/output device range for each module may be automatically
assigned by the system and not according to a continuous sequence. Thus, users can click
Input/Output Device Rearrange from the File menu in HWCONFIG toolbar and all the
Input/Output Device Range of the module will rearrange base on the order of the slot and
backplane number.
The execution does not change the corresponding device D setting of an internal module; when
rearranging, if Input/Output Device Range and Corresponding Device D are not in conflict, the
system will automatically skip the address for corresponding device D to program the next available
address.
3-51
For AS series, users can apply on the toolbar and execute Input/Output Device Rearrange
function.
3.2.2.16 Show/Hide Module Names
For AS series, users can choose on the toolbar to show or hide module names in System
Configuration area.
3.2.3 Managing the Version of a Module

The functions of a module or the parameters in the module vary with the versions of the module. In
HWCONFIG, the functions of the modules and the parameters in the modules are defined in a
document called MDS. When ISPSoft is installed, the latest MDS document will be also installed.
An MDS document provides the information about the firmware versions of the modules. If users
want to configure modules in HWCONFIG, they can select a suitable configuration according to the
firmware versions of the actual modules. Besides, the parameters which can be set in the modules
vary with the firmware versions of the modules which are set. If the firmware version of a module set
in HWCONFIG is older than the firmware version of the actual module, the module will operate
normally after the parameters are downloaded. If the firmware version of a module set in
HWCONFIG is newer than the firmware version of the actual module, the module will not operate
normally after the parameters are downloaded. Please refer to the descriptions in the table below for
more information.
3-52
Difference Compatibility
The firmware version set is
The module operates normally. Functions or parameters not
older than the actual
defined in HWCONFIG are assigned with the default values.
firmware version.
The module cannot operate, and is in an erroneous condition.
The firmware version set is
Users have to select a firmware version which is the same as the
newer than the actual
firmware version of the actual module in HWCONFIG, check the
firmware version.
parameters, and download the parameters again.
*. The compatibility mechanism described above only applies to modules whose firmware version is 1.0 or above. A
firmware version below 1.0 is not compatible with firmware version 1.0 or above.
*. The equipment description file can be in DDF or MDS format based on different models.
If users want to set the firmware version of a module, they can select a version number in the
Firmware Version drop-down list cell on the information list. If the firmware version of a module is
unknown, no version number will be displayed.
If users want to change the firmware versions of the modules of a certain model, they can click Alter
Overall Firmware Version on the Option menu. The Alter Overall Firmware Version window will
appear.
Click in the Module Name box, select a module model in the Module Selection window, and
double-click the module model.
3-53
Select a version number in the Firmware Version drop-down list. After the setting is complete,
users can click OK to change the firmware versions of the modules specified.
*The AS series do NOT support the version of firmware modification.
Additional remark
Users can know the firmware version of an actual module by clicking I/O Scan on the Option menu.
If ISPSoft is connected to the CPU module, users can get the information about the firmware version
of an actual module in the Module Information window. If users want to know the firmware version
of an actual module by clicking I/O Scan on the Option menu, or viewing the information about the
firmware version of an actual module in the Module Information window, ISPSoft must be
connected to the CPU module normally, and the installation of modules must be completed. Please
refer to section 3.8.5 and section 3.8.6 for more information.
3.3 Parameter Settings for AH500 Series PLC

3.3.1 Open the PLC Host Parameter Setting Page
When HWCONFIG is enabled, double-click the CPU graphic in System Configuration area to
open the Host CPU Parameter Setting page. In addition, the setting paged for parameters differ
based on different PLC model types.
Before setting the PLC host parameters, please check on user manuals for all PLC types
and the effects of parameter settings to the host as well as the whole system, in order to
avoid any system or personnel risks.
*. Download the parameter once settings are complete, please refer to section 3.8.4 for ways to download.
3-54
The setting window contains many tabs based on different parameters. Users can use the main
category tabs near the top of the window, while each sub-category tab refers to a parameter setting
is shown near the bottom of the main category page.
3-55
3.3.2 Setting CPU Parameters
3.3.2.1 CPU Basic Parameter: Name
After users click the CPU tab at the top of the window, and the Name tab at the bottom of the
window, the AH5x0 series can type 32 characters at most in the Name box, and 60 characters at
most in the Comment box. While the AH5x1 series or AH560 redundant system, users can type 31
characters at most in the Name box, and 63 characters at most in the Comment box, there is no
restriction on characters typed in the Comment box. Characters typed in the boxes can include
special marks and spaces. However, please take note that a Chinese character occupies two
characters.
When adding an ISPSoft project, the system uses the project name as the host name by default and
appears after the model type in the Project section which can be redefined from here.
By using PLC label name for device identification, especially during networking applications or
connecting, users can avoid operating mistakes through checking the PLC label name;
several devices are connected to one network, users can check whether a device connected to
the computer is the device they expect by checking the device name. To prevent errors, if users
want to download/upload the program, the system will remind the users to check the name of the
CPU module and the name attached to the model in the project management area, when the name
of the CPU module is different from the name attached to the model in the project management
area.
3-56
3.3.2.2 CPU Basic Parameter: System
In System sub-category page of CPU main parameter category, the page provides CPU parameter
settings.
 Clear Non-latched Device (STOPRUN)

When Enable is selected and PLC host switches from STOP to RUN, the state of non-latched
devices and values are cleared.
 Y State (STOPRUN)
To set the host state from STOP to RUN of Y state.
 Clear: Set all Y device output to OFF.
 Retain Present State: Output retained to present state.
 Previous State before STOP: Restore to previous states before STOP.
3-57
 Reset Button & Clear Button

The parameters are used to setup and enable the function concerning Reset (RST) and Clear
(CLR) button on CPU panels. For descriptions regarding button function and operation, please
refer to user manuals for related PLC types.
AH5x0 and AH5x1 AH500 Redundancy

Series Front Panel System Front Panel
 Enable Redundancy
When enabled, two redundant main backplanes will appear in System Configuration area (see
below) containing a left redundant main backplane and a right redundant main backplane which
mirrors the left and cannot execute functions including add, delete or replace modules. To
perform these functions, users need to use the left redundant main backplane. When
Redundancy function is enabled, the expansion backplane in System Configuration area will
automatically change to redundant expansion backplane; For redundant main backplane
configuration module and functions, please refer to AH560 redundant system related manuals.
(Currently, only AH560 redundant system series support Redundancy Enable function.)
Left Redundant Main Right Redundant Main

Backplane Backplane
 Communication Loading of Scan Time

When enabled, users can adjust communication loading of scan time.
(ONLY AH5x1 and AH560 redundant system series supports this function.)
3-58
 Watchdog Timeout
Users can set a timeout during which the program is scanned. Generally speaking, the watchdog
timeout is reset whenever the scan of the program is complete. If the scan procedure cannot be
completed within the time set for some reason, the watchdog timeout occurs, and the CPU
module will be in an erroneous condition. Please refer to operation manuals for more information
about troubleshooting.
 Enable Constant Scan

Users can select the Enable Constant Scan checkbox, and set a scan time. If the actual scan
time is less than setting value, the CPU module will not carry out the next scan until the setting
value is reached. If the actual scan time is larger than the setting value, the CPU module will
ignore the setting value, and operate according to the actual scan time. Besides, if the scan time
set is larger than the watchdog timeout set, a watchdog timeout occurs when the CPU module
operates.
 Interval Interrupt Time

An AH500 series CPU module provides four interrupts. Users can set intervals of triggering the
interrupts. In ISPSoft, a timed interrupt is created through a task and a POU. Please refer to
chapter 5 for more information.
 Enable Remote Run

If the Enable Remote Run checkbox is selected, users can specify an X device which controls
the status of the CPU module. For example, the CPU module runs when the state of X0.0 is ON,
and the CPU module stops running when X0.0 is OFF.
3-59
 Constant Communication Response

If the Enable checkbox is not selected, commands received through the communication ports will
not be processed until the scan cycle is complete. If the Enable checkbox is selected, commands
received through the communication ports will be processed every specific period of time.
However, the scan procedure is interrupted when the system processes commands received
through the communication ports. As a result, the scan time will be prolonged if the Enable
checkbox is not selected. Please make sure that the operation of the system is not affected when
the function is used.
 Error Log Location

If the PLC option button is selected, error logs will be stored in the special data registers in the
CPU modules. If the PLC and PLC CARD option button is selected, error logs will be stored not
only in the CPU module, but also in the memory card.
Twenty error logs at most can be stored in an AH500 series CPU module. If there are more than
twenty error logs, the oldest error log will be overwritten by the latest error log. However, if the
PLC and PLC CARD option button is selected, and there are more than twenty error logs, the
oldest error log will be backed up in the memory card before the oldest error log is overwritten.
 CPU Operation at Program Error & CPU Operation at Bus Fault

If an error occurs, the status of the CPU may change. The status of the CPU depends on an error
code generated. Users can define the status of the CPU module for some errors. They can select
the Stop option button or the Continue option button in the CPU Operation at Program Error
section, select the Stop option button or the Continue option button in the CPU Operation at
Bus Fault section, and download the parameters to the CPU module. Please refer to operation
manuals or related technical documents for more information.
 Remote Reset
If the Enable checkbox is selected, the CPU module can be reset through a remote system. After
users select the Enable checkbox, and download the parameter to the CPU module, they can
click Format PLC Memory… on the PLC menu, and select the Reset PLC Memory (Factory
Setting) option button in the Format PLC Memory window.
3-60
3.3.2.3 CPU Basic Parameter: Latched Device Range
After users click the CPU tab at the top of the window, and the Latched Device Range tab at the
bottom of the window, they can set a range of latched devices.
(1) After users click a device type, they can be set a range of latched devices. There is a
rectangular bar in the setting area. The values at the two ends of the bar represent a maximal
value and a minimal value. The blue part represents a range of latched devices.
(2) Please select values in the boxes. The value in the left box is a start address, and the value in
the right box is an end address. The value in the left box must be less than the value in the
right box. Besides, the value in the left box cannot be less than the minimal value at the left
end of the rectangular bar, and the value in the right box cannot be larger than the maximal
value at the right end of the rectangular bar.
3-61
(3) If all the devices in the block are not latched devices, the users can click Clear. After the users
click Clear, the boxes become gray, and the range of latched devices will be -1~-1.
(4) If the users want to restore the setting to the default values, they can click Default. After the
users click Default, the setting will be restored to the default values.
Additional remark
Some latched device range may not cover the entire area. When there is a maximum value
restriction, a hint will appear under the setting area. The following image is the AHCPU530-EN
model setting page for latched range of D device; since the permitted latched range total is 32768
words, this means users can setup the latched range to be smaller or equal to 32768 from the entire
section setting range from 0~65535. For example, 0 ~ 32767 or 10000 ~ 42767.
Take the diagram below for instance, the image show input device range as 0~32768, yet the length
has reached 32769 words, thus, when leaving the page, the system shows a warning message
regarding PLC Parameter Setting.
3.3.3 Setting COM Port Parameters

When users click COM Port from the main category label and enters the setting page and two COM
port is setup for the model type, e.g. AHCPU5xx-RS2. The setting page will have two identical COM
port setting section but both are independent from each another.
3-62
For notes on connecting hosts through COM ports, please refer to section 2.4.8 for more
information.
 Select types of communication with options including RS232, RS485, or RS422.

 Select the Baud Rate for the communication speed. When choosing RS232, the baud rate
options include 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps and 115200 bps; while for RS485 or
RS422, the baud rate options include 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, 115200 bps,
230400 bps, 460800 bps, or 921600 bps.
 Setup other communication protocol parameters. When RTU is selected for Transfer Mode, the
Data Length is limited to choosing 8 bit.
 Setup COM Port station address for device identification during connection, while station
address on the same network is not allowed to be repeated, the setting range is 0 ~ 247.
When the port is referred to as a slave and there are other slaves connected, the port station
address cannot be set as 0 because it is defined as broadcast communication under the
communication protocol. However, when the Master assigns data transfer to Slave station
address 0, this means the data packets are transferred to all slave stations regardless of the
station address.
 When communication fails, the host will retry to connect. Users can setup the times of auto-retry
within the range of 0~20.
 Setup the time interval for auto-retry once communication fails. When PLC host retries to
connect due to communication failure, users need to setup the interval time to start the next
connection. The setting range is 100~65535 ms.
3.3.4 Setting Ethernet Parameters

Users need to select Ethernet - Basic from the main category label for parameter settings, e.g.
AHCPU5xx-RS2. The page provides parameter settings for Ethernet port. For information regarding
host connection through Ethernet, please refer to section 2.4.8. As for descriptions about the
Ethernet, please view other related documents or references.
3-63
 Setup the IP address mode. When choosing Static, this means users can directly assign the IP
address parameter; but when selecting DHCP or BOOTP, this means the IP address is
managed by the dynamic allocation of DHCP or BOOTP.
 When IP address mode is Static, users can setup the IP Address, Netmask Address, and
Gateway Address.
 When the host is not transmitting any data on the internet and already exceeds the Keep Alive
Timer, it will automatically disconnect.
If Dynamic is selected in the IP Addressing Mode drop-down list box, the IP address, the subnet
mask, and the gateway can be read from the CPU module by means of the following steps.
(1) Connect the CPU module to Ethernet, and make sure that the network and the CPU module
operate normally.
(2) Select Dynamic in the IP Addressing Mode drop-down list box, and download the parameter
to the CPU module.
(3) After Refresh is clicked, the system will read the IP address, the subnet mask, and the gateway
from the CPU module. The IP address, the subnet mask, and the gateway will be displayed in
the boxes.
For AH5x1 or AH560 redundant system series, users can use the DNS server to auto-retrieve the
DNS server address or adopt user-defined one or other server addresses.
3-64
3.3.5 Setting Advanced Ethernet Parameters

If a CPU module is equipped with an Ethernet port, users can enter this page. For example,
AHCPU5xx-EN is equipped with an Ethernet port. After users click the Ethernet─Advance tab at
the top of the window, they can set devices on a network.
3.3.5.1 Ethernet - Advance: Filter
After users click the Ethernet - Advance tab at the top of the window, and the Filter tab at the
bottom of the window, they can set a filter. Devices on a network are filtered. The setting here
ensures that objects communicating with the CPU module are devices which are allowed.
 Enable IP Address Filter

If the Enable IP Address Filter checkbox is selected, devices whose IP addresses are listed in
the table will be allowed to communicate with the CPU module, and the CPU module will discard
data packets sent from devices whose IP addresses are not listed in the table. The steps of
setting the function are as follows. Sixteen groups of IP address at most can be listed in the table.
(1) Select the Enable IP Address Filter checkbox, and then double-click an item which will be
modified or added in the table.
3-65
(2) Type a start IP address and an end address in the IP address Filter window. The start IP
address must be less than the end IP address. Finally, click OK.
 Enable Static ARP Table

Users can use this function to set MAC addresses and corresponding IP addresses. The MAC
address of every device is unique. If the MAC address of device A is known, the MAC address
can be bound to the IP address assigned to device A. The CPU module will regard the IP address
as the exclusive address of device A. Even if device B is assigned the same IP address, the CPU
module does not respond to device B. The steps of setting the function are as follows. Sixteen
groups of addresses at most can be listed in the table.
(1) Select the Enable Static ARP Table checkbox, and then double-click an item which will be
modified or added in the table.
(2) Type an IP address and a MAC address in the Static ARP Table window. Finally, click OK.
Take the tables below for example. After the setting in the tables is downloaded to the CPU
module, devices whose IP addresses are within the range between 192.168.1.1 and
192.168.1.50, and devices whose IP addresses are within the range between 192.168.1.100 and
192.168.1.150 are allowed to communicate with the CPU module if the CPU module operates.
Besides, if the CPU module communicates with a device whose IP address of 192.168.1.20, the
MAC address of the device must be BA:99:BA:14:BA:51. Likewise, if the CPU module
communicates with a device whose IP address is 192.168.1.21, the MAC address of the device
must be 00:10:5A:81:CA:FD.
3-66
*1. If users want to know the MAC address of a CPU module, they can click Online Mode in HWCONFIG to view the
information about the CPU module (section 3.8.6), or click System Information in ISPSoft to get the information
about the CPU module connected and the status of the CPU module (section 17.6.1).
3.3.5.2 Ethernet - Advance: NTP
After users click the Ethernet─Advance tab at the top of the window, and the NTP tab at the bottom
of the window, they can enable the function of synchronizing the real-time clock in the CPU module
to an NTP server, and carry out the related setting. NTP will not be introduced here. Please refer to
related documents or manuals for more information about NTP.
Select the Enable NTP Client Service checkbox, and then set the related parameters.
3-67
 Users can set the IP address of an NTP server. The CPU module corrects the time inside itself
by connecting to the server periodically.
 Users can set an interval of correcting the time in the CPU module. If the interval is thirty minutes,
the CPU module will connect to the NTP server every thirty minutes.
 After users select the Daylight Saving checkbox, they can select a start date and an end data.
 Users can select a time zone in the Time Zone drop-down list box.
3.3.5.3 Ethernet - Advance: Email
After users click the Ethernet - Advance tab at the top of the window, and the Email tab at the
bottom of the window, they can set the mail sending function.
After users select the Enable Email Sending Function checkbox, they can set the related
parameters.
 SMTP Server: Users can set the IP address of an SMTP server.

 Port: Users can set a port for an SMTP server, or select the Default (25) option button.
 Local Email Address: Users can set the address of an actual sender. A local email address is
composed of 64 characters at most.
 SMTP Subject: Data typed in the SMTP Subject box will be put at the front part of the subject of
every email. Only English letters, numerical digits, and special marks can be
typed in the box. The subject of an email is composed of 16 characters at most.
 Account Identification: If users want to authenticate themselves with a user name and a
password before logging in to an SMTP server, they can select the Yes
option button.
3-68
 Account Identification Info.: Users can type a user name and a password which are used for
authentication. A user name is composed of 16 characters at
most, and a password is also composed of 16 characters at most.
If the parameters above are set correctly, and the computer can
connect to an SMTP server normally, users can click
Identification to test whether the user name and the password
are correct.
3.3.5.4 Ethernet - Advance: Email Trigger
After users click the Ethernet - Advance tab at the top of the window, and the Email Trigger tab at
the bottom of the window, they can set triggers for the sending of emails. Before setting triggers,
users have to click the Email tab, and select the Enable Email Sending Function checkbox.
Please refer to section 3.3.5.3 for more information.
Triggers are listed in the Trigger Configuration table. Users can set eight triggers at most. If users
want to set or view a trigger, they can double-click the trigger in the table. The Trigger
Configuration window will appear.
(1) Type a trigger name and an interval of triggering the sending of an email in the Trigger Setting
section.
3-69
 Trigger Name
Users can type a trigger name in the Trigger Name box. Only English letters, numerical
digits, or special marks can be typed in the box. A trigger name is composed of 16
characters at most. If the sending of an email is due to this trigger, the trigger name will be
put in the subject of this email.
 Trigger Interval
Users can set an interval of triggering the sending an email. Ten minutes are taken as a unit.
If the condition of triggering the sending of an email is met, the system will send the email
every specific period of time, and the email will not be sent within the intervals.
(2) Select a condition of triggering the sending of an email in the Trigger Mode section.
 CPU Error
If an error occurs in the CPU module, the condition of triggering the sending of an email is
met. Please refer to operation manuals for more information about errors occurring in CPU
modules. After users select the CPU Error option button, they have to select Fatal Error
Only or All Errors in the drop-down list box at the right side of the option button.
(a) Fatal Error Only: If a fatal error occurs in the CPU module, the condition of triggering the
sending of an email is met.
(b) All Errors: If an error occurs, the condition of triggering the sending of an email is met.
 CPU (STOP<=>RUN)
When the CPU module begins to run, or when the CPU module stops running, the condition
of triggering the sending of an email is met.
 Periodic Timer
An email is sent periodically. How often an email is sent depends on the interval typed in the
Trigger Interval box in the Trigger Setting section.
 Bit Value Change

If the state of a bit device specified meets a condition set, the sending of an email will be
triggered. For example, if X0.0 is turned from OFF to ON, the condition of triggering the
sending of an email will be met. If users want to set a condition, they can double-click the
table under the option button to open the Trigger Mode window.
3-70
 Device: Users can select a device type in the Device drop-down list box.
 Number & Bit: Users can type a device address in the Number box. If the device type
selected is X/Y/D/L, the users have to specify a bit number.
 State: Users can select Rising or Falling in the State drop-down list box.
 Word Value Change
If the value in a device specified meets a condition set, the sending of an email will be
triggered. For example, if the value in D0 is larger than 10, the condition of triggering the
sending of an email will be met. If users want to set a condition, they can double-click the
table under the option button to open the Trigger Mode window.
 Device: Users can select a device type in the Device drop-down list box.
 Number: Users can type a device address in the Number box.
 State & Value: Users can set s condition of triggering the sending of an email here.
(3) Select the User Message box or the Error Log box in the Email Content section. If a
user-define message is the text of an email, the User Message box is selected. If an error log
in the CPU module is the text of an email, the Error Log box is selected. Only English letters,
numerical digits, and special marks can be typed in the box under the User Message box.
(4) Select the None option button, the File option button, or the PLC Device option button in the
Attachment section. If users want to set an attachment, they have to make sure of the
maximum size of an email which the CPU module allows. Please refer to operation manuals
3-71
 None
If this option button is selected, no attachment will be inserted.
 File
Users can select an error log in the memory card, or the system backup file in the memory
card as the attachment of the email.
 PLC Device
If this option button is selected, the system automatically retrieves the states of the devices,
or the values in the devices listed in the table as the attachment when the email is sent. After
this option button is selected, users can double-click the table to open the Attachment
window. Two groups of devices at most can be set. For example, if the condition is met, the
values in D0~D9 will be sent as an attachment.
(5) After all the setting is complete, users can click OK to create the trigger.
3.3.5.5 Ethernet - Advance: Email and Trigger Configuration
After users click the Ethernet─Advance tab at the top of the window, and the Email and Trigger
Configuration tab at the bottom of the window, they can set the relation between triggers for the
sending of emails and receivers. Before setting the function here, the users have to click the Email
tab, select the Enable Email Sending Function checkbox, click the Email Trigger tab, and set at
least one trigger. Please refer to section 3.3.5.3 and section 3.3.5.4 for more information.
3-72
First, type the email addresses of receivers in the Email Address column. Eight email addresses at
most can be set for the CPU module, and every email address is composed of sixty-four characters
at most. Then, select triggers corresponding to receivers. If email addresses or triggers are not set,
the corresponding selection positions are gray.
For example, if the condition represented by trigger 1 or the condition represented by trigger 4 is met,
the system will automatically send the emails to user_1@delta.com.tw. If the condition represented
by trigger 2 or the condition represented by trigger 5 is met, the system will automatically send the
email to user_2@delta.com.tw. If the condition represented by trigger 1 is met, the system will
automatically send the email to user_1@delta.com.tw, and user_4@delta.com.tw.
3.3.5.6 Ethernet - Advance: Socket
After users click the Ethernet - Advance tab at the top of the window, and the Socket tab at the
bottom of the window, they can set the parameters for sockets through which data is transmitted.
This function has to be used with specific applied instructions. Please refer to AH500 Programming
Manual for more information.
Sockets will not be introduced here. Please refer to related documents or manuals for more
information about sockets.
3-73
An AH500 system supports the transmission of data between the CPU module and other CPU
modules or devices by means of the creation of sockets, and supports TCP and UDP. Users can set
eight TCP connections and eight UDP connections. If users want to set a TCP connection, they
have to select the Enable Socket Function checkbox, and double-click an item in the TCP Socket
Connection table to open the TCP Socket Configuration window. If the users want to set a UDP
connection, they have to select the Enable Socket Function checkbox, and double-click an item in
the UDP Socket Connection table to open the UD Socket Configuration window.
The parameters in the TCP Socket Configuration window are the same as the parameters in the
UDP Socket Configuration window except that there is no Keep Alive Timer parameter in the
UDP Socket Configuration window. The parameters in the TCP Socket Configuration window are
described below.
3-74
 Users can set a remote IP address.

 Users can set a communication port used by the remote device for this TCP connection. The
port number must be within the range between 0 and 65535.
 Users can set a communication port used by the local CPU module for this connection. The port
number must be within the range between 0 and 65535.
 Users can set the length of data which will be sent by the local CPU module. The length must be
within the range between 0 words and 500 words.
 Uses can set an initial device in the CPU module where data which will be sent is stored.
 Users can set the length of data which will be received by the local CPU module. The length
must be within the range between 0 words and 500 words.
 Uses can set an initial device in the CPU module where data which will be received is stored.
 Users can set a maximum keep alive time for the connection. If no data is transmitted, and the
keep alive period has elapsed, the CPU module will terminate the connection automatically.
The port number used by the local CPU module and the port number used by the remote device can
not be the same, and the devices where data which will be sent is stored cannot overlap the devices
where data which will be received is stored. If the IP address of the remote device is 192.168.1.100,
the port number used by the remote device is 65500, and the port number used by the local CPU
module is 65501, the remote device and the local CPU module can transmit data through this TCP
connection.
If the local CPU module wants to send 10-word data to the remote device, the data will be stored in
D0~D9 before the data is sent. If the local CPU module receives 20-word data from the remote
device, the data will be stored in D100~D119.
If the length of data received is larger than the length set, the first 20-word data will be stored in
D100~D119, and the data after the first 20-word data will be discarded. Likewise, if the length of
data received is less than the length set, the data will be stored in the devices starting from D100,
and the values in devices where no new data is stored will be retained.
If no data is transmitted, and 60 seconds have elapsed, the CPU module will close the socket, and
terminate the connection.
3.3.5.7 Ethernet - Advance: Web
After users click the Ethernet - Advance tab at the top of the window, and the Web tab at the
bottom of the window, they can enable the built-in web monitoring function of the CPU module.
3-75
Select the Enable Web Function checkbox, and the select a language which will be adopted in the
drop-down list box. After the parameter is downloaded to the CPU module correctly, users can view
the built-in web pages in the CPU module by means of a web browser.
*. Please refer to operation manuals for more information about the web monitoring function.
3.3.5.8 Ethernet - Advance: Data Exchange
The CPU module of AH5x0-EN series contains the data exchange function based on MODBUS
TCP. The built-in function is enabled by clicking the Ethernet - Advance tab at the top of the
window, and the Data Exchange tab at the bottom of the window as below.
3-76
If users open this page of the PLC Parameter Setting window for the first time, the table is blank due
to no data set. A new row of data can be inserted by clicking Add. Double-click the data so that the
data setting window is opened.
 Set the starting mode to Program Control; PLC decides whether the set data exchange is
performed. PLC Run means that the set data exchange will be performed automatically when
PLC is in RUN state. Always Enable means that the data exchange will be performed
constantly when PLC is powered on.
 A new data exchange table will be added in area  by clicking Add. The present data
exchange table selected will be moved up or down by clicking Move Up and Move Down. The
present data exchange table selected will be deleted by clicking Delete. The present data
exchange table selected will be copied by clicking Copy and then can be pasted to the last row.
 The data exchange table is listed and explained as below.
3-77
Name Description
Item The number of the block for data exchange
To select whether to enable the data exchange table when the data
Enable
exchange is performed.
Remote
Station The target slave station address of the data exchange table
Address
IP The target IP address of the data exchange table. One IP address can be
Address set for multiple data exchange tables.
Local
The device address range used by the master in the data exchange table
Address
「<<」: Input; the data block where the master read a slave
<< / >>
「>>」: Output; the data block where the master write to a slave
The device address range used by a slave in the data exchange table
Remote
The device range will be in hexadecimal display, if the slave in the data
Address
exchange table is a user-defined MODBUS Device.
The size of the data exchange table, which is basically consistent with the
Quantity
result calculated from the device range.
Double click a data exchange table to be set so as to open the Item window as below. Select the
checkbox of Enable to enable the data exchange table in the mode mentioned above. Remote
Address is the address of the target slave for data exchange. The Shortest Update Cycle is the
period for data exchange of the data exchange table. If the target device does not make any
response within the time specified by Connection Timeout, that is timeout. The master can
complete the read and write in a command to improve the efficiency of data exchange by selecting
Support Read/write synchronization (Function code 0x17) in which the specific MODBUS
function code is used. Please make sure that all devices in data exchange support MODBUS
function code for read and write synchronization. Otherwise, the read and write will fail on account of
the failure to identify the function codes after the command from the master is received. Device
Type is the model of a slave including Delta PLC and standard MODBUS devices.
3-78
 Input
AH5x0-EN series read data from a remote device.
Local Start Address: The start address of D data registers where AH5x0-EN series store data
Remote Start Address: Device type and start address of the remote device to be read
Quantity: Data length of input
 Output
AH5x0-EN series write data to a remote device.
Local Start Address: The start address of D device type of the source data of AH5x0-EN series
Remote Start Address: Device type and start address of the remote device to be written
Quantity: Data length of output
While the data exchange setup for AH5x0-EN series is conducted, the local device can only be the
data register D with Word as the unit. And remote address can take Bit as the unit which may not
start from 0, such as D0.3 as a remote start address. If the set data size is not a multiple of Word,
the local devices will still make the data exchange via corresponding bits and the bits which are not
in data exchange will keep original state. For example, if the data in remote M0~M19 is read to local
data register D0~D1, the data will be stored in D0.0~D1.3 in order and D1.4~D1.15 will keep their
original states.
3.3.6 Data Exchange Setup - COM & Ethernet

For AH5x1 and AH560 redundant system series, there are additional tabs for data exchange setup
in PLC Parameter Setting window, such as two COM ports or one COM port and one Ethernet port
according to different models. The parameters are set on the tabs of Data Exchange Setup-COM1
and Data Exchange Setup-COM2, or Data Exchange Setup-COM and Data Exchange
Setup-Ethernet for making the data exchange table of the communication port built in AH5x1 series.
AH5x1 and AH560 redundant system series working as the master exchanges data with the remote
devices working as slaves via COM1 and COM2 based on MODBUS protocol or via Ethernet port
based MODBUS TCP protocol.
3-79
 Set the starting mode to Program Control; PLC decides whether the set data exchange is
performed. PLC Run means that the set data exchange will be performed automatically when
PLC is in RUN state. Always Enable means that the data exchange will be performed
constantly when PLC is powered on.
 The data exchange table is listed and explained as below.
Name Description
Enable
Remote The slave station address of the data exchange table, One address can be
Station set for multiple data exchange tables. It is a station address for COM1 and
Address COM2 tabs and IP address for Ethernet tab.
Local Address The device address range used by the master in the data exchange table
<< / >>
Remote
Address
Quantity
3-80
3.3.6.1 Data Exchange Setup - COM1/COM2 /COM
On the page of tab Data Exchange Setup - COM1, Data Exchange Setup - COM2, or Data
Exchange Setup - COM, double click a data exchange table which is to be set to open Item window
as below. Select the checkbox of Enable to enable the data exchange table in the mode mentioned
above. Remote Address is the address of the target slave for data exchange. The Shortest
Update Cycle is the period for data exchange of the data exchange table. If the target device does
not make any response within the time specified by Connection Timeout, that is timeout. The
master can complete the read and write in a command to improve the efficiency of data exchange
by selecting Support Read/write synchronization (Function code 0x17) in which the specific
MODBUS function code is used. Please make sure that all devices in data exchange support
MODBUS function code for read and write synchronization. Otherwise, the read and write will fail on
account of the failure to identify the function codes after the command from the master is received.
Remote Device Type is the model of the target slave including Delta PLC and standard MODBUS
devices.
 Input
AH5x1-EN series read data from a remote device.
Local Start Address: Device type and start address of devices where AH5x1-EN series store data;
Remote Start Address: Device type and start address of the remote device to be read;
 Output
AH5x1-EN series write data to a remote device.
Local Start Address: Device type and start address of the source data of AH5x1-EN series;
Remote Start Address: Device type and start address of the remote device where data are to be
written;
3-81
3.3.6.2 Data Exchange Setup - Ethernet
On the page of tab Data Exchange Setup - Ethernet, double click the data exchange table to be
set so as to open the Item window as below. The settings are almost same as that for Data
Exchange Setup - COM except the target slave model option in Device Type which contains Delta
PLC and standard MODBUS TCP equipment as well as IP address for typing the IP of remote
slaves. For other settings, refer to the content of Data Exchange Setup - COM.
Select the check box of Apply to all to the right side of The Shortest Update Cycle and
Connection Timeout and then click OK. The settings for The Shortest Update Cycle and
Connection Timeout will be written to other data tables on the tab Data Exchange Setup -
Ethernet. Users could set a data exchange table separately without selecting the check box of
Apply to all.
3.4 Parameter Settings for AHxxEMC Series PLC

3.4.1 Open the PLC Host Parameter Setting Page
Double click the CPU icon on the system configuration area after HWCONFIG is started and the
PLC Parameter Setting window will be opened automatically. The parameters to be set and
window display may look different for different CPU models.
Please refer to the operation manual for the CPU module before the parameters in a CPU
module are set and learn about the impact of the set parameters on the CPU module and
the entire system so as to prevent from the system and personnel damages.
3-82
*. Download the parameter settings to the host. For ways to download, please refer to section 3.8.4.
Description
of the device
The parameters are classified into several types. The users can click the primary tabs at the top of
the window. Users should switch to different setting pages according to main types of parameters
and their secondary tables. Parameter name, Value, Unit, Default, Minimum and Maximum are
listed in the title bar in the right of the window.
3-83
3.4.2 Options
3.4.2.1 Options - System Information
Device Info, System Parameter, Latched Device Range and IO Interrupt under Device Setting,
click the Options tab to see these options.
There are Name box where maximum 31 characters can be input and Comment box where
maximum 63 characters can be input on the Device Setting page. There is no special restriction on
the input characters; special marks and spaces are allowed to use here. However, the users have to
note that one Chinese character occupies two characters.
When adding an ISPSoft project, the system will use the project name as the host name by default
and appear next to the model name in Project section to be re-defined.
3-84
Users can identify a device by means of the name of the device. When several devices are
connected to one network, users can check whether a device connected to the computer is the
device they expect by checking the device name. To prevent errors, when users are downloading or
uploading data or operating online, the system will check whether the label name of the host and the
label name in the Project section is the same or not, when the name of the CPU module is different
from the name attached to the model in the project management area.
The following image is the System Parameter setting page that provides drop-down lists to choose
or box to input appropriate parameter values.
 Clear Non-latched Device (STOP --> RUN)

If the Clear Non-latched Devices checkbox is selected, the states of the non-latched devices and
the values in the non-latched devices will be cleared when the CPU module begins to run.
 Y state (STOPRUN)
When the CPU module begins to run, the states of the Y devices are OFF, retained, or restored to
the states before the CPU module’s stopping running.
 Clear: Set all Y device output to OFF.
 Retain Present State: Output retain to present state.
 Previous State before STOP: Restore Y device output to previous state before STOP.
3-85
 Error Log Storage Location

Users set the place where the error log is stored.
 PLC：If the PLC option button is selected, twenty error logs at most can be stored in an AHxxEMC
series CPU module. If there are more than twenty error logs, the oldest error log will be overwritten
by the latest error log.
 PLC and PLC CARD：If the PLC and PLC CARD option button is selected, and there are more
than twenty error logs, the oldest error log will be moved to the memory card before the overwritten.
 CPU Operation during an occurrence of a Program Error

If an error occurs in the program, the status of the CPU may change.
 Stop: CPU switches to the Stop state.
 Continue: CPU retains the state before any error occurs.
 CPU Operation during an occurrence of a Bus Fault

If an error occurs on the bus, the status of the CPU may change.
 Stop: CPU switches to the Stop state.
 Continue: CPU retains the state before any error occurs.
 Remote Reset Enable

The function is for setting whether to allow the remote system to reset the CPU. After users select
the function and download the parameter to the CPU module, they can click Format PLC
Memory… on the PLC menu, and select the Reset PLC Memory (Factory Setting) option button
in the Format PLC Memory window in ISPSoft.
 Useless: The function is not used.
 Use: The function is used.
 Constant Communication Response Enable

If this function is not enabled, commands received through the communication ports will not be
processed until the scan cycle is complete. If this function is enabled, commands received through
the communication ports will be processed every specific period of time. However, the scan
procedure is interrupted when the system processes commands received through the
communication ports. As a result, the scan time will be prolonged if this function is enabled. Please
make sure that the operation of the system is not affected when this function is used.
 Watchdog Timeout
Users can set a timeout during which the program is scanned. If the scan procedure cannot be
completed within the time set for some reason, the watchdog timeout occurs, and the CPU module
will be in an erroneous condition.
 Constant Scan Enable

Users can select the Constant Scan Enable checkbox, and set a scan time. If the actual scan time
is less than the setting value, the CPU module will not carry out the next scan until the setting value
is reached. If the actual scan time is larger than the setting value, the CPU module will ignore the
3-86
setting value, and operate according to the actual scan time.
 Scan Time
Users type the period of scan time in the box if the preceding constant scan is enabled. User should
notice that the timeout error will occur once the CPU starts to run if the set scan time is larger than
Watchdog Timeout value.
 Interval Interrupt Time 0

Users can set interval timers to trigger the interrupts. The function is used with Timer Interrupt 0 in
the work management together. Please refer to chapter 5 for more information.


 High-speed Scan
Users set a range of latched devices on tab Latched Device Range.
Click button to open the setting window where users can set the start and end addresses of the
device. If users need to use the function of non-latched area, users need to set up the start and end
addresses of the device in the range of zero and the maximum. After the users click Default, the
setting will be restored to the default values. After the users click Clear, the value in the box will be
cleared to -1 and the function of the non-latched area will be disabled. Exit from the window by
clicking OK to save the settings and Cancel to give up the settings.
3-87
Tab IO Interrupt is for users to select X input points and enable the IO interrupt input function.
X0.8~X0.15 will match IO interrupt 1~ IO interrupt 8 separately. Please refer to chapter 5 for more
information.
Tab IO Input Filter is for users to setup IO input filter to reject unwanted signals.
 X Input Single Filter Time

Users can set up the response time for pulse input, the setting range is 0~1000, unit is ms. Any
3-88
response time below the set-up value will be filtered.
 X Input Single Hardware Frequency Filter Time

Users can set up the value to be lower than the time of X input Duty On, the setting range is
1~50000000, unit is 0.1us. Base on the time (t) and frequency filter equation (f) * =
(Hz), if the frequency input signal is higher than the (f) * value, the input signal will be
filtered. (For more information on the time of X input Duty On, please refer to AH Motion
Controller operation manual.)
*. About IO Input Filter, please refer to AH Motion Controller operation manual for more information.
3.4.2.2 Option - COM Port Setting
AHxxEMC is equipped with 2 COM ports. Users could set COM1 and COM2 parameters individually
by clicking COM Port 1 Setting or COM Port 2 Setting under COM Port Setting. COM1 is for
uploading and downloading; COM2 is for Data Exchange.
The setting items are same for the two COM ports.
 Set the communication protocol of the COM port.

 Users can set a station address at the communication port. A device on a network can be
identified by means of the station address of the device. The station address of a device on a
network cannot be the same as the station address of another device on the same network.
If the communication port functions as a slave, and there are other slaves, the station address of
the communication port cannot be 0. Station address 0 has the meaning of broadcasting to all
slaves in a communication protocol. If a master specifies in a data packet that data must be sent
to station address 0, the data will be sent to all slaves. No matter what station addresses of these
slaves are, these slaves will receive the data packet.
 If the sending of a command fails, the CPU module will retry the sending of the command. Users
can set the number of times for sending a command in the box of Times of Auto-retry and set
the time interval to retry the sending of a command in the box of Time Interval of Auto-retry
when the communication fails. PLC module will make a next connection with the network every
the set interval time when the communication fails.
3.4.2.3 Option- Ethernet Setting
The users can set the communication parameters for the Ethernet port in the CPU module in this
page. They can refer to section 2.4.7 for more information about connecting to a CPU module
through the Ethernet port on the CPU module, and refer to other related documents or manuals for
3-89
more information about Ethernet.
Users can set an IP addressing mode for the CPU module. If users select Static in the IP
Addressing Mode drop-down list box, they can specify an IP address. If Dynamic is selected in the
IP Addressing Mode drop-down list box, an IP address is assigned dynamically.
3.4.2.4 Option- Ethernet Setting (advanced)
On the Ethernet Port Advance Setting window, users can set the parameters for sockets through
which data is transmitted. In the Socket table, users can set COM port parameters for data
transmission via Ethernet. However, the function should be applied with specific API instructions.
Please refer to AHxxEMC Series Instrunction Manuals for more information. Sockets will not be
introduced here. Please refer to related documents or manuals for more information about sockets.
The system for AHXXEMC series modules supports the data transmission between the CPU
module and other CPU module or device via a socket as well as TCP and UDP protocols in each of
which 8 groups of connections can be set. Users should select Socket Function Enable checkbox
before any setup and then do other setting in TCP and UDP setting pages respectively.
The parameters in the TCP Socket Setting are the same as the parameters in the UDP Socket
Setting except that there is no Keep Alive Timer parameter in the UDP Socket Setting. The
parameters in the TCP and UDP Socket Setting are described below.
3-90
 Remote IP: Users can set a remote IP address.

 Remote Port: Users can set a communication port used by the remote device for this TCP
connection. The port number must be within the range between 0 and 65535.
 Local Port: Users can set a communication port used by the local CPU module for this
 Send Address: Users can set the length of data which will be sent by the local CPU module.
 Send Length: Uses can set an initial device in the CPU module where data which will be sent is
stored. The length must be within the range between 0 and 1000 bytes.
 Receive Address: Users can set the length of data which will be received by the local CPU
module.
 Receive Length: Uses can set an initial device in the CPU module where data which will be
received is stored. The length must be within the range between 0 and 1000 bytes.
 Keep Alive Timer: Users can set a maximum keep alive time for the connection. If no data is
transmitted, and the keep alive period has elapsed, the CPU module will terminate the
connection automatically.
The port number used by the local CPU module and the port number used by the remote device
cannot be the same, and the devices where data which will be sent is stored cannot overlap the
devices where data which will be received is stored. If the IP address of the remote device is
192.168.1.100, the port number used by the remote device is 65500, and the port number used by
the local CPU module is 65501, the remote device and the local CPU module can transmit data
through this TCP connection.
and the values in devices where no new data is stored will be retained. If no data is transmitted, and
30 seconds have elapsed, the CPU module will close the socket, and terminate the TCP connection.
3.4.3 Data Exchange - COM2 &Ethernet

After users click the tab Data Exchange - COM and Data Exchange – Ethernet, the parameters for
making the data exchange table of the communication port built in AHxxEMC series can be set.
AHxxEMC series as a master exchanges data with remote devices working as slaves via COM2
based on MODBUS protocol or via Ethernet port based on MODBUS TCP protocol.
3-91
 As one start mode, Program Control decides whether the set data exchange is performed.
PLC Run means that the set data exchange will be performed automatically when PLC is in
RUN state. Always Enable means that the data exchange will be performed constantly when
PLC is powered on.
 The data exchange table is explained as below.
Name Description
Enable
Remote The slave station address of the data exchange table, One address can be
Station set for multiple data exchange tables. It is a station address for COM2 tab
Address and IP for Ethernet tab.
Local Address The device address range used by the master in the data exchange table
<< / >>
Remote
Address
Quantity
3.4.3.1 Data Exchange - COM2
On the page of tab Data Exchange - COM2, double click a data exchange table which is to be set to
3-92
open Item window as below. Select the checkbox of Enable to enable the data exchange table in
the mode mentioned above. Remote Address is the address of the target slave for data exchange.
The Shortest Update Cycle is the period for data exchange of the data exchange table. If the target
device does not make any response within the time specified by Connection Timeout, that is
timeout. The master can complete the read and write in a command to improve the efficiency of data
exchange by selecting Support Read/write synchronization (Function code 0x17) in which the
specific MODBUS function code is used. Please make sure that all devices in data exchange
support MODBUS function code for read and write synchronization. Otherwise, the read and write
will fail on account of the failure to identify the function codes after the command from the master is
received. Device Type is the model of the target slave including Delta PLC and standard MODBUS
devices.
 Read
AHxxEMC series read data from a remote device.
Local Start Address: Device type and start address of devices where AHxxEMC series store data;
 Write
AHxxEMC series write data to a remote device.
Local Start Address: Device type and start address of the source data of AHxxEMC series;
written;
3.4.3.2 Data Exchange - Ethernet
On the page of tab Data Exchange - Ethernet, double click the data exchange table to be set so as
to open the Item window as below. The settings are almost same as that for Data Exchange -
3-93
COM2 except the target slave model option in Device Type which contains Delta PLC and standard
MODBUS TCP equipment as well as IP address for typing the IP of remote slaves. For other
settings, refer to the content of Data Exchange - COM2.
Select the check box of Apply to all to the right side of The Shortest Update Cycle and
Connection Timeout will be written to other data tables on the tab Data Exchange- Ethernet. Users
could set data exchange tables separately without selecting the check box of Apply to all.
3.5 Parameter Settings for AS Series PLC

3.5.1 Open PLC Host Parameter Setting Page
After users double-click the CPU module in the system configuration area, the PLC Parameter
Setting window will appear. The parameters which can be set vary with the models or hardware of
the CPU modules. For more information on the hardware and operations of the CPU modules,
please refer to the manuals and catalogues of the PLC series.
Before the parameters in a CPU module are set, users have to refer to the operation
manual for the CPU module. To prevent damage to the system or staff, the users have to
make sure of the effect that the parameters which are set have on the CPU module and the
whole system.
*. Theparameter settings are not effective until they are downloaded to the CPU module. Refer to
section 3.8.4 for the download method.
3-94
Device
Information
The parameters are classified into several tabs on the setting page. The users can click the primary
tabs at the top of the window. Users should switch to different setting pages according to main types
of parameters and their secondary tables.
3-95
3.5.2 Options
3.5.2.1 Options - System Settings
System Information, System Parameter, Latched Device Range, Input Point Filter Time,
Limited Point Setting and Daylight Saving Timing under System Settings appear after users
click the Options tab.
There are only PLC Name box where maximum 15 characters can be input and Comment box
where maximum 31 characters can be input on System Information page. There is no special
restriction on the input characters; special marks and spaces are all allowed to use here. However,
the users have to note that a Chinese character occupies two characters.
After an ISPSoft project is created, the project name will be taken as the default name of the CPU
module, and the default name of the CPU module will be attached to the model in the project
management area. Users can change the default name of the CPU module in the Name box later.
3-96
device they expect by checking the device name. To prevent errors, if users want to
download/upload the program, the system will remind the users to check the name of the CPU
module and the name attached to the model in the project management area, when the name of the
CPU module is different from the name attached to the model in the project management area.
The parameters on System Parameter table are shown in the following window. Users could set
appropriate values via a drop-down option list or type the values in the box.
 Clear non-latched area when STOP --> RUN

If the state of the CPU module changes from Stop to Run, the states of the non-latched devices and
the values in the non-latched devices are cleared.
 Enable: The current states and values of devices are retained.
3-97
 Disable: The states and values of devices are cleared to default value.
 Y output point keep when (RUN <-> STOP)

The state of Y device is set when the state of CPU is switched between RUN and STOP.
 Off：All Y devices are set to OFF.
 Retain Present State: The states of the Y devices are retained.
 I/O module CONFIG by Auto/Manual when Power On

The actual I/O module configuration is read automatically when the CPU module is powered ON.
Or the CPU module operates based on the configuration set manually by users in HWCONFIG.
 Auto: Operates based on actual connected modules without any module and parameters set.
 Manual: Operates based on the configuration set in HWCONFIG by users.
 Select Action when I/O Module parameter with Manual CONFIG Different
The parameter cannot be set unless the Manual option is selected in the above parameter I/O
module CONFIG by Auto/Manual when Power On.
 Auto update: The CPU module will update its configurations based on the actual module
configurations.
 CPU alarm: The CPU module shows a warning when an error occurs.
 CPU module Stop when I/O Module No Response

The parameter sets whether the CPU and other normal modules can operate constantly when there
is a expansion module, which does not response when offline.
 Stop: The CPU module stops running and gives errors.
 Keep Run: The CPU module and other normal modules keep running.
 CPU module Stop when I/O Module Occurred Error

The parameter sets the method to deal with a tiny error in the expansion modules.
 Stop: The CPU stops running and sends an error.
 Keep Run: The CPU keeps running but records the warning message.
 Setting delay time to detect I/O Module

The parameter sets how long after the CPU is powered on, the I/O module and remote I/O module
begin to be scanned.
 Assign X Input Point Control Run/Stop

The parameter sets whether one X input point controls the RUN or STOP state of the CPU.
 Disable: The function is closed. The state of the CPU can be changed with its DIP switch.
 Enable: Use the specified X input point to control and the DIP switch of the CPU can also be
used.
 Select X Input Point

Select one X input point on the drop-down list to switch Run/Stop if the above parameter Assign X
Input Point Control Run/Stop is enabled.
 Constant Scan Cycle Time

The parameter sets the shortest constant time to complete a cycle of scan.
 Disable: The function is closed.
 Enable: The CPU starts the next scan after the waiting time reaches the setting value if the actual
3-98
scan time is less than the setting value. However, the CPU will operate based on actual scan time
disregarding the setting value if the actual scan time is greater than the setting value.
 Input Constant Time

Type the cycle time value in the parameter box if the parameter Constant Scan Cycle Time is
enabled. Please note if the setting value of scan time is greater than the setting value of Setting
Watchdog Time, there will be a timeout error once the CPU operates.
 Setting Watchdog Time

The parameter sets a timeout during which the program is scanned. The CPU module will send an
error if the program execution exceeds the time.
 Show Battery Low Voltage Error

The parameter sets whether the alarm is shown when the lithium battery for the real-time clock is of
low voltage or is not installed in AS series.
 Enable: There is an alarm when the lithium battery is of low voltage or not installed.
 Save Error history into

The parameter sets the location to store error logs.
 PLC: The error logs are stored in PLC. Twenty error logs at most can be stored. If there are more
than twenty error logs, the oldest error log will be overwritten by the latest error log.
 PLC & SD Card: The error logs are stored in PLC and SD card. There are more than twenty error
logs, the oldest error log will be moved to the SD card before the oldest error log is overwritten.。
 COM Communication Error Record

The parameter sets whether to enable the error record when there is an error at COM port.
 Enable: The error record function is enabled.
 Select Action When 24Vdc Input Unstable

What to do when the 24Vdc power is unstable
 Continue Running when power stable: waits till the power is stable and then PLC begins to run.
 Into Error Status: Stops and go to the error mode。
3-99
 Communication Module Refreshed Priority

 Scan time first: only refresh the data that is different from the original ones to save scan time
 Synchronous Data first: scan and refresh all the data to ensure all data are synchronized.
 1601 Timer interrupt Setting Time Base

Users can set the interval of triggering 1601 timer interrupt. The function is used with Timer Interrupt
0 in the work management together. Please refer to chapter 5 for more information.



3-100
The parameters on Device Range Setting table are shown in the following window.
Set the start address and end address of this kind of devices by clicking button. Click Default
button to restore to the default value. Click Clear button to clear the box content to 0. Finally, click
OK to save the settings or Cancel to give up the setting and leave the dialogue box.
The filter time of every input point is set on the Input Point Filter Time table. The signal will be
filtered as a noise if the period of time during which an input point receives a signal less than the
filter time. And users could set an appropriate filter time according to the interference state of the
field environment.
3-101
 X Input Point Setting Mode

The parameter sets whether to set the filter time of input points or to use default settings.
 Default Setting: Filter time is set to default value.
 Custom Setting: Users set the filter time of every X input point themselves.
 X0.0~X0.15 Input Filter Time Setting

Users could type the respective filter time of X0.0~X0.15 if Custom Setting is selected as X
Input Point Setting Mode.
The parameters on Position Control Parameter table set to specify input points as the positive and
negative limits of axis 1~ axis 6 channels. 12 limit points can be set at most. Axis No. 1~6 can also
be set as Z phase triggers, home function finish points and clear output selects or positive/negative
limited position.
 Axis1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) Positive/negative Limited Select~ Axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) Positive/negative

Limited Select.
Select the rising or falling edge trigger and X input point on the drop-down list.
 Axis1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) Z Phase Trigger ~ Axis6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) Z Phase Trigger
3-102
 Axis1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) Home Function Finish and Clear Output Select ~ Axis6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) Home
Function Finish and Clear Output Select
 Axis1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) Positive/negative Limited Position ~ Axis6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) Positive/negative
Limited Position
Set up the number of pulses as the positive or negative limited position in axis 1~6; setting
range is -2147483647～2147483647.
The parameters on Daylight Saving Timing table are used to enable or disable the function of
daylight saving time and set the date when the daylight saving is conducted. The clock will
automatically set the daylight saving time in advance based on the period of time set after the
function is enabled.
 Disable/Enable D.S.T Function

The parameter sets to enable or disable daylight saving time.
 Start date- month

The parameter sets the month from which the daylight saving time starts.
 Start date- day

The parameter sets the date on which the daylight saving time starts.
 End date- month

The parameter sets the month in which the daylight saving time ends.
 End date- day

The parameter sets the date on which the daylight saving time ends.
 Saving time
The parameter is used to adjust to the earlier daylight saving time with the unit of minute.
3.5.2.2 Options - COM1 Port Setting & COM2 Port Setting
AS series modules are equipped with one or two COM ports based on different models. COM1 and
3-103
COM2 parameters are set by clicking COM1 Port Setting and COM2 Port Setting in the list on the
left-side of the following window. And the specific setting items are same for the two COM ports.
 Users can set a station address. A device on a network can be identified by means of the station
address of the device. The station address of a device on a network can not be the same as the
station address of another device on the same network. If the communication port functions as a
slave, and there are other slaves, the station address of the communication port cannot be 0.
Station address 0 has the meaning of broadcasting to all slaves in a communication protocol. If
a master specifies in a data packet that data must be sent to station address 0, the data will be
sent to all slaves. No matter what station address of these slaves are, these slaves will receive
the data packet.
 Users can set the timing of getting effective for the communication port. The communication port
will take effect when the CPU module changes from STOP to RUN if users select Stop --> Run.
The communication port will take effect when the CPU module is powered on if users select
Power on.
 Users set the baud rate for the COM port. Users can select one of the preset baud rates on the
drop-down menu or select custom to type a custom baud rate.
 Users set the communication protocol for the COM port.
 Users set a value for Delay time to Reply. The AS CPU module waits for a period of time set
and then gives a reply after receiving a communication command so as to match the time when
the remote device switches the mode. Users set a value for Received Data Timeout. The AS
CPU module sends a communication command as a master. But it cannot receive a reply within
a period of time set and that will be regarded as a timeout.
 Setting COM1 to show for: when COM1 is selected from the drop-down list, it will show the
RS485 communication status of the COM1; when Card1 is selected from the drop-down list, it
will show the Card1 communication status.
Setting COM2 to show for: when COM2 is selected from the drop-down list, it will show the
RS485 communication status of the COM2; when Card2 is selected from the drop-down list, it
will show the Card2 communication status.
3.5.2.3 Options - Ethernet Port Basic Setting
Users can enter this page by clicking Ethernet Port Basic Setting in the project list of the window.
The communication parameters can be set for the Ethernet port in the CPU module in this page.
Refer to section 2.4.8 for more information about connecting to a CPU module through the Ethernet
port on the CPU module, and refer to other related documents or manuals for more information
3-104
about Ethernet.
Mode sets the addressing mode of the IP of the CPU module.

If users select Static, they can specify an IP address directly. If DHCP or BOOTP is selected, the IP
address is assigned dynamically by a DHCP/BOOTP server.
3.5.2.4 Ethernet Port Advance Setting
Users can set the parameters of Ethernet Port Advance Setting under Options including IP Filter,
NTP, Email, Sock1 and RTU Mapping.
IP Filter sets the filter function of network devices. It is another acknowledgement mechanism to
ensure the communication object is a device which is allowed by us. The function can limit the
communication object. Only the devices in the IP address list are allowed to communicate with the
CPU module after the IP filter function is enabled. The data packets sent from devices of other IP
addresses will be discarded by the CPU module. The setting steps are shown below. Eighteen
groups of IP address at most can be listed in the table.
3-105
Select IP Filter Function Enable checkbox to enable the IP filter function and type the start address
and end address of group 1~8 IP. Users can use NTP table to enable the CPU module and adjust
time via NTP server. Relevant parameters are set here. For more information on NTP, refer to
related literature and manuals.
 Select NTP Client Function Enable checkbox to enable the function.

 Set the address of NTP server and cycle of constant update. Take the figure above as an
example. The CPU module connects to the NTP server every 30 minutes.
 Set up the time zone for the daylight saving time area.
Email table is for users to set the email-related functions. The email will be sent to the set email
address after the email function is enabled. Total four groups of email sending conditions and four
groups of email addresses can be set.
 Select Email Function Enable to enable the function and then start setting the following
parameters.
 Set an IP address of SMTP server. Set the COM port of SMTP server at the COM port and set
the sender’s email box at local email address. Type a mail subject as the start of the subject
3-106
of every email.
 Select Account identification checkbox to enable the function. Users can set to authenticate
themselves with a user name and a password before logging in to an SMTP server.
 Type the target email address of a receiver.
Type a trigger name in Trigger Name box and a minimum interval in Trigger Min Cycle in the
Trigger Setting table. And then select a trigger condition on the drop-down list. When the sending
condition is met, the system will send an email every a period of time. But the same email will not be
sent again within the set interval.
Trigger modes can be set as follows.

 CPU Error
If an error occurs in the CPU module, the condition of triggering the sending of an email is met.
Please refer to operation manuals for more information about errors occurring in CPU modules.
After users select the CPU Error option button, they have to select Fatal Error Only or All Errors in
the drop-down list at the right side of the option button.
a) Fatal Error Only: If a fatal error occurs in the CPU module, the condition of triggering the
sending of an email is met and an email will be sent.
b) All Errors: If an error occurs in the CPU module, the condition of triggering the sending of an
email is met and an email will be sent.
 CPU (RUN<=>STOP)
When the CPU module begins to run, or when the CPU module stops running, the condition of
triggering the sending of an email is met and an email will be sent.
 Bit Status Change

If the state of a bit device specified meets a condition set, the sending of an email will be triggered
and an email will be sent. For example, if X0.0 is turned from OFF to ON, the condition of triggering
the sending of an email will be met. If users want to set a condition, they can click button in the
following window.
3-107
 Device Name: Users can select a device type in the Device Name drop-down list box.
 Device Number & Bit: Users can type a device address in the Device Number box. If
the device type selected is X/Y, the users have to specify a bit
number.
 State: Users can select Rising or Falling in the State drop-down list.
 Register Value Change
If the value in a device specified meets a set condition, the sending of an email will be triggered and
an email will be sent. For example, if the value in D0 is larger than 10, the condition of triggering the
sending of an email will be met and an email will be sent. If users want to set a condition, they can
they can click button in the following window.
 Device Name: Users can select a device type in the Device Name drop-down list.
 Device Number: Users can type a device address in the Device Number field.
 State & Value: Users can set s condition of triggering the sending of an email here.
 Periodic Timer
An email is sent periodically. How often an email is sent depends on the interval typed in the Trigger
Min Cycle box in the Trigger Setting section.
Where any trigger mode is set, the user message and error log related parameters will show up.
3-108
Select the Trigger User Message Enable box and then click button to the right side of Trigger
User Message. Type some content as the email text in the pop-up window.
If users select the Error Log Enable checkbox in the Trigger Setting table, the error log will be
added to the email content automatically.
The options on the drop-down menu of Trigger Attachment Mode decide whether to add an
attachment to the email. Please make sure the maximum size of the email file allowed before setting
an attachment. For more information, refer to relevant operation manuals.
 None
If this option button is selected, no attachment will be inserted.
 File
Users can select an error log in the memory card, or the system backup file in the memory card as
the attachment of the email.
 PLC Device
If this option button is selected, the system automatically retrieves the states of the devices, or the
values in the devices listed in the table as the attachment when the email is sent. After this option
button is selected, users can click button in the following window to open the Attachment
window. Two groups of devices at most can be set. For example, if the condition is met, the values in
D0~D9 will be sent as an attachment.
Select the target email address of a receiver when the condition of sending an email is met in
Trigger Receiving table. And the specific email box is set in the Email section.
3-109
In the Socket table, users can set COM port parameters for data transmission via Ethernet.
However, the function should be applied with specific API instructions. For relevant details, refer to
AS series programming manual. And for the information on the socket, refer to relevant literature.
The system for AS300 series modules supports the data transmission between the CPU module
and other CPU module or device via a socket as well as TCP and UDP protocols in each of which
four groups of connections can be set ( AS200 series: 2 groups of connections can be set for each
TCP and UDP protocols). Users should select Socket Function Enable checkbox before any setup
and then do other setting in TCP and UDP setting pages respectively.
3 - 11 0
The parameters in the TCP Socket Setting are the same as the parameters in the UDP Socket
Setting except that there is no Keep Alive Timer parameter in the UDP Socket Setting. The
parameters in the TCP and UDP Socket Setting are described below.
 Remote IP: Users can set a remote IP address.

 Remote Port: Users can set a communication port used by the remote device for this TCP
 Local Port: Users can set a communication port used by the local CPU module for this
 Send Address: Users can set the length of data which will be sent by the local CPU module.
The length must be within the range between 0 words and 200 bytes.
 Send Length: Uses can set an initial device in the CPU module where data which will be sent is
stored.
 Receive Address: Users can set the length of data which will be received by the local CPU
module. The length must be within the range between 0 words and 200 bytes.
 Receive Length: Uses can set an initial device in the CPU module where data which will be
received is stored.
3 - 111
 Keep Alive Timer: Users can set a maximum keep alive time for the connection. If no data is
transmitted, and the keep alive period has elapsed, the CPU module will terminate the
connection automatically.
The port number used by the local CPU module and the port number used by the remote device
cannot be the same, and the devices where data which will be sent is stored cannot overlap the
devices where data which will be received is stored. If the IP address of the remote device is
192.168.1.100, the port number used by the remote device is 65500, and the port number used by
the local CPU module is 65501, the remote device and the local CPU module can transmit data
through this TCP connection.
and the values in devices where no new data is stored will be retained.
If no data is transmitted, and 60 seconds have elapsed, the CPU module will close the socket, and
terminate the connection.
In the RTU Mapping table, users can set Delta RTU-EN01 slave in connection with AS series
module. The remote device can be controlled via Ethernet and 4 groups of RTU-EN01 are
connectable in the network. For the setting and operation of RTU-EN01, refer to the operation
manual.
Select RTU Mapping Enable checkbox to enable the function of connection between RTU module
and AS series module. Set the update cycle in Cycle box and a timeout in Timeout box. It means a
timeout when RTU does not give a reply within the timeout set.
The data mapping between each group of RTU-EN01 and AS series module is set in the RTU
Mapping section. RTU-EN01 and I/O module connected to it are set via DCISoft. For more
information on DCISoft, refer to the operation manual.
3 - 11 2
 Users can select RTU1 Enable to enable this RTU function. Each RTU can be set individually.
 Users can set a station address and IP address.
 Users can set RX mapping address and RX mapping length to make the digital input points of
DI module connected to RTU mapped to X/M devices and length of AS series module. While,
the RY mapping address and length set is used for making the digital output points of DO
module mapped to Y/M devices and length of AS series module.
 Users can set RCR Read mapping address and RCR Read mapping length to make the
analog input points of AI module connected to RTU mapped to D/SR devices and length of
AS series module. While, the RCR Write mapping address and length set is used for making
the analog output points of AO module mapped to D/SR devices and length of AS series
module.
3.5.2.5 Options - Function Card 1 Setting
The Function Card 1 Setting table is used for setting parameters of function card 1 in AS300 series
CPU module, which is installed by inserting to the slot.
3 - 11 3
 Users can select Auto in Card1 Detect mode box to detect the actual card model and setting
or Manual to select the AS-F232/ F422/ F485/F2AD/F2DA function card which need be
configured in the Manual Select Card box.
 For the setting of parameters in AS-F232/ F422/ F485, refer to COM port setting in section
3.5.2.2.
 Users can set F2AD to receive the signal of 0~10V or 4~20mA in F2AD Analog Input Mode
box and set F2AD to send the signal of 0~10V or 4~20mA in F2DA Analog Output Mode box.
The average times are set in F2AD Sampling Time and Average Times boxes respectively.
3.5.2.6 Options - Function Card 2 Setting
The Function Card 2 Setting table is used for setting parameters of function card 2 in AS300 series
CPU module, which is installed by inserting to the slot. Besides function card 2 settings, the option
also include settings for AS-FEN02 and IP filter. For function card 2, AS-FCOPM and AS-FEN02 in
Manual Select Card box are additional options that does not exist for function card 1. If users select
AS-FCOPM card, the parameters can be set in the following window.
 Users can select AS Remote Control/Delta Servo Drives and AS Remote Module/CANopen
DS301 from the AS-FCOPM working mode box. The AS Remote Module and Delta Servo
Drives adopts communication protocols exclusive to Delta servo products and AC motor
drives. In addition, the AS Remote Module and Delta Servo Drives are also applied in
connecting remote I/O AS series as well as CANopen DS301 for the application of DS301
standard protocol.
 Users can set the address of the station when CANopen DS301 is selected from the
AS-FCOPM working mode box.
 The remote I/O parameters can be set if AS Remote Mode is selected from the AS-FCOPM
working mode box. The AS Remote Module No. sets the number of remote I/O modules and
each one can connect an expansion module. For AS remote module operation, please refer
to section 3.5.3.
If Delta servo drives and AS Remote Mode is selected as working mode, users can set the AS
remote module no. and the total no. of remote I/O. When the no. of AS remote I/Os are
connected, each remote I/O can connect to an expansion module. Please refer to section
3.5.3. for more information on remote module operation.
 If AS Remote Mode/Delta servo drives and AS Remote Mode is selected from the AS-FCOPM
3 - 11 4
working mode box, users can Select run mode after detect remote module to run the number of
actual connected modules inconsistent with the set number of modules, then the actual connected
remote module operating or all remote modules will stop running; AS CPU keep or Stop when
slave node dis-connected only shows errors or stops running and sends an alarm when the
remote I/O module is disconnected during operation; AS Remote and CANopen Communication
Timeout sets the timeout during which the remote I/O module does not give a reply; Auto Retry
connection after Disconnected sets the times of retrying to make a connection after a timeout
occurs.
 All three AS-FCOPM working modes can set the AS-FCOPM Bit Rate.
 The DS301PDO Data Exchanged parameter contains Start after power and PLC RUN
Will work when CANopen DS301 protocol is selected from the AS-FCOPM working mode box.
In Function Card 2 Setting for AS300 series, users can set AS-FEN02 card as Manual Select Card
(Note: If AS-FEN02 card is selected from Manual Select Card, then Function Card 1 Setting under
Options tab cannot be used for setup and settings in Data Exchange-Function Card 1 & Data
Exchange-Function Card 2 tab cannot be used as well) for AS-FEN02 Setting. Under this setting,
users can setup parameters of Ethernet communication port used in AS-FEN02. To assign a static
IP address for AS-FEN02, users need to provide the assign subnet mask for this IP address. For
dynamic allocation of IP addresses, select DHCP/BOOTP for setting.
3 - 11 5
After completing the setting of AS-FEN02 in Manual Select Card, users can select IP Filter
Function Enable. The IP filter adds another layer of confirmation to ensure the devices for
communication are permitted. This function can also limit communication objects. When IP filter
function enables, only the devices within the listed IP address from the IP filter table are allowed to
communicate with AS-FEN02. As for devices transmitting datagrams from other IP addresses, the
CPU will clear those data. The following IP filter setting process includes up to 8 sets of IP
addresses.
3 - 11 6
By selecting IP Filter Function Enable, users can input the beginning and ending of 1-8 set of IP
address.
3.5.2.7 Options - Built-in AD/DA Setting
For Built-in AD/DA Setting, the selected AS series need to be equipped with AD/DA ports to set the
following parameters.
 Options for AD channel 1 & 2 input mode parameters include Voltage（-10～+10V）, Current
（-20～+20mA）and Disable.
 Options for DA channel 1 & 2 output mode parameters include Voltage（-10～+10V）, Current
（0～+20mA）.
 Setting AD Sampling Time (unit: ms).
 Setting AD Average Times
3 - 11 7
3.5.2.8 Options - Built-in CAN Communication
For Built-in CAN Communication Setting, the selected AS series need to be equipped with CAN
port to set the following parameters.
 For CAN port work mode, users can select the AS Remote Mode, Delta Servo Drives and AS
Remote Mode and CANopen DS301. The AS Remote Mode can be used to connect remote I/O
AS Series; Delta servo drives and AS remote mode is selected for communication protocols
designed for Delta servo and AC motor drive products as well as for remote I/O AS series; the
CANopen DS301 is applied in DS301 standard communication protocol environment.
 Under the CANopen DS301 work mode, users can set CAN port node ID.
 Under AS Remote Mode, users can set its remote module no. Each remote I/O can connect an
expansion module, please refer to section 3.5.3 for remote module operation.
If Delta servo drives and AS Remote Mode is selected as working mode, users can set the AS
remote module no. and the total no. of remote I/O. When the no. of AS remote I/Os are
connected, each remote I/O can connect to an expansion module. Please refer to section 3.5.3.
for more information on remote module operation.
 If AS Remote Mode/Delta servo drives and AS Remote Mode is selected as work mode, users
can Select Action when the detected remote module to run the number of actual connected
modules inconsistent with the set number of modules, then the actual connected remote module
operating or all remote modules will stop running. The Select Action when the slave node
dis-connected shows errors or stops running and sends an alarm when the remote I/O module
is disconnected during operation. For AS Remote and CANopen Communication on Timeout
sets the timeout during which the remote I/O module does not give a reply; Re-connected retry
number after timeout sets the times of retrying to make a connection after a timeout occurs.
 All three working modes can set CAN bit rate.
 Users can set data sampling position value under CANopen Communication.
 When CANopen DS301 mode data exchange is enabled, users can select Start after power
and PLC RUN to activate DS301 PDO data exchange.
 Select Enable for CAN Hardware error counter
3.5.3 Configuring AS-Series Remote Modules
AS300 series CPU module can connect remote IO modules so as to save the wiring between a
device in the remote place and the controller. AS Remote Control can be selected in AS-FCOPM
Working mode box and the number of AS remote module can be set in AS Remote module No.
box after users select Manual in Card2 Detect Mode box and AS-FCOMPM in Manual Select Card
box in Function Card 2 Setting table under Options tab.
3 - 11 8
If users set 2 units in AS Remote module No. box, there will be 2 remote modules in the system
configuration area after clicking the OK button.
Users can set the remote module in the system configuration area according to the introduction
such as adding, deleting, copying and moving an expansion module in section 3.2.2. The actions of
clicking with the mouse or dragging as well as right-clicking and selecting context menu options are
the same as that for a general controller as follows. All expansion modules except network modules
can be configured.
3 - 11 9
Likewise, users can double click to open the parameter setting window of a remote module and the
expansion modules connected to it.
3-120
For the remote module, the start of input device range can be set as follows. Click one remote
module, double click Input Device Range box in Remote Module Group 1 table and then type the
device No. in the pop-up window. After the OK button is clicked, the input and output device range
of the remote device will be updated and that of expansion modules connected to it will be
configured automatically.
3.5.4 Data Exchange - COM1, COM2 and Ethernet

After users click the tab Data Exchange-COM1, Data Exchange-COM2 or Data Exchange-Ethernet,
the parameters for making the data exchange table of the communication port built in AS series can
be set.
AS series module can be the master and exchanges data with the slave remote devices via COM1
and COM2 based on MODBUS protocol or via Ethernet port based on MODBUS TCP protocol.
3-121
Their setting windows are the same as below.
 When setting the start mode to Program Control, the program in the PLC decides whether the
set data exchange is performed. PLC Run means that the set data exchange will be performed
automatically when PLC is in a RUN state. Always Enable means that the data exchange will
be performed constantly when the PLC is powered on.
Name Description
Enable
Remote Station/IP The slave station address of the data exchange table, one address
Address can be set for multiple data exchange tables. It is a station address
under COM1and COM2 tabs and IP under Ethernet tab.
The device address range used by the master in the data exchange
Local Address
table
<< / >>
The device address range used by a slave in the data exchange
Remote Address table
The device range will be in hexadecimal display, if the slave in the
data exchange table is a user defined MODBUS Device
The size of the data exchange table, which is basically consistent
Quantity
with the result calculated from the device range.
 Select automatically scan slaves and then operate data exchange during the first time.
The data exchange is not effected by the enabling or disabling of connection information.
(Supports Data Exchange- COM1 &COM2)
3.5.4.1 Data Exchange - COM1 and Data Exchange - COM2
On the page of tab Data Exchange-COM1 or Data Exchange-COM2, double click a data exchange
3-122
table which is to be set to open Item window as below. Select the checkbox of Enable to enable the
data exchange table in the mode mentioned above. Remote Address is the address of the target
slave for data exchange. The Shortest Update Cycle is the period for data exchange of the data
exchange table. If the target device does not make any response within the time specified by
Connection Timeout, that is timeout.
The master can complete the read and write in a command to improve the efficiency of data
specific MODBUS function code is used.
Please make sure that all devices in data exchange support MODBUS function code for read and
write synchronization. Otherwise, the read and write will fail on account of the failure to identify
function codes after the command from the master is received.
Device Type is the model of a target slave including Delta PLC and standard MODBUS devices.
 Read
AS series module reads data from a remote device.
Local Start Address: Device type and start address of devices where AS series store data;
 Write
AS series module writes data to a remote device.
Local Start Address: Device type and start address of the source data of AS series;
written;
3-123
3.5.4.2 Data Exchange - Ethernet
On the page of tab Data Exchange - Ethernet, double click the data exchange table to be set so as
to open the Item window as below. The settings are almost the same as that for Data Exchange -
COM1 and Data Exchange - COM2 except the target slave model option in Device Type which
contains Delta PLC and standard MODBUS TCP equipment as well as IP address for typing the IP
of remote slaves. For other settings, refer to the content of Data Exchange - COM1 and Data
Exchange - COM2.
Select the check box of Apply to all on the right side of The Shortest Update Cycle and
Connection Timeout will be written to other data tables on the tab Data Exchange - Ethernet.
Users could set data exchange tables separately without selecting the check box of Apply to all.
3.5.5 Data Exchange - FEN02, Function Card 1 and Function

Card 2
The parameters of Data Exchange – FEN02, Data Exchange-Function Card 1, Data

Exchange-Function Card 2 tabs are used to complete data exchange setup in AS series CPU
modules. AS series module can be the master and exchanges data with the slave remote devices
via ports of function card 1 &2 based on MODBUS protocol or via port of AS-FEN02 card based on
MODBUS TCP protocol. (If functions in Data Exchange – FEN02 are applied, then functions in Data
Exchange-Function Card 1&2 cannot be used; However, if functions in Data Exchange – Function
Card 1&2 are applied, then functions in Data Exchange– FEN02 cannot be applied.)
Their setting windows are the same as below.
3-124
 When setting the start mode to Program Control, the program in the PLC decides whether the
set data exchange is performed. PLC Run means that the set data exchange will be performed
automatically when PLC is in a RUN state. Always Enable means that the data exchange will
be performed constantly when the PLC is powered on.
Name Description
To select whether to enable the data exchange table when the
Enable
data exchange is performed.
The slave station address of the data exchange table, one
Remote Station /IP
address can be set for multiple data exchange tables. It is a
Address
station address under COM1and COM2 tabs and IP under
Ethernet tab.
The device address range used by the master in the data
Local Address
exchange table
<< / >>
The device address range used by a slave in the data exchange

table
Remote Address
The device range will be in hexadecimal display, if the slave in the
data exchange table is a user-defined MODBUS Device.
The size of the data exchange table, which is basically consistent

Quantity
with the result calculated from the device range.
 Select Automatically scan slaves, when the first time and then proceed data exchange.
The data exchange is not effected by the enabling or disabling of connections. (Supports Data
Exchange- COM1 &COM2)
3-125
3.5.5.1 Data Exchange - FEN02
In Function Card 2 Setting for AS300 series, users can set AS-FEN02 card as Manual Select Card
(Note: If AS-FEN02 card is selected from Manual Select Card, then Function Card 1 Setting under
Options tab cannot be used for setup and settings in Data Exchange-Function Card 1 & Data
Exchange-Function Card 2 tab cannot be used as well) for AS-FEN02 Setting. Under this setting,
users can setup parameters of Ethernet communication port used in AS-FEN02. To assign a static
IP address for AS-FEN02, users need to provide the assign subnet mask for this IP address. For
dynamic allocation of IP addresses, select DHCP/BOOTP for setting.
On the page of tab Data Exchange – FEN02, double click the data exchange table to open the Item
window for setup as below. The settings are almost the same as that for Data Exchange – Ethernet
except the target slave model option in Device Type which contains Delta PLC and standard
MODBUS TCP equipment as well as IP address for typing the IP of remote slaves. For other
settings, please refer to Data Exchange – Ethernet for more information.
3-126
Select the check box of Apply to all on the right side of The Shortest Update Cycle and
Connection Timeout will be written to other data tables on the tab Data Exchange – FEN02. Users
could set data exchange tables separately without selecting the check box of Apply to all.
3.5.5.2 Data Exchange - Function Card 1 & Function Card 2
On the page of tab Data Exchange- Function Card 1 or Data Exchange- Function Card 2, double
click a data exchange table which is to be set to open Item window as below. Select the checkbox of
Enable to enable the data exchange table in the mode mentioned above. Remote Address is the
address of the target slave for data exchange. The Shortest Update Cycle is the period for data
exchange of the data exchange table. If the target device does not make any response within the
time specified by Connection Timeout, that is timeout.
The master can complete the read and write in a command to improve the efficiency of data
specific MODBUS function code is used.
Please make sure that all devices in data exchange support MODBUS function code for read and
write synchronization. Otherwise, the read and write will fail to identify function codes after the
command from the master is received.
Device Type is the model of a target slave including Delta PLC and standard MODBUS devices.
3-127
 Read
AS series read data from a remote device.
Local Start Address: Device type and start address of devices where AS series store data;
Quantity: Input data length
 Write
AS series write data onto a remote device.
Local Start Address: Device type and start address of the source data of AS series;
written;
Quantity: Output data length
3.6 Parameter Settings for DVPxxMC Series PLC

3.6.1 Opening the PLC Parameter Setting Window
After double-clicking HWCONFIG in the system configuration area, users can select Setting from
the Parameter field and the Device Setting window will appear. The parameters which can be set
vary with the models or hardware of the CPU modules.
Before setting the parameters in a CPU module, users have to refer to the operation
manual for the CPU module and to make sure the effect of the setting parameters have on
the CPU module and the whole system is safe, so as to avoid system damage or staff
injuries.
*. The parameter settings are not effective until they are downloaded to the CPU module. Refer to section 3.8.4 for the
download method.
3-128
Device
Information
The parameters are classified into several tabs on the setting page. Users can click the primary tabs
at the top of the window and can switch to other setting pages base on different levels of settings.
On the right, a table regarding parameter name as well as corresponding value is provided for users
to set its unit, default, maximum and minimum.
3-129
3.6.2 Options
3.6.2.1 Options - System Settings
The System Information page under Device Settings appear after users click the Options tab.
There are only PLC Label box where maximum 15 characters can be input on the page. There is no
special restriction on the input characters; special marks and spaces are all allowed to use here.
However, the users have to note that a Chinese character occupies two characters.
After an ISPSoft project is created, the project name will be taken as the default name of the CPU
module, and the default name of the CPU module will be attached to the model in the project
management area. Users can change the default name of the CPU module in the Name box later.
3-130
device they expect by checking the device name. To prevent errors, if users want to
download/upload the program, the system will remind the users to check the name of the CPU
module and the name attached to the model in the project management area, when the name of the
CPU module is different from the name attached to the model in the project management area.
3.6.2.2 Options - CANopen
The parameters for CANopen are listed in the setting window below and users can set these values
in the input box or via the drop-down menu.
Parameters for setting include CANopen station address and CANopen baud rate. Users can select
CANopen baud rate value such as 20k bps, 50k bps, 125k bps, 250k bps, 500k bps, 800k bps and
1Mbps.
3-131
3.6.2.3 Options - CANmotion
The parameters for CANmotion are listed in the setting window below and users can set these
values in the input box or via the drop-down menu.
Parameters like CANmotion station address is set up with a default value of 112 and cannot be
changed; users can select either 1Mbps or 500kbps for CANmotion baud rate.
3.6.2.4 Options - RS232
The settings of RS232 station are listed in the window below.
 Users can set up RS232 station address

 Select values of RS232 data format, baud rate and transfer mode. Users can select baud rate
including 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200.
3-132
3.6.2.5 Options - RS485
The settings of RS485 station are listed in the window below.
 Users can set up RS485 station address

 Select values of RS485 data format, baud rate and transfer mode. Users can select baud rate
including 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200.
3.6.2.6 Options - Incremental Encoder 1
The page below is for the first set of device settings.
Parameters settings include resolution, integration method and frequency multiplication.
 Incremental Encoder 1 Resolution

The default value of incremental encoder 1 resolution is 1024.
 Incremental Encoder 1 Integration Method

The settings include forward and reverse direction.
3-133
 Incremental Encoder 1 Frequency Multiplication

The settings include one/ two/ four times frequency multiplication.
The integration method and frequency multiplication is explained in the following table.
Integration Method Meaning Counting Method
One time frequency
The counting starts when phase B
multiplication in forward Increase the count
rising edge is detected.
direction
Two times frequency Increase the count
multiplication in forward
rising and falling edge is detected.
direction
Four times frequency The counting starts when the rising Increase the count
multiplication in forward and falling edge of phase A and B are
direction both detected.
One time frequency
multiplication in reverse Decrease the count
rising edge is detected.
direction
Two times frequency Decrease the count
multiplication in reverse
rising and falling edge is detected.
direction
Four times frequency The counting starts when the rising Decrease the count
multiplication in reverse and falling edge of phase A and B are
direction both detected.
3.6.2.7 Options - Incremental Encoder 2
The page below is for the second set of device settings.
Parameters settings including resolution, integration method and frequency multiplication is the
same as explained in incremental encoder 1 page. Please refer to section 3.6.2.6 for more
information.
3-134
3.6.2.8 Options - Absolute Encoder
The page below is for setting the absolute encoder.
 The output value for absolute encoder include Gray or Binary. This parameter is set according to
the encoder type.
 The parameter Number of data bits to count turns item sets resolution for multi-turn. A recount
will take place if the number of pulses exceeds the valid maximum turn count. The number of
turns (N) equals to 2 N. This parameter is set according to the encoder type; the Number of
data bits per turn item sets resolution for a single turn. The number of turns (N) equals to 2 N.
An encoder turns to create the number of pulses. This parameter is set according to the encoder
type.
 The item sets data transfer speed.
 The item determines the minimum transfer speed that counts from the falling edge of the last
pulse in clockwise direction.
3.6.2.9 Options - Filtration Time Zone of Input Points
The setting page for DVPxxMC Filtration Time Zone of Input Points and updates IO along with
Task.
3-135
 Enable the filtration time of input points -I0~I7

The input points to filter the short pulse signals via filtration is set between -I0~I7. This can increase
filtration rate and reduce signal interference, input signal tremble or external interference. Users can
select enable or disable IO filter via the drop-down menu.
 Enable the filtration time of input points -I10~I17
The input points to filter the short pulse signals via filtration is set between-I10~I17. This can
increase filtration rate and reduce signal interference, input signal tremble or external interference.
Users can select enable or disable IO filter via the drop-down menu.
 Filtration Time Factor of I0~I7
The I0~I7 time factor of filtration is set between 0~255. The filtration time: t=31us * (time factor of
filtration), the filtration time is a multiple of 31us and the default value of time factor is set to 0.
 Filtration Time Factor I10~I13
 Filtration Time Factor I14~I17
 IO Update with Task
The I/O includes DVPxxMC I/O points, left and right expansion modules and CANopen data. Select
FF and IO data is updated in the system; select other assigned Task and the IO data will be updated
before executing the assigned Task.
3.6.2.10 Options - Run/Stop Setting
The page below is set to refresh IO and initial value of parameters.
3-136
 Stop -> Run Initial Value

Users can select Clear value or Keep value
(1) When Clear Value is selected and the device operates from Stop to Run, non-retentive variables
and devices will return to initial value or default value, while the retentive variables
(VAR_RETAIN type) and devices will not return to initial value.
When the non-retentive variables are bound to retentive devices, the variable will return to initial
value if operates from Stop to Run or powering up; If the initial value is not set, the variable will
be set as the value stored in the retentive device operates from Stop to Run or powering up.
(2) When Keep Value is selected and the device operates from Stop to Run, the variables and
devices will keep the value before Stop. When the software starts download again and operates
from Stop to Run, the, non-retentive variables and devices will return to initial value or default
value; while the retentive variables (VAR_RETAIN type) and devices will not return to initial
value.
 Run -> Stop IO Update

Users can select Clear Output Value or Keep Output Value for IO refresh setting when the device
operates from Run to Stop.
(1) When Clear Output Value is selected and the device is under Stop, the current IO data is
deleted not updated.
(2) When Keep Output Value is selected and the device is under Stop, the current IO data is not
deleted and will continue to update while under Stop.
3.6.2.11 Options - Ethernet Port Basic Setting
Users can select Ethernet Port Basic Setting under the Option menu to setup the two Ethernet
port communication parameters.
3-137
3.7 Parameter Settings for Modules

3.7.1 Setting Internal Parameters for AH5x0 and AH5x1 Modules
Users can set the parameters in every module configured in HWCONFIG. The functions and
characters of every module depend on the setting of the parameters. (The parameter setting of
AH560 redundant system series is based on AH5x1 series.) If users want to set the parameters in a
module, they can double-click the module in the system configuration area. The system will
automatically open the Parameter Setting window. The setting windows of various models are a bit
different.
The parameters are set according to the functions supported by the module. Before
users set the parameters, they have to refer to AH500 Module Manual for more
information. To prevent damage to the system or staff, the users have to make sure of the
effect that the parameters which are set have on the module and the whole system.
3-138
There are two tabs in the setting window of AH5x0 and AH5x1 Modules. They are the MDS
Information tab and the Normal Exchange Area tab. If users click the MDS Information tab, the
version of the MDS document will be displayed. The number of parameters which can be set in the
module and the range of setting values depend on the version of the MDS document. Besides, if the
parameters in HWCONFIG in a project are created by a newer MDS document, the system will ask
users to update the MDS document when the users open the HWCONFIG window in the project.
If users click the Normal Exchange Area tab, the functions to which the input/output devices
assigned to the module correspond will be displayed.
Users can select a parameter type at the left side of the window, and then set the parameters in the
table at the right side of the window. The formats of the tables for the parameter types are the same,
but the contents of the tables are different. Besides, the number of parameters which can be set and
the range of setting values depend on the firmware version of the module which is set.
The description of the columns in a table is as follows. If the color of a table cell is grayed out, the
cell cannot be edited.
 Description
The parameter names or descriptions are shown in this column.
3-139
 Address
Users can set data registers in this column. The parameters in the module which do not need to
be updated constantly are stored in the data registers. If users specify data registers for the
parameters in the module, and the parameters in HWCONFIG are downloaded to the CPU
module correctly, the data registers in the CPU module are synchronized to the parameters in the
module when the system operates. As a result, the users can access the module through the data
registers. Accessing a module through the data registers is more efficient than accessing the
module through the instruction FROM/TO. Besides, the number of data registers that a module
has is limited. When users set data registers, they have to refer to the instructions for the module.
As the example below shows, D3000 corresponds to the parameter CH0 Average Time in the
Parameter Setting window for AH04AD-5A. After the parameters in HWCONFIG are
downloaded to the CPU module, users can change the value of the parameter CH0 Average
Time by changing the value in D3000 in the CPU module.
But if users write a value which is not allowed by a parameter into a data register during the
operation of the system, the system will restore the value in the data register and the value of the
parameter to the original values.
*. Please refer to programming manuals for more information about the instruction FROM/TO.
If users want to set a data register, they can click in the Address cell for a parameter, and
type a data register address which will be used in the Address window. Please note that a data
register address which has been assigned to the module cannot be used again. If users want to
delete the data register address in the Address cell for a parameter, they can open the Address
window in the same way, and delete the data register address in the window.
If the color of the Address cell for a parameter is grayed out, users can not set a data register for
the parameter. In the example below, the values of these parameters are binary values. The
states of certain bits in the data register set in the Address cell for the first parameter correspond
to these parameters. Please refer to the documents for the modules for more information about
the relation between parameters and the states of the bits in data registers.
 Monitor
After users click Monitor Table on the Option menu in HWCONFIG, they can access a module
through the data registers in the Monitor Table window. As a result, if a data register is set for a
3-140
parameter in a module, and the checkbox in the Monitor cell for the parameter is selected, the
data register specified will be displayed in the Monitor Table window after the Monitor Table
window is opened. The checkbox in the Monitor cell for a parameter to which no data register is
assigned cannot be selected.
In the example below, D3000~D3003 are assigned to the parameters, but only D3000 and D3001
are monitored. As a result, only D3000 and D3001 will be displayed in the Monitor Table window
after the Monitor Table window is opened. Please refer to section 3.8.6 for more information
about Monitor Table in HWCONFIG.
 Initial
Users can set initial values in this column. When the parameters in HWCONFIG are downloaded,
the initial values set are written into the module. Users may need to type initial values in the Initial
columns for some of the parameter types, and select initial values in the Initial columns for the
other parameter types. Please refer to the instructions for a module for more information about
the range of values which can be set, and the processing mechanism after the downloading of the
initial values.
 Comment
After users click the Comment cell for a parameter, they can type a comment on the parameter. A
comment is composed of 32 characters at most, and a Chinese character occupies two
characters. The default contents of the Comment column for a parameter type are usually the
same as the contents of the Description column for the parameter type.
After Default in the lower left corner of the Parameter Setting window is clicked, the values of
the parameters in the module will be restored to the default values.
3.7.2 Parameter Settings for AHxxEMC and AS Series Modules

Users can set the parameters in every module configured in HWCONFIG. The functions and
characters of every module depend on the setting of the parameters. If users want to set the
parameters in a module, they can double-click the module in the system configuration area. The
system will automatically open the Parameter Setting window. The setting windows of various
models are a bit different.
3-141
AHxxEMC Series
AS Series
The parameters are set according to the functions supported by the module.
Before users set the parameters, they have to refer to Operation Manual for more
information. To prevent damage to the system or staff, the users have to make sure of
the effect that the parameters which are set have on the module and the whole system.
There are two tabs in the setting window of AHxxEMC and AS series modules. They are the Device
Information tab and the Normal Exchange Area tab. If users click the Device Information tab, the
module information, appearance and present DDF document version will be displayed.
The number of parameters which can be set in the module and the range of setting values depend
on the version of the DDF document. Besides, the firmware version and hardware version of the
3-142
CPU module will be displayed as well when all modules are connected online.
If users click the Normal Exchange Area tab, the functions to which the input/output devices
assigned to the module correspond will be displayed.
Users can select a parameter type at the left side of the window, and then set the parameters in the
table at the right side of the window. The formats of the tables for the parameter types are the same,
but the contents of the tables are different. Besides, the number of parameters which can be set and
the range of setting values depend on the firmware version of the module which is set.
The descriptions of the columns in the table are as follows. If the color of a table cell is grayed out,
the cell cannot be edited.
Parameter name
The parameter names or descriptions are shown in this column.
Value
Users can set initial values in this column. When the parameters in HWCONFIG are downloaded,
the initial values set are written into the module. Users may type initial values for some parameter
types, or select initial values on a drop-down menu for other parameter types in the Value column.
Please refer to the instructions of the module for more information about the range of values which
can be set, and the processing mechanism after the initial values are downloaded.
3-143
Unit, Default, Minimum and Maximum

Users can refer to the unit, default, the minimum and maximum of the parameters in the following
window when setting them.
After Default button in the lower left corner of the Parameter Setting window is clicked, the values of
the parameters in the module will be restored to the default values.
3.7.3 Exporting and Importing Parameters for Modules

After Export File in the Parameter Setting window is clicked, the parameters in the module will be
saved as a CSV file. A file which was exported previously can also be imported.
 Exporting the parameters in a module
Click Export File in the Parameter Setting window, select a folder in the Save in drop-down list
box in the Save As window, type a filename in the File name box, and click Save.
 Importing the parameters in a module
Click Import File in the Parameter Setting window, select a file which will be imported in the
Save As window, and click Open. The windows for importing and exporting parameters of
various modules are a bit different as follows.
(The exporting and importing on the parameter setting of AH560 redundant system is based on
AH5x1 series.)
AH5x0 &
AH5x1 series
3-144
AHxxEMC and
AS Series
Before the parameters are imported, the system will check the file format and the module model.
If the file format or the module model is not correct, the system will stop the import of the
parameters. If the data registers specified in the original file exported have been used in the
present configuration, different data registers will be specified in the file after the file is imported.
3.7.4 Updating Parameters for Modules

For the parameters update in a module, the system needs to be in the online mode. For the
operation of the online mode, please refer to section 3.8 for details. After the system is in the on-line
mode, users can select the module that needs to update the parameters and then the device setting
window will show up. From the device setting window, the Update option will appear. Click Update
button to update the parameters in a module. This function is only available for digital I/O modules,
analog I/O modules and network modules.
AHxxEMC and
AS series
3-145
3.7.5 Parameter Settings for Intelligent Modules

Delta Electronics, Inc. provides the exclusive configuration tools for some modules. Through the
software, the modules can be further configured and the parameters in the modules can be further
set, such as CANopen network planning and etc.
Take the AH5x0 as an example (shown below), if users want to set the parameters in an intelligent
module, they can right-click the module in the system configuration area, and click Intelligent
Module Configuration on the context menu. If the configuration and the setting of the parameters
in HWCONFIG have not been saved, the system will ask the users to save the configuration and the
setting before starting the corresponding software. Once the corresponding software is started,
users can not perform any editing tasks in HWCONFIG before the software is closed. Some
software need be installed additionally and there will be a message to remind users of installing the
configuration software if the software is not installed.
Please refer to instructions for software and modules for more information about the usage of the
software.
3.8 HWCONFIG Parameter Management and Online

Diagnosis
HWCONFIG
V V V V V V
Print Function
Purchase
Order V V V V V V
3-146
3.8.1 Save and Print function

After a hardware configuration is complete, the setting in HWCONFIG can be saved with the whole
project. The contents which are saved include the hardware configuration, the parameters in the
modules, and the parameters in the CPU module, but do not include the parameters in the intelligent
modules. The parameters in the CPU module are saved as a para file whose primary filename is the
project name. The hardware configuration and the parameters in the modules are saved as an hw
file whose primary filename is the project name. The files are saved in a folder in which the project
(*.isp) is saved.
If users want to save the setting in HWCONFIG, they can click Save on the File menu, or on
the toolbar.
If users want to perform a printing task, they click Print on the File menu to open the Print Preview
window. The contents which are printed only include the configuration in the configuration area.
Please refer to appendix C for more information about the Print Preview window.
Additional remark
If the CPU module is changed in ISPSoft after the setting of the parameters in the hardware is
complete, and the new CPU module can not completely support the range of devices set for the
original hardware, a warning message appears when the HWCONFIG window is opened again.
The problematic modules are marked with triangular error signs in HWCONFIG. These modules are
in an abnormal condition. The Download function and the Online Mode function cannot be enabled.
After the incorrect device addresses are modified, users can proceed with the operation. Besides,
the triangular error signs will disappear after the incorrect devices addresses are modified.
3.8.2 Purchase Order

After a hardware configuration is complete, users can click PO List on the Option menu. The
system will collect the hardware which are configured, and show it in a list.
3-147
After Export on the File menu in the upper left corner of the window is clicked, the list will be saved
as a CSV file. The data which is exported can be edited or managed through Microsoft Excel.
3.8.3 Rack Information List for AH Series

After a hardware configuration is complete, users can click Rack Information List on the File menu.
The users can view the configuration in the Rack Information List window. The modules in the
window are sorted according to the backplanes on which they are installed, and arranged in a
hierarchical tree structure. The users can fold or unfold a rack section to increase the convenience
of viewing the configuration
3-148
After Export on the File menu in the upper left corner of the window is clicked, the list will be saved
as a CSV file. The data which is exported can be edited or managed through Microsoft Excel.
3.8.4 Download/Upload System Parameters

The parameters set in HWCONFIG must be downloaded to the CPU module so that they can take
effect. Owing to the fact that HWCONFIG adopts the communication setting in ISPSoft, users have
to make sure that ISPSoft is connected to the CPU module normally before the parameters are
downloaded/uploaded. If users want to download/upload the program, but the name of the CPU
module is different from the name attached to the model in the project management area, the
system will remind the users to check the name of the CPU module and the name attached to the
model in the project management area.
3-149
 Downloading the system parameters

After users click Download on the Option menu, or on the toolbar, the Transfer Items
window will appear. The items which will be downloaded can be selected as needed, but the
items do not include the parameters in the intelligent modules. After the users click OK, the
parameters will be downloaded to the CPU module.
*. For AH5x0 series, download items are not selectable. But AH560 redundant system and AH5x1 series provides
download items.
 Uploading the system parameters

After users click Upload on the Option menu, or on the toolbar, the system parameters in
the CPU module will be uploaded to HWCONFIG. The items which will be uploaded include the
hardware configuration, the parameters in the modules, and the parameters in the CPU module,
but do not include the parameters in the intelligent modules.
For AH5x0 series, the PLC parameter setting window provides the function of uploading and
downloading, but only for the CPU parameters. Click to download PLC parameters and
to upload PLC parameters in the upper left of the PLC parameter setting window.
3-150
All CPU parameters will be uploaded during uploading. During downloading data, users can select
the parameters to be downloaded in the following window rather than downloading all settings to the
CPU module.
The CPU module must be in STOP state if CPU or Ethernet –Advance checkboxes are selected in
the following window. And so the system will show a reminder message before the downloading
starts if the CPU module is in RUN state.
*1. If the name of the CPU module is different from the name attached to the model in the project management area,
a dialog box will appear before the parameters are downloaded or uploaded. Please refer to section 3.3~3.5 for
more information.
*2. HWCONFIG adopts the communication setting in ISPSoft. Please make sure that ISPSoft is connected to the CPU
module normally before the parameters are downloaded/uploaded. Please refer to section 2.4 for more
information.
3.8.5 I/O Scan

Users can configure modules in the way mentioned above. If users have gotten related hardware,
they can install the hardware, click I/O Scan in HWCONFIG, and scan the actual hardware
configuration through communication. The time of configuring the modules will be saved. Users
have to make sure that ISPSoft has connected to the CPU module normally before they carry out
the operation. Please refer to section 2.4 for more information about communication setting.
Users can click I/O Scan on the Option menu, or on the toolbar to carry out the operation. The
contents which will be scanned include the module models, the hardware configuration, and the
firmware versions of the modules, but do not include the parameters in the modules and the
parameters in the CPU module. After I/O Scan is clicked, the original hardware configuration and
the parameter setting will be cleared. However, the parameters in the CPU module will not be
affected.
After the scan is complete, the actual hardware configuration will be displayed in the system
configuration area, the system will assign input/output devices to the modules, the parameters in the
modules are assigned the default values.
3-151
For AH560 redundant system, the I/O Scan result is different when the redundancy function is
enabled (please refer to section 3.3.2.2 for more information) or disabled. Two examples are given
below. (The actual scan result may differ base on real connection status.)
Redundancy- disabled
3-152
Redundancy-enabled
For AS series, after the I/O Scan icon is clicked, a warning window will appear “The software
will scan module current configurations, please check if you need to scan the parameters as well?
(Note: The current configurations will be overwritten.)” When Yes is clicked, the parameters of the
module PLC (parameters of the CPU PLC excluded) will be used and the current configurations will
be overwritten. Besides that other information such as the model number, configurations of the I/O
port, the firmware version, and extension card will also be scanned. After the scan is complete, the
actual module configurations will be shown in the configuration area and the Input/Output Device
Range will be rearranged. If No is clicked, the parameters of the module PLC (parameters of the
CPU PLC excluded) will be set according to the default settings.
3-153
The original setting is 10.
After scan, the setting is 20.
The firmware versions of AH5x0,AH5x1 and AH560 redundant system series modules will be based
on the actual firmware versions of the modules scanned. If the firmware version of a module which
is scanned is higher than the firmware version of the module in the MDS document, the highest
version which can be selected will be displayed in the Firmware Version drop-down list for the
module, and the actual firmware version of the module will be displayed in the Comment cell for the
module. For AHxxEMC and AS series, both module firmware adopts the scanned firmware version.
However, if the firmware version of the scanned module is not compatible with the system firmware
(DDF version), users can select the highest version number for Firmware Version from the
drop-down list, while the actual firmware version is shown in the Comment cell.
*. Please refer to section 3.4.1 for more information about MDS documents and firmware versions of modules.
3-154
The difference between I/O Scan and Upload can be illustrated with the following example. If I/O
Scan is clicked, the hardware configuration will be scanned, and the parameters in the modules will
not be scanned. If Upload is clicked, the hardware configuration in the CPU module will be read.
The hardware configuration uploaded to HWCONFIG may be different from the actual hardware
configuration.
The parameters in the hardware shown below are downloaded to the CPU module first. The
parameter in AH16AN01R-5A (installed in slot 1) is as follows.
Then, AH04HC-5A installed in slot 2 is removed from the actual backplane. The BUS FAULT LED
indicator on the CPU module will be ON, that is to say, the hardware configuration in the CPU is
different from the actual hardware configuration.
Next, I/O Scan is clicked. The scan result will be the same as the actual hardware configuration.
After AH16AN01R-5A (installed in slot 1) is double-clicked to open the Parameter Setting window,
users will find that the parameter in the module is assigned the default value. The value of the
parameter is different from the value of the parameter previously downloaded to the CPU module,
that is to say, only the hardware configuration will be scanned after I/O Scan is clicked.
Then, Upload is clicked. After the uploading is complete, users will find that the hardware
configuration and the parameters in the modules which are uploaded are the same as the hardware
configuration and the parameters in the modules which were previously downloaded to the CPU
module. In other words, after Upload is clicked, the system parameters in the CPU module will read,
and the actual hardware configuration will not be uploaded.
Next, I/O Scan is clicked, and the scan result is downloaded to the CPU module. The BUS FAULT
LED indicator on the CPU module will be OFF, that is to say, the hardware configuration in the CPU
module is the same as the actual hardware configuration.
3-155
3.8.6 AH Series Online Diagnosis

Users not only can configure modules in HWCONFIG offline, but also can operate and inspect the
system through the Online Mode function if ISPSoft is connected to the CPU module. Owing to the
fact that HWCONFIG adopts the communication setting in ISPSoft, users have to make sure that
ISPSoft is connected to the CPU module normally before the Online Mode function is enabled. If
users want to enable the Online Mode function, but the name of the CPU module is different from
the name attached to the model in the project management area, the system will remind the users to
check the name of the CPU module and the name attached to the model in the project management
area. Please refer to section 3.3~3.4 for more information.
3.8.6.1 Online Mode
(1) After users click Online Mode on the Option menu, or on the toolbar, the hardware
configuration will be in the online mode. If the users click again, the hardware
configuration will not be in the online mode.
(2) Before the hardware configuration enters the online mode, the system checks whether the
hardware configuration stored in the CPU module is the same as the hardware configuration in
the system configuration area. If the hardware configuration stored in the CPU module is
different from the hardware configuration in the system configuration area, the system will ask
users to download the hardware configuration again.
(3) After the hardware configuration enters the online mode, the statuses of the modules
displayed in the system configuration area will vary with the actual statuses of the modules.
The statuses of the LED indicators on the CPU module displayed in the system configuration
area are the same as the actual statuses of the LED indicators on the CPU module. The LED
indicators are the RUN LED indicator, the ERROR LED indicator, and the BUS FAULT LED
indicator from top to bottom.
3-156
An error occurs in the module.

The module is in a warning status.
The module is normal.
The system configuration is different from the actual
system configuration. (An unknown module is installed in
this slot.)
The system configuration is different from the actual system
configuration. (No module is installed in this slot.)
The system configuration is different from the actual system
configuration. (No expansion backplane is scanned.)
For AH560 redundant system, if the Redundancy function is enabled and enters online mode, the
status of Master and Standby controllers will be displayed in the system configuration area.
3.8.6.2 Module Information and Diagnosis
If the hardware configuration is in the online mode, users can right-click the CPU module or a
module, and click Module Information on the context menu. The users can get the information
related to the CPU module or the module through the connection, and the information is displayed in
the Module Information window.
If users right-click a module, and click Diagnosis on the context menu, the Module Error Log
window will appear.
3-157
In the Module Error Log window, the current error is displayed in the Current column, and the
errors which occurred before are displayed in the History column. The numbers of error logs which
are stored in the modules are different. If the errors which occurred in a module before are not
stored in the module, the History column will be blank. Besides, owing to the fact that the digital I/O
modules do not generate any error code, users can not use the Diagnosis function.
After the errors occurring in a module are eliminated, users can click Clear to clear the errors in the
window, and the error stored in the module. The module will not be in the erroneous condition. After
users click Refresh, the system will retrieve the data in the module again. The data will be displayed
in the window.
3-158
3.8.6.3 Changing the Status of a Module Online
If the hardware configuration is in the online mode, users can change the status of a module, carry
out a simple test.
Before the status of a module is changed, users have to make sure that the operation
does not cause damage to the system or staff.
 Changing the operating state of a module
If the hardware configuration is in the online mode, users can right-click a module, and click Run
on the context menu. The module will begin to run. When the module runs, the green light on the
module is ON. If the users click Stop on the context menu, the module will stop running. Besides,
if the operating state of the CPU module is changed, the operating states of all the modules are
also changed.
 Changing the input/output state of a module

If the modules which are configured include a digital I/O module, an analog I/O module, or a
temperature measurement module, users can right-click the module, and click Module Status on
the context menu. The users can monitor the input/output state of the module in the window
which appears. In the window for a digital I/O module, users can right-click an input/output
channel, and click Force ON or Force OFF on the context menu. Before Force ON or Force OFF
on the context menus is clicked, the CPU module and the digital I/O module must run to produce
the actual outputs.
 Force ON: The channel selected is forced ON.

 Force OFF: The channel selected is forced OFF.
 Release: The channel selected is not forced ON/OFF.
 Release all: All the channels are not forced ON/OFF.
 Changing the values of the parameters in a module

If a module is assigned data registers, users can change the values in the data registers after the
hardware configuration enters the online mode. However, on account of the design of the module,
the CPU module and the module may need to run to produce the values of the parameters before
the values in the data registers are changed.
3-159
(1) If the hardware configuration is in the online mode, users can double-click a module to open
the Parameter Setting window, and click a parameter type which will be set at the left side of
the window. The users will find that the appearance of the table in the window is quite
different from the appearance of the table in the offline mode.
(2) The present values of the parameters are displayed in the PV column, but they are not
updated timely. After users click in the window, the system will retrieve the present
values again, and the values retrieved will be displayed in the PV column.
(3) If users want to change the values in the data registers assigned to the parameters, they can
type the setting values in the SV column. Users can only type the setting values in the SV
cells for the parameters to which the data registers are assigned. If users want to change the
values of parameters, they can type the setting values in the SV cells for the parameters, and
click after the typing of the setting values is complete. The values of the
parameters will be written into the data registers assigned to the parameters.
*. Before the value of a parameter is changed, users have to refer to the instructions for the module to make sure
of the range of values which are allowed.
3-160
3.8.6.4 Monitoring Table
If the hardware configuration is in the online mode, users can view the values in the data registers in
the Monitor Table window after they click Monitor Table on the Option menu. Users can not add
any item to the Monitor Table window. After users select the checkboxes in the Monitor cells for
parameters, the data registers assigned to the parameters will be listed in the Monitor Table
window. Please refer to section 3.7.2 for more information.
*. If the setting in the Monitor column in the Parameter Setting window is changed, the setting can take effect without
having to be downloaded to the CPU module.
Users can view the values in the data registers in the Monitor Table window, but they can not
change the values. If users want to change the values in the data registers in the Monitor Table
window, they can follow the instructions in section 3.7.1. Besides, after users click the Radix cell for
a data register, they can select a method of representing the value in the data register on the
drop-down list.
3.8.7 AS Series Online Diagnosis

Users not only can configure modules in HWCONFIG offline, but also can operate and inspect the
system through the Online Mode function if ISPSoft is connected to the CPU module. Owing to the
fact that HWCONFIG adopts the communication settings in ISPSoft, users have to make sure that
ISPSoft is connected to the CPU module normally before the Online Mode function is enabled. If
users want to enable the Online Mode function, but the name of the CPU module is different from
the name attached to the model in the project management area, the system will remind the users to
check the name of the CPU module and the name attached to the model in the project management
area. Please refer to section 3.5 for more information.
3-161
3.8.7.1 Online Mode
(1) After users click Online Mode on the Option menu, or on the toolbar, the hardware
configuration will be in the online mode. If the users click again, the hardware
configuration will not be in the online mode.
(2) Before switching to the online mode, the system checks whether the hardware configuration
stored in the CPU module is the same as the hardware configuration in the system configuration
area. If the hardware configuration stored in the CPU module is different from the hardware
configuration in the system configuration area, the system will ask users to download the
hardware configuration again.
(3) After switching to the online mode, the statuses of the modules displayed in the system
configuration area will vary with the actual statuses of the modules. The statuses of the LED
indicators on the CPU module displayed in the system configuration area are the same as the
actual statuses of the LED indicators on the CPU module. The LED indicators are the RUN LED
indicator and the ERROR LED indicator from top to bottom.
On e unco nfigu red module is s can ned.

The sc anned mo dule is different from t he configured one.
The module is in a warning stat us.
An error oc cu rs in the mod ule
.
The modu le is norma l
3.8.7.2 Module Information and Diagnosis
(1) If users right-click a module, and click Diagnosis on the context menu, the Module Error Log
window will appear.
3-162
In the Module Error Log window, the current error is displayed in the Current column, and the
errors which occurred before are displayed in the History column. The numbers of error logs which
are stored in the modules are different. If the errors which occurred in a module before are not
stored in the module, the History column will be blank.
After the errors occurring in a module are eliminated, users can click Clear to clear the errors in the
window and the errors stored in the module; the module will no longer in the erroneous condition.
After users click Refresh, the system will retrieve the data in the module again. The data will be
displayed in the window.
3.8.7.3 Changing the Status of a Module Online
If the hardware configuration is in the online mode, users can change the status of a module, carry
out a simple test.
Before the status of a module is changed, users have to make sure that the operation
 Changing the operating state of a module

If the hardware configuration is in the online mode, users can right-click a module, and click Run
on the context menu. The system including the CPU and other modules without errors and
warning will begin to run. When the CPU and modules run, the green lights on modules will be
ON. If the users click Stop on the context menu, the system will stop running. Being different from
AH series, AS series cannot change the operating states of modules separately.
3-163
 Changing the input/output state of a module

If the hardware configurations include a digital I/O module, an analog I/O module, or a
temperature measurement module, users can right-click the module, and click Module Status on
the context menu. The users can monitor the input/output state of the module in the window
which appears. In the window for a digital I/O module, users can right-click an input/output
channel, and click Force ON or Force OFF on the context menu. Before Force ON or Force OFF
on the context menus is clicked, the CPU module and the digital I/O module must run to produce
the actual outputs.
 Force ON: The channel selected is forced ON.

 Force OFF: The channel selected is forced OFF.
 Release: The channel selected is not forced ON/OFF.
 Release all: All the channels are not forced ON/OFF.
3-164
3.9 Setting a RTC

The RTC in a PLC can be set by a tool provided by ISPSoft. Before the real-time clock in a PLC is
set, users have to make sure that ISPSoft is connected to the PLC normally. Please refer to section
2.4 for more information about communication setting.
After users click Set RTC on the Tools menu, the SET RTC window will appear. The date displayed
at the top of the window is the date retrieved from the PLC when the window is opened, and the time
displayed at the top of the window is the time retrieved from the PLC when the window is opened.
If the time on the computer’s clock is the time on the real-time clock, users can select the Computer
option button, and click OK.
If users want to set the real-time clock by themselves, they can select the Custom option button,
and type a date and a time in the boxes. If users click in the box, an auxiliary tool will appear.
Click OK after the setting of the real-time clock is complete
3-165
3.10 Setting the Memory in a PLC

By means of ISPSoft, users can clear the memory, or restore the setting in the PLC to the factory
setting. Users have to make sure that ISPSoft has connected to the CPU module normally before
they carry out the operation. Please refer to section 2.4 for more information about communication
setting.
After users click Format PLC Memory… on the PLC menu, the Format PLC Memory will appear.
Select the Clear All Program Memory option button, and then click OK. The system will clear the
memory in the PLC.
If the Reset PLC Memory (Factory Setting) option button is selected, the setting in the PLC will be
restored to the factory setting after OK is clicked. On account of the design of the PLC, after the
setting in the PLC is restored to the factory setting, users may need to repower the PLC so that they
can proceed with the operation.
If ISPSoft is connected to an AH series CPU module, the setting in the CPU module is not allowed to
be restored to the factory setting until the Enable Remote Run checkbox in the PLC Parameter
Setting window is selected and the parameters are downloaded. Please refer to section 3.3 and 3.4
3-166
Chapter 4 Quick Start
Table of Contents
4.1 Quick Start ........................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.1 Example .......................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Hardware ......................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.3 Program .......................................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Procedure for Creating a Project in ISPSoft ....................................... 4-3
4.3 Creating a Project .............................................................................. 4-4
4.4 Hardware Configuration .................................................................... 4-5
4.4.1 Configuring a Module......................................................................... 4-5
4.4.2 Parameter Setting for PLCs and Modules .............................................. 4-7
4.5 Creating a Program.......................................................................... 4-10
4.5.1 Adding a Ladder Diagram................................................................. 4-10
4.5.2 Basic Editing - Creating a Contact and a Coil ...................................... 4-12
4.5.3 Basic Editing - Inserting a Network and Typing an Instruction .............. 4-15
4.5.4 Basic Editing - Selection of a Network and Operation ........................... 4-17
4.5.5 Basic Editing - Connecting a Contact in Parallel ................................... 4-19
4.5.6 Basic Editing - Editing a Comment .................................................... 4-20
4.5.7 Basic Editing - Inserting an Applied Instruction ................................... 4-21
4.5.8 Basic Editing - Creating a Comparison Contact and Typing a Constant ... 4-23
4.5.9 Writing a Program ........................................................................... 4-24
4.5.10 Checking and Compiling a Program ................................................... 4-25
4.6 Testing and Debugging a Program ................................................... 4-26
4.6.1 Creating a Connection ..................................................................... 4-26
4.6.2 Downloading a Program and Parameters ............................................ 4-29
4.6.3 Connection Test .............................................................................. 4-31
4-1
4.1 Quick Start

The chapter provides a simple example, and leads users to create a traditional ladder diagram in
ISPSoft in a short time. However, in order to help users who are not familiar with IEC 61131-3
understand the functions provided by ISPSoft, and create a traditional ladder diagram, programming
concepts related to IEC 61131-3 are not introduced in this chapter. For example, POUs, function
blocks, variables, and etc. are not introduced. The concepts related to IEC 61131-3 will be
introduced in the following chapters.
4.1.1 Example
When the equipment operates, the parts on the conveyer are conveyed from left to right. If a sensor
senses that a part is under an injector, the PLC will send a trigger signal to the injector, and the
injector will injects the glue. How long the part will be injected is set externally, and is not controlled
by the program in the PLC. However, the program in the PLC must be able to turn the trigger signal
OFF so that the trigger signal can be sent next time. There are two injectors above the conveyer,
and the two injectors inject glue in the same way.
Besides, there is a sensor at the left side of the conveyer. When a part passes the sensor, the
sensor value increases by one increment. If the sensor value is 100, the internal completion flag will
be set to ON. The state of the flag can be used by other procedures later. However, the use of the
state of the flag is not introduced in this example.
4.1.2 Hardware
In this example, we use AH5x0 series host CPU- AHCPU530-EN, the AH16AP11R-5A with 8-point
digital I/O module, and AHBP04M1-5A with 4 slots as the main backplane. The following is an
example of I/O allocation table.
Type ID Description
Digital input X0.0 START button
Digital input X0.1 STOP button
Digital input X0.2 In position sensor 1
Digital input X0.3 In position sensor 2
Digital input X0.4 Counting sensor
Digital output Y0.0 Conveyer
Digital output Y0.1 Trigger signal for injector 1
Digital output Y0.2 Trigger signal for injector 2
4-2
Ch a pt er 4 Q u ic k Star t
4.1.3 Program
(1) When the START button (X0.0) is turned from OFF to ON, the internal operation flag is set to
ON, and the conveyer (Y0.0) starts to run. When the STOP button (X0.1) is turned from OFF to
ON, an error occurs (the error flag is ON), the operation flag is reset to OFF, and the conveyer
stops running.
(2) When in position sensor 1 (X0.2) is ON, the trigger signal for injector 1 (Y0.1) is set to ON.
When in position sensor 1 is OFF, the trigger signal for injector 1 is reset to OFF.
(3) When in position sensor 2 (X0.3) is ON, the trigger signal for injector 2 (Y0.2) is set to ON.
When in position sensor 2 is OFF, the trigger signal for injector 2 is reset to OFF.
(4) When the counting sensor (X0.4) is turned from OFF to ON, the sensor value increases by one
increment. If the sensor value is larger than or equal to 100, the internal completion flag will be
set to ON.
4.2 Procedure for Creating a Project in ISPSoft

The procedure for creating a project in ISPSoft is as follow. Users can adjust the procedure
according to the practical application and their habits.
 Hardware configuration
Users can set the parameters such as a range of latched devices and a port number in a PLC.
Besides, the users have to configure modules used with an AH500 series CPU module, and set
the parameters in these modules.
 Network configuration
If a system used adopts network architecture, or devices need to exchange data, users can
configure a network, a PLC Link, or an Ether Link easily through the network configuration tool
NWCONFIG in ISPSoft.
 Programming
After users write a program in ISPSoft, they can compile the program. If the compiling of a
program is unsuccessful, the messages in the Compile Message page can lead users to the
places where errors occur to check the program code.
 Test and debugging
Users can download a program which is compiled, a hardware configuration, and a network
configuration to a PLC. Besides, the users can test and debug the program online by means of
the functions provided by ISPSoft.
Owing to the fact that the example introduced in this chapter does not discuss a network
configuration, only the following procedure is carried out. The procedure will be introduced in the
following section.
4-3
4.3 Creating a Project

After ISPSoft is started, users can click the File menu, point to New, and click New to create a new
project. They can also create a new project by clicking on the toolbar after ISPSoft is started.
In the Create a New Project window, type a project name in the Project Name box and a path in
the Drive/Path box, select a PLC in the drop-down list boxes of Controller Type and PLC Type,
and click OK. (The PLC used in this example is AHCPU530-EN.)
After the project is created successfully, a project management area will appear at the left side of the
main screen. The relation between the items listed in the project management area is represented
by a hierarchical tree structure. If the project management area does not appear, the users can click
Workspace on the View menu, or click on the toolbar.
4-4
4.4 Hardware Configuration

After users double-click HWCONFIG in the project management area, the HWCONFIG window will
appear.
4.4.1 Configuring a Module

In the HWCONFIG window, there is an eight-slot backplane on which a CPU module and a power
supply module are installed. However, the backplane used in this example is the four-slot backplane
AHBP04M1-5A on which the digital I/O module AH16AP11R-5A is installed.
If users want to replace the backplane, they can right-click the left side of the rack in the system
configuration area, click Replace on the context menu, and double-click AHBP04M1-5A in the Rack
Selection window.
4-5
Unfold the Digital I/O Module section on the product list, find AH16AP11R-5A, and drag the
module to a vacant slot on the backplane in the system configuration area. After the module is
added successfully, the related information and the devices assigned to the module will be listed in
the table at the bottom of the window.
The system automatically assigns devices to a module which is added. If the devices assigned to a
module do no conform to what is expected, users can click the Input/Output Device Range cell for
the module, click in the cell, and type a device address in the Manual Assignment window.
4-6
4.4.2 Parameter Setting for PLCs and Modules

After AH16AP11R-5A is configured, users can set the parameters in the CPU module and the
parameters in the extension module. After the users double-click the CPU module or the extension
module, a corresponding window will appear.
After the CPU module is double-clicked, the PLC Parameter Setting window will appear. The users
can click the primary tabs at the top of the window, and the secondary tables at the bottom of the
window to set the parameters. In this example, the users only need to define the name of the CPU
module.
After the users click the CPU tab at the top of the window, and the Name tab at the bottom of the
window, they can type a name in the Name box. The users will find the default name in the Name
box is the same as the project name. Delete the default name, type “Main_Controller” in the Name
box, and click OK.
4-7
After the users double-click AH16AP11R-5A, the Parameter Setting window will appear.
4-8
After the Parameter Setting window is opened, the users can view the information related to the
module. The users can select the parameter type at the left side of the window, and then set the
parameter in the table at the right side of the window.
In this example, the default values are retained. Therefore, the step of setting the parameter in
AH16AP11R-5A is skipped.
The hardware configuration is not complete until the parameters in the CPU module and
AH16AP11R-5A are set. However, the configuration and the setting must be downloaded to the
CPU module so that they can take effect. The configuration and the setting are saved here, and will
be downloaded with the program in the project later.
If the users want to save the configuration and the setting, they can click Save on the File menu, or
on the toolbar. After the configuration and the setting are saved, the users can close the
HWCONFIG window.
*. Please refer to chapter 3 for more information about HWCONFIG.
4-9
4.5 Creating a Program

The following sections will lead users to create a traditional ladder diagram in ISPSoft. The contents
of the following sections include creating a POU, editing a traditional diagram, and compiling a
program. The users are expected to equip themselves with the basic abilities to create a traditional
ladder diagram in a short time.
4.5.1 Adding a Ladder Diagram

(1) Right-click Programs in the project management area and click New….
(2) Type a program name in the POU Name box, select the Ladder Diagram (LD) option button in
the Language section, and retain the other default values. Click OK after the setting is
complete. An item will be under Programs in the project management area. The item is a
program organization unit (POU).
4-10
(3) After the POU is added, a program editing window will appear in the main working area.
Local symbol table
Program editing area
After the program editing window is opened, the corresponding toolbar will appear in the
window. The functions are described below.
Icon Keyboard shortcut Function

None Switch to the Address mode
Shift+Ctrl+C Displaying/Hiding the comments on the networks
None Displaying/Hiding the commands on the devices
Adding a bookmark to the network selected or

Shift+Ctrl+B
deleting a bookmark from the network selected
Shift+Ctrl+P Going to the previous bookmarked position
Shift+Ctrl+N Going to the next bookmarked position
Ctrl+I Putting a network above the network selected
Shift+Ctrl+I Putting a network under the network selected
ESC Selection
Typing an instruction Inserting a contact
Typing an instruction Inserting a coil
Typing an instruction Inserting a comparison contact
Typing an instruction Selecting a type of comparison contact

Inserting a block logic instruction
Typing an instruction
(NP/PN/INV/FB_NP/FB_PN)
Selecting a type of block logic instruction
Shift+Ctrl+U Inserting an instruction or a function block
*. Please refer to section 4.5.3 for more information about typing an instruction.
4 - 11
4.5.2 Basic Editing - Creating a Contact and a Coil

(1) Click on the toolbar, and then move the mouse cursor to the red frame in network 1. The
mouse cursor appears as a contact when the mouse cursor is moved to the left side of the red
frame, the right side of the red frame, or the bottom of the red frame. Users can decide where
to insert a contact. If a ladder diagram is edited, the mouse cursor must be near a position
which is edited. Besides, an object inserted is arranged by the system automatically. Users
can not move the object at will.
In this example, users do not need to decide where to insert the contact. Therefore, the mouse
cursor can be near the red frame, and the users can click the left mouse button.
(2) Click on the toolbar, or press Esc on the keyboard. After the contact is double-clicked, a
drop-down list will appear. The items on the drop-down list are Normally Open, Normally
Close, Rising-edge Trigger, and Falling-edge Trigger. In this example, Rising-edge
Trigger is selected.
4-12
(3) Click the line at the right side of the contact, click on the toolbar, and move the mouse
cursor to the red frame. Likewise, the mouse cursor appears as a coil when the mouse cursor
is above or under the red frame. Users can decide where to insert the coil.
In this example, the users do not need to decide where to insert the coil. Therefore, the mouse
cursor can be near the red frame, and the users can click the left mouse button.
(4) Click on the toolbar, or press Esc on the keyboard. After the coil is double-clicked, a
drop-down list will appear. The items on the drop-down list are Out, Set, and Reset. In this
example, Set is selected.
4-13
(5) Click ??? above the contact, type a device address in the box, and press Enter on the
keyboard to jump to the next box in the network. After a device address is typed in the box, the
users can press Esc on the keyboard to complete the editing. In this example, X0.0 is typed in
the box for the contact, and M0 is typed in the box for the coil.
Additional remark
After users click a network and press Enter on the keyboard, they can edit a box. The users can edit
the next box in the network after they press Enter on the keyboard. Besides, the next network is
selected after the users press Tab on the keyboard. The users can edit a box with the keyboard.
After the editing is complete, the users can press Enter on the keyboard to jump to the next box. If
the users want to end the editing, they can press Esc on the keyboard.
If the users have declared symbols, users can type the symbols or clear the field and use the
drop-down list to select the symbols which can be assigned to the object.
The users can select a symbol by the mouse or the up/down key on the keyboard. Please refer to
chapter 6 for more information about symbols.
4-14
4.5.3 Basic Editing - Inserting a Network and Typing an Instruction

After on the toolbar is clicked, a network will be under the network selected. After on the
toolbar is clicked, a network will be put above the network selected. In this example, a network is
under network 1.
A contact and a coil can be created not only by clicking and on the toolbar, but also by
typing instructions.
(1) Click the line in network 2.
(2) Type the IL instruction “LD M0”. (The instruction is case-insensitive.) As soon as the IL
instruction is typed, a box which can be edited appears. After the typing of the IL instruction is
complete, users can press Enter on the keyboard or click OK at the right side of the box.
4-15
(3) Type the IL instruction “OUT Y0.0”, and write the program shown below.
Additional remark
A contact and a coil can be created by typing simple instructions. Please refer to the description
below. (The instructions typed are case-insensitive.)
 Inserting a normally-open contact (contact A): “A Device address”
 Inserting a normally-closed contact (contact B): “B Device address”
 Inserting an output coil (OUT): “O Device address”
When adding devices, press [Insert] on the keyboard to choose Insert or Replace mode. Use
[Insert] on the keyboard to input LD M5 on M1 position and M1 is replaced by M5 (see below).
4-16
4.5.4 Basic Editing - Selection of a Network and Operation

When selecting in the ladder diagram, users can press [Esc] on the keyboard, or click from the
toolbar. After the mouse cursor appears in select mode, click the selected item. Basic operating
steps are shown below.
 Select the entire network

 Select an input
 Select the section
 Select the output coil
 Select the block
If users want to select a group of devices, they can click a device, and drag it to draw a frame round
the group of devices. The users can also select the group of devices by clicking the first device,
pressing Ctrl+B on the keyboard, clicking the last device, and pressing Ctrl+B on the keyboard.
Users must draw a frame round devices which are in the same network, and the devices must be
adjacent to one another. Besides, input devices and output devices cannot be in the same frame.
If users want to select several networks, they can press Ctrl on the keyboard, and click the networks.
The users can also select a range of networks by pressing Shift on the keyboard, clicking the first
network within the range, and the last network within the range.
4-17
Right-click the selected item and execute basic operations from the quick start menu.
Item Function
Undoing the last action
Undo
(The number of previous actions that can be undone is 20.)
Redo Redoing an action which has been undone
Cut Cutting a device, a block, or a network
Copy Copying a device, a block, or a network
Paste an object which has been copied or cut on the present
Paste
position
Pasting an object at the right side of the position selected
Paste right
(The object will be connected to the position selected in series.)
Pasting an object under the position selected
Paste under
(The object will be connected to the position selected in parallel.)
Delete Deleting a device, a block, or a network
Activate Network Set the selected network to activate
Inactivate Network Set the selected network to Inactivate
To generate variable automatically and use on pins for function
Variable Generated
blocks
Add to Device Use on the selected pins to quickly add the device in the monitoring
Monitoring Table table
Users can proceed with the operation in the example.

(1) Select network 1, right-click network 1, and click Copy on the context menu.
(2) Select network 2, right-click network 2, and click Paste on the context menu. A copy of network
1 will be put above network 2, and network 2 will become network 3.
4-18
4.5.5 Basic Editing - Connecting a Contact in Parallel

(1) Click on the toolbar, and then move the mouse cursor to the input contact in network 2.
The mouse cursor will appear as a contact. Move the mouse cursor to the button of the input
contact in network 2. After the mouse cursor appears as , users can click the left mouse
button. A contact will be connected to the input contact in network 2 in parallel.
(2) Write the program in network 2 shown below in the way described above.
Additional remark
After users select a group of contacts, they can connect a contact to the group of contacts in the way
described above.
4-19
4.5.6 Basic Editing - Editing a Comment

(1) Make sure that on the toolbar is pressed. Click the position above a device name, type a
comment in the box, and press Enter on the keyboard.
(2) Make sure that on the toolbar is pressed. Click the position under a network number, and
then type a comment in the box. If users want to start a new line of text at a specific point, they
can press Shift+Enter on the keyboard. Press Enter on the keyboard after the editing is
complete.
(3) Write the program shown below in the way described above.
4-20
4.5.7 Basic Editing - Inserting an Applied Instruction

Put network 6 under network 5, and then write the program shown below. Users can insert an
applied instruction in one of the three ways described below.
 Method 1
Click the position where an instruction will be inserted, type the instruction (INC in this example),
and press Enter on the keyboard.
 Method 2
Unfold the APIs section in the project management area, find the instruction type, and unfold the
instruction type section.
Select the instruction (INC in this example) which will be inserted, and then drag it to the position
where it will be inserted.
4-21
 Method 3
Click the position where an instruction will be inserted, click on the toolbar, select the
instruction (INC in this example) which will be inserted in the API/FB window, and click Insert.
After the instruction is inserted successfully, the users can assign a device address to the
operand, and write the program shown below.
4-22
4.5.8 Basic Editing - Creating a Comparison Contact and Typing a

Constant
A comparison contact can be inserted not only in one of the three ways described in section 4.5.7,
but also by means of the following steps. Users need to put network 7 under network 6, and write
the program shown below.
(1) Click on the toolbar, and then select a type (>= in this example).
(2) Click on the toolbar, and then move the mouse cursor to the position where the
comparison contact will be inserted. The mouse cursor appears as a comparison contact when
the mosue is moved to the left side of the red frame, the right side of the red frame, or the
bottom of the red frame. The users can decide where to insert the comparison contact. After
the users decided on a position, they can click the left mouse button to insert the comparison
contact.
Write the program shown below in the way described above. In WPLSoft, a decimal value is
preceded by K, and a hexadecimal value is preceded by H. If users want to type a decimal value in
ISPSoft, they can type it directly. If users wan to type a hexadeicmal value in ISPSoft, they have to
type “16#” and the hexadecimal value, e.g. 16#7FFF. In ISPSoft, an octal value is preceded by 8#,
and a binary value is preceded by 2#.
4-23
4.5.9 Writing a Program

The creation of a traditional ladder diagram in ISPSoft has been introduced. Users can write the
program shown below in the way described in the previous sections. Owning to the fact that the
program has not been compiled, the mother line at the left side of the ladder diagram is red during
the writing of the program. The following sections will introduce how to compile the program, and
how to download the program which has been compiled to the CPU module to test the program.
*1. The program above is saved in the folder denoted by …\ISPSoft x.xx\Project\Example\Gluing_System_C.
*2. Please refer to chapter 10 for more information about creating a ladder diagram.
4-24
4.5.10 Checking and Compiling a Program

After users write a program, they can check the syntax of the programming language or compile the
program. The syntax and the structure in the present window will be checked after the Check
function is enabled. The whole project will be checked after the Compile function is enabled. If there
is no error in the project, an execution code will be generated automatically. After the program is
compiled successfully, the mother line at the left side of the ladder diagram will become black.
 Check
Click Check on the Compile menu, or on the toolbar.
 Compile
Click Compile on the Compile menu, or on the toolbar.
After the check is complete, the Compile Message page shows the result related to the check. If
there is any error in the project, the Compile Message page will show the related message. After
the message is clicked, the system will automatically lead users to the place where the error occurs.
The users can enable the Check function or the Compile function after the error is eliminated.
4-25
4.6 Testing and Debugging a Program

4.6.1 Creating a Connection
Before a program and parameters are downloaded to a PLC or monitored online, ISPSoft must be
connected to the PLC. In this example, ISPSoft is connected to AHCPU530-EN host CPU through a
USB cable.
For those already connected to the host, please skip to section 4.6.2 on details regarding download
program and configuration parameters.
(1) Install the modules on the main backplane in accordance with the hardware configuration in
HWCONFIG. Make sure that the wiring is correct, and then power the CPU module.
(2) Connect the CPU module to the computer through a USB cable. If the USB driver for the
AH500 series CPU module has been installed on the computer, Delta PLC will appear in the
Device Manager Window, and a port number will be assigned to Delta PLC. Please refer to
appendix A for more information about installing a USB driver.
(3) Make sure that COMMGR is started, and the icon representing COMMGR is displayed on the
system tray. If the icon representing COMMGR is not displayed on the system tray, users can
start COMMGR by clicking the shortcut on the Start menu (Start>Programs>Delta Industrial
Automation>Communication>COMMGR).
(4) Double-click the icon representing COMMGR on the system tray to open the COMMGR
window. Click Add in the COMMGR window to create a driver.
4-26
(5) Set the parameters in the Driver Properties window, and then click OK.
Type a driver name in the Driver Name box.

Select USB (Virtual COM) in the Type drop-down list box in the Connection Setup
section.
Select a communication port in the COM Port drop-down list box. If the first two steps are
complete, the PLC which is connected and its communication port will be displayed in the
COM Port drop-down list box.
Users can select the number of times the sending of a command is retried if a connection
error occurs in the Time of Auto-retry box, and select an interval of retrying the sending of
a command in the Time Interval of Auto-retry box.
(6) After the status of the driver displayed in the window becomes OK, the window can be closed.
The icon representing COMMGR will still be displayed on the system tray.
Start ISPSoft, and then click Communication Settings… on the Tools menu. In the
Communication Setting window, select the driver which has been created in the Driver
drop-down list box, appear, and select 0 in the Station Address drop-down list box, and click
OK. The information about the driver will be displayed in the status bar in ISPSoft.
4-27
(7) Click System Information on the PLC menu. ISPSoft will retrieve related information from the
PLC. If the computer communicates with the CPU module normally, the related information
retrieved from the PLC will be displayed in the System Information window.
4-28
4.6.2 Downloading a Program and Parameters

If ISPSoft is connected to a PLC normally, the parameters and the program in the project can be
downloaded to the PLC. First, start ISPSoft and open the project created in the previous sections. In
this example, two types of parameters are downloaded to the CPU module. They are the hardware
configuration and the program.
 Downloading the hardware configuration
(1) Double-click HWCONFIG in the project management area to open the HWCONFIG window.
(2) The hardware configuration is displayed in the window. Before the hardware configuration is
downloaded to the CPU module, users have to make sure that the actual hardware
configuration is the same as the hardware configuration in the window.
4-29
(3) After the users click Download on the Option menu, or on the toolbar, the Transfer
Items window will appear. The hardware configuration will be downloaded to the CPU
module after OK is clicked.
(4) After the hardware configuration is downloaded to the CPU module successfully, the BUS
FAULT LED indicator on the CPU module will be OFF. The users can close the HWCONFIG
window. If the BUS FAULT LED indicator on the CPU module is still ON or blinking, the CPU
4-30
module is in an abnormal state. Please make sure that the actual hardware configuration is
the same as the hardware configuration in the HWCONFIG window again, or refer to the
operation manual for more information about eliminating the error. Please refer to chapter 3
for more information about HWCONFIG.
 Downloading the program
After the program is compiled successfully, the users can click the PLC menu, point to Transfer,
and click Download. The users can also click on the toolbar after the program is compiled
successfully. Select the Program and related Comments checkboxes in the Transfer Setup
window so that the program in the CPU module can be uploaded later, and then click OK.
4.6.3 Connection Test

After a program is downloaded to a PLC, users can monitor the execution status of the PLC through
ISPSoft. There are two monitoring modes that ISPSoft provide. One is the device monitoring mode,
and the other is the program monitoring mode.
Monitoring mode Description
Users can monitor the statuses of the devices in the PLC through
the monitoring table. In this mode, ISPSoft only needs to update the
Device monitoring mode statuses of the devices. The present program in ISPSoft does not
need to be the same as the program in the PLC.
In this mode, the operating status of the program is displayed in the
program editing window. As a result, the present program in ISPSoft
Program monitoring mode must be the same as the program in the PLC.
*. The device monitoring function can be enabled independently. However, if the program monitoring function is
enabled, the device monitoring function is also enabled.
After users click Online Mode on the PLC menu, or on the toolbar, the online monitoring
function will be enabled. The system will also enable the device monitoring mode and the program
monitoring mode.
4-31
In the online monitoring mode, users can view the present scan time, the communication status, and
the status of the PLC in the status bar in ISPSoft.
Besides, the present statuses of the devices will be displayed in the original program editing window
after the program monitoring function is enabled.
Users can change the operating status of a PLC by the RUN/STOP switch on the PLC. They can
also change the operating status of the PLC through the functions provided by ISPSoft. After users
click Run on the PLC menu or on the toolbar, the PLC will begin to run. The PLC will stop
running after Stop on the PLC menu or on the toolbar is clicked.
In the online monitoring mode, users can select a device, right-click the device, and click an item on
the context menu. During a test, users can change the status of a device or the value in a device by
clicking an item on the context menu.
Before the status of a device is changed, users have to make sure that the operation
4-32
The items on the context menu are described below. Force on the context menu only applies to
input contacts and output contacts.
Item Description
Set On Setting the contact selected to ON
Set Off Setting the contact selected to OFF
No matter what the state of the contact selected is, the system set the
Rising-edge Trigger
contact to OFF, and then set it to ON.
Falling-edge Trigger
contact to ON, and then set it to OFF.
Force Forcing an input contact or output contact ON or OFF
Force Device List Forcing several input contacts or output contacts in the tables ON or OFF
If users want to change the value in a device, they can click the device, right-click the device, click
Change Present Value on the context menu, and set a present value in the Enter Present Value
window.
The Enter Present Value window is described below.
4-33
 Message text.
 Select input number format: 16 bits/32 bits/64 bits.
 Input present value for modification.
 To modify present device name or symbol name.
 Log for modified number (Format shown: Device name+ modified value)
 When binary mode is enabled, use the mouse to set ON/OFF state for each bit.
 Click OK to apply the setting value, and click Cancel to close the setting window.
 Click to open or hide binary mode.
In this example, X0.0~X0.15 and Y0.0~Y0.15 are input devices and output devices assigned to the
digital I/O module AH16AP11R-5A. After the parameters in the hardware are downloaded to the
CPU module, the states of X0.0~X0.15 will be the same as the states of the inputs on the actual
module. Even if users set X0.0~X0.15 to ON or OFF in the program editing window, the states of
X0.0~X0.15 will be updated by the actual input signals.
However, an input contact can be forced ON or OFF during a test. Users can click an input contact
or output contact which will be set, right-click the contact, point to Force on the context menu, and
select On (X/Y), Off (X/Y), Release (X/Y), or Release All. If an input contact or output contact is
forced ON or OFF, a lock symbol will appear at the left side of the contact.
4-34
Force Description
On (X/Y) Forcing the input contact or output contact selected ON
Off (X/Y) Forcing the input contact or output contact selected OFF
Release (X/Y) Releasing the contact from the locked state
Release All Releasing all the contacts from the locked states
If an output contact in the program is forced ON or OFF, the output state of this contact will not be
affected by the program execution result.
*. If the online monitoring function is disabled, the contacts will not be automatically released from the locked states.
As a result, users have to check whether the contacts need to be released from the locked states after the test is
complete.
There are two ways to create a monitoring table. Users can create a monitoring table online or
offline.
 Method 1
Click New Devices Table on the PLC menu, or on the toolbar.
 Method 2
Right-click Device Monitoring Table in the project management area and click Add.
Type a table name in the Add Monitor Table window, and then click OK. An item will be under
Device Monitor Table in the project management area. If users want to open the monitoring table,
4-35
they can double-click the item. Users can create several monitoring tables in the project, and the
monitoring tables created will be saved with the project.
After the item is double-clicked, a window will appear. The users can add items which will be
monitored to the window. If the users want to add an item to the window, they have to double-click
the blank in the monitoring table, or type a device name directly, and type a start address and the
number of devices which will be monitored in the Device Monitor Input window. Please notice that
100 items at most can be added to a monitoring table.
When adding a device item, press [Insert] on the keyboard to select Insert or Replace mode; users
can find the current selected state in the ISPSoft status column.
When choosing Insertion mode, the item added will be on top of the selected item in the monitoring
table; when choosing Replace mode, the item added will overwrite the selected item in the
monitoring table.
If the users want to hide certain columns in the monitoring table, they can right-click the monitoring
table, point to Set the Fields, and unselect certain items. After an item is unselected, the
corresponding column will disappear.
4-36
Description on the columns of the monitoring table.

Column Description
Source The source of a symbol
Identifier The identifier of a symbol
Device name The name of a device monitored
Status If a bit device or a contact is monitored, the state will be ON or OFF.
Data type If a symbol is monitored, the data type of the symbol will be displayed.
Value (16 bits) In the online mode, a 16-bit value is displayed.
Value (32 bits) In the online mode, a 32-bit value is displayed.
Float (32-bit
In the online mode, a 32-bit floating-point number is displayed.
floating-point )
Float(64-bit
In the online mode, a 64-bit floating-point number is displayed.
floating-point )
Radix Users can select a format in which a value is represented.
Comment The comments on a device or the comment on a symbol is displayed.
After the monitoring table is created, the users can monitor the items in the monitoring table in the
online mode. Besides, after the users right-click an item in the monitoring table in the online mode, a
context menu which is the same as the context menu which will after a device in the program editing
window is clicked will appear. The users can change the state of the item or the value in the item by
clicking an item on this context menu.
4-37
The program created in this chapter can be tested and debugged through the monitoring table
created in this section. Please refer to chapter 17 for more information about testing and debugging
a program.
4-38
Chapter 5 POU and Task
Table of Contents
5.1 Program Organization Units and Tasks .............................................. 5-2

5.2 Program Organization Units .............................................................. 5-3
5.2.1 Program Architecture and Types ...................................................... 5-3
5.2.2 POUs in ISPSoft ............................................................................. 5-3
5.3 Tasks ................................................................................................. 5-5
5.3.1 Managing the Tasks in ISPSoft ......................................................... 5-5
5.3.2 Tasks in the Project Management Area ........................................... 5-10
5.3.3 Executing the POUs Assigned to a Task ........................................... 5-12
5.4 Managing a POU .............................................................................. 5-14
5.4.1 Creating and Setting a POU ........................................................... 5-14
5.4.2 POU Active State .......................................................................... 5-17
5.4.3 Delete and Copy POU ................................................................... 5-18
5.4.4 Set and Remove POU Password ..................................................... 5-20
5.4.5 Exporting POU Program ................................................................ 5-20
5.4.6 Importing POU Program ................................................................ 5-21
5.4.7 Exporting Function Block POU ........................................................ 5-22
5.4.8 Importing Function Block POU ....................................................... 5-23
5.5 Task Management ............................................................................ 5-24
5.5.1 Setting Task Description and Condition for Interruption .................... 5-26
5.5.2 Configuration of POU .................................................................... 5-31
5.5.3 POU Order .................................................................................. 5-32
5.6 Example ........................................................................................... 5-33
5.6.1 Programming TASK and POU ......................................................... 5-33
5.6.2 Example of an Interrupt Subroutine in a DVP Series PLC ................... 5-38
5.6.3 Examples of AH5x0 Series Interrupt Programs ................................. 5-44
5-1
5.1 Program Organization Units and Tasks

Program Organization Units (POUs) and tasks are important programming concepts related to IEC
61131-3. They upgrade programming from traditional program writing to project management. The
difference between traditional ladder diagrams and IEC 61131-3 is described below.
Traditional ladder diagram IEC 61131-3
1. A single program is divided into several independent
program organization units.
Main program
2. A program organization unit which has been created is
assigned to a cyclic task.
1. A subroutine is a function block.
General Subroutine 2. A function block which has been created can be called by a
program organization unit.
1. Different interrupt subroutines are independent program
organization units.
Interrupt subroutine
2. A program organization unit which has been created is
assigned to an interrupt task.
Traditional ladder diagrams and IEC 61131-3 are represented by the following architectures. In the
classic architecture, users write a source code. In the IEC 61131-3 architecture, a program is
divided into several program organization units. Every program organization unit can be developed
independently, and can be assigned a task.
If a control system reaches a certain scale, the internal control procedures will be quite complex,
and the relation between the procedures will be closer. If the classic architecture is adopted, a lot of
time and manpower must be invaded in developing and maintaining a program. However, in the IEC
61131-3 architecture, the program organization units are reusable and modular. Besides, the
program organization units can be integrated easily by means of the management of the tasks. The
concepts related to program organization units and tasks will be introduced in the following section.
5-2
Ch a pt er 5 PO U an d Tas k
5.2 Program Organization Units

5.2.1 Program Architecture and Types
Program organization units are basic elements of a program in a PLC. They are different from a
traditional program in a PLC. The characteristic of the program architecture introduced by IEC
61131-3 is that a program is divided into several units. These units are called program organization
units.
In the classic architecture, a source code for a PLC is composed of all procedures, including
subroutines. If the size of a program becomes larger, the maintenance of the program and the
debugging of the program will be a burden. In the IEC 61131-3 architecture, a program is divided
into several units according to the functions or characteristics. It is convenient to develop and
maintain a program. Besides, owing to the fact that program organization units are modular, different
program organization units can be developed by different designers. It benefits the distribution of
manpower and the execution of the project.
There are two types of POUs in ISPSoft. They are programs (PROGs) and function blocks (FBs).
 Program (PROG)
A POU of the program type plays a role according to the task to which it is assigned. If a program
POU is assigned to a cyclic task, the POU of the program type acts as a main program. If the POU
of the program type is assigned to an interrupt task, the POU of the program type acts as a
subroutine. Besides, a POU of the program type can call a function block (FB).
 Function block (FB)
A static symbol can be declared in a function block (FB). As a result, the value of the symbol after
an operation can be retained. Owing to the fact that the operation is performed on the value
memorized in the function block and an input value, the output values may be different even if the
input values are the same. Besides, a function block can call another function block.
The relation among POUs is shown below. A function (FC) is a type of POU. Owing to the fact that
ISPSoft currently does not support Function POU, this part will not be covered in this chapter.
5.2.2 POUs in ISPSoft

All POUs created by users are listed in the program management area. The POUs of the program
type and the POUs of the function block type are managed separately. Besides, the programming
language in which a POU is written determines the icon representing the POU, and the information
about the POU is put at the end of the POU name.
After a POU in the project management area is double-clicked, a POU editing window will appear.
The POU editing window is composed of two parts. A table of local symbols is at the upper part of
the window, and the body of a program is at the lower part of the window. Besides, the editing
5-3
environment at the lower part of the window varies with the programming language used. Please
refer to the following sections for more information about symbol tables and program editing.
The icons representing POUs are described below.

Icon Description
The POU is a ladder diagram (LD).
The POU is an instruction list (IL).
The POU is a function block diagram (FBD).
The POU is a structured text (ST).
The POU is a sequential function chart (SFC).
The POU is a continuous function chart (CFC).
If the icon representing a POU is gray, the POU is disabled. A POU which is disabled
is skipped when the program is compiled, and is not executed.
If the icon representing a POU is marked with a red cross, the POU is not assigned to
any task. A POU which is not assigned to any task is skipped when the program is
compiled, and is not executed.
*. Please refer to section 5.4.2 for more information about enabling a POU. Please refer to the following section for
more information about tasks.
5-4
5.3 Tasks
Every POU of the program type is assigned to a specific task. The tasks determine the order in
which the POUs of the program type are executed or enabled. The Task is like a mission. In other
words, every POU of the program type is like a basketball player, and the tasks are the roles that the
POUs play.
5.3.1 Managing the Tasks in ISPSoft

In ISPSoft, not all the POUs of the program type in the project are executed. A POU of the program
type will be executed after it is assigned to a task, and the task determined how the POU is
executed. When a POU is not assigned to a task, the POU is refer to as a source code saved in a
project, but not to be translated into an execution code. Only POUs of the program type need to be
assigned to tasks, and function blocks are called by POUs.
The characteristic of the IEC 61131-3 architecture is that a program is divided into several
independent POUs. All POUs are rearranged to scan as execution code for compiling and the
combination is based on the TASK allocation status.
In ISPSoft, a POU is assigned to one TASK, however, DVPxxMC series can assign a POU to
multiple tasks, but the same task can allocate to more than one POU and the allocated POU can
also assign the execute order in task; when users add a POU, a task has to be assigned by default.
Applicable
AS/AH/DVP DVPxxMC
Model
Work
A POU is assigned to one task A POU is assigned to multiple tasks
Management
Periodic, Timer Interrupt and Freewheeling ,Cyclic and Triggered
Operation
Condition for Interrupt by Event
For AS, AH and DVP series, the TASK operation can be categorized into three types: Periodic,
Timer Interrupt and Condition for Interrupt.
(1) Periodic
For POU assigned to periodic task, the execution is simply to scan back and forth. Since there
is only one periodic task in DVP series, therefore, all POUs been periodically scanned are
assigned to this task; while AH series provides 32 periodic tasks for selection with number from
0 ~31. The scanning starts with small number as number one priority and AH series supports
API command (TKON and TKOFF) to control task. Users can adopt the command to activate or
stop a task during PLC operation.
The POU is created in SFC language and can only be allocated in periodic task and not task
with interrupts.
(2) Timer Interrupt

For POU assigned to a task with timer interrupt, the function is similar to the subroutine of timer
interrupt. When the timer interrupt has reached its time, all the POUs assigned to this task is
executed according to the combination order. The task number with timer interrupt depends on
the type of PLC used. In addition, the selected PLC type also determines the number of task
group with timer interrupt based on the support of interrupt source groups.
(3) Condition for Interrupt

There are several types of condition for interrupt. For example, external interrupt, I/O interrupts,
count interrupt and etc. Since different types of PLCs provides different interrupt service and
amount. Thus, users have to make sure which interrupt modes are supported by the selected
5-5
PLC type. When POU is allocated to task with condition for interrupt, the function is similar to
subroutine interrupt. When the condition for interrupt is formed, for example the count has
reached setting value, then all the POU assigned to that task will execute in order.
For DVPxxMC series, a POU can assign to multiple tasks and the same POU can repeatedly assign
to the same task. While one task can assign to more than one POU and the allocated POU can also
assign the execution order in the task. Three ways regarding DVPxxMC series task operation
include freewheeling, cyclic and triggered by event. The following introduces ways of task
operation and execution according to priority.
 Task Operation
(1) Freewheeling
The task is handled as soon as the program running starts. The task will be restarted automatically
in the next cycle after one execution cycle ends.
 Executing freewheeling task:
P riorit y Tas k exe cut io n t ime 1 Task e xec ution time 2
Hig h F ree wh e eli ng

tas k IO Use r program IO Us er prog ram
System Syst em Syst em

processin g p ro cessing p ro cessing
Low
Note: There is no fixed execution time for the freewheeling task. So the values of task execution
time 1 and task execution time 2 may not be equal in the above figure
(2) Cyclic
The cyclic task executes base on the setting of time interval in TASK Manager.
 Executing cyclic task:
P riorit y Time int erval b etween tas ks Time int erva l between tas k s
Hig h Cy clic Re ma in in g Remaining

IO Use r program IO Us er prog ra m
t ask int erv al int erval
Sys te m Sys te m Sy s tem

Low proce ss ing proce ss ing proc es sing
IO: IO means I/O refresh. I/O includes local I/O points and left-side and right-side extension module
data and CANopen data. The data can be specified to refresh before the set task is executed. If not
specified, the data will be refreshed during the system processing.
User Program: User Program stands for user program execution which is based on the execution
sequences of programs assigned in a task.
Remaining interval:
When the controller is to perform system processing, the low-priority task is executed first if any and
then the system processing is performed.
System processing:
The controller will perform the system processing which includes Ethernet, RS232 and RS485
communication processing after all task requests are completed.
5-6
The four terms mentioned above have the same meanings as those in the following sections.
Note: If the cycle defined in the cyclic task is too short, the task will immediately repeat
execution once finishing the user program but will not execute other low priority task or
work on the system, and this may affect the execution on all tasks. If the task has setup
watchdog timer for program scan, this will cause response timeout by the timer and the
controller will be in Error state and stops executing the user program; if the task did not
setup watchdog timer for program scan, the controller will not be able to execute the system,
causing problems like communication timeout.
(3) Task triggered by event

An event task is executed once just when the specified event happens. The timing for execution of
an event task depends on the timing for occurring of the event and the priority level of the event
task.
 Executing an event task:
Tas k ex ec ution
c ondit ion met
P riorit y Tas k exe cut ion t ime
High Tas k trig g ered

by ev en t IO User program
Sy stem Sy stem
process ing pr ocess ing
L ow
 Events that are triggered in the following ways:
- Motion event (Motion control task)

- Rising edge or falling edge of local input points (I0~I7 and I10~I17)
- CANopen SYNC signal
- Z pulse rising edge of incremental encoder 1 or encoder 2
The condition for the second-time execution is ignored when the condition required for execution of
the event task is met again before the event task is completed. The period before an event task is
completed is the course while the event task is being executed or is waiting to be executed.
 Executing Task According to Priority
The controller can not perform multiple tasks simultaneously. Every task must be given a priority
level and they are executed according to preset priorities. Priority level can be set within the range of
1 to 24. (1 is the highest priority and 24 is the lowest priority.) The priority level of each task must be
unique. The task with higher priority takes priority to perform. The high-priority task can interrupt the
low-priority task.
We recommend that the task which has a high requirement of real time should be given a high
priority and the task which has a low requirement of real time should be given a low priority. The
priority of the default motion control task built in ISPSoft is 1 by default.
5-7
 Executing two tasks at the same time (Cyclic and freewheeling)
Priority Time interval between tasks Time int erval between t asks
High Cyclic task User User

( Priority 1) IO IO
program program
1 2 5 6
Task execution Task execution Task execution Task execut ion
condition met finished condit ion met finished
Task execu tion tim e Task execu tion t im e Task e xecut ion time
Fre ewh eelin g task User User User User

( Priority 2) Pause IO IO Pause IO program
program program program
3 4 7 8
Task execution Task execut ion
Task execut ion Task execution Task execut ion
condition met condition met finished condition met
finished
Sys tem Sy stem Sys tem Sys tem

proces sing pr ocess ing proces sing proc ess ing
Low
① The execution conditions for the cyclic task and freewheeling task are met at the same time.
The cyclic task is executed first because of its higher priority.
○
2 E A When the cyclic task execution is finished, the freewheeling task execution starts.
○
3
A E A The controller will execute the system processing if there is no other task after the execution of
the freewheeling task is completed.
○
4
A E A The execution of the freewheeling task continues since the high-priority cyclic task request has
not arrived.
○
5 The cyclic task interrupts the freewheeling task execution and the controller executes the cyclic
A E A
task because of the arrival of the high-priority cyclic task request during the execution of the
freewheeling task.
○
6
A E A The controller continues to execute the part of the low-priority freewheeling task, which has not
been executed yet when the execution of the cyclic task is completed.
○
7 When the execution of the freewheeling task is completed, the controller executes the system
A E A
processing due to no other task request.
○
8
A E A When the system processing is completed, the execution of the freewheeling task continues
due to no high-priority cyclic task request.
5-8
 Executing mixture of three tasks (Event, Cyclic and Freewheeling task)
Task exe cut ion t ime

P riorit y
Hig h Task trigg ered by

User
e ve nt The event task has not be en t rig gered IO
( P rio rit y 1 ) program
8 9
Task execution Task execution
condition met finished
Task execu tion time Task execution time

Task execut io n time Tas k exec uti on tim e
F re ewh eelin g task User User User User User

( Priority 2)
IO program IO program IO program Pau se program IO program
1 2 4 Task 5 6 10 12
Task execution Task execution Task execution execution Task execution Task execution Task execution
condition met finished condition met finished condition met finished condition met
Time int erval between tasks Time interval between tasks Time interval between tasks
Cyclic task User User

(Priority 3) Pause IO P ause IO program
program
3 7 11
Task execution Task execution Task execution
condition met Task execution
finished condition met finished
Syst em System Syste m System

p ro cessing processing proce ssin g processing
Low
○
1 When the conditions for execution of the freewheeling task and cyclic task are both met, the
A E A
freewheeling task is executed first because the priority of the freewheeling task is higher.
○
2
A E A The cyclic task execution starts when the freewheeling task execution is completed.
○
3 When the cyclic task execution is completed, the controller executes the system processing due
A E A
to no other task request.
○
4
A E A The freewheeling task is executed when the system processing is completed.
○
5 E A When the freewheeling task execution is completed, the controller executes the system
processing due to no other task request.
○
6 The freewheeling task is executed when the system processing is completed.
A E A
○
7
A E A The freewheeling task execution continues because the freewheeling task has a higher priority
than the cyclic task although the execution condition for the cyclic task is met. And the cyclic task
waits to execute.
○
8
A E A The event task interrupts the freewheeling task execution because the event task has the
highest priority and the execution condition for the event task is met.
○
9
A E A The controller continues to execute the part of the low-priority freewheeling task, which has not
been executed yet when the event task execution is completed.
○
10 The freewheeling task execution is completed. The controller executes the cyclic task since the
A E A
cyclic task request in ⑦ is not responded yet.
○
11 The cyclic task execution is completed. The controller executes the system processing due to
A E A
no other task request.
5-9
5.3.2 Tasks in the Project Management Area

The POUs which are assigned to tasks are listed in the Tasks section in the project management
area, and the POUs which are not assigned to tasks are not listed in the Tasks section. The order in
which the POUs listed in a task section are arranged is the order in which the POUs are executed.
Take the project for an AH500 series CPU module below for example. There are 9 POUs of the
program type. The assignment of the POUs of the program type to tasks is as follows.
Task name POU Execution

Owning to the fact that Prog2 and Prog3 are
Not assigned Prog2 and Prog3 not assigned to tasks, Prog2 and Prog3 are
not executed.
The smaller the task number is, the earlier the
Cyclic (0) Prog6 and Prog4
task is executed. As a result, the order in
which Prog6, Prog4, Prog5, and Prog7 are
Cyclic (1) Prog5 and Prog7
scanned is Prog6Prog4Prog5 Prog7.
If the condition of the interrupt is met, Prog1
I/O interrupt (0) Prog1
will be executed once.
Timed interrupt 1 is triggered every specific
Timed interrupt 1 (253) Prog8 and Prog9 period of time. The order in which Pog8 and
Prog9 are executed is Prog8Prog9.
*. The setting of the condition for an interrupt will be introduced in section 5.5. Please refer to instructions for PLCs
Task name
POUs assigned to the

task
POUs which are not

assigned to tasks
For DVPxxMC series, the task name appears to be a bit different with priority and type added. The
following projects has established 9 POUs in total and the task allocation are described below.
The priority order and task type determine the task execution order.
5-10
TASK TASK
POU Execution
Priority Level Type
The POU is not executed,

Not allocated Prog1
because the Task is not assigned.
When executing, the program

Triggered by
Priority: 1 Prog5, Prog7 scans from Prog5  Prog7 (back
Event
and forth)

Prog6, Prog6,
Priority: 2 Freewheeling scans from Prog6  Prog6 
Prog4
Prog4 (back and forth)

Priority: 3 Cyclic Prog3, Prog8 scans from Prog3  Prog8 (back
and forth)
Priority: 4 Cyclic Prog2, Prog9 scans from Prog2  Prog9 (back
and forth)
5 - 11
5.3.3 Executing the POUs Assigned to a Task

More one POU can be assigned to the same task, and the order in which the POUs listed in a task
section in the project management area are arranged is the order in which the POUs are executed.
Please refer to the following example. There are four POUs in the project. These POUs are
described below.
POU name Description

Prog0 When M0 is ON, the value in D0 is 0.
OUTPUT When M0 is ON, the value in Y0 is the value in D0.
The programs in the POUs are as follows.
Suppose the four POUs of the program type are assigned to cyclic task (0). The arrangement of the
POUs is shown below. The order in which these POUs are executed is
Prog0Prog1Prog2OUTPUT. The value in D0 in OUTPUT depends on the program in Prog2.
When M0 is ON, the value in D0 in OUTPUT is 2. After the value in D0 is transferred to Y0, the value
in Y0 will be 2. In other words, Y0.1 will be ON after a scan cycle is complete. The equivalent
program is shown below.
5-12
If Prog2 is moved above Prog1, and Prog0 is removed from the Cyclic (0) section, the program in
Prog0 will not be translated into an execution code, and the order in which the POUs are listed in the
Cyclic (0) section will be Prog2Prog1OUTPUT. The value in D0 in OUTPUT depends on the
program in Prog1. When M0 is ON, the value in Y0 is 1. In other words, Y0.0 will be ON after a scan
cycle is complete.
5-13
5.4 Managing a POU

5.4.1 Creating and Setting a POU
(1) If users want to create a POU of the program type, they have to right-click Programs in the
project management area and click New…. If users want to create a POU of the function block
type, they have to right-click Function Blocks in the project management area and click
New….
 Adding a POU of the program type
 Adding a POU of the function block type
(2) The users have to set the attributes of the POU added in the window which appears. The
attributes of the POU of the program type are slightly different from those of the POU of the
function block type, and they are described below. Users can choose the task types from the
drop-down menu base on the selected PLC series.
5-14
 POU Name: Users can type a POU name in this box.

(a) Special marks and spaces can not be used. For example, *, #, ?, \, %, @, and etc. can
not be used.
(b) A POU name is composed of thirty characters at most. Users have to notice that a
Chinese character occupies two characters.
(c) Underlines can be used, but they can not be used continuously or put at the end of a
POU name. For example, “POU_1” is a legal name, but “POU__1” and “POU_1_” are
illegal names.
 Task: POU is created and can assign a task type. For DVPxxMC series, the content
appears to be different (see below).
DVPxxMC
 Password: If users want to set a password, they have to type the same passwords in the
two boxes. English letters, numerical digits, and special marks can be typed in
the boxes.
 Lock (Permanently): This function can lock the function block permanently. A copy of the
project is required if Lock (Permanently) is selected. Users can right-click Attributes on the
POU item after adding a function block (FB POU).
 Language: Users have to select a programming language in which the POU is written. (The
language may vary according to the selected PLC series)
5-15
 Comment: Users can type a comment on the POU in this box.
*. If the POU created is a POU of the program type, the Active checkbox will be in the window. The function of the
Active checkbox will be introduced in section 5.4.2.
(3) After the setting is complete, the users can click OK. If the POU created is a POU of the
program type, the POU will be listed in the Programs section and the default task section. If
the POU created is a POU of the function block type, the POU will be listed in the Function
Blocks section.
(4) If users want to modify the properties of a created POU, right-click Properties from the POU
item and refer to pervious description for setup. The programming language cannot be changed
when using edit on Properties. For DVPxxMC series, editing Properties cannot change the task
setting.
5-16
DVPxxMC
5.4.2 POU Active State

ISPSoft provides the function to temporarily close POUs. When POU is closed, the POU will be
skipped for compiling and the internal process will also not be executed. However, this function only
supports in program type POUs.
This function is used for testing or debugging. To skip some process beforehand, users can set POU
as ineffective and restore to active testing is complete.
The following example shows the equipment has five workstations and the task process is
categorized into 5 POUs for development.
Feeding Positioning Test A Test B Discharging
When equipment assembly is complete, but test instrument are not, users can disable both POUs-
test A and test B. Then, users can skip the two station to focus on other parts for adjusting and
testing.
Feeding Positioning Test A Test B Discharging
To set POU in active state, click Active in the Create Program window. If Active is not selected, the
POU function is closed. A different icon is shown in the Project section to represent POU function
closed.
5-17
*1. Users can disable a POU by removing it from the original task section. However, if the users want to execute the
POU later, they have to assign the POU to the original task again, and rearrange the POUs in the task section. As
a result, it is more convenient for the users to disable the POU temporarily by unselecting the Active box in the
window.
*2. A POU can be enabled not only by selecting the Active box, but also from Task Manager. Please refer to section
5.4.3 Delete and Copy POU

To delete a POU, right click on the selected item and click Delete.
The POU can not be recovered after it is deleted. The POU will be deleted from the project after OK
is clicked. If the POU deleted is a POU of the program type, they system will also delete it from the
task section.
POU Multi-deletions are also supported. Right-click “Programs” or “Function Blocks” to see and
select the option “POU Multi-Delete”. And then users will see the POU Multi_Delete window, use the
“Select All”, “Inverse Select” and “Deselect All” buttons to select and delete more than 1 POU at the
same time.
5-18
To copy a POU, right-click on the selected item and click Copy.
The POU can be copied into the same project or another project. If the POU copied is a POU of the
program type, it can not be copied into the Function Blocks section. If the POU copied is POU of
the function block type, it can not be copied into the Programs section. If the users want to paste
the POU, they have to right-click Programs or Function Blocks and click Paste. Besides, if the
POU copied is a POU of the program type, the POU pasted will not be assigned to any task.
*. If a POU is pasted on a position where the same POU name exists, the system will put CopyOf_n at the end of the
POU which is pasted. (n in CopyOf_n is a serial number.)
5-19
5.4.4 Set and Remove POU Password

Users can set a password for a POU in ISPSoft. The setting of a password, and the unlocking of the
password are described below.
(1) When users create a POU, they can set a password for the POU. If users do not set a
password a POU when the POU is created, but want to protect the POU with a password later,
they have to right-click the POU in the project management area and click Properties… to
open the Properties window.
(2) Type the same passwords in the Enter Password box and the Confirmation box, and then
click OK. English letters, numerical digits, and special marks can be typed in the boxes. Once
the POU is protected with the password, the system asks the users to type the password
whenever the window for the POU is opened.
(3) If the users want to unlock the password, they have to open the Properties window again,
type the password in the Enter Password box, and click OK.
5.4.5 Exporting POU Program

ISPSoft supports exporting and importing POUs. But, under group project structure, users can only
operate on the current editing project.
Choose Programs from Export in the File menu to directly operate on the current editing project for
export; or, right-click Programs to select Export Programs from the quick menu.
5-20
In the Export Programs window, specify a path in the Drive/Path box, type a file name in the File
Name box, and select POUs of the program type which will be exported in the Program section. If
the users want to protect the file which will be exported with a password, they have to select the
Password Setting checkbox, type the same passwords in the Password box and the
Confirmation box. English letters, numerical digits, and spaces can be typed in the boxes. Finally,
click OK.
Specify a path and type a file name.
Select POUs.
Type the same passwords.
5.4.6 Importing POU Program

Similar to Exporting, users can only operate on the current editing project for Import. When
importing, exported function block POU cannot import in Programs.
Choose Import Programs from Import in the File menu to directly operate on the current editing
project for import; or, right-click Programs to select Import Programs from the quick menu.
5-21
Select a file which will be imported, and then click Open. If the file is protected with a password, the
users have to type the password in the Password for Decrypting window, and click OK. The POUs
which are imported will not be assigned to any tasks. Besides, if the name of a POU which will be
imported is the same as the name of a POU in the project, the system will not allow the POU to be
imported, but the other POUs will be imported normally.
5.4.7 Exporting Function Block POU

ISPSoft supports exporting and importing POU. But, under group project structure, users can only
operate on the current editing project.
Choose Export Function Blocks from Export in the File menu to directly operate on the current
editing project for export; or, click Function Blocks to select Export Function Blocks from the
quick menu.
5-22
In the Export Function blocks window, specify a path in the Drive/Path box, type a file name in the
File Name box, and select POUs of the function block type which will be exported in the Function
Blocks section. If the users want to protect the file which will be exported with a password, they
have to select the Password Setting checkbox, type the same passwords in the Password box
and the Confirmation box. English letters, numerical digits, and spaces can be typed in the boxes.
Finally, click OK.
Specify a path and type a file name.
Select POUs.
Type the same passwords.
5.4.8 Importing Function Block POU

Similar to Exporting, users can only operate on the current editing project for Import. When
importing, exported POU cannot import back under Function Blocks.
Choose Function Blocks from Import in the File menu to directly operate on the current editing
project for import; or, click Function Blocks to select Import Function Blocks from the quick
menu.
5-23
Select a file which will be imported, and then click Open. If the file is protected with a password, the
users have to type the password in the Password for Decrypting window, and click OK. Besides, if
the name of a POU which will be imported is the same as the name of a POU in the project, the
system will not allow the POU to be imported, but the other POUs will be imported normally.
5.5 Task Management

The steps of managing the tasks in ISPSoft are shown below. Please refer to the following sections
for more information about the management of the tasks in ISPSoft.
Setting a task property Assigning POUs to the task Arranging the POUs
Before managing the tasks in ISPSoft, users have to start the Task Manager. There are three ways
to start the tasks management tool.
 Method 1
Right-click Tasks in the project management area, and then click Task Property on the context
menu to open the Task Manager window.
5-24
 Method 2
Unfold the Tasks section in the project management area, and then double-click a task which will
be set to open the Task Manager window.
 Method 3
Right-click the Programs section in the project management area, and then click Task Property
on the context menu to open the Task Manager window.
5-25
Below is the Task Manager setting page.
 Task type: The tasks available are listed here.

 Task description: The description of a task selected is displayed here.
 Task management area: Users can assign POUs to tasks, and arrange POUs.
5.5.1 Setting Task Description and Condition for Interruption

The following TASK listed in Task Type differs according to the different types of PLC.
5-26
DVPxxMC
After a task in the Task Type section is selected, the description of the task will be displayed in the
Task Description section. Users can set the condition of executing the task in the Task
Description section. The tasks provided by projects are related to the functions of selected PLCs.
Thus, each task property content is different, but basic settings are the same.
The content in Task Description also differs depending on the types of PLC. For instance, when
using AH560 redundant system series, specific option like Synchronize Redundancy Data after
Execution appears. For more information regarding the function, please refer to related product
user manual.
5-27
The setting of the properties of tasks can be illustrated with some simple examples. Users can refer
to the examples and the operation manual for a PLC for more information about setting the
properties of tasks.
Example 1: To set the interrupt task property of SV series, please check on the interrupt indicators
provided by SV series. The following table demonstrates interrupt indicators in SV
series from the DVP-PLC Application Manual (Programming).
The Task Type section for a DVP-SV series PLC is shown below. If users want to set a task
corresponding to the interrupt I001, they have to select External Interruption (X0) in the Task Type
section first. (I001 is triggered when the signal passing through X0 goes from low to high.) The
description of External Interruption (X0) will be displayed in the Task Description section.
According to the message in the Task Description section, I001 is rising edge-triggered if the value
in the External box is 1. As a result, the users have to select 1 in the External box.
Example 2: The figure below is the Task Manager window for AHCPU530-EN. The task selected is
Cyclic (1). Owing to the fact that users can enable and disable a cyclic task in an
AH500 series CPU module through the applied instructions TKON and TKOFF, they can
set the initial state of the cyclic task. If the Active checkbox is unselected, Cyclic (1) is
disabled when the program is executed. Cyclic (1) is not enabled until a POU assigned
to another task uses the instruction TKON to enable Cyclic (1). Please refer to AH500
Programming Manual for more information about TKON and TKOFF.
Example 3: The figure below is the Task Manager window for AHCPU530-EN. The task selected is
I/O Interruption (2). Owning to the fact that users can set the condition of an I/O
interrupt by themselves, the message in the Task Description section indicates that the
condition of I/O Interruption (2) can be set in HWCONFIG. The setting of the condition
of I/O Interruption (2) in HWCONFIG is described below.
5-28
Suppose I/O Interruption (2) will be triggered after channel 1 on AH02HC-5A receives a certain
number of pulses. The setting of I/O Interruption (2) in HWCONFIG is described below. Users can
refer to chapter 3 for more information about setting the parameters in a module, and refer to AH500
Operation Manual for more information about the interrupts in an AH500 series CPU module.
(1) Double-click HWCONFIG in ISPSOft.
(2) Double-click AH02HC-5A to open the Parameter Setting window.
(3) Select CH1~2 Number of Interrupt Setting, and type 2 in the Initial cell for CH1 Number of
Interrupt Setting for Comparison.
*. The number of interrupt setting for channel 0 and 1 can be the same. This setting means when the condition of any
channel is set, it will trigger the same I/O interrupt.
5-29
(4) Switch to comparison value setting page and input the Setting Value for triggering interrupt in
CH0 Comparison Value Setting.
(5) Be sure to save the file after the setting is complete. The parameters set in HWCONFIG must
be downloaded to the CPU module so that they can take effect.
When using DVPxxMC series, the work list has options containing priority level 1~24 (1 refer to the
highest priority level, 24 is the lowest priority level). After choosing the priority level, users can select
the appropriate Type and setup Watchdog for program scan from Task Description. The following
section introduces Task Type and Watchdog function.
 Type
The three task types are freewheeling, cyclic and triggered by event.
(1) Freewheeling
Choose Freewheeling from the Type drop-down list. This is the first task to choose when start
operating. After operating for a cycle, the task is activated in the next cycle.
(2) Cyclic
Choose Cyclic from the Type drop-down list and setup the Time Interval; The cyclic task is
operated according to the time interval setting from Task Manager.
5-30
(3) Triggered by Event
Choose Triggered by Event from the Type drop-down list and select from Mode of Triggering
drop-down list.
 The mode of triggering contains the following events:
- Motion event (Motion control task)

- Rising edge or falling edge of local input points (I0~I7 and I10~I17)
- CANopen SYNC signal
- Z pulse rising edge of incremental encoder 1 or encoder 2
An event task is only executed once to the assigned event. The executing time for event task is
determined by the time of event and event task according to priority.
 Watchdog
The Watchdog is used to monitor every task. When the task execution time exceeds the set
watchdog time, the controller will enter Error state and the user program execution will stop. Every
task can set its exceeding time and click the Watchdog function if needed.
5.5.2 Configuration of POU

When Task Description setting is complete, the POUs will be configured in the TASK list. Please pay
attention that one POU is assigned to one task, while POU that uses SFC for editing can only be
configured to cyclic task.
(1) After a task in the Task Type section is selected, the assignment of the POUs will be displayed
in the task management area. The POUs which have not been assigned to the task are in the
Unassigned POUs section, and the POUs which have been assigned to the task are in the
Assigned POUs section.
5-31
(2) If users want to assign a POU in the Unassigned POUs section to the task, they can select
the POU in the Unassigned POUs section, and click .
(3) If the users want to remove a POU from the Assigned POUs section, they can select the POU
in the Assigned POUs section, and click .
When using DVPxxMC series in project, the same POY can be reassigned to multiple tasks and be
reassigned in the same task too (see below).
5.5.3 POU Order

When POU configuration is complete under the Task list, these POUs need to be arranged in
execution order.
(1) If users want to execute a POU in the Assigned POUs section earlier, they can select the
POU in the Assigned POUs section, and click to move the POU upward.
5-32
(2) If users want to execute a POU in the Assigned POUs section later, they can select the POU
in the Assigned POUs section, and click to move the POU downward.
(3) After a POU in the Assigned POUs section is selected, users can select the Active checkbox
if they want to enable the POU, or unselect the Active checkbox if they want to disable the
POU. A POU which is disabled is represented by a gray icon in the project management area.
*.Please refer to section 5.4.2 for more information about enabling a POU.
(4) Click OK in the Task Manager window after the setting of the task is complete.
5.6 Example
5.6.1 Programming TASK and POU
The examples created in chapter 4 will be rewritten in TASK and POU program. The program
created in chapter 4 is shown below. It will be divided into three parts according to the functions
listed below.
5-33
 This part of the program functions to start or stop the system.

 This part of the program functions to inject the glue.
 This part of the program functions to count the parts which are conveyed.
This section aims at the architecture of a program. The contents related to configuring hardware,
setting parameters, testing a program, and debugging a program are the same as the contents of
chapter 4. Users can try to complete the related setting by themselves.
First, create a new project. Then, refer to chapter 4, and complete the hardware configuration.
Finally, refer to section 5.4.1, and create three POUs in the Programs section in accordance with
the three points listed above. These three POUs are assigned to Cyclic (0).
5-34
Please refer to chapter 4, and write the programs in the POUs shown below.
The program in RUN_STOP functions to start or stop the system.
5-35
POU- GLUING to control gluing.
POU- COUNTING to finish the final counting.
When programming is complete, please check the POU order under Tasks is the same as the
diagram shown below.
5-36
When re-planning the task configuration for each POU, right-click Tasks in Project section and
choose Task Property from the quick menu to open Task Manager setting page and add POU to
the assigned POUs in Cyclic (0).
If the creation of the POUs is complete, the result of executing the program will be the same as the
result of executing the ladder diagram in chapter 4. Please refer to chapter 4, and compile the
program. The program can be tested after it is downloaded to the CPU module.
5-37
5.6.2 Example of an Interrupt Subroutine in a DVP Series PLC

 Example
If the ON button is pressed (X0 is turned ON), Y0~Y7 will scanned in order. If the OFF button is
pressed (X1 is turned ON), the output will stop, and the present output state will be retained. If the
RST button is pressed (X2 is turned ON), the output will be reset, and Y0~Y7 will be scanned
again.
 Planning a program
The model used in this example is a DVP-SV PLC, and four POUs are created. The functions of
the POUs are described below.
POU name Function
1. Reset the operation flag M0, transfer the value 1 to the output data
register D0, and enable the interrupt.
Run_Stop
2. When X0 is turned from OFF to ON, the operation flag M0 is set to ON.
3. When X1 is turned from OFF to ON, the operation flag M0 is set to OFF.
The states of Y0~Y7 are updated according to the value in the output data
LED
register D0.
The values of the bits in the output data register D0 is shifted by one bit to
Shift the left every 0.5 seconds. If the value in D0 is larger than 128, the value 1
will be transferred to D0.
Transfer the value 1 to the output data register D0, that is, set bit 0 in D0 to
ON. The POU will be executed after the external interrupt I201 is triggered.
Reset
(I201 is triggered when the signal passing through X2 goes from low to
high.)
*. Please refer to DVP-PLC Application Manual─Programming for more information about the interrupts in a
DVP-SV series PLC and the related applied instructions.
 Creating New Project

First, create a SV series project.
Under Programs in Project section, create for instance 4 POUs and Task column in POU Property
can remain as Cyclic by default.
5-38
Write the programs in the POUs shown below.
*. The applied instruction MOV is in the Transmission Comparison section, and the applied instruction EI is in the
Loop Control section.
*. The applied instruction MOV is in the Transmission Comparison section.
5-39
*. The applied instruction TMR is in the Basic Instructions section, the applied instruction ROL is in the Rotation
and Displacement section, the applied instruction MOV is in the Transmission Comparison section, and the
comparison contacts are in the Contact Type Logic Operation section.
*. The applied instruction MOV is in the Transmission Comparison section.
5-40
Open the Task Manager window after the writing of the program is complete. Owing to the fact
that the four POUs are assigned to Cyclic when they are created, the four POUs are in the
Assigned POUs section for Cyclic.
However, since Reset function is triggered by external interrupt, therefore, please remove Reset
from the TASK list.
5-41
After the assignment of the POUs to Cyclic is complete, users can arrange the POUs in the
Assigned POUs section. Owing to the fact that Run_Stop and Shift must be executed earlier
than LED, the order in which Run_Stop, Shift, and LED are listed in the Assigned POUs section
is Run_StopShiftLED.
Select External Interruption (X2) in the Task Type section, and select 1 in the External box in
the Task Description section. External Interruption (X2) is triggered when the signal passing
through X2 goes from low to high.
Assign Reset to External Interruption (X2). Owing to the fact that there is only one POU in the
Assigned POUs section, the users do not need to arrange the POU.
After OK is clicked, the assignment and the setting in the Task Manager window will be applied.
The assignment is shown below. The writing of the program has been completed so far. The
users can try to compile the program, download the program to the PLC, and test the program by
themselves.
5-42
Additional remark
After the program above is compiled successfully and downloaded to the PLC, the users can upload
the program in the PLC to WPLSoft. The program uploaded to WPSoft is shown below.
The main program is composed of the three POUs which are assigned to the cyclic task. The order
in which the the POUs are executed is Run_StopShiftLED. The contents of the interrupt
subroutine I201 are the same as the contents of the POU Reset.
The users can remove Run_Stop from the Tasks section, and disable Shift. After the program is
compiled and downloaded to the PLC, the users can upload the program in the PLC to WPLSoft.
The main program will not include the two POUs Run_Stop and Shift.
*. WPLSoft is programming software for Delta PLCs. The programming architecture adopted by WPLSoft is
traditional programming architecture. Please refer to WPLSoft User Manual for more information.
5-43
5.6.3 Examples of AH5x0 Series Interrupt Programs

 Example
If the START button is pressed (X0.0 is turned ON), the system will begin to count. The STOP
button must be pressed (X0.1 must be turned ON) within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the alarm will
ring (Y0.0 will be turned ON).
 Hardware configuration
In this example, the CPU module AHCPU530-EN, the digital I/O module AH16AP11R-5A, and the
four-slot main backplane AHBP04M1-5A are used. (The hardware configuration here is the same
as the hardware configuration in chapter 4.)
 Planning a program
In this example, a timed interrupt is triggered every 25 milliseconds, and time intervals are
measured through a program. In the figure below, Timed Interruption (0) is triggered every 25
milliseconds, and the value in the 32-bit register (D1, D0) increases by one whenever Timed
Interruption (0) is triggered. As long as the PLC keeps running, Timed Interruption (0) is
triggered every 25 milliseconds, and the value in the 32-bit register (D1, D0) increases by one
whenever Timed Interruption (0) is triggered. Users can calculate the time for which the PLC has
run by reading the value in (D1, D0). For example, if the value in (D1, D0) is 10, the time for which
the PLC has run is 250 milliseconds (10x25 ms).
After the START button is pressed, the present value in (D1, D0) will be transferred to (D3, D2),
and the value in (D1, D0) will increase. After the present value in (D1, D0) is transferred to (D3,
D2), the value in (D3, D2) will remain unchanged. Users can calculate the time which has elapsed
since the START button was pressed by subtracting the value in (D3, D2) from the value in (D1,
D0). The value gotten is stored in (D5, D4).
Time when the START button is pressed Time for which the PLC has run
Time having elapsed since the
START button was pressed
Examples in this section include timed interrupt in an AH5x0 series timed interrupt and the two
control instructions concerning TKON and TKOFF. The following chart briefly describes the 5
POUs of a program.
5-44
POU name Function

The value in the 32-bit register (D1, D0) increases by one every 25
INT_Timer
milliseconds. (The POU is assigned to Timed Interruption (0).)
Reset the flags M0 and M1, transfer the value 0 to the 32-bit registers (D1,
D0), (D3, D2), (D5, D4), and (D7, D6), and enable the interrupt.
Initialize During the first scan cycle, Cyclic (0) to which the POUs are assigned is
enabled, and Cyclic (1) to which Initialize is assigned is disabled. As a
result, Initialize is only executed during the first cycle.
When X0.0 is turned form OFF to ON, the operation flag M0 is set to ON,
Control and the value in (D1, D0) is transferred to (D3, D2). When X0.1 is turned
from OFF to ON, or when an overflow occurs, the operation flag M0 is reset.
Users can calculate the time which has elapsed since the START button
was pressed by subtracting the value in (D3, D2) from the value in (D1, D0).
Time_CHK
The value gotten is stored in (D5, D4). If the value gotten is less than 0, the
overflow flag M1 is set to ON.
If the time which has elapsed is more than 30 seconds (25 ms x1200), or the
Signal
overflow flag M1 is ON, the alarm Y0.0 will be set to ON.
*. For more information on AH5xo series interrupt indicator and related API instructions, please refer to AH500
operation manual and AH500 programming manual.
 Creating New project

First, create an AHCPU530-EN series project.
Click HWCONFIG to add a 16AP module and download hardware configuration and the
parameter setting into the hosts.
Create the 5 POUs in the Programs section in the project management area shown below. When
these POU are created, they are assigned to Cyclic (0).
5-45
Please complete the following programming in each POU window.
*. The applied instruction EI is in the Loop Control section, the applied instruction DNMOV is in the Data Transfer
section, and the applied instructions TKON and TKOFF are in the Task Control section.
*. The applied instruction EI is in the Four Arithmetic Operations section.
5-46
*. The applied instruction D- is in the Four Arithmetic Operations section, and the comparison contact D< is in the
Contact Type Logic Operation section.
*. The comparison contact D> is in the Contact Type Logic Operation section.
5-47
*. The applied instruction DMOV is in the Data Transfer section.
When programming is complete, double-click Task Property.
Set the property of Cyclic (0) first. Owing to the fact that Cyclic (0) is enabled by Initialize, the
Active checkbox is unselected.
5-48
INT_Timer must be assigned to Timed Interruption (0), and Initialize must be assigned to
Cyclic (1). As a result, INT_Timer and Initialize are removed from the Assigned POUs section
for Cyclic (0).
After the assignment of the POUs to Cyclic (0) is complete, users can arrange the POUs in the
Assigned POUs section. Owing to the fact that Control and Time_CHK must be executed earlier
than Signal, the order in which Control, Time_CHK, and Signal are listed in the Assigned
POUs section is ControlTime_CHKSignal.
Select Cyclic (1) in the Task Type section. Owing to the fact that Cyclic (1) will be disabled after
the first scan cycle is complete, the Active checkbox is selected.
Assign Initialize to Cyclic (1). Owing to the fact that there is only one POU in the Assigned
POUs section, the users do not need to arrange the POU.
Select Timed Interruption 0 (252) in the Task Type section. The message in the Task
Description section indicates that the condition of Timed Interruption 0 (252) can be set in
HWCONFIG. The users have to assign a POU to this task, and set the property of this task.
5-49
Assign INT_Timer to Timed Interruption 0 (252).
After OK is clicked, the assignment and the setting in the Task Manager window will be applied.
The assignment is shown below.
In order to set the property of Timed Interruption 0 (252), HWCONFIG is started.
5-50
After HWCONFIG is started, the users can double-click the CPU module to open the PLC
Parameter Setting window. Click the CPU tab at the top of the window, and the System tab at
the bottom of the window.
5-51
Find the Interval Interrupt Time section. Type 25 ms in the Interval Interrupt 0 box, and then click
OK.
When complete, save the settings in HWCONFIG and download the setting value to the hosts to
come into effect. Then, please compile the program and download to the host for testing.
5-52
Chapter 6 Symbol Variables
Table of Contents
6.1 Introduction of Symbols .................................................................... 6-2
6.1.1 Application of Symbols and Creation of Identifiers .............................. 6-2
6.1.2 Symbol Variable Classification.......................................................... 6-3
6.1.3 Data Types .................................................................................... 6-4
6.1.4 Symbol Variable Address Allocation and Initial Value........................... 6-8
6.1.5 Indirect Assignment and Modification for Register Symbol Variable ..... 6-10
6.1.6 Bit Operation of Symbol Variable (Only AH/AS Series ) ..................... 6-12
6.2 Symbol Variable Management in ISPSoft ......................................... 6-13
6.2.1 Symbol Variable Table .................................................................. 6-13
6.2.2 Adding Symbol Variable ................................................................ 6-15
6.2.3 Principles of ARRAY or STRING Symbol ........................................... 6-19
6.2.4 Modify Symbol Variables and Edit Symbol Table ............................... 6-22
6.2.5 Remove Symbol Variable Allocated Address ..................................... 6-23
6.2.6 Downloading the Initial Values of the Symbols ................................. 6-23
6.2.7 Export Symbol Table .................................................................... 6-24
6.2.8 Importing a Symbol Table ............................................................. 6-26
6.2.9 Arranging the symbols .................................................................. 6-29
6.2.10 Filtering the Symbols ................................................................... 6-30
6.2.11 Device Resource Allocation Setting ................................................ 6-31
6.3 Example ........................................................................................... 6-32
6.3.1 Planning a Symbol Table ............................................................... 6-32
6.3.2 Writing a Program ........................................................................ 6-33
6-1
6.1 Introduction of Symbols

During the process of developing a traditional program for a PLC, it generally takes much time to
manage device addresses. Besides, managing or debugging the program in a big project is a
burden on users. As a result, the concept of symbols in a high-level programming language is
introduced into IEC 61131-3. A device in a PLC can be represented by a symbol, and a device can
be automatically assigned to a symbol. The time of assigning devices is saved, a program is more
readable, and the efficiency of developing a program increases.
*. Variables in ISPSoft are called symbols. As a result, variables are the same as symbols in terms of meaning in this
manual.
6.1.1 Application of Symbols and Creation of Identifiers

A symbol has to be declared before it is used, as shown below. There are two types of symbols.
They are global symbols and local symbols. The global symbols can be used in all the POUs in a
project, and the local symbols can only be used in the POU in which the local symbols are declared.
Besides, the identifier of a local symbol in a POU can be the same as the identifier of a local symbol
in another POU. However, if the identifier of a local symbol declared is the same as the identifier of a
global symbol, the system will automatically regard the local symbol declared in a POU as a local
symbol.
The regulations of creating the identifier of a symbol are as follows.
 An identifier is composed of 30 characters at most, and a Chinese character occupies two
characters.
 The identifier of a symbol cannot be a name reserved by the system, e.g. an instruction code, a
device name, or a name given a special significance. However, if a name reserved by the system
is a part of the identifier of a symbol, the identifier is a legal name. For example, “M0” is an illegal
name, but “_M0” is a legal name.
 The name of a symbol and the name of an enumeration cannot be the same. Refer to chapter 8
for the enumeration usage.
 Spaces cannot be used. For example, “INPUT CH0” is an illegal name.
 Underlines can be used, but they cannot be used continuously or put at the end of an identifier.
For example, “INPUT_CH0” is a legal identifier, but “INPUT__CH0” and “INPUT_CH0_” are
illegal identifiers.
 Special marks cannot be used. For example, *, #, ?, \, %, @, and etc. cannot be used.
* When naming for the variable symbols, do not use digits or DFB_(initials of the function keys by default).
To achieve optimization, it is recommended to use what the system assigns for the variable address.
6-2
Ch a pt er 6 S ym bo l Var ia b l es
6.1.2 Symbol Variable Classification

Symbol variables can be categorized into five types based on functions. The symbol category
supported by global variable and program (local variable) are the same. The following table depicts
the characteristics and details of the program (local variable) and function block (local variable).
Symbol Program (Local Variable) Function Block (Local Variable)

Variable
Classification AH/AS DVP DVPxxMC AH/AS DVP DVPxxMC
Supports
Position ONLY ES3 Position
VAR    cannot be & Position cannot be
Assigned cannot be Assigned
Assigned
Supports
Position ONLY ES3
cannot be & Position Position
VAR_RETAIN Assigned cannot be  cannot be
Assigned Assigned
（*1）
（*1）
Position Position Position

VAR_INPUT cannot be cannot be cannot be
Assigned Assigned Assigned
Position Position Position
VAR_OUTPUT cannot be cannot be cannot be
Assigned Assigned Assigned
Position Position
VAR_IN_OUT cannot be cannot be
Assigned Assigned
*1. Data type cannot be TIMER, COUNTER or STEP.
 VAR－General symbol
The symbols of this class are for general operations only. The significance of a symbol of this
class depends on the data type of the symbol or the corresponding device.
 VAR_RETAIN - Latched symbol
When symbol variable is declared as VAR_RETAIN, it will automatically be configured in retain
latched area. Therefore, when PLC host is latched, the symbol variables retains its value.
 VAR_INPUT－Symbol variable for function block input terminal point
A symbol of this class is used as an input terminal point in a function block. If a function block is
called, the symbol of this class can receive the input value from the caller. In ladder or function
block editing environment, the VAR_INPUT is arranged on the left side of the function block
diagram and will configure one terminal point to receive the input value of the caller.
 VAR_OUTPUT－Symbol variable for function block input terminal point
A symbol of this class is used as an output terminal point in a function block. After the execution of
a function block is complete, the operation result will be sent to the caller through the symbol of
this class. In ladder or function block editing environment, the VAR_OUTPUT is arranged on the
right side of the function block diagram and will configure one terminal point to receive the input
value of the caller.
 VAR_IN_OUT－Symbol variable for feedback terminal point
A symbol of this class is used as a feedback terminal point in a function block. Please refer to the
following example. When the function block is called, the caller sends the value in D1 to DT_IO,
which is a symbol of the VAR_IN_OUT class. After the operation comes to an end, the final value
6-3
of DT_IO is sent to D1. In ladder or function block editing environment, the VAR_IN_OUT is
arranged on the left side of the function block diagram and the terminal point is in blue bold lines
used to connect with the caller.
6.1.3 Data Types

The data type of a symbol determines the significance of the value of symbol. Suppose there are
two symbols VAR_1 and VAR_2. The data type of VAR_1 is BOOL, and the data type of VAR_2 is
WORD. When VAR_1 and VAR_2 are used in a program, VAR_1 represents a contact, and VAR_1
represents a 16-bit device which can be involved in arithmetic or data transfer.
The data types supported by ISPSoft are listed below. Different PLC types supports different data
types, however, global variable and program (local variable) are mainly the same, but symbol
variables declared by function block (local variable) are different (see below).
AH/AS DVP DVPxxMC

Data type Description
Program FB Program FB Program FB
Boolean data type, use 0, 1,
or TRUE or FALSE to
represents a pin device
BOOL
status; DVPxxMC only
     
supports TRUE or FALSE,
default setting is FALSE.
8-bit value, the effective
range is 16#00~FF and can
BYTE
store 8-bit data size, default  
setting is 16#00.
range is 16#00~FFFF and
WORD
can store 16-bit data size,      
default setting is 16#0000.

range is 16#00000000~
DWORD FFFFFFFF and can store      
32-bit data size, default
setting is 16#00000000.
6-4
AH/AS DVP DVPxxMC

range is
16#0000000000000000 ~ Only Only
LWORD FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF can support support  
store 64-bit data size, AH AH
default setting is
16#0000000000000000
8-bit signed integer,
effective range is -128 ~
127 and using
SINT
positive/negative sign to  
represent the highest bit.
Default value is 0.
effective range is -32768 ~
Only Only
32767 and using
INT
positive/negative sign to   support support  
AH AH
Default value is 0.
effective range is
-2147483648 ~ Only Only
DINT 2147483647 and using   support support  
positive/negative sign to AH AH
Default value is 0.
effective range is
-9223372036854775808 ~
Only Only
9223372036854775807
LINT
and using positive/negative
support support  
AH AH
sign to represent the
highest bit. Default value is
0.
8-bit unsigned integer,
USINT effective range is 0 ~ 255,  
default value is 0.
UINT effective range is 0 ~  
65535, default value is 0.
effective range is 0 ~
UDINT
4294967295, default value  
is 0.
effective range is 0 ~
ULINT
18446744073709551615,  
default value is 0.
32-bit floating-point value,
effective range is
-3.402823e+38 ~
REAL -1.175495e-38, 0 and      
1.175495e-38 ~
3.402823e+38, contains
32-bit to represent a
6-5
AH/AS DVP DVPxxMC

decimal value. Default
value is 0.
64-bit floating-point value,
effective range is
-1.79769313486231e+308
~-2.22507385850721e-308,
Only Only
0 and
LREAL
2.22507385850721e−308 ~
support support  
AH AH
1.79769313486231e+308,
contains 64-bit to represent
a decimal value. Default
value is 0.
Array data type
When a symbol is declared,
the length of an array and
ARRAY
the data type which to be
     
stored are specified. (The
max. length of array is 512.)
String data type, use 8-bit to
represent one ASCII
character. AH/AS series
has to declare assigned
string length, maximum 128
characters; the string format Only Only
STRING of DVPxxMC series uses   support support  
ES3 ES3
apostrophe, e.g. ‘abcd’,
the initial biggest length is
32000 characters; the initial
character length by default
is 80 characters.
Do
It is used as a recognition NOT
STEP
flag for step. (*1) (*2)   support
ES3
Only
Function Represents a named
Block function block. (*2)    support  
ES3
Do
Timer format use to NOT
COUNTER
represent timer device.   support
ES3
Do
Timer format use to NOT
TIMER
represent timer device.   support
ES3
Select VAR_IN_OUT in Only
POINTER using WORD device as  support
index indication. (*2) ES3
T_POINTER using timer as index  support
indication. (*2) ES3
C_POINTER using timer variables as  support
index indicator. (*2) ES3
6-6
AH/AS DVP DVPxxMC

HC_POINTE using high-speed timer support
R variables as index indicator.  ES3
(*2)
Time format, using
TIME#XXXXXXdXXhXXmX
XsXXX.XXXms or
T#XXXXXXdXXhXXmXXsX
XX.XXXms for input, unit is
ms. Effective range:
T#0ms~T#213503d23h34m
33s709 .551ms, the value
can be decimal (number)
TIME but not negative number;  
the number can exceed the
effective range of TIME,
e.g. T#25h and T#1d1h；d,
h, m, s, ms unit can be
dropped, but one unit
should remain and cannot
arrange randomly; numbers
must be decimal, default
value is T#0ms.
Time format, using DATE#
Y-M-D or D#Y-M-D.
Effective range : Display
range:D#1970-01-01~D#21
06-02-07. Unit is day. The
Y, M,D cannot be dropped
DATE
nor exceed the effective  
range; additional number 0
can be added before the
number, the number must
be decimal, default value is
D#1970-01-01.
Time format. Using
TIME_OF_DAY# hr: min:
sec. ms or TOD# hr: min:
sec. ms. Effective range:
TOD#00:00:00~23:59:59.9
99. Unit is ms. When value
is 0, TOD#00:00:00 is
displayed; when value is 1,
TOD#00:00:00.001 is
TOD displayed; when value is  
86399999,
TOD#23:59:59.999 is
displayed; when value is
86400000, TOD#00:00:00
is displayed; when value is
4294967295,
TOD#17:2:47.295 is
displayed. Default value is
TOD#00:00:00.
6-7
AH/AS DVP DVPxxMC

Time format. Using
DT#Y-M-D-hr-min-sec for
input. Effective range:
DT DT#1970-01-01-0:0:0~  
DT#2106-02-07-6:28:15.
Unit: s. Default value is
DT#1970-01-01-0:0:0.
*1. For more information on STEP, please refer to chapter 14.

*2. The symbol variables for function block types and index types has special meanings. For more details, please
refer to chapter 7- Function Block (FB) and library.
6.1.4 Symbol Variable Address Allocation and Initial Value

Every symbol variable is allocated to a corresponding device address based on data types and can
setup an initial value. When downloading the project, users can select to write initial value in the
corresponding device address of the symbol variable; when downloading DVPxxMC series project,
users need to setup variables and device initial values in HWCONFIG.
The following chart provides a description on the symbol variable address allocation principle. The
allocation principle differs based on different PLC types.
Model Allocation Principle
 Users can assign devices to the global symbols and the local symbols declared in
the POUs of the program type. The system can also automatically assign devices
to the global symbols and the local symbols declared in the POUs of the program
type.
AH/AS  The system automatically allocates the local symbols of function blocks, but does
not provide allocation by users.
 The auto-allocated address is configures to the reserved memory section in the
hosts, and do not occupy D or M device; for STEP, TIMER, or COUNTER types,
the system still automatically allocate S, T and C device.
 Users can allocate devices to all the global symbols and the local symbols. The
system can also automatically allocate devices to all the global symbols and the
DVP local symbols.
 The devices allocate by the system are usable devices. (Users can set a range of
devices which can be allocate automatically.)
 Users can assign devices to the global symbols and the local symbols declared in
the POUs of the program type. The system can also automatically assign devices
to the global symbols and the local symbols declared in the POUs of the program
type.
DVPxxMC
 The system automatically allocates the local symbols of function blocks, but does
not provide allocation by users.
 The auto-allocated address is configures to the reserved memory section in the
hosts, and do not occupy I/Q/ M device.
The relation between the data types and the device types which can be allocate is described below.
AH/AS DVP
Data
type Device allocate by Device allocate by Device allocate by Device allocate by
users the system users the system
Contact M/SM or bit in
BOOL Internal memory Contact M/X/Y Contact M
the device D/L/X/Y
WORD D/L/X/Y/E/SR Internal memory D/E/F D
DWORD D/L/X/Y/E/SR Internal memory D/E/F D
6-8
AH/AS DVP
Data
type Device allocate by Device allocate by Device allocate by Device allocate by
users the system users the system
D/L/X/Y/E/SR
LWORD Internal memory None
(Only support AH)
INT D/L/X/Y Internal memory None
DINT D/L/X/Y Internal memory None
D/L/X/Y
LINT Internal memory None
(Only support AH)
REAL D/L/X/Y Internal memory D D
D/L/X/Y
LREAL Internal memory None
(Only support AH)
STRING D/L/X/Y Internal memory None
S
STEP S S S
(Only support AH5x0)
COUNTER C/HC C C C
TIMER T T T T
The devices assigned to a symbol whose data type is ARRAY depend on the array
type specified. The array is composed of the devices starting from the device
assigned by users or the system, and the number of devices in the array conforms to
ARRAY the size of the array.
The devices assigned to a symbol whose data type is ARRAY cannot be SR/SM/E/F
devices.
DVPxxMC
Data type
Device assigned by users Device assigned by the system
BOOL I/Q/M of B and X Internal memory
BYTE I/Q/M of B device Internal memory
WORD I/Q/M of W device Internal memory
DWORD I/Q/M of D device Internal memory
LWORD I/Q/M of L device Internal memory
USINT I/Q/M of B device Internal memory
SINT I/Q/M of B device Internal memory
UINT I/Q/M of W device Internal memory
INT I/Q/M of W device Internal memory
UDINT I/Q/M of D device Internal memory
DINT I/Q/M of D device Internal memory
LINT I/Q/M of L device Internal memory
ULINT I/Q/M of L device Internal memory
REAL I/Q/M of D device Internal memory
LREAL I/Q/M of L device Internal memory
STRING I/Q/M of B device Internal memory
TIME I/Q/M of L device Internal memory
DATE I/Q/M of D device Internal memory
TOD I/Q/M of D device Internal memory
DT I/Q/M of D device Internal memory
6-9
DVPxxMC
Data type
Device assigned by users Device assigned by the system
I/Q/M device and base on types to

determine devices (B,W,D,L), WORD Array
ARRAY Internal memory
does not support the assigned address
writing for WORD[ArrayIndex].Bit
*1. If the device assigned to a symbol is an internal memory in an AH/AS series CPU module, users cannot know the
actual device address.
*2. Please refer to section 6.2.3 for more information about ARRAY and STRING.
*3. Please refer to section 6.2.11 for more information about setting a range of devices which can be assigned
automatically in a DVP series PLC.
*4. A symbol in a function block has a special significance. Please refer to chapter 7- Function Block and Library for
more information.
*5. For example, X0.0 and Y0.1 are bits in the word devices X and Y. Please refer to appendix B for more information.
6.1.5 Indirect Assignment and Modification for Register Symbol

Variable
In ISPSoft, a symbol can be modified by an index register. The format is Identifier@Index register.
An index register can be an E device, an F device, or a symbol to which an E device or an F device
is assigned.
The data stored in an index register indicates the offset for an object modified. Take the figure above
for example. If the value in the index register E0 is 2, VAR_0@E0 indicates that 2 is added to the
device address (D100) assigned to VAR_0, that is, VAR_0@E0 represents D102. When M0 is ON,
the value 123 is transferred to the data register D102.
The same rule applies to a symbol whose data type is ARRAY. The format is
Identifier[Index]@Index register. The index must be a constant. If the index is a symbol, the
symbol whose data type is ARRAY cannot be modified by the index register.
In the figure below, Ary is an array composed of five elements, and the start device address is D200.
When the system compiles the program, D200~D204 are assigned Ary. If the value in the index
register E0 is 2, Ary[0]@E0 indicates that 2 is added to the device address (D200) assigned to
Ary[0], that is, Ary[0]@E0 represents D202, the device address assigned to Ary[2]. If the value in the
index register E0 is 6, Ary[0]@E0 represents D206. D206 is not within the range of devices
assigned to the array, but this usage is legal. Owing to the fact that the data stored in an index
register indicates the offset for an object modified, users have to be more careful when they modify
6-10
a symbol whose data type is ARRAY with an index register. Please refer to section 6.2.3 for more
information about the usage of arrays.
An AH500 series CPU module differs from a DVP series PLC in the use of an index register to
modify an operand. Please refer to the following table.
Application Example AH/AS DVP DVPxxMC
MOV 100 According to According to Do NOT
Modify operands
VWD@E0 instruction instruction Support
Modify contact or LD VBL_0@E0 According to Do NOT
Support
coil OUT VBL_1@E1 model types Support
Modifying symbol Do NOT
ARY[0]@E0 Support Support
variable of ARRAY Support
*1. In an AH/AS series CPU module, only the E devices are index registers. In a DVP series PLC, the E devices and
the F devices are index registers. Please refer to the operation manual for a model for more information.
*2. An index register cannot be modified by another index register. For example, E0@E1 is not allowed. As a result,
before a symbol is modified by an index register, users have to make sure that the device assigned to the symbol
is not an E device or an F device.
Additional remark
(a) The data stored in an index register indicates the offset for a device modified. If the system
automatically assigns a device to a symbol modified, the use of an index register will cause the
program to be executed incorrectly because users do not know which device is assigned to the
symbol.
(b) If the addition of the value in an index register to a device address produces a device address
which is not within the range, the PLC will operate incorrectly. As a result, users have to be more
careful when they modify a symbol with an index register. Take AHCPU530-EN for example. If
the value in E0 is larger than 35, the operand D65500@E0 represents a device which is not
within the range of data registers, and an error occurs in the CPU module.
(c) If the value in an index register is changed, the device which actually operates differs from the
original device. As a result, if the original device is not used in the program, the final value in the
original device is retained. Take AHCPU530-EN for example. In the figure below, if the value in
E0 is 2. M102 is ON when M0 is ON. If the value in E0 is changed from 2 to 3, the device which
actually operates becomes M103. M103 is ON when M0 is ON. Owing to the fact that M102 is
not used in the program, M102 remains ON.
6 - 11
6.1.6 Bit Operation of Symbol Variable (Only AH/AS Series )

An AH/AS series CPU module supports the manipulation of the bits in a word device. The format is
Word device.Bit number. For example, D0.2 indicates that bit 2 in D0 is manipulated. The same
rule applies to the symbols. The format is Identifier.Bit number, e.g. VB.2. The rule also applies to
the symbols whose data type is ARRAY. The format is Identifier[Index].Bit number, e.g. Ary[0].1.
The bit number must be a decimal constant. No matter what the data type of a symbol modified is,
the bit number must be within the range between 0 and 15. Besides, the bits in a device represented
by a symbol whose data type is BOOL, STEP, COUNTER, TIMER, a function block, HC_POINTER,
C_POINTER, or T_POINTER cannot be manipulated.
In the figure below, the data type of VB is WORD. Suppose the present value of VB is 0. When M0 is
ON, the value of bit 2 in the device represented by VB is 1, that is, the value of VB is 4.
In an AH/AS series CPU module, an index register can be used with the manipulation of the bits in a
device. If an index register is used with the manipulation of the bits in a device, the mark @ has high
priority. Please refer to the following example. The data type of VB is WORD.
Example 1: VB.1@E0 (VB represents D100. The value in E0 is 3.)
6-12
1@E0 is interpreted first. As a result, VB.1@E0 is equivalent to VB.4. The bit which is actually
manipulated is bit 4 in D100.
Example 2: VB@E0.1 (VB represents D100. The value in E0 is 3.)

VB@E0 is interpreted first. As a result, VB@E0.1 represents D103.1. The bit which is actually
manipulated is bit 1 in D103.
Example 3: VB@E0.1@E1 (VB represents D100. The value in E0 is 3, and the value in E1 is 2.)
VB@E0 and 1@E1 are interpreted separately. As a result, VB@E0 represents D103, and 1@E1
represents 3. VB@E0.1@E1 represents D103.3. The bit which is actually manipulated is bit 3 in
D103.
*1. If a bit in a device is manipulated, the system will faithfully get the state of the bit. Users have to judge whether
the state of the bit is significant by themselves.
*2. In the present version of ISPSoft, a bit number must be within the range between 0 and 15. However, in the future
version of ISPSoft, the data length of a symbol will allow the bit number to be within the range between 0 and 31,
or between 0 and 63, and a symbol will represent a bit, e.g. VB.VC.
6.2 Symbol Variable Management in ISPSoft

6.2.1 Symbol Variable Table
 Global symbol table
Double-click Global Symbols in the project management area to open the Global Symbols
window.
The option Global Symbols may have more sub-options for some series. For example the
AHxxEMC series has more sub-options, including Main Table, Axis Table, and EtherCAT Table.
Please refer to the related chapters for more information on how to use these symbols.
 Local symbol table

In ISPSoft, the local symbol table in a POU is at the top of the window for the POU. If users click
the button under a local symbol table, the local symbol table will be hidden. After the users click
the button again, the local symbol table will be displayed.
6-13
6-14
6.2.2 Adding Symbol Variable

(1) After users double-click or right-click the blank in a symbol table, they can click Add a Symbol
(2) After Add a Symbol is clicked, the Add Symbol window will appear. Type an identifier in the
Identifier box. Please refer to section 6.1.1 for more information about the regulations of
creating the identifier of a symbol.
*1. The window which appears varies with the model selected, and the symbol table created (the global/local
symbol table). However, the setting does not vary.
*2. There is a way to open a declaration window in every programming environment. Please refer to chapter
8~chapter 12 for more information.
(3) Select a class in the Class drop-down list box. The items in the Class drop-down list box vary
with the symbol table created (the global/local symbol table). Please refer to section 6.1.2 for
more information.
(4) Click the button at the right side of the Type… box, set the data type of the symbol in the Type
Selection window, and click OK. Please refer to section 6.1.3 for more information about the
data types.
6-15
The setting of Function Block, Data Unit Type, STRING, and ARRAY are described below.
 Function Block
Select the Function Block option button in the Type Class section, and then select a
function block definition in the Type box. If the data type of a symbol is a function block, a
function block instance is declared. Please refer to chapter 7 for more information.
 Data Unit Type

Select the Data Unit Type option button in the Type Class section, and then select a
DUT_enumA in the Type box, indicating the symbol is declared here. Please refer to chapter
8 for more information.
6-16
 STRING
If the data type of a symbol is STRING, users have to set the size of the string. The size of a
string is within the range between 1 character and 128 characters. The size of a string that
users set is the maximum number of characters in the string. Users can click or to
decrease or increase the digit in the ones place of the setting value, and they can click
or to decrease or increase the digit in the tens place of the setting value.
 ARRAY
If the data type of a symbol is ARRAY, the Array Type window will appear after OK in the
Type Selection window is clicked. Users have to select an array type and set the size of the
array in the Array Type window. The size of an array is within the range between 1 element
and 512 elements. Users can click or to decrease or increase the digit in the ones
place of the setting value, and they can click or to decrease or increase the digit in
the tens place of the setting value.
(5) If the Address box is blank, the system will automatically assign a device address to the
symbol. If users want to specify a device address, they can type the device address in the
Address box, or specify the device address in the Refer Device window after they click the
button at the right side of the Address box. Please refer to section 6.1.4 for more information.
6-17
*1. When function block is selected for Type, the address column cannot be setup.
*2. For bit operation supported model types, the device setting window has Bit Number column to input e.g.
X0.0, D0.1.
(6) If users want to set the initial value of the symbol, they can type the initial value in the Initial
box. If the data type of the symbol is ARRAY, the Array Initial Values window will appear after
the Initial box is clicked. In the Array Initial Values window, users can set the initial values of
the elements in the array.
If the data type of the symbol is BOOL, the initial value is either TRUE (abbreviated to T) or
FALSE (abbreviated to F). If users type 1 or 0 in the Initial box, the system will automatically
convert it into TRUE or FALSE. If the data type of the symbol is STRING, the number of
characters in the Initial box cannot be larger than the maximum number of characters in the
string which has been set. The characters cannot be put in double quotes. Otherwise, the
double quotes will be regarded as a part of the string. For DVPxxMC, users can add
apostrophe to the first and last character in a string. When the data type of the symbol is
function block or user-defined, the Initial column cannot be setup.
(7) If After users click the Comment box, they can type a comment about the symbol in the
drop-down box that appears.
6-18
(8) There are three checkboxes in the Add Symbol window. Please refer to the descriptions
below for more information. After users make sure of the setting, they can click OK to add the
symbol.
 Auto-close Dialog
If users unselected the Auto-close Dialog checkbox, the Add Symbol window will not be
closed automatically after OK is clicked. Please refer to section 2.3.1 for more information.
 Insert
When selected, the symbol variable declared here will be added on top of the symbol
variables for selection in the symbol table; when not selected, it is added to the last row in
the symbol table.
 Declared in Global Symbol Table

If users select the Define Global checkbox, the symbol declared here will appear in the
global symbol table. However, the Define Global checkbox is not in the Add Symbol
window for a global symbol.
6.2.3 Principles of ARRAY or STRING Symbol

 Symbol Variable - ARRAY
If users want to use a symbol whose data type is ARRAY in a program, the expression format is
Identifier[Index]. Generally speaking, the index is a decimal constant. If the programming
language in a project for an AH/AS series CPU module is a structured text, the index can be a
symbol. The minimum index value must be 0, whether the index is a constant or a symbol. The
maximum index value cannot be larger than or equal to the number of elements in the array. For
example, if the number of elements in an array is 10, the index value must be within the range
between 0 and 9. If the index is a symbol, the value of the symbol cannot be larger than the
number of elements in the array. Otherwise, an error will occur during the operation.
6-19
If users declare a symbol whose data type is ARRAY, they have to select an array type, and set
the size of the array. The number of elements in an array must be within the range between 1 and
512. A start device address is assigned to a symbol whose data type is ARRAY according to the
array type. Please notice that the start device address is assigned to a symbol whose data type is
ARRAY cannot be an SR device, an SM device, an E device, or an F device. Please refer to
section 6.1.4 for more information. Besides, an array is composed of the devices starting from the
device assigned by users or the system, and the number of devices in the array conforms to the
size of the array.
In the figure below, ARRAY[3] OF DWOED in the Type… cell for Ary_0 indicates that the array is
composed of 3 elements, and the array type is DWORD. The device address in the Address cell
for Ary_0 indicates that the start device address is D0. As a result, the array is composed of
D0~D5 (6 word devices).
ARRAY[5] OF BOOL in the Type…cell for Ary_1 indicates that the array is composed of 5
elements, and the array type is BOOL. The device address in the Address cell for Ary_1
indicates that the start device address is M0. As a result, the array is composed of M0~M4. For
DVPxxMC, if ARRAY[10] OF BOOL in the Type, the assigned address is%IB0, this means the
array will occupy %IB0～%IB9 device, a total of 10 IB devices.
When users declare a symbol whose data type is ARRAY, they can set the initial value of the
symbol. Please refer to the following example.
[1,2,3,4,5] in the Initial Value cell for A_Ary indicates that the initial value of A_Ary[0] is 1, the
initial value of A_Ary[1] is 2, the initial value of A_Ary[2] is 3, the initial value of A_Ary[3] is 4, and
the initial value of A_Ary[4] is 5. [1,3(0),5] in the Initial Value cell for B_Ary indicates that the
initial value of B_Ary[0] is 1, the initial value of B_Ary[1] is 0, the initial value of B_Ary[2] is 0, the
initial value of B_Ary[3] is 0, and the initial value of B_Ary[4] is 5.
A_Ary B_Ary
Element Initial value Element Initial value
A_Ary[0] 1 B_Ary[0] 1
A_Ary[1] 2 B_Ary[1] 0
A_Ary[2] 3 B_Ary[2] 0
A_Ary[3] 4 B_Ary[3] 0
A_Ary[4] 5 B_Ary[4] 5
6-20
When the element is with a two-dimensional array or three-dimensional array in the data unit type,
the symbol can use [n,n] or [n,n,n]. As the image shown below, the element pt1 is with a
three-dimensional array, the data unit type of the variable can be vardut.pt1[1,1,1] to assign the
element [1,1,1] from the array.
 Symbol Variable - STRING

In ISPSoft, a string is composed of ASCII codes, and the ASCII codes are surrounded by double
apostrophe, e.g. “ABCD”, while for DVPxxMC series, the single apostrophe is used, e.g. ‘ABCD’.
A symbol whose data type is STRING is generally used with an applied instruction. Please refer
to the programming manual for a model for more information.
When users declare a symbol whose data type is STRING, they can specify the maximum size of
the string. The number of characters in a string is within the range between 1 and 128, and one
character occupies 1 byte. The number of devices assigned to the characters in a string must
conform to the size of the string, and one extra byte must be assigned to the ending character in
the string. If the last character and the ending character in a string does not occupy the two bytes
in a word device, the ending character will be assigned another device.
For example, two word devices (four bytes) will be assigned to a string which is composed of
three characters, and three word devices (six bytes) will be assigned to a string which is
composed of four or five characters.
Please refer to the following figure. The number in the parentheses in the Type… cell for a
symbol whose data type is STRING indicates the maximum size of the string. The characters in
the Initial Value cell for a symbol whose data type is STRING cannot be put in double quotes,
and the number of characters in the Initial Value cell for the symbol whose data type is STRING
must be less than or equal to the maximum number of characters in the string.
When using DVPxxMC, users do not need to adjust because the string length declared is allocated
by software. For initial value assigned, the character length of an initial value is 0~32000 characters.
After declaring, the maximum length of characters is not shown in the brackets beside STRING
type.
6-21
Input character
length range is
0~32000
DVPxxMC
6.2.4 Modify Symbol Variables and Edit Symbol Table

If users want to modify the attributes of a symbol, they can double-click the symbol to open the
declaration window, and modify the setting values in the boxes according to the description in
section 6.2.2.
When editing an item in the symbol table, users can click Edit in the toolbar, or right-click on the
symbol table to operate from the quick menu. Please refer to the following table for basic operations.
6-22
Item Function
Undoing the last action
Undo
(*The number of previous actions that can be undone is 20.)
Redo Redoing an action which has been undone
Cut Cutting the symbol selected
Copy Copying the symbol selected
Pasting an object which has been copied or cut on the present
Paste
symbol table
Delete Deleting the symbol selected
Select All Selecting all the symbols in the symbol table
*1. To copy/cut/paste symbol variables in different PLC types or POUs, please check the pasted symbol variable
attributes are correct.
*2. The AH/AS series, DVP series and DVPxxMC series, users cannot copy/ paste/ cut the symbol variables amongst
the three types .
*3. When the pasted symbol table contains the same symbol name, the system will automatically add CopyOf_n (n is
a serial number) after the pasted symbol.
6.2.5 Remove Symbol Variable Allocated Address

Users can clear all the devices addresses assigned to the symbols in a symbol table, whether the
devices are assigned by the users or by the system. After the program is compiled again, the
system will automatically assign device addresses to these symbols. Besides, only the device
addresses in the symbol table selected are cleared, the device addresses in the other symbol tables
are not cleared.
Right-click a symbol table, and click Remove Address on the context menu.
6.2.6 Downloading the Initial Values of the Symbols

Users can set the initial value of a symbol when they declare the symbol. If a project is downloaded,
the initial values of the symbols can be written into the devices assigned to the symbols. However,
the initial values of the symbols in a project are written into the devices assigned to the symbol only
when the project is downloaded. If a PLC is disconnected or stops running, and runs again, the
values of the symbols in the program in the PLC will not be the initial values. In order to ensure that
the values of the symbols in the program in a PLC are the initial values whenever the PLC begins to
run, it is suggested that users download the initial values of the symbols. When executing online
updates, the system does not download the initial values of the symbol variables; DVPxxMC does
not have this option, therefore, when downloading the project, users need to setup parameters and
device initial value in HWCONFIG.
Users can click the PLC menu, point to Transfer, and click Download to open the Transfer Setup
window. The can also click on the toolbar to open the Transfer Setup window. After the users
select the Initial Value checkbox in the Transfer Selections section, and click OK, the initial values
will be written into the PLC.
6-23
*. Before the initial values are downloaded, users have to make sure that ISPSoft is connected to the PLC normally.
6.2.7 Export Symbol Table

The symbols created in a project can be exported as a CSV file. The data which is exported can be
edited and managed through Microsoft Excel.
If users want to export a symbol table, they can right-click the symbol table, and click Export Global
Symbol or Export Local Symbol on the context menu.
6-24
The users can also export the global symbol table in a project through the toolbar or the project
management area. However, if there is a group of projects in ISPSoft, the users can only export the
global symbol table in the project which is being edited presently.
After users click the Tools menu, point to Export, and click Global Symbols…, the global symbol
table in the project which being edited presently will be exported. The users can also export the
global symbol table in the project which is being edited presently by right-clicking the project in the
project management area, pointing to Export, and clicking Global Symbols….
6-25
6.2.8 Importing a Symbol Table

If users want to create symbols, they can add the symbols to a symbol table. If the users want to
create a large number of symbols easily, they can export a symbol table as a CSV file, edit the CSV
file through Microsoft Excel, and import the new CSV file into ISPSoft.
If users want to import a symbol table, they can right-click a symbol table, and click Import Global
Symbol or Import Local Symbol on the context menu.
The users can also import the global symbol table in a project through the toolbar or the project
management area. However, if there is a group of projects in ISPSoft, the users can only import the
global symbol table in the project which is being edited presently.
6-26
After users click the Tools menu, point to Import, and click Global Symbols…, the global symbol
table in the project which being edited presently will be exported. The users can also import the
global symbol table in the project which is being edited presently by right-clicking the project in the
project management area, pointing to Import, and clicking Global Symbols….
Select a file which will be imported in the Import Symbol List window, select an option button in the
Clear Table before Importing section, and click OK.
Additional remark
A symbol table exported from a project for a model or a POU can be imported into a project for
another model or another POU. Currently, the DVPxxMC series do not support export and import
symbol variables with other model types. However, if a symbol in a file which will be imported is in
one of the situations listed below, the symbol will be automatically eliminated or converted. Besides,
if an error occurs when a symbol table is imported, the error log will be saved as a file whose
primary filename is “Project name_ErrorLog” in a folder in which the project (*.isp) is saved. Users
can know the error occurring when the symbol is imported by viewing the file.
(a) If a symbol in a file is imported into a symbol table where the same identifier exists, the symbol
will be automatically eliminated from the file. If the contents of a symbol table are cleared before
a symbol table is imported, no such problem will occur.
(b) If the data type of a symbol in a file is not supported by a project for a model, the symbol is
eliminated from the file when the file is imported into the project.
(c) If the device assigned to a symbol in a file is not supported by a project for a model, or the device
is not within the range of devices in the model, the symbol is eliminated from the file when the file
is imported into the project.
6-27
(d) If the class of a symbol in a file is incompatible with the symbol table in a POU or a global symbol
table, the symbol is eliminated from the file when the file is imported into the symbol table in the
POU or the global table.
(e) If a symbol in a project for an AH/AS series CPU module is a symbol of the VAR_RETAIN class,
the symbol will become a symbol of the VAR class after the symbol is imported into a project for
a DVP series PLC.
An example of importing the global symbol in a project for AHCPU530-EN into a project for a
DVP-SV series PLC is shown below. Var_A, Var_B, and Var_C in the project for AHCPU530-EN can
be imported into the project for a DVP-SV series PLC. Var_C in the project for AHCPU530-EN is a
symbol of the VAR_RETAIN class. After Var_C in the project for AHCPU530-EN is imported into the
project for the DVP-SV series PLC, Var_C becomes a symbol of the VAR class. Owing to the fact L0
is not supported by the DVP-SV series PLC, Var_D is eliminated. D65535 is not within the range of
devices in the DVP-SV series PLC, and therefore Var_E is eliminated. Var_F is eliminated because
the DVP-SV series PLC does not support the symbols whose data types are STRING.
Users not only have to pay attention to the data formats in symbol tables, but also have to pay
attention to the comments on the symbols in a symbol table.
A CSV file can be opened in Microsoft Excel and Notepad, as shown below. In a CSV file, the cells
are divided by the commas. As a result, if there are commas in the Identifier Comment… cell for a
symbol in a symbol table, the system will automatically regard the contents after the first comma as
the contents of other cells, as shown by C2 and C3 which are in the red circle below. After the
symbol table is imported again, the contents after the first comma will be lost.
 Before the symbol table is exported  After the symbol table is imported
6-28
6.2.9 Arranging the symbols

In the local symbol table in a function block, the order in which the symbols of the VAR_INPUT class,
the symbols of the VAR_IN_OUT class, and the symbols of the VAR_OUTPUT class are arranged
affects the order in which the operands in the function block are arranged. If users want to arrange
the symbols in the local symbol table in a function block, they can right-click a symbol which will be
moved upward or moved downward, and press Alt＋ or Alt＋ on the keyboard.
In global symbol table and local symbol table of POU, users can click the Identifier or Address
the data in the table will be sorted according to the contents of the Identifier column or the Address
column, and a mark indicating the sort direction will appear in at the right side of the heading
Identifier or Address. Owing to the fact that the order in which the symbols in the local symbol table
in a function block are arranged affects the order in which the operands in the function block are
arranged, the data in the local symbol table in a function block cannot be sorted in this way.
6-29
6.2.10 Filtering the Symbols

Users can view the symbols which meet the same conditions.
(1) Right-click a symbol table, and click Symbols Filter on the context menu.
(2) Users can set the conditions in the Symbols Filter window. The wildcard character “＊” can be
used to substitute for any character or characters in a string. The symbols which satisfy the
conditions set are sieved out. If the users want to ignore a certain condition, they can leave the
box for the condition blank. Click OK after the setting is complete.
(3) The symbols which are sieved out are displayed in the additional page. The users can switch
between the pages by clicking the tabs at the top of the table. If several groups of symbols are
sieved out, the users can switch among the tabs by clicking or in the upper right
corner of the window. If users click in the upper right corner of a page, the page will be
closed. Besides, these additional pages are for view only. Users cannot edit the tables in the
pages. After the users click the Normal tab, they can edit the original symbol table.
6-30
6.2.11 Device Resource Allocation Setting

The devices automatically assigned to the symbols in a project for a DVP series PLC are devices
available to users. Users set a range of devices which can be automatically assigned to the symbols
in a project so that they can manage the devices conveniently. They can set a range of devices for a
project created. When the program in a project is compiled, devices within the range which is set are
assigned to the symbols. If the number of symbols is larger than the devices within the range, an
error message showing that the devices are insufficient will appear after the program in a project is
compiled. Please refer to section 6.1.4 for more information about assigning devices to the symbols
in a project.
Unfold the PLC section in the project management area in a project for a DVP series PLC,
double-click Device Resource Allocation.
Users can set a device range in the Device Resource Allocation window. Every type of device has
its limitations. For example, the data registers in a DVP-SV series PLC start from D2000, the
auxiliary relays start from M2000, the counters are 16-bit counters, and the timers take 100
milliseconds as the timing unit. If users select a device address which is not allowed, the system will
modify it automatically.
Click OK after the setting is complete. The setting here will be saved with the project.
6-31
6.3 Example
An example of creating a ladder diagram is shown in chapter 4. In section 5.6.1, the program
created in chapter 4 is rewritten by means of reorganizing the structure of the POU and TASK. In the
following sections, the device names in the program created in section 5.6.1 will be replaced by
symbols.
6.3.1 Planning a Symbol Table

The symbols which correspond to the device names in the program created in section 5.6.1 are
listed in the following table. Please refer to the descriptions below for more information.
Original Address Declaration
Identifier Function
device name specified position
X0.0 START_BT X0.0 Global symbol table START button
X0.1 STOP_BT X0.1 Global symbol table STOP button
X0.2 InP_SNR_1 X0.2 Global symbol table In position sensor 1
X0.3 InP_SNR_2 X0.3 Global symbol table In position sensor 2
X0.4 CNT_SNR X0.4 Global symbol table Counting sensor
Y0.0 CONVEYER Y0.0 Global symbol table Conveyer
Trigger signal for
Y0.1 TRIG_1 Y0.1 Global symbol table
injector 1
Trigger signal for
Y0.2 TRIG_2 Y0.2 Global symbol table
injector 2
A device address
M0 RUNNING is assigned Global symbol table Operation flag
automatically.
A device address
M1 COMPLETE is assigned Global symbol table Completion flag
automatically.
A device address
M2 ERROR is assigned Global symbol table Error flag
automatically.
A device address
Number of parts
D0 CNT_DT is assigned Local symbol table
which are conveyed
automatically.
 The X devices and the Y devices in the PLC are contacts connected to the equipment. The X
device addresses and the Y device addresses are related to the wiring of the equipment. Users
have to specify the device addresses by themselves. Besides, it is suggested that the X devices
and the Y devices should be created in the global symbol table although some X devices and Y
devices are only used in a certain POU. After the X devices and the Y device are created in the
global symbol table, the subsequent maintenance such as changing the wiring and accessing the
contacts in the additional program will be more convenient to users. However, it is not necessary
for users to create the X devices and the Y devices in the global symbol table. The users can
decide by themselves.
 Owing to the fact that M0, M1, and M3 are used in the different POUs, the symbols correspond to
the three flags are declared in the global symbol table. Users do not need to assign device
addresses to the symbols, and therefore the system assigns device addresses to them.
 The number of parts which are conveyed is stored in D0, and D0 is only used in the COUNTING.
As a result, the symbol corresponding to D0 is declared in the local symbol table in the
COUNTING, and the system assigns a device address to D0.
6-32
6.3.2 Writing a Program

Users can directly modify the program created in section 5.6.1, or write the program shown in
section 5.6.1 again. If the users want to write the program again, they have to create a new project,
and refer to chapter 4 and section 5.6.1 for more information.
First, open the Global Symbols window. Then, refer to section 6.2, and create the symbols shown
below in the global symbol table.
Double-click RUN_STOP in the project management area after the creation of the symbols in the
global symbol table is complete. If users directly modify the program created in section 5.6.1, they
will find that the symbols to which they assign the device addresses replace the corresponding
device names, and the comments on the symbols replace the original comments on the devices.
Please refer to the contents below if the program displayed in RUN_STOP is not the same as that
shown in the figure below.
6-33
The users can choose whether to display the symbols to which they assign devices in the ladder
diagram. If on the toolbar is pressed, the device names and the comments on the devices will
be displayed in the program. If is not pressed, the identifiers and the comments on the
symbols will be displayed in the program.
*. M0 is not assigned to any symbol, and therefore it remains unchanged if is not pressed. Likewise, if users
do not assign a device address to a symbol, or the system automatically assigns an internal memory to a symbol,
the symbol will remain unchanged after is pressed.

The operation flag M0 can be replaced by the identifier RUNNING. The users can refer to chapter 4,
and type RUNNING directly. They can also click M0, click in the box, and select an identifier on
the drop-down list. Besides, the users can press Page Down on the keyboard when they edit the
box. The users can select an identifier on the drop-down list by  or  on the keyboard. Press
Enter on the keyboard after the selection is complete.
Refer to the description above, and write the program in the POU shown below.
6-34
If users want to write the program shown in section 5.6.1 again, they have to refer to chapter 4 and
section 5.6.1, and complete the hardware configuration, the parameter setting, and the task
management. After the writing of the program is complete, the users have to compile the program,
and download the parameters and the program to the CPU module. Before the program is
downloaded to the CPU module, the users have to select the Initial Value checkbox in the Transfer
Setup window. Once the Initial Value checkbox in the Transfer Setup window is selected, the initial
value of CNT_DT in COUNTING will be written into the CPU module.
6-35
MEMO
6-36
Chapter 7 Function Block and Library
Table of Contents
7.1 Knowing Function Blocks................................................................ 7-2
7.1.1 Introduction of Function Blocks ........................................................ 7-2
7.1.2 Characteristics and Advantages of Function Blocks ............................. 7-3
7.2 Structure of the Function Blocks in ISPSoft .................................... 7-3
7.2.1 En Pin of Function Block .................................................................. 7-4
7.2.2 Symbol Variables in Function Block................................................... 7-4
7.2.3 Input/Output Pins of a Function Block ............................................... 7-6
7.2.4 Index Type Symbol Variables ......................................................... 7-11
7.2.5 Function Block Definition and Function Block Instance ...................... 7-14
7.2.6 Calling Relation Between Function Blocks ........................................ 7-18
7.2.7 Memory Configuration of Function Block ......................................... 7-19
7.3 Using a Function Block ................................................................. 7-25
7.3.1 Basic Specifications for Function Blocks .......................................... 7-25
7.3.2 Pulse Instructions for Function Blocks (AH/AS Series ONLY) .............. 7-27
7.3.3 Monitoring the Program in a Function Block ..................................... 7-28
7.3.4 Modifying the Program in a Function Block ...................................... 7-28
7.4 Instance ....................................................................................... 7-29
7.4.1 Planning a Program ...................................................................... 7-29
7.4.2 Creating the Program ................................................................... 7-30
7.5 Knowing the Library ..................................................................... 7-39
7.5.1 Creating the User-defined Library .................................................. 7-39
7.5.2 Including the Function Blocks in the User Defined Library .................. 7-41
7.5.3 Using Delta Library....................................................................... 7-43
7-1
7.1 Knowing Function Blocks

Function blocks (FB) and Function (FC) play important roles in the PLC programming. They are also
supported by IEC 61131-3. Owing to the characteristics and advantages of function blocks, ISPSoft
also supports and offer many functionalities related to function blocks, for instance user-defined FB
POU and system-defined FB POU. Though self-defined FC POU is not supported, ISPSoft provides
API instructions for users to use as system-defined FC POU.
7.1.1 Introduction of Function Blocks

A function block is a component in a program which performs an operation. It is a type of POU, but it
can not operate by itself. After a POU of the program type calls a function block, and sends the
related parameters, the function of the function block can be executed. After the execution of the
function block is complete, the internal operation result will be sent to the device or symbol specified
by the superior POU (caller).
A function block is shown below. The appearance of a function block is similar to that of an applied
instruction in that there are input pins and output pins. The usage of a function block is also similar
to that of an applied instruction. A function block is different from an applied instruction in that users
have to declare a symbol whose data type is a function block in the superior POU (caller) which calls
the function block. Besides, a function block can call another function block.
A function block is a memory unit. Every function block is assigned a substantial memory block
where the values of the internal symbols are stored. Owing to the fact that the value of the symbol in
a function block will be retained after the function block is executed, every execution result is
affected by the last execution result. In other words, the output values may be different even if the
input values are the same.
An application instance of a function block is shown in the figure below. There is a symbol whose
data type is a function block in the local symbol table in the superior POU (caller). The name in the
Type… cell is the same as the name of the function block. Please refer to the following sections for
more information about the usage of a function block.
7-2
Ch a pt er 7 F u nc t i o n B loc k a n d L ibr ar y
7.1.2 Characteristics and Advantages of Function Blocks

Owing to the fact that function blocks present characteristics and advantages that traditional
programming of a PLC does not have, function blocks are supported by IEC 61131-3, and are
widely used by users.
 Modular design
A large program is divided into several subroutines, and the subroutines are created as function
blocks. The function blocks are arranged and called by POUs of the program type.
 Highly independent
Different function blocks can be created by means of different programming languages such as a
ladder diagram, an instruction list, a structured text, and a function block diagram according to the
characteristics of the function blocks or a programmer’s habit. Besides, when a POU calls a
function block, the programming language by which the program in the function block is written
does not need to be considered. For example, if a complex operation has to be performed in a
part of a ladder diagram, users can create the part of the ladder diagram as a function block by
means of a structured text, and the function block can be called by the original ladder diagram.
 Reusable
Once a function block is created, it can be used repeatedly as long as users conform to the rule of
using the function block.
 Highly portable
After a function block is created, it can be used in the original project. Besides, after the function
block is exported, it can be imported into another project. As a result, users can gradually create
their own function blocks.
 Function blocks can be maintained conveniently.
The program in a function block is an independent module. If an error occurs in a function block,
or the function of a function block does not meet the actual requirement, users can just modify the
program in the function block, and do not need to debug or modify the whole program,
 The readability of a program is increased.
Users can write a complex program or a program which will be used repeatedly in a function
block, and the function block can be called by the original program. The structure of the original
program becomes more simplified, and the program becomes more readable.
 Highly confidential
After users set a password for a function block created, they can create their own core technology
in the function block without care, and provide the function block for other users. Besides, system
suppliers or software developers can provide function blocks which have specific functions for
customers.
 Highly efficient
The application of function blocks provides a highly efficient development environment in terms of
project development. Owing to the fact that function block are modular, developers and
manufacturers can take part in the development of a project together, and the use of human
resources are more flexible.
7.2 Structure of the Function Blocks in ISPSoft

Please refer to the following figure. The internal structure of a function block is similar to that of a
POU of the program type. It is composed of a local symbol table and a program. A function block is
edited in a way in which a POU of the program type is edited. The programming languages that
users can make use of to create the function blocks in ISPSoft are ladder diagrams, instruction lists,
structured texts, and function block diagrams, but are not sequential function charts. Besides, a
function block can call another function block. When a function block is called, the programming
language by which program in the function block is written does not need to be considered.
7-3
7.2.1 En Pin of Function Block

A superior POU (caller) calls a function block in a way similar to the way in which an applied
instruction is executed. Whether a function block is executed depends on the logic state sent to the
En pin of the function block. If the logic state sent to the En pin of a function block is ON, the function
block will be executed. If the logic state sent to the En pin of a function block is OFF, the function
block will not be executed. The Eno pin of a function block functions to send the logic state sent to
the En pin of the function block. Besides, if a function block is used in a structured text, the function
block does not have an En pin. Please refer to chapter 11 for more information.
7.2.2 Symbol Variables in Function Block

Function blocks are similar to POUs of the program type in that users can create local symbols in
the function blocks. Local symbols can also be used in a function block. However, if local symbols
are used in a function block in a project, the function block may not portable. If the function block is
imported into another project, the project may not have the same global symbols.
The following table describes the symbol variables related to function blocks and different
categories of symbol variables supported by each PLC types.
 The category of symbol variables for function block:
7-4
Category Description AH/AS DVP DVPxxMC

Only for function block arithmetic purpose
VAR internally. After executing, the symbol   
variable status is retained.
Used as input point of function block. The
variable receives the assigned operand
VAR_INPUT from the upper level POU (caller). When   
executing the function block, the operand
value is copied into the function block.
Used as output point of function block.
When finish executing the function block,
VAR_OUTPUT the variable outputs the arithmetic result to   
the assigned operand by the upper level
POU (caller).
Feedback points of a function block. When
executing function blocks, use the point to
send in the assigned operand content by
the upper level POU (caller) to the function
VAR_IN_OUT block. When finish executing the function  
block, arithmetic result feedback is output
to the assigned operand by the upper level
POU (caller). (DVPxxMC does NOT
support VAR_IN_OUT)
The retain variables can retain their value
VAR_RETAIN after power failure and the variable can be 
defined up to 15999 in total.
 Data types supported by internal function block local symbols :

Model
Description
Types
BOOL, WORD, DWORD, LWORD(*2), INT, DINT, LINT(*2), REAL, LREAL(*2),
AH/AS ARRAY, STRING, POINTER(*1), T_POINTER(*1), C_POINTER(*1),
HC_POINTER(*1), function block(FB) types, user-defined types
DVP BOOL, WORD, DWORD, , REAL, ARRAY, STEP, TIMER, and COUNTER
BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD,LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT,
DVPxxMC UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, ARRAY, STRING, TIME, DATE, TOD,DT, function
block (FB) types, user-defined types
*1. Please refer to section 7.2.4 for more information about POINTER, T_POINTER, C_POINTER, andHC_POINTER.
*2. The LWORD, LINT and LREAL data types are not supported by the function blocks in AS series CPU modules.
 Memory configuration of function block
Model
Description
Types
When the symbols whose data type is a function block, and the local symbols
created in a function block are declared, users can not assign device addresses to
AH/AS
them. The system will automatically assign memories reserved by the CPU
module.
Every symbol whose data type is a function block is assigned a P device. Besides,
DVP the system automatically assigns devices in the PLC to the local symbols in a
function block instance according to the data types of the local symbols.
When declaring symbol variables as function block types (FB instance)as well as
DVPxxMC local symbols created in function blocks, both cannot assign device address by
themselves, the system will auto-configure a reserved memory section in the host.
7-5
*. Please refer to sections 7.2.5~7.2.7 for more information about function block instances and the assignment of
memories.
7.2.3 Input/Output Pins of a Function Block

When a POU calls a function block, it sends the value in a device to the input pin of the function
block. After the function block is executed, the operation result is sent to the device in the POU
through the output pin of the function block.
Please refer to the following figures.
 Before a function block is executed
The caller assigns D0 to DT_IN, the input pin of the function block. When the function block is
called, the system sends the present value in D0 to DT_IN. (DT_IN is a symbol of the
VAR_INPUT type.)
 After a function block is executed

After the function block is executed, the value of DT_IN becomes 89. The value in D0 is
unchanged. Besides, DT_OUT sends the final operation result to D2, the device specified by the
caller. Even if the value in D2 is overwritten during the execution of the program, the value of
DT_OUT will remain unchanged. (DT_ OUT is a symbol of the VAR_OUTPUT class.)
Although the value of the symbol of the VAR_IN_OUT class will be sent to the device that the
caller assigns to the symbol after the function block is executed, the present value in the device
specified by the caller is sent to the symbol before the symbol sends the final operation result to
the device.
*. The data type of the symbol of the VAR_IN_OUT class in a function block in a project for an AH/AS series PUC
module can be POINTER. The caller can send the device address to the function block through the symbol
whose data type is POINTER. Please refer to the following section for more information.
Please refer to the function blocks below. FB_Var is the pin of the function block, and P_Var is the
operand that the superior POU (caller) assigns to FB_Var. The data type of P_Var and that of
FB_Var must conform to the basic principle described below. However, in order to make the
writing of a program more convenient, ISPSoft provides some special principles. As long as the
data type of P_Var and that of FB_Var conform to one of the special principles, the system will
7-6
regard the data types as legal data types even if the data types does not conform to the basic
principle. The basic principles below is supported by DVPxxMC.
 Basic principle for the general data types

The data type of P_Var must be the same as the data type of FB_Var.
 Special principles for the general data types (Please refer to the following table.)
1. If either the data type of P_Var or the data type of FB_Var is WORD, DWORD, or LWORD, the
data type of the other symbol can be WORD, DWORD, LWORD, INT, DINT, LINT, REAL, or
LREAL. If this condition is met, the data length of P_Var can be larger than or equal to the data
length of FB_VAR.
2. If the data type of P_Var is STEP, the data type of FB_Var can be BOOL. The state of the step
in the caller will be used in the function block.
Model Types AS/AH/DVP

FB_Var (function block)
Data type
WORD DWORD LWORD INT DINT LINT REAL LREAL BOOL
WORD  
DWORD     
P_VAR LWORD        
(caller) INT  
DINT   
LINT    
REAL   
P_VAR LREAL    
(caller) BOOL 
STEP 
In addition to the principles for the general data types described above, there are principles for the
symbols whose data type is ARRAY.
 Basic principles for the symbols whose data types are ARRAY
1. The array type of P_Var must be the same as the array type of FB_Var.
2. If the array type of P_Var is the same as the array type of FB_Var, the size of the array for
P_Var can be larger than the size of the array for FB_VAR.
 Special principles for the symbols whose data types are ARRAY
1. When the array types are compared, the first special principle for the general data types
applies.
2. If either the data type of P_Var or the data type of FB_Var is ARRAY, the system will regard the
other symbol whose data type is not AARAY as a symbol whose data type is ARRAY, and the
size of the array for the symbol will be one element.
3. If the array type of P_Var or the array type of FB_Var is WORD,INT, REAL or any other types,
users can compare bothdata lengths by means of summation. For example, a symbol whose
array type is DWORD is compatible with a symbol whose array type is INT and contains the
length of two elements and for a symbol whose array type WORD and has a length of four
elements is compatible with a symbol whose array type is LINT. However, a symbol whose
array type is INT and has a length of four elements is not compatible with a symbol whose
7-7
array type is LINT, because both data types do not contain the array type of WORD and do
not fit the principle.
The following examples are:
 Example 1: The data type of P_Var (in the caller) is INT, and the data type of FB_Var (in the
function block) is INT.
 The basic principle for the general data types is satisfied. As a result, the data types are legal.
 Example 2: The data type of P_Var (in the caller) is WORD, and the data type of FB_Var (in the
function block) is INT.
 The first special principle for the general data types is satisfied. As a result, the data types are
legal.
 Example 3: The data type of P_Var (in the caller) is LWORD, and the data type of FB_Var (in the
function block) is DINT。
 The first special principle for the general data types is satisfied. As a result, the data types are
legal.
ㄨ Example 4: The data type of P_Var (in the caller) is WORD, and the data type of FB_Var (in the
function block) is LINT.
 Although the data type of P_Var is WORD, the data length of P_Var is less than that of
FB_Var. As a result, the data types are illegal.
ㄨ Example 5: The data type of P_Var (in the caller) is LINT, and the data type of FB_Var (in the
function block) is DINT.
 The data type of P_Var is not the same as the data type of FB_Var. As a result, the data types
are illegal.
 Example 6: The array type of P_Var (in the caller) is INT, and the size of the array for P_Var (in
the caller) is four elements. The array type of FB_Var (in the function block) is INT,
and the size of the array for FB_Var (in the function block) is three elements.
 The basic principles for the symbols whose data types are ARRAY are satisfied. As a result,
the array types are legal.
 Example 7: The array type of P_Var is WORD, and the size of the array for P_Var is two elements.
The data type of FB_Var is WORD (not ARRAY).
 The second special principle for the symbols whose data types are ARRAY is satisfied. As a
result, the array type and the data type are legal.
 Example 8: The array type of P_Var is WORD, and the size of the array for P_Var is four
elements. The data type of FB_Var is DWORD (not ARRAY).
 The third special principle for the symbols whose data types are ARRAY is satisfied. As a
result, the array type and the data type are legal.
ㄨ Example 9: The array type of P_Var is DINT, and the size of the array for P_Var is four elements.
The array type of FB_Var is INT, and the size of the array for FB_Var is two
elements.
 The array type of P_Var is not the same as the array type of FB_Var. As a result, the array
types are illegal.
 Example 10: The data type of P_Var is DWORD (not ARRAY). The array type of FB_Var is
WORD, and the size of the array for FB_Var is two elements.
 The third special principle for the symbols whose data types are ARRAY is satisfied. As a
result, the data type and the array type are legal.
 Principles of Data Types for DVPxxMC

Example 1
7-8
1. Generally, the data type of P_Var (in the caller) and the data type of FB_Var (in the function
block) is the same. But for some situations, the ISPSoft allows the length of the data type of
P_Var (in the caller) to be shorter or equal to the length of FB_Var (in the function block).
2. If the data type of FB_Var (in the function block) is ARRAY, then the data type of P_Var (in the
caller) has to be ARRAY and the content as well as length has to be the same as FB_Var (in
the function block).
Model
DVPxxMC
Types
FB_Var (Function Block)
Data
Type WOR DWO LWO USIN UDIN ULIN LREA
BOOLBYTE UINT SINT INT DINT LINT REAL
D RD RD T T T L
BOOL 
BYTE              
WORD           
DWORD        
LWORD     
USINT              
P_VAR (Caller)
UINT           
UDINT        
ULINT     
SINT              
INT           
DINT        
LINT     
REAL  
LREAL  
Model Types DVPxxMC

Data Type
TIME DATE TOD DT STRING
TIME 
DATE 
P_VAR
(Caller)
TOD 
DT 
STRING 
7-9
Example below:
1. Generally, the data type of P_Var (in the caller) and the data type of FB_Var (in the function
block) is the same. But for some situations, the ISPSoft allows the length of the data type of
P_Var (in the caller) to be longer or equal to the length of FB_Var (in the function block).
2. If the data type of FB_Var (in the function block) is ARRAY, then the data type of P_Var (in the
caller) has to be ARRAY and the content as well as length has to be the same as FB_Var (in the
function block).
Model
DVPxxMC
Type
Data
Type BOOL BYTE WORDDWORDLWORDUSINT UINT UDINT ULINT SINT INT DINT LINT REAL LREAL
BOOL 
BYTE   
WORD      
DWORD         
LWORD            
USINT   
P_VAR (Caller)
UINT      
UDINT         
ULINT            
SINT   
INT      
DINT         
LINT            
REAL              
LREAL              
Model Type DVPxxMC

Data Type
TIME DATE TOD DT STRING
TIME 
DATE 
P_VAR
(Caller)
TOD 
DT 
STRING 
Additional remark
(a) According to the above principle, the data length of P_Var (in the caller) is larger than that of
FB_Var (in function block), and the value of P_Var is sent to FB_Var, the values of the bits
starting from the lowest bit in P_Var are retrieved, and the number of values retrieved conforms
7-10
to the data length of FB_Var. If the value of FB_Var is sent to P_Var, the values of the bits
starting from the lowest bit in P_Var are overwritten, the number of values overwritten conforms
to the data length of FB_Var, and the values which are not overwritten remains unchanged.
Users have to be careful about the correctness of the data.
(b) The data type of a symbol in a function block in a project for an AH series CPU module can be
POINTER. Please refer to section 7.2.4 for more information.
(c) For DVPxxMC, if the data length of P_Var (in the caller) is shorter than that of FB_Var (in function
block), and the value of P_Var is sent to FB_Var, the values of the bits starting from the lowest bit
in P_Var are retrieved, and the number of values retrieved conforms to the data length of FB_Var.
If the value of FB_Var is sent to P_Var, the values of the bits starting from the lowest bit in P_Var
are overwritten, the number of values overwritten conforms to the data length of FB_Var, and the
highest bits which exceeds the length of FB_Var is overwritten as 0. Users have to be more
careful about the correctness of the data.
7.2.4 Index Type Symbol Variables

A symbol whose data type is POINTER, T_POINTER, C_POINTER, or HC_POINTER functions to
send the symbol or the device address specified by the caller to the function block. The use of a
symbol whose data type is POINTER, T_POINTER, C_POINTER, or HC_POINTER is quite
different from the use of a symbol whose data type is a general data type. A symbol whose data type
is a general data type in a function block either receives the value from the device specified by the
caller or sends the operation result to the device specified by the caller. If the data type of a pin of a
function block is POINTER, T_POINTER, C_POINTER, or HC_POINTER, the data sent to the
function block will be the symbol or the device address assigned to the pin. As a result, the object
processed in a function block is the object which is specified.
The caller assigns D0 to pVAR in the function block, and the data type of pVAR in the function block
is POINTER, T_POINTER, C_POINTER, or HC_POINTER, as shown in the figure below. If the
function block is called and executed, pVAR in the function block will be regarded as D0.
The principles of using a symbol whose data type is POINTER, T_POINTER, C_POINTER, or
HC_POINTER are as follows.
1. Only AH/AS series CPU modules support a symbol whose data type is POINTER, T_POINTER,
C_POINTER, or HC_POINTER.
2. The symbols whose data types are POINTER can only be declared in the function blocks in a
project, and they must be symbols of VAR_IN_OUT class.
3. The pointers and the restrictions are described below.
Pointer Restriction
Maximum 16 symbols whose data types are POINTER can be
number declared in a function block.
General pointer
Symbol whose data type is
POINTER
Reference WORD/DWORD/LWORD/INT/DINT/LINT, data register, link
register, or X/Y device (e.g. X0/Y0)
Maximum 8 symbols whose data types are T_POINTER can be
Pointer for a timer
7 - 11
Pointer Restriction
T_POINTER Reference Timer or symbol whose data type is TIMER
Maximum 8 symbols whose data types are C_POINTER can be
Pointer for a counter
C_POINTER
Reference Counter or symbol whose data type is COUNTER
Pointer for a Maximum 8 symbols whose data types are HC_POINTER can be
high-speed counter number declared in a function block.
32-bit counter or symbol whose data type is COUNTER and
HC_POINTER Reference
to which a 32-bit counter is assigned
 Example of using a symbol whose data type is POINTER

The function block FB0 has three input pins. The data types and the classes are in the red
frame in the local symbol table below. D0, D1, and D2 in the POU (caller) are assigned to the
three pins. (The initial values in D0, D1, and D2 are 0.) The execution of the program is as
follows.
 D0 is assigned to VAR_IN. VAR_IN is a symbol of the VAR_INPUT class, and the data type
of VAR_IN is WORD. When the function block is called, the present value in D0 is copied
into VAR_IN. After the operation inside the function block is performed, 4 will be added to
the value of VAE_IN. The operation result does not affect D0, and therefore the value in D0
is always 0.
 D1 is assigned to VAR_IO. VAR_IO is a symbol of the VAR_IN_OUT class, and the data
type of VAR_IO is WORD. When the function block is called, the present value in D1 is
copied into VAR_IO. After the operation inside the function block is performed, 4 is added to
the value of VAR_IO. Owing to the fact that VAR_IO is a symbol of the VAR_IN_OUT class,
the value of VAR_IO is copied into D1 after the function block is executed. The value sent
from D1 to VAR_IO is an accumulated value. The value in D1 accumulates during the
execution of the function block.
 D2 is assigned to pVAR. Owing to the fact that the data type of pVAR is POINTER, the sum
will be written into D2 after 4 is added to D2. The value in D2 accumulates during the
execution of the function block.
Although D1 and D2 get the same execution results, they have different execution processes.
Besides, owing to the fact that pVAR is regarded as D2, the present value of pVAR is not
displayed in a way in which the present value of VAR_IO is displayed when the online
monitoring function is enabled.
7-12
*. SM400 is a special auxiliary relay in AH/AS series. It is ON when the CPU module is powered. SM402
initializes forward (an instant RUN is ON).
 Example of using a symbol whose data type is T_POINTER and a symbol whose data
type is C_POINTER
Owing to the fact that users can not declare a symbol whose data type is TIMER and a symbol
whose data type is COUNTER in a function block in a project for an AH/AS series CPU module,
they can send a timer, and a counter to a function block by means of declaring a symbol whose
data type is T_POINTER, and a symbol whose data type is C_POINTER in the function block.
The function block FB1 has two input pins. pTMR is a symbol whose data type is T_POINTER,
and pCNT is a symbol whose data type is C_POINTER. The caller assigns TMR_1 and CNT_1
to the two pins. (The data type of TMR_1 is TIMER, and the data type of CNT_1 is
COUNTER.)
In the superior POU, the value of CNT_1 increases by one when X0.0 is turned from OFF to
ON. CNT_1 will not be ON until the value of CNT_1 is 10. Owing to the fact that TMR_1 and
CNT_1 are assigned to the function block, the state of CNT_1 (pCNT) is judged when the
function block is executed. When CNT_1 (pCNT) is ON, TMR_1 (pTMR) measures the time
interval. When the value of pTMR is 50, CNT_1 (pCNT) is reset.
7-13
Likewise, the present value of pTMR and that of pCNT are not displayed when the online
monitoring function is enabled.
7.2.5 Function Block Definition and Function Block Instance

The definition of a function block and an example of a function block are important concepts. Please
refer to the following example. Whenever the superior POU (caller) is executed, the value of V1_IN
is sent to the function block RIPPLE_FILTER. After the value sent to the function block this time is
compared with the value recorded last time, the final operation result will be sent to V1_OUT in the
superior POU. In order to record the operation result, a local symbol in which the operation result
can be stored is declared in the function block. When the program is compiled, the system assigns a
substantial memory block to this local symbol.
7-14
If several pieces of data in the superior POU are processed in the same way, and theses pieces of
data are independent of one another, the execution result may be incorrect, as shown in the figure
below. After the value of V2_IN is sent to the function block, it will be compared with the value gotten
from the operation performed on V1_IN last time. As a result, V1_IN and V2_IN interfere with each
other.
If the same POU of the function block type is created a gain, the execution result is correct although
different memory blocks are assigned to the local symbols in the two POUs of the function block
type when the program is compiled. However, the same work is repeated when users write the
program.
7-15
In view of this, the concept related to function block instances is introduced into IEC 61131-3.
After users add a POU of the function block type, declare local symbols in the POU, and write a
program in the POU, they will get a function block definition. The function block definition is like a
document. It does not participate in any operation, and does not appropriate any resources that the
PLC uses.
If a POU of the program type wants to call this function block, the users must declare a symbol
whose data type is a function block in advance. In other words, the users have to produce an object
which takes part in an operation according to the function block definition. The object produced is a
function block instance.
When the program is compiled, the system assigns a substantial memory block to the function block
instance and the local symbols in the function block instance according to the definition.
If the same operation is required, and a different memory block is also required, users can make use
of the characteristic of a function block instance. After a different symbol is declared for a function
block which requires a different memory block, the system will regard the different symbol as a
different function block instance. When the program is compiled, a different memory block is
assigned to the different function block instance.
7-16
As shown in the figure below, only the function block definition is under Function Blocks in the
project management area before the program in the project is compiled. After the program is
compiled, the function block instances will be under the function block definition. The format of a
function block instance is Instance name[POU name].
If a symbol whose data type is general data type is declared, a device is assigned to the symbol
when the program is compiled. Likewise, if a symbol whose data type is a function block is declared,
a corresponding function block instance is produced when the program is compiled. Besides, the
number of function block definitions which produce the instances in a project for an AH5X0 series
CPU module can not be larger than 1024. (The function block definitions which do not produce the
instances are not included.)
If a symbol with a general data type is declared, a device will be assigned to the symbol when the
program is compiled. Likewise, whether it will be used or not, if a symbol with a function block data
type is declared, a corresponding function block instance will be produced, whenever a program is
compiled. However for an AH5X0 series CPU module, the number of function block instances as
POUs in a project cannot exceed 1024. (The function block definitions which do not produce
instances are not included.) This limitation only applies to AH5X0 series; for other series, the
number of function block definitions can be as large as the size of the PLC internal memory.
In sum, the operation of a function block involves a definition and an instance. Function block
definitions are related to planning, and function block instances are related to execution. Take
products for example. A function block definition is the same as the product specifications developed
by engineers, and a function block instance is the same as the product produced according to the
specifications.
7-17
7.2.6 Calling Relation Between Function Blocks

In ISPSoft function block specification, a function block can call another function block. For AH
series, maximum of 32 layers can be called; AS/DVP series, a maximum of 16 layers can be called;
DVPxxMC series, there are no limits on calls. To identify, the function block example called by POU
is defined as the first layer.
The program in function block A calls function block B, and the program in function block B calls
function block C. In other words, function block A is superior to function block B and function block C,
and function block B is superior to function block C. In ISPSoft, a function block is not allowed to call
itself. As a result, if function block A is superior to function block B, function block B and function
block C can not call function block A, but the POU of the program type can call function block A,
function block B, or function block C.
If function block A, function block C, and function B are not called by any POUs of the program type,
they do not participate in the execution of the program, and the corresponding function block
instances are not produced when the program is compiled. After function block A is declared in a
certain POU of the program type or in a the global symbol table in a project, the corresponding
function block instances will be produced according to the relation among the three function blocks
during the compiling of the program.
Please refer to the declaration of the function block instances and the relation among the function
blocks below. Function block D is declared in the global symbol table while the other function block
instances are declared in the local symbol tables in the superior POUs (callers).
Declaration position Function block which is declared

Global symbol table One instance of function block D: INS_D
POU of the One instance of function block A: INS_A
Local symbol program type One instance of function block B: INS_B
table Function block A One instance of function block B: INS_B
Function block B Two instances of function block C: INS_C1 and INS_C2
7-18
The function block instances produced when the program is compiled according to the relation
described above are as follows. Owing to the fact two instances of function block C are declared in
the local symbol table in function block B, two instances of function block C are produced when
another instance of function block B is produced. Since function block D is declared in the global
symbol table, the function of the function block instance and the data stored in the function block
instance can be used by all the POUs. In other words, the system only produces one instance of
function block D. Although function block D is called by the two POUs, the same instance of function
block D is executed in the two POUs.
The items which will appear in the project management area after the program is compiled are
shown in the figure below. The superior POU of the program type and the inferior POUs are in the
brackets at the end of a function block instance.
Users can not declare function block instances in the local symbol table in a function block in a
project for a DVP series PLC. If a function block wants to call another function block, the inferior
function block instance must be declared in the global symbol table. As a result, users have to be
more careful about the correctness of the data when a function block calls another function block. If
an independent memory block is required, users have to declare another instance of a function
block in the global symbol table.
Users are allowed to declare function block instances in the local symbol table in a function block in
a project for an AH/AS series CPU module. If an inferior function block instance which is called by a
function block is not called by another POU, the inferior block instance can be declared in the local
symbol table in the function block. Besides, in a project for an AH/AS series CPU module, the
memory block the system assigns to a function block instance depends on the position where the
function block instance is declared.
7.2.7 Memory Configuration of Function Block

When internal function blocks has local symbols declared to auto-configure address, the system will
7-19
configure an independent memory section for these local symbols during the process of compiling
and creating the instance; if the internal function block declare that the local symbol has assigned
device address by themselves, then the symbol variable is referred as an absolute address and a
memory section is not configured to the variable during compiling. Even in different function block
instances, as long as the process is related to this variable, the system will view as user-defined
device content to operate.
When the system is configuring resources, DVP series, DVPxxMC series, AH5X0 series, AH5X1
series, AH560 redundant system, AHxxEMC and AS series all have different mechanisms. Please
refer to the following explanations.
.
 DVP series PLC
When a DVP series PLC assigns memory blocks, every function block instance is automatically
assigned a P device. If the POU name of a function block begins with “P0_” or “P1_”, P0 or P1 will
be assigned to the function block instance after the program is compiled. If more than one
instance of the function block is declared, an error occurs when the program is compiled. The
error occurs because the same P device is used repeatedly.
The system assigns corresponding devices to the local symbols declared in a function block
according to the data types of the local symbols. For example, the system assigns a data register
to a local symbol whose data type is WORD, and an auxiliary relay to a local symbol whose data
type is BOOL. As a result, the size of function block instance in a DVP series PLC depends on the
local symbols declared, and different instances occupy different devices. Two function block
instances produced in a DVP series PLC are shown in the figure below. After the windows for the
two function block instances are opened, users can see in the local symbol tables that the system
assigns different devices to the two instances.
7-20
 AH5X0 series CPU module

The system in an AH5X0 series CPU module reserves a fixed number of memory blocks for
function block instances. The number of memory blocks varies with the model selected and every
instance produced will occupy one P device. The size of every memory block is 4096 words.
Owing to the fact that the memory blocks assigned to the function blocks in a project for an
AH5X0 series CPU module are memories reserved by the CPU module, users can not view the
assignment result in the windows for the function blocks.
The following diagram is the call structure of function block for section 7.2.6 example.
The system assigns a 4096-word memory block to the function block instance declared in a POU
of the program type in a project for an AH5X0 series CPU module. The function block instance
declared in the POU of the program type and the inferior function blocks are assigned the same
memory block. Besides, the system assigns another 4096-word memory block to a function block
instance declared in the global symbol table.
In the example above, the system assigns three 4096-word memory blocks.
The memory blocks that an AH5X0 series CPU module reserves for function block instances are
stored in the internal memory. The memory blocks assigned to the function blocks in a project for
an AH5X0 series CPU module are not devices available to users. No matter what the size of the
memory that a function block instance occupies is, the size of the memory block assigned to the
function block instance is 4096 words. As a result, users have to be careful when they program a
7-21
CPU module. The calculation of the size of a function block instance is as follows.
(1) The size of the memory that a function block instance occupies is 2 words.
(2) The size of the memory that a local symbol in a function block instance occupies is calculated
by the word. The size which is less than one word is calculated as one word. The size of the
memory that a symbol whose data type is a function block (inferior function block instance)
occupies is calculated by means of (1).
Please refer to the following example. The local symbols declared in the function block definitions
are listed in the table below.
Function block
Number of local symbols
definition
Two symbols whose data types are DWORD. One
Function block A symbol whose data type is LREAL. One inferior
function block instance.
One symbol whose data type is WORD. Two symbols

Function block B whose data type is REAL. Two inferior function block
instances.
Two symbols whose data type is BOOL. One symbol

Function block C whose array type is BOOL and whose array size is 22
elements.
The calculation for the example is as follows.

(1) The size of the memory that a function block instance occupies is 2 words. There are four
function block instances in the example, and therefore the size is 8 words.
(2) The size of the memory that a local symbol whose data type is not a function block in a
function block instance occupies is calculated as follows.
 Function block instance INS_A
 Two words (DWROD x 1) + Four words (LREAL x 1)
The sum is 2+4=6 (words).
 Function block instance INS_B
 One word (WORD x 1) + Four words (REAL x 2)
 Function block instance INS_C1/INS_C2
The size of the memory that a local symbol occupies is calculated by the word. The size
which is less than one word is calculated as one word. As a result, the size of the memory
that a local symbol whose data type is BOOL occupies is calculated as one word. The size
of the memory that a local symbol whose array type is BOOL and whose array size is 22
elements occupies is larger than one word, but is less than two words. The size is
calculated as two words. The calculation is as follows.
 Two words (BOOL x 2) + Two words (Boolean array which is composed of twenty-two
elements x 1)
The sum is 2+2=4. There are two instances of function block C, and therefore the size
of the memory that the two function block instances occupy is 2x4=8 (words).
The size of the memory that the function block instances and the local symbols occupy is
8+6+5+8=27 (words).
 AH5X1, AH560 Redundant System, AHxxEMC, and AS Series

The memory blocks that an AH5X1, AH560 Redundant System, AHxxEMC, or ASseries CPU
module reserves for function block instances are stored in the internal memory. That means it will
not take up the device resources while allocating. The difference is for AH5X1, AHxxEMC, AS series,
the number of memory blocks assigned to the function block instances can be as large as the size of
the PLC internal memory, but for AH5X0, the limitation is 4096 words. And one function block
7-22
instance occupies one P device.
The following diagram adopts section 7.2.6 example, including an estimated amount of local and
global symbol data types declared in the function block definition.
Function block
Number of local/global symbols
definition
One symbol whose data type is
Function block DWORD. One symbol whose data
A type is LREAL. One inferior function
block instance.
One symbol whose data type is
Function block WORD. Two symbols whose data
B type is REAL. Two inferior function
block instances.
Two symbols whose data type is
Function block BOOL. One symbol whose array type
C is BOOL and whose array size is 22
elements.
Function block One symbol whose data type is
D WORD.
Following figure illustrates how the internal memory occupies in the instances.

(1) All the instances will occupy the internal memory by the order of their declarations. The first
declared one is the function block instance INS_D.
 Function block instance INS_D
 One word (WORD x 1)
The sum is 1 (word).
(2) The size of the memory that a local/global symbol whose data type is not a function block in a
function block instance occupies is calculated as follows.
7-23
 Two words (DWROD x 1) + Four words (LREAL x 1)


 One word (WROD x 1) + Four words (REAL x 2)
 Function block instance INS_C1 / INS_C2

The size of the memory that a local/global symbol occupies is calculated by the word. The
size which is less than one word is calculated as one word. As a result, the size of the
memory that a local symbol whose data type is BOOL occupies is calculated as one word.
The size of the memory that a local symbol whose array type is BOOL and whose array
size is 22 elements occupies is larger than one word, but is less than two words. The size
is calculated as two words. The calculation is as follows.
 Two words (BOOL x 2) + Two words (Boolean array which is composed of twenty-two
elements x 1)
The sum is 2+2=4. There are two instances of function block C, and therefore the size of
the memory that the two function block instances occupy is 2x4=8 (words).
 Function block instance INS_B / INS_C1 / INS_C2

 As the previous example shown INS_B occupies 5 (Words)；INS_C1 / INS_C2 occupies 8
(Words); and therefore the size of the memory that two function block occupy is 5 + 8 = 13
(Words).
The size of the memory that the function block instances and the local/global symbols occupy is 1 +
6 + 5 + 8 + 13 = 33 (words).
 DVPxxMC series PLC

When DVPxxMC series is configured in memory section, the instance is assigned to a particular
section of the memory and till the memory space reaches 2x1013Byte. Users need to take not that
the memory section is still affected by the number of POU, therefore, the more number of FB
defined by users, there will be limits in corresponds to the number of instances referred by each
function block definition.
For local symbols in each instance, when byte number for each symbol variable based on data
size does not reach 1 byte, it is calculated as 1 byte (no device attached); if symbol variable data
type is BOOL and has device attached, the device type is calculated in Bit if device type is Bit, if
the device type is Byte, then it is calculated in Byte.
The following diagram is the section 7.2.6 instance regarding call structure of function block,
please refer to the section for more details. In addition, the diagram includes an estimated
amount of local and global symbol data types declared by each function block definition.
7-24
Function
Block Amount of Local / Global Symbols
Definition
Function DWORD x 1, lower level function
Block A instance, function block instance x 1
Function LREAL x 1, lower level function
Block B instance x 2
Function
BOOL array x 1 (length is 2)
Block C
Function
WORD x 1
Block D
Following figure illustrates how the internal memory occupies in the instances.
2x1013Bytes

 4 Bytes (DWORD x 1), total 5 (Bytes)
 8 Bytes (LREAL x 1), total 8 (Bytes)
 Function block instance INS_C1/INS_C2
In BOOL array. The BOOL element in each array is fixed to occupy 1 Byte. Calculation are
as followed.
 2 Bytes (BOOL array x 1, length is 2), total is 2; function block C produces 2 instances
in total. So, the two function block instances total is 2x2=4 (Bytes) i.
In short, the total memory size of the occupied section that corresponds to the function block is 5+8+4=17
(Bytes).
7.3 Using a Function Block

7.3.1 Basic Specifications for Function Blocks
The specifications for the function blocks in ISPSoft are shown below. When users use function
blocks, they have to make sure that the operation conforms to the specifications in the table.
Otherwise, an error occurs when the program is compiled or executed.
7-25
 Specifications for the function blocks

Number of
function block All series: no limitation
definitions
AH5X1/ AH560 Redundancy System / AHxxEMC/AS: Depends on the
controller devices available.
Number of
AH5X0: The maximum number of memory block instances varies according
function block
to the series (Please refer to appendix B).Depends on the controller
instances
devices available.
DVP: Depends on the controller devices available.
AH5X1/ AH560 Redundancy System/AS: Without limit, until the internal
Size of a function memory is used up.
block AH5X0: The size of a memory block instance is 4096 words.
DVP: Depends on the devices assigned to the function block.
For AH series, the nest structure of function block calling function block,
Number of layers maximum layer is 32 ; AS/DVP series, maximum layer is 16; DVPxxMC
series does not have limit.
 Note
 The pins of a function block must be assigned operands. The operands can be device
addresses or symbols. If the class of a symbol is VAR_INPUT, the operand assigned to the
symbol can be a constant.
 An inferior function block can not call the superior function block, and a function block can not
call itself.
 If a function block is exported, the definition of the function block is exported, but the definitions
of the inferior function blocks and the global symbols used are not exported.
 The En pins of the function blocks in ladder diagrams, sequential function charts, function block
diagrams, and instruction lists must be connected to contacts. However, the En pins of the
function blocks in structured texts do not have to be connected to contacts.
 The programming languages which support the creation of function blocks include ladder
diagrams, instruction lists, structured texts, function block diagrams and continuous function
charts. Sequential function charts do not support the creation of function blocks.
 The programming languages which support the calling of function blocks include ladder
diagrams, instruction lists, structured texts, function block diagrams and continuous function
charts. Users can also use function blocks in the actions in sequential function charts.
 Users can modify function block definitions, but they can not modify function block instances.
(Please refer to section 7.3.4.)
 If the modification of a function block definition in the online mode results in the abnormal
representation of the function block in the superior POU, users have to disable the online
editing function, delete the abnormal representation of the function block, and add the normal
representation of the function block. After the normal representation of the function block is
added, the program can be compiled and downloaded. (Please refer to section 7.3.4 for more
information.)
 If a jump instruction is used in a function block, the jump destination must be in the same
function block, and can not be outside the function block or in the inferior function block.
 Users can not declare symbols whose data types are TIMER and symbols whose data types
are COUNTER in the function blocks in a project for an AH/AS series CPU module, but they
can declare symbols whose data types are POINTER, symbols whose data types are
T_POINTER, symbols whose data types are C_POINTER, and symbols whose data types are
HC_POINTER.
 Pulse instructions such as MOVP and CML can not be used in the function blocks in a project
for an AH/AS series CPU module. LDP/ANDP/ORP, LDF/ANDF/ORF, PLS, PLF, NP, PN, MC,
MCR, and GOEND can not be used.
 AH/AS series CPU modules provide special pulse instructions which can be used in function
blocks. Please refer to the following section for more information.
7-26
*1. Please refer to section 5.4.1 for more information about creating a POU of the function block type, and section
6.2.2 for more information about declaring a function block instance.
*2. Please refer to chapter 10~chapter 15 for more information about calling function blocks.
7.3.2 Pulse Instructions for Function Blocks (AH/AS Series

ONLY)
Pulse instructions such as LDP, LDF, NP, and PN can not be used in the function blocks in a project
for an AH/AS series CPU module, and therefore users can consider using the following instructions.
Please refer to AH/AS Programming Manual for more information about the instructions.
 PED and NED
PED and NED are similar to LDP and LDF in functions. PED and NED differ from LDP and LDF in
that users have to specify Boolean devices. The Boolean devices that users specify when they
use PED and NED in a project can not be used in other places in the project. Otherwise, an error
will occur.
 LDP (rising-edge detection) and LDF (falling-edge detection) can be used in a POU of the
program type.
 Users can use PED in place of LDP in a function block, but they have to specify a device, e.g.
M100 in the figure below.
 Users can use NED in place of LDF in a function block, but they have to specify a device, e.g.
 FB_NP and FB_PN

FB_NP and FB_PN are similar to NP and PN in functions. FB_NP and FB_PN differ from NP and
PN in that users have to specify Boolean devices. The Boolean devices that users specify when
they use NED and PED in a project can not be used in other places in the project. Otherwise, an
error will occur.
 NP can be used in a POU of the program type.
 Users can use FB_NP in place of NP in a function block, but they have to specify a device, e.g.
 PN can be used in a POU of the program type.
 Users can use FB_PN in place of PN in a function block, but they have to specify a device, e.g.
7-27
7.3.3 Monitoring the Program in a Function Block

It is the functions block instances in a project that participate in the execution of the program in the
project. If users want to monitor the program in a function block online, they have to open the
window for the function block instance.
If users want to monitor the program in a function block online, they have to open the window for the
function block instance, as shown below. The function block instances below operate independently.
If users open the window for a function block definition, no values will be displayed in the window,
and users can not monitor the program in the function block.
No values are displayed.
*. If users want to modify the program in a function block, they have to open the window for the function block
definition. Please refer to section 7.3.4 for more information.
7.3.4 Modifying the Program in a Function Block

The object produced from a function block definition is a function block instance. The program in a
function block instance can not be modified, but the program in a function block definition can be
modified. After the program in a function block definition is modified, the modification result will be
applied to the new instances produced from the function block definition. The new function block
instances will not be produced until the program is compiled. Likewise, if users want to modify the
program in a function block online, they have to open the window for the function block.
After users double-click a function block definition in the project management, they can modify the
program in the window which appears, as shown below.
7-28
If users open the window for a function block instance, they can not modify the program in the
window.
The program can not

be modified.
If a function block is called by another POU, the modification of the function block will result in the
abnormal representation of the function block in the superior POU, as shown below. Users have to
delete the abnormal representation of the function block.
7.4 Instance
An instance of creating a ladder diagram is shown in chapter 4. In section 5.6.1, the program
created in chapter 4 is rewritten by means of POU and TASK. In section 6.3, the device names in
the program created in section 5.6.1 are replaced by symbols. In the following sections, function
blocks will be used in the program created in section 6.3.
7.4.1 Planning a Program

The POUs created in section 6.3 are described below.
POU name Function
If the START button is pressed, the equipment begins to operate. If the STOP
RUN_STOP
button is pressed, or an error is detected, the equipment stops operating.
There are two injectors above the conveyer, and the two injectors inject glue
in the same way. When in position sensor 1 is ON, the trigger signal for
injector 1 is set to ON. When in position sensor 1 is OFF, the trigger signal for
GLUING
injector 1 is reset to OFF. When in position sensor 2 is ON, the trigger signal
for injector 2 is set to ON. When in position sensor 2 is OFF, the trigger signal
for injector 2 is reset to OFF.
The parts which are conveyed are counted. If the number of parts which are
COUNTING
conveyed is 100, the completion flag is set to ON.
Two function blocks will be created according to the characteristics of the POUs.
 The two networks in the GLUING are the same, and therefore they can be created in a function
block which can be used repeatedly. The function block will be called by the GLUING. Owing to
the fact the two injectors operate independently, two independent function block instances will be
declared for them.
7-29
 The program in the COUNTING is not related to the other programs except that the operation flag
and the completion flag are related to the other programs. In other words, the COUNTING is quite
independent. In order to make the program in the COUNTING more readable, the program is
created in a function block.
7.4.2 Creating the Program

Users can directly modify the program created in section 6.3, or write the program shown in section
6.3 again. If the users want to write the program again, they have to create a new project, and refer
to chapter 4~chapter 6 for more information.
Please refer to section 5.4.1, and create EQUIP_TRIG in the Function Blocks section in the project
management area.
The program in EQUIP_TRIG functions to inject the glue. Please refer to section 6.2.2, and create
the two symbols shown below in the local symbol table in the EQUIP_TRIG window. Please refer to
chapter 4~chapter 6, and write the program shown below.
Create PARTS_CNT in the Function Blocks section in the project management area.
The program in PARTS_CNT functions to count the parts which are conveyed. Please refer to
section 6.2.2, and create the three symbols shown below in the local symbol table in the
PARTS_CNT window. The initial value of CNT_DT is 0. Please refer to chapter 4~chapter 6, and
write the program shown below.
7-30
The function block EQUIP_TRIG is called by the POU GLUING. Please refer to section 6.2.2, and
declare the two function block instances shown below in the local symbol table in the GLUING
window. Write the program shown below.
A function block is inserted into a program in a way in which an applied instruction is inserted into a
program. Drag the function block EQUIP_TRIG in the project management area to the position
where it will be inserted. If there is a function block instance under EQUIP_TRIG in the porject
management area, users have to drag the function block definition rather than the function block
instance.
7-31
Specify a function block instance and two operands after the function block is inserted.
7-32
Write the program shown below.
The function block PARTS_CNT is called by the POU COUNTING. Please declare the function
block instance shown below in the local symbol table in the COUNTING window. The local symbol
CNT_DT does not have any effect, and therefore it is deleted. Write the program shown below.
Please refer to the description above, and insert the function block PARTS_CNT. Write the program
shown below.
The editing of the program in this section has been completed so far. Users have to make sure that
the program they write is the same as the program shown below.
7-33
7-34
After the users make sure that the program they write is the same as program shown above, they
can try to compile the program. After the program is compiled, the function block instances declared
will appear in the project management area.
7-35
Please make sure that the hardware configuration, the parameter setting, and the task management
are completed. If the hardware configuration, the parameter setting, and the task management are
not completed, the users have to refer to chapter 4~chapter 6, and complete the hardware
configuration, the parameter setting, and the task management. After the hardware configuration,
the parameter setting, and the task management are completed, the users can compile the program
again, and download the parameters and the program to the CPU module. Before the program is
downloaded to the CPU module, the users have to select the Initial Value checkbox in the Transfer
Setup window. Once the Initial Value checkbox in the Transfer Setup window is selected, the initial
value of CNT_DT in PARTS_CNT will be written into the CPU module.
When the program is downloaded, the users can click and on the toolbar. Please follow
the steps below, and test the characteristics of the function blocks.
Open the window for RUN_STOP, and force START_BT ON. RUNNING is ON. The equipment
begins to run.
7-36
Open the window for GLUING, and force InP_SNR_1 ON. TRIG_1 is ON. The sensor senses a part,
and a trigger signal is sent.
Open the window for RUN_STOP, and force STOP_BT ON. RUNNING is reset to OFF. The
equipment stops running.
7-37
Open the window for GLUING, and force InP_SNR_1 OFF. TRIG_1 is still ON. The situation is
correct. RUNNING is a flag connected to the En pin of the function block. RUNNING is OFF, and
therefore the function block is not executed. The value of TRIG, a pin of the function block, is not
sent to the symbol TRIG_1, and therefore the state of TRIG_1 remains unchanged.
7-38
Set TRIG_1 to OFF.
Open the window for ET_INS_1. TRIG in the window remains ON. This indicates that the states of
the symbols in a function block will be retained after the function block is executed.
Open the window for ET_INS_2. TRIG in the window is OFF. The state of TRIG in the window for
ET_INS_2 is different the state of TRIG in the window for ET_INS_1. This indicates that the function
block instances operate independently.
After the users follow the steps above, they can draw the following conclusions.
1. If the flag connected to the En pin of a function block is OFF, the program in the function block will
not be executed.
2. The states of the symbols in a function block will be retained after the function block is executed.
3. The function block instances in a project operate independently.
Obviously, the execution of the program in this section is different from the execution of the program
in section 6.3. In the program in section 6.3, TRIG_1 is OFF when the flag RUNNING is OFF. In the
program in this section, TRIG_1 is ON when the flag RUNNING is OFF. This is an expectable and
acceptable situation. In the plan for the equipment, TRIG_1 is set to OFF so that it can be set to ON
next time. As a result, the function of the equipment will not be affected even if the state of TRIG_1
remains unchanged when the equipment stops running. Please refer to section 4.1 for more
information about the plan for the equipment.
7.5 Knowing the Library

Library contains User Defined Library and Delta Library. A function block can be exported to the
User Defined Library and can be used in other projects. There are several function blocks for
various applications stored in the Delta Library for users to apply.
7.5.1 Creating the User-defined Library

When there is a function block created in a project, the function block can be exported to the
user-defined library and by doing so, the function block can be used in other projects. Right click the
Function Blocks under the Project node and click Export Function Blocks.
7-39
After that you will see the Export Function Blocks window, type the file name, select the option
Export to User Defined Library and click to select the function blocks you’d like to export. File
name is used for categorization; one file can contain more than 1 function block. After the setup is
done, click OK to confirm the setting. Click OK again once the Export Successfully window show up.
Click the User Defined Library tab and you will see the exported function blocks in this section.
Click on the Function Block, its properties will be shown in the Preview section.
7-40
7.5.2 Including the Function Blocks in the User Defined Library

Aforementioned, once a function block is exported to the User Defined Library, users can find the
exported function block in the User Defined Library when opening a new project in the same
computer. Through the following methods, users can include the function to the function block.
 Method 1:
Right click the Function Blocks under the Project node and click Include Function Blocks.
After that you will see the Include Function Blocks window, select the function that you’d like to
include and click OK. Click Cancel to close the window. After that you will see the newly included
function under the Function Blocks node.
7-41
 Method 2:
In the User Defined Library click and drag the function you’d like to use to the position where you’d
like to add in the POU and it will be added in the POU.
7-42
After that you will see the newly added function under the Function Blocks node.
Nodes
added here.
7.5.3 Using Delta Library

For various applications, Delta provides several function blocks stored in the Delta Library for users
to apply. Click the Delta Library tab to see the provided function blocks.
Through the following methods, users can include the function to the function block.
 Method 1:
Right click the Function Blocks under the Project node and click Include Function Blocks.
7-43
After that you will see the Include Function Blocks window, select the function that you’d like to
include and click OK. Click Cancel to close the window. After that you will see the newly included
function under the Function Blocks node.
 Method 2:
In the Delta Library click and drag the function you’d like to use to the position where you’d like to
add in the POU and it will be added in the POU.
7-44
After that you will see the newly added function under the Function Blocks node.
*1. For the function blocks in the Delta Library, the contents are not for users to open to view or edit.
7-45
MEMO
7-46
Chapter 8 Data Unit Type
Table of Contents
8.1 User-defined Data Type/Data Unit Type ............................................. 8-2

8.2 Structure ............................................................................................ 8-2
8.2.1 Definition of a Structure ................................................................. 8-2
8.2.2 Creating a Structure ....................................................................... 8-2
8.2.3 Using a Structure Variable............................................................... 8-4
8.2.4 Applications of Structures ............................................................... 8-5
8.2.5 Change Structure to Enumeration .................................................... 8-7
8.3 Enumeration ....................................................................................... 8-8
8.3.1 Definition of Enumeration ............................................................... 8-8
8.3.2 Creating an Enumeration ................................................................ 8-8
8.3.3 Using an Enumeration Variable ...................................................... 8-10
8.3.4 Applications of Enumerations ......................................................... 8-11
8.3.5 Change Enumeration to Structure ................................................. 8-12
8-1
8.1 User-defined Data Type/Data Unit Type

Sometimes basic data types are not sufficient for users to write their own programs for the PLC. In
the IEC 61131-3 standard, a high-level language such as the user-defined data type is adopted to
create a new data type as users desired, allowing users to define their own variables and improving
the readability and the efficiency of developing a program.
8.2 Structure
8.2.1 Definition of a Structure
A structure is the collection of data, consisting of same amount various data types. Structured or
array elements can be elements for other structures. A structure is used for grouping data and can
be seen as a data unit to transfer parameters.
8.2.2 Creating a Structure

Right-click DUT (Data Unit Type) in the project management area to see the option New. Click New
to bring out a New DUT window. Input a structure name, select the type as Structure and then click
OK to confirm the setting. After that, a new DUT with name and type will appear under the DUT
option.
*. The naming rules of a structure and an element can be found below.
After a structure DUT is created. an editing window will be presented with examples and definitions
for reference. Users can edit the examples to make them as their own structures. . .
8-2
Ch a pt er 8 Da ta U n it Typ e
Users can also find it under the DUT option in the project management area. Double click the new
DUT to open it and start to add the contents of the newly added DUT.
The structure format is stated as below: wordings in blue are the system keywords; wordings in
black are the user-defined structure names and element names.
TYPE <Structure Name>:

STRUCT
<Element 1 Name>: <Data Type>;
<Element 2 Name>: <Data Type>;
...
<Element N Name>: <Data Type>;
END_STRUCT
END_TYPE
 Structure Name: Define the structure name. It is recommended to use the same name as the
name shown on the project management area.
 Element Name: Define the element name.
 Data Type：Define the data type for every element, such as BOOL, WORD, DWORD, LWORD,
INT, DINT, LINT, REAL, LREAL, ARRAY, or another STRUCTURE
8-3
or,ENUMERATION. (For DVP15MC, data types include BYTE, SINT, USINT, UINT,
UDINT, ULINT, TIME, DATE, TOD, DT, STRING.) As the image shown below, when
the element data type is ARRAY, the format will be ARRAY [0..n] OF <data type>;
the maximum for n value is 65535. (For DVP15MC, the maximum for n value
is2147483647.) If the element data type is Structure, write another structure name.
But if the data type is ARRAY, users cannot import ARRAY again. The system
supports multi-dimensional array, up to three-dimension. The format of a
two-dimensional array is ARRAY [0..n] [0..n] OF <data type> and the
three-dimensional array is ARRAY [0..n] [0..n] [0..n] OF < data type>. As the image
shown below:
The naming rules of a structure and an element are stated as below.

 An identifier cannot be the same as names of the user-defined data types. The repetition of a
structure identifier is not allowed.
 The repetition of an element identifier in the same structure is not allowed.
 The identifiers of a structure and an element can be composed of 30 characters at most, and a
Chinese character takes two characters.
 It is not allowed to use a name reserved by the system, e.g. an instruction code, a device name,
or a name given a special significance. However, if a name reserved by the system is a part of the
names of a structure or an element, it is then a legal name. For example, “M0” is an illegal
name, but “_M0” is a legal name.
 The identifiers of a structure and an element cannot contain space. For example, “INPUT CH0”
is an illegal name.
 The identifiers of a structure and an element can contain underline but it is not allowed to use 2
underlines in a row or put it in the end. For example, “INPUT_CH0”is acceptable, but
“INPUT__CH0” and “INPUT_CH0_” are illegal.
 The identifier of a structure and an element cannot contain special characters, including *, #, ?, \,
%, @ and more.
8.2.3 Using a Structure Variable

After the creation of the structure type is done, users can declare the variable symbol in the Local
Symbols page. Open the Add Symbol window from the Global and local symbol table and input the
identifier and then click …on the right as the image shown below.
8-4
Select the Data Unit Type, and the declared structure data type and then click OK to add a new
symbol.
8.2.4 Applications of Structures
After the structure and symbol are declared, they can be used in the POU. The data type of the
symbol struct_var0 is Struct_0 in the function block as the image shown below. Users can use “.”
to assign the element for the structure symbols, for example struct_var0.pt1 means the first
8-5
element pt1 is assigned as a contact to the data type BOOL operand and struct_var0.pt2 means
the second element pt2 is assigned as a pin to the data type WORD operand as the image shown
below.
When using the aforementioned function block, Struct_0 data type symbol should be declared in the
POU, so that Struct_0 data type input pin and output pin can be consistent. The elements with the
same structure can use “.” to assign the element for the structure type symbols, for example
POUstruct_var.
From the description above, we know that when the structure type symbol POUstruct_Var is used
in the FB0, it also delivers all the elements from the symbol for struct_var0.pt1 and
struct_var0.pt2 to operate. Thus users can define the structure type symbols as the input/output
pin for the function block to deliver all the elements from the symbol. So that the pin defining time
can be saved and the program can be simpler.
8-6
FB0_inst
POUstruct_Var POUWord_Var
struct_var0.pt1
struct_var0.pt2
When the structure is constructed with an array element, the variables in the structure can be written
as the example shown below: the status of M0 can be written in the [1,1,1] of the appointed element
pt3 in the variable Pstruct_var1.
8.2.5 Change Structure to Enumeration
Users can change a DUT from Structure to Enumeration by editing the structure names of
STRUCT and END STRUCT to “（” and “ ） ; ” as well as the element names from STRUCT to
ENUM format, please refer to section 8.3 for more information.
8-7
Change to ENUM format

and edit
DUT Change to ENUM
8.3 Enumeration
8.3.1 Definition of Enumeration
Users can enumerate (obtain one at a time) the elements in a collection of objects, providing an
efficient way to define a set of named integral constants that may be assigned to a variable and
values that the enumeration represents.
8.3.2 Creating an Enumeration

Right-click DUT (Data Unit Type) in the project management area to see the option New. Click New
to bring out a New DUT window. Input an enumeration name, select the type as Enumeration and
then click OK to confirm the setting. After that, a new DUT with name and type will appear under the
DUT option.
8-8
*. The naming rules of an enumeration can be found below.

After an enumeration DUT is created, an editing window will be presented with examples and
definitions for reference. Users can edit the examples to make them as their own enumerations.
Users can find it under the DUT option in the project management area. Double click the new DUT
to open it and start to add the contents of the newly added DUT.
The enumeration format is stated as below: wordings in blue are the system keywords; wordings in
black are the user-defined enumeration names,
element names and values.
TYPE <Enumeration Name>:
8-9
(
< Element 1 Name > := <Value 1>,
< Element 2 Name > := <Value 2>,
...
< Element n Name > := <Value n>
);
END_TYPE
 Enumeration Name: Define the enumeration name. It is recommended to use the same name as
the name shown on the project management area.
 Element Name: Define the element name.
 Value: Define values for every element, ranging -32768~32767. It is acceptable to leave this field
blank. The system will use defaults according to the previous element value and avoid
duplications. The system will set the value of the element Blue to 1 and Yellow to 6 as the image
shown below.
The naming rules of an enumeration and an element are stated as below.

 An identifier cannot be the same as names of the user-defined data types. The repetition of a
enumeration identifier is not allowed.
 The repetition of an element identifier in the same enumeration is not allowed.
 The identifiers of an enumeration and an element can be composed of 30 characters at most, and
a Chinese character takes two characters.
 It is not allowed to use a name reserved by the system, e.g. an instruction code, a device name,
or a name given a special significance. However, if a name reserved by the system is a part of the
names of a structure or an element, it is then a legal name. For example, “M0” is an illegal name,
but “_M0” is a legal name.
 The identifiers of an enumeration and an element cannot contain space. For example, “INPUT
CH0” is an illegal name.
 The identifiers of an enumeration and an element can contain underline but it is not allowed to use
2 underlines in a row or put it in the end. For example, “INPUT_CH0”is acceptable, but
“INPUT__CH0” and “INPUT_CH0_” are illegal.
 The identifier of an enumeration and an element cannot contain special characters, including *,
#, ?, \, %, @ and more.
 The data size of enumeration variables are the same as INT data size.
8.3.3 Using an Enumeration Variable

After the creation of the enumeration type is done, users can declare the symbol in the Local
Symbols page. Open the Add Symbol window from the Global and local symbol table and input the
identifier and then click … on the right as the image shown below.
8-10
Select the Data Unit Type, and the declared structure data type and then click OK to add a new
symbol.
8.3.4 Applications of Enumerations

After the enumeration and symbol are declared, they can be used in the POU. The data type of the
8 - 11
symbol POUenum_Var0 is Enum_0. The Initial Value can be set by the element name or values.
The image below shows the element name, Red.
Users can use “.” to assign the element for the enumeration symbols, for instance, users can assign
Enum_0.Blue to POUenum_Var0, the symbol Enum_0, and execute the instruction MOV; the
defined element or value will be the enumeration value and after the execution of MOV, the value of
POUenum_Var0 will be 1.
Users can also perform numerical operations; using the instruction + and set the value to 1,
POUenum_Var0 will be incremented by 1 as the example shown above. When the value of
POUenum_Var0 is 1, after executing the instruction +, the value result will be 2 and its element will
be Green as defined.
When running and monitoring the program, the enumeration symbols will show their current defined
element names. For example when the value is 1, the POUenum_Var0 will be seen as
POUenum_Var0=Blue(1) as they are defined in the following image. But if the value of the
enumeration symbol is not in the defined element range, the value will be shown as it is; as the
following example shows when the value is 11 but 11 is not in the defined range,
POUenum_Var1=11 will be stated as the image shown below.
8.3.5 Change Enumeration to Structure
Users can change a DUT from Enumeration to Structure by editing “（” and “ ） ; ” to structure
8-12
names of STRUCT and END STRUCT as well as the element names from ENUM to STRUCT
format, please refer to section 8.2 for more information.
Change to STRUCT
format and edit
Change to STRUCT
8-13
MEMO
8-14
Chapter 9. Axis
Table of Content
9.1 Axis ........................................................................................................ 2
9.1.1 The Meaning of Axis ....................................................................... 2
9.1.2 Creating a New Axis ....................................................................... 2
9.1.3 Main Table and Axis Table under Global Symbols................................ 8
9.2 Axis Parameter and Monitor & Test Run ................................................. 9
9.2.1 Axis Parameter .............................................................................. 9
9.2.2 Monitor & Test Run ...................................................................... 17
9-1
9.1 Axis
9.1.1 The Meaning of Axis
As defined in the PLCopen MC standard, Axis on the software is the VAR_IN_OUT parameter of
the STRUCTURE data type used in motion control function blocks. Axis provides a connection
between the motion control in the program and the physical output device. Axis stores various
motion control information such as position, velocity and so on. Below is an example of one function
block defined in the PLCopen MC standard and AXIS_REF being the axis defined in the standard.
In the actual application, different motion function blocks are used to control an axis and then the
target servo motor receives the output to achieve the motion control.
*. Currently the DVPxxMC does not follow the principle for VAR_IN_OUT parameter of the STRUCTURE data type
used in the Axis, but uses the VAR_INPUT of the STRUCTURE data type instead.
9.1.2 Creating a New Axis
9.1.2.1 AHxxEMC Series PLC - New Axis Settings
Right-click New from the context menu in Project area. The New Axis window will appear. Type an
axis variable name under Axis Variable and click OK button in the following window to add the
node item under Axis in the project management area. Make sure that the axis variable name
should not be the same as other global symbol names or local symbol names. The Cycle Time
shown next to the Axis in the project management is the cycle time of ECAT Builder master station,
please refer to section 3.2 Master Setting of the ECAT Builder User Manual for more information.
9-2
Ch a pt er 9 Ax is
Users can synchronize the Axis information (including axis parameter, node information) which is
saved in the ECAT Builder, then right-click the Axis in the project management area and select
Synchronize with ECAT Builder on the context menu to display the synchronized information.
Users can also right-click the EtherCAT Table and select Synchronize with ECAT Builder on the
context menu to view synchronized information of the ECAT Builder, Axis and EtherCAT Table.
9-3
The full name of the node item under Axis contains the axis variable name and axis type mentioned
above. The axis type here which is the same as that in the parameter setting can be the EtherCAT
slave name and the station address of a virtual or real axis. There are two sub-items, Axis
Parameter and Monitor & Test Run under every node. Refer to the following sections for more
information.
Axis Variable Name (Axis Type)
Right-click the axis which has been built and then select Delete button on the context menu to
delete the axis or select Property button to reset the axis variable name.
9-4
Ch a pt er 9 Ax is
9.1.2.2 DVPxxMC – Create Axis & Basic Settings
Right-click Axis in the Project area and then click New on the context menu. The New Axis window
will appear. Type an axis variable name under Axis Variable and click OK button in the following
window to add the node item under Axis in the project management area. Currently, the DVPxxMC
provides maximum number of 32 axes and supports up to 24 real axes. For settings on real axis and
virtual axis, please refer to section 9.2.1.2. Make sure that the axis variable name should not be the
same as other global symbol names or local symbol names. On the right side of the Axis items is
Node ID:112, it is the station number of motion controller, default setting is 112 and cannot be
changed.
The Axis name is shown next to the Node item and contains two sub-items- Axis Parameter and
Monitor &Test Run. Please view the following chapters for more details.
Right-click the axis which has been built and then select Delete button on the context menu to
delete the axis or select Property button to reset the axis variable name.
9-5
Right-click the Axis to select Basic Setting for adjusting axis parameter settings.
9-6
Ch a pt er 9 Ax is
The Basic Setting window contains two items- General and SYNC Object and descriptions are
introduced below.
 General
 Device Name: Device name for project by default and cannot change.
 Node ID: Default is 112 and cannot change.
 Baud Rate: The baud rate of CANMotion in HWCONFIG. For more information on
CANMotion baud rate setting, please refer to section 3.6.2.
 SYNC Object
Cyclic: Represents setting the synchronous cycle time for the master to transmit a new datagram.
This is an important motion control parameter. If the cycle time is set wrong, it will cause alarm
AL303/AL302/ AL301 or errors in servo drives during the network communication cycle.
The Cyclic starts by scanning the motion control program and use algorithm to calculate the motion
data and send the information to all axes. It can be identified as a total time for motion programming
and communication between DVPxxMC and all servo drives.
The maximum execution time for motion programming is set as the execution time for motion
programming time (unit: ms). Since 1000 microseconds equals to 1 millisecond. It is suggested to
round up the unit (ms) for applications. For example, the maximum execution time for motion
programming is 2567 microseconds and equals to 2.5 milliseconds. Thus, the execution time is
rounded to 3 milliseconds.
The estimated communication time between DVPxxMC and servo drives is 0.5 milliseconds per axis.
It is suggested to round up the unit (ms) for applications. For example, the communication time for
five servo drives is 5*0.5 milliseconds and equals to 2.5 milliseconds. Thus, the execution time is
rounded to 3 milliseconds.
9-7
Calculation formula: Cyclic (ms) = round the max. execution time (ms) + communication time
between DVPxxMC and servo drives (ms) + 1 (reserved time for program change) (ms).
For program change, the reserved time is set between 1 to 2 milliseconds so that the synchronous
time setting is not affected by increased programming time.
Example:
The maximum execution time for five servo drives is 1634 microseconds. The reserved time for
program change is 1 millisecond.
Cyclic = 2 milliseconds (round the max. execution time of 1634 microseconds to an integer) + 3
milliseconds (round 5*0.5 to an integer) + 1 millisecond (reserved time to program) = 6 milliseconds.
For DVPxxMC series, the following table provides axis related system structure:
Member Variable Data Type Function Description

CmdPos LREAL Command position (unit: unit)
CmdVel LREAL Command velocity (unit: unit/sec)
CmdAcc LREAL Command acceleration (unit: unit/sec)
CmdTrq INT Command torque (per thousand (1‰) of rated torque)
ActPos LREAL Actual position (unit: unit)
ActVel LREAL Actual velocity(unit: unit/sec)
ActTrq INT Actual torque (per thousand (1‰) of rated torque)
ActCur INT Actual current
9.1.3 Main Table and Axis Table under Global Symbols

For management of the symbols by classification, there are different sub-items including Main Table,
Axis Table and other network symbol table under Global Symbols.
Main Table, the global symbols of other models, is used for editing the global symbols.
Axis Table lists all axis variable names which have already been created.
Other network symbol table contains the symbols in other network configuration software such as
ECAT Builder supported by the model. For details on other network configuration software, refer to
operation manuals of the software.
After the axis is created, the identifier of the axis variable name will appear automatically in Axis
Table under Global Symbols and the axis symbol table cannot be edited. Double-click Axis Table
to open the Axis Table window.
9-8
Ch a pt er 9 Ax is
The axis variable symbol can be used for the pins of PLCopen MC function blocks and Delta
function blocks as the example shown below.
9.2 Axis Parameter and Monitor & Test Run

9.2.1 Axis Parameter
9.2.1.1 AHxxEMC Series Parameter Settings

The parameter setting pop-up window AxisParaForm appears after the node item is created. Users
can double-click Axis Parameter under the axis node item to open the AxisParaForm window
once more after the window is closed. All settings on motion control of the axis are listed in the
window as below. For details, refer to the user manuals of modules.
The set values can be downloaded to the PLC with the project together after the setting is done.
Axis Type Setting

Users can set the real axis which produces actual output to the drive assembly or the virtual servo
axis on which the operation is done in the controller.
Servo Axis Form Setting

The axis can be set as Linear axis or Rotary axis. The position value will be constantly increased
9-9
(or decreased) when the linear axis rotates toward the positive direction (or negative direction). The
position value will be calculated again from minimum (maximum) value after the axis which rotates
toward the positive direction (or negative direction) reaches the limit value.
Node Address Setting

If Real axis is selected in the Axis Type Setting box, the content in Node Address Setting must
be chosen by the servo names and station addresses in ECAT Builder. It means that the axis is the
set EtherCAT servo drive to which the actual output is delivered. The node address is selected as
the EtherCAT slave, ASDA-A2-E CoE Drive [5] (the station address) as below. The drop-down menu
of the Node Address Setting is updated when the setting information is saved in the ECAT Builder
and then close both ECAT Builder and HWCONFIG; Or the updated setting will take place when the
axis information synchronizes with the ECAT Builder, please refer to section 9.1.2 in this chapter
for more detail.
Unit of Display Setting

Users can select a system unit. The default unit is user unit.
Pulse Count Per Motor Rotation

Users can set how many pulses the controller outputs for a motor to rotate.
Distance Count Per Motor Rotation

Users can set the distance in an actual mechanism move whenever a motor rotates.
Maximum speed setting

Users can set the upper limit of the speed of the axis.
Start-up speed setting

Users can set the start-up speed for the axis to start running.
Maximum Acceleration Setting

Users can set the upper limit of the acceleration of the axis.
Maximum Deceleration Setting

Users can set the upper limit of the deceleration of the axis.
MC_Stop deceleration = 0 Setting

Users can set the axis stopping method, when an error occurs or an instruction is executed. The
option Immediate Stop or Deceleration Stop can be selected.
Error Stop Deceleration Setting

Users can set the axis stopping method, when the axis runs beyond the software limit set. The
option Immediate Stop or Deceleration Stop can be selected.
Software Limit Enable Setting

Users can set whether to enable or disable the software limit control and the limit values depend on
the following two parameters.
Axis software positive limit Setting

Users can set the positive software limit value of the axis, which is only applied to the linear axis.
9-10
Ch a pt er 9 Ax is
Axis software negative limit Setting

Users can set the negative software limit value of the axis, which is only applied to the linear axis.
Rotary Maximum Position Setting

Users can set the maximum position of the rotary axis which moves toward the positive direction.
The position value will be calculated again from the minimum value after the axis reaches the limit
value.
Rotary Minimum Position Setting

Users can set the minimum position of the rotary axis which moves toward the negative direction.
The position value will be calculated again from the maximum value after the axis reaches the limit
value.
Gear Ratio Numerator

Users can set the numerator value of the electronic gear ratio.
Gear Ratio Denominator

Users can set the denominator value of the electronic gear ratio.
Homing Acceleration
The acceleration speed while homing is performed.
Homing Velocity
The parameter is the speed while the homing is performed
Homing Closed Velocity

While the homing is performed, the motor moves at the homing velocity at first. Then the motor
starts to decelerate to this velocity and moves at this velocity when the trigger is close to the home
signal.
Permitted Deviation
The permitted deviation between the actual position and the command position
The axis parameter setting window provides the following tool bar for editing the axis parameter
table.
Single Axis Start Immediately

Users can select Disable or Enable. When single axis is enabled, it will enable motion immediately
and not be affected by the CPU cycle time. Please refer to AHxxEMC Series PLC manuals for more
information.
MC_CamIn Master Direction

Users can select Positive Direction or No Direction. Under Positive Direction, the main axis
moves backwards and this will halt the slave; Under No Direction, the slave is not affected by the
main axis moving forward or backwards.
Search Tool: After a character string is typed, relevant character strings will be listed automatically.
If one item in the list of relevant character strings is selected, the corresponding line in the table will
be selected accordingly.
9 - 11
After the button is clicked, the parameter values different from the
default values will be filtered out.
After the button is clicked, all setting values will be restored to the default
values.
If the button is clicked, current parameters can be exported to the specified path in the file
format of .CSV.
If the button is clicked, the file at the specified path can be imported.
9.2.1.2 DVPxxMC Parameter Settings
For DVPxxMC, the Basic Parameter Setting pop-up window of the axis appears once the node
item is created. Users can double-click Axis Parameter under the node item to open the window
once more when closed.
9-12
Ch a pt er 9 Ax is
The basic parameter setting window contains two items - Basic Parameter Setting and Cyclic
Communication Data, please refer to PLC series manuals for more information. The parameter
settings for projects can be downloaded to the CPU.
 Parameter Setting
Description of the Parameter Settings:
Master NodeID
The master node ID set as 112 is permanent.
Axis Number
The setting value range is from 1~32.
Axis Type
The axis type include Linear Axis and Rotary Axis.
 Linear Axis Model
Note:
9-13
P1 Positive Limit
P2 Negative Limit
Servo Position
 Rotary Axis Model (“modulo”: 360)
Note:
P1 Positive Limit
P2 Negative Limit
Servo Position
R Homing Position
Z Servo Motor Shaft
Modulo
The cycle is used for equally dividing the actual position of the actuator.
E-gear Ratio Numerator

This parameter and gear ratio denominator sets the motor pulse number per round.
E-gear Ratio Denominator

This parameter and gear ratio numerator sets the motor pulse number per round.
Reference Velocity
A temporary parameter that does not affect the functions of the controller.
Max. Velocity
It sets the max. velocity of axis connection to a device
Max. Acceleration
Max. Deceleration
Homing Mode
Users can set the homing mode range from 1~35. Please refer to DVP15MC manuals for more
9-14
Ch a pt er 9 Ax is
detail.
Homing Speed 1
The speed from homing to finding the homing switch
Homing Speed 2
The speed after finding the homing switch to machine homing.
Software Limit Switches

Users can select Enable or Disable. If software limit switch is enabled and the axis actuator position
reaches positive limit or negative limit setting, motion instruction is wrong and stops
Positive Software Limit

It refers to the positive direction of an axis
Negative Software Limit

It refers to the negative direction of an axis
Deviation Switch
It sets the deviation detected between command position and feedback position. When the deviation
switch is enabled, the controller detects the deviation between command position and feedback
position; if deviation switch is disabled, the controller will not detect for deviation between command
and feedback positions.
Permitted Deviation
It refers to the deviation between the command position and feedback position
Gearbox Input Rotation

This parameter and gearbox output rotation decides the mechanical gear ratio.
Gearbox Output Rotation

This parameter and gearbox input rotation decides the mechanical gear ratio.
Units Per Rotation

The number of units which the actuator moves while gearbox output rotates for one circle.
Axis Mode
This parameter sets the real axis to read the actual position of servo components, the virtual axis
to calculate by a controller and the encoder axis to perform with an encoder.
Encoder Axis Mode

Users can select Encoder Axis from the Axis mode and mode options include incremental
encoder 1, incremental encoder 2, absolute encoder and data source.
Mode Function
The data source is derived from incremental
Incremental Encoder 1
encoder 1
The data source is derived from incremental
Incremental Encoder 2
encoder 2
The data source is derived from absolute
Absolute Encoder
encoder
The data source is derived from assigned
DataSource
device data
Encoder Axis Data Source

Users can select DataSource from the Encoder Axis Mode and left-click icon for
9-15
DataSource setting window to appear as below.
 The drop-down list of Device Name include %IL, %QL and %ML.
 This section is for Device Number settings
Under DataSource, the variation amount of the encoder axis position is the same as that of the
variation amount for each scanning cycle of the assigned device value.
EtherCAT Node
DVP50MC or DVP50MC-06 supports this item. The node number begins from 1001 to 1024.
 Cyclic Communication Data
After users select Velocity, Torque, Current or User-defined Parameter, the servo drives operates in
cyclic synchronous velocity and can transmit data length of up to 8 bytes regarding information data
and cyclic communication data to the bus network. When the corresponding data are selected,
users can monitor corresponding parameters from the Axis status.
The axis parameter settings window provided the following toolbar for editing the axis parameter
table.
Search Tool: After a character string is typed, relevant character strings will be listed automatically.
If one item in the list of relevant character strings is selected, the corresponding line in the table will
be selected accordingly.
9-16
Ch a pt er 9 Ax is
After the button is clicked, the parameter values different from the
default values will be filtered out.
After the button is clicked, all setting values will be restored to the default
values.
If the button is clicked, current parameters can be exported to the specified path in the file
format of .CSV.
If the button is clicked, the file at the specified path can be imported.
9.2.2 Monitor & Test Run

9.2.2.1 AHxxEMC Series Monitoring & Test Run
When ISPSoft is in online mode, double-click Monitor &Test Run to open the setting window.
9-17
The upper part of the window above is a monitor window for displaying the axis state, the set value
and actual value of a variable such as positions and velocities.
The bottom part of the window is a test-run window for giving a test-run command to the axis after
hardware connection is made in the period of the test.
9-18
Ch a pt er 9 Ax is
After the Fetch button is clicked, the Confirm window will appear for confirmation of the control over
the axis.
Please note that the field configuration and personnel’s positions must be confirmed in order to
make sure that no injury to personnel and no damage to devices when the motor works before the
test run of the axis is started.
To exit the test-run mode, click the Relinquish button to stop having the control over the axis.
Click Servo ON button to turn on or Servo OFF button to turn off the servo drive after having the
control over the axis.
9-19
When Servo ON is clicked, various test-run modes in the Mode field are for option. There are
different execution functions for users to type under various modes. The corresponding functions
are explained as below.
Homing Mode: Perform the homing according to the axis parameter setting and type the homing
mode number in the Homing Mode field based on the 35 homing modes in CANopen standard.
Click the Execute button to start the homing. Click Stop to abort the homing action.
Jog: Execute the jog action according to the jog velocity in the axis parameter setting. After typing
the jog velocity in the Velocity field, the acceleration unit and the deceleration unit, execute the
backward jog or forward jog by clicking the Backward Jog or Forward Jog button.
Velocity: Type the values in the Velocity, Acceleration Time and Deceleration Time fields. If the
Forward or Negative button is clicked, the drive will accelerate till the set velocity is reached
according to the set acceleration time and then keep moving in the forward or backward direction.
By clicking Stop, the axis will decelerate to stop according to the set acceleration time.
9-20
Ch a pt er 9 Ax is
Relative Positioning: Type values in the Position (adding + or -)，Velocity, Acceleration Time
and Deceleration Time fields. After the Enabled button is clicked, the drive will accelerate till the
set velocity is reached and keep moving according to the set acceleration time. And then the drive
decelerates to stop and finally reaches the relative position according to the set deceleration time.
Clicking Stop will abort the action during the motion.
Absolute Positioning: Type values in the Position, Velocity, Acceleration Time and
Deceleration Time fields. After the Enabled button is clicked, the drive will accelerate till the set
velocity is reached and keep moving according to the set acceleration time. And then the drive
decelerates to stop and finally reaches the absolute position according to the set deceleration time.
Clicking Stop will abort the action during the motion.
Click Error Reset and all the data in the System Log is cleared.
9-21
Data is
cleared
9.2.2.2 DVPxxMC Series Monitoring &Test Run

For DVPxxMC, double-click Monitor &Test Run under Axis to open the Monitor & Test Run window
after ISPSoft enters the online mode.
9-22
Ch a pt er 9 Ax is
The Monitor & Test Run window contains Online and Axis Diagnosis tabs. The Clear All Axis
Error Log button at the bottom of the page can clear all the axis error records from the project
management area.
9-23
 Online
The upper part of Online is the Monitor section. On the left are items regarding real-time set value
as well as actual value of the axis state and the physical quantity with the following variables, e.g.
position and velocity. On the right is the Enabled section that displays the axis state and servo
alarm. This section can be used jointly with the Test Run section at the lower part of the window.
9-24
Ch a pt er 9 Ax is
The Test Run section is for testing the axis state after connecting to the hardware. Users can click
Fetch and a window will appear for confirmation of the control over the axis. When motors are
running, please make sure that field configuration and personnel’s positions will not cause
personnel injury or object damage before doing the Test Run.
9-25
To exit the test-run mode, click the Relinquish button to stop having the control over the axis.
Click Servo ON button to turn on or Servo OFF button to turn off the servo drive after having the
control over the axis.
*. If users select Virtual Axis for mode, the axis will automatically switch to Servo ON, please refer to section 9.2.1.2
for more information on axis mode.
By connecting servo drives and motion controllers via communication ports, users can click Servo
ON and the system will point out the following remarks in Jog mode.
9-26
Ch a pt er 9 Ax is
(a) Velocity selected under cyclic data exchange.

(b) Do NOT use MC_Power instruction for axis programming
(c) If communication disconnects during jog mode, the servo axis will automatically stop after 1 sec.
When Servo OFF change to ON, the red light will change to green in the Enabled State field and
the Axis State changes from Disable to Standstill under Enabled section.
Under Servo is ON, currently only Jog mode can be selected for test run and functions are explained
as below.
Jog: Users can input parameter settings including Velocity, Acceleration, Deceleration and press
Forward Jog or Backward Jog for execution.
When Forward Jog / Backward Jog button is clicked, the red light will turn to green in Forward
/Reverse field and the Axis State changes from Standstill to Jog under Enabled section. (This
function is used when controllers are in operating mode.)
9-27
Relevant parameters in Enabled section are described below.
Parameter Description
Enabled State Color : Green - Enabled; Red - Disabled
Axis Standstill Color : Green - Standstill; Red - Jog
Forward Color : Green – Forward; Red – Reverse/Standstill
Reverse Color : Green – Backward; Red – Reverse/Standstill
Servo Alarm Display error message
Axis State Include Disable, Standstill, ErrorStop, Stopping,
Homing, Discrete Motion, Continuous Motion,
Synchronized Motion and Jog
 Axis Diagnosis
The function provides diagnosis for axis connection, state and servo alarm, while error detail
and correction are displayed in the Axis Error Log section.
9-28
Ch a pt er 9 Ax is
Relevant parameters of Axis Diagnosis are described below.
Parameter Description
Axis Connection Successful connection or disconnection
between servo drives and controllers
Axis State Corresponds to the state machine（Please refer
to related product manuals for more details）
Servo Alarm Display error message
Axis Error Log Records error data including the date & time,
detail and correction.
Click Refresh to update the Axis Diagnosis page.
9-29
Click Clear Log button to delete the current axis error log data.
9-30
Ch a pt er 9 Ax is
9-31
MEMO
9-32
Chapter 10 Ladder Diagram
Table of Contents
10.1 Introduction of a Ladder Diagram ................................................ 10-2
10.1.2 Networks in a Ladder Diagram ................................................... 10-4
10.2 Creating a Ladder Diagram in ISPSoft .......................................... 10-6
10.2.1 Creating a Contact, Coil & MPS ................................................... 10-6
10.2.1.1 Inserting a Contact and Changing a Contact Type .................. 10-6
10.2.1.2 Inserting a Coil and Changing a Coil Type.............................. 10-7
10.2.1.3 Add MPS ........................................................................... 10-8
10.2.2 Use Device, Symbols and Constants in LD.................................... 10-9
10.2.3 Typing Instructions .................................................................. 10-10
10.2.4 Inserting Applied Instructions and Function Blocks ....................... 10-11
10.2.5 Creating a Comparison Contact ................................................. 10-14
10.2.6 Inserting a Block Logic Instruction ............................................. 10-16
10.2.7 Creating Multiple Outputs ......................................................... 10-18
10.2.8 Putting a Label ........................................................................ 10-19
10.2.9 Editing a Comment .................................................................. 10-20
10.2.11 Bookmark ............................................................................... 10-22
10-1
10.1 Introduction of a Ladder Diagram

A ladder diagram is one of the programming languages defined by IEC 61131-3, and is widely used
to create a PLC program. A ladder diagram is a programming language that represents a program
by a graphical diagram based on the circuit diagrams of relay logic hardware. A ladder diagram in
ISPSoft is shown below.
*. Please refer to DVP-PLC Application Manual─Programming for more information about ladder diagrams.
10.1.1 Editing Environment

Select the Ladder Diagram (LD) option button in the Language section in the Create Program
10-2
Ch a pt er 1 0 La d der D i agr am
The environment in which a ladder diagram can be edited is shown below. The table at the upper
part of the window is a local symbol table, and the area at the lower part of the window is a working
area.
Local symbol
Working area
After a program editing window in which a ladder diagram can be created is opened, the
corresponding toolbar will appear in the ISPSoft window. The functions are described below.
Display/Hiding symbol or address
Adding a bookmark to the network selected or deleting the

Shift+Ctrl+B
bookmark from the network selected
Ctrl+I Inserting a network above the network selected
Shift+Ctrl+I Inserting a network under the network selected
ESC Selection
Typing an instruction Inserting a contact
Typing an instruction Inserting a coil
Typing an instruction Add MPS
Typing an instruction Inserting a comparison contact
Typing an instruction Selecting a type of comparison contact
Inserting a block logic instruction

10-3
Typing an instruction Selecting a type of block logic instruction

*. Please refer to section 8.2.3 for more information about typing an instruction.
10.1.2 Networks in a Ladder Diagram
A ladder diagram consists of networks. Every network is an independent program. Besides, there is
no limit on the number of objects which can be inserted in a network in ISPSoft, and therefore there
is no mark which is used to connect two networks.
Network numbers are marked on the networks in a ladder diagram. The color at the left side of a
network indicates the state of the network. A network can be activated or inactivated, and a network
can be selected or unselected. Users can select colors which will be shown at the left sides of the
networks in a ladder diagram in the Options window in ISPSoft. Please refer to section 2.3.1 for
more information.
The network is unselected The network is unselected

and activated. and inactivated.
The network is selected The network is selected

After a new window in which a ladder diagram will be created is opened, the system will insert a
blank network in the window. If users want to add a network, they can select a network, and click
on the toolbar. The network added will be under the network selected.
If users click on the toolbar, a blank network will be put above the network selected.
10-4
10.1.3 Selecting Objects

Before an object in a network in a ladder diagram is selected, users have to press Esc on the
keyboard, or click on the toolbar. After the cursor appears as a small arrow, the users can click
the object in the network. The basic selection is shown below.
 Selecting the network

 Selecting the input contact
 Selecting the network
 Selecting the output coil
 Selecting the block
If users want to select a group of devices, they can click a device, and drag it to draw a frame round
the group of devices. The users can also select the group of devices by clicking the first device,
pressing Ctrl+B on the keyboard, clicking the last device, and pressing Ctrl+B on the keyboard.
Users must draw a frame round devices which are in the same network, and the devices must be
adjacent to one another. Besides, input devices and output devices can not be in the same frame.
If users want to select several networks, they can hold down Ctrl on the keyboard while they click
the networks. The users can also select a range of networks by pressing Shift on the keyboard,
clicking the first network within the range, and the last network within the range.
10-5
10.2 Creating a Ladder Diagram in ISPSoft

10.2.1 Creating a Contact, Coil & MPS
The representations of contacts and the representations of coils in ISPSoft are listed below.
Normally-open contact
Normally-closed contact
Contact
Rising edge-triggered contact
Falling edge-triggered contact
OUT
Coil
SET
Coil RESET
10.2.1.1 Inserting a Contact and Changing a Contact Type
(1) Select a line, a contact, or a group of devices. Before users connect a contact to a group of
devices in parallel or in series, they have to draw a frame round the group of devices.
After users make sure of the position in which a contact will be inserted, they can click on
the toolbar.
(2) The mouse cursor appears as a contact when the mouse cursor is near the position in which a
contact will be inserted.
 If the mouse cursor is near a contact, a contact will be connected to the contact in parallel
or in series.
 If the mouse cursor is near a line, a contact will be inserted in the line.
10-6
 If the mouse cursor is near a group of devices, a contact will be connected to the group of
devices in parallel or in series.
 If users want to insert a contact in a new network, they can move the mouse cursor to the
red frame in the new network.
(3) The mouse cursor appears as a contact when the mouse cursor is at the right side of a contact,
at the left side of a contact, or at the bottom of a contact. Users can decide where to insert a
contact. After users click the position in which a contact will be inserted, the system will insert
the contact.
(4) After a contact is inserted, users can click on the toolbar or press Esc on the keyboard.
After the contact is double-clicked, users can select a contact type on the drop-down list.
10.2.1.2 Inserting a Coil and Changing a Coil Type
(1) Select a line, a contact, a coil, or an applied instruction. After users make sure of the position in
which a coil will be inserted, they can click on the toolbar.
(2) The mouse cursor appears as a coil when the mouse cursor is near the position in which a coil
will be inserted. If the mouse cursor is at the top of a coil or at the top of an applied instruction,
a coil will be put above the coil or the applied instruction. If the mouse cursor is at the bottom of
a coil or at the bottom of an applied instruction, a coil will be put under the coil or the applied
instruction. If the mouse cursor is near the line in a network, a coil will put above all the output
10-7
devices in the network.

After users click the position in which a coil will be inserted, the system will insert the coil.
If users want to insert a coil in a network where there is no output device, the mouse cursor
must be near the line selected.
(3) After a coil is inserted, users can click on the toolbar or press Esc on the keyboard. After
the coil is double-clicked, users can select a coil type on the drop-down list.
10.2.1.3 Add MPS
Choose a line, coil, comparison or API position to confirm and add the MPS by clicking on the
toolbar which will create a bifurcation point.
Users can select the line or comparison instruction, then click the add MPS icon to create a
bifurcation point.
Users can select a contact, then click the add MPS icon to create a bifurcation point.
10-8
Users can select a line, then click the add MPS icon to create a bifurcation point.
Some positions cannot add MPS, so when users click add MPS icon, the diagram will show the
position to insert MPS.
10.2.2 Use Device, Symbols and Constants in LD

After users click ??? above an object inserted in a network, they can type an operand.
The users can click in the box, and select a declared symbol on the drop-down list. Select an
ARRAY data type symbol from the drop-down list and type an element in the […]. See below for
ARRAY element descriptions.
The users can type a device name or a symbol in the box. If they type a symbol which is not
declared, the Add Symbol window will appear after they press Enter on the keyboard. (Please refer
to section 2.3.1 for more information about declaring a symbol.)
10-9
the next box in the network after they press Enter on the keyboard. Besides, the next network will be
selected after the users press Tab on the keyboard. The users can edit a box with the keyboard. If
the users have declared symbols, they can press Page Down on the keyboard when they edit a box.
The symbols on the drop-down list are symbols which can be assigned to the operands. The users
can select a symbol by the mouse or the up/down key on the keyboard. After the editing is complete,
the users can press Enter on the keyboard to jump to the next box. If the users want to end the
editing, they can press Esc on the keyboard.
Additional remark
(a) If users want to use constants in a ladder diagram in ISPSoft, the constants must be
represented in the following ways.
 Decimal value: 23456 (A value which is not preceded by any mark will be regarded as a
decimal value.)
 Hexadecimal value: 16#5BA0 (A value is preceded by 16#.)
 Octal value: 8#55640 (A value is preceded by 8#.)
 Binary value: 2#101101110100000 (A value is preceded by 2#.)
 String: “XYZ” (Characters are put in double apostrophes); use single apostrophe for
DVPxxMC
 Boolean value (BOOL):
AH/AS: SM400 (normally-open contact), or SM401 (normally-closed contact) is used.
DVP: M1000 (normally-open contact), or M1001 (normally-closed contact) is used.
(For DVP15MC, please refer to Appendix B for more information)
(b) If users want to use a symbol whose data type is ARRAY, the expression format is as the
image shown above Ary[…] (Identifier[Index]). An index should be a decimal constant, less
than the size of the ARRAY and should start from 0, supporting up to three-dimensional array
and separating by a comma, for example Ary[1,2,3], please refer to chapter 8.
10.2.3 Typing Instructions

Users can add devices, applied instructions and function blocks to a ladder diagram in ISPSoft by
typing instructions.
(1) Select a position in which an object will be inserted in a working area.
(2) Type an instruction. As soon as the instruction is typed, a box which can be edited appears.
After the typing of the instruction is complete, users can press Enter on the keyboard or click
OK at the right side of the box. (The instruction is case-insensitive.)
Besides, contacts and coils can be created by typing simple instructions. Please refer to the
10-10
following figures. (The instructions typed are case-insensitive.)

 Inserting a normally-open contact (contact A): “A Device address”
 Inserting a normally-closed contact (contact B): “B Device address”
 Inserting an output coil (OUT): “O Device address”
10.2.4 Inserting Applied Instructions and Function Blocks

The applied instructions and function blocks in a ladder diagram in ISPSoft are represented by
blocks. The pins of a block representing an applied instruction include the pins corresponding to the
operands specified in the applied instruction and an En pin. The pins of a block representing a
function block include the pins corresponding to the symbols declared in the function block and an
En pin. The En pin of a block representing an applied instruction or a function block is connected to
the logic state preceding the En pin. If the logic state connected to the En pin of a block representing
an applied instruction or a function block is ON, the applied instruction or the function block will be
executed.
The pins of a block representing a function block include an Eno pin whereas the pins of a block
representing an applied instruction do not include an Eno pin. An applied instruction can only be put
at the end of a network in a ladder diagram, and can not be followed by any object. Besides, users
can type a function block instance in the box above a function block. Please refer to chapter 7 for
more information.
Users can insert an applied instruction or a function block in a ladder diagram in ISPSoft in one of
the three ways described below.
 Method 1
Unfold the APIs section or the Function Blocks section in the project management area, and
find the item which will be inserted. Select the item, and drag it to the position in which it will be
inserted.
1 0 - 11
Function block definitions can be dragged, but function block instances can not be dragged.
 Method 2
Click the position in which an applied instruction or a function block will be inserted, click on
the toolbar, select the item which will be inserted in the API/FB window, and click Insert.
10-12
 Users can select the All Types option button, the Comparison Instruction option button, the
API option button, or the Function Block option button.
 If users select the API option button in the Type Class section, they have to select an
instruction type in the Classification box.
 Users can select an applied instruction, a comparison contact, or a function block here.
 If users unselect the Auto Close checkbox, they can insert instructions or function blocks
continuously.
 Method 3
Click the position in which an instruction or a function block will be inserted, and type the applied
instruction or the function block definition. As soon as the applied instruction or the function block
definition is typed, a box which can be edited appears. After the typing of the applied instruction or
the function block definition is complete, users can press Enter on the keyboard or click OK at the
right side of the box. (The applied instruction and the function block definition are
case-insensitive.)
If users want to insert a function block, they have to type the function block definition, and they
can not type the operands specifed in the function block. If users want to insert an applied
10-13
instruction, they have to type the applied instruction, and they can type the operands specified in
the applied instruction. The users do not have to type all the operands specified in the applied
instruction. The system will assign the operands typed to the corresponding boxes, and ??? will
appear in the boxes where there are no operands. Besides, if the operands typed include a
symbol which is not declared, the Add Symbol window will appear after the users press Enter on
the keyboard. Please refer to programming manuals for more information about instructions.
After an applied instruction or a function block is inserted successfully, users have to refer to section
10.2.2, and type operands.
*. If the Auto-leading ‘Add Symbol’ Dialog checkbox in the Options window is selected, the Add Symbol window
will appear automatically after users type a symbol which is not declared. Please refer to section 2.3.1 for more
information.
Right-click on top of the function block, select Auto Generate Symbols and choose to generate by
default. The default name usually adopts function block name + pin name and once symbols are
generated type in pin position (see below); type in the spelling or words to generate symbols and
type in pin position.
10.2.5 Creating a Comparison Contact

An example of a comparison contact in ISPSoft is shown below. > in the block represents a
comparison type. S1 and S2 are objects which are compared. The data format which is accepted
depends on the comparison type. Q can drive a coil or connect to a contact in series.
10-14
The comparison contacts in a ladder diagram are similar to general contacts in that they can
connect to other contacts in parallel or in series.
A comparison contact can be inserted not only in one of the three ways described in section 10.2.4,
but also by means of the following steps.
(1) Click on the toolbar, and then select a type.
(2) Select a line, a contact, or a group of devices. Before users connect a comparison contact to a
group of devices in parallel or in series, they have to draw a frame round the group of devices.
After users make sure of the position in which a comparison contact will be inserted, they can
click on the toolbar.
(3) The mouse cursor appears as a comparison contact when the mouse cursor is near the
position in which a comparison contact will be inserted. Please refer to the figures below. The
mouse cursor appears as a contact when the mouse cursor is at the right side of the contact
selected, at the left side of the contact selected, or at the bottom of the contact selected. Users
can decide where to insert a comparison contact. After users click the position in which a
contact will be inserted, the system will insert the contact.
10-15
(4) After an comparison contact is inserted successfully, users have to refer to section 10.2.2, and
type operands.
Additional remark
If users want to insert a comparison contact in a new network, the mouse cursor must be near the
line selected.
10.2.6 Inserting a Block Logic Instruction

If users want to take the operation result of a block as a condition of a rising edge-triggered circuit,
they traditionally have to create two networks in a ladder diagram. However, the users can combine
the two networks by means of using a block logic instruction.
10-16
The following table provides block logic instructions in ISPSoft and the PLC types which can use
these instructions and supports regarding POU program or function blocks.
AH/AS DVP DVPxxMC

Icon Instruction Function
POU FB PO FB POU FB
When the block preceding
this block logic instruction
NP
is tuned from OFF to ON,    
the output device is ON.
When the block preceding

this block logic instruction
PN
is turned form ON to OFF,    
the output device is ON.
Invert the preceding block

INV
logic status and output.      
The function is similar to
NP, users need to specify Support
FB_NP
a register device or  ES3
variables.
The function is similar to
PN, users need to specify Support
FB_PN
a register device or  ES3
variables.
* Please refer to AH/AS Programming Manual or section 7.3.2 for more information about FB_NP and FB_PN.
Users can insert a block logic instruction in one of the two ways described below.
 Method 1
(1) Click on the toolbar, and then select a type.
10-17
(2) Click on the toolbar.
(3) The mouse cursor appears as the representation of a block logic instruction when the
mouse cursor is near the position in which a block logic instruction will be inserted. Please
refer to the figures below. The mouse cursor appears as the representation of a block logic
instruction when the mouse cursor is at the right side of the contact selected, or at the left
side of the contact selected. Users can decide where to insert a block logic instruction. After
users click the position in which a block logic instruction will be inserted, the system will
insert the block logic instruction.
 Method 2
Click the position in which a block logic instruction will be inserted, and type the block logic
instruction. As soon as the block logic instruction is typed, a box which can be edited appears.
After the typing of the block logic instruction is complete, users can press Enter on the keyboard
or click OK at the right side of the box. The representation of the block logic instruction typed will
be put in front of the position selected. (The instruction typed is case-insensitive.)
10.2.7 Creating Multiple Outputs

(1) If users want to create multiple outputs, they have to insert a coil or an applied instruction first.
10-18
(2) Click or on the toolbar, move the mouse cursor to a position near the output object,
and then click the left mouse button.
(3) Create multiple outputs according to the description above.
10.2.8 Putting a Label

If users want to use a jump instruction, they have to put a label on the network to which the
execution of the program jumps. A label is put at the right side of a network number.
If users want to specify a label in an instruction, they do not have to type a colon in front of the label.
The steps of putting a label are as follows.

(1) Click the right side of the network number at which a label will be put.
10-19
(2) Users have to type a label symbol. Press Enter on the keyboard after a P device number or a
label symbol is typed. The system will automatically put a colon at the right side of the label.
10.2.9 Editing a Comment

In a ladder diagram in ISPSoft, users not only can make comments on the devices, but can make
comments on the networks. Users can type comments under the network numbers in a ladder
diagram in ISPSoft.
 Editing the comment on a network

(1) After users click on the toolbar, the comments on the networks will be displayed. If the
users click on the toolbar again, the comments on the networks will be hidden.
(2) After the users click the position under a network number, a box will appear.
(3) Type a comment in the box. If the users want to start a new line of text at a specific point,
they can press Shift+Enter on the keyboard. Press Enter on the keyboard after the editing is
complete.
10-20
 Editing the comment on a device

(1) After users click on the toolbar, the comments on the devices will be displayed. If the
users click on the toolbar again, the comments on the devices will be hidden.
(2) After the users click the position above a device name, they can type a comment in the box
and also edit pin content of API. Press Enter on the keyboard after the editing is complete.
Additional remark
If a symbol is assigned to a contact or a coil in the program, the comment users make on the symbol
will appear after on the toolbar is clicked. The comments on the devices are different from the
comments on the symbols. Users can not edit the comments on the symbols directly. If users want
to edit the comment on a symbol, they have to open the Modify Symbol window for the symbol.
Please refer to section 6.2.4 for more information.
Besides, if on the toolbar is clicked, the hints related to a device will appear after the mouse
cursor stays at the device for a while. Users can select hints in the Options window in ISPSoft.
Please refer to section 2.3.1 for more information.
10-21
10.2.10 Symbol Mode and Address Mode

If a device address is assigned to a symbol declared in a ladder diagram, users can change the
mode in which the symbol is displayed by means of clicking on the toolbar. However, the
symbols to which no devices are assigned and the devices to which no symbols are assigned will
remain unchanged after on the toolbar is clicked.
If on the toolbar is not clicked, the identifiers of the symbols to which devices are assigned will
be displayed, and the comments on the symbols will be displayed.
If on the toolbar is clicked, the devices to which symbols are assigned will be displayed, and
the comments on the devices will be displayed.
10.2.11 Bookmark
After networks are bookmarked, users can find or go to the networks easily.
(1) After users click on the toolbar, a bookmark will be inserted in the network selected. If the
users want to delete the bookmark, they can select the network, and click on the toolbar
10-22
again.
(2) If there are bookmarks in a program, users can go to the next network which is bookmarked by
clicking on the toolbar, and go to the previous network which is bookmarked by clicking
on the toolbar.
Additional remark
After users point to Bookmarks on the Edit menu, they can select Toggle Bookmark, Goto the
Next Bookmark, Goto the Previous Bookmark, or Remove All Bookmarks. If the users click
Remove All Bookmarks, all the bookmarks in the present program editing window will be deleted.
10.2.12 Activating/Inactivating a Network

If a network is inactivated, the compiling of the program will skip the network. When users test or
debug a program, they can inactivate some part of the program temporarily by means of this
function.
The color at the left side of a network indicates whether the network is activated or inactivated.
Users can select colors which will be shown at the left sides of the networks in a ladder diagram in
the Options window in ISPSoft. Please refer to section 2.3.1 for more information.
10-23
The network is
inactivated.
The network is
activated.
If users want to activate or inactivate a network, they have to select the network first. Users can
select several networks simultaneously.
Click Inactivate Network on the Edit menu or right-click the network selected and click Inactivate
Network on the context menu. The network selected will be inactivated.
If users want the inactivated network selected to be activated, they can click Activate Network on
the Edit menu or right-click the network selected and click Activate Network on the context menu.
10-24
10-25
Chapter 11 Function Block Diagram
Table of Contents
11.1 Introduction of Function Block Diagrams ..................................... 11-2
11.1.1 Knowing Function Block Diagrams............................................... 11-2
11.1.3 Networks in a Function Block Diagram ......................................... 11-4
11.2 Creating a Function Block Diagram in ISPSoft .............................. 11-6
11.2.1 Input Nodes and Output Nodes................................................... 11-6
11.2.2 Use Devices, Symbols Constants in FB Diagram........................... 11-10
11.2.3 And and OR Block .................................................................... 11-10
11.2.4 Inverse Logic .......................................................................... 11-13
11.2.5 Rising and Falling edge-triggered Input ...................................... 11-15
11.2.6 Setting an Output and Resetting an Output ................................. 11-17
11.2.7 API, Comparison Contact and Function Block ............................... 11-19
11.2.8 Setting Label ........................................................................... 11-23
11.2.9 Comments and Hints ................................................................ 11-24
11.2.11 Bookmark ............................................................................... 11-27
11 - 1
11.1 Introduction of Function Block Diagrams

11.1.1 Knowing Function Block Diagrams
A function block diagram is one of the five languages defined by IEC 61131-3 standard. A function
block diagram and a ladder diagram are graphical programming languages. A ladder diagram is a
programming language that represents a program by a graphical diagram based on the circuit
diagrams of relay logic hardware. A function block diagram is a block diagram that describes a
function between input variables and output variables. A program is systematically divided into
several function blocks, and these function blocks are arranged in a function block diagram.
A function block diagram in ISPSoft is shown below.

Select the Function Block Diagram (FBD) option button in the Language section in the Create
Program window. Please refer to section 5.4.1 for more information.
11 - 2
Ch a pt er 11 F unc t io n B loc k D i a gr am
The environment in which a function block diagram can be edited is shown below. The table at the
upper part of the window is a local symbol table, and the area at the lower part of the window is a
working area.
Local symbol table
Working area
After a program editing window in which a function block diagram can be created is opened, the

None Displaying/Hiding the symbol or address
Shift+Ctrl+A Activating/Inactivating the network selected

Shift+Ctrl+B
Ctrl+I Inserting a network above the network selected
Shift+Ctrl+I Inserting a network under the network selected
Shift+F1 Inserting an AND block
Shift+F2 Inserting an OR block
Shift+F3 Inserting an output node
Shift+F4 Adding an input node to the AND/OR block
Shift+F5 Deleting the input node from the AND/OR block
Shift+F6 Inserting inverse logic
Shift+F7 Setting/Resetting the input
Shift+F8 The input is rising edge-triggered/falling edge-triggered.
11 - 3

*. Instructions and function blocks can be inserted by means of a keyboard. Please refer to section 11.2.7 for more
information.
11.1.3 Networks in a Function Block Diagram
A function block diagram consists of networks. Every network is an independent program. Besides,
there is no limit on the number of objects which can be inserted in a network in ISPSoft.
Network numbers are marked on the networks in a ladder diagram. The color at the left side of a
network indicates the state of the network. A network can be activated or inactivated, and a network
can be selected or unselected. Users can select colors which will be shown at the left sides of the
networks in a ladder diagram in the Options window in ISPSoft. Please refer to section 2.3.1 for
more information.
The network is unselected The network is unselected

The network is selected The network is selected

After a new window in which a ladder diagram will be created is opened, the system will insert a
blank network in the window. If users want to add a network, they can select a network, and click
on the toolbar. The network added will be under the network selected.
If users click on the toolbar, a blank network will be put above the network selected.
11 - 4

The red frame in the working area indicates the objects which are edited. It also indicates the
objects which are selected. If users want to edit he program in the figure below, they can only select
the positions marked with red frames. Besides, the functions which can be used vary with the
position selected. The objects which are copied/cut/pasted/deleted depend on the position selected.
The positions which are marked with red frames in the figure are described below.
 The input node at the right side of this position is selected. M0 in the figure is selected.
 The block before this position is selected.
 All the blocks before this position are selected.
 The output node at the right side of this position is selected. M1 in the figure is selected.
 The whole network is selected.
 The block is selected.
 The block before this position is selected.
 The output nodes under this position are selected.
 The output node at the right side of this position is selected.
 The block before this position is selected.
If users want to select several networks, they can hold down Ctrl on the keyboard while they click
the networks. The users can also select a range of networks by pressing Shift on the keyboard,
clicking the first network within the range, and the last network within the range.
11 - 5
11.2 Creating a Function Block Diagram in ISPSoft

A basic function block diagram and its equivalent ladder diagram are shown below. The graphical
representations in a function block diagram will be described in the following sections.
 Function block diagram
 Equivalent ladder diagram
11.2.1 Input Nodes and Output Nodes

The devices and the symbols in a function block diagram are represented by nodes. An input node
and the corresponding output node must conform to the rules listed below.
(a) One node represents an M/S/T/C/HC device, and the other node represents a symbol whose
data type is BOOL/STEP/TIMER/COUNTER. (The device assigned to the node which
represents a symbol is a bit device.)
(b) One node represents a D/L device, and the other node represents a symbol whose data type is
11 - 6
not BOOL/STEP/REAL/STRING.
(c) One node represents a T/C device, and the other node represents a D/L device or a symbol
whose data type is WORD/INT/TIMER/COUNTER.
(d) One node represents a D/L/HC device, or a symbol whose data type is COUNTER, and to
which a HC device is assigned. The other node represents a symbol whose data type is
DWORD/DINT.
(e) One node represents a symbol whose data type is WORD/DWORD/LWORD, and the other
node represents a symbol whose data type is INT/DINT/LINT. The data length of the output
node must be larger than or equal to the data length of the input node.
(f) Both nodes represent symbols whose data types are REAL/LREAL/STRING. The data lengths
of the nodes must be the same.
(g) If an input node has multiple output nodes, the output nodes must conform to the rules listed
above. 32 output nodes at most form a group. After users add an output node rightward, they
can create another group of output nodes.
 Graphical representation
 Example
Example 1: The state of the contact M0 is sent to M1.
Example 2: The data in D0 is sent to D1.
Example 3: There are three groups of output nodes. The first group begins with M100, the second
group begins with M200, and the third group begins with M300. 32 output nodes at
most form a group. After users add an output node rightward, they can create another
group of output nodes. There is no limit on the number of output nodes which can be
added rightward.
Example 4: Some incorrect examples are listed below.

Incorrect example Description
The data type of the input node must not be different from
the data type of the output node.
The data length of the output node must not be less than
the data length of the input node.
The value of a symbol whose data type is REAL can not

be sent to a D device.
11 - 7
Incorrect example Description

If the input node represents a symbol whose data type is
REAL, the output node must represent a symbol whose
data type is REAL. If the input node represents a symbol
whose data type is LREAL, the output node must
represent a symbol whose data type is LREAL.
The data length of the input node representing a symbol
whose data type is STRING and the data length of the
output node representing a symbol whose data type is
STRING must be the same.
The value of a symbol whose data type is TIMER can not
be sent to a symbol whose data type is DWORD, but can
be sent to a symbol whose data type is WORD.
The value in a HC device can not be sent to a symbol
whose data type is WORD, but can be sent to a symbol
whose data type is DWORD.
The multiple output nodes must conform to the rules listed

above. The example is incorrect because the data length
of the output node representing a symbol whose data type
is INT is less than the data length of the input node.
 Inserting an output node

(1) Select a position into which an output node will be inserted in the working area. Users are
allowed to insert output nodes into the positions marked with red frames in the figure below.
(2) In addition to the structure in the figure above, users may be allowed to insert an output node
into another structure. If users are allowed to insert an output node into the position selected,
on the toolbar can be clicked. After is clicked, an output node will be inserted.
11 - 8
An output node can be inserted in the following structures.

Inserting an output node into an input pin of an AND/OR block
Before
After
Inserting an output node into the output pin of an AND/OR block
Before
After
Adding an output node downward
Before
After
Adding an output node rightward
Before
After
*. Users are not allowed to insert output nodes into the output pins of a function block/an applied instruction to
which operands are assigned.
11 - 9
11.2.2 Use Devices, Symbols Constants in FB Diagram

Before users edit a node or an operand of an instruction, they have to click the node or the operand.
Click in the box, and then select a symbol on the drop-down list. If a symbol whose data type is
ARRAY is declared, the elements in the array will be on the drop-down list. Ary[…] in the figure
below are elements.
The users can type a device name or a symbol in the box. If they type a symbol which is not
declared, the Add Symbol window will appear after they press Enter on the keyboard. (Please refer
to section 2.3.1 for more information about declaring a symbol.)
the next box in the network after they press Enter on the keyboard. Besides, the next network will be
selected after the users press Tab on the keyboard. The users can edit a box with the keyboard. If
the users have declared symbols, they can press Page Down on the keyboard when they edit a box.
The users can select a symbol by the up/down key on the keyboard. After the editing is complete,
the users can press Enter on the keyboard to jump to the next box. If the users want to end the
editing, they can press Esc on the keyboard.
Additional remark
(a) If users want to use constants in a function block diagram in ISPSoft, the constants must be
represented in the following ways.
decimal value.)
 String: “XYZ” (Characters are put in double quotes.)
 BOOL: Need to use normally-open or normally-closed contact
AH/AS Series: Use SM400/ SM401 .
DVP Series: M1000/ M1001.
If users want to use a symbol whose data type is ARRAY, the expression format is Identifier[Index],
for example Ary [1] from the drop-down list of the above diagram.
11.2.3 And and OR Block

Contacts in a function block diagram can be connected in series/parallel by means of an AND/OR
block. The input nodes and the output nodes of an AND/OR block must represent Boolean devices
or symbols whose data types are BOOL. An AND/OR block have 32 input nodes and 32 output
nodes at most. Besides, an AND/OR block has at least one output node, or is connected to the next
object.
11 - 1 0
 Graphic representation
 Example
Example 1: The contacts M0, M1, and M2 are assigned to the OR block, and the result of the
operation is sent to M3. In other words, after M0, M1, and M2 are connected in
parallel, the coil M3 will be driven if M0, M1, or M2 is ON.
Example 2: The contacts M0, M1, and M2 are assigned to the AND block, and the result of the
operation is sent to M3. In other words, after M0, M1, and M2 are connected in series,
the coil M3 will be driven if M0, M1, and M2 are ON.
Example 3: The use of an AND block and an OR block in a function block diagram is equivalent to
the use of a serial connection and a parallel connection in a ladder diagram.
11 - 11
 Inserting an AND/OR block

(1) Select a position into which an AND/OR block will be inserted in the working area. Users are
allowed to insert AND/OR blocks into the positions marked with red frames in the figure
below.
(2) In addition to the structure in the figure above, users may be allowed to insert an AND/OR
block into another structure. If users are allowed to insert an AND/OR block into the position
selected, / on the toolbar can be clicked.
After is clicked, an AND block will be inserted.
After is clicked, an OR block will be inserted.
11 - 1 2
 Adding an input node to an AND/OR block

Select an input node of an AND/OR block, and then click on the toolbar. After is
clicked, a node will be added to the bottom of the input node selected. If the input node selected
is the topmost input node of an AND/OR block, e.g. M0 in the figure below, users can not add an
input node.
If an AND/OR block is selected, an input node will be added to the bottom of the bottommost
input node of the block after is clicked.
 Deleting an input node from an AND/OR block

Select an input node which will be deleted from an AND/OR block, and then click on the
toolbar. After is clicked, the input node will be deleted. Users have to pay attention to the
following two points when they delete an input node.
(a) The topmost input node of an AND/OR block, e.g. M0 in the figure below, can not be deleted.
(b) If an AND/OR block has only two input nodes, neither of the input nodes can not be deleted.
11.2.4 Inverse Logic

Users can insert inverse logic into a Boolean position in a function block diagram, e.g. an input node
which represents a Boolean device or a symbol whose data type is BOOL, an output node which
represents a Boolean device or a symbol whose data type is BOOL, the En pin of a function block,
or the En pint of an applied instruction. However, users have to notice that they are not allowed to
insert inverse logic into the pins of a function block/an applied instruction to which operands are
assigned.
 Example
Example 1: The state of M0 is inverted, and the inversion result is sent to M1. Likewise, the coil
11 - 1 3
M1 will be driven if the normally-closed M0 is OFF.
Example 2: The inverse logic inserted into the output node indicates that the result of the
operation is inverted. The inversion result is sent to M3.
Example 3: If M0 is ON, the function block BLACK will be executed. If M0 is OFF, the function
block WHITE will be executed.
Example 4: The figure below is an incorrect example. Inverse logic can not be inserted into a
node which does not represent a Boolean device or a symbol whose data type is
BOOL.
 Inserting inverse logic

(1) Select a position into which inverse logic will be inserted in the working area. Users are
allowed to insert inverse logic into the positions marked with red frames in the figure below.
Although the operand assigned to the output pin of the instruction CMP is a Boolean
operand, inverse logic can not be inserted into the output pin of CMP. Besides, inverse logic
can not be inserted into a position which does not have an output node, and a position
which is not connected to an object. For example, inverse logic can not be inserted into the
input node in network 3.
11 - 1 4
(2) In addition to the structure in the figure above, users may be allowed to insert inverse logic
into another structure. If users are allowed to insert inverse logic into the position selected,
on the toolbar can be clicked. After users click , inverse logic will be inserted.
If the users want to cancel the inverse logic, they can click again.
11.2.5 Rising and Falling edge-triggered Input

In a function block diagram in ISPSoft, the mark P on an input node indicates that the input node is
rising edge-triggered, and the mark F on an input node indicates that the input node is falling
edge-triggered. The mark P/F can only be inserted into an input node which represents a Boolean
device or a symbol whose data type is BOOL, or an input node of an AND/OR block. Users are not
allowed to insert P/F into the operands of a function block/an applied instruction, and the En pin of a
function block/an applied instruction.
 Example
Example 1: When M0 is turned from OFF to ON, M1 is ON. When M0 is turned form ON to OFF,
M1 is OFF.
Example 2: The mark F is inserted into an input pin of the AND block.
11 - 1 5
Example 3: The En pin of the first applied instruction is connected to the input node representing
M0, and therefore the mark P can be inserted into in the input node representing M0.
However, the mark P/F can not be inserted into the En pin of the second applied
instruction.
Example 4: The figure below is an incorrect example. The mark F can not be inserted into an
input node which does not represent a Boolean device or a symbol whose data type
is BOOL.
 Inserting the mark P/F

(1) Select a position into which the mark P/F will be inserted in the working area. Users are
allowed to insert the mark P/F into the positions marked with red frames in the figure below.
Although the operand assigned to the input pin of the function block FB0 is a Boolean
operand, the mark P/F can not be inserted into the input pin of FB0. Besides, P/F can not
be inserted into a position which does not have an output node, and a position which is not
connected to an object. For example, the mark P/F can not be inserted into the input node
in network 3.
11 - 1 6
(2) In addition to the structure in the figure above, users may be allowed to insert the mark P/F
into another structure. If users are allowed to insert the mark P/F into the position selected,
on the toolbar can be clicked. After users click , the mark P will be inserted. If the
users click again, the mark F will be inserted.
11.2.6 Setting an Output and Resetting an Output

In a function block diagram in ISPSoft, the mark S on an output node indicates that the output node
is set to ON, and the mark R on an input node indicates that the output node is reset to OFF. Users
are not allowed to insert S/R into the operands of a function block/an applied instruction.
 Example
Example 1: If M0 is ON, M1 will be reset to OFF.
Example 2: In the figure below, the mark S is inserted into the output node representing M3, and
the mark R is inserted into the output node representing M4.
11 - 1 7
Example 3: If M0 or M1 is ON, M2 will be set to ON. If M0 or M1 is ON, and M3 is ON, M4 will be

reset to OFF.
Example 4: The figure below is an incorrect example. The mark S can not be inserted into an
output node which does not represent a Boolean device or a symbol whose data type
is BOOL.
 Inserting the mark S/R

(1) Select a position into which the mark S/R will be inserted in the working area. Users are
allowed to insert the mark S/R into the positions marked with red frames in the figure below.
Although the operand assigned to the output pin of the applied instruction CMP is a Boolean
operand, the mark S/R can not be inserted into the output pin of CMP.
11 - 1 8
(2) In addition to the structure in the figure above, users may be allowed to insert the mark S/R
into another structure. If users are allowed to insert the mark S/R into the position selected,
on the toolbar can be clicked. After users click , the mark S will be inserted. If the
users click again, the mark R will be inserted.
11.2.7 API, Comparison Contact and Function Block

In a function block diagram in ISPSoft, the applied instructions, the comparison contacts, and the
function blocks are represented by blocks. Besides, users can type function block instances in the
boxes above the function blocks.
If the logic state connected to the En pin of a block representing an applied instruction or a function
block is ON, the applied instruction or the function block will be executed. A function block diagram
is flexible in that users can put a logical operation, e.g. inverse logic or an AND/OR block, between
two function blocks, between two applied instructions, or between a function block and an applied
instruction in a network.
 Graphic representation
11 - 1 9
 Example
Example 1: The En pin of a block representing an applied instruction in a function block diagram
can be connected to anther instruction or object.
Example 2: In a function block diagram, no object can precede a comparison contact, but the
output pin of the comparison contact can connect to an input pin of an AND/OR block,
an output node, the En pin of a block representing a function block, or the En pin of a
block representing an applied instruction.
*. Please refer to chapter 7 for more information about function blocks.
11 - 2 0
 Inserting an applied instruction, a comparison contact, or a function block

(1) Select a position into which an applied instruction, a comparison contact, or a function block
will be inserted in the working area. In the figure below, users are allowed to insert applied
instructions and function blocks into the positions marked with red frames, and comparison
contacts into the positions marked with green triangles.
(2) There are three ways to insert an applied instruction, a comparison contact, or a function
block in a function block diagram.
 Method 1
Unfold the APIs section or the Function Blocks section in the project management
area, and find the item which will be inserted. Select the item, and drag it to the position
in which it will be inserted.
11 - 2 1
Function block definitions can be dragged, but function block instances can not be
dragged.
 Method 2
Click the position into which an applied instruction, a comparison contact, or a function
block will be inserted, click on the toolbar, select the item which will be inserted in
the API/FB window, and click Insert.
 Users can select the All Types option button, the Comparison Instruction option
button, the API option button, or the Function Block option button.
 If users select the API option button in the Type Class section, they have to select
an instruction type in the Classification box.
 Users can select an applied instruction, a comparison contact, or a function block
here.
 If users unselect the Auto Close checkbox, they can insert instructions or function
blocks continuously.
 Method 3
Click the position into which an applied instruction, a comparison contact, or a function
block will be inserted, and type the applied instruction, the comparison contact
instruction, or the function block definition. As soon as the applied instruction, the
11 - 2 2
comparison contact instruction, or the function block definition is typed, a box which can
be edited appears. After the typing of the applied instruction, the comparison contact
instruction, or the function block definition is complete, users can press Enter on the
keyboard or click OK at the right side of the box. (The applied instruction, the
comparison contact instruction, and the function block definition are case-insensitive.)
If users want to insert a function block, they have to type the function block definition,
and they can not type the operands specifed in the function block. If users want to insert
a comparison contact or an applied instruction, they have to type the comparison
contact instruciton or the applied instruction, and they can type the operands specified
in the comparison contact instruciton or the applied instruction. The users do not have
to type all the operands specified in the comparison contact instruciton or the applied
instruction. The system will assign the operands typed to the corresponding boxes,
and ??? will appear in the boxes where there are no operands. Besides, if the operands
typed include a symbol which is not declared, the Add Symbol window will appear after
the users press Enter on the keyboard. Please refer to programming manuals for more
information about instructions.
(3) After an applied instruction, a comparison contact, or a function block is inserted

successfully, users have to type operands.
*. If the Auto-leading ‘Add Symbol’ Dialog checkbox in the Options window is selected, the Add Symbol window will
appear automatically after users type a symbol which is not declared. Please refer to section 2.3.1 for more
information.
11.2.8 Setting Label

If users want to use a jump instruction, they have to put a label on the network to which the
execution of the program jumps. A label is put at the right side of a network number. When choosing
DVP series or AH/AS series, since the P device is automatically assigned by the system and cannot
be directly used by users, input label name must not be repeated and the label symbols do not need
to be declared in the symbol table. For more information on using P device and limitations, please
refer to user manuals of PLC types.
11 - 2 3
If users want to specify a label in an instruction, they do not have to type a colon in front of the label.
The steps of putting a label are as follows.

(1) Click the right side of the network number at which a label will be put.
(2) If the project created is a project for a DVP or AH/AS series CPU module, users have to type a
label symbol. Press Enter on the keyboard after a P device number or a label symbol is typed.
The system will automatically put a colon at the right side of the label.
11.2.9 Comments and Hints

Users can make comments on the networks in a function block diagram in ISPSoft. They can type
comments under the network numbers in a function block diagram in ISPSoft.
 Editing the comment on a network

(1) After users click on the toolbar, the comments on the networks will be displayed. If the
users click on the toolbar again, the comments on the networks will be hidden.
11 - 2 4
(2) After the users click the position under a network number, a box will appear.
(3) Type a comment in the box. If the users want to start a new line of text at a specific point,
they can press Shift+Enter on the keyboard. Press Enter on the keyboard after the editing is
complete.
 Hints related to the devices and the symbols in a function block diagram
In a function block diagram, the comments on the devices and the comments on the symbols are
not displayed. If users want to view the comment on a device or a symbol, they have to make
sure that on the toolbar is clicked, and move the mouse cursor to the device or the symbol.
After the mouse cursor stays at the device or the symbol for a while, the hints related to the
device or the symbol will appear. The users can select hints in the Options window in ISPSoft.
Please refer to section 2.3.1 for more information. If the users want to hide the hints, they can
click again.
11 - 2 5
Besides, owing to fact that the devices and the symbols are different objects in ISPSoft, the hints
related to the devices are different from the hints related to the symbols.
Additional remark
Users can make a comment on a device by means of the comment management tool provided by
ISPSoft. Please refer to section 16.2 for more information.
11.2.10 Symbol Mode and Address Mode

If a device address is assigned to a symbol declared in a function block diagram, users can change
the mode in which the symbol is displayed by means of clicking on the toolbar. However, the
symbols to which no devices are assigned and the devices to which no symbols are assigned will
remain unchanged after on the toolbar is clicked.
If on the toolbar is not clicked, the identifiers of the symbols to which devices are assigned will
be displayed, and the hints which appear will be the hints related to the symbols.
11 - 2 6
If on the toolbar is clicked, the devices to which symbols are assigned will be displayed, and
the hints which appear will be the hints related to the devices.
11.2.11 Bookmark
After networks are bookmarked, users can find or go to the networks easily.
(1) After users click on the toolbar, a bookmark will be inserted in the network selected. If the
users want to delete the bookmark, they can select the network, and click on the toolbar
again.
11 - 2 7
(2) If there are bookmarks in a program, users can go to the next network which is bookmarked by
clicking on the toolbar, and go to the previous network which is bookmarked by clicking
on the toolbar.
Additional remark
After users point to Bookmarks on the Edit menu, they can select Toggle Bookmark, Goto the
Next Bookmark, Goto the Previous Bookmark, or Remove All Bookmarks. If the users click
Remove All Bookmarks, all the bookmarks in the present program editing window will be deleted.
11.2.12 Activating/Inactivating a Network

If a network is inactivated, the compiling of the program will skip the network. When users test or
debug a program, they can inactivate some part of the program temporarily by means of this
function.
The color at the left side of a network indicates whether the network is activated or inactivated.
Users can select colors which will be shown at the left sides of the networks in a ladder diagram in
the Options window in ISPSoft. Please refer to section 2.3.1 for more information.
The network is
inactivated.
The network is
activated.
11 - 2 8
If users want to activate or inactivate a network, they have to select the network first. Users can
select several networks simultaneously.
Right-click the network selected, and click Activate/InactivateNetwork on the context menu. The
network selected will be activated/inactivated. Users can also activate/inactivate the network
selected by clicking Activate/InactivateNetwork on the Edit menu, or by clicking on the
toolbar.
If users want to activate all the networks which are inactivated in the present program editing
window, they can click Activate All Networks on the Edit menu.
11 - 2 9
MEMO
11 - 3 0
Chapter 12 Instruction List
Table of Contents
12.1 Introduction of Instruction Lists .................................................. 12-2
12.1.1 Structure of an Instruction List ................................................... 12-2
12.1.2 Calling a Function Block ............................................................. 12-4
12.1.3 Important Points About Instruction Lists ...................................... 12-5
12.2 Create Instruction List in ISPSoft ................................................. 12-6
12.2.2 Edit IL instruction ..................................................................... 12-7
12.2.3 Insert API and Function Blocks ................................................... 12-8
12.2.4 Bookmark ................................................................................ 12-9
12.2.4.1 Adding Bookmarks ............................................................ 12-10
12.2.4.2 Removing Bookmarks ........................................................ 12-11
12.2.4.3 Going to a Bookmark ......................................................... 12-12
12-1
12.1 Introduction of Instruction Lists

An instruction list is one of the five languages supported by the IEC 61131-3 standard. It is a low
level language and resembles an assembly language. In earlier times, users entered control
instructions into a PLC through a programming panel, and the programming language used was an
instruction list.
12.1.1 Structure of an Instruction List

An instruction list is composed of statements. Every statement represents an action. A task which
can be accomplished by a complete ladder diagram can be accomplished by an instruction list
composed of many instructions.
An example of an instruction list is shown below. There are five lines of program code. The ladder
diagram corresponding to the instruction list is shown at the right side of the instruction list.
LD M0: Loading the state of M0
OR M1: The logical OR operation is performed on M1.
AND M2: The logical AND operation is performed on M2.
OUT M3: M3 The result of the operation is sent to M3.
(*Note*): It is a comment on the program. When the program is compiled, this line is skipped
automatically.
No action
Every statement on an instruction list is composed of an operator and operands. An operator is a

function representing an operation, and an operand is the object of an operation. An operand can be
a device, a symbol, or a constant. Besides, the operands for an operator are separated by spaces.
12-2
Ch a pt er 1 2 I ns tr uc t io n L is t
The operator MOV in the example below denotes that an action of transferring data will be executed.
The operands D0 and D1 are the source device and the destination device which take part in the
transfer.
On an instruction list, the words between (* and *) are regarded as comments. When a program is
compiled, the system automatically skips the words between (* and *). Besides, as long as the
structure of an instruction list is not destroyed, comments can be put anywhere on the instruction list.
However, users have to be careful about the readability of the instruction list. The comments in the
example below are legal.
Instructions are divided into basic instructions and advanced instructions. Please refer to
programming manuals for more information about the usage of instructions. If users want to check
the usage of an instruction, they can click PLC Instruction and Special Registers Reference on
the Help menu.
Besides, if users press F1 after they click an instruction, the usage of the instruction will be
displayed in the window which appears.
12-3
12.1.2 Calling a Function Block

The important points about calling a function block on an instruction list are listed below.
 CAL, the function block instance and the left parenthesis must be in the same line while the other
parts can be in different lines.
 The input/output pins of the function block and the corresponding operands must be put in
parentheses. A pin and the corresponding operand form a group. The groups are separated by
commas. The data types of the operands are specified in the function block definition.
 The function block after CAL is a function block instance rather than a function block definition,
that is, the symbol after CAL is a symbol whose data type is a function block. Please refer to
chapter 7 for more information about function block definitions and function block instances.
 The assignment mark for an input pin is :=, and the assignment mark for an output pin is =>.
 The pins and the operands are arranged according to the definition of the function block. The
arrangement can not be changed. The En pin and the Eno pin are excluded. The input pins are
listed above all the output pins. A pin of the VAR_IN_OUT class is an input pin. Please refer to the
ladder diagram and the instruction list below for more information.
 The state of the En pin of the function block is not specified in the instruction CAL. When the
instruction is executed, the result of the logical operation before the instruction determines
whether the function block will be enabled.
12-4
12.1.3 Important Points About Instruction Lists

 Every line on an instruction list is regarded as an instruction except the instruction CAL, and
therefore an operator and the operands for the operator can not be in different lines. If an
operator and the operands for the operator are in two lines, these two lines will be regarded as
two incomplete instructions. Besides, no spaces can be inserted into the instruction names, the
function block names, and the operand names on an instruction list. Otherwise, the instructions,
the function blocks, and the operands will not be recognized if the program is compiled.
 As long as the format of an instruction is not destroyed, leaving blank spaces and starting new
lines are allowed.
 Fullwidth characters and halfwidth characters in ISPSoft are regarded as different characters.
Please avoid using fullwidth characters lest they should be identified incorrectly.
 Instruction lists are case-insensitive. “OUT” and “Out” are considered to be the equivalents of
“out”.
 If users want to use constants in a program created by means of an instruction list in ISPSoft, the
constants must be represented in the following ways.
decimal value.)
 BOOL: Need to use normally-open contact / normally-closed contact
AH/AS Series: SM400/ SM401
DVP Series: M1000/ M1001
 When using ARRAY, the input format is Identifier[Index] and since IL currently does not support
index value, therefore, users can use decimal-constant smaller than array, but must begin with 0.
 When using function blocks or APIs, if there is no LD commands or logic calculation area before
giving an instruction, an error will occur during compiling.
 Although there is no limit on the number of lines, users still have to consider the capacity of the
memory in the PLC.
 The sections of an instruction list in ISPSoft can be copied/cut/pasted. Users can copy the text in
a file edited with a text editor into an instruction list in ISPSoft.
12-5
12.2 Create Instruction List in ISPSoft

Select the Instruction List (IL) option button in the Language section in the Create Program
The environment in which an instruction list can be edited is shown below. The table at the upper
area. There are line numbers at the left side of the working area. Users can set the way in which the
line numbers are displayed. Please refer to section 2.3.1 for more information. After a program
editing window in which an instruction list can be created is opened, the corresponding toolbar will
appear in the ISPSoft window. The functions are described below.
Local symbol table
Working area

Shift+Ctrl+B
12-6
12.2.2 Edit IL instruction

The way in which an instruction list file is edited is similar to the way in which a text file is edited with
a general text editor. If users want to create an instruction list, they can type or modify text in the
working area. If the users want to start a new line of text at a specific point, they can press Enter on
the keyboard.
If users want to select any amount of text, they can click where they want to begin the selection, hold
down the left mouse button, and drag the pointer over the text that they want to select. The users
can also click at the start of the selection, scroll to the end of the selection, and hold down Shift on
the keyboard while they click where they want the selection to end.
If users type a symbol which has not been declared, they can click the symbol, click the right mouse
button, and click Add Symbol on the context menu to open the Add Symbol window.
12-7
12.2.3 Insert API and Function Blocks

Users can insert an applied instruction or a function block in an instruction list in ISPSoft in one of
the three ways described below.
 Method 1
An applied instruction or a function block is inserted according to the format of the applied
instruction or the format of the function block.
 Method 2
inserted.
After the applied instruction or the function block is inserted, users have to type the
corresponding operands according to the format of the applied instruction or the format of the
function block.
12-8
 Method 3
Click the position in which an applied instruction or a function block will be inserted, click on
the toolbar, select the item which will be inserted in the API/FB window, and click Insert.
 Users can select the All Types option button, the Comparison Instruction option button, the
API option button, or the Function Block option button.
 If users select the API option button in the Type Class section, they have to select an
instruction type in the Classification box.
 Users can select an applied instruction, a comparison contact, or a function block here.
 If users unselect the Auto Close checkbox, they can insert instructions or function blocks
continuously.
After the applied instruction or the function block is inserted, users have to type the
corresponding operands according to the format of the applied instruction or the format of the
function block.
12.2.4 Bookmark
After lines are bookmarked, users can find or go to the lines easily. Users can add ten bookmarks at
most to an instruction list.
12-9
12.2.4.1 Adding Bookmarks
 Method 1
If users want to add a bookmark to a line, they can select the line, click the right mouse button,
click Bookmarks on the context menu, and select a bookmark number. If the bookmark number
selected has been added to another line, the bookmark number will be moved to the line selected
presently.
 Method 2
If users want to add a bookmark to a line, they can click the line, and click on the toolbar.
The users can also add a bookmark to a line by clicking the line, clicking the Edit menu, pointing
to Bookmarks, and clicking Toggle Bookmark. The bookmarks added in this way are numbered
in sequence. The users can not specify bookmark numbers.
12-10
12.2.4.2 Removing Bookmarks
 Method 1
If users want to remove the bookmark from a line, they can select the line, click the right mouse
button, click Bookmarks on the context menu, and click the bookmark number corresponding to
the bookmark added to the line. If the bookmark number clicked does not correspond to the
bookmark added to the line, the bookmark number added to the line will become the bookmark
number clicked. Besides, if the bookmark number clicked has been added to another line, the
bookmark number will be moved to the line selected presently.
 Method 2
If users want to remove the bookmark from a line, they can click the line, and click on the
toolbar. The users can also remove the bookmark from a line by clicking the line, clicking the Edit
menu, pointing to Bookmarks, and clicking Toggle Bookmark. If the users click the Edit menu,
point to Bookmarks, and click Remove All Bookmarks, all the bookmarks in the present
program editing window will be deleted.
1 2 - 11
12.2.4.3 Going to a Bookmark
 Method 1
Right-click the working area, point to Goto the Bookmark on the context menu, and click a
bookmark number.
 Method 2
If there are bookmarks in a program, users can go to the next line which is bookmarked by
clicking on the toolbar, and go to the previous line which is bookmarked by clicking on
the toolbar. The users can also go to the next/previous line which is bookmarked by clicking the
Edit menu, pointing to Bookmarks, and clicking Goto the Next Bookmark/Goto the previous
Bookmark.
12-12
Chapter 13 Structured Texts
Table of Contents
13.1 Introducing Structured Texts ....................................................... 13-2
13.1.1 Basic Structure of a Structured Text............................................ 13-2
13.1.2 Statement ............................................................................... 13-2
13.1.3 Expression ............................................................................... 13-3
13.1.4 Operand and Operator............................................................... 13-4
13.1.5 Keyword and Comment ............................................................. 13-5
13.1.6 Using Array Symbols in ST ......................................................... 13-7
13.1.7 Notes on ST Programming ......................................................... 13-7
13.2 Structure of a Statement .............................................................. 13-8
13.2.1 Assignment Structure─:= .......................................................... 13-8
13.2.2 Conditional Structure - IF ......................................................... 13-11
13.2.3 Conditional Structure─CASE ...................................................... 13-13
13.2.4 Loop Structure - REPEAT .......................................................... 13-15
13.2.5 Loop Structure - WHILE ............................................................ 13-16
13.2.6 Loop Structure - FOR ............................................................... 13-17
13.2.7 Applied Instruction Structure .................................................... 13-18
13.2.8 Function Block Structure ........................................................... 13-19
13.2.9 Blank Statement ...................................................................... 13-20
13.2.10 RETURN Statement .................................................................. 13-21
13.2.11 EXIT Statement ....................................................................... 13-21
13.3 Create Structured Text in ISPSoft .............................................. 13-22
13.3.1 ST Editing Environment ............................................................ 13-22
13.3.2 Edit Structured Text ................................................................. 13-23
13.3.3 Insert API and Function Blocks .................................................. 13-24
13.3.4 Bookmark ............................................................................... 13-25
13.4 Example of a Structured Text ..................................................... 13-26
13.4.1 Explanation ............................................................................. 13-26
13-1
13.1 Introducing Structured Texts

A structured text is a high level language that is syntactically resembles C or Pascal. It is composed
of text. Compared with instruction lists, structured texts are more readable. A structured text is very
flexible and intuitive for writing control algorithms. People who are trained in programming
languages often find it the easiest language to use for programming control logic. Besides,
structured texts provide a familiar programming environment for programmers who are familiar with
the C language.
13.1.1 Basic Structure of a Structured Text

The structured text shown below is a basic structured text. It has the same function as the ladder
diagram under it. The structure of the structured text is similar to the syntax of human language. A
structured text is composed of statements.
The structure of the structured text above is shown below.
* In a structured text, “:＝” means “to assign”, and “＝” means “to be equal to”.
13.1.2 Statement
The statement is a basic unit. It represents a complete task which can be executed. A complete
statement may not be represented by a single line, but it always ends with a semicolon.
13-2
Ch a pt er 1 3 Str uc tur e d Tex ts
A complete statement corresponds to a network in a ladder diagram. It represents a task. Take the
sub-statement shown above for example. The value of the arithmetic expression D0* (D1+D2) is
calculated, and the result of the operation is stored in D10. The arithmetic expression in the red
frame in the figure below is not a legal statement. It is an expression. It is not a concrete task. It is
like the ladder diagram shown below. The ladder diagram lacks an output operand. It is not a
complete program which can be executed.
A structured text is composed of statements, and a statement is composed of elements. An example

of a structured text is shown below. The complete statements in the structured text are in the red
frames.
* In a structured text, “:＝” means “to assign”, and “＝” means “to be equal to”.
13.1.3 Expression
An expression is an important element of a statement. It represents a value. An expression can be
an arithmetic expression, a constant, a symbol, or a device. Examples are listed below.
 M0 & M1 (Boolean value)
The logical operator & takes M0 and M1, and performs the logical & operation on M0 and M1.
The result of the operation is a Boolean value.
 M0 = FALSE (Boolean value)
The expression is a conditional expression. If M0 is ON, the Boolean value is TRUE. If M0 is OFF,
the Boolean value is TRUE.
 M0 (Boolean value)
If M0 is ON, the Boolean value is TRUE. If M0 is OFF, the Boolean value is FALSE.
 D1 + D2 (Value)
The value of the arithmetic expression D1+D2 is calculated.
 D0 (Value)
The value represented by the expression if the value stored in D0.
 D2 = D0 + D1 (Boolean value)
If the value of the arithmetic expression D0+D1 is equal to the value stored in D2, the Boolean
value is TRUE. If the value of the arithmetic expression D0+D1 is not equal to the value stored in
D2, the Boolean value is FALSE.
13-3
 D2 := D0 + D1; (Statement)
This is a statement rather than an expression. The value of the arithmetic expression D0+D1 is
calculated, and the result of the operation is stored in D2. This statement is composed of the
expression D2 and the expression D0+D1.
Please refer to the following example. The program is mainly composed of two IF statements. When
the first IF statement is executed, the system evaluates the expression M0. If M0 is ON, the value of
the arithmetic expression D21+D22 will be calculated, and the result of the operation will be stored
in D20. When the second IF statement is executed, the system judges whether the value of the
arithmetic expression D0* (D1+D2) is equal to the value stored in D20. If the value of the arithmetic
expression D0* (D1+D2) is equal to the value stored in D20, the Boolean value is TRUE, and the
value of M1 is TRUE. If the value of the arithmetic expression D0* (D1+D2) is not equal to the value
stored in D20, the value of M1 is FALSE.
13.1.4 Operand and Operator

Operands and operators are basic elements of an expression. An operand is the object of an
operation, and an operator is a symbol or function representing an operation. For example, in the
expression D0 + D1, D0 and D1 are operands, and + is an operator.
An expression can be composed of operands and operators. It can also be composed of a single
operand. The operands in an expression can be devices, symbols, or constants.
Rules of precedence affect which values form operands for which operators. If the operators in an
expression share the same precedence, the order of the operation is carried out from left to right.
The operands which can be used in a structured text in ISPSoft are listed below.
13-4
Example of an
Data format
expression
Result of an
Symbol Function Precedence
operation
Operand Expression Value
(Value of an
expression)
The
parenthetical
part of an
() Unspecified Unspecified (D0 + 6)* 3 33 Highest
expression is
calculated
first.
Floating-point Floating-point
** Exponentiation 2.0 ** 5.0 3.2E+1
number number
Signed Signed
- Negative sign -(D0 + 3) -8
number number
Logical Boolean
NOT Boolean value NOT M0 TRUE
negation value
* Multiplication Any value Any value D0 * 3 15
/ Division Any value Any value 15 / D0 3
MOD Remainder Integer Integer D0 MOD 3 2
Addition,
+,- Any value Any value D0 + 3 8
subtraction
< , >,<=,
Comparison Any value Boolean value D0 > 2 TRUE
>=
Any value D0 <> 2 TRUE
Equal to, not
=, <> Boolean value
equal to Boolean
M0 = TRUE FALSE
value
Logical AND Boolean
AND, & Boolean value M0 & M1 FALSE
operation value
Logical
Boolean
XOR exclusive OR Boolean value M0 XOR M1 TRUE
value
operation
Logical
Boolean
OR inclusive OR Boolean value M0 OR M1 TRUE Lowest
value
operation
*1. In the table above, the default value of M0 is FALSE, the default value of M1 is TRUE, and the default value of D0
is 5.
*2. The operands for an exponentiation operator must be constants or floating-point symbols, and must not be
devices.
13.1.5 Keyword and Comment

In computer programming, a keyword is a word which has a special meaning to the programming
language. For example, TRUE and FALSE in a program represent Boolean values, and the IF
statements in the example above represent tasks which will be executed. Besides, applied
instructions are regarded as keywords. In order to prevent a program from being compiled
incorrectly, the words which are regarded as keywords in the program cannot be declared to be
symbols. However, the words which are regarded as keywords in a program can be parts of the
symbols in the program. For example, “FIFO” and “_IF” are allowed.
In a structured text, the words between (* and *) are regarded as comments. When a program is
compiled, the system automatically skips the words between (* and *) in the program. Besides, as
long as the structure of a structured text is not destroyed, comments can be put anywhere in the
structured text. However, users have to be careful about the readability of the structured text.
13-5
Please refer to the two examples below. The comments in the left example are legal. The comment
in the right example divides the keyword “END_IF” into two parts, and therefore an error will occur if
the program is compiled.
ISPSoft provides a quick way to change the programs to Block Comment/Line comment. Click and
drag the ST block that you’d like to edit and then right click the selected area to open the quick
menu.
After selecting the Block Comment/Line Comment, the comments will be added. Click again if you’d
like to remove the comments.
Block Comment Line Comment
13-6
13.1.6 Using Array Symbols in ST

If users want to use a symbol whose data type is ARRAY in a structured text, the expression format
is Identifier[Index]. The index is a constant or a symbol. However, only the indexes in a project for
an AH/AS series CPU module can be symbols. The minimum index value must be 0, whether the
index is a constant or a symbol. The maximum index value cannot be larger than or equal to the
number of elements in the array. For example, if the number of elements in an array is 10, the index
value must be within the range between 0 and 9. Please refer to section 6.2.3 for more information.
Besides, users have to pay attention to the following points when they use a symbol whose data
type is ARRAY.
 Users can only manipulate a single element in an array. A symbol which represents an array can
not be used as an operand.
 The arrays that ISPSoft supports are one-dimensional arrays but the structure from the Data Unit
Type can support up to three-dimensional arrays. This type of variables can be written as the
image shown below. DO value is written in the pt1 [1,1,1] of the vardut. Refer to chapter 8 for
more information.
 If an index is a symbol, and the value of the symbol is not within a legal range, the PLC will
continue running and no error will occur. However, the data taking part in the operation may be
incorrect.
 If the index for a symbol is constant, the symbol can be modified by an index register. If the index
for a symbol is a symbol, the symbol can not be modified by an index register. Please refer to
section 6.1.5 for more information.
13.1.7 Notes on ST Programming

 If the structure of the keywords or the statements in a structured text is not destroyed, starting
new lines and leaving blank spaces isallowed.
 In principle, fullwidth characters and halfwidth characters in ISPSoft are regarded as different
characters. Please avoid using fullwidth characters lest they should be identified incorrectly.
 Structured texts are case-insensitive. “IF” and “If” are considered to be the equivalents of “if”. (The
C language is case-sensitive.)
 If users want to use constants in a structured text in ISPSoft, the constants must be represented in
the following ways.
decimal value.)
 Boolean value (BOOL): TRUE or FALSE
 In a structured text in ISPSoft, the data types of the operands in an expression must be the same.
However, if the data type of one operand is INT and the data type of the other operand is WORD,
both operands can take part in the operation. Likewise, if the data type of one operand is DINT
and the data type of the other operand is DWORD, the two operands can take part in the
operation as well. If the data lengths of the operands in an expression are different, the operands
cannot take part in the operation.
13-7
 If the data type of a symbol is WORD, DWORD, the system regards it as a signed integer during
the operation.
 Although there is no limit to the number of lines, users still have to consider the capacity of the
memory in the PLC.
 The sections of a structured text in ISPSoft can be copied/cut/pasted. Users can copy the edited
text into a structured text in ISPSoft.
 The following instructions are not supported in a structured text:
AH/AS series CPU modules
All the IL instructions are not supported. For example, LD, LDI, OUT, SET, RST, LD&, LDP are
not supported.
All the pulse type API instructions are not supported. For example, ROLP, RORP, BCDP, TRDP
are not supported.
The Four Arithmetic Operations instructions, the Logical Operation instructions, the Contact
Type Logic Operation instructions, and the Structure Creation instructions are not supported. In
addition, instructions including PLS, PLF, MOV, DMOV, DFMOV, $MOV, MC, MCR, CJ, JMP,
GOEND are not supported.
Also, instructions such as CNT, DCNT used in counter values and TMR instruction used by
counters in subroutine program are not supported.
 The following instructions are supported in a structured text but with limitation:
AS series CPU module
All the high speed output instructions (API 27xx) for example, DPLSY and DDRVI are
supported. Please refer to DDRVI instruction for application.
The use of DCNT instructions for high speed counters is supported. But, statements need to be
executed so that values can be updated.
Communication instructions are supported but only after flag instruction setup is completed.
The instructions used in the program procedures can be scanned for execution.
13.2 Structure of a Statement

13.2.1 Assignment Structure─:=
 Format
 Description
The value represented by the expression at the right side of := is assigned to the device or the
symbol at the left side of :=.
 Rules and limits
 The expression at the right side of := can be a constant, a device, a symbol, or an arithmetic
expression. Only a device or a symbol can be at the left side of :=.
 The operands at both sides of := must conform to the rules listed below.
(a) One operand is an M/S/T/C/HC device, and the other operand is a symbol whose data
type is BOOL/STEP/TIMER/COUNTER. (The device assigned to the operand which is a
symbol is a bit device.)
(b) One operand is a D/L device, and the other operand is a symbol whose data type is not
BOOL/STEP/REAL/STRING.
13-8
(c) One operand is a T/C device, and the other operand is a D/L device or a symbol whose
data type is WORD/INT/TIMER/COUNTER.
(d) One operand is a D/L/HC device, or a symbol whose data type is COUNTER, and to which
a HC device is assigned. The other operand is a symbol whose data type is
DWORD/DINT.
(e) One operand is a symbol whose data type is WORD/DWORD/LWORD, and the other
operand is a symbol whose data type is INT/DINT/LINT. The data length of the operand at
the left side of := must be larger than or equal to the data length of the operand at the right
side of :=.
(f) Both operands are symbols whose data types are REAL/LREAL/STRING. The data
lengths of the operands must be the same.
 Example
Example 1: The value of M0 is assigned to the symbol OUT_0.
Example 2: M0 is set to ON.
Example 3: The value in D2 is added to the value in D1. The sum is stored in D0.
Example 4: 3 is assigned to the symbol DATA.
Example 5: The system judges whether the value of the arithmetic expression 3*2+6* (5+3) is
equal to the value stored in D0. The judgement result is sent to M0.
13-9
13-10
Example 6: Examples of incorrect use of the assignment structure are as follows.

Statement Description
The data type of one operand must not be different from the
D0 := M0 ;
data type of the other operand.
The data length of the operand at the left side of := must not
V_WORD := V_DWORD ; be less than the data length of the operand at the right side
of :=.
The value of a symbol whose data type is REAL can not be
D0 := V_REAL ;
assigned to a D device.
If one operand is a symbol whose data type is REAL, the
other operand must be a symbol whose data type is REAL.
V_LREAL := V_REAL ;
If one operand is a symbol whose data type is LREAL, the
other operand must be a symbol whose data type is LREAL.
The value of a symbol whose data type is TIMER can not be
V_DWORD := V_TIMER ; assigned to a symbol whose data type is DWORD, but can
be assigned to a symbol whose data type is WORD.
The value in a HC device can not be assigned to a symbol
V_WORD := HC0 ; whose data type is WORD, but can be assigned to a symbol
whose data type is DWORD.
13.2.2 Conditional Structure - IF

 Format
 Description
If the value of Boolean expression 1 is TRUE, Sub-statement 1 will be executed. If the value of
Boolean expression 1 is FALSE, Boolean expression 2 will be evaluated. If the values of all the
Boolean expressions are FALSE, Other sub-statement will be executed.
 A Boolean expression can be a device, a symbol, or an arithmetic expression. It can not be a
constant.
 A sub-statement can be a legal statement, or an IF statement.
 There is no limit on the number of sub-statements following THEN or ELSE.
 The ELSIF sections and the ELSE section can be omitted. If the ELSE section is omitted, and
the values of all the Boolean expressions are FALSE, no sub-statement will be executed.
 Users can add ELSIF sections to a conditional structure at will. There is only one ELSE section
in a conditional structure. The ELSE section in a conditional structure is at the last section of
the conditional structure.
1 3 - 11
 Example
Example 1: If M0 is ON, M1 will be set to ON, and M2 will be set to OFF. If M0 is not ON, the step
will end. No matter what the value of M0 is, the value of M0 will be assigned to M0.
Example 2: If the value of DT1 is larger than 5, OUT_0 will be set to ON, and OUT_1 will be reset to
OFF. If the value of DT is not larger than 5, the value of OUT_2 will be assigned to OUT_0 and
OUT_1.
13-12
Example 3: If M1 is ON, the value in D0 will be 1. If M1 is not ON, the PLC will evaluate M2. If M2
is ON, the value in D0 is 2. If M2 is not ON, the value in D0 will be 0.
13.2.3 Conditional Structure─CASE

 Format
 Description
The PLC judges whether the value of Integer expression is on the list of condition values. If the
value of Integer expression is the same as a condition value on the list, the sub-statement
following the condition value will be executed. If the value of Integer expression is not on the list
of condition values, Other sub-statement under the keyword ELSE will be executed.
 Integer expression in the figure above can be a device, a symbol, or an arithmetic expression.
It can not be a constant. The data type of Integer expression must be INT (-32768~32767) or
DINT (-2147483648~2147483647). If a device is used as Integer expression, the system will
automatically regard the value in the device as an integer. Besides, if an arithmetic expression
is used as Integer expression, and the result of the operation is not an integer, the result will
be rounded down to the nearest whole digit.
 A condition value on the list can not be the same as another condition value on the list, and the
condition values on the list must be integers. The range of condition values depends on the
data type of Integer expression. If the data type is INT, the condition values must be in the
13-13
range of -32768 to 32767. If the data type is DINT, the condition values must be in the range of
-2147483648 to 2147483647.
 If the sub-statements following some condition values are the same, users can combine them.
(a) If the condition values are not continuous values, they are separated by commas. For
example, 1, 3, 5: Sub-statement means that the sub-statement will be executed if the
value of Integer expression is 1, 3, or 5.
(b) If the condition values are continuous values, the range of condition values can be
indicated by the mark “..”. For example, 3..6: Sub-statement means that the
sub-statement will be executed if the value of Integer expression is in the range of 3 to 6
(including 3 and 6). If the mark “..” is used, the value at the left side of “..” must be less
than the value at the right side of “..”. For example, 6..3 : is an illegal range.
 A sub-statement can be a legal statement, or another structure.
 There is no limit on the number of sub-statements following a condition value.
 The ELSE section can be omitted. If the ELSE section is omitted, and the value of Integer
expression is not on the list of condition values, no sub-statement will be executed.
 After a sub-statement is executed, the execution of the program will jump out of the CASE
structure. No jump instruction is needed.
 Example
Example 1: If the value in D0 is 1, M1 will be ON. If the value in D0 is 2, M2 will be ON. If the value
in D0 is neither 1 nor 2, M0 will be ON.
Example 2: The value of the arithmetic expression D0+D1 is calculated first. If the result of the
operation is in the range of 1 to 3, M0 will be ON. If the result of the operation is 5 or 7,
M1 will be ON. If the result of the operation is not on the list of condition values, no
sub-statement will be executed, and the execution of the program will jump out of this
structure.
13-14
13.2.4 Loop Structure - REPEAT

 Format
 Description
The sub-statement is executed, and then the Boolean expression is evaluated. If the Boolean
expression is evaluated as TRUE, the loop will be terminated. If the value of the Boolean
expression is FALSE, the program in the structure will be executed repeatedly until the value of
the Boolean expression is TRUE.
 The Boolean expression can be a device, a symbol, or an arithmetic expression. It can not be a
constant.
 The sub-statement is executed before the Boolean expression is evaluated, and therefore the
sub-statement is executed at least once.
 The sub-statement can be a legal statement, or another structure. There is no limit on the
number of sub-statements in a REPEAT structure. One loop structure can be embedded in
another loop structure. There are at most 64 loop structures.
 If the value of the Boolean expression following UNTIL is TRUE, the loop will be terminated. To
prevent an infinite loop, the operand in the Boolean expression following UNTIL can not be a
device or a symbol which cannot be updated.
 The X devices in a program are updated after the program is scanned. If users want to use an
X device as the operand of the Boolean expression, they have to add an I/O update instruction
to the structure, or update the X through an interrupt subroutine.
13-15
 Example
Example 1: The initial value of DT1 is 0. In the loop structure, the value of DT1 increases
progressively by 2. The loop will not be terminated until the value of DT1 is larger
than 100.
Example 2: The initial value in D0 is 1, and the initial value in D10 is 5. After the loop is terminated,
the value in D0 will become 5*4*3*2*1.
13.2.5 Loop Structure - WHILE

 Format
 Description
The Boolean expression is evaluated. If the value of the Boolean expression is TRUE, the
sub-statement will be executed. This repeats until the value of the Boolean expression becomes
FALSE.
 The Boolean expression can be a device, a symbol, or an arithmetic expression. It can not be a
constant.
 The sub-statement will be executed if the value of the Boolean expression is TRUE, and
therefore the sub-statement may not be executed.
number of sub-statements in a WHILE structure. One loop structure can be embedded in
another loop structure. There are at most 64 loop structures.
 If the value of the Boolean expression following WHILE is FALSE, the loop will be terminated.
To prevent an infinite loop, the operand in the Boolean expression following WHILE cannot be
a device or a symbol which cannot be updated.
 The X devices in a program are updated after the program is scanned. If users want to use an
X device as the operand of the Boolean expression, they have to add an I/O update instruction
to the structure, or update the X through an interrupt subroutine.
 Example
Example 1: The initial value of DT1 is 0. In the loop structure, the value of DT1 increases
progressively by 2. The loop will not be terminated until the value of DT1 is larger
than 100.
13-16
Example 2: The REPEAT loop checks the Boolean expression after the sub-statement is
executed. The sub-statement in the REPEAT structure is executed once. After the
REPEAT loop is terminated, the value in D0 will become 1. The WHILE loop checks
the Boolean expression before the sub-statement is executed. The Boolean
expression in the WHILE structure is evaluated as FALSE, and therefore the
sub-statement in the WHILE structure is not executed. After the WHILE loop is
terminated, the value in D1 will still be 0.
13.2.6 Loop Structure - FOR

 Format
 Description
The initial value of the symbol or the initial value in the device is the start value. Whenever the
loop body is executed, the value of the symbol or the value in the device increases by the
increment. If the value of the symbol or the value in the device is in the range of the start value to
the end value, the loop body will be executed. If the value of the symbol or the value in the device
is not in the range of the start value to the end value, the loop will be terminated.
 The start value/end value/increment can be a device, a symbol, an arithmetic expression, or a
constant. The data type of the start value/end value/increment must be INT (-32768~32767) or
DINT (-2147483648~2147483647). If a device is used as the start value/end value/increment,
the system will automatically regard the value in the device as an integer. Besides, if an
13-17
arithmetic expression is used as the start value/end value/increment, and the result of the
operation is not an integer, the result will be rounded down to the nearest whole digit.
 If the end value is less than the start value, the increment must be a negative number.
Otherwise, there will be an infinite loop.
 The data type of the symbol must be INT or DINT. If the symbol or the device takes part in the
operation, please prevent the value of the symbol or the value in the device from resulting in
an infinite loop.
number of sub-statements in a FOR structure. One loop structure can be embedded in another
loop structure. There are at most 64 loop structures.
 After the value of the symbol or the value in the device increases by the increment, the system
will check whether the value of the symbol or the value in the device is in the range of the start
value to the end value. If an overflow occurs after the value of the symbol or the value in the
device increases by the increment, there will be an infinite loop.
 Example
The initial value of the symbol INDEX is 1. Whenever the loop body is executed, the value of
INDEX increases by 2. After the loop body is executed for the fifth time, the value of INDEX will
increase by 2, and the value of INDEX will become 11. Owing to the fact that the value INDEX is
not in the range of 1 to 9, the loop is terminated. The initial value of the symbol SU is 0. After the
loop is terminated, the value of SU will become 12+32+52+72+92.
13.2.7 Applied Instruction Structure

 Format
 Description
The applied instruction is executed.
 The state of the En pin does not need to be specified in the applied instruction. When the
statement is executed, the applied instruction is executed. An IF statement functioning as an
En pin can be used with the applied instruction.
 As long as the structure of the operands and the structure of the keywords are not destroyed,
starting new lines is allowed.
 The applied instruction is a statement, and therefore it ends with a semicolon.
 The operands specified in the applied instruction must be put in parentheses.
 The order in which the operands are arranged can not be changed. Please refer to instruction
manuals for more information.
 The applied instructions in ISPSoft do not support the assignment of values, and therefore
M0 := CMP（D0, D10, M0）; is an illegal statement.
 As long as the structure of the applied instruction is unchanged, starting new lines is allowed.
 Example
Example 1: The instruction CMP is used with an IF statement.
13-18
Example 2: The state of the En pin does not need to be specified in an applied instruction. If the
instruction TMR is used, a statement about resetting the timer is required. Otherwise,
the value of the counter will not become zero. For example, line 0004 in the figure
below is a statement about resetting the timer.
13.2.8 Function Block Structure

 Format
 Description
The function block is executed.
 The state of the En pin of the function block does not need to be specified in the function block.
When the statement is executed, the function block is executed. An IF statement functioning
as an En pin can be used with the applied instruction.
 As long as the structure of the operands and the structure of the keywords are not destroyed,
starting new lines is allowed.
 The function block is a statement, and therefore it ends with a semicolon.
 The input/output pins of the function block and the corresponding operands must be put in
parentheses. A pin and the corresponding operand form a group. The groups are separated by
commas. The data types of the operands are specified in the function block definition.
 The function block before the parentheses is a function block instance rather than a function
block definition, that is, the symbol before the parentheses is a symbol whose data type is a
function block. Please refer to chapter 7 for more information about function block definitions
and function block instances.
 The assignment mark for an input pin is :=, and the assignment mark for an output pin is =>.
 The pins and the operands are arranged according to the definition of the function block. The
arrangement can not be changed. The En pin and the Eno pin are excluded. The input pins are
listed above all the output pins. A pin of the VAR_IN_OUT class is an input pin. Please refer to
the ladder diagram and the structured text below for more information.
13-19
 Example
Example 1: When a statement which calls a function block is executed, the function block is
executed.
Example 2: A function block is used with an IF statement.
Example 3: The value of the symbol CH determined which function block will be executed.
13.2.9 Blank Statement

 Format
 Description
13-20
If a statement is needed, but no action needs to be executed, a blank statement is used.

 Example
The For loop below shows that no action is executed. Owing to the blank statement, the execution
of the program is delayed. Users can adjust the time for which the execution of the program is
delayed by adjusting the number of times the loop body is executed.
13.2.10 RETURN Statement

 Format
 Description
A RETRUN statement is used in a function block in a structured text. It ends the program in the
function block.
 Example
The programming language used to create the program in the function block FB0 is a structured
text. After the upper part of the program is executed, the state of X0.0 will be judged. If X0.0 is ON,
the execution will leave the current program. If X0.0 is OFF, the whole program in the function
block will be executed.
13.2.11 EXIT Statement

 Format
 Description
An EXIT statement is used in a REPEAT loop, a WHILE loop, or a FOR loop. It is used to exit the
loop.
 Example
Example 1: The loop below is a REPEAT loop. The loop will not be terminated until the value of
DT1 is 0. The IF structure in the loop is used with an EXIT statement. The initial value
in D0 is 0. It increases by 1. The loop will not be terminated until the value in D0 is
100. As a result, the loop body will be executed 100 times at most. In the example
below, the initial value of DT1 is 110. After the loop body is executed for the 100th time,
the value of DT1 will become 10. In other words, the final value of DT1 will be 10. The
value of DT1 will not decrease to 0.
13-21
Example 2: The loop below is a FOR loop. Originally, the arithmetic hierarchy is DT1 value (initial
value is10) and the result of the operation is stored in D0. The IF structure in the loop
is used with an EXIT statement. The loop will not be terminated until the value in D0 is
larger than 100. When the value in D10 increases to 5, the value in D0 is
1*2*3*4*5=120, and the loop is terminated.
13.3 Create Structured Text in ISPSoft

13.3.1 ST Editing Environment
Select the Structured Text (ST) option button in the Language section in the Create Program
The environment in which a structured text can be edited is shown below. The table at the upper
13-22
area. There are line numbers at the left side of the working area. Users can set the way in which the
line numbers are displayed. Please refer to section 2.3.1 for more information. After a program
editing window in which a structured text can be created is opened, the corresponding toolbar will
appear in the ISPSoft window. The functions are described below.
Local symbol table
Working area
Icon Function
Inserting an example of an assignment structure
Inserting an example of an if statement
Inserting an example of a repeat loop
Inserting an example of a while loop
Inserting an example of a for loop
Inserting an example of a case statement
13.3.2 Edit Structured Text

The way in which a structured text file is edited is similar to the way in which a text file is edited with
a general text editor. If users want to create a structured text, they can type or modify text in the
working area. If the users want to start a new line of text at a specific point, they can press Enter on
the keyboard.
Besides, the users can click a line which will be edited, insert an example of a structure, and modify
the structure.
If users want to select any amount of text, they can click where they want to begin the selection, hold
down the left mouse button, and drag the pointer over the text that they want to select. The users
can also click at the start of the selection, scroll to the end of the selection, and hold down Shift on
the keyboard while they click where they want the selection to end.
13-23
If users type a symbol which has not been declared, they can click the symbol, click the right mouse
button, and click Add Symbol on the context menu to open the Add Symbol window.
While typing in the symbol, the system will autofill and show a list with variable symbols for users to
choose from. Users can use “↑” and “↓” on the keyboard to select or simply click on the variable
symbol you’d like to use.
13.3.3 Insert API and Function Blocks

Users can insert an applied instruction or a function block in a structured text in ISPSoft in one of the
two ways described below.
 Method 1
An applied instruction or a function block is inserted according to the format of the applied
instruction or the format of the function block.
 Method 2
inserted.
13-24
After the applied instruction or the function block is inserted, users have to type the corresponding
operands according to the format of the applied instruction or the format of the function block.
13.3.4 Bookmark
After lines are bookmarked, users can find or go to the lines easily.
 Adding/Removing bookmarks
If users want to add a bookmark to a line, they can select the line, click the right mouse button,
click Bookmarks on the context menu, and select a bookmark number. If users want to remove
the bookmark from a line, they can select the line, click the right mouse button, click Bookmarks
on the context menu, and click the bookmark number corresponding to the bookmark added to
the line. If the bookmark number clicked does not correspond to the bookmark added to the line,
the bookmark number added to the line will become the bookmark number clicked. Besides, if
users click the Edit menu, point to Bookmarks, and click Remove All Bookmarks, all the
bookmarks in the working area will be removed.
If users click a bookmark number which has been added to another line, the bookmark number
will be moved to the line selected presently.
 Going to a bookmark
Right-click the working area, point to Goto the Bookmark on the context menu, and click a
13-25
bookmark number.
13.4 Example of a Structured Text

13.4.1 Explanation
The example is about the control of a tower light. A tricolor light and a buzzer are used. The control
mechanisms for various device statuses are listed below. If more than one device status appears,
the device status which is given precedence over the others is displayed.
Light
State
Device status Red Yellow Green Precedence
code Buzzer
light light light
4 The device is malfunctions. ON OFF OFF Flash Highest
The device malfunctions.
3 Flash OFF OFF OFF
(The buzzer is turned off.)
2 The device is operating. OFF OFF ON OFF
1 The work is done. OFF Flash OFF OFF
0 The device is idling. OFF ON OFF OFF Lowest
13.4.2 Planning Hardware

In this example, the AH500 series CPU module AHCPU530-EN, the digital I/O module
AH16AP11R-5A, and the four-slot main backplane AHBP04M1-5A are used. The table below is an
I/O allocation table.
Type ID Description
Digital output Y0.0 Red light
Digital output Y0.1 Yellow light
Digital output Y0.2 Green light
Digital output Y0.3 Buzzer

(1) If the flag ERROR is ON, and the flag BUZZER_OFF is OFF, the state code will be 4.
(2) If the flag ERROR is ON, and the flag BUZZER_OFF is ON, the state code will be 3.
(3) If the flag ERROR is OFF, and the flag RUNNING is ON, the state code will be 2.
(4) If the flags ERROR and RUNNING are OFF, and the flag COMPLETE is ON, the state code
will be 1.
(5) If the flags ERROR, RUNNING, and COMPLETE are OFF, the state code will be 0.
(6) Every state code corresponds to a light. The control of the tricolor light has many practical
applications, and the tricolor light can be displayed in various ways. Considering that a
13-26
program can be expanded and reused, a function block is created.
13.4.4 Creating a Program

Start ISPSoft, and then create a new project.
The hardware configuration in this example is the same as the hardware configuration in chapter 4.
Please refer to chapter 4, and complete the hardware configuration.
13-27
Create a POU of the program type and a POU of the function block type in the project management
area. The programming language used to create the POU of the program type and the POU of the
function block type are structured texts.
13-28
Create the flags and the digital outputs in the global symbol table.
When users edit the POU of the function block type, they have to create an input pin which receives
the state code specified by the main program, and output pins which correspond to the three lights
and the buzzer.
Owing to the fact that the corresponding light will be displayed after the function block receives the
state code specified by the main program, a CASE statement can be used in the function block. If
there is another display mode, the users can add a state code, and insert a condition in the function
block.
The users can insert an example of a CASE statement in the working area, and modify the
statement. They can also type the structured text shown below in the working area.
13-29
When the users edit the POU of the program type, they have to declare the symbol SC, which
represents a state code, and the function block instance in the local symbol table. Owing to the fact
that there is a precedence mechanism for the control of the tricolor light, an IF statement can be
used in the main program. After a state code is specified, the function block must be called. The
state code is sent to the function block, and the result of the operation is sent to the digital output
which is specified.
The main program is shown below.
13-30
After the POU of the program type and the POU of the function block type are edited, the users can
compile the program, download the parameters and the program to the CPU module, and test the
program.
13-31
MEMO
13-32
Chapter 14 Sequential Function Charts
Table of Contents
14.1 Knowing Sequential Function Charts ............................................ 14-2
14.1.1 Structure of a Sequential Function Chart ..................................... 14-2
14.1.2 Principle of a Sequential Function Chart ....................................... 14-2
14.2 Sequential Function Chart in ISPSoft ........................................... 14-4
14.2.1 Steps and Actions ..................................................................... 14-4
14.2.2 Transitions ............................................................................... 14-7
14.2.3 Simultaneous Divergence and Divergence of Sequence Selection .... 14-9
14.2.4 Simultaneous Convergence & Select Convergence ....................... 14-10
14.2.5 Jump ..................................................................................... 14-11
14.2.6 Qualifier of an Action................................................................ 14-14
14.2.6.1 Qualifier Types .................................................................. 14-14
14.2.6.2 Important Points About Qualifying an Action ......................... 14-18
14.2.7 Initial Step .............................................................................. 14-19
14.2.8 Internal Property ..................................................................... 14-20
14.2.8.1 Step Property ................................................................... 14-20
14.2.8.2 Action and Transition Property ............................................ 14-24
14.3 Create SFC in ISPSoft ................................................................. 14-30
14.3.1 Editing Environment ................................................................. 14-30
14.3.2 Creating and Managing Actions and Transitions ........................... 14-33
14.3.3 Adding a Step ......................................................................... 14-35
14.3.4 Connecting a Transition in Parallel ............................................. 14-36
14.3.5 Connecting a Step in Parallel ..................................................... 14-37
14.3.6 Step Structure - Simultaneous Divergence & Select Convergence .. 14-38
14.3.7 Step Structure – Select Divergence & Simultaneous Convergence .. 14-39
14.3.8 Inserting a Jump Point ............................................................. 14-40
14.3.9 Assign Steps and the Transitions ............................................... 14-41
14.3.10 Specifying an Initial Step .......................................................... 14-42
14.3.11 Assigning Actions / Fold the Action Table .................................... 14-42
14.4 Sequential Function Chart Examples .......................................... 14-45
14.4.1 Example Descriptions ............................................................... 14-45
14-1
14.1 Knowing Sequential Function Charts

14.1.1 Structure of a Sequential Function Chart
A sequential function chart is one of the five languages defined by IEC 61131-3 standard. It is a
powerful graphical technique for describing the sequential behavior of a control program.
A sequential function chart and its corresponding flowchart are shown below. The main components
of a sequential function chart are steps with associated actions, transitions with associated logic
conditions, and directed links between steps and transitions.
14.1.2 Principle of a Sequential Function Chart

A sequence in a sequential function chart is depicted as a series of steps shown as rectangular
boxes connected by vertical lines. Each step represents a particular state of the system being
controlled. A transition is associated with a condition which, when true, causes the step before the
transition to be deactivated and the step that follows the transition to be activated.
14-2
Ch a pt er 1 4 Se q u en t i a l F unc t i on C har t
Steps in a sequential function chart can be active or inactive. Actions are only executed for active
steps. If a step is inactive, the transition follows it will not affect the execution of the program, and
the actions associated with the step will not be executed.
In a sequential function chart in ISPSoft, the steps must alternate with the transitions. If there are
two continuous steps or transitions in a sequential function chart, the program can not be compiled.
The example above is the structure of a simple sequential function chart. ISPSoft also provides
other flexible programming functions, such as the use of divergent and convergent paths, the use of
modular actions and transitions, and the qualification of actions. These programming functions will
be introduced in the sections below.
14-3
14.2 Sequential Function Chart in ISPSoft

If users use sequential function chart (SFC) for programming, the content of this program format
may vary according to the PLC series. This chapter contains introduction of the SFC structure.
14.2.1 Steps and Actions

Every step in ISPSoft must be assigned a variable whose data type is STEP, and functions as a
state flag. If the flag correspond to a step is ON, the step is active. Every symbol in AH5x0 and DVP
series whose data type is STEP occupies an S device in the PLC. Please refer to operation manuals
for more information about the S devices.
After a step is activated, the actions associated with the step will be executed according to the
qualifiers. In ISPSoft, the actions can be modularized, and can be associated with different steps. A
step can be associated with more than one action. Besides, every action has a qualifier that
determines when the action is executed.
In ISPSoft, an action is a program code, and can be developed by means of a ladder diagram, an
instruction list, a function block diagram, or a structured text. The actions which are created are
listed in the project management area. The program editing window in which an action can be
created differs from the window for a programming language in that there is no local symbol table in
the program editing window in which an action can be created. In ISPSoft, the actions and the
transitions in a sequential function chart share the same local symbol table.
14-4
If users want to edit a sequential function chart, they have to create actions, assign the actions to
the steps, and assign qualifiers to the actions. The Action Settings window and the corresponding
action list are shown below.
Final scans are important procedures during the execution of a sequential function chart. After the
execution of an action stops, the system will automatically execute a procedure to disable all the
outputs in the action. If a final scan is executed, the coils driven by the instruction OUT will be OFF,
the application instructions and the function blocks will not executed, the timers will be reset, the
states of the coils driven by the instruction SET or RESET will remain unchanged, the counters will
stop counting, the states of the contacts of the counters will remain unchanged, and the values in
the counters will remain unchanged.
Action0 in the figure below is an action associated with STEP_0, and is an N action. When STEP_0
is deactivated and STEP_1 is activated, the system executes a final scan.
14-5
STEP_0 in the figure below is activated. M10 in Action0 is ON, and therefore M0 is ON, M1 is set to
ON, M2 is reset to OFF, the value in T0 is 30, and the value in C0 is 5.
STEP_1 in the figure below is activated. Although M10 is ON, M0 is OFF, and T0 is reset. The state
of M1, the state of M2, and the value in C0 remain unchanged.
For the AH5x1, AH560 redundant system, AHxxEMC and AS series, users can set the Final Scan to
run or not for every Action. The default is to run the Final Scan in the ISPSoft. To disable this
function, users can right-click the Action that does not require a Final Scan to see a context menu
and then deselect the Action/Transition > Enable Reset Function. After that users will see a red
indicator situated in front of the Action that does not require a Final Scan. The state of an Action that
does not run a Final Scan will stay the same as the previous state does, while the state of an Action
that runs a Final Scan will be cleared.
14-6
14.2.2 Transitions
When a transition is true, the active step immediately before the transition becomes inactive and the
step immediately after the transition becomes active. A transition can be true anytime, but for a
transition to activate the step following it, the step preceding it must be active when the transition is
true.
In ISPSoft, a transition can be a Boolean device or symbol, or a program code. If a transition is a
logical operation, users can create a transition program, and assign the program to the transition.
The transition programs which are created are listed in the project management area.
The programming languages which can be used to create transition programs include ladder
diagrams, instruction lists, function block diagrams, and structured texts. The Boolean state in a
transition program must be sent to a symbol name which is the same as the transition program
name, whether the programming language used to create the transition program is a ladder diagram,
an instruction list, a function block diagram, or a structured text. The symbol does not need to be
declared. However, if there is a symbol name in a symbol table which is the same as a transition
program name, an error occurs when the program is compiled. Besides, applied instructions and
function blocks can not be used in a transition program, but comparison contacts and block logic
instructions (NP, PN, and INV) can be used in a transition program.
14-7
If the programming language used to create a transition program is a ladder diagram, the program
code of the transition program must be composed of one network, and the output contact must be
assigned a symbol name which is the same as the transition program name. Besides, multiple
outputs are not allowed in a transition program created by means of a ladder diagram.
If the programming language used to create a transition program is a structured text, there is no limit
on the number of lines of program code. However, a Boolean state in a transition program must be
assigned to a symbol name which is the same as the transition program name.
If the programming language used to create a transition program is a function block diagram, the
program code of the transition program must be composed of one network, and the output contact
must be assigned a symbol name which is the same as the transition program name. Besides,
multiple outputs are not allowed in a transition program created by means of a function block
diagram.
If the programming language used to create a transition program is an instruction list, there is no
limit on the number of lines of program code. OUT, SET, RST, and applied instructions can not be
used in a transition program created by means of an instruction list. Besides, the output instruction
in a transition program created by means of an instruction list must be TRANS, and the operand for
TRANS must be assigned a symbol name which is the same as the transition program name.
When users create a transition program, a symbol name which is the same as the transition
program name is added to the program code of the transition program. The users only have to
create a conditional operation. Owing to the fact that the actions and the transitions in a sequential
function chart share the same local symbol table, there are not local symbol tables in the program
editing windows for the transitions.
Users can not create a complex transition program. If a transition condition must undergo a complex
operation, users can create the complex operation in an action associated with a step, create a
condition flag in the action, and assign the flag to the transition following the step.
14-8
Although users do not need to declare the symbols in the transition programs, the system assigns
memories which function as flags to the symbols. As a result, users have to make sure that the
symbols in the transition programs can be assigned a specific logic state. Otherwise, an error will
occur if the program is executed.
Take the transition program which is created by means of a structured text below for example.
During the execution of the transition program for the first time, Tran4 will be ON if the result of (M0
AND M1) is ON. Since Tran4 is ON, it passes control to the next step. After the control is passed to
the step preceding the transition program again, the transition program will be executed again. If the
result of (M0 AND M1) is OFF, the statement following THEN will not be executed. Tran4 will still be
ON because it is not updated. The system will evaluate the transition condition as TRUE, and the
control will be passed to the next step.
Adding an ELSE section to the transition program below is a better way to ensure that the symbol
Tran4 is assigned a specific logic state. Users also have to pay attention to the same problem in a
CASE sttructure.
14.2.3 Simultaneous Divergence and Divergence of Sequence

Selection
Users can create divergent paths in a sequential function chart. There are two types of divergences.
One is a simultaneous divergence, and the other is a divergence of sequence selection
 Simultaneous divergence
A simultaneous divergence is shown below. The divergent steps are connected by a double line.
The characteristic of a simultaneous divergence is that the divergent steps share the same
transition. When the transition is true, the steps are active.
When Tran0 is true, STEP_0 becomes inactive, and STEP_1 and STEP_2 become active.
 Divergence of sequence selection

A divergence of sequence selection is shown below. The characteristic of a divergence of
sequence selection is that the divergent steps have their own transitions. When one transition is
true, the step following the transition becomes active, and the other transitions are not evaluated.
Consequently, if there are divergent paths, only one path is taken at a time. Besides, the
transitions are evaluated from left to right. If several transitions are true simultaneously, only the
step following the leftmost transition will be activated.
When Tran2 is true, STEP_0 becomes inactive, and STEP_2 becomes active. Tran1 is not
evaluated, and STEP_1 remains inactive.
14-9
14.2.4 Simultaneous Convergence and Convergence of Sequence

Selection
The divergent paths in a sequential function chart must be converged. There are two types of
convergences. One is a simultaneous convergence, and the other is a convergence of sequence
selection.
 Simultaneous convergence
A simultaneous convergence is shown below. The convergent steps are connected by a double
line. The characteristic of a simultaneous convergence is that the convergent steps are
connected to the same transition. The transition will not be evaluated until the convergent steps
preceding the transition are activated.
After STEP_1 and STEP_2 are activated, Tran3 will be evaluated. When Tran3 is true, STEP_1
and STEP_2 become inactive, and STEP_3 becomes active.
 Convergence of sequence selection

A convergence of sequence selection is shown below. The characteristic of a convergence of
sequence selection is that the convergent steps have their own transitions. When one transition is
true, the next step becomes active. If there is another convergent step which is activated, the
step will be active until the transition following the step is true. When the transition is true, the
step following the transition becomes active. Consequently, if a convergence of sequence
selection is used in a sequential function chart, several steps following the convergence may be
activated. If users use a convergence of sequence selection in a sequential function chart, they
have to make sure that the program is not confused.
When Tran1 is true, STEP_1 becomes inactive, and STEP_3 becomes active. If Tran2 is true,
STEP_2 will be inactivated, and STEP_3 will be activated again.
14-10
14.2.5 Jump
The use of a jump structure in a sequential function chart results in the passing of control to a step
which is specified. There is at least one jump point indicating that the passing of control will occur
once the transition preceding the jump point is true in a sequential function chart. Users can use
jump structures quite freely. If they use a jump structure in a sequential function chart, they have to
make sure that the program is not confused.
The program below is a sequential function chart where there is a divergence of sequence selection.
If Tran2 is true, control will be passed to STEP2. When Tran4 is true, it passes control to STEP1
through a jump. When Tran5 is true, it passes control to STEP0.
If users use a jump structure in a sequential function chart, the step specified must be a step in the
same sequential function chart. If the step specified is not in the same sequential function chart, and
is declared in a local symbol table or the global symbol table, an error occurs when the program is
compiled
If control needs to be passed from a step in a sequential function chart to a step in another
sequential function, users can make use of the characteristics of steps and the characteristics of
transitions. Users can declare the step or the transition which is the destination of a jump in the
1 4 - 11
global symbol table. When the condition of the jump is met, the step or the transition declared is set
to ON. The condition of the jump can be created in an action.
The figure below shows that SFC_A is executed first. SFC_B will be executed after SFC_A is
executed, and SFC_A will be executed after SFC_B is executed. User can achieve the jumps by
means of the characteristics of transitions.
The steps SP_A and SP_B in the example below are used to express the sequential function chart
which will be executed. They are preceded and followed by steps. Besides, the transitions RUN_A
and RUN_B are declared in the global symbol table.
When the program is executed, the step WAIT in SFC_A and the step WAIT in SFC_B are activated,
and the action INITIALIZE associated with WAIT in SFC_A and the action INITIALIZE associated
with WAIT in SFC_B are executed. INITIALIZE in SFC_A sets the transition RUN_A to ON during
the first scan cycle, and therefore control is passed to SP_A. INITIALIZE in SFC_B sets the
transition RUN_ B to OFF during the first scan cycle, and therefore control is not passed to SP_B.
When the step JUMP in SFC_A is activated, the action associated with JUMP sets the transition
RUN_B to ON, and resets RUN_A to OFF. When RUN_B is set to ON, control is passed to the step
SP_B. Besides, the transition following JUMP in SFC_A is a special relay which is always ON, and
therefore control is passed to the step WAIT. Owing to the fact that RUN_A is set to OFF, control is
not passed to SP_A. RUN_A will not be set to ON until the action associated with JUMP in SFC_B
is executed.
The use of WAIT and JUMP in SFC_A serves to set RUN_B to ON, and the use of WAIT and JUMP
in SFC_B serves to set RUN_A to ON. WAIT and JUMP in SFC_A and WAIT and JUMP in SFC_B
actually have little significance. If the program is applied to an AH/AS series CPU module, users can
assign the qualifier P or P1 to the actions associated these steps. Please refer to section 14.2.6 for
more information.
14-12
14-13
14.2.6 Qualifier of an Action

In ISPSoft, users can define the execution of an action by qualifying the action. However, users can
not qualify the actions in the program in a DVP series PLC. Consequently, the actions in the
program in a DVP series PLC are N actions.
 The step name is displayed here.

 Users can select qualifiers for the actions associated with the step.
 Users can specify qualifiers related to time.
 Users can select actions which are qualified.
 Users can make comments on the step.
14.2.6.1 Qualifier Types
 N (Normal)
When a step is activated, the N action associated with the step is executed. When the step is
inactivated, the system executes a final scan to disable all the outputs in the N action. However,
the outputs which use the instructions similar SET are not disabled. The actions in the program in
a DVP series PLC are N actions.
 S (Set)
When a step is activated, the S action associated with the step is executed. Even if the step is
inactivated, the S action will still be executed.
When STEP_1 in the figure below is activated, Action1 and Action2 are executed. When Tran1 is
true, STEP_1 becomes inactive. Once STEP_1 is inactivated, the execution of Action1 will stop,
the system will execute a final scan, and Action2 will still be executed.
 D (Delay)
The D action associated with a step is not executed at the time when the step is activated. The
execution of the D action is delayed for a certain amount of time. If the transition following the
step becomes true before the D action is executed, the step will be inactivated, control will be
passed to the next step, and the D action will not be executed. When the step is activated again,
the delay is measured again.
14-14
Action1 in the figure below is not executed at the time when STEP_1 is executed. The execution
of Action1 is delayed for two seconds. If STEP_1 is inactivated before Action1 is executed,
Action1 will not be executed.
 SD (Set Delay)
The SD action associated with a step is not executed at the time when the step is activated. The
execution of the SD action is delayed for a certain amount of time. If the SD action is executed, it
will still be executed after the step is inactivated. Besides, if the transition following the step
becomes true before the SD action is executed, control will be passed to the next step, and the
delay will still be measured. A certain amount of time has elapsed before the SD action is
executed.
 DS (Delay Set)
A DS action is similar to a SD action. However, if the transition following a step becomes true
before the SD action associated with the step is executed, the delay will not be measured, and
the SD action will not be executed. When the step is activated again, the delay is measured again.
If the DS action is executed, it will still be executed after the step is inactivated.
Action1 and Action2 are not executed at the time when STEP_1 is activated. The execution of
Action1 and the execution of Action2 are delayed for two seconds. There are two situations which
need to be considered.
(a) STEP_1 is activated for more than two seconds.
Action1 and Action2 will be executed after STEP_1 has been executed for two seconds. Even
if STEP_1 is inactivated, Action1 and Action2 will still be executed.
(b) STEP_1 is activated for less than two seconds.
After control is passed to the next step, the delay of Action1 will still be measured. Two
seconds has elapsed before Action1 is executed. However, after the control is passed to the
next step, the delay of Action2 will not be measured, and Action2 will not be executed.
 L (Limit)
When a step is activated, the L action associated with the step is executed. If the L action has
been executed for a certain amount of time before control is passed to the next step, the
execution of the L action will stop automatically, and the system will execute a final scan. If the
control is passed to the next step before the time specified has elapsed, the execution of the L
action will stop.
 SL (Set Limit)
When a step is activated, the SL action associated with the step is executed. If the SL action has
been executed for a certain amount of time before control is passed to the next step, the
execution of the SL action will stop automatically, and the system will execute a final scan. If the
control is passed to the next step before the time specified has elapsed, the execution of the SL
action will stop after the time specified has elapsed.
When STEP_1 is activated, Action1 and Action2 are executed. There are two situations which
need to be considered.
14-15
(a) STEP_1 is activated for more than two seconds.

After Action1 and Action2 have been executed for two seconds, the execution of Action1 and
the execution of Action2 will stop, and the system will execute final scans.
(b) STEP_1 is activated for less than two seconds.
After control is passed to the next step, the execution of Action1 will stop, and the system will
execute a final scan. The execution of Action2 will stop after two seconds have elapsed.
 R (Reset)
When a step is activated, the R action related to the step is not executed, and the system
executes a final scan. An action qualified by S, SD, DS, or SL will not be executed if it is qualified
by R.
Suppose that Action0, Action1, and Action2 are executed during the activation of STEP_0, and
will be executed until control is passed to STEP_2. After the control is passed to STEP_2, the
execution of Action0 and the execution of Action2 will stop, and the system will execute final
scans. Owing to the fact that Action1 is not qualified by R, it will still be executed after the control
is passed to STEP_2.
14-16
 P (Pulse)
During the first scan cycle, the P action associated with a step is executed when the step is
activated. During the second scan cycle, even if the step is activated, the outputs will be disabled,
and the system will execute a final scan.
During the first scan cycle, Action1 is executed when STEP_1 is activated. Owing to the fact that
SM400 is ON, M1 and M2 are ON. During the second scan cycle, the system inactivates Action1.
Although SM400 is still ON, M2 becomes OFF. M1 is driven by the instruction SET, and therefore
it remains ON.
 P1 (Raising Pulse)
The P1 action associated with a step is executed only when the step is activated during the first
scan cycle. Besides, the system will not execute a final scan after the execution of the P1 action
stops. Consequently, although an action where the instruction OUT or TMR is used is allowed to
be qualified by P1, a warning appears when the program is compiled.
During the first scan cycle, Action1 is executed when STEP_1 is activated. If M1 is ON, M2 will be
ON. Action1 is executed only when STEP_1 is activated during the first scan cycle. Besides, the
system will not execute a final scan after the execution of Action1 stops. Consequently, the state
of M2 will not change even if the state of M1 changes.
 P0 (Falling Pulse)
The P0 action associated with a step is executed only when the step is inactivated during the first
scan cycle. Besides, the system will not execute a final scan after the execution of the P0 action
stops. Consequently, although an action where the instruction OUT or TMR is used is allowed to
be qualified by P1, a warning appears when the program is compiled.
When STEP_1 is activated, Action1 is not executed. Action1 will not be executed until Tran1 is
true. If M1 is ON, M2 will be ON. Action1 is executed only when STEP_1 is inactivated during the
first scan cycle. Besides, the system will not execute a final scan after the execution of Action1
stops. Consequently, the state of M2 will not change even if the state of M1 changes.
14-17
14.2.6.2 Important Points About Qualifying an Action

 Once an action qualified by S is executed, it will still be executed even if it is qualified by N or P.
The execution of the action stops only when the action is qualified by R. If there is an action which
is qualified by S, users have to check whether they have to assign R to the action to stop the
execution of the action.
When STEP_0 is activated, Action0 and Action1 are executed. After control is passed to STEP_1,
Action0 and Action1 will still be executed even if they are qualified by N and P respectively. The
execution of Action1 will stop after control is passed to STEP_2. Action0 is never qualified by R,
and therefore it will be executed all the time.
 Except the R qualifier, when assigning a time-related qualifier for an Action, the qualifier can only
be used in the SFC instruction once. In other words, if an action is qualified by D, SD, DS, L, or
SL, no other qualifiers can be used for the action, except the R qualifier.
From the example shown below, we can see that in the STEP_0, the Action0 and Action1 are
qualified by D and L respectively. And in the STEP_1, the Action0 and Action1 are qualified by N
and R. The usage of Action 0 being assigned with D in the STEP_0 and N in the STEP_1 is
wrong and will cause error to occur. The usage of Action 1 being assigned with Lin the STEP_0
and R in the STEP_1 is correct, since R can be added to an Action with more than 1 qualifier.
14-18
14.2.7 Initial Step

During the execution of a sequential function chart, every step is activated in turn and cyclically. It is
necessary to define a step as an initial step which is activated when the program is executed for the
first time. In ISPSoft, the initial step in a sequential function chart is drawn as a box with a double
line. Besides, there is only one initial step in a sequential function chart.
Any step in a sequential function chart in an AH/AS series CPU module can be defined as the initial
step in the sequential function chart. When a sequential function chart in an AH/AS series CPU
module is executed for the first time during the operation of the CPU module, the initial step in the
sequential function chart is the step which is activated first.
If there is a sequential function chart in a DVP series PLC, the sequential function chart will not be
executed until the instruction SET used in another POU activate a step in the sequential function
chart. Users can not define a step in a sequential function chart in a DVP series PLC as the initial
step in the sequential function chart, and the first step in a sequential function chart in a DVP series
PLC is always the initial step in the sequential function chart. The real initial step in a sequential
function chart in a DVP series PLC is the device or the symbol driven by the instruction SET used in
another POU. An example of executing a sequential function chart in DVP series PLC is shown
below.
Users have to determine which step in a sequential function chart is the initial step in the sequential
function chart, declare the step in the global symbol table, and apply the instruction SET to the step
in another POU. In the program code where the instruction SET is applied to the step, the condition
contact or the logical output preceding the step must be prevented from becoming ON again during
the execution of the program. Otherwise, the step will be ON, and the sequential function chart will
be executed incorrectly. The special relay M1002 is highly recommended. The characteristic of
M1002 is that M1002 is ON during the first scan cycle.
14-19
14.2.8 Internal Property

The internal property provides users to use in POUs and particular parameter properties in SFC
programming. The parameter properties are categorized into Step, Action and Transition. The
following content introduce the properties accordingly.
14.2.8.1 Step Property
To use SFC in POU, the step property adopts STRUCTURE framework to display.
The structure consists of POU Name, Step Name and Step Member. Users can select the
appropriate POU and Step name then decide on the step member.
The following table provides Step member categorization.

Category Member Description Read Write
When executing Step, the SFC parameter

X property is ON；this parameter property can V X
replace previous S device.
Step
When Step Property T (the current time spent
done executing Step) >= Step property timePreset V X
and the value is ON
14-20
When Step property X changes from OFF to

counter V X
ON, parameter property count adds 1
Determines the time for Step property done

timePreset changes from OFF to ON (unit: ms, data length: V X
DWORD)
Record the maximum time of Step property T

maxTime V X
(unit: ms, data length: DWORD)
The time spent executing Step

T V X
(unit: ms, data length: DWORD)
Take executing Step member X in SFC for example, when users want to trigger the contact to ON
for POU in ladder programming once Step execution starts, the programs are written in the following
ways.
By using normally-open contact of POU in ladder program, click on top of the normally-open contact,
a drop-down list appears and provides POU name options for SFC program then click the name.
After clicking the POU name for SFC program, right-click the mouse and a drop-down list with POU
Step name appears, then select the name.
14-21
After clicking the POU Step name for SFC program, right-click the mouse and a drop-down list with
POU Step Member name appears, then select the name.
14-22
When executing POU Step in SFC program, the normally-open contact of SFC_Prog.Step1.X is ON.
14-23
14.2.8.2 Action and Transition Property

To use SFC in POU, the Action and Transition property adopts STRUCTURE framework to display.
For Action property structure consists of POU Name, Action Name and Action Member. Users can
select the appropriate POU and Action name then decide on the Action member.
For Transition property structure consists of POU Name, Transition Name and Transition Member.
Users can select the appropriate POU and Transition name then decide on the Transition member.
The following table provides Action and Transition member categorization.
When qualifier condition of Action is set, the

enabled SFC parameter property is ON and checks if V X
Action is enabled or not.
When finish Action program for the first time,

active V X
the SF parameter property is ON.
When Final scan is enabled, its value is OFF;

Action
rstDisable when Final scan is not enabled, its value is V X
ON.
When Active property active changes from

counter V X
OFF to ON, parameter property count adds 1.
Shows time for time related qualifier (unit: ms,

setTimer V X
data length: DWORD)
When Transition condition set is ON, or

Transition transOut V X
Transition is forced to start is ON.
14-24
Take Action member counter for example, if users want to monitor Action property active number
change from 0 to 1and transmit the parameter value to D100 register, the programs are written in
the following ways.
Use SM400 (normally-open contact) and DMOV command in ladder program, click the S contact of
DMOV command and choose the POU name for SFC program from the drop-down list and click the
name.
Action name appears, then select the name.
After clicking the POU Action name for SFC program, right-click the mouse and a drop-down list with
POU Action Member name appears, then select the name.
14-25
For D contact of DMOV command, input D100.
When SFC_Prog.Action.Act_1.Active changes from 0 to 1, the SFC_Prog.Action.Act_1.counter

adds 1.
14-26
Take Transition member transOut for example, if users want Transition condition set in POU, trigger
the normally-open contact in POU for ladder program to ON, the programs are written in the
following ways.
Use a normally-open contact and click on top of the contact and choose the POU name for SFC
program from the drop-down list and click the name.
14-27
Transition name appears, then select the name.
14-28
After clicking the POU Transition name for SFC program, right-click the mouse and a drop-down list
with POU Transition Member name appears, then select the name.
14-29
When Transition condition Step_CND_1 in POU for SFC program is set, the normally-open contact
of SFC_Prog. Step_CND_1.transOut is ON.
14.3 Create SFC in ISPSoft

Select the Sequential Function Chart (SFC) option button in the Language section in the Create
Program window. Please refer to section 5.4.1 for more information about creating a sequential
14-30
function chart. In addition, users have to pay attention to the following two points when they create a
sequential function chart.
(a) The programming language used to create a POU of the function block type can not be a
(b) If the programming language used to create a POU of the program type is a sequential function
chart, the POU of the program type can only be assigned to a cyclic task.
The environment in which a sequential function chart can be edited is shown below. The table at the
upper part of the window is a local symbol table, and the area at the lower part of the window is a
working area. The working area is like a checkerboard.
The steps and the transitions are put in squares. If users click an object or the square where the
object is put, the object will be selected, and a yellow frame will appear.
Local symbol table
Working area
14-31
After a program editing window in which a sequential function chart can be created is opened, the
Icon Keyboard Function

shortcut
Shift+F1 Adding a step to the top of the object selected.
Shift+F2 Adding a step to the bottom of the object selected

Connecting a transition to the transition selected in
Shift+F3 parallel, and putting the transition at the right side of the
transition selected
Connecting a transition to the transition selected in
Shift+F4 parallel, and putting the transition at the left side of the
transition selected
Connecting a step to the step selected in parallel, and
Shift+F5
putting the step at the right side of the step selected
Connecting a step to the step selected in parallel, and
Shift+F6
putting the step at the left side of the step selected
Creating a simultaneous divergence and a convergence
Shift+F7 of sequence selection at the right side of the step
selected
Creating a simultaneous divergence and a convergence
Shift+F8 of sequence selection at the left side of the step
selected
Creating a divergence of sequence selection and a
Shift+F9 simultaneous convergence at the right side of the
transition selected
Creating a divergence of sequence selection and a
Shift+F10 simultaneous convergence at the left side of the
transition selected
Shift+F11 Inserting a jump point
14-32
Users can edit the sequential function chart by means of the toolbar. They can also edit the
sequential function chart by clicking an object in the working area, and clicking an item on the
context menu. To ensure that the sequential function chart is a complete and legal sequential
function chart, the editing function which can be used varies with the object selected.
14.3.2 Creating and Managing Actions and Transitions

If users want to create an action, they have to unfold the sequential function chart section in the
project management area, select Actions, right-click Actions, and then click Add. Type an action
name in the New Action window, and select a programming language in the New Action window.
14-33
If the users want to create a transition, they have to unfold the sequential function chart section,
selection Transitions, right-click Transitions and then click Add, type a transition name in the New
Transition window, and select a programming language in the New Transition window.
After the users double-click the action or the transition created in the project management area, the
corresponding program editing window will appear. In the window for the transition, there is a
symbol name which is the same as the transition program name.
The action and the transition are edited in much the same way as a general POU is. However, there
are no local symbol tables in the window for the action and the window for the transition. If users
want to declare a local symbol table, they have to declare it in the window for the sequential function
chart. Besides, the actions and the transitions in a sequential function chart share the same local
symbol table.
*. If the transition create is assigned to a transition in the sequential function chart, the window for the transition will
be opened after users double-click the transition in the sequential function chart.
14-34
If the users want to manage the action or the transition created in the project management area,
they can right-click the action or the transition and then click Add. The users have to notice that the
action can not be copied into the Transition section, and the transition can not be copied into the
Action section.
14.3.3 Adding a Step

(1) Select a step in the working area.
14-35
(2) If users want to put a step to the top or the bottom of the step selected, they can click for
the top or for the bottom direction on the toolbar. Or users can also right-click the step
selected and click the suitable option, for the step to be added to the before or after the cursor.
14.3.4 Connecting a Transition in Parallel

(1) Select a transition in the working area.
(2) If users want to put a transition at the right/left side of the transition selected, they can click
on the toolbar for the right direction or for the left direction. Or users can also
right-click the transition selected and click the suitable option, for the transition to be branched
14-36
to the right or left direction.
14.3.5 Connecting a Step in Parallel

(1) Select a step in the working area. (The topmost step in the working area can not be connected
to another step in parallel.)
(2) If users want to put a step at the right/left side of the step selected, they can click on the
toolbar for the right direction or for the left direction. Or users can also right-click the
simultaneous step selected and click the suitable option, for the simultaneous step to be added
14-37
to the right or left direction.
14.3.6 Step Structure - Simultaneous Divergence & Select

Convergence
(1) Select a step in the working area. The step selected can not be the topmost step in the
(2) If users want to create a simultaneous divergence and a convergence of sequence selection at
the right/left side of the step selected, click on the toolbar for the right direction or
for the left direction. Or users can also right-click the step selected and click the suitable option,
for the step and a transition to be added to the right or left direction.
14-38
14.3.7 Step Structure – Select Divergence & Simultaneous

Convergence
(1) Select a transition in the working area. The transition selected can not be the bottommost
transition in the sequential function chart.
(2) If users want to create a divergence of sequence selection and a simultaneous convergence at
the right/left side of the step selected, click on the toolbar for the right direction or
for the left direction. Or users can also right-click the step selected and click the suitable option,
for the transition and a step to be added to the right or left direction.
14-39
14.3.8 Inserting a Jump Point

(1) Select the bottommost step or the bottommost transition on a divergent path in the working
area.
(2) After users click on the toolbar, a jump point will be inserted. The users can also insert a
jump point by right-clicking the step or the transition selected and click Jump to a Step.
14-40
14.3.9 Assign Steps and the Transitions

After the editing of a sequential function chart is complete, users must assign symbols to the steps
and the transitions in the sequential function chart. Click a step or a transition first. After a yellow
frame appears, users can type partial step name to see a dropdown list and then click to select the
step or the transition. Click the button at the right side of the box which appears, and select an item
created.
The users can also assign a symbol to a step or a transition by means of the keyboard. They can
move the yellow frame by pressing the up/down key on the keyboard. After the users select a step
or a transition, they can press Enter on the keyboard. The users can type characters in the box
which appears and a drop-down list will appear. The users can select a symbol on the drop-down list
by the up/down key on the keyboard. After the editing of the box is complete, the users can press
Enter on the keyboard to jump to the next box. If the users want to end the editing, they can press
Esc on the keyboard. Besides, if the step name the users type in the box for a step is symbol which
is not declared, the Add Symbol window will appear after the users press Enter on the keyboard.
However, if the transition name the users type in the box for a transition is a symbol which is not
declared, the Add Symbol will not appear.
14-41
*.Transitions can be assigned as the element BOOL for the structure variable. Please refer to chapter 8, for more
information about structure.
*. Users can decide whether to allow the system to open the Add Symbol window automatically or not. Please refer
to section 2.3.1 for more information about the setting.
14.3.10 Specifying an Initial Step

Users can define a step in a sequential function chart in an AH/AS series CPU module as the initial
step in the sequential function chart whereas they can not define a step in a sequential function
chart in a DVP series PLC as the initial step in the sequential function chart. If users want to define a
step in a sequential function chart as the initial step in the sequential function chart, they have to
select the step in the working area, right-click the step, and click Set Initial on the context menu.
*. Please refer to section 14.2.7 for more information about activating the steps in a DVP series PLC.
14.3.11 Assigning Actions / Fold the Action Table

(1) Select the step to which an action will be assigned, right-click the step, and click Action
Settings… on the context menu to open the Action Settings window. If the step is not
declared, the system will not allow the assignment of an action to the step.
14-42
(2) Select an action in an Associate Action drop-down list cell in the Action Settings window.
(3) After an action is selected, users have to select a qualifier in the Qualify drop-down list cell for
the action. If the qualifier selected is related to time, the users have to type a time interval in
the Time (sec) cell for the qualifier. A second is a measurement unit of a time interval. Besides,
the users can only type an integer. (The users can not qualify the actions in the program in a
DVP series PLC.)
(4) If the users want to make comments on the step, they can type the comments in the box at the
lower part of the window.
(5) After the users right-click an item on the list, they can click Add, Insert, Delete, or Select All on
the context menu. When there are more than one action that needed to be selected, users can
hold the Control button on the keyboard and simultaneously use the mouse to click and select
the actions. Users can also hold the Shift button on the keyboard and simultaneously use the
mouse to click the first action needed and the last action needed to set the selection range.
Item Function
Add Adding a row to the bottom of the cell selected.
Insert Inserting a row above the cell selected
Delete Deleting the row selected
Select All Selecting all the items
14-43
(6) After the assignment of actions is complete, users can click OK. A list of the actions will appear
at the right side of the step.
Additional remark
ISPSoft has a new button for quickly adding and set up actions. Users can click the button in the
STEP to open a New Action window to add and set up actions. Once the creation is done, click the
OK button to have the action added to the step you have selected.
Users can use the icon to fold the Action table to save some space.
14-44
14.4 Sequential Function Chart Examples

14.4.1 Example Descriptions
The example is about the rotation of two plates. The figure below is a flow chart. The actual
equipment is also diagramed below.
The inlet is at the right side of the platform, and the outlet is at the left side of the platform. After a
plate enters the inlet, and the plate in the outlet makes its exit from the outlet, the rotator in the
middle of the platform will rotate 180 degrees. After the rotator rotates, the plate which entered the
inlet will be in the outlet, and the clamp from which the plate made its exit will receive another plate.
During the whole process, a plate enters the inlet independently, and the plate in the outlet makes its
exit from the outlet independently. However, the rotator does not rotate independently.
When the system begins to operate, the cylinders under the clamps open the clamps. After the
clamps are opened, the system will send readiness signals. After the readiness signals are sent, a
plate will enter the inlet, and the plate in the outlet will make its exit from the outlet.
After a plate enters the inlet, and the plate in the outlet makes its exit from the outlet, the system will
receive completion signals, the corresponding readiness signals will be set to OFF, and the clamps
will be closed. After the system makes sure that the clamps are closed, the system will send a
trigger signal. After the rotator rotates 180 degrees, and the system receives a completion signal,
the next cycle will begin.
14-45
14.4.2 Planning Hardware

In this example, the AH5x0 series AHCPU530-EN, the digital I/O module AH16AP11R-5A, and the
four-slot main backplane AHBP04M1-5A are used. The table below is an I/O allocation table.
14-46
Type ID Description
Digital input X0.0 Completion signal
Digital input X0.3 (Inlet) Cylinder─Opening sensor
Digital input X0.4 (Inlet) Cylinder─Closing sensor
Digital input X0.5 (Outlet) Cylinder─Opening Sensor
Digital input X0.6 (Outlet) Cylinder─Closing Sensor
Digital output Y0.0 Readiness signal
Digital output Y0.1 Readiness signal
Digital output Y0.2 Trigger signal
Digital output Y0.3 (Inlet) Clamp
Digital output Y0.4 (Outlet) Clamp

(1) The procedure for initializing the system is to reset the trigger signal and the readiness signals
to OFF until the condition for the operation of the system is met. In this example, when the
operation flag is ON, and the error flag is OFF, the condition for the operation of the system is
met.
(2) Once the system begins to operate, the cylinders under the clamps will open the clamps (Y0.3
and Y0.4), and the system will make sure that the opening sensors (X0.3 and X0.5) are ON.
(3) After the system makes sure that the clamps are opened, the system will send readiness
signals (Y0.0 and Y0.1) to inform the work stations connecting to the system.
(4) After a plate enters the inlet, the system will receive a completion signal (X0.0), and delay the
closing of the clamp in the inlet (Y0.3) for one second.
(5) After the plate in the outlet makes its exit from the outlet, the system will receive a completion
signal (X0.1), and delay the closing of the clamp in the outlet (Y0.4) for one second.
(6) After the system makes sure that the closing sensors (X0.4 and X0.6) are ON, the system will
send a trigger signal (Y0.2). After the rotator rotates 180 degrees, the system will receive a
completion signal (X0.2), and the procedure for initializing the system is carried out again.
14.4.4 Creating a Program

Start ISPSoft, and then create a new project.
The hardware configuration in this example is the same as the hardware configuration in chapter 4.
Please refer to chapter 4, and complete the hardware configuration.
14-47
14-48
Create a POU of the program type in the project management area. The programming language
used to create the POU of the program type is a structured text.
Create the flags, the digital input, and the digital outputs in the global symbol table.
14-49
Declare the steps shown below in the local symbol table in the POU of the program type.
Base on the sequential function chart shown below, use the first step by default for initial step.
Create a transition called Go and a transition called All_Done under the Transitions section in the
project management area.
14-50
After a transition called Go and a transition called All_Done are created under the Transitions
section in the project management area, users have to write the programs shown below.
Create the actions which are shown below under the Actions section in the project management
area.
14-51
After the actions are created under the Actions section in the project management area, the users
have to write the programs shown below.
After the users write the action programs and the transition programs, they have to assign symbols
to the transitions in the sequential function chart. All the symbols assigned to the transitions in the
sequential function chart are symbols in the global symbol except GO and All_Done.
14-52
14-53
The users have to assign the actions to the steps in the sequential function chart, and assign
qualifiers to the actions.
The writing of the program has been completed so far. The users can try to compile the program,
download the parameters and the program to the CPU module, and test the program by themselves.
14-54
Chapter 15 Continuous Function Charts
Table of Contents
15.1 Continuous Function Charts (CFC) ..................................................... 15-2
15.1.1 About Continuous Function Charts ................................................ 15-2
15.1.2 Things to Note When Using CFC ................................................... 15-2
15.1.3 CFC Programming in ISPSoft ....................................................... 15-2
15.1.4 CFC Editing Toolbar .................................................................... 15-3
15.1.5 Shortcuts for CFC Programing ...................................................... 15-4
15.2 Creating a CFC in ISPSoft .................................................................. 15-5
15.2.1 Selecting Objects ....................................................................... 15-5
15.2.2 Input/Output Nodes and Logic Gates ............................................ 15-5
15.2.2.1 Inserting Nodes or Gates .................................................... 15-6
15.2.2.2 Add/Delete a Pin ................................................................ 15-7
15.2.3 Changing a Pin Type ................................................................... 15-8
15.2.4 Connecting objects and Canceling Connections .............................. 15-9
15.2.5 Instructions and Function Blocks .................................................. 15-9
15.2.5.1 Inserting an Instruction ..................................................... 15-11
15.2.5.2 Inserting a Function Block .................................................. 15-12
15.2.6 Deleting objects ........................................................................ 15-13
15.2.7 Editing Devices or Symbols ........................................................ 15-15
15.2.8 Activating/Inactivating an Object ................................................ 15-16
15.2.9 Inserting a Comment ................................................................. 15-16
15.2.10 Changing the Order in Which Objects are Executed ....................... 15-18
15.2.11 Displaying/Hiding Information..................................................... 15-19
15-1
15.1 Continuous Function Charts (CFC)

15.1.1 About Continuous Function Charts
Continuous Function Chart (CFC) is a PLC programming language in extension to the IEC 61131-3
standard. CFC is often used in the area of motion control. The most significant feature is its
graphical programming language basing on the function block diagram language. Comparing to
other PLC programming languages, CFC can provide a more logical relation between input and
output and a more clear execution order of the program. The operation principle of CFC will not be
covered in this chapter; this chapter will only focus on the creation and operation of CFC in ISPSoft.
15.1.2 Things to Note When Using CFC

 It supports keyboards but does not support the instructions of LD, LDI, LDP, and LDF. Users can
type the register or the name of the variable, and the system will add input node in the back.
 Inputted data is not case-sensitive, any uppercase or lowercase character can be entered. For
example, OUT, Out and out are all correct. Common positional numeral systems:
 Decimal range: 2345
 Hexadecimal range: 16#5BA0
 Floating point number: 4.123
*. The K and H notations are supported.
 There is no limit on the number of the loops for CFC to edit. But the size of a edited programs
should not be larger than the memory size.
The input pin of nodes, logic gates, instructions, and function blocks can only be from one origin.
But the targets of the output pin can be multiple.
15.1.3 CFC Programming in ISPSoft

When creating a POU, select Continuous Function Chart (CFC) in the Language selection section
and then users can see the created program in the project management area. Refer to section 5.4.1
or more information.
Below is the editing area for CFC in the ISPSoft. The upper section is for Local Symbols to be
declared. And the lower section is for CFC program editing, including the input/export nodes and
15-2
Ch a pt er 1 5 C o nt i nu o us F u nc t i on C h ar ts
logic gate. The number on the upper right corner of the object is the execution order.
Local symbol table
Execution order
Input node Output node
Logic gate
Program editing area
15.1.4 CFC Editing Toolbar
After a program editing window in which a CFC diagram can be created is opened, the
Icon Keyboard Shortcut Function
Shift + F9 Inserting an input node
Shift + F3 Inserting an output node
Shift + F10 Comment
Shift + F11 OUT gate
Shift + F1 Inserting an AND block
Shift + F2 Inserting an OR block
Shift + F12 Enable/Disable function blocks or the EN pin of

the instructions
Shift + F4 Adding an input node to the AND/OR block
Shift + F5 Deleting the input node from the AND/OR block
Shift + F6 Inserting inverse logic
Shift + F7 Setting/Resetting the input
Shift + F8 The input is rising edge-triggered/falling

edge-triggered.
15-3
Icon Keyboard Shortcut Function
Auto arrange
None All the objects will be sorted according to the data
flow in an order of top-to-bottom and left-to-right.
None Auto resize to fit the screen to see all the objects
15.1.5 Shortcuts for CFC Programing

Right-click in the editing area, users will see the following shortcuts. The functions are described
below.
Item Description
It erases the last editing done to the document reverting it to
Undo
an older state.
Redo It reverses the undo.
Cut Cut the selected object.
Copy Copy the selected object.
Paste Paste the lately cut/copied object to the editing position.
Delete Delete the selected object.
Select All Select all objects in the editing area.
Comment Insert a comment at the cursor position.
Set up the execution order of the logic gates, instructions and
function blocks. Data flow: all objects will be run according to the
Execution Order
original set order. Topology: all the objects will be sorted and
executed in an order of top-to-bottom and left-to-right.
Activate/Inactivate Activate/inactivate the selected object
EN Enable/Disable function blocks or the EN pin of the instructions
Negate Inserting inverse logic
Rising/Falling The input is rising edge-triggered/falling edge-triggered.
Set/Reset Setting/Resetting the input
15-4
15.2 Creating a CFC in ISPSoft

Objects in the CFC can be selected by clicking the mouse. After selected, users can start to edit,
copy, paste and so on.
 Select an object
Move the cursor to the object you’d like to select and click the mouse or use the directional
buttons on the keyboard to select objects. The selected object will be in orange; as for
unselected objects, they are in white as the image shown below.
 Select multiple objects

Click and drag the mouse to select the area of objects you’d like to select.
15.2.2 Input/Output Nodes and Logic Gates

Nodes and logic gates are factors to construct a CFC. Input nodes can be the variable status of the
input origin or the status of the register. The output nodes are the results from the operation of logic
gates. The following example illustrates the same program in 2 programming languages, the CFC
and LD. Input nodes and output nodes cannot be linked directly; that is why logic gates are needed.
15-5
Use logic gates such as AND gate and OR gate to link the objects to create various complicated
loops, as the following example shown.
15.2.2.1 Inserting Nodes or Gates

There are 2 methods to insert a node, choose one for insertions.
 Method I: use the icons from the toolbar
(1) Click the icon from the toolbar, as the image shown below.
(2) Click the mouse on where you’d like to put the nodes/gates in the editing area, as the image
shown below.
 Method II: use a keyboard

(1) Click the mouse in the editing area and type the name of the instruction. After pressing Enter on
the keyboard or click the OK button on the screen, the instruction will appear. Click where you’d
like to use the instruction and then the instruction creation is done. (The instructions you type
are not case-sensitive. But if the instruction name is wrong, an error message will appear.)
15-6
Instructions can be created via a keyboard:

Instruction Description
OUT Creating an OUT gate
AND Creating an AND gate
OR Creating an OR gate
Name of a register Creating an input nodes for the register
Name of a instruction Creating an instruction block
Name of a function block Creating a function block
15.2.2.2 Add/Delete a Pin

AND and Or gates can be used for adding and deleting a pin, suitable for programs with multiple
conditions.
(1) Click to select the logic gate as the image shown below.
(2) Click the icon to add an input node to the AND/OR gates as the image shown below.
(3) Then there will be a pin added to the logic gate as the image shown below.
(4) If a pin needs to be added before a specific pin, click to select the pin you’d like to add a new pin
before it and click the icon . A newly added pin will appear right before the pin you have
15-7
selected as the image shown below.
(5) Click the icon to delete an input node from the AND/OR gates. Users can also click and
select a specific pin and click the icon to delete as the image shown below.
15.2.3 Changing a Pin Type

Users can change a pin type in a way described below, and design a complex continuous function
chart.
(1) For negating, users can select the pin of a node, a pin of a logic gate, a pin of a function block,
or a pin of an instruction, and then click on the toolbar or on the context menu which will
appear after the users right-click the pin, the state of the pin will be negated. If users select a pin
whose state is negated, and then click , the state of the pin will not be negated.
15-8
(2) For setting a pin, users can select the pin of an output node, and then click on the toolbar or
on the context menu which will appear after the users right-click the pin, the pin will be set. For
resetting a pin, if users select a pin which is set, and then click , the pin will be reset. If users
select a pin which is reset, and then click , the pin will not be reset.
(3) For rising, users can select a pin of a logic gate, a pin of a function block, or a pin of an
instruction, and then click on the toolbar or on the context menu which will appear after the
users right-click the pin, the pin will be rising-edge triggered. For falling, when users select a pin
which is rising edge-triggered, and then click , the pin will be falling edge-triggered. If the
users select a pin which is falling edge-triggered, and then click , the pin will not be falling
edge-triggered.
15.2.4 Connecting objects and Canceling Connections

When users click a pin of an object, and hold down the left mouse button, the target pins to which
the pin can be connected are indicated by gray. When the users drag the mouse cursor to a target
pin of an object, an arrow appears. After users release the left mouse button, the two pins will be
connected. If users want to change the connection or cancel the connection, they can drag the line
to a new target pin or to the blank.
15.2.5 Instructions and Function Blocks

An instruction name and operands are shown in a block. The orders in which the instructions in a
continuous function chart are executed are indicated by the numbers in the right corners of the
blocks representing the instructions. An instruction is executed only when the logic state connected
to the En pin of the block representing the instruction is ON.
Instruction name
Execution order
En pin
Operand
A function block in a continuous function chart is shown below. It is executed only when the logic
15-9
state connected to the En pin is ON. Besides, the text on the top of the function block is the name
given to the function block, i.e. a function block instance. Please refer to chapter 7 for more
information about function blocks.
Function block instance
Function block definition
If users need to enable an instruction and a function block by a condition, they can connect the input
node of the condition to the En pin of the block representing the instruction and the En pin of the
function block. When the input node is ON, the instruction and the function block is executed in
order. From the image shown below, enable_1 controls the instruction and the function block.
If an instruction or a function block does not need to be controlled by a condition, users can select
the block representing the instruction or the function block, and then click on the toolbar or on
the context menu which will appear after the users right-click the block representing the instruction
or the function block. After the En pin of a block representing the instruction or the En pin of a
function block is disabled, the instruction or the function block will be executed if it is the instruction’s
turn or the function block’s turn to be executed. If users select an instruction or a function block
whose En pin is disabled, and then click , the En pin of the instruction or the En pin of the
function block will be enabled.
15-10
15.2.5.1 Inserting an Instruction

There are two methods to insert an instruction.
 Method 1: Drag the instruction

(1) Open the API to seek for the instruction you’d like to use, as the image shown below.
(2) Click on the instruction you’d like to add and drag it to where you’d like to add in the editing area.
And then the instruction is added.
1 5 - 11
 Method 2: Keyboard
Type an instruction in the Instruction box, and press Enter on the keyboard, or click OK. If users
move the mouse cursor and click where you’d like to add the instruction in the program editing area,
the instruction will be inserted. (The instruction that users type in is not case-insensitive. If the users
type an incorrect applied instruction, or an incorrect device name, an error message will appear after
they click OK.), as the image shown below.
15.2.5.2 Inserting a Function Block

There are two methods of inserting a function block.
 Method 1: Dragging a function block definition
Click on the function block definition you’d like to add and drag it to where you’d like to add in the
editing area. And then the funciton block is added.
15-12
 Method 2: Keyboard
Type an instruction in the function block definition box, and press Enter on the keyboard, or click
OK. If users move the mouse cursor and click where you’d like to add the function block, the
function block will be inserted. (The function block that users type in is not case-insensitive. If the
users type an incorrect function block, or an incorrect device name, an error message will appear
after they click OK.), as the image shown below.
15.2.6 Deleting objects

If users want to delete a single object or several objects in a continuous function chart, they can use
one of the methods below.
(1) The users have to click an object, and click Delete on the Edit menu, or on the standard
toolbar, as the image shown below.
15-13
(2) The users have to click to select the object and right-click on the object, and then click Delete on
the context menu which appears
(3) The users have to click an object, and press Delete on the keyboard, as the image shown
below.
15-14
15.2.7 Editing Devices or Symbols

If users want to edit a node, they have to double-click the node, type a device name, and click the
blank in the program editing area or press Enter on the keyboard.
If the users type a symbol in a node, the Add Symbol window will appear after they press Enter on
the keyboard. After the users set a symbol and click OK in the Add symbol window, they will finish
declaring the symbol, as the image shown below. Please refer to chapter 6 for more information
about symbols.
15-15
15.2.8 Activating/Inactivating an Object

If an object in a continuous function chart inactivated, the compiling of the continuous function chart
will skip the object. Users can temporarily inactivate some parts of a program.
(1) The users have to right-click on an object, as the image shown below.
(2) After the users click Activate/Inactivate on the context menu which appears, the object will be
in a dark color, as the image shown below.
(3) If the users want to activate the object, they have to right-click the object, and click
Activate/Inactivate on the context menu which appears.
15.2.9 Inserting a Comment

Users can insert comments in a continuous function chart. There are two methods of inserting a
comment.
 Method 1: Inserting a comment in any position
(1) The users have to click Comment on the toolbar, as the image shown below.
(2) After the users click a position in the program editing area, an object will be inserted, as the
image shown below.
15-16
(3) After the users double-click the object inserted, a box will appear. The users can type a
comment in the box. If the users want to start a new line of text at a specific point, they can
press Shift+Enter on the keyboard.
(4) After the users type a comment, they have to click the blank in the program editing window, or
press Enter on the keyboard. This type of comment is independent of the other types of objects
in the program editing area. It does not vary with the deletion or the movement of another type
of object.
 Method 2: Inserting a comment binding with an object

(1) The users have to click the object in which a comment will be inserted, as the image shown
below.
15-17
(2) After the users click Comment on the toolbar, the comment binding with the object will appear.
The users can edit the comment.
(3) The position of the comment varies with the movement of the object. When the users move the
object, the comment moves, as the image shown below.
15.2.10 Changing the Order in Which Objects are Executed

The numbers in the upper right corners of the objects in a continuous function chart indicate the
order in which the objects are executed. If users want to change the number in the upper right
15-18
corner of an object, they can right-click the object, point to Execution Order on the context menu
which appears, and click Up, Down, Front, Back, Insert After, Data Flow, or Topology. If Data
Flow is clicked, the order in which the objects in a continuous function chart are executed will be
determined by the data flow of the objects. If Topology is clicked, the order in which the objects in a
continuous function chart are executed will be determined by the relative positions of the objects.
15.2.11 Displaying/Hiding Information

If users move the mouse cursor to a device or a symbol after they click on the toolbar, the
information about the device or the symbol will appear. The information related to a device or a
symbol includes a device address and a comment
15-19
MEMO
15-20
Chapter 16 Auxiliary Editing Tools
Table of Contents
16.1 ISPSoft Editing Tools and Auxiliary Functions .............................. 16-2
16.1.1 Modify PLC Types...................................................................... 16-2
16.1.2 Change DVP Series Modules to AS Series Modules ........................ 16-2
16.1.3 Download/Upload a Project ....................................................... 16-14
16.1.4 Find/Replace in LD/FBD/ CFC .................................................... 16-16
16.1.5 Find/Replace in IL/ST ............................................................... 16-18
16.1.6 Find/Replace in SFC ................................................................. 16-20
16.1.7 Find Function in Symbol Table ................................................... 16-22
16.1.8 Find/Replace in Project ............................................................. 16-23
16.1.9 Print Function .......................................................................... 16-24
16.2 Devices and Registers ................................................................ 16-27
16.2.1 Device Comment List for a DVP Series PLC ................................. 16-27
16.2.2 AH/AS Series Device Comment List ............................................ 16-30
16.2.3 Using Device Report ................................................................. 16-36
16.2.4 Edit Register Memory ............................................................... 16-39
16.2.5 Edit Bit Memory ....................................................................... 16-45
16.2.6 Edit DVP Series File Register ..................................................... 16-50
16.3 Step Positioning ......................................................................... 16-57
16.3.1 Using Step Positioning .............................................................. 16-57
16.4 Program Comparison .................................................................. 16-57
16.4.1 Introduction to Program Comparison .......................................... 16-57
16.4.2 Compare with File .................................................................... 16-58
16.4.3 Compare with PLC ................................................................... 16-60
16.1 ISPSoft Editing Tools and Auxiliary Functions

16.1.1 Modify PLC Types
In ISPSoft, users can change PLC types, most series offers two-way but some series only offer
one-way modification. For example, DVP Series can change to AS200/AS300 Series, but not vice
versa; AH5xo Series can change to AH560 Series but not vice versa. Please refer to the following
table.
Purpose DVPx
AS200 AS300 AH5x0 AH5x1 AH560 AHxxEMC DVP
Source xMC
Support
AS200 V V
ES3
Support
AS300 V V
ES3
AH5x0 V V V V
AH5x1 V V V
AH560 V V V
AHxxEMC V
DVP V V V（*1）
DVPxxMC V
*1. DVP-ES3 Series cannot change other DVP Series, but other DVP Series can change to DVP-ES3 Series.
The modified PLC types will change the content of current project. Thus, the project should be
saved first before modify the PLC. Since PLC functions, device range or support command can vary
before or after the modification, please make sure the original program, parameter setting, hardware
and network planning is functioning properly.
If users want to change the PLC type, they can click Change PLC Type… on the Tools menu,
select a PLC type in the Change PLC Type window, and click OK.
16.1.2 Change DVP Series Modules to AS Series Modules

For the change of a DVP series module to an AS series module, user can click Tools tab and then
Change PLC Type to see a change PLC Type window. Select the PLC type you’d like to change
from the drop-down list and then click the exchange icon to complete the conversion I/O
mapping change.
16-2
Ch a pt er 1 6 Aux i l i ar y E d it i ng Too ls
Input the start/end point of the DVP series module to be changed with the AS series module and
click save . After that users can see the start/end points of the DVP series and AS series in the
list of sections to be converted. The SRC start point and end point correspond to the start and end
point of the input points X and Y of a DVP series module. DEST start and end points correspond to
the input points X and Y of an AS series module. Please note if the I/O conversion range of a DVP
series module and an AS series module cannot be matched, a warning will appear; Double click the
mouse on the selected box(See below), the save or delete icon will appear for users to directly
change the value in the box or select it from the drop-down menu.
16-3
When start/end points are set, click save to complete the setting. Then, Sections to be converted
and Sections not to be converted will appear.
To add a new conversion, users can click on the sections to be converted list and then input new
start/end points and then click Plus after that a new converison will be added.
16-4
To delete a conversion item from the list, users can double click to select the item to be deleted on
the list and then click the delete icon after that the selected item will be deleted.
After the conversion mapping table is set, users can close the window. A Change PLC Type window
will then appear. Click OK to confirm the change and a warning window stating “Warning! This
operation may cause loss of data or task.” will appear. (If users want to keep the original file, click
“No” to cancel the conversion, then use Save As to save the file for conversion). Click Yes to double
confirm the change for conversion.
16-5
After the conversion is done, a Transferring Report will show up.
Click and drag the header of the Transferring Report to move the window. Double click the header to
have it shown the Overview part only and double click the header again to have a complete window
back.
16-6
Show the Overview
part only.
On the left side of the Transferring Report, there is an overview of the conversion, including tasks,
programs, function blocks, symbols and total. A pie chart will show the corresponding result of the
selected item in the middle of the transferring report. Green indicates the percentage of the finished
part, yellow shows the percentage of the warning part, and red represents the percentage of the
error part. When the 3D option is selected, the pie chart will be shown in 3D.
On the right side of the transferring report, a message section shows the description of the selected
item from the overview section. Users can click any number shown in the overview to see the
detailed descriptions of the selected item.
16-7
Shows the description
of selected item
(Tasks: Finished)
Shows the description
of selected item
(Programs: Warning)
On the right side of the transferring report, a suggestion section targeting on “warning” or “error”
messages in the selected item will be shown in the section. After transferring, users can use the
corresponding index files to edit the instructions.
16-8
Before
After
After the conversion is done, if there is any change in the Task Manager, suggestions will be shown
in the suggestion section. Users can click the detailed message in the message section to open the
Task Manager to edit the setting.
16-9
If the special M or special D of the DVP series can correspond to the ones in AS series, the system
will generate the relays and registers automatically during the conversion. If not, users can find
suggestions in the suggestion section after the conversion. Suggestion section is used for providing
suggestions for users when warnings or errors occur.
16-10
Before conversion
After conversion
When executing program conversion, if both DVP series and AS series support Delta Function
Blocks then it will automatically convert to support once execution is complete; after conversion,
however, when AS series does not have any corresponding Delta Function Blocks, an error cross
mark appears in the function block (see below).
1 6 - 11
Before conversion
After conversion
If the symbols used in the DVP series and the symbols, instructions names, device names used in
AS series are contradicted, after the conversion, errors will occur.
16-12
Before conversion
After conversion
The programming languages such as LD and SFC are supported by the conversion of DVP series
and AS series. Thus these two programming languages can be used without problem during
conversion. When any unsupported programming language is used, the unsupported part will be
deleted, after the conversion is done. For instance, a STEP variable is declared in DVP series but
this variable will be deleted after the conversion, since AS series does not support this variable. If Kn
is used in devices for DVP series, after the conversion, an error will occur, since AS series does not
support Kn.
Unsupported
parts will be
deleted.
16-13
Before conversion
Afore conversion
16.1.3 Download/Upload a Project

Users can download/upload not only the program in a project, but also the functions or the
parameters in the project.
If users want to download the project, they can click the PLC menu, point to Transfer, and click
Download. Or click on the toolbar. After that users will see a PC=>PLC (Download) window,
select the items you’d like to download and then click Transfer.
16-14
If users want to download the project, they can click the PLC menu, point to Transfer, and click
Upload. Or click on the toolbar. After that users will see a PC=>PLC (Upload) window, select
the items you’d like to upload and then click Transfer.
The items in the upload and download windows vary according to different series. The descriptions
of the items in the upload/download window are as follows.
Transmit Item Description AH/AS DVP DVPxxMC

Upload Download Upload Download Upload Download
Program
Execution code compiled PLC V V V V V V
execution code
Users create
Program
project program V V V V V V
Comments for
Project Comment
projects V V V V V V
POU and FB
POU Comment
comments V V V V V V
POU and FB
program
Segment Comment
Segment V V V V V V
Comment
Comments
regarding global
Symbol Comment
and local V V V V V V
symbols
Synchronize
project
Synchronize project
and PLC passwords
password to V V V
PLC host
password
Setting task
Task Parameter
parameters V V
Setting value for Do Not
Retention Range
retention range Support
(power failure) ES3
(power failure)
Retention
Retention Symbol symbol for
Table (power failure) power failure V V
listed in the table
Setting
CANopen Parameter CANopen V V
Builder Value
Write the
Symbol Initial Value
symbol initial V V
16-15
Transmit Item Description AH/AS DVP DVPxxMC

Upload Download Upload Download Upload Download
value in the
corresponding
hosts memory
Write in the
Calendar Date/Time V V V
settings in PLC
Content of
Position planning Support Support
position planning Support AS Support AS
Table ES3 ES3
table
Axis parameter Support Support
Axis Parameter
content AHxxEMC AHxxEMC V V
Ethernet/IP
Ethernet/IP Symbol Support
symbol table Support AS
ES3
Table
content
Support AS Support AS Support
E-CAM E-CAM content
&AHxxEMC &AHxxEMC ES3 V V
16.1.4 Find/Replace in LD/FBD/ CFC

The Find/Replace function that ISPSoft provides varies with the program editing window. This
section aims at describing the functions used in the window in which a ladder diagram / function
block diagram / continuous function chart can be created.
Users can open a program editing window, and click the position in the working area at which they
want to start searching. (For searching in the CFC, click anywhere blank.) If the users click the local
symbol table in the program editing window, the local symbol table will be searched. Please refer to
section 16.1.7 for more information about using the Find function in a symbol table.
In the editing environment in which a ladder diagram / function block diagram / continuous function
chart can be created, the Find item, and the Replace item are on the Edit menu. The icons
corresponding to these items are on the toolbar in the editing environment. The same window is
opened, whether users click Find or Replace. The page displayed in the window opened varies with
the item clicked. There are three tabs in the window opened.
16-16
The Find and the Replace page are shown below. Type the object which will be searched for, and
select search conditions. The users can do a search on the object typed in the Find box by clicking
Find Next (F3) or pressing F3 on the keyboard. The users can still do a search on the object typed
in the Find box by means of pressing F3 on the keyboard even when the Find/Replace/Goto
window is closed. When not selecting the scope, the search will only focus on the current editing.
When the Project is selected in the Scope section, the results will be shown.
Search
Description
condition
Users can type the object which will be searched for, or select an object which
Find
has been searched for after they click in the box.
Direction Users can search down or search up.
Match Case: ISPSoft searches only for words that match the case of the word
that users type in the Find box.
Whole Words: Whole Words instructs ISPSoft to find complete words only, and
Options not to find words that only contain what users type. If the option
is selected, users can further select the “Copy Comments to
Replace Devices (Whole Words)” to copy the source device
comments to the target device comments.
Current Network: The search starts at the position selected.
Origin Entire Scope: The search starts at the beginning of the program or the end of
the program. This is the only option for CFC.
Scope Users can select ranges which will be searched.
16-17
The users can type a replacement object in the Replace with box, or select a replacement object
which has been typed after they click in the box. If the users click Replace, an occurrence of
the object typed in the Find box will be replaced by the replacement object. If users click Replace
All, all the occurrences of the object typed in the Find box will be replaced.
If the users want to go to a specific position in the LD and FBD program, they can click the Goto tab
in the Find/Replace/Goto window, select Network Label or Bookmark in the Location Type
drop-down list box, select an item in the Index drop-down list box, and click Goto (GOto function is
not available for CFC).
16.1.5 Find/Replace in IL/ST

Users can only find and replace text on an instruction list/in a structured text. The functions
described in this section are used in the present program editing window. Users can open a program
editing window, and click the position in the working area at which they want to start searching. If the
users click the local symbol table in the program editing window, the local symbol table will be
searched. Please refer to section 16.1.7 for more information about using the Find function in a
symbol table.
After the users click Find on the Edit menu, or on the toolbar, the Search/Replace Text
window will appear.
16-18
After the users click Replace on the Edit menu, or on the toolbar, the Search/Replace Text
window will appear.
The Find page and the Replace page are shown below. Type the object which will be searched for,
and select search conditions. If the users want to use the Replace function, they have to type a
replacement object in the Replace with box. The users can do a search on the object typed in the
Search for box by clicking Find Next (F3) or pressing F3 on the keyboard. The users can still do a
search on the object typed in the Search for box by means of pressing F3 on the keyboard even if
the Find/Replace/Goto window is closed.
Search condition Description

Users can type the object which will be searched for, or select an object
Search for
which has been searched for after they click in the box.
ISPSoft searches only for words that match the case of the word that users
Case sensitivity
type in the Search for box.
Whole words only instructs ISPSoft to find complete words only, and not
Whole words only
to find words that only contain what users type.
The search starts at the text cursor. (If this checkbox is not selected, the
Search from caret
system will search the whole program.)
The search starts at the text selected. (If this checkbox is not selected, the
Selected text only
system will search the whole program.)
Regular expression After this checkbox is selected, regular expressions can be used.
* A regular expression is a type of standard syntax. For example, “*” is a wildcard. Please refer to related technical
documents for more information.
If the users use the Replace function, the Confirm replace window will appear after an object
meeting the search conditions selected is found.
16-19
Button Function
The object found is replaced by the replacement object, and the system searches
Yes
for the next occurrence of the object typed in the Search for box.
The object found is not replaced by the replacement object, and the system
No
searches for the next occurrence of the object typed in the Search for box.
Cancel The search is canceled, and the Confirm replace window is closed,
All the objects meeting the search conditions selected are replaced by the
Yes to all
replacement object.
16.1.6 Find/Replace in SFC

Users can only use the Find function and the Replace function in a sequential function chart (SFC).
Users can open a program editing window, and click the position in the working area at which they
want to start searching. If the users click the local symbol table in the program editing window, the
local symbol table will be searched. Please refer to section 16.1.7 for more information about using
the Find function in a symbol table.
In the editing environment in which a sequential function chart can be created, the Find item and the
Replace item are on the Edit menu. The icons corresponding to these items are on the toolbar in
the editing environment. The same window is opened, whether users click Find or Replace. The
page displayed in the window opened varies with the item clicked. There are two tabs in the window
opened.
16-20
The Find page and the Replace page are shown below. Type the object which will be searched for,
and select search conditions. The users can do a search on the object typed in the Find box by
clicking Find Next (F3) or pressing F3 on the keyboard. The users can still do a search on the object
typed in the Find box by means of pressing F3 on the keyboard even if the Find/Replace/Goto
window is closed. When not selecting the scope, the search will only focus on the Steps and
Transitions in the SFC. As for the programs in the Actions and Transitions, users will have to open
the window and refer to the section 16.1.3 and 16.1.4 to edit the program. When the Project is
selected in the Scope section, the results will be shown.

Find
Match Case: ISPSoft searches only for words that match the case of the
word that users type in the Find box.
Whole Words: Whole Words instructs ISPSoft to find complete words
Options only, and not to find words that only contain what users
type. If the option is selected, users can further select the
“Copy Comments to Replace Devices (Whole Words)” to
copy the source device comments to the target device
comments.
Scope Users can select ranges which will be searched.
16-21
The users can type a replacement object in the Replace with box, or select a replacement object
which has been typed after they click in the box. If the users click Replace, an occurrence of
the object typed in the Find box will be replaced by the replacement object. If users click Replace
All, all the occurrences of the object typed in the Find box will be replaced.
16.1.7 Find Function in Symbol Table

Users can only use the Find function in a local symbol table/global symbol table. They can not use
the Replace function and the Goto function in a local symbol table/global symbol table. Besides,
only the identifiers in a local symbol table/global symbol table can be searched for. The function
described in this section is used in the present program editing window, and is not used in the whole
project. Users can open an editing window, and click the position in the symbol table at which they
want to start searching. If the users click the working area in a program editing window, working
area will be searched. Please refer to section 16.1.4~section 16.1.6 for more information about
using the Find/Replace function in a working area.
After the users click Find on the Edit menu, or on the toolbar, the Search/Replace/Goto
window will appear.
16-22
The users can do a search on the object typed in the Find box by clicking Find Next (F3) or
pressing F3 on the keyboard. The users can still do a search on the object typed in the Find box by
means of pressing F3 on the keyboard even if the Find/Replace/Goto window is closed.
Find
Match Case: ISPSoft searches only for words that match the case of the
word that users type in the Find box.
Options
Whole Words: Whole Words instructs ISPSoft to find complete words
only, and not to find words that only contain what users type.
16.1.8 Find/Replace in Project

The Find/Replace function is used to search for/replace a device or a symbol in a project. The
global symbol, the local symbol tables in the POUs, and the working areas in the project are
searched. If there is a group of projects, the Find/Replace function is used in the project which is
being edited.
Right-click the Global Symbols/Programs/Function Blocks in the project management area, and
then click Find/Replace in Project on the context menu.
The Find page and the Replace page are shown below. There are two tabs in the Find/Replace in
Project window. Type the object which will be searched for, and select search conditions. If the
users click OK on the Find page, the system will use the Find function. If the users click OK on the
16-23
Replace page, all the occurrences of the object typed in the Search for box will be replaced by the
replacement object. The replacement can not be undone.
After the users use the Find/Replace function, the search results will be displayed in the message
display area at the bottom of the ISPSoft window. If the users double-click a search result, the
system will lead the users to the position of the object corresponding to the search result.
16.1.9 Print Function

ISPSoft provides a printing function.
 Printer Setup
After users click Printer Setup on the File menu, the Print Setup window will be opened. Before
a document is printed, the users can select a printer, and set a print format.
 Project Print
After users click Project Print on the File menu, users can select items which will be printed in
the Project Print window. The items which can be selected are the main programs, the function
blocks, and the global symbols.
16-24
An example of a print result is shown below. The contents which are printed include a local
symbol table. If there are comments in the window whose contents are printed, the comments will
be printed.
 Print
If users want to print the contents of the present window, they can click Print on the File menu or
on the toolbar. The users can set a print range in the Print Setup window. The print result
varies with the contents of the present window. Please refer to the table below for more
information.
16-25
Window All Part

The complete global symbol Users can not print a part of the global
Global symbol table
table is printed. symbol table.
The complete local symbol table and a
Ladder
The complete program and local part of the program are printed. (The
diagram/Function
symbol table are printed. start number and the end number are
block diagram
network numbers.)
The complete local symbol table and a
Instruction The complete program and local part of the program are printed. (The
list/Structured text symbol table are printed. start number and the end number are
network numbers.)
The complete local symbol table
Sequential function and sequential function chart are Users can not print a part of the
chart printed. (The actions and the sequential function chart.
transitions are not printed.)
Continuous function The complete program and local Users can not print a part of the
chart symbol table are printed. continuous function chart.
*.After users open the window for an action/transition, they can print the action/transition.
After the users click Preview in the Print Setup window, the Print Preview window will be
opened. Please refer to appendix C for more information about the print management tool that
ISPSoft provides.
16-26
16.2 Devices and Registers

16.2.1 Device Comment List for a DVP Series PLC
*. Currently, NOT supported by DVPxxMC.
If users want to export the device comment list from a project for a DVP series PLC, they can click
the File menu, point to Export, and click Export Device Comments…. If the users want to import
the device comment list, they can click the File menu, point to Import, and click Import Device
Comments….
If the users want to manage the comments on devices, they can click Device Comment List on the
View menu, or double-click Device Comment List in the project management area. After the users
click Device Comment List on the View menu, or double-click Device Comment List in the project
management area, the system will open the Device Comment List window.
The comments on devices are on a View/Edit page. After the users click a tab which indicates a
device type in the window, the comments on devices are displayed. The mark “*” at the left side of a
device indicates that the device is used in the program. If the users want to make a comment on a
device, they can double-click the Comment cell for the device, and type the comment.
16-27
The devices on which comments are made and all the comments on the devices are on the Used
Device Comment page. After the users double-click the Comment cell for a device, they can edit
the comment on the device.
*1. The comments on devices are separate from the comments on symbols. The comments on devices appear in the
Device Comment List window, while the comments on symbols do not appear in the Device Comment List
window.
*2. Users can edit the default comments on the special relays and the special registers in a project. However, the
new comments are valid only in this project.
After the uses right-click the table in the Device Comment List window, a context menu will appear.
The context menu comprises basic items and special items.
 Jump to…
After the users click Jump to… on the context menu, the Jump to… window will appear. The
users can type a device name in the Device Name box. After the users click OK in the Jump
to… window, they can easily view the device name and the comment on the device on a
View/Edit page.
The device name typed must be matched with the device type clicked, otherwise, the device
name will not be found. If the users click Jump to… on the context menu which appears after
they right-click the Used Device Comment page, the device name typed in the Device Name
box in the Jump to… window must be on the Used Device Comment page.
 Delete Unused Device Comment
16-28
After the users click Delete Unused Device Comment on the context menu, the system will
delete the comments on the devices which are not used in the program.
 Copy with Device Name

If the users click Cut/Copy on the context menu, the items selected in the Device Comment List
window will be cut/copied to the Windows Clipboard. The items cut/copied can be pasted into a
document in Microsoft Excel. If Copy with Device Name on the context menu is clicked before
Cut/Copy on the context menu is clicked, the contents which will be cut/copied will include device
names. Please compare the two Excel tables below.
 Assign Device Comment to Symbol

If symbols are assigned devices, the comments on the devices will be assigned to the symbols
after the users click Assign Device Comment to Symbol on the context menu.
16-29
16.2.2 AH/AS Series Device Comment List

Users can manage the devices in an AH/AS series CPU module. After users click Device Comment
List on the View menu, or double-click Device Comment List in the project management area, the
Device Comment List window will be opened.
There are two tabs at the top of the Device Comment & List window. If the users modify the
program or comments after the window is opened, they have to close the window, compile the new
program, and open the window again to get the latest information.
The View/Edit Device Comment page displays the device names with corresponding comments on
the list. The tabs below the Comment indicate the device types. After the users click All, the devices
on which comments are made are displayed. Besides, the mark “*” at the left side of a device
indicates that the device is used in the program.
16-30
The users can modify the comments on the View/Edit Device Comment page, and add comments
to a View/Edit Device Comment page. If the users want to modify the comment on a device, they
can double-click the comment, and modify the comment in the Input/Modify Device Comment
window. The users can also modify the comment on a device by right-clicking the comment or
clicking Edit on the context menu, and modifying the comment in the Input/Modify Device
Comment window. The users can edit the default comments on the SR devices and the SM devices
in a project. However, the new comments are valid only in this project.
Right-click Add on the selected Device Comment from the Device Comment List window or double
left-click the list and users can modify the comments shown in the Input/Modify Device Comment
window. Users can input a value in the Device Count box to indicate the number of devices and
corresponding comments as the image shown below.
16-31
Users can also input the device location and then the Input/Modify Device Comment window will
appear. Input the comment and the Device Count to complete the setting.
16-32
If the users want to delete the comment on a device on a View/Edit Device Comment page, they
can select the comment, right-click the comment, and click Delete on the context menu. If the users
want to delete a range of comments on a View/Edit Device Comment page, they can select the
first comment and the last comment while they press Shift on the keyboard, right-click a comment
selected, and click Delete on the context menu. If the users want to delete all the comments on a
View/Edit Device Comment page, they can right-click the page, select Select All on the context
menu, right-click a comment selected, and click Delete on the context menu.
The users can also delete the device selected or the devices selected by pressing Delete on the
keyboard. If the comments deleted include the comments on SM devices or the comments on SR
devices, the comments on the SR devices or the comments on the SR devices is recovered to
default value.
If the users want to rearrange the devices on a View/Edit Device Comment page, they can
right-click the page, and click Sort on the context menu.
16-33
The users can export the comments on devices as a CSV file, edit the CSV file through Microsoft
Excel, and import the new CSV file into ISPSoft. If the default comments on SM/SR devices are
modified, the comments exported will include the new comments on theses SM/SR devices. The
comments exported do not include the default comments on all the SM/SR devices. If the comments
imported include the comments on SM/SR devices, the default comments on these SM/SR devices
will be modified after the comments are imported, and the default comments on the remaining
SM/SR devices will not be changed after the comments are imported.
If the users want to export the comments on devices, they can right-click a View/Edit Device
Comment page, click Export on the context menu, select a folder in the Save in drop-down list box
in the Export Device Comments window, type a filename in the File name box, and click Save. If
the users want to import a CSV file, they can right-click a View/Edit Device Comment page, click
Import on the context menu, select the CSV file in the Import Device Comments window, and click
Open.
For a quick way to go to the specific device range, right-click on the Device Comment area to see
the context menu and select “Jump to”. After that a Jump to window will show up. Type the device
name and press OK. The table will display the required device range. Before typing the device name,
you will need to make sure the device name you are going to type exists in the table. You can also
use Jump to function in the Used Device tab.
16-34
The devices used in the program and the information about the devices are listed in the Used
Device page. The tabs below this page indicate device types. Besides, after the users double-click
a row on the Used Device page, the system will lead the users to the corresponding device position
of that row.
16-35
16.2.3 Using Device Report

*. Currently, NOT supported by DVPxxMC
When users edit a project, they can refer to the report on the devices used in the project. However,
the users have to compile the program in the project before they refer to the report on the devices
used in the project for a DVP series PLC. Besides, if the users modify the program after the window
for the report is opened, they have to close the window, compile the new program, and open the
window again to get the latest information.
If users click Used Device Report on the View menu, or double-click Used Device Report in the
project management area, the Used Device Report window will be opened.
The Used Device Report window is composed of two parts. A table of devices is in the left part of
the window. The users can click the tabs at the top of the window. The checks in the cells of devices
indicate that the devices are used in the program. For example, there are checks in the cells for M11
M12 and M13.
16-36
If users select AH/AS Series CPU modules and use any bits of the device or the device itself, that
device box will be checked.
A table of devices used in the program is in the right part of the window. The devices listed are not
classified. If a certain device is used in different positions in the program, the information about the
positions will be listed. For example, M11 in the figure below is used in two positions in the program.
16-37
After the users double-click a row on the right part of the window, the system will lead the users to
the corresponding device location.
If the users press Enter on the keyboard after they type a device number in the Go to… box, the
blue cursor in the table in the left part of the window will move to the corresponding device position.
By executing the input number next to the Previous/ Next button for forward or backward
movement, the blue cursor can move to the assigned device number.
16-38
16.2.4 Edit Register Memory

Users can edit the values in the T/C/D/L devices in a batch. And the new values in these T/C/D/L
devices can be saved and downloaded. After users create a project, they can click Edit Register
Memory on the PLC menu to open the Edit Register Memory window.
The values in the tables in the Edit Register Memory window are not the values uploaded form the
PLC. They are the values saved last time. If the Edit Register Memory window in the project is
opened for the first time, the default values in the tables are 0.
The tabs at the top of the Edit Register Memory window indicate device types.
16-39
If the users want to edit the value in the cell for a device, they can click the cell for the device, and
type a value.
The users can select a data format in the Data Format section.
The users can select the 16 bits option button or the 32 bits option button in the Data Length
section. If the 32 bits option button is selected, the value in the cell for a device includes the value in
the next device.
Take the figures below for example. The hexadecimal value in D0 is AAAA, the hexadecimal value in
D1 is BBBB, and the hexadecimal value in D2 is CCCC. If the 32 bits option button in the Data
Length section is selected, the value in the cell for D0 will include the value in D1, the value in the
cell for D1 will include the value in D2, and the value in the cell for D2 will include the value in D3. In
other words, if the 32 bits option button is selected, the value in the cell for D0 will become
BBBBAAAA, the value in the cell for D1 will become CCCCBBBB, and the value in the cell for D2
will become CCCC.
16-40
If the users click Clear All, the values on the present page will be cleared to 0, and the values on the
other pages will remain unchanged.
Besides, the users can clear the values on the present page by right-clicking the present page,
clicking Select All on the context menu, right-clicking the present page again, clicking Clear as 0 on
the context menu.
If the users want to clear the values in the cells for a range of devices on the present page, they can
drag across the cells, right-click the present page, and click Clear as 0 on the context menu.
After type the device number in the Go to field, click Go. The blue cursor will move to the number
you have typed.
16-41
After the users click Transfer, the Transfer Setup window will appear. The users can download the
values in the tables to the PLC, or upload the values in the T/C/D devices from the PLC through the
window. Before Transfer is clicked, the users have to make sure that ISPSoft is connected to the
PLC normally. Please refer to section 2.4 for more information.
The users can select the Read from PLC Device Register option button or the Write to PLC
Device Register option button. Besides, the users can select device ranges. The values in the
devices which are not in the device ranges will remain unchanged after OK is clicked. After the
setting is complete, the users can click OK. After OK is clicked, the values in the T devices, the
values in the C devices, and the values in the D devices which are in the device ranges set will be
transferred.
Before the values are written into the registers, users have to make sure that the
operation does not affect the system, or cause damage to the system and staff.
The values in the Edit Register Memory window can be saved with the project. If the present
window is the Edit Register Memory window, the values in the Edit Register Memory window will
be saved as a .dvl file whose primary filename is the project name in the folder in which the project
(*.isp) is saved after the users click Save on the File menu or the toolbar. If the users want to open
the Edit Register Memory window in the project again, the system will open the dvl file in the folder
in which the project (*.isp) is saved. If no dvl is in the folder in which the project is saved, the values
in the Edit Register Memory window will be 0. Besides, the users can save the values in the Edit
Register Memory window as a dvl file in another folder after they click Save As on the File menu. If
the users want to open the dvl file which was saved previously, they can click Open on the File
menu or the toolbar.
16-42
The users can export the values on the present page as a CSV file, and edit the CSV file through
Microsoft Excel. If the users want to export the values on the present page, they can right-click the
present page, select the range you’d like to export and then click Export on the context menu.
Select a folder in the Save in drop-down list box in the Save As window, type a filename in the File
name box, and click Save. The contents exported are the contents of the page selected.
If the users want to import a CSV file into a page, they can right-click the page, click Import on the
context menu, select the CSV file in the Open window, and click Open. The file imported must be
matched with the device type clicked.
After the users click Hint in the Edit Register Memory window, the ISPSoft window will appear.
16-43
After a hint is typed in the ISPSoft window, the hint will appear at the bottom of the Edit Register
Memory window. The hint is saved with the values in the Edit Register Memory window. After the
users open a dvl file, they can identify the tables in the file through the hint in the file.
If the present window is the Edit Register Memory window, the users can print the present page in
the Edit Register Memory window by clicking Print on the File menu or on the toolbar.
16-44
Select the All option button or the Part option button in the Print Options section, set margins, and
select items which will be added. After the users click Printer Setup, they can select a printer, and
set a print format. After the users click Preview, they can preview the document which will be
printed. After the setting is complete, the users can click Print in the Preview window.
16.2.5 Edit Bit Memory

Users can edit the states of several M/S devices in a batch. The new states of these M/S devices
can be saved and downloaded. After users create a project, they can click Edit Bit Memory (M, S)
16-45
on the PLC menu to open the Edit Bit Memory window.
The states in the tables in the Edit Bit Memory window are not the states uploaded form the PLC.
They are the states saved last time. If the Edit Bit Memory window in the project is opened for the
first time, the default states in the tables are OFF.
The tabs at the top of the Edit Bit Memory window indicate device types.
If the users want to change the state in the cell for a device, they can double-click the cell.
If the users want to set the states in the cells for a range of devices on the present page
simultaneously, they can drag across the cells, right-click the present page, and click Set On or Set
Off on the context menu.
16-46
If the users click Set the Device Online, the states in the Edit Bit Memory window will be written
into the PLC. If the users click Read the Device Online, the states of the M devices, and the states
of the S devices will be read from the PLC. Before Set the Device Online/Read the Device Online
is clicked, the users have to make sure that ISPSoft is connected to the PLC normally. Please refer
to section 2.4 for more information.
Before the states are written into the PLC, users have to make sure that the operation
does not affect the system, or cause damage to the system and staff.
The users can export the states on the present page as a CSV file, and edit the CSV file through
Microsoft Excel. If the users want to export the states on the present page, they can right-click the
present page, select the range you’d like to export and then click Export on the context menu.
Select a folder in the Save in drop-down list box in the Save As window, type a filename in the File
name box, and click Save. The contents exported are the contents of the page selected.
If the users want to import a CSV file into a page, they can right-click the page, click Import on the
context menu, select the CSV file in the Open window, and click Open. The file imported must be
matched with the device type clicked.
16-47
The states in the Edit Bit Memory window can be saved with the project. If the present window is
the Edit Bit Memory window, the states in the Edit Bit Memory window will be saved as a dvb file
whose primary filename is the project name in the folder in which the project (*.isp) is saved after the
users click Save on the File menu or the toolbar. If the users want to open the Edit bit Memory
window in the project again, the system will open the dvb file in the folder in which the project (*.isp)
is saved. If no dvb is in the folder in which the project is saved, the states of the devices in the Edit
Bit Memory window will be OFF
Besides, the users can save the states in the Edit Bit Memory window as a dvb file in another folder
after they click Save As on the File menu. If the users want to open the dvb file which was saved
previously, they can click Open on the File menu or the toolbar.
If the present window is the Edit Bit Memory window, the users can print the present page in the
Edit Bit Memory window by clicking Print on the File menu or on the toolbar.
16-48
16-49
16.2.6 Edit DVP Series File Register

Users can edit the values in several file registers in a DVP series PLC at a time. The new values in
these file registers can be saved and downloaded.
After users create a project for a DVP series PLC, they can click Edit File Register Memory on the
PLC menu to open the Edit File Register Memory window.
The values in the table in the Edit File Register Memory window are not the values uploaded form
the PLC. They are the values saved last time. If the Edit File Register Memory window in the
project is opened for the first time, the default values in the table are 0. Users can select different tap
for different register ranges.
If the users want to edit the value in the cell for a file register, they can click the cell for the file
register, and type a value.
16-50
The users can select a data format at the top of the Edit File Register Memory window.
If the users click Clear All, the values in the Edit File Register Memory window will be cleared to 0.
16-51
Besides, the users can clear the values on the present page by right-clicking the present page,
clicking Select All on the context menu, right-clicking the present page again, clicking Clear as 0 on
the context menu.
If the users want to clear the values in the cells for a range of file registers on the present page, they
can drag across the cells, right-click the present page, and click Clear as 0 on the context menu.
After the users click Transfer, the Transfer Setup window will appear. The users can download the
values in the table to the PLC, or upload the values in the file registers from the PLC through the
window. Before Transfer is clicked, the users have to make sure that ISPSoft is connected to the
PLC normally. Please refer to section 2.4 for more information.
Select Read form PLC or Write to PLC in the Transmission Type drop-down list box, and then
select the All option button or the Part option button. After the setting is complete, the users can
click OK.
16-52
Before the values are written into the registers, users have to make sure that the
operation does not affect the system, or cause damage to the system and staff.
The values in the Edit File Register Memory window can be saved with the project. If the present
window is the Edit File Register Memory window, the values in the Edit Register Memory window
will be saved as a wft file whose primary filename is the project name in the folder in which the
project (*.isp) is saved after the users click Save on the File menu or the toolbar. If the users want to
open the Edit File Register Memory window in the project again, the system will open the wft file in
the folder in which the project (*.isp) is saved. If no wft is in the folder in which the project is saved,
the values in the Edit File Register Memory window will be 0.
Besides, the users can save the values in the Edit File Register Memory window as a wft file in
another folder after they click Save As on the File menu. If the users want to open the wft file which
was saved previously, they can click Open on the File menu or the toolbar.
The users can export the values on the present page as a CSV file, and edit the CSV file through
Microsoft Excel. If the users want to export the values on the present page, they can right-click the
present page, click Export on the context menu, select a folder in the Save in drop-down list box in
the Save As window, type a filename in the File name box, and click Save.
16-53
If the users want to import a CSV file into the page, they can right-click the page, click Import on the
context menu, select the CSV file in the Open window, and click Open.
After the users click Hint in the Edit File Register Memory window, the ISPSoft window will appear.
After a hint is typed in the ISPSoft window, the hint will appear at the bottom of the Edit File
Register Memory window. The hint is saved with the values in the Edit File Register Memory
window. After the users open a wft file, they can identify the table in the file through the hint in the
file.
16-54
If the present window is the Edit File Register Memory window, the users can print the present
page in the Edit File Register Memory window by clicking Print on the File menu or on the
toolbar.
16-55
16-56
16.3 Step Positioning

16.3.1 Using Step Positioning

When an error occurred during operation, users can use special registers (e.g. SR1, SR2, the 32 bit
registers for storing wrong addresses in the AH series) to know which step went wrong and then go
to the specific program to check and fix it. Go to Edit > Step Positioning to open the Step Positioning
window. Type the step number you’d like to inquire and press OK. The system will direct you to the
corresponding POU and the position of the step in the program, as the image shown below. Be sure
to program the project before using the step positioning function.
16.4 Program Comparison

16.4.1 Introduction to Program Comparison

ISPSoft provides a program comparison tool for users to compare 2 ISPSoft projects, or to compare
an ISPSoft project and the PLC internal programs. Here are the comparison rules.
 Comparison items include product series, models, POUs, global symbols, local symbols and
programs.
 For a POU comparison, the name of a POU will be checked first. Different POU name will be seen
as different, even for those with the same contents.
 For a variable symbol comparison, the order of a variable symbol will be checked first. Different
16-57
variable symbol order will be seen as different, even for those with the same contents. As the image
shown below, the var_a and var_b from the left and right are with different order; thus they will be
seen as different.
 The comparison of variable symbols will include the step skipping in the program. As the image
shown below the var_c only appears on the left and that does not exist on the right.
 The comparison of POUs in the languages of LD, FBD, IL, ST will include the step skipping in the
program. As the image shown below, the second line on the left does not exist on the right.
 Once there is a difference in the SFC, the comparison of POUs in the language of SFC will be
seen as different. When the Action and Transition are different in the SFC, the system will identify
which sections or lines of action/transition are different.
 Projects should be saved before running the program comparison tool.
 Be sure to select the program items while downloading the CPU module; so that the programs in
the CPU module can be compared.
16.4.2 Compare with File

It is used to compare different projects in the computer. Select File > Program Comparison >
Compare with File, and then the Open Project window will appear. Select the project you’d like to
compare with and click Open.
After that you will see a program comparison table, listing the sameness and the differences.
16-58
 The location of the current project

 The location of the compared project
 The comparison results, including models, global symbols and program contents.
Double click the items with different comparison results; the system will open the contents for users
to review. As the image shown below, click Prog0, the item with a different comparison result, to
show its contents.
16-59
16.4.3 Compare with PLC

It is used to compare the CPU module contents and the projects in the computer. Make sure the
connection between ISPSoft and the CPU module has been established. Select File > Program
Comparison > Compare with PC=LC, and then the Program Comparison window will appear. Open
the Program Comparison window and view the compared items (see below). PLC type used in
connection with the compared project is also shown.
Select the items from the PC => PLC (Download) you’d like to compare with the CPU module. If not
selecting any item to compare, an error message will appear and no comparison can be made.
Refer to section 16.1.2 for more information on Downloading.
16-60
Chapter 17 Testing and Debugging
Tools
Table of Contents
17.1 Online Monitoring Function .......................................................... 17-2
17.1.1 Changing the Operating Status of a PLC ...................................... 17-2
17.1.2 Online Monitoring Function and Environment ................................ 17-2
17.1.3 Changing the States of the X Devices in the Online Mode............... 17-7
17.1.4 Monitoring a Program Online ...................................................... 17-8
17.1.5 Device Monitoring Table ........................................................... 17-15
17.1.6 Online Editing Function and Online Update Function ..................... 17-20
17.2 Debugging Mode for DVP Series ................................................. 17-22
17.2.1 Enabling the Debugging Mode for DVP Series .............................. 17-22
17.2.3 Execution of the Program in the Debugging Mode ........................ 17-24
17.3 Debugging Mode for AH/AS Series ............................................. 17-26
17.3.1 Enter Debugging Mode ............................................................. 17-26
17.3.3 Continuous Execution ............................................................... 17-27
17.3.4 Single-Step Execution .............................................................. 17-27
17.4 Checking the Status of a PLC ...................................................... 17-29
17.4.1 System Information ................................................................. 17-29
17.4.2 PLC System Log ...................................................................... 17-31
17.5 3D Chart ..................................................................................... 17-38
17.5.1 Features ................................................................................. 17-38
17.5.2 Creating a 3D Chart ................................................................. 17-38
17.5.3 Creating a Curve ..................................................................... 17-40
17.5.4 Display a 3D Chart ................................................................... 17-42
17.1 Online Monitoring Function

17.1.1 Changing the Operating Status of a PLC
Users need to constantly change the operating status of a PLC when they test and debug the
program in the PLC. They can easily change the status of the PLC by means of ISPSoft. Before the
operation status of a PLC is changed by means of ISPSoft, users have to make sure that ISPSoft is
connected to the PLC normally. Please refer to section 2.4 for more information.
After users click Run on the PLC menu or on the toolbar, the PLC will begin to run. The PLC
will stop running after Stop on the PLC menu or on the toolbar is clicked.
If the operating status of a PLC is changed by means of ISPSoft, users do not have to consider the
state of the RUN/STOP switch on the PLC. After the operating status of a PLC is changed by means
of ISPSoft, users still can change the operating status of the PLC again by means of the RUN/STOP
switch on the PLC.
17.1.2 Online Monitoring Function and Environment

If ISPSoft is connected to the PLC normally, users can monitor the execution status of the PLC
through the online monitoring modes. Please refer to section 2.4 for more information about setting
the connection between ISPSoft and a PLC.
In ISPSoft, there are two monitoring modes. One is the device monitoring mode, and the other is the
program monitoring mode.
Monitoring mode Description
Users can monitor the statuses of the devices in the PLC through
the monitoring table. In this mode, ISPSoft only needs to update the
Device monitoring mode statuses of the devices. The present program in ISPSoft does not
need to be the same as the program in the PLC.
In this mode, the operating status of the program is displayed in the
program editing window. As a result, the present program in ISPSoft
Program monitoring mode must be the same as the program in the PLC.
*. The device monitoring function can be enabled independently. However, if the program monitoring function is
enabled, the device monitoring function is also enabled.
17-2
Ch a pt er 1 7 Tes t i ng a nd D e bu g gi n g To ols
After users click Online Mode on the PLC menu, or on the toolbar, the online monitoring
function will be enabled. The system will also enable the device monitoring mode and the program
monitoring mode.
If the users only want to monitor the statuses of the devices in the PLC, they can click on the
toolbar. When on the toolbar is clicked, on the toolbar is also clicked. If the users want to
monitor the program, they can click on the toolbar.
If the users want to disable the online monitoring function, they can click Online Mode on the PLC
menu, or on the toolbar.
17-3
In the online monitoring mode, users can view the present scan time and the status of the PLC in the
status bar in ISPSoft. The light at the left side of the status of the PLC indicates the communication
status. When ISPSoft communicates with the PLC, the green light blinks.
If an error occurs in the PLC, users may not be able to operate the PLC, e.g. the PLC can not run.
Please refer to the manual for the model used for more information about troubleshooting.
The present statuses of the devices will be displayed in the program editing window after the
program monitoring function is enabled. Users can debug and test the program in the program
monitoring mode. The way in which the statuses of the devices in a program are displayed depends
on the programming language used to create the program.
A ladder diagram in the program monitoring mode is shown below.
17-4
A function block diagram in the program monitoring mode is shown below.
An instruction list in the program monitoring mode is shown below.
A structured text in the program monitoring mode is shown below.
A sequential function chart in the program monitoring mode is shown below. Not only the sequential
function chart itself is monitored, but also the actions and the transitions are monitored.
Action0 and Action1

STEP_0 is ON. are being executed.
Action 2 is not
Time for which
executed.
STEP_0 has been
executed
* The time for which a step in a
DVP series PLC has been
executed is not displayed
STEP_1 is OFF.
In the program monitoring mode, users can monitor not only the states of the contacts, but also the
values in the registers. Besides, users can set the formats of the values monitored.
17-5
Click Monitoring Data Format on the View menu, and then select a data format on the drop-down
list. If Automatically is selected, the formats of the values monitored depend on the data types of
the symbols declared.
After users click Floating Format Setting on the View menu, they can set the formats of the
floating-point numbers.
17-6
17.1.3 Changing the States of the X Devices in the Online Mode

In the online mode, users can change the states of the contacts in the program editing window.
Users may not be allowed to change the states of the X devices in some PLCs in the online modes
owing to the design of these PLCs. If users want to change the state of an X device, an error
message will appear. Please refer to the manual for the model selected for more information.
If an X device needs to be operated when the program is tested, users can click on the toolbar
to enable the function of setting the X device. However, the state of the X device will not be updated
after the function is enabled.
After the online monitoring function is disabled, the function of setting the X device will not be
disabled automatically. As a result, be sure to disable the function of setting the X device before the
online monitoring function is disabled lest the state of the X device should not be updated during the
operation of the PLC.
Before the state of a contact is changed, users have to make sure that the operation
performed does not affect the operation of the system, or cause damage to the system or
the staff,
17-7
17.1.4 Monitoring a Program Online

In the program monitoring mode, users can change the state of a contact or the value in a register in
the program editing window. By means of changing the state of a contact or the value in a register,
users can debug or test the program. If users want to manipulate a device or an operand in a ladder
diagram or a function block diagram, they can click the device or the operand, right-click the device
or the operand, and select an item on the context menu. The items on the context menu vary with
the programming language used.
If users want to manipulate an operand on an instruction list or in a structured text, they can
right-click the operand, and select an item on the context menu.
If users want to manipulate a step or a transition in a sequential function chart, they can right-click
the step or the transition, and select an item on the context menu.
17-8
If users want to manipulate a step or a transition in a continuous function chart, they can double click
the shown status to switch from True to False or vice versa.
The items on the context menu are described below.

Item Description
Set On Setting the contact selected to ON
Set Off Setting the contact selected to OFF
Rising-edge Trigger
contact to OFF, and then set it to ON.
Falling-edge Trigger
contact to ON, and then set it to OFF.
Change Present Value Users can set the value of the operand selected.
Force Forcing an input contact or output contact ON or OFF
Forcing several input contacts or output contacts in the tables ON or
Force Device List
OFF
Before the status of a device is changed, users have to make sure that the operation
does not affect the operation of the system, or cause damage to the system or the staff.
 Change Present Value

First, select an operand, and right-click the operand. Next, select Change Present Value on the
context menu. Finally, set the value of the operand in the Enter Present Value window.
17-9
 Message.
 Users can select 16 bits/ 32 bits/ 64bits. (The content changes according to the selected PLC
series.)
 Input the present value to be changed.
 Users can type a Device Name or Symbol Name for the change present value.
 Value change history (Format: Device name Value).
 In the binary mode, users can set the states of the bits through the mouse.
 The setting values will be applied after OK is clicked. The window will be closed after Cancel
is clicked.
 Users can display or hide the binary mode.
Users can select DVPxxMC series and the following image appears.
17-10
DVPxxMC
 Message.
 Users can select 16 bits/ 32 bits/ 64bits. (The content changes according to the selected PLC
series)
 Input the present value and select format including Binary/ Octal/ Decimal/ Hexadecimal.
 Users can type a Device Name or Symbol Name for the change present value.
 Press Enter to apply the setting values; press Cancel to close the setting window.
In the continuous function charts, double click the value that you’d like to change, the field will
become editable. Type the value in and click on the blank area or press Enter on the keyboard to
complete the editing.
1 7 - 11
Press Enter
 Force
Only X contact and Y contacts and be forced ON or OFF. If an X contact is forced ON or OFF, the
state of the contact will not be affected by the actual input. Likewise, if a Y contact is forced ON or
OFF, the state of the contact will be affected by the program execution result.
Y0.0 in the figure below is forced ON. It will be ON even if M0 is OFF. Besides, if a contact is
forced ON or OFF, a lock symbol will appear at the left side of the contact.
Click an X contact or a Y contact which will be manipulated, right-click the X contact or the Y
contact, point to Force on the context menu, and select On (X/Y), Off (X/Y), Release (X/Y), or
Release All.
 On (X/Y): Forcing the X contact or the Y contact selected ON
 Off (X/Y): Forcing the X contact or the Y contact selected OFF
 Release (X/Y): Releasing the contact from the locked state
17-12
 Release All: Releasing all the contacts from the locked states
*1. The mechanism for forcing contacts ON/OFF, and the limit on the number of contacts which can be forced
ON/OFF vary from model to model. Please refer to the manual for the model selected for more information.
*2. If the online monitoring function is disabled, the contacts will not be automatically released from the locked
states. Please check whether the present state will cause any problem.
17-13
 Force Device List

Right-click the program editing window, and then select Force Device List on the context menu.
Click the Device X tab or the Device Y tab in the Forced Devices List window. Select a contact
in the table, right click the contact, and select an item on the context menu.
 Force On (X/Y): Setting the contact selected to ON
 Force Off (X/Y): Setting the contact selected to OFF
 Release (X/Y): Releasing the contact from the locked state
 Release All: Releasing all the contacts from the locked states
*1. The mechanism for forcing contacts ON/OFF, and the limit on the number of contacts which can be forced
ON/OFF vary from model to model. Please refer to the manual for the model selected for more information.
*2. If the online monitoring function is disabled, the contacts will not be automatically released from the locked
states. Please check whether the present state will cause any problem.
17-14
17.1.5 Device Monitoring Table

After users create monitoring tables, they can monitor the devices or the symbols in the tables
online. Users are allowed to create more than one device monitoring table in a project in ISPSoft.
100 items at most can be added to a device monitoring table. Users can classify and manage the
items which are monitored by themselves. Besides, device monitoring tables can be created online
or offline. The device monitoring tables which are created in a project will be saved with the project,
and users
There are three ways to create a device monitoring table.
 Method 1
Click New Devices Table on the PLC menu.
 Method 2
Right-click Device Monitoring Table in the project management area and click Add.
 Method 3
Click on the toolbar.
Type a table name in the Add Monitor Table window, and then click OK. An item will be under
Device Monitor Table in the project management area, and a device monitoring window will appear
in the working area. Users can manage the items in the window.
17-15
If users want to rename a device monitoring table created, they can click the device monitoring table
in the project management area, right-click the device monitoring table click Delete. As for renaming
a device, click Rename and type a new table name in the Add Monitor Table window.
Users are allowed to open several device monitoring windows in ISPSoft. If users want to open a
device monitoring window, they can double-click the device monitoring table in the project
management area.
If users want to add an item to a device monitoring table, they have to double-click any blank area in
the device monitoring table, or type a start address and the number of devices which be monitored
in the Device Monitor Input window. Please notice that 100 items at most can be added to a
monitoring table.
Users can press Insert on the keyboard to switch between inserting an item in the present device
monitoring table and replacing an item in the present device monitoring table. The mode which is
selected is displayed in the status bar in ISPSoft.
If the insertion mode is selected, the item added will be inserted above the item selected in the
device monitoring table.
17-16
If the replacement mode is selected, the item added will overwrite the item selected in the device
monitoring table.
Users can click the Identifier tab and add identifiers in this Device Monitor Input window.
Users can add symbols as well as devices to a device monitoring table. After they right-click a
device monitoring table, and select Select Symbols on the context menu, they can add symbols to
the device monitoring table.
The users can select global symbols or local symbols in the POUs in the Symbols Select window.
Before they select local symbols in a function block, the program must be compiled. After the
function block instances declared in the superior POU are produced, they will be assigned
substantial memory blocks. The users can monitor the local symbols in the function block instances.
Different function block instances are assigned different memory blocks. If users want to monitor
local symbols in a function block, they must select the local symbols in the instances of the function
block.
After the users select an item in the Object Source section, they can select symbols in the
Symbols section. If a symbol whose data type is ARRAY is declared, the elements will be listed in
17-17
the Symbols section. After symbols in the Symbols section are selected, the user can click Apply
to add the symbols to the device monitoring table. The users can continue to select other symbols.
After the users finish adding symbols to the device monitoring table, they can click Cancel to close
the window.
*. The symbols whose data types are POINTER, the symbols whose data types are T_POINTER, the symbols whose
data types are C_POINTER, and the symbols whose data types are HC_POINTER can not be monitored.
If the users want to delete an item in a device monitoring table, they can select the item, right-click
the item, and click Delete on the context menu. If the users want to delete several items in a device
monitoring table, they can select the items while they press Ctrl on the keyboard, right-click an item
selected, and click Delete on the context menu. If the users want to delete a range of items in a
device monitoring table, they can select the first item and the last item while they press Shift on the
keyboard, right-click an item selected, and click Delete on the context menu. If the users want to
delete all the items in a device monitoring table, they can right-click the device monitoring table,
select Select All on the context menu, right-click an item selected, and select Delete on the context
menu. The users can also delete the item selected or the items selected by pressing Delete on the
keyboard.
17-18
The users can hide some columns in a device monitoring table. If the users want to hide some
columns in a device monitoring table, thy can right-click the device monitoring table, point to Set the
Fields, and unselect items which correspond to the columns they want to hide. Please refer to the
description of the columns below for more information.
The description of the columns in a device monitoring table is as follows.

Column Description
Object The sources of the symbols are displayed.
Identifier The identifiers of the symbols are displayed.
Device Name The names of the devices monitored are displayed.
If the objects monitored are bit devices or contacts, the states of the bit
Status
devices or the states of the contacts will be displayed in this column.
If the objects monitored are symbols, the data types of the symbols will be
Data Type
displayed in this column.
When the devices and the symbols are monitored, the 8-bit values are
Value ( 8 bits)
Value (16 bits)
Value (32 bits)
Value ( 64 bits)
Float (32-bit When the devices and the symbols are monitored, the 32-bit floating-point
floating-point) numbers are displayed in this column.
Float (64-bit When the devices and the symbols are monitored, the 64-bit floating-point
floating-point) numbers are displayed in this column.
Radix Users can select the formats of the values monitored.
The comments on the devices monitored, and the comments on the symbols
Comment…
monitored are displayed in this column.
17-19
After a device monitoring table is created, the users can monitor the items in the device monitoring
table online. After the users right-click an item in a device monitoring table in the online mode, they
can select an item on the context menu to change the state of the item monitored, or the value of the
item monitored. Please refer to section 17.1.4 for more information.
Additional remark
If the comment on a device which is monitored is changed, users have to close the device
monitoring table in which the device is added, and open the window again to get the new comment
on the device. If the properties of a symbol in a device monitoring table are changed, or a symbol in
a device monitoring table is removed from the symbol table, the symbol in the device monitoring
table will not be updated, and will not have any effect in the online mode. Please delete the symbol
from the device monitoring table, and add it again.
17.1.6 Online Editing Function and Online Update Function

When the system is in the online mode and the PLC is running, users can modify the program
monitored through the online editing function and the online update function. Please refer to the
following table for more information about the limits set on the editing of programs.
Programming
Description
language
One network is edited at a time. Users are allowed to add new networks. After a
Ladder
new network is added, the network which can be edited will be the new network,
diagram
that is, the previous networks can not be edited.
One network is edited at a time. Users are allowed to add new networks. After a
Function block
new network is added, the network which can be edited will be the new network,
diagram
that is, the previous networks can not be edited.
Instruction list There is no limit on the number of lines which can be edited.
Structured text There is no limit on the number of lines which can be edited.
A sequential function chart can not be modified online, but actions and transitions
Sequential
can be modified. The limit set on the editing of an action or a transition depends
function chart
on the language used to create the action or the transition.
Continuous
No limit on the editing.
function chart
After the program is edited, users can only edit one POU.
Common limit
In the online editing mode, users can not modify or add a symbol.
If users want to edit the program online, they must enable the program monitoring function, make
17-20
sure that the PLC runs, and click on the toolbar.
If the online editing function is enabled, On-line Edit will be displayed in the status bar in ISPSoft.
If the editing of the program is complete and the program is compiled successfully, the program will
be downloaded to the PLC after users click on the toolbar. If the program is not compiled, the
system will ask users to compile the program.
When users select DVP series and click on the toolbar, the screen will appear Recommand
redownload program after finished this operation window. Choose OK to dowload the edited
program code to the PLC.
Click and select Programs to download the PLC source code for synchronization.
17-21
17.2 Debugging Mode for DVP Series

ISPSoft provides debugging functions for DVP series PLCs. Users can debug and test the program
in a DVP series PLC by means of the debugging tools. Before the debugging mode is enabled,
users have to pay attention to two points below.
(a) The debugging mode for a DVP series PLC can be executed only if the connection type is a
simulator.
(b) If the online mode is enabled, the debugging mode can not be enabled. However, the device
monitoring function can be enabled after the debugging mode is enabled.
17.2.1 Enabling the Debugging Mode for DVP Series

The connection type must be a DVP simulator. Please refer to section 2.4 for more information. After
users click on the toolbar, a window will appear. If the users want to disable the debugging
mode, they can click again.
17-22
After the program in a DVP series PLC is translated into an instruction list, the instruction list will
appear in the debugging window for the DVP series PLC. The part of the instruction list which is on a
blue ground in the debugging window is the position where the execution of the program stops. The
position where the execution of the program stops is the part of the program which has not been
executed.
17-23
17.2.2 Adding and Clearing Breakpoints

After users right-click a line in the debugging window and select Set Break Point on the context
menu, a breakpoint will be added to the line. If the users right-click the line again and select Set
Break Point on the context menu, the breakpoint will be canceled. In the debugging window, an
exclamation appears at the beginning of the line to which a breakpoint is added, and the line is on a
red ground.
If users want to clear the breakpoints in the debugging window, they can right-click a line, and select
Clear All Break Points on the context menu.
17.2.3 Execution of the Program in the Debugging Mode

 Continuous execution
After on the toolbar is clicked, the execution of the program will stop at a breakpoint. If users
click again, the execution of the program will continue, and will stop at the next breakpoint. If
there are no breakpoints, the program will be scanned repeatedly after clicked.
17-24
 Single-step execution
If the execution of the program stops, single-step execution will be performed after on the
toolbar is clicked.
 Setting the number of times the program is executed

If the number of times the program is scanned reaches the number specified, the scan will stop.
Besides, the scan of the program is not affected by the breakpoints in the program. Users have to
set a number in on the toolbar. The maximum number which can be set is 32767.
Click on the toolbar after the setting is complete.
 Stopping the execution of the program and resetting the execution order
After users click on the toolbar, the execution of the program stops.
After on the toolbar is clicked, the execution order and the values will be reset. The
execution of the program will start form the beginning of the program next time the program is
executed.
*. After the debugging mode for a DVP series PLC is enabled, the devices in the device monitoring table still can be
monitored.
17-25
17.3 Debugging Mode for AH/AS Series

17.3.1 Enter Debugging Mode
The debugging mode which ISPSoft provides for AH/AS series CPU modules supports all the
programming languages. (Currently, when the AH560 Redundant System series synchronizes, it
does NOT provide debugging mode.) However, the debugging functions can only be executed in the
actions in a sequential function chart, and the steps to which the actions belong must be ON.
Besides, if the state of a transition in a sequential function chart does not make the transition from
one step to another step, users must change the state of the transition.
Click on the toolbar, click on the toolbar, and click on the toolbar.
If the debugging mode is not enabled, but the CPU module is in the debugging mode, the debugging
mode can not be enabled. (When the CPU module is in the debugging mode, Debug is displayed in
the status bar in ISPSoft.) The reason is that the debugging mode was not disabled normally last
time or another user on the network is debugging the program in the CPU module. If users want to
reset the debugging mode, they must stop the CPU module, start the CPU module again, and
enable the debugging mode.
17.3.2 Adding and Clearing Breakpoints

Ten breakpoints at most can be added to the program in a project for an AH500 series CPU module.
After users click a position in a program editing window and click on the toolbar, a breakpoint
will be added to the position. If the users click the position again and click on the toolbar, the
breakpoint will be canceled.
If users want to clear all the breakpoints in the program in an AH500 series CPU module, they can
click on the toolbar.
After on the toolbar is clicked, the execution of the program will stop at a breakpoint. If users
click again, the execution of the program will continue, and will stop at the next breakpoint.
The position where the execution of the program stops is the part of the program which has not
been executed.
17-26
17.3.3 Continuous Execution

If on the toolbar is clicked, the execution of the program will stop at a breakpoint. If users click
again, the execution of the program will continue, and will stop at the next breakpoint. If there
are no breakpoints, the program will be scanned repeatedly after is clicked.
17.3.4 Single-Step Execution

After or on the toolbar is clicked, the part of the program selected will be executed. If a
function block is selected, the function block will be executed after is clicked, and the first step
in the function block will be executed after is clicked. However, if the function block selected is
protected with a password, or the state of the En pin of the function block selected is OFF, the first
17-27
step in the function block will not be executed whether or is clicked. Besides, if users
want to perform single-step execution in a structured text, they must add breakpoints to the
structured text. If users want to perform single-step execution in the POUs following a sequential
function chart, they must add breakpoints to the POUs.
The different between and is shown below.
17-28
17.4 Checking the Status of a PLC

17.4.1 System Information
If ISPSoft is connected to the PLC normally, the system will retrieve information from the PLC after
users click System Information… on the PLC menu. For AH560 redundant system series, a
Redundant page is added.
AH560 Redundant System
In Redundant page provides current redundant system status or related settings. The current
system can only operate under standby mode CPU; only redundancy system status appears in
Control Mode CPU (see below).
17-29
Control Mode CPU Standby Mode CPU
Introducing Redundant page content:
 CPU ID: an id for A and B controller to check whether the controller is switched in the redundant
system and uses API2901 RCS command for setting or reading.
Synchronization Options: contains ‘Always’ and ‘Condition’ which also allows users to check the
redundant system and synchronization settings, please refer to related product manuals.
Download Settings: Finish setting CPU ID and Synchronization Options, users need to click this
button to download to PLC hosts.
 Synchronize: triggers the master CPU to check the standby CPU and will only initiate
synchronization under qualified standby CPU.
Unsynchronize: cancelling the standby CPU
Switchover: refers to switching controllers under qualified standby CPU.
Become Master: allows the standby CPU to become the master CPU when the master CPU does
17-30
not exist.
 The section displays synchronized data in Current Synchronized Size and Max. Synchronized
Size (Kbytes), using special registers ‘SR18’ ~ ‘SR21’ for confirmation.
 Current Connected Controller: can connect to either a master CPU or a standby CPU
Current System Status: contains Checking the redundancy system’, ‘Redundancy system is
ready’, ‘Control mode CPU’, ‘Redundancy system is failed’ and ‘Disconnected with
synchronous optical network’.
 Refresh: used to update all information in the Redundant page.
*. For more information containing AH560 redundant system series and Redundant page, please refer to related product
manuals.
17.4.2 PLC System Log

Under normal connection with hosts, users can select System Log from the PLC menu to view logs
regarding modification and errors; For AH560 redundant system, users can check the logs of both
master and standby controllers, if no master or standby controller is detected, the display areas are
in gray color. The System Log page contains several pages and can use the labels on top to switch
to different functions. The data in system log is not updated in real-time, but users can click Refresh
to update.
17-31
AH500 Redundancy System

Series
 Error Log
Users can view hosts and all modules error codes, date & time as well as error description. In
addition, it will also contain the error module ID and backplane no. as well as slot no.
When users click Refresh, the system will retrieve data from the host and update the data in the log;
click Clear Log, to clear the table and internal host error log as well as reset the host error status.
But, when the error reason still exists, the host remains in error status and new error log is formed.
17-32
AH560 Redundant System Series
When the CPU module is connected to a remote module, users can click to view the remote
module’s rack no., slot no. and RTU remote IP address from the error logs.
Error logs can be stored in the SD card and then the logs can be moved to the PC for better
management. Refer to character 3 for more information on how to save error logs to the SD card.
After that users can go to Tools > Review Error Log File and press Open Log File to select the path
where the error log saved to see the contents of the error log.
17-33
 Program Change Log

After users click the Program Change Log tab, they can view the log related to the
downloading/uploading of programs and parameters. After users click Refresh, the system will
retrieve data from the CPU module, and the data displayed in the window is updated. After users
click Clear Log, the program change log in the pop-up window and the program change log in the
CPU module is cleared.
17-34
 Status Change Log

After users click the Status Change Log tab, they can view the log related to the change of the status
of the CPU module. After users click Refresh, the system will retrieve data from the CPU module,
and the data displayed in the pop-up window isupdated. After users click Clear Log, the status
change log in the pop-up window and the status change log in the CPU module is cleared.
17-35
 Redundant Event Log

The tab displays redundant event logs of the master and standby CPU. After users click Refresh,
the system will retrieve data from the master and standby CPUs, and the data displayed in the
pop-up window is updated. After users click Clear Log in the master CPU, the redundant event log
in the pop-up window and the redundant event log in the master CPU is cleared; if users click Clear
Log in the standby CPU, the redundant event log in the pop-up window and the redundant event log
in the standby CPU is cleared.
17-36
AH560 Redundant
System Series
*. The redundant event log only supports the AH560 redundant system series.
 Axis Log
After users click the Axis Log tab (the axis number and the axis name inside the bracket are shown
in the Axis. No column), they can view the log related to the axis. After users click Refresh, the
system will retrieve data from the CPU module, and the data displayed in the window is updated.
After users click Clear Log, the axis log in the window and the axis log in the CPU module is
cleared.
*.Axis log is only available for AHxxEMC.
17-37
17.5 3D Chart
17.5.1 Features
During the operation of the multi-axis interpolation in the monitoring mode, users can use the 3D
chart to see the motion traces, variables and devices, providing a way to check the accuracy of the
motion and a way to analyze the value trend.
*. This function is only available for AHxxEMC.
17.5.2 Creating a 3D Chart

Right-click the 3D Chart in the project management area and then click Add to bring out a New
Trace Item window, type the trace name in the field to create a trace. One project can add up to 10
sets of 10 traces.
Once a trace is created, the 3D chart window will show up automatically. Users can also find it under
the option 3D Chart and double click it to open its editing window.
Right-click the created trace, users can use the options to delete or click Property to rename the
17-38
selected trace.
17-39
17.5.3 Creating a Curve

Click the button on the 3D chart editing page to bring out a Curve Setting page.
Type a name for the new curve and define the sources and other related settings for the X-, Y-, Z-
axes. Setting the source to Position or Speed for the axes means the data of the 3D chart is from the
positon or speed of the axes. Users can use the drop-down list to select the created axes. When the
PLC runs the motion control program, the positon or speed of the set axis can be monitored in real
time.
Setting the source to Device for the axes means the data of the 3D chart is from the device of the
axes. Users can use the drop-down list to select the created device address and select the type.
When the PLC runs the program, the address and type of the device of the set axis can be
monitored.
Setting the source to Variable for the axes means the data of the 3D chart is from the variable of the
axes. Users can use the … to open a Symbol Select page and select the created variable from the
Symbols section. The system will bring in the suitable type automatically.
17-40
Setting the source to Time for the axes means the data of the 3D chart is from the time of the axes
and the value of axes will be increased by 1 every second.
Set up the width and the color for the curve and then click OK on Curve Setting page to complete
the creation of a curve. After that the created curve will be listed below the 3D chart. Click to select a
curve you’d ike to edit. Click to delect the selected or click … to open the curve set up page and
set up again. Use the drop-down list to change the color of the selected curve and select or deselect
the checkbox to show or hide the curve on the 3D chart. Up to 10 curves can be added on one 3D
chart.
17-41
17.5.4 Display a 3D Chart

Follow the procedures aforementioned to download program and complete the monitoring setups.
After a 3D chart is created, make sure the motion control CPU is connected to your computer and
then the 3D chart will be displayed.
 To edit a created curve, users can use the drop-down list on the area  or click to select a
curve from the list. After selection, click and to edit the curve or click to
delete the selected curve.
 Use options in the View Mode section to change the view of the chart; selections are 3D, XY
Plane, ZX Plane and YZ Plane. Other view options include to show or not to show the Draw
Points, Shadow, Draw Grids and Auto Fit. When Auto Fit is selected, the display area will auto
adjust the X, Y, Z axes according to the traces to fit the screen.
 3D chart display area.
 List of the curves created.
Users can use click and drag the trace on the 3D chart to see the chart from different angles. Use
the mouse wheel to scroll and adjust the scale of the chart.
17-42
Move the cursor pointer to the trace on the 3D chart and it will show its coordinates, as the image
shown below.
17-43
MEMO
17-44
Chapter 18 Password Management and
Data Protection
Table of Contents
18.1 Password Protection Mechanisms Provided by ISPSoft ................ 18-2
18.2 Program ID and PLC ID ................................................................ 18-3
18.2.1 Setting and Unlocking a Program ID............................................ 18-3
18.2.2 Setting and Unlocking a PLC ID .................................................. 18-4
18.3 Project Password and PLC Password ............................................ 18-4
18.3.1 Setting and Unlocking a Project Password .................................... 18-5
18.3.2 Setting and Unlocking a PLC Password ........................................ 18-6
18.3.3 Synchronize Project and PLC Password ........................................ 18-8
18.4 POU Password .............................................................................. 18-8
18.5 Subroutine Password ................................................................... 18-9
18.5.1 Introduction of a Subroutine Passwords ....................................... 18-9
18.5.2 Setting and Unlocking a Subroutine Password ............................. 18-10
18.6 Other Password and Data Protection Functions ......................... 18-11
18.6.1 Disable Program Upload ........................................................... 18-11
18.6.2 Setting Read-only Area ............................................................ 18-12
18.6.3 Setting TC-01 Password Key ..................................................... 18-12
18.1 Password Protection Mechanisms Provided by

ISPSoft
To protect the programs or the core techniques developed by users, ISPSoft provides multiple
protection mechanisms for the projects developed by the users. The password protection
mechanisms provided by ISPSoft are shown below. Users can set or unlock the passwords, and
adopt different data protection mechanisms according to their needs.
Password type Description

This is the first authentication information which needs to be checked
on. If users want to download a project to a PLC, the program ID set in
Program ID
the project must be the same as the PLC ID set in the PLC. A specific
project can only be downloaded to a specific PLC.
The project password set in a project is used to protect the program in
Project the project. If users want to open the POUs in a project protected by a
password project password, the system will require the users to type the correct
password.
ISPSoft The POU password set in a POU is used to protect the POU. Users
project POU
can set a password in a POU to protect the source code or the core
password
technique in the POU.
A subroutine password set in a subroutine is used to protect the
Subroutine
subroutine. It prevents the programs in the function blocks from being
password
analyzed after the programs are uploaded.
The password is used to protect all design data. Different PLC types
Settings
provides design tools and password protection, including E-CAM and
Password
Position Planning Table password introduced in each chapter.
This is the first authentication information which needs to be checked
on. If users want to download a project to a PLC, the program ID set in
PLC ID
the project must be the same as the PLC ID set in the PLC. A specific
PLC project can only be downloaded to a specific PLC.
PLC The PLC password set in a PLC is used to protect the data in the PLC.
password If users want to download the data protected by a PLC password to a
18-2
Ch a pt er 1 8 Pas s wo r d M an a g em ent a n d D ata Pr ot ec t i o n
Password type Description

PLC, or upload the data protected by a PLC password from a PLC,
they have to type the correct password.
18.2 Program ID and PLC ID

An ID is the first authentication information which needs to be checked on. If users want to
download a project to a PLC, the program ID set in the project must be the same as the PLC ID set
in the PLC. The project which is protected by a program ID can only be downloaded to a specific
PLC, and the PLC ID set in the PLC must be the same as the program ID.A specific project can only
be downloaded to a specific PLC.
If users want to upload a project to a PLC protected by a PLC ID, the system will ask the users to
type the correct ID before the project is uploaded. If users want to open a project protected by a
program ID, the system will ask the users to type the correct ID before the project is opened. As a
result, an ID is used for access approval to gain access to data.
18.2.1 Setting and Unlocking a Program ID

After users click the Tools menu, point to Program Settings, and click Program ID Setting, the
Program ID Setting window will appear. The message at the bottom of the window indicates
whether the project is protected by a program ID.
If the project is not protected by a program ID, there will be two boxes used to set a program ID in
the Program ID Setting window. If the users want to set a program ID, they have to type the same
password in the two boxes, and click OK.
If the project is protected by a program ID, there will be one box used to unlock the program ID in the
Program ID Setting window. If the users want to unlock the program ID, they can type the correct
ID in the box, and click OK.
If the users want to set a program ID, they can only type English letters, numerical digits, and
spaces in the window. A program ID is case-sensitive. Besides, the limit on the number of characters
which can be typed depends on the model selected. The users have to type a program ID according
to the hint in the window. After the users set a program ID, the project will be protected by the
program ID. The window will be closed after the users click Cancel.
18-3
18.2.2 Setting and Unlocking a PLC ID

To set a PLC ID, please make sure that ISPSoft and PLC host is connected.
After users click the PLC menu, point to System Security, and click PLC ID Setting, ISPSoft will
connect to the PLC, and read the information from the PLC. If the reading of the information from the
PLC is successful, ISPSoft will open the PLC ID Setting window. The message at the bottom of the
window indicates whether the PLC is protected by a program ID.
If the PLC is not protected by a PLC ID, there will be two boxes used to set a PLC ID in the PLC ID
Setting window. If the users want to set a PLC ID, they have to type the same password in the two
boxes, and click OK.
If the PLC is protected by a PLC ID, there will be one box used to unlock the PLC ID in the PLC ID
Setting window. If the users want to unlock the PLC ID, they can type the correct ID in the box, and
click OK.
If the users want to set a PLC ID, they can only type English letters, numerical digits, and spaces in
the window. A PLC ID is case-sensitive. Besides, the limit on the number of characters which can be
typed depends on the model selected. The users have to type a PLC ID according to the hint in the
window. After the users set a PLC ID, the PLC will be protected by the PLC ID. The window will be
closed after the users click Cancel.
18.3 Project Password and PLC Password

The project password set in a project is used to protect the program in the project. If users want to
open the POUs in a project protected by a project password, the system will require the users to
type the correct password. Besides, the users can limit the total number of password guesses that
can be made. If the number of password guesses that is made is larger than the total number of
password guesses that can be made, the project will be closed automatically.
The PLC password set in a PLC is used to protect the data in the PLC. If users want to download or
upload a project, the system will ask the users to type the correct password. Besides, the users can
limit the total number of password guesses that can be made. If the number of password guesses
that is made is larger than the total number of password guesses that can be made, the PLC will be
locked, and the data can not be downloaded/uploaded. To unlock the PLC, the users have to restore
18-4
the PLC to the default setting.
18.3.1 Setting and Unlocking a Project Password

After users click the Tools menu, point to Program Settings, and click Project Password Setting,
the Project Password Setting window will appear. The message at the bottom of the window
indicates whether the project is protected by a project password. If the project opened is a project for
a DVP series PLC, the Program Copy to PCC01 checkbox will appear in the Project Password
Setting window.
If the project is not protected by a project password, there will be two boxes used to set a project
password in the Project Password Setting window. If the users want to set a project password,
they have to type the same password in the two boxes, and click OK. The users can only type
English letters, numerical digits, and spaces in the window. A project password is case-sensitive.
The limit on the number of characters which can be typed depends on the model selected. The
users have to type a project password according to the hint in the window.
If the users want to limit the total number of password guesses that can be made, they can select
the Enable Limited Times checkbox, and select a number in the box at the right side of the
checkbox. If users want to copy the program into DVPPCC01, they can select the Program Copy to
PCC01 checkbox. (Please refer the additional remark below for more information.)
After the users set a project password, the project will be protected by the project password. The
window will be closed after the users click Cancel.
18-5
If the project is protected by a project password, there will be one box used to unlock the project
password in the Project Password Setting window. If the users want to unlock the project
password, they can type the correct password in the box, and click OK. After the project password is
unlocked successfully, the project will not protected by the project password. The window will be
closed after the users click Cancel.
Additional remark
DVPPCC01 is a data backup memory card for DVP series PLCs. If the Program Copy to PCC01
checkbox in the Project Password Setting window is selected, the PLC connected to ISPSoft will
be in a status after the project is downloaded to the PLC. If DVPPCC01 is inserted into the PLC
when the PLC is in that status, the project downloaded to the PLC will be backed up onto
DVPPCC01. However, if the PLC receives another communication command before DVPPCC01 is
inserted, the program will not be copied into DVPPCC01. This function supports DVP-ES2 series
PLCs. Please refer to the related user manuals or technical documents for more information about
the firmware versions which support this function and the usage of DVPPCC01.
18.3.2 Setting and Unlocking a PLC Password

Before users set a PLC password, they have to make sure that ISPSoft is connected to the PLC
normally.
After users click the PLC menu, point to System Security, and click Password Setting, ISPSoft
will connect to the PLC, and read the information from the PLC. If the reading of the information from
the PLC is successful, ISPSoft will open the Password Setting window. The message at the bottom
of the window indicates whether the data in the PLC is protected by a PLC password.
18-6
If the data in the PLC is not protected by a PLC password, there will be two boxes used to set a PLC
password in the Password Setting window. If the users want to set a PLC password, they have to
type the same password in the two boxes, and click OK. If the users want to limit the total number of
password guesses that can be made, they can select the Enable Limited Times checkbox, select a
number in the box at the right side of the checkbox, and click OK.
If the data in the PLC is protected by a PLC password, there will be one box used to unlock the PLC
password in the Password Setting window. If the users want to unlock the PLC password, they can
type the correct password in the box, and click OK.
The users can only type English letters, numerical digits, and spaces in the window. A PLC
password is case-sensitive. The limit on the number of characters which can be typed depends on
the model selected. The users have to type a project password according to the hint in the window.
After the users set a PLC password, the data in the PLC will be protected by the PLC password. The
window will be closed after the users click Cancel.
18-7
18.3.3 Synchronize Project and PLC Password

ISPSoft provides a convenient function for users. During the downloading/uploading of a project,
users can make the project password and the PLC password become the same.
If users select the Synchronize Project and PLC Password checkbox in the Transfer Setup
window, the PLC password will become the same as the project password after the project is
downloaded.
If the users do not set a project password, the system will ask the users to set a project password
after the users select the Synchronize Project and PLC Password checkbox in the Transfer
Setup window. When users open a project like an old file and the file is protected by project
password, the Synchronize Project and PLC Password option is forced to select.
18.4 POU Password

ISPSoft allows users to set a password in a POU. If users want to open a POU protected by a
password, the system will ask the users to type the correct password. The password set in a POU
protects the source code or the core technique in the POU. The setting of a POU password and the
unlocking of a POU password are described below.
Right-click a POU in the project management area and click Properties…. The Protection section
in the Properties window indicates whether the POU is protected by a POU password.
18-8
If the POU is not protected by a POU password, there will be two boxes used to set a POU
password in the Protection section. If the users want to set a POU password, they have to type the
same password in the two boxes. The users can only type English letters, numerical digits, and
marks in the window. A POU password is case-sensitive. After the setting of a POU password is
complete, the users can click OK.
If the POU is protected by a POU password, there will be one box used to unlock the POU password
in the Protection section. If the users want to unlock the POU password, they can type the correct
password in the box, and click OK.
18.5 Subroutine Password

* Currently. DVPxxMC series does not support subroutine password .
18.5.1 Introduction of a Subroutine Passwords

After the program in a project for a DVP series PLC is compiled, the object code produced by the
system may include a main program, a general subroutine, and an interrupt subroutine. The
subroutine is transformed from the source code in the POUs of the function block type in the project.
If the Program checkbox in the Transfer Setup window is not selected, and the Object Code
checkbox in the Transfer Setup window is selected, the general subroutine which is a part of the
object code will be transformed into POUs of the function blocks type in ISPSoft after the object
code is uploaded. Owing to the fact that a POU password protects the source code in a POU, the
POUs transformed from the object code are not protected by POU passwords. Users can open the
POUs of the function block type at will, and analyze the contents of the POUs.
18-9
Do not select program.
Generally speaking, developers pack core techniques or low-level programs in function blocks. If
object code is gotten in the way described above, all the techniques may be analyzed. To prevent
this situation, the users can set a subroutine password before the project is downloaded. If the users
set a subroutine password, the subroutine password will become the POU passwords which protect
the POUs of the function block type transformed from the object code which is uploaded. As a result,
if the users want to open the POUs of the function block type, the system will ask the users to type
the correct passwords.
18.5.2 Setting and Unlocking a Subroutine Password

After users click the Tools menu, point to Program Settings, and click Subroutine Password
Setting, the Subroutine Password Setting window will appear. The message at the bottom of the
window indicates whether the subroutine is protected by a subroutine password.
If the subroutine is not protected by a subroutine password, there will be two boxes used to set a
subroutine password in the Subroutine Password Setting window. If the users want to set a
subroutine password, they have to type the same password in the two boxes, and click OK.
If the subroutine is protected by a subroutine password, there will be one box used to unlock the
subroutine password in the Subroutine Password Setting window. If the users want to unlock the
subroutine password, they can type the correct password in the box, and click OK.
18-10
The users can only type English letters, numerical digits, and spaces in the window. A subroutine
password is case-sensitive. After the users set a subroutine password, the subroutine will be
protected by the subroutine password. The window will be closed after the users click Cancel.
18.6 Other Password and Data Protection Functions

18.6.1 Disable Program Upload
Users can inactivate the uploading of the program from a DVP series PLC. If this function is used,
the uploading of the program from the DVP series PLC will be prohibited. The uploading of the
program from the DVP series PLC will be allowed only after the PLC is restored to the default setting.
Besides, if a PLC password is set in the PLC, it has to be unlocked before this function is used. The
data in the PLC does not need to be protected by a PLC password after the uploading of the
program from the PLC is inactivated, and therefore the users can not set a PLC password.
If the users want to inactivate the uploading of the program from the DVP series PLC, they can click
the PLC menu, point to System Security, and click Program Upload Disable. After the uploading
of the program from the PLC is inactivated, the data in the PLC can not be uploaded. As a result, the
users have to decide whether they need to back the data in the PLC up in advance.
*. Before the function is used, users have to check whether the model selected and the firmware version of the
model support this function. Please refer to operation manuals or technical documents for more information.
1 8 - 11
18.6.2 Setting Read-only Area

The values stored in the read-only devices in a PLC can not be altered at will. After users set
read-only device ranges in a DVP series PLC, they can not alter the values in the devices in these
ranges through communication. If the users want to alter the values in the devices in these ranges,
they have to restore the PLC to the default setting.
If the users want to set read-only device ranges in the DVP series PLC, they can click the PLC
menu, point to System Security, click Read Only Area Setting. In the Read Only Area Setting
window, the users have to select device types, and set read-only device ranges. After the setting is
complete, the users can click Set in the Read Only Area Setting window.
*. Before the function is used, users have to check whether the model selected and the firmware version of the
model supports this function. Please refer to operation manuals or technical documents for more information.
18.6.3 Setting TC-01 Password Key

Users can set a TC-01 password key in DVPDU-01, a digital setup display. A drawing of DVPDU-01
is shown below. DVPDU-01 provides a simple operation interface for a DVP series PLC.
If users want to monitor the devices in a DVP series PLC through DVPDU-01, they can select the
TS-01 mode in DVPDU-01. If users want to read data from a DVP series PLC through DVPDU-01,
or write data into a DVP series PLC through DVPDU-01, they can select the TC-01 mode in
DVPDU-01. If users want to read data from a DVP series PLC in which a PLC password is set
through DVPDU-01, or write data into a DVP series PLC in which a PLC password is set through
DVPDU-01, they can set a TC-01 password key which is the same as the PLC password in
18-12
DVPDU-01. After the system makes sure that the TC-01 password key set in DVPDU-01 is the
same as the PLC password, the data will be read from the DVP series PLC, or the data will be
written into the DVP series PLC. Besides, when users read data from a DVP series PLC in which no
PLC password is set through DVPDU-01, or write data into a DVP series PLC in which no PLC
password is set through DVPDU-01, the system sets a PLC password in the DVP series PLC. The
PLC password set in the DVP series PLC is the same as the TC-01 password key set in DVPDU-01.
The setting of a TC-01 password key and the unlocking of a TC-01 password key are described
below. Users have to make sure that DVPDU-01 is on standby before they set a TC-01 password. If
an error occurs in DVPDU-01, or DVPDU-01 is in a process, the users have to eliminate the error, or
complete the process. Please refer to DVPDU-01 User Manual for more information.
(1) After the users press ESC on DVPDU-01 for three seconds, the password setting screen will
appear.
(2) Set a TC-01 password key by means of ISPSoft, or unlock the TC-01 password key by means
of ISPSoft.
 Setting a TC-01 password key
After the users click the Tools menu, point to DU01 Setting, and click Set TC-01
Password Key, the Set TC-01 Password Key window will appear. The users have to
type the same password in the two boxes in the window. After the setting of a TC-01
password key is complete, the users can click OK in the window.
18-13
 Unlocking the TC-01 password key

Click the Tools menu, point to DU01 Setting, click Clear TC-01 Password Key, and click
Yes in the Delta ISPSoft window.
(3) After the users set a TC-01 password key, or unlock the TC-01 password key, KEY SET will be
displayed on DVPDU-01. Press ESC on DVPDU-01.
18-14
Chapter 19 Network Configuration and
Data Exchange
Table of Contents
19.1 Network Configuration Tool - NWCONFIG ......................................... 19-2
19.1.1 Introduction of NWCONFIG ............................................................. 19-2
19.1.2 Basic Knowledge ........................................................................... 19-3
19.1.3 Communication Setting in NWCONFIG .............................................. 19-4
19.1.3.1 Connection Mechanism in NWCONFIG ........................................ 19-5
19.1.3.2 Setting Communication Parameters ........................................... 19-6
19.1.4 Workflow...................................................................................... 19-7
19.2 Creating a Network Architecture .................................................... 19-11
19.2.1 Deploying Nodes ......................................................................... 19-11
19.2.2 Connecting to a Network .............................................................. 19-15
19.2.3 Adjusting or Deleting Devices or Networks ...................................... 19-20
19.2.4 Setting the Attributes of a Node/Network ........................................ 19-23
19.2.5 Hiding/Displaying Devices or Networks ........................................... 19-27
19.2.6 Correct Network Architecture ........................................................ 19-30
19.2.7 Downloading Routing Tables ......................................................... 19-32
19.2.8 Testing Routing ........................................................................... 19-34
19.3 Constructing a PLC Link .................................................................. 19-36
19.3.1 Opening the PLC Link Table Editor Window ...................................... 19-37
19.3.2 Select Master Station Device (Step 1) ............................................ 19-38
19.3.3 Communication Parameter Settings (Step 2) ................................... 19-39
19.3.4 Create Data Exchange Table (Step 3) ............................................. 19-41
19.3.4.1 Introduction of a Data Exchange Table ..................................... 19-41
19.3.4.2 Setting a Data Exchange Group .............................................. 19-43
19.3.4.3 Device Synchronization in Data Exchange Table ........................ 19-45
19.3.4.4 Managing a Data Exchange Table ............................................ 19-47
19.3.5 Monitoring a PLC Link ................................................................... 19-48
19.3.6 Notifications on PLC Link .............................................................. 19-51
19.4 Constructing an Ether Link ............................................................. 19-52
19.4.1 Introduction of an Ether Link ......................................................... 19-52
19.4.2 Open Ether Link Configuration ....................................................... 19-53
19.4.3 Create and Manage Data Exchange Table ........................................ 19-56
19.4.4 Node List and Display Area ........................................................... 19-58
19.4.5 Start Mode of an Ether Link .......................................................... 19-60
19.4.6 Download Ether Link Configuration ................................................. 19-62
19.4.7 Upload Ether Link Configuration ..................................................... 19-64
19.4.8 Deleting Asynchronous Device ....................................................... 19-67
19.4.9 Enable/Disable Online Monitoring Function ...................................... 19-68
19.4.9.1 Enabling a Monitoring Function ............................................... 19-68
19.4.9.2 Monitoring Status .............................................................. 19-70
19.4.9.3 Disabling a Monitoring Function .............................................. 19-70
19.4.10 Online Start/Stop Ether Link (SM Flag) ........................................... 19-71
19.4.10.1 Starting the Execution of an Ether Link .................................... 19-71
19.4.10.2 Stopping the Execution of an Ether Link ................................... 19-73
19.4.11 Monitoring Table and Error Log ...................................................... 19-75
19.5 NWCONFIG Management and Application ....................................... 19-76
19.5.1 Save and Print ............................................................................ 19-76
19.5.2 Downloading ............................................................................... 19-77
19.5.2.1 Downloading Parameters ....................................................... 19-77
19.5.2.2 Description of Downloading .................................................... 19-78
19.5.3 ISPSoft Routing Application ........................................................... 19-79
19-1
19.1 Network Configuration Tool - NWCONFIG
19.1.1 Introduction of NWCONFIG

NWCONFIG is the network configuration tool provided by ISPSoft. Users can configure the network
in a project and set up a mechanism for data exchange through NWCONGIF. The functions of
NWCONFIG are listed below. They will be described in the following sections.
(a) Creating networks in a project, and selecting paths along which data is sent
(b) Performing data exchange through an RS-485 cable─PLC Link
(c) Performing data exchange through Ethernet─Ether Link
NWCONFIG is used to create a network framework for projects, and therefore it is at the top of the
project management area. If users want to start NWCONGIF, they can double-click NWCONFIG in
the project management area.
 Working area: It is a main working area. Users can create a network framework in this area.
 Device list: All the devices which can be used are listed in a catalog.
 Message display area: The messages related to operation are displayed in this area.
19-2
Ch a pt er 1 9 N e t wor k Co nf i g ur a t io n a nd D a ta Ex c h an g e
19.1.2 Basic Knowledge

Before creating networks, users need to have some basic knowledge. The basic knowledge is
introduced in this section.
 Device and network

A device is the most basic element in a network. It is a PLC, a module, or equipment defined by
users. A network is a collection of devices which are interconnected. Every network is assigned a
network number. There are RS-485 networks and Ethernet networks. Besides, a physical
interface that a device uses to connect to a network is a port of the device. If there are more than
two ports on a device, the device can connect to networks which are assigned different network
numbers. Please refer to section 19.2.2 for more information about the marking of a port in
NWCONFIG.
 PLC name
“AH-01”, “AH-02”, and “AH-03” in the figure above are PLC names. The PLC name of an AH5x0
series CPU module depends on the setting in HWCONFIG. Users can identify a device in a
network by means of the PLC name of the device. Please refer to section 3.3.2.1 for more
information. However, the PLC name of a device which is not an AH5x0 series CPU module is
like a comment on the device. It has little significance.
 Node and node number
A node is a basic unit which can operate independently in a network.  ~  in the figure above
are nodes.  consists of a CPU module and a network module. The network module cannot
operate by itself, and therefore the CPU module and the network module are regarded as one
node.
Besides, AH5x0 series CPU modules can forward packets and perform routing. For example, 
in the figure above can be monitored through . Before routing is performed, users have to
create paths along which data is sent, and assign node numbers to the nodes which forward the
data along the paths. Only AH5x0 series CPU modules can be assigned node numbers, and the
node number of a node in a network cannot be the same as the node number of another node in
the network. After the paths created are downloaded to the PLCs which forward the data along
the paths, every PLC has its own routing table. The forwarding of the data is directed on the basis
of the routing tables produced.
 Station address
This is to identify RS-485 stations on the internet. The station address is configured base on
communication port. Basically, a communication port represents a station, and the workstation
address that has the same internet no. cannot be repeated. Therefore, when a node contains
several COM ports and is connected, a station address has to be assigned.
19-3
 IP address and DHCP mode

IP address is the address for communication ports on the internet. Basically, a communication
port represents a internet point. Therefore, when several communication ports are included and
connected to the internet, an IP address has to be assigned and cannot be repeated.
DHCP is the mechanism for dynamic allocation of IP addresses. A host allocated by the DHCP
has to exist in the internet. When a communication port adopts DHCP mode, the port
automatically obtains an IP address from DHCP host.
 Subnet mask
A subnet mask is used to differentiate the subnework parameter values.
 PLC Link
A network mechanism for data exchange performed through an RS-485 cable. If there are
several nodes in an RS-485 network, users can create a mechanism for data exchange in the
network. If the parameters which are set are downloaded to the PLC which functions as a master
station, the system of the PLC will perform data exchange through special relays and special
registers when the PLC runs.
A PLC Link is a master/slave model. There is only one master station in an RS-485 network, and
the other stations which are slave stations passively receive reading/writing commands from the
master station. The slave stations cannot exchange data. They have to exchange data through
the master station.
 Ether Link
A network mechanism for data exchange performed through an Ethernet connection. If there are
several nodes in an Ethernet network, users can create a mechanism for data exchange in the
network, and select a start mode. If the parameters which are set are downloaded to the PLCs in
the network, the systems of the PLCs perform data exchange according to the start mode
selected when the PLCs run.
An Ether Link is not a master/slave model. It allows a node to send reading commands which ask
for data to other nodes. The nodes will send the data to the node after they receive the reading
commands. Owing to the fact that a node cannot send writing commands to other nodes, the use
of an Ether Link is safer than the use of a PLC Link. Besides, the system automatically manages
the transmission of packets through TCP/IP. Compared with a PLC Link, an Ether Link is more
efficient.
*. Please refer to related books or technical documents for more information about RS-485 and Ethernet.
19.1.3 Communication Setting in NWCONFIG

NWCONFIG is used to configure a network. When users configure a network, they have to
download parameters to the nodes in the network, upload parameters from the nodes in the network,
or monitor nodes in the network. The nodes in the networks created in NWCONFIG may include a
device which is not the device for which the ISPSoft project is created, and therefore users have to
set the communication parameters in the device. In order to help people select appropriate
parameters, the communication mechanism in NWCONFIG is introduced before communication
setting is described.
19-4
19.1.3.1 Connection Mechanism in NWCONFIG
In the networks created in NWCONFIG, users can download parameters to a single node or multiple
nodes, upload parameters from a single node or multiple nodes, and monitor a single node or
multiple nodes. Before users download parameters to a single node or multiple nodes, upload
parameters from a single node or multiple nodes, or monitor a single node or multiple nodes, they
have to select appropriate parameters.
 Single node
Users can download parameters to a single device, upload parameters from a single device, and
monitor a single device. Before users download parameters to a single device, upload
parameters from a single device, or monitor a single device, they have to make sure that the
device specified is the same as the device which is actually connected to the computer.
 Multiple nodes
In a network, users can download parameters to multiple devices, upload parameters from
multiple devices, and monitor multiple devices. Before users download parameters to multiple
devices, upload parameters from multiple devices, or monitor multiple devices, they have to
make sure that the devices are connected to an Ethernet network, the devices are assigned IP
addresses, and the connection type that the driver uses is Ethernet.
19-5
If the connection type that the driver selected uses is Ethernet, the system will carry out
communication according to the IP addresses assigned to the devices in NWCONFIG. Before the
communication is carried out, users have to make sure that the IP addresses actually assigned to
the devices are the same as the IP addresses set in NWCONFIG, and the networks actually created
are the same as the networks created in NWCONFIG. Otherwise, an error will occur if the
communication is carried out.
NWCONFIG can also carries out communication through routing.

Routing is a function provided by AH5x0 series CPU modules. It directs packet forwarding. Packet
forwarding is the relaying of packets from their source toward their destination through intermediate
nodes. In the figure below, the device which actually connects to the computer is AH-01. If the
computer wants to connect to AH-03, it can communicate with it through routing, and designates
AH-01 as the first station. After the computer sends a command, the command is transmitted to
AH-03 through AH-01 and AH-02.
The important points about routing are listed below.

(a) Users have to create networks in NWCONFIG, and download the routing tables produced to
nodes in the networks. Please refer to section 19.2 for more information.
(b) AH5x0 series CPU modules support routing whereas DVP series PLCs and other devices do
not support routing. Although DVP series PLCs and other devices cannot function as
intermediate nodes through which packets pass, they can function as destinations to which
packets are transmitted.
19.1.3.2 Setting Communication Parameters

The steps of setting the communication parameters in NWCONFIG are as follows. Please follow the
steps to ensure normal connection.
19-6
(1) Start the communication manager COMMGR, and check the status of the driver as OK.
(2) When using Single node, please check the object for operation is the same as the actual
device for connection; When operating in Multiple node, please check that all operating
devices are linked to the Ethernet and as planned in NWCONFIG.
(3) Click Communication Setting on the Tools menu or on the toolbar in the NWCONFIG
window. After the users complete the setting described below, they can click OK in the Select
a Driver window.
(4) Select a driver in the Driver Name drop-down list box.
(5) Select the Routing Mode and select a device in the First Station from the drop-down list box
that is the actual device connected to the PC.
19.1.4 Workflow
The creation of networks involves the operation of a system, and therefore the workflow needed
must consist of a sequence of connected steps. The workflow needed to create networks is
introduced briefly in this section, and will be described in length in the following sections. The
workflow introduced in this section is a method which can be used to efficiently complete work in a
general condition. It is not necessarily applicable to all conditions. Users can adjust the workflow
according to the actual situations or their habits.
(1) Before users create a system by means of ISPSoft, they have to design networks. The users
have to decide what PLCs or devices are used in the networks, whether a PLC needs to be
connected to a network module, how the nodes in the networks are connected, what IP
address or RS-485 station address are assigned to the ports connected, and what the values
of RS-485 communication parameters are. Besides, the users have to decide what devices
perform data exchange. The data exchange is related to the programs in the PLCs used in the
networks. After the users design networks, they can create the networks in ISPSoft.
(2) Create a project in ISPSoft. If there are more than two Delta PLCs in a system, it is
recommended that the users should create a group of projects in ISPSoft. Please refer to
19-7
section 2.2 for more information.
(3) If there are projects for AH5x0 series CPU modules, the users have to open the HWCONFIG
windows in the projects, and complete hardware configurations. The users have to configure
modules, set the parameters in network modules, gives names to the CPU modules, set ports,
and set Ethernet ports. Please refer to chapter 3 for more information.
19-8
19-9
(4) Complete a network configuration in NWCONFIG.
(5) Create a mechanism for data exchange performed by means of a PLC Link or an Ether Link. A
PLC Link and an Ether Link operate independently. The users can create them in any order.
The addresses involved in data exchange cannot overlap, otherwise an error will occur after
the data exchange is performed. It is recommended that the users should set addresses which
are involved in data exchange according to the programs in the projects created.
The figure below is a table related to data exchange performed by means of a PLC Link. After
the users complete the setting in the table, the master station in NWCONFIG will be marked.
19-10
The figure below is a table related to data exchange performed by means of an Ether Link.
(6) Download the programs in the projects, the parameters set in HWCONIFG, and the
parameters set in NWCONFIG to the PLCs. If the devices in the networks designed include
DVP series PLCs or devices which are not AH5x0 series CPU modules, the users have to set
the communication parameters in these DVP series PLCs or devices which are not AH500
series CPU modules.
The Optional Download window in NWCONFIG is shown below. The items which can be
downloaded vary with the node selected.
19.2 Creating a Network Architecture

19.2.1 Deploying Nodes
After users open the NWCONFIG window for projects for the first time, the devices for which the
projects are created will be deployed in the working area in the NWCONFIG window. If the devices
deployed in the working area include AH5x0 series CPU modules, the modules connected to the
1 9 - 11
CPU modules, the parameters in the CPU modules, and the parameters in the modules connected
to the CPU modules will be displayed according to the setting in HWCONFIG. The devices deployed
in the working area cannot be changed or deleted.
The users can add other PLCs or devices to the working area. There are two ways to add a new
device to the working area.
 Method 1
Select a PLC or a device on the device list. After the users double-click the PLC or the device, the
PLC or the device will be put at the right side of the rightmost device in the working area.
19-12
 Method 2
Select a PLC or a device on the device list, and then drag it to a position in the working area.
The users can add a user-defined Modbus device to the working area. After the users select
MODBUS Device on the device list, and add it to the working area in one of the two ways described
below, the Custom Device window will appear. The users have to type a name in the Name box,
select a number in the The number of ports from drop-down list box, with maximum of three ports
and click OK.
Base on the project content, the first AH5xo host is auto-selected with module configuration in sync
with HWCONFIG. Therefore, it is not possible to add modules in NWCONFIG, but configuration
changes can be made in HWCONFIG settings.
19-13
● Method 1
Select a network module on the device list, and then drag it to a PLC in the working area.
If the PLC does not support the network module selected, the mouse cursor becomes .
For AH5x0 series, 10EN module can be placed on the main backplane, with a maximum of at
least 8 modules. The SCM module can be put on the extension backplane and the number is
limited according to the slot number of each backplane. .
When choosing to drag added SCM modules, users can decide the backplane position to drag
and drop.
After the users drag an AH10SCM series module to at the right side of a node, an extension
rack will be added to the node.
19-14
 Method 2
Select a PLC or a rack in the working area, and then double-click a network module on the device
list.
After the users add a network module to a node, the slot in which the network module is installed,
and the backplane on which the network module is installed may be different from the actual slot
in which the network module is installed, and the actual backplane on which the network module
is installed. The users have to adjust the properties of the node.
19.2.2 Connecting to a Network

After users deploy the nodes in the NWCONFIG window, they can connect the nodes to the
networks designed.
There are three ways to add a network to the working area. There are Ethernet networks and
RS-485 networks.
 Method 1
After users click on the toolbar, an Ethernet network is added. After the users click on
the toolbar, an RS-485 network is added.
19-15
 Method 2
Click the Edit menu, point to Add a Network, and click Ethernet or RS-485.
 Method 3
Right-click the blank in the working area, point to Add a Network on the context menu, and click
Ethernet or RS-485.
The ports of a device are displayed at the bottom of the device. If a port is blue, it is an RS-485 port.
If a port is green, it is an Ethernet port. The port number assigned to a port of a device is consistent
with the definition of the port. For example, E1 represents the first Ethernet port, C1 represents
COM1, and C2 represents COM2. The ports of an AH10SCM series module are marked with TR1
and TR2, and the ports of an AH10EN series module are marked with X1 and X2. Besides, if the IP
address assigned to an Ethernet port is a dynamic IP address, or a port of an AH10SCM series
module is not a Modbus port, the Ethernet port or the port of the AH10SCN series module will be
gray, and cannot connect to any network.
19-16
There are several ways to connect the nodes in the working area to networks.
 Connecting a port to a network by means of dragging the port
The users press the left mouse button while the mouse cursor hovers over a port. A dotted line is
under the existing network.
The users move the mouse cursor to the existing network while holding the left mouse button
down. If the network matches the port, the port will connect to the network after the users release
the left mouse button.
If the users move the mouse cursor to the dotted line while holding the left mouse button down,
the port will connect to a network which matches the port.
 Connecting a single device or several devices to an existing network

(1) The users hold down Shift on the keyboard while they click devices and a network. They
have to conform to the two principles below.
(a) PLCs and modules are independent devices. A device that the users click must have at
least one port which is not connected to any network, and matches the network clicked.
(b) The users can click several devices, but they can only click one network.
19-17
(2) After the users click Connect Devices on the Edit menu, or on the toolbar, the system
will connect the devices clicked to the network clicked.
Additional remark
(a) If the objects selected do not conform to the two principles listed above, the system will not
connect the devices selected to the network selected, and a warning message will appear.
(b) If a device selected has more than one port which is not connected to any network and matches
the network selected, the system will connect the port whose port number is smaller to the
network selected.
(c) Users can select multiple devices by dragging a selection net around them. If the users press
Ctrl+A on the keyboard, all the devices and networks in the working area are selected.
(d) If users select a node which consists of a PLC and a module, and the PLC and the module
conform to the principles listed above, the system will connect a port of the PLC and a port of
the module to the network selected.
 Automatically connecting a single device or several devices to a new network
(1) The users hold down Shift on the keyboard while they click devices. PLCs and modules are
independent devices. A device that the users click must have at least one port which is not
connected to any network, and matches the new network added.
19-18
(2) After the users click Connect Devices on the Edit menu, or on the toolbar, the system
will connect the devices clicked to the new network added.
Additional remark
(a) If the devices selected do not conform to the principle described in (1), the system will not
connect the devices selected to a new network, and a warning message will appear.
(b) If a device selected has more than one port which is not connected to any network and matches
the new network added, the system will connect the port whose port number is smaller to the
new network added.
(c) Users can select multiple devices by dragging a selection net around them. If the users press
Ctrl+A on the keyboard, all the devices and networks in the working area are selected.
(d) If users select a node which consists of a PLC and a module, and the PLC and the module
conform to the principle described in (1), the system will connect a port of the PLC and a port of
the module to a new network added.
(e) If the devices that users select have ports which are not connected to any networks, and can be
connected to an RS-485 network or an Ethernet network, the system will connect the ports to an
Ethernet network.
19-19
19.2.3 Adjusting or Deleting Devices or Networks

 Adjusting the order in which the nodes in the working area are arranged
Users can change the order in which the nodes in the working area are arranged by dragging a
node to a different position. The nodes in the working area can only be at the same level, and
increase rightwards. The users cannot drag a node to a position above or under another node.
 Deleting a single device by means of a context menu

After users right-click a PLC, and click Delete the Device on the context menu, the PLC and the
modules connected to the PLC will be deleted. However, the PLC for which a project is created
and the modules connected to the PLC cannot be deleted.
After the users right-click a module, and click Delete the Module on the context menu, the
module will be deleted.
19-20
 Adjusting a connection
If users press the left mouse button while the mouse cursor hovers over a connection point which
connects a network and a port, a small picture representing a trash can and a dotted line will
appear.
If the users release the left mouse button after they drag the connection point to the small picture
representing a trash, the connection between the network and the port will be canceled.
If the users drag the connection point to the dotted line, the system will connect the port to the
new network added.
If the users release the left mouse button after they drag the connection point to another network
which matches the port, the port will be connected to the network.
19-21
 Deleting a single network by means of a context menu

After users right-click a network, and click Delete the Network on the context menu, the network
and the lines connected to the network will disappear.
 Deleting several devices or several networks

Users can select several objects by holding down Shift on the keyboard. Besides, the users can
select multiple devices by dragging a selection net around them, or selecting all the objects in the
working area by pressing Ctrl+A on the keyboard.
After the users click Delete Selections on the Edit menu, click on the toolbar, or press
Delete on the keyboard, the objects selected will be deleted. However, the PLC for which a
project is created and the modules connected to the PLC cannot be deleted. Besides, if a PLC is
deleted, the modules connected to the PLC will also be deleted.
19-22
19.2.4 Setting the Attributes of a Node/Network

After users deploy the nodes in the NWCONFIG window, the information about the nodes will put
above the nodes. The information includes PLC names and node numbers. The attributes of the
ports connected to networks are also displayed. If a port is an RS-485 port, a station address will be
displayed. If a port is an Ethernet port, an IP address will be displayed. The information about a port
will be shown if the port is connected to a network. If a port is not connected to any network, no
information about the port will be shown. Besides, if a port of a network module is connected to a
network, the information about the slot in which the network module is installed, and the information
about the backplane on which the network module is installed will be shown.
In addition to the information about the nodes, the network numbers assigned to the networks and
the network types of the networks are shown. If a network is an Ethernet network, the subnet mask
assigned to the ports connected to the network will be shown.
If the ports connected to an Ethernet network are not in the same domain, or are not assigned the
same subnet mask, a warning sign will appear. If the ports connected to an Ethernet network are not
assigned the same subnet mask, the strictest subnet mask will be shown.
The ports connected to the The ports connected to the
Ethernet network are not assigned Ethernet network are not in
the same subnet mask. the same domain.
19-23
 Setting the attributes of a node

There are two ways to open the Device Information window.
(a) After users double-click a PLC, the Device Information window will appear. The users can
also open the Device Information window by right-clicking the PLC, and clicking Device
Information on the context menu.
(b) After users double click a module, the Device Information window will appear. The users
can also open the Device Information window by right-clicking the module, and clicking
Module Information on the context menu.
In the Device Information window, there are two tabs. The page displayed in the window
depends on the device selected.
When the device selected based on project setting is AH5x0 series, most of the columns in the
property window is greyed, so property settings can only be completed through HWCONFIG.
19-24
In the setting page, every communication port has a corresponding Connected Network
number to choose from the drop-down list box. When None is selected, the port connection is
deleted.
In the page for a module, the users can select a rack number in the Rack Number drop-down list
box, and a slot number in the Slot Number drop-down list box.
After the users complete the setting of the attributes of a node, and click OK in the Device
Information window, the attributes of the node will be updated immediately.
19-25
 Setting the attributes of a network

After users double-click a network, the Network Information window will appear. The users can
also open the Network Information window by right-clicking the network, and clicking Network
Information on the context menu.
In the Network Information window, the users can select a network number which is not
assigned to any network in the Network Number drop-down list box. Besides, the users can type
a comment in the Comment box. After the users complete the setting of the attributes of the
network, and click OK in the Network Information window, the attributes of the network will be
updated immediately.
Un-click Visible in the Network Information window, the network will be hidden and connected
communication ports are displayed in dotted lines.
19-26
19.2.5 Hiding/Displaying Devices or Networks

Users can hide/display devices or networks in the working area. The number of devices visible and
the total number of devices are displayed in the status bar. Besides, if a dotted line is connected to a
port of a device, the port is connected to an invisible network.
 Only displaying the objects connected to a device

After users right-click a node, and click Only Show Directly Connected Devices on the context
menu, only the network and the devices which are connected to the node will be displayed.
 Only displaying the devices connected to a network

After users right-click a network, and click Only Show This Network on the context menu, only
the devices connected to the network will be displayed.
19-27
 Hiding a network and the devices connected to the network

Unclick Visible in the Network Information window, the network is hidden and connected
communication ports are displayed in dotted lines.
 Hiding/Displaying the devices which are not connected to any networks

If users want to hide/display the devices which are not connected to any networks, they can
right-click the working area, point to Unconnected Devices Visible on the context menu, and
click Hide/Show. This operation affects the devices in the present working area. It does not affect
the devices which will be added latter.
19-28
 Setting the display states of all the objects at the same time
Users can set the display states of all the devices at the same time.
Click Device & Network Visible Settings on the View Menu, or on the toolbar.
Select networks which will be displayed in the Networks section in the Devices & Networks
Visible Settings window. The networks which are not selected will not be displayed in the
working area. If the users select the Select All checkbox, all the networks in the Networks
section will be selected. If the users unselect the Select All checkbox, all the networks in the
Networks section will be unselected.
In the Unconnected Devices section, the users can set the display states of the devices which
are not connected to any networks. This operation affects the devices in the present working area.
It does not affect the devices which will be added latter.
 Displaying all the objects

After users right-click the blank in the working area, click Show All Devices and Networks on
the context menu, the devices and the networks which are hidden will be displayed.
19-29
19.2.6 Correct Network Architecture

After users click Check Routing Information on the Edit menu, or on the toolbar, the system
will check whether the network architecture the users create is correct, and the check result will be
displayed in the message display area.
When checking, the system only focuses on the connected ports or the nodes and internet
information in the Graphic Workspace for confirmation. The items to check include nodes number,
RS485 station address and IP address. From the above image, the issue of repetition in nodes
number, RS485 station address and IP address appears, therefore, we can check an internet one at
a time to make sure that it is connected to the same node on the internet and the nodes number,
RS485 station address and IP address are not repeated.
 Node number
In principle, the node number assigned to a node in a network cannot be the same as the node
number assigned to another node in the network. If users view a network at a time, they can
check whether the node number assigned to a node connected to a network is the same as the
node number assigned to another node connected to the network.
19-30
 RS-485 station address

In principle, the RS-485 station address of a port in a network cannot be the same as the RS-485
station address of another port in the network. If users view an RS-485 network at a time, they
can check whether the RS-485 station address of a port in a network is the same as the RS-485
station address of another port in the network.
19-31
 IP address
The IP address of a port in a network cannot be the same as the IP address of another port in the
network. If users view an Ethernet network at a time, they can check whether the IP address of a
port in a network is the same as the IP address of another port in the network.
19.2.7 Downloading Routing Tables

After users make sure that the network architecture they create is correct, they can download the
routing tables produced to PLCs. The routing data stored in a PLC is data related to the PLC itself,
and therefore the routing tables downloaded to nodes are different. The users have to download the
19-32
routing tables produced to nodes in the working area.

The users can download the routing tables produced to nodes one by one, or download the routing
tables produced to nodes at the same time. If the users want to download the routing tables
produced to nodes, the Routing Mode checkbox in the Select a Driver window must be
unselected.
 Single node
First, select a node to download and click on the node in the host part from the graphic
workspace. Since the routing function only supports AH5x0 series, therefore, selecting other PLC
types or devices will be unable to download the Routing Table.
After the users click Download to PLC on the PLC menu, or on the toolbar, the Optional
Download window will appear. The users can also open the Optional Download window by
right-clicking the device they select, and clicking Download to PLC on the context menu. After
the users select the Routing Table checkbox in the Optional Download window, and click OK, a
routing table will be downloaded to the device.
 Multiple nodes
The COMMGR Driver has to be under Ethernet structure in the communication setting. Then,
choose an Ethernet network from the graphic area and parameters can download to connected
nodes.
19-33
Download window will appear. Select the Routing Table checkbox in the Optional Download
window, and click OK, the routing tables produced will be downloaded to the nodes connected to the
Ethernet network.
Additional remark
If the parameters related to an Ether Link or a PLC Link can be downloaded to the object selected,
users can select the Ether Link checkbox or the PLC Link (Reset) checkbox in the Optional
Download window. If a checkbox in the Optional Download window is gray, the checkbox cannot
be selected. Please refer to the following sections for more information about Ether Links and PLC
Links.
Besides, the routing data stored in a PLC is data related to the PLC itself. The users cannot upload
the routing data stored in a PLC. The system does not provide the function of uploading routing
data.
19.2.8 Testing Routing

After the routing tables produced are downloaded, users can test routing by means of a function
provided by NWCONFIG. The steps of testing routing are as follows.
(1) The users have to make sure that all the nodes are wired according to the configuration in
NWCONFIG, and operate normally. The setting of the devices has to be consistent with the
setting in NWOCNIFG. In the Select a Driver window, the users have to select the Routing
Mode checkbox, and select a device in the First Station drop-down list box.
19-34
(2) After the users select the destination device toward which packets are relayed, they have to
click on the toolbar, or Routing Detect on the PLC menu.
The users can also right-click the destination device, and then click Routing Detect on the
context menu.
(3) After Routing Detect is clicked, the display of the network architecture in the working area will
change, and the Routing detect status window will appear. Please see the red circle in the
figure below.
19-35
(4) After the detection is complete, the detection result will be shown in the working area.
Additional remark
If the detection fails, the users have to make sure of the following points.
(a) Please confirm hardware configuration is the same as NWCONFIG configuration and every
node is correctly connected to the internet and functioning.
19.3 Constructing a PLC Link

A PLC Link is a network mechanism for data exchange performed through an RS-485 cable. If there
are several nodes in an RS-485 network, users can create a mechanism for data exchange in the
network. If the parameters which are set are downloaded to the PLC which functions as a master
station, the system of the PLC will perform data exchange through special relays and special
registers when the PLC runs.
A PLC Link is a master/slave model. There is only one master station in an RS-485 network, and the
other stations which are slave stations passively receive reading/writing commands from the master
station. The slave stations cannot exchange data. They have to exchange data through the master
station.
19-36
19.3.1 Opening the PLC Link Table Editor Window

Before creating a PLC Link, users have to make sure that all the network setting is correct. Please
use one of the methods described below.
 Method 1
After the users select a network, they have to click Construct PLC Link on the Tools menu, or
on the toolbar.
 Method 2
Double-click a network.
19-37
 Method 3
Right-click a network, and then click Construct PLC Link on the context menu.
After the users use one of the methods described above, the PLC Link Table Editor window will
be opened. The PLC Link Table Editor window leads the users to construct a PLC Link step by
step. The steps of constructing a PLC Link are designating a port as a master station, setting
communication parameters, and creating a data exchange table. The system leads the users to
the operation screen displayed last time as soon as the PLC Link Table Editor window is
opened. As a result, if the users construct a PLC Link for the first time, the screen displayed will
lead the users to accomplish the first step.
Besides, a PLC Link is executed through special relays and special registers. The construction
tool introduced here is just a friendly user interface which helps users download the parameters
related to a PLC Link to the related special relays and the related special registers. The exact
execution of a PLC Link depends on the special relays and the special registers in a PLC. To
ensure that the PLC Link constructed can operate normally, users have to make sure of the
functions of the PLCs and the limitations of the PLCs with regard to the PLC Link.
19.3.2 Select Master Station Device (Step 1)

Only an AH5x0 series CPU module, an AH500 series module, a DVP series PLC, or a DVP series
module can be designated as the master station. Not all ports of a PLC or a module can be
designated as the master station, and therefore users have to read the usage of the PLC or the
module before they designate a port as the master station. Besides, if some of the ports of a node
can be designated as masters, the PLC which is a part of the node will execute the PLC Link no
matter what port is designated as a master station.
19-38
(1) Select a port of a node in the Master Device drop-down list box. Only the ports which can be
designated as master stations are listed.
(2) After users click , the system will ask the users whether they want to upload the
setting related to a PLC Link through the master station. If the users click No, they will be led to
the second step. If the users click Yes, the setting related to a PLC Link in the PLC which is a
part of the node will be uploaded through the master station, and the data uploaded will be
displayed on the screen after the users are led to the third step. Before the users upload the
data, they have to make sure of the following points.
(a) The users have to make sure that the computer and the port designated as a master
station are connected by means of a communication cable.
(b) The users have to make sure that a driver has been created correctly, and the driver status
is OK.
(c) The users have to make sure that they have completed the communication setting in
NWCONFIG.
19.3.3 Communication Parameter Settings (Step 2)

After the system leads users to the second step, the users have to set the communication
parameters in the PLC Link Table Editor window. The parameters uploaded through the master
station are displayed at the left part of the window. The setting of the communication parameters of
all the slave stations in the same network must be the same as the setting of the communication
parameters of the master station. If no parameters are uploaded, “Unknown” will be shown in the
boxes at the left part of the window. If the station address uploaded is different form the station
address assigned o the master station, the Station Address box will become red.
19-39
 Transfer Capacity Mode

The users can set 16 data exchange groups or 32 data exchange groups, depending on the
model selected. The users can select a maximum data length in the Transfer Capacity Mode
section. Besides, the maximum data length which can be set varies with the PLC which is
designated as a master station. Please refer to manuals for more information.
Setting Description DVP AH5x1
A single data exchange transfer capacity length is

16 Words V V
16 Words. Use only Device D.

100 Words V V
100 Words. Use only Device D.

450 Words and can use Device M, D or L. The
450 Words V
device type for master and slave station can be
different.
19-40
 Hold the RS485 Setting

The communication parameters in a DVP series PLC will be restored to the default values if the
DVP series PLC is turned on after a power failure. However, if the Hold the RS485 Setting
checkbox is selected, the host will switch from STOP to RUN and re-download the saved
communication parameters; for more information on DVP COM port communication parameters,
please refer to manuals regarding PLC types.
 Synchronic R/W
A master station sends a writing command and a reading command to a slave station separately.
If the Synchronic R/W checkbox is selected, the master station can complete reading and writing
simultaneously by means of a specific Modbus function code (the hexadecimal code 17), and the
efficiency of data exchange is increased. However, the users have to make sure that the devices
involved in data exchange support the Modbus function code before they select the Synchronic
R/W checkbox. If the devices do not support the Modbus function code, the Modbus code cannot
be identified, and the reading/writing of data will fail after they receive the commands from the
master station. For mode, choose 450 Words or users can only select Device D to enable
Synchronic R/W.
 Run PLC Link after downloading
Select Run PLC Link after downloading. When finish planning PLC Link, download to hosts will
also enable PLC Link.
 Interval Time (ms)
The users can specify how often the master station sends a command.
After the users click , the system will lead the users to the next step. If the users click
, the system will lead the users to the previous step.
19.3.4 Create Data Exchange Table (Step 3)

19.3.4.1 Introduction of a Data Exchange Table
The table below is a data exchange table. When a PLC Link is executed, the master station sends
reading/writing commands to the slave stations according to the data exchange table created.
19-41
Column Description
The data exchange groups in the data exchange table in the PLC Link Table
Serial
Editor window are numbered. Users can set 16 data exchange groups or 32
Number (#)
data exchange groups, depending on the model selected.
Indicate the station address for data exchange group. The same station address
Station can contain multiple sets of slave station from different sections. Besides, the
Addr. station address 0 represents an undefined slave station, and is not a broadcast
station address.
R: The master station reads the data in devices in a slave station.
R/W
W: The master station writes data into devices in a slave station.
Master
The range of devices which are used in the master station is indicated.
Device Data
<=: The master station reads the data in devices in a slave station.
<=>
=>: The master station writes data into devices in a slave station.
The devices which are used in a slave station are indicated. If a slave station is a
Slave Device
user-defined Modbus device, the devices used will be represented by
Data
hexadecimal addresses.
Length A data length is indicated. A length indicates the number of devices used.
Users can decide whether to involve a data exchange group in data exchange. If
a data exchange group is set incorrectly, the data exchange group will not be
Status
involved in data exchange. If a data exchange group is not involved in data
exchange, the related data will be on a gray ground.
The device types shown are consistent with the device names shown in the
working area in NWCONFIG. If a slave station address is assigned to a network
Device Type
module, the name of the PLC to which the network module is connected will be
shown. Besides, if a slave station is undefined, it is unknown.
The figure below is an example of a data exchange table. Group #1, group #2, group #4, and group
#5 are involved in data exchange. Please refer to the table below for more information.
19-42
Serial
Description
number
The master station reads the data in D2500~D2599 in the slave station whose station
#1 number is 2, and stores the data in D3000~D3099 in itself. Meanwhile, the data in
D3100~D3149 in the master station is written into D2600~D2649 in the slave station.
The master station reads data from slave station no.2 (SV series) in D3000~D3009,
a total of 10 words and stores the data in D3000~D3009. Meanwhile, the mast
#2
station data in D3200~D3209, a total of 10 words is written in slave station
D3200~D3209.
The master station reads the data in 16#1000~16#1018 in the slave station whose
station number is 3, and stores the data in D3400~D3424 in itself. Meanwhile, the
#4
data in D3500~D3524 in the master station is written into 16#1025~16#103D in the
slave station.
The master station reads the data in D3000~D3099 in the slave station whose station
#5 number is 6, and stores the data in D3600~D3699 in itself. Meanwhile, the data in
D3700~D3799 in the master station is written into D3100~D3199 in the slave station.
19.3.4.2 Setting a Data Exchange Group

Double-click on the data exchange group for setup to open the setting window.
19-43
 Linked Device
The Station Address is the slave station for data exchange group. Do not select the master
station address but slave station address used in other data exchange group can be selected.
When choosing 0, Unknown appears in the Device Type column meaning not defined. Otherwise,
a hardware device name will appear in corresponds to the slave station address.
 Linked Status
To set on the linked status to enable data exchange for data exchange groups.
19-44
 Read
The device type on both sides should be the same. The data length is the number for exchange.
To read from the device starting address of Slave Parameter Setting the device starting address
of Master Parameter Setting.
 Write
The device type on both sides should be the same. The data length is the number for exchange.
To read from the device starting address of Master Parameter Setting the device starting address
of Slave Parameter Setting.
For section planning, the same section data can write into multiple different positions but does not
allow different section data to store in the same position. Base on the image above, the content data
in master station D3100~D3149 can repeat and write in different slave station, but section in master
station D3000~D3099 cannot receive data from other slave stations.
19.3.4.3 Device Synchronization in Data Exchange Table

In Device Type column of the data exchange table, the appearing content is based on the host
model type of each station address as well as according to the current configuration in the
NWCONFIG Graphic Work space; when a host has multiple station address, the host type is shown
in the Device Type column.
19-45
When finish planning and data setting is saved, the modified host type is marked in red to remind
users and the status is auto-switched to Disabled.
When the master station device is AH5x0 series and executing upload but finds the current
NWCONFIG not matched, the modified PLC type is marked in red to remind users and the status is
auto-switched to Disabled.
19-46
When the master station device is DVP series, since the host of DVP series cannot save the device
type in data exchange table, it is not possible to check on the PLC type base on the data uploaded.
Therefore, the Device Type column shows the name of the PLC type base on the Graphic
Workspace. For unreasonable settings, the status is auto-switched to Disabled.
19.3.4.4 Managing Data Exchange Table

There are buttons under the data exchange table in the PLC Link Table Editor window. Please
refer to the table below for more information about the buttons. If users click , the system
will lead the users to the previous step.
Item Description
Export Exports the data exchange table in CSV file format.
Reset Set the data exchange table content to initial state.
Check
Check the data exchange table to be correct.
Settings
Upload Upload the data exchange table in master station.
19-47
Item Description
Download Download data exchange table to master station.
Download & Download data exchange table to master station and automatically opens
Monitor monitoring window once downloading is complete.
Finish The system will ask to save the modifications before closing the window.
Before executing uploading & downloading or monitoring in PLC Link, please make sure the actual
device is well-connected.
19.3.5 Monitoring a PLC Link

Before monitoring, please make sure the system and host is well-connected. Then, click Monitor
and Download to open the monitoring window in PLC Link; the host of the master station must be in
RUN state, so that PLC Link operation can execute.
 Function Operation area: To operate PLC Link data exchange function.

 Monitoring area: Displays the read or write status of master to slave station and execute online
data read or write in this area.
 Lighting Status area: The lighting indicates current PLC Link status. Please refer to the
following table for each lighting description.
Lighting Description
PLC Run When lighting is ON means PLC host is RUN.
PLC Link Run When lighting is ON means PLC Link enabled.
Auto Mode When lighting is ON means PLC Link execution in Auto Mode.
When lighting is ON means PLC Link execution in Manual Mode. When
Manual mode
executing number reaches the polling number, the lighting is OFF.
Synchronic R/W When lighting is ON means Synchronic R/W enabled.
 Setting area
To execute setting or operating PLC Link data exchange function, the values in the related
special registers in the master station and the states of the related special relays in the master
station will be changed. When leaving PLC Link monitoring function, the PLC Link will remain in
its last operating status, therefore, please make sure the current PLC Link status is correct before
leaving the monitoring page.
19-48
 When lighting is ON means the computer and PLC host remains connected.
 Select the item and the setting bases on  polling number to execute. Maximum number is
65535.
 When is selected and execution starts, the number of Execution Times is shown; the
calculation is to complete one round of data read and write in slave station.
 To start or stop monitoring.
When disconnection occurs during monitoring process, Continue to Monitor button appears on
the right upper corner of the window; when resolved, click the button to restart the connection.
● Monitoring area
When the PLC Link constructed is executed, the master station exchanges data with the slave
stations. The status of the data exchange between the master station and the slave stations are
displayed in this area.
The small pictures in the monitoring area indicate the status of the main station rather than the
statuses of the slave stations. The small pictures in the monitoring area are described below.
19-49
 The indicators on the small picture indicate the status of the data exchange group represented
by the small picture.
 The data exchange group represented by the small picture is not involved in data exchange.
 The number corresponds to a serial number in the data exchange table. It represents the
serial number of the data exchange group represented by the small picture.
 The number corresponds to a slave station address in the data exchange table. It represents
the slave station address which belongs to the data exchange group represented by the small
picture.
Since PLC Link error flags for AH5x0 series and DVP series differs slightly, therefore it is
displayed differently. Please refer to the following table.
Master
station Small
Description
picture
PLC Type
 When lighting is ON means read slave station data is in
error.
AH5x0 series  When lighting is ON means writing data in slave station
data is in error.
 When lighting is ON means data is exchanging.
 When lighting is ON means read or write slave station
DVP series data is in error.
 When lighting is ON means data is exchanging.
After the users select a small picture, and right-click the small picture, they can click Write
Register or Read Register on the context menu.
 Write Register: To write in the device position data of slave to master station, for example
D3100~D3149 (see image below).
 Read Register: To read the device position data of slave from master station, for example
D3000~D3099 (see image below).
After the users click Write Register or Read Register on the context menu, a correponding
register monitoring table will appear.
19-50
A data format can be
If the users double-click the Value cell for a device, or click Edit Value on the context menu after
they right-click the Value cell, they can type a value in the Enter Value window. If the users
double-click the Device Comment cell for a device, or click Edit Comment on the context menu
after they right-click the Device Comment cell, they can make a comment on the device. The
comments made are for the PLC Link constructed. They are not related to the comments on the
devices in the program created in ISPSoft.
 Users can type a value in the box.

 Users can select a data format.
 Users can display or hide the binary
mode.
 In the binary mode, users can set the
states of the bits through the mouse.
19.3.6 Notifications on PLC Link

When planning PLC Link, the same RS-485 network can only have one master station. When the
nodes set as the master station has many COM ports, the nodes cannot be used as master station
in other RS-485 network, but only as slave station. For example (see below), AH-01 shows that
node in communication port C1 is the master station for Network #1 and cannot be the master
station assigned to Network #2 but only as slave station. While, C1 and TR1 port in AH-01 are
connected to Network#1 and both port station addresses are independent, therefore, TR2 assigned
as slave station is allowed for Network#1 in PLC Link planning.
19-51
One network can only have one master station to send command at the same time. Therefore, when
finish network planning, please make sure the actual network is the same as in NWCONFIG to
avoid similar error (see below).
Besides, if the users do not set the parameters related to a PLC Link in the original master station
again before they designate another device as a master station, an error occurs when more than
one device sends reading/writing commands. As a result, if the users want to designate another
device as a master station, they have to make sure that the original master station does not execute
the original PLC Link.
* In addition to the conditions mentioned above, users have to prevent two devices or more than two devices from
sending reading/writing commands simultaneously in any conditions.
19.4 Constructing an Ether Link

19.4.1 Introduction of an Ether Link
An Ether Link is a network mechanism for data exchange performed through an Ethernet
connection. If there are several nodes in an Ethernet network, users can create a mechanism for
data exchange in the network, and select a start mode. If the parameters which are set are
downloaded to the PLCs in the network, the systems of the PLCs perform data exchange according
to the start mode selected when the PLCs run. The users do not have to write a redundant program.
A PLC Link is a master/slave model. There is only one master station in an RS-485 network, and the
other stations which are slave stations passively receive reading/writing commands from the master
19-52
station. Compared with a PLC Link, an Ether Link adopts a safer data request mechanism. It is the
data demanding nodes in an Ethernet network that execute an Ether Link.
An Ether Link is not a master/slave model. It allows a node to send reading commands which ask
for data to other nodes. The nodes will send the data to the node after they receive the reading
commands. Owing to the fact that a node cannot send writing commands to other nodes, the use of
an Ether Link is safer than the use of a PLC Link. Besides, all the nodes in an Ethernet network can
send reading commands through TCP/IP, and the system automatically manages the transmission
of packets through TCP/IP. Compared with a PLC Link, an Ether Link is more efficient.
Please refer to the example below for more information. If users want to create an Ether Link shown
below, they have to create a data exchange table for the two data request nodes AH-01 and AH-02.
(a) AH-01 reads the data in D100~D109 in AH-02, and stores the data in D0~D9 in itself.
(b) AH-02 reads the data in D200~D219 in AH-01, and stores the data in D110~D129 in itself.
An Ether Link is based on a network. If a node is connected to several networks, users can set
several groups of parameters related to Ether Links for the networks. As a result, there may be
several groups of parameters related to Ether Links in a PLC. Owing to the fact that an Ether Link is
not a master/slave model, each node in a network can be a data demanding node and a data supply
node at the same time. In the first piece of data in the table above, AH-01 is a data requiring node,
and AH-02 is a data providing node. In the second piece of data in the table above, AH-01 is a data
providing node, and AH-02 is a data requiring node.
19.4.2 Open Ether Link Configuration

To construct an Ether Link, they have to make sure that a network is set correctly. There are three
ways to open the Ether Link Configuration window.
 Method 1
After the users select a network, they have to click Construct Ether Link on the Tools menu, or
on the toolbar.
19-53
 Method 2
Double-click a network.
 Method 3
Right-click a network, and then click Construct Ether Link on the context menu.
The Ether Link Configuration window is shown below.
19-54
 Node list: Displays the node list.

 Graphic area: Use graphics to demonstrate node settings.
 Information window: Display three pages each contains information on data exchange table,
message and device error logs.
A node shown in the display area in the figure above is described below.
 The information is composed of a node number, a PLC name, and a model name.
 The IP address assigned to AH500 series CPU module is 192.168.1.2. The start mode of the
Ether Link constructed is Always Run.
 The IP address assigned to the module installed in slot 0 is 192.168.1.3. The start mode of the
Ether Link constructed is Always Stop.
 >1< in the D block indicates that the D block demands data of node 1. The numbers at the left
side of the D block indicate that the data demanded of node 1 will be stored in D110~D119 in
node 2. The color assigned to the D block depends on the node number in the D block. Owing to
the fact that there is not any information in the M block and the L block, the M block and the L
19-55
block does not demand any data of other devices.
19.4.3 Create and Manage Data Exchange Table

If users want to create a data exchange table, they have to click the Table tab in the information
area. The node which is selected on the node list is shown in the upper left corner of the information
area. The data in the table is related to the node selected.
If the users click , a new piece of data will be added to the table. A piece of data is composed of
two parts. The left part of the data in the figure below indicates that the data demanding node AH-01
will store the data demanded in L0 in itself, and the right part of the data in the figure below indicates
that the data supply node AH-02 will supply the data in L0 in itself.
The steps of setting a data exchange group are as follows.

(1) Select a node number in the # cell for the data demanding node. After the users select a node
number, the PLC name corresponds to the node number will be appear in the Device Name
cell for the node number.
If the users select a specific node number rather than All Nodes on the node list, the data in
the table will be related to the specific node number selected, and the fixed node number in the
# cell for the data demanding node will be the specific node number selected on the node list.
19-56
(2) Select a device type in the Register cell for the data demanding node, and type an address in
the Starting Address cell for the data demanding node.
(3) Select a node number in the # cell for the data supply node. The node number in the # cell for
the data demanding node cannot be the same as the node number in the # cell for the data
supply node. After the users select a node number, the PLC name corresponds to the node
number will be appear in the Device Name cell for the node number.
(4) Select a device type in the Register cell for the data supply node, and type an address in the
Starting Address cell for the data supply node. The device type selected in the Register cell
for the data supply node does not have to be the same as the device type selected in the
Register cell for the data demanding node.
(5) Type a data length in the Size cell. A word is a unit. The maximum data length is 1900 words.
After the users type a data length, the device ranges in the Range cells will change according
to the data length typed.
The users can create data exchange groups by following the steps described above. The device
range in the Range cell for a data demanding node cannot overlap the device range in the Range
cell for another data demanding node whereas the device range in the Range cell for a data supply
node can overlap the device range in the Range cell for another data supply node. In other words,
different demanders can ask for the same data, but different data cannot be store in the same block.
If the users want to delete a piece of data, they can click the piece of data, and click .
19-57
After the users click Export, the data in the data exchange table can be exported as a CSV file.
After the users create a data exchange table, they can click Check Table Correctness on the Edit
menu or on the toolbar if they wan to check the data set in the table. The check result will be
displayed in the Message page.
19.4.4 Node List and Display Area

If users click All Nodes on the node list, all the nodes will be displayed in the display area, and all
the data exchange groups set will be in the data exchange table under the display area. Besides,
the devices in which the data demanded will be stored, and the data supply nodes are indicated in
device blocks of the nodes in the display area.
19-58
>2< in the D block in node 1 indicates that the D block demands data of node 2, and the numbers at
the left side of the D block indicate that the data demanded of node 2 will be stored in D500~D509 in
node 1. Likewise, >1< in the D block in node 2 indicates that the D block demands data of node 1,
and the numbers at the left side of the D block indicate that the data demanded of node 1 will be
stored in D1000~D1019 in node 1.
If the users click a specific node on the node list, the node and the nodes of which the node
demands data will be shown in the display area, and the data in the data exchange table under the
display will be related to the specific node selected.
In the figure below, the dotted frame indicates that node 1 on the node list is selected, and the gray
ground indicates that node 2 is a data supply node. Node 2 cannot be selected, and the information
in the M block in node 2 indicates the data which will be supplied to node 1. Owing to the fact that
node 3 does not supply any data to node 1, node 3 is not displayed in the display area.
The numbers at the left side of the D block in node 1 indicates that the data demanded of node 2 will
be stored in D500~D509 in node 1. <1> in the M block in node 2 indicates that the data in
M1000~M1129 in node 2 will be supplied to 1.
If a specific node on the node list is selected, the node in the display area will be selected. After the
users select All Nodes on the node list, they can click the information about a node in the display
area if they want to select the node. If the users click a device block in a node, the node will not be
selected. After a node is selected, a dotted frame will appear.
19-59
Once a node is selected, the node will be designated as a data demanding node. After the users
click a device block in the node selected, a blue cursor will appear. After the users click a device
block in another node (a data supply node), a green cursor will appear. The users can only click a
device block in a data supply node. They cannot select the node, otherwise the node will be
designated as a data demanding node.
The users can click to add a new piece of data to the data exchange table. The data includes
the data demanding node, the node number assigned to the data demanding node, the data supply
node, the node number assigned to the data supply node, and the device types selected.
19.4.5 Start Mode of an Ether Link

There are three start modes. Please refer to the table below for more information.
Start mode Description
Always Stop During the operation of the PLC, no data exchange is performed.
Always Run When the PLC runs, data exchange is performed.
SM Flag The performance of data exchange depends on a special relay in the PLC.
After users select SM Flag, they can set the initial state of the related special
19-60
Start mode Description

relay.
*. Please refer to manuals or technical documents for more information about special relays related to Ether Links.
The execution of an Ether Link is based on the nodes in a network. If some of the ports that a node
has are connected to a network, users can set the start modes of the ports separately. When the
Ether Link constructed is executed, the system automatically distributes reading/writing work to the
ports according to the start modes of the ports. If a port is disconnected, the system will pass the
work belonging to the port to another port.
There are three ways to set the start mode of a node.

 Method 1
Right-click CPU information or module information, and then click Set Startup Mode on the
context menu.
 Method 2
Double-click CPU information or module information.
19-61
 Method 3
After the users click CPU information or module information, they have to click on the
toolbar, or Set Startup Mode on the Edit menu.
After the users use one of the methods described above, the Starting Mode Setup window will
appear. The page displayed in the window varies with the information selected. The users can click
the tabs in the window.
Select a mode in the Start Mode drop-down list box. If SM Flag is selected, the users can select an
initial state in the Download State drop-down list box. After an initial state is selected, the users can
click OK.
19.4.6 Download Ether Link Configuration

After the parameters related to an Ether Link are set, users have to download the parameters to
PLCs. The PLCs can perform data exchange after the parameters are downloaded.
19-62
 Single node
Only the data demanding setting related to the PLC selected, the start mode of the PLC selected,
and the start modes of the modules connected to the PLC are downloaded. Before downloading
the related parameters, please make sure the system is well-connected to hosts or modules.
 Method 1
Select a data demanding node to download parameters, click on the toolbar. The users
can also download the related parameters by selecting a data demanding node, clicking the
PLC menu, pointing to Transfer, and clicking Download (Single PLC).
 Method 2
Select a data demanding node, right-click the data demanding node, and click Download
(Single PLC) on the context menu.
 Multiple nodes
Download all settings and enabling mode for data demanding nodes; before downloading, please
check the system and hosts or modules are well-connected.
 Method 1
Click the PLC menu, point to Transfer, and click Download (Multiple PLCs). The users can
also download the related parameters by clicking on the toolbar.
19-63
 Method 2
Select All Nodes on the node list, right-click All Nodes, and click Download (Multiple PLCs)
Additional remark
If the parameters set include a node which does not demand any data, the node will not demand
any data through the network specified after the parameters are downloaded to multiple nodes.
The node does not

demand any data.
19.4.7 Upload Ether Link Configuration

Users can upload the parameters related to an Ether Link in a PLC.
 Single node
Upload only the Ether Link setting parameter of single node; before uploading, please check the
system and hosts or modules are well-connected.
 Method 1
Select a data demanding node, and then click on the toolbar. The users can also
download the related parameters by selecting a data demanding node, clicking the PLC menu,
pointing to Transfer, and clicking Upload (Single PLC).
19-64
 Method 2
Select a data demanding node, right-click the data demanding node, and click Upload (Single
PLC) on the context menu.
19-65
 Multiple nodes
Upload all Ether Link setting parameters on nodes; before uploading, please check the system
and hosts or modules are well-connected.
 Method 1
Click the PLC menu, point to Transfer, and click Upload (Multiple PLCs). The users can also
download the related parameters by clicking on the toolbar.
 Method 2
Select All Nodes on the node list, right-click All Nodes, and click Upload (Multiple PLCs) on
the context menu.
Additional remark
After re-uploading Ether Link parameters, if nodes that are not assigned in NWCONFIG, the node
will be framed in red to display as Asynchronous Device. When Ether Link setting contains
asynchronous device, monitoring or down loading are not allowed.
19-66
19.4.8 Deleting Asynchronous Device

If the setting of an Ether Link includes asynchronous devices, the system does not allow the Ether
Link to be monitored, and it does not allow the parameters related to the Ether Link to be
downloaded. Users have to find out the reason for the existence of the asynchronous devices. If the
network configuration in NWCONFIG is incorrect, the users have to modify the network
configuration, and upload the parameters related to the Ether Link again. If the parameters
uploaded are not applicable to the current network configuration, the users can delete the
asynchronous devices.
Select an asynchronous device which will be deleted, and then click Delete This Asynchronous
Node on the Edit menu, or on the toolbar.
If the users want to delete all the asynchronous devices at the same time, they can click
Synchronize All Nodes on the Edit menu, or on the toolbar.
19-67
19.4.9 Enable/Disable Online Monitoring Function

In the Ether Link Configuration window, users can execute or test the Ether Link constructed by
means of the online monitoring functions provided by NWCONFIG. The users can enable/disable
the function of monitoring a single node/multiple nodes online.
Enabling/Disabling Description
Enabling or disabling the function of monitoring the node
Function
selected online
Single node The users have to make sure that ISPSoft can connect to the
Condition PLC selected normally, and they have completed the
communication setting in NWCONFIG.
Enabling or disabling the function of monitoring all the nodes
Function
online
The users have to make sure that all the nodes are connected
Multiple nodes to a network, and can connect to ISPSoft through Ethernet. The
Condition connection type that the driver selected in the Driver Name
drop-down list box in the Select a Driver window uses must be
Ethernet.
Before the users enable the online monitoring function, they have to make sure that all the nodes
are connected according to the network framework created in NWCONFIG, and can operate
normally.
(a) Every node has been connected to a network according to the network framework created in
NWCONIFG.
(b) The users have set the parameters for Ethernet ports of the nodes by means of HWCOFNIG,
and the parameters have been downloaded to the PLCs and the modules. The setting of the
parameters must be consistent with the setting in NWCONFIG.
(c) The parameters related to an Ether Link have been downloaded to the PLC selected.
(d) Every node is powered up, and can operate normally.
19.4.9.1 Enabling a Monitoring Function

 Enabling the function of monitoring a single node
 Method 1
Select a data demanding node, and then click on the toolbar, or Online (Connect to a
Single node) on the PLC menu. When the data demanding node is monitored, on the
toolbar is pressed.
19-68
 Method 2
Select a data demanding node, right-click the data demanding node, and click Online
(Connect to a Single Node) on the context menu. When the data demanding node is
monitored, on the toolbar is pressed.
 Enabling the function of monitoring multiple nodes

 Method 1
Click Online (All Nodes) on the PLC menu, or on the toolbar.
 Method 2
Select All Nodes on the node list, right-click All Nodes, and click Online (All Nodes) on the
context menu.
Additional remark
Before the system enters a monitoring mode, it checks whether the Ether Link constructed in the
Ether Link Configuration window is consistent with the setting in the PLCs. If the Ether Link
constructed in the Ether Link Configuration window is not consistent with the setting in the PLCs,
the system will ask the users to download the related parameters again.
19-69
19.4.9.2 Monitoring Status

After the system enters a monitoring mode, the node which is monitored will be colored on the node
list.
Besides, the words and the pictures in the display area will indicate the execution status of the
current Ether Link after the system enters a monitoring mode.
Status Description
: The Ether Link constructed is
 Running/Stopping executed.
: The Ether Link is not executed.
: The Ether Link constructed is
executed normally.
 Operating status
: The Ether Link constructed is not
executed normally.
: Always Stop
 Start mode : Always Run
: SM Flag
: The data exchange is being
performed.
 Data block
: The performance of the data
exchange stops.
19.4.9.3 Disabling a Monitoring Function

 Disabling the function of monitoring a single node
 Method 1
Select a data demanding node, and then click on the toolbar, or Offline (Disconnect
from a Single node) on the PLC menu.
19-70
 Method 2
Select a data demanding node, right-click the data demanding node, and click Offline
(Disconnect from a Single Node) on the context menu.
When the data demanding node selected is not monitored, on the toolbar is not pressed. If
another node is monitored, will be pressed.
 Disabling the function of monitoring multiple nodes

 Method 1
Click Online (All Nodes) on the PLC menu, or on the toolbar.
 Method 2
Select All Nodes on the node list, right-click All Nodes, and click Online (All Nodes) on the
context menu.
19.4.10 Online Start/Stop Ether Link (SM Flag)

When the start mode of a node is in SM Flag, users can directly operate the flags under online
monitoring state and start or stop a node under Ether Link operation; however, it is limited to nodes
in monitoring.
19.4.10.1 Starting the Execution of an Ether Link

 Making a single node start the execution of an Ether Link
 Method 1
19-71
If users want to make a node start the execution of the Ether Link constructed, they have to
select the node, and click on the toolbar. They can also make the node start the
execution of the Ether Link constructed by selecting the node, clicking the PLC menu, pointing
to Flag Control, and clicking Start Ether Link (Single PLC).
 Method 2
Select a node, right-click the node, and click Start Ether Link (Single PLC) on the context
menu.
 Making multiple nodes start the execution of an Ether Link

 Method 1
If users want to make all the nodes start the execution of the Ether Link constructed, they have
to click the PLC menu, point to Flag Control, and click Start Ether Link (All Online Nodes).
The users can also make all the nodes start the execution of the Ether Link constructed by
clicking on the toolbar.
19-72
 Method 2
Select All Nodes on the node list, right-click All Nodes, and click Start Ether Link (All Online
Nodes) on the context menu.
19.4.10.2 Stopping the Execution of an Ether Link

 Making a single node stop the execution of an Ether Link
 Method 1
If users want to make a node stop the execution of the Ether Link constructed, they have to
select the node, and click on the toolbar. They can also make the node stop the
execution of the Ether Link constructed by selecting the node, clicking the PLC menu, pointing
to Flag Control, and clicking Stop Ether Link (Single PLC).
 Method 2
Select a node, right-click the node, and click Stop Ether Link (Single PLC) on the context
menu.
19-73
 Making multiple nodes stop the execution of an Ether Link

 Method 1
If users want to make all the nodes stop the execution of the Ether Link constructed, they have
to click the PLC menu, point to Flag Control, and click Stop Ether Link (All Online Nodes).
The users can also make all the nodes stop the execution of the Ether Link constructed by
clicking on the toolbar.
 Method 2
Select All Nodes on the node list, right-click All Nodes, and click Stop Ether Link (All Online
Nodes) on the context menu.
Additional remark
If a node in the display area has several Ethernet ports, users can make a port start/stop the
execution of the Ether Link constructed by means of clicking an item on the context menu which
appears after they right-click the node. The execution of an Ether Link is based on the nodes in a
network. If users make a port that a node has stop the execution of the Ether Link constructed,
another node that the node has can still execute the Ether Link constructed.
19-74
19.4.11 Monitoring Table and Error Log

After users double-click a data block, the Data Monitor window will appear. The users can view the
values in the window. They cannot change the values in the window.
 After users click the Radix cell for a device, they can select a method of representing the value in
the device on the drop-down list.
 The information about the data block which is monitored is displayed.
 Users can type a device address in this box. After the users press Enter on the keyboard, they
can easily view the device address in the window.
After a node is selected, the error log in the node will be displayed in the Error Log page. If the
users select the Ether Link Error Filter checkbox, only the error log related to the Ether Link
constructed will be listed. Besides, after the users click Renew, the error log in the node will be
retrieved, and the error log retrieved will be displayed in the Error Log page. After the users click
Clear, the error log in the Error Log page and the error log in the node will be cleared.
19-75
The Error Log page contains error records from hosts and modules. When an error log is formed by
modules, the PLC model type is known in the Device Type column and the module position can be
found in Rack No. and Slot No. columns. However, when error occurs by CPU, no numbers are
shown in Rack No. and Slot No. columns.
19.5 NWCONFIG Management and Application

19.5.1 Save and Print
If users want to save the parameters set in NWCONFIG, they can click Save on the File menu, or
on the toolbar. The parameters which can be saved are the network framework created in
NWCONFIG, the parameters related to the PLC Links constructed, and the parameters related to
the Ether Links constructed. After the saving of the parameters set in NWCONFIG is complete, an
nw file whose primary filename is the project name/group name, and an nwsd file whose primary
filename is the project name/group name will appear in the folder in which the project/group of
projects is/are saved.
After the users click Print Preview on the File menu, or on the toolbar, the system will
automatically open the Print Preview window, and the network framework that the users create in
NWCONFIG will be displayed in the Print Preview window. Please refer to appendix C for more
information.
19-76
Before the users print the data related to a PLC Link or an Ether Link, they have to export the data
as a CSV file. After the CSV file is opened in Microsoft Excel, they can print the data in the CSV file.
19.5.2 Downloading
In NWCONFIG Graphic Workspace, download the routing tables produced to PLCs, the parameters
related to the PLC Links constructed, the parameters related to the Ether Links constructed to the
nodes.
19.5.2.1 Downloading Parameters

 Routing table
The routing data stored in a PLC is data related to the PLC itself, and therefore the routing tables
downloaded to nodes are different. Users have to download the routing tables produced to nodes
in the working area.
 Parameters related to a PLC Link
The parameters related to a PLC Link can only be downloaded to the PLC designated as a
master station. If the parameters related to a PLC Link are downloaded to a slave station, the
related special relays and the related special registers in the slave station will be restored to the
default setting. There is only one master station in a network. If users are not sure whether a
device was designated as a master station, and whether the parameters related to a PLC Link
was downloaded to the device, they have to download the parameters related to a PLC Link to
the device.
 Parameters related to an Ether Link
The parameters related to an Ether Link must be downloaded to the data demanding nodes.
However, the data exchange table stored in a PLC is a table related to the PLC itself. Besides, if
the parameters set include a node which does not demand any data, the data in the node will be
cleared after the parameter are downloaded to the node, and the start mode of the node will
depend on the parameters after the parameters are downloaded to the node.
19-77
19.5.2.2 Description of Downloading

There are two ways to download. One is Single node, the other is Multiple node. When
downloading communication settings, do not use Routing Mode.
 Single node
The users have to select a node in the working area.
Download window will appear. The users can also open the Optional Download window by
right-clicking the device they select, and clicking Download to PLC on the context menu.
 Multiple nodes
The users have to select an Ethernet network in the working area. After the users click Download
to PLC on the PLC menu, or on the toolbar, the Optional Download window will appear. If
the actual connection is consistent with the setting in NWCONFIG, parameters can be
downloaded to the nodes connected to the Ethernet network.
19-78
Base on the steps above, the screen will appear Optional Download window. When certain items
are in grey, the function is not supported; select the time to download and click OK.
19.5.3 ISPSoft Routing Application

When completing the network structure in NWCONFIG and successfully downloaded Routing Table
for each node, users can download and upload or monitor hosts (non-directly connected) through
routing function in ISPSoft; but, to use the function in ISPSoft, the objective needs to be AH5xo
series.
In the figure below, the actual connected host is AH-01. But, it is possible to monitor AH-03 through
routing function.
19-79
(1) Users have to activate the project for AH-03.
(2) Click the Tools menu, and then click Communication Settings….
(3) In the Communication Setting window, the users have to select the Routing Mode checkbox,
and select a device in the First Station drop-down list box.
Generally speaking, the device which actually connects to the computer is the first station. If
the computer connects to several devices, or connect to devices through Ethernet, the users
have to designate a device as the first station according to the network framework created in
NWCONFIG. Besides, if the Routing Mode checkbox is selected, the driver selected in the
Driver drop-down list box must be a driver which can connect to the first station.
After the users click OK in the Communication Setting window, AH-03 can be monitored
through AH-01.
19-80
Chapter 20 Data Backup and Data
Restoration
Table of Contents
20.1 Data Backup Memory Cards .......................................................... 20-2
20.1.1 Introduction of Data Backup Memory Cards ..................................... 20-2
20.1.2 Operating Data Backup by Memory Card ......................................... 20-2
20.2 Permanent Data Backup ............................................................... 20-3
20.3 CARD Utility .................................................................................. 20-3
20.3.1 Introduction of CARD Utility .......................................................... 20-3
20.3.2 Backup ....................................................................................... 20-5
20.3.3 Restoration ................................................................................ 20-10
20.1 Data Backup Memory Cards

20.1.1 Introduction of Data Backup Memory Cards
A DVP-EH2 series PLC can be used with DVP-256FM, a data backup memory card with a milky
cover. A DVP-EH3 series PLC can be used with DVP-512FM, a data backup memory card with a
black cover.
Install a memory card in a PLC, power the PLC up, unfold the PLC section in the project
management area in ISPSoft, and double-click Connected Information. If ISPSoft is connected to
the PLC normally, the system information about the PLC will be under the Connected Information
section. The Data Backup Memory Card item indicates whether the memory card is enabled.
20.1.2 Operating Data Backup by Memory Card

Before executing data backup by memory card, please make sure that ISPSoft and PLC hosts are
connected. Click PLC Memory<=>Memory Card… on the PLC menu, select the PLC
Memory=>Memory Card option button or the Memory Card=>PLC Memory in the Type section in
the PLC Memory<=>Memory Card window, and click OK.
20-2
Ch a pt er 2 0 D ata B ac k up a n d Da ta R es t or at i on
*. Please refer to the related user manuals or technical documents for more information about data backup memory
cards, the models which are supported, and the firmware versions which are supported.
20.2 Permanent Data Backup

There is flash memory in a DVP-EH2/DVP-EH2-L/DVP-EH3/DVP-EH3-L/DVP-SV/DVP-SV2 series
PLC. The flash memory in a PLC is used to back up the data in the PLC. Please refer to manuals or
documents for more information about the functions of flash memory.
Users have to make sure that ISPSoft is connected to a PLC before they perform a data backup or a
data restoration through ISPSoft. Click PLC Permanent Backup Setting on the Tools menu. In the
PLC Permanent Backup Setting window, the users have to select the PLC=>Flash option button
or the Flash=>PLC option button in the Flash Memory Read/Write section, select contents which
will be transferred, select the Enable option button or the Disable option button in the Warning
Message section. (A data restoration is automatically performed when the flat battery in a PLC
causes a data loss. If the Enable option button in the Warning Message section is selected, a
warning message appears when a data restoration is automatically performed.) After the setting in
the PLC Permanent Backup Setting window is complete, the users can click OK.
20.3 CARD Utility

20.3.1 Introduction of CARD Utility
There are SD slots on AH/AS series CPU modules. Users can back up/restore data in an AH/AS
series CPU module through the use of a memory card. Besides, ISPSoft provides CARD Utility for
AH/AS series CPU modules. The users can back up/restore data in an AH/AS series CPU module
20-3
or an ISPSoft project. The program codes, the parameter settings, the hardware configurations, and
the network configurations in an AH/AS series CPU module or an ISPSoft project can be backed up.
The values in the devices in an AH/AS series CPU module can also be backed up. For the module
software in the HWCONFIG, only ECAT Builder supports data backup and restoration. Please refer
to operation manuals or technical documents for more information about the specifications of the SD
cards which can be inserted into each series CPU modules, and the usage of the SD cards.
As for the network configuration, the AH5x0 series will only back up data that is related to their own
modules and ISPSoft CPU projects, such as Routing Table and Ether Link. Likewise, not all network
configurations can be restored back to the ISPSoft project. Please refer to chapter 19 for more
information about a network configuration.
The functions supported by CARD Utility are described below. The diagram below is a flowchart.
 If users export data from an AH series CPU module as a backup file (*.dup), the data exported
can be saved in the memory card or in the computer. Users can also export the values in the
devices in the AH/AS series CPU module.
 If users export an ISPSoft project of an AH500 series CPU module as a backup file (*.dup) can
only be saved in the computer and the values in the devices of the AH500 series CPU module are
not included. Data such as register editing (*.dvl), device status editing (*.dvb), file register editing
(*.wft) of AS series and AHxxEMC can be seen as values in the device and can be exported and
saved as backup files.
 Users can put the backup file saved in the memory card inserted in a CPU module into the CPU
module.
 Users can import a backup file (*.dup) saved in a computer back to the AH series CPU module or
restore the backup file to an ISPSoft project. For AS series, if the users choose to restore the
backup file to an ISPSoft project, the system will automatically skip the values in the devices and
the hardware configuration in the backup file. Data such as register editing (*.dvl), device status
editing (*.dvb), file register editing (*.wft) of AS series and AHxxEMC can be seen as values in the
device and can be imported back to restore the ISPSoft project.
 For AHxxEMC series users can backup the G-Code files on the SD card of the CPU module to
the computer. And when restoring, users can restore the G-Code files on the computer to the SD
card of the CPU module or to the ISPSoft project.
After users double-click CARD Utility in the project management area, the system will open the
CARD Utility window. Select the controller and PLC type from the drop-down list and then click
Next to start.
20-4
20.3.2 Backup
When the backup source/backup destination contains a host CPU or memory card, please check
that ISPSoft and the hosts is connected.
(1) Select Backup (To DUP File) option button in the CARD Utility window, then click Next.
(2) Select a backup source, and then click Next.

After the users select the ISP Project (Compiled and saved) option button, they have to click ,
and select an isp file in the Open window. If the program in the isp file selected is not compiled, a
message appears when the isp file is backed up; meanwhile, please re-compile and save to re-
execute data backup.
20-5
(3) When backup source is CPU , a window appears to choose whether the backup should
include or exclude device content.
(4) Select a backup destination. If the backup source is an ISPSoft project, the backup destination
must be a computer.
a. If the Memory Card (PLC Side) option button is selected, the filename of the backup
file which will be produced will be AUTOEXEC.dup, and the path which points to the backup
20-6
file is Root directory of the memory card\\PLC CARD\AH500\SysDup\AUTOEXEC.dup

for AH series.
For AS300 series, it is Root directory of the memory card\ SDCard \PLC
CARD\AS300\SysDup\AUTOEXEC.dup
For AS200 series, it is Root directory of the memory card\ SDCard \PLC
CARD\AS200\SysDup\AUTOEXEC.dup
b. If the PC (DUP File) option button is selected, the users have to click , select a folder
in the Save in drop-down list box in the Save As window, and type a filename in the File name
box.
(5) For AHxxEMC series when the backup is from a CPU module to the computer, users can also
choose to backup the G-Code files on the SD card of the CPU module to the computer.
20-7
(6) When the backup source is selected to the ISPSoft Project, users can set up the PLC
password. The options are to set the password the same as the Project (If the password for the
Project is not set, the same goes to the PLC password.), set a new PLC password, and do not
set a PLC password. When the option “Setting new PLC password” is selected, the setup
window will show up.
20-8
(7) After the users make sure that the summary in the CARD Utility window is consistent with the
data backup which will be performed, they can click Execute.
Even if the users click Cancel to stop ISPSoft from performing the data backup in the process of
backing up data in the CPU module onto the memory card inserted in the CPU module, the CPU
module will still performs the data backup. The users can turn off the CPU module to stop the data
backup from being performed. However, the backup file produced is not a complete backup file. As a
result, the users have to delete the backup file from the memory card.
If the Memory Card (PLC Side) option button is selected, the filename of the backup file which will
be produced will be AUTOEXEC.dup, and the path which points to the backup file will be Root
directory of the memory card\AH500\SysDup\AUTOEXEC.dup. If there is an old backup file in
the memory card inserted in the CPU module which is connected to ISPSoft, the Warning window
will appear. The users have to click Replace, Archive, or Cancel in the Warning window according
to the message in the window.
20-9
If the data backed up is protected by passwords, these passwords will also be backed up.
Data backup Description
The data backed up includes the PLC ID and the PLC
CPU module  Memory card
password set in the CPU module.
The system asks users to type a PLC ID and a PLC
password. If the PLC ID and the PLC password typed
CPU module  Computer
are correct, the data backup will be performed. The data
backed up includes the PLC ID and the PLC password.
The data backed up includes the program ID, the project
ISPSoft project  Computer password and the PLC password set while setting up the
backup.
(8) After the data backup is performed, the users can click Home or Close in the CARD Utility
window.
20.3.3 Restoration
When restoration source/restoration destination has a host CPU or memory card, please make sure
that ISPSoft and the host is connected
(1) Select Restore (From DUP File) option button in the CARD Utility window, and then click Next.
20-10
(2) Click at the right of the path column and select a backup file to restore.
When Memory Card (PLC side) (Need Connection) is selected, the system automatically
connect to a PLC and displays all backup files by memory card in the window. Double-click on
the backup files for restoring.
2 0 - 11
For AHxxEMC series when the backup is from a computer, the system will prompt to ask if
you’d like to restore the G-Code in the computer and save the restored G-Code files to the SD
card of the CPU module or ISPSoft project. If yes, the .nc files that share the same directory
with the DUP files will be saved to the selected location.
*.G-Code filenames will be 100.nc~227.nc correspond to the G-Code items (100~227) in the SD card from the G-Code editor
of the ISPSoft. For more information, please refer to chapter 21.
(3) Select a restoring destination, and then click Next.

a. If the users want to put the backup file selected into the CPU module which is connected to
ISPSoft, they have to select the CPU (Need Connection) option button.
b. If ISP Project is selected, click in the directory column to setup the file name and path after
restoring. When the path already contains the same file name, the file content will be covered by
the data restored.
20-12
(4) After the users make sure that the summary in the CARD Utility window is
consistent with the data restoration which will be performed, they can click Execute.
If the users click Cancel in the process of restoring data to the CPU module, the data will not
be completely restored. To prevent the CPU module from operating incorrectly, the users have
to restore the CPU module to the factory setting if they do not perform the data restoration
20-13
again. Besides, the CPU module will still performs the data restoration even if the users click
Cancel in the process of restoring a backup file in the memory card inserted in the CPU
module. The users can turn off the CPU module to stop the data restoration from being
performed.
If restoration source/restoration destination contains a password and an ID, the password and
the ID will be processed as follows.
Data restoration Description
a. The ID in the backup file must be the same as the ID in the
CPU module, otherwise the data restoration will not be
performed.
b. If there is a PLC password in the CPU module, the
password in the backup file must be the same as the PLC
Memory cardCPU module password in the CPU module. Otherwise the data
restoration will not be performed.
c. If there is no PLC password in the CPU module, and there
is a password in the backup file, the system will perform
the data restoration, and the password in the backup file
will become the PLC password in the CPU.
a. The ID in the backup file must be the same as the ID in the
CPU module, otherwise the data restoration will not be
executed.
b. If there is a PLC password in the CPU module, the
password in the backup file must be the same as the PLC
password in the CPU module. Otherwise the data
ComputerCPU module
restoration will not be performed, and a message will
appear.
c. If there is no PLC password in the CPU module, and there
is a password in the backup file, the system will perform
the data restoration, and the password in the backup file
will become the PLC password in the CPU.
While restoring, if the backup file is PLC password protected,
users will be asked for the password to proceed. After
restoration, the ID and the password in the backup file will
Computer ISPSoft project
become the program ID and the project password in ISPSoft
project but the PLC ID and PLC password will not be saved
to ISPSoft.
(5) When execution is complete, users can choose Home to return to the main page or
or Close.
20-14
20-15
MEMO
20-16
Chapter 21. G-Code Editor and E-CAM
Editor
Table of Contents
21.1 G-Code Editor (Not Supported by the Current ISPSoft Version) ........ 21-2
21.1.1 About G-Code .............................................................................. 21-2
21.1.2 G-Code Command Structure .......................................................... 21-2
21.1.3 Using G-Code Editor ..................................................................... 21-4
21.2 E-CAM Editor ..................................................................................... 21-8
21.2.1 About E-CAM (Electronic CAM) ....................................................... 21-8
21.2.2 The Significance and Description of E-CAM ...................................... 21-8
21.2.3 Using E-CAM Editor ...................................................................... 21-9
21-1
I S P Soft Us er M an u a l
21.1 G-Code Editor (Not Supported by the Current ISPSoft

Version)
21.1.1 About G-Code

During the control of motion, users can generate G-codes for the complex processing paths of two
axes (or more than two axes) by means of computer-aided manufacturing software, and the
G-codes can be input to a controller which can drive the axes. The time of developing a motion
program can be saved. G-code is a CNC (computer numerical control) programming language
widely used in automatic equipment. Delta motion controllers and ISPSoft support the majority of
G-codes on the market. The minorities of G-codes which are not supported are skipped, and are not
executed.
21.1.2 G-Code Command Structure

A G-code is composed of an instruction name and operands, and an operand is composed of the
indication of a function and the setting of a parameter. In the figure below, the instruction name
represents the function which is executed, the indication of functions represents the targets of the
operands, and the setting of the parameters represents the values of the operands. The instruction
G00 indicates that the x-axis and the y-axis are moved at the maximum speed to the target position
(100, 100).
Indication of a function
Operand
Setting of a parameter
Instruction name
Here are some basic items of the supported formats and basic G-Code instructions.
 In the beginning of every G-Code, there is a parameter mark "N" to indicate a new line for
example N1 or N2.
 As long as the format of an instruction is not destroyed, leaving spaces is allowed. For example,
G01X50 Y15F20 is legal, and is equivalent to G01 X50 Y15 F20. G01X50Y15F 20 is illegal
because there are spaces between F and 20.
 Users can put several instruction names in a line, e.g. G91G01X10Y30F50G04X4.5. (This
function will be available in the next version.)
 If instructions of the same type are in a line, the last instruction is given preference. For example,
G02G00G01 X10 Y30 F50 is equivalent to G01 X10 Y30 F50 because G02, G00, and G01 are
movement instructions. (This function will be available in the next version.)
 G00/G01/G02/G03 supports inheritance function (meaning the next row of codes without G code
can inherit the previous G codes) while some G codes do not possess this function. The speed
parameter (F) of G01/G02/G03 can be extended. Equivalent to G00 X-40 Y-50
Equivalent to G00 X-40 Y-50
21-2
Ch a pt er 2 1 G - Co d e E di t or an d E- C A M E d it or
Equivalent to G03 X-40 Y-50 R10 F20
 Input type of constant operand parameter: Arabic numerals and floating points
E.g. N0 G0 X100.0 Y100.0
 Quick positioning (G0) does not need to set speed

E.g. N0 G0 X100.2 Y500.0
 At least one of the position unit of axis parameters X/Y/Z is saved in G00, G01, while other
omitted axis parameters can refer to the closest parameter values from the previous rows of
codes.
 There are two ways to execute comments :

 Use “and” to wrap comments, but nested comments are not allowed. E.g. (Comment)
 Add words after “%”, e.g. %comment
 The operand parameters X, Y, Z, I, J, K, R can be written in any order and not a particular order
to fulfill the needs of writing G codes.
E.g: N0 G1 X100 Z300 Y200.45 F400 ＝＞ N0 G1 X100 Y200.45 Z300 F400
The G code formats are listed in the following table.

G code Function Format
G0 Quick Positioning N_G0 X_Y_Z_A_B_C
G1 Linear interpolation N_G1 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_F_
N_G2 X_Y_Z_I_J_F_
Clockwise circular N_G2 X_Y_Z_I_K_F_
G2 arc/helical N_G2 X_Y_Z_J_K_F_
interpolation
N_G2 X_Y_Z_R_F_
N_G3 X_Y_Z_I_J_F_
Anticlockwise N_G3 X_Y_Z_I_K_F_
G3 circular arc/ N_G3 X_Y_Z_J_K_F_
helical interpolation
N_G3 X_Y_Z_R_F_
XY plane for circular

G17 N_G17
interpolation
XZ plane for circular N_G18

G18
interpolation
YZ plane for circular N_G19

G19
interpolation
G90 Absolute mode N_G90
G91 Relative mode N_G91
21-3
21.1.3 Using G-Code Editor

There are 2 options under the G-Code Editor, select G-Code to save the codes in the PLC and
G-Code (External SD Card) to save the codes to the external SD Card on the PLC. (Currently, the
ISPSoft does not support this function in DVPxxMC). Select one, right-click the selected option and
then click New to open the New G-Code Program setting window. Type a name and an item ID for
this G-Code. Users can also set up a password to protect the G-Code data. When a password is set,
the system will ask for the password upon next editing. Up to 64 sets of G-Code can be created
(max. 250KB for each set) in the PLC.
21-4
After the G-Code is created, an editing window will appear.
 Toolbar icons: functional buttons are provided for users to modify the G-Code easily.
 Toolpath view area: the toolpath is created according to the programs written in the programming
area.
 G-Code programming area: type the G-Code here.
The function buttons of the G-Code Editor are described below.
Icon Name Description
Display grids in the toolpath view area, show/hide
Show/Hide Grid
grids in the XY, YZ, XY plane respectively.
Switch to the XY plane Switch the view seen to the XY plane.
Switch to the XZ plane Switch the view seen to the XZ plane.
Switch to the YZ Plane Switch the view seen to the YZ plane.
Show/Hide the display of dotted lines representing

Show/Hide G0 Trace
rapid moves (G0)
Vertical CCW Rotation Rotate the toolpath view counter-clock wisely.
Vertical CW Rotation Rotate the toolpath view clock wisely.
To reverse the toolpath view upwardly and

Horizontal Top Rotation
horizontally
To reverse the toolpath view downwardly and
Horizontal Down Rotation
horizontally
Adjust the toolpath view area automatically to fit the
Auto Fit
screen
Zoom In Increase the magnification of the toolpath view.
Zoom Out Decrease the magnification of the toolpath view.
21-5
Users can right-click the created G-Code item to open the context menu and select Delete to delete
this item. Or select Property to edit the name and the password. Note that Item ID is not allowed to
be changed.
While writing a G-Code in the programming area, the current drawing G-Code will be shown in read
in the toolpath view area.
21-6
Users can click, hold and drag the mouse to move the toolpath in the toolpath view area.
Users can right-click, hold and drag the mouse to rotate the toolpath in the toolpath view area.
After all the setups are done, download the parameters and the project to the PLC. Refer to section
16.1.3 for Downloading / Uploading a Project.
21-7
21.2 E-CAM Editor

21.2.1 About E-CAM (Electronic CAM)
A mechanical cam is an input object with irregular shape. It makes a
follower move regularly by coming into contact with the follower. A
traditional mechanical cam is composed of a cam, a follower, and a
support. As the image shown, when a cam rotates, the follower will
go move according to the shape of the cam. For an operation of
motion control, the relative movements between axes are achieved
by the rotation of a cam.
Use a cam chart to define the relation between a follower and a cam
to simulate the movements of a cam controlled by a PLC, making a
slave axis to move by the master axis according to their defined
relation. The benefit of using a E-CAM is that users can modify the
electronic cam data in an electronic cam in software. Users do not
need to modify the mechanical design and no depreciation costs.
21.2.2 The Significance and Description of E-CAM

A created E-CAM chart is as the image shown below. In the cam chart, the horizontal axis
represents the master axis used and the vertical axis represents the slave axis used. Values (such
as number of pulses sent) on the cam chart are all single digits. The range of 0-3000 on the
horizontal axis represents an E-CAM cycle and the vertical axis represents the units of the relative
slave axis outputs.
If an electronic cam operates cyclically, the slave axis of the electronic cam moves in accordance
with electronic cam data when the master axis of the electronic cam moves. After the master axis
completes an electronic cam cycle (3000 units sent), the number of pulses that the master axis
sends will continue to increase. However, after the slave axis completes an electronic cam cycle, it
will repeat the electronic cam cycle. The relation between the positions of a master axis and the
positions of a slave axis is the repeated extension of electronic cam data.
If a motion controller is connected to a master servo motor and a slave servo motor, the master
servo motor will regarded as a drive shaft rotating in a direction, and the slave servo motor will be
regarded as a processing shaft which rotates back and forth. This characteristic can be applied to
flyingsaws and flyingcuts.
Cycle 1 Cycle 2 Cycle 3
21-8
21.2.3 Using E-CAM Editor

Right-click the E-CAM Editor in the project management area and then click New to see a New
E-CAM Chart setting window. Type a name and select an item ID and a mode. Users can also set up
a password to protect the E-CAM data. After a password is set, the system will ask for the password
upon next editing when the mode is set to Graphic Mode. When the mode is set to File mode, the
password will be asked for upon each import and export.
Name Function Description AS AHxxEMC DVPxxMC

Item ID E-CAM table item ID Max.16 Max.32 Max.32
ASDA Using ASDA file format in
V
File Format E-CAM table
File Mode E-CAM table in file mode V
Graphic E-CAM table in graphic
V V
mode mode
When dragging the first and
last control point, data
Flag Cycle V
synchronization of the two
secondary axes data starts.
Password Password for E-CAM table V V
Upload
Upload master axis and
E-CAM to V
slave axis position from PLC
File
Right-click on the created E-CAM item and choose Delete to remove the item; or select Property to
reset item name or password but the item ID cannot be changed.
21-9
Use the AH-Motion function block in Delta library, e.g. DFB_CamWire to modify E-Cam graph point
position online and then implement Upload E-CAM Data to File function to save the master axis
and slave axis position in E-CAM table in another file. The function requires connection with
AHxxEMC hosts first then right-click Upload E-CAM Data to File in E-CAM Editor. Meanwhile, the
E-CAM in PLC window will appear.
21-10
When the directory/path for file saving is selected, click Upload and Save. Two files, one is the
xxxx_scrptdata.txt that appears in the directory before any editing on the function blocks and
xxxx_uploadptdata.txt that appears after any editing on the function blocks. The xxxx is the E-CAM
name (see below).
before any editing

on the function
blocks
after any editing on

the function blocks
When selecting Graphic Mode, it will open E-CAM edit window once E-CAM graph is created. The
description are as followed.
 E-CAM curve area: the chart is created according to the position, velocity and
acceleration of the E-CAM. Users can also use their mouse to move the points
directly in the chart or use the function buttons to add new data points or sections on
the created chart.
 Data setting area: users can use the function buttons to add, edit, or delete the
created charts. The data in the Data setting area and the E-CAM chart will be
synchronized with one another.
2 1 - 11
Explanation of E-CAM Editor function icons (see below).
Icon Name Description AS AHxxEMC DVPxxMC
Select tools Switch to the selected tool V V V

Add a key point in the
Add a key point V V V
diagram
Delete a key point in the
Delete a key point V V V
diagram
Add a line segment that
Add line segment V V
include two key points in
Setting Open setting window V V V
Export E-CAM in
Export .csv .dst .dst
corresponding format
Import E-CAM in
Import .csv .dst .dst
corresponding format
Upload slave axis Upload data from data
V
data registers/servers
Download slave Download data to data
V
axis data registers/servers
Add a key point data in the
Add a row V V V
planning area
Delete a key point data in
Delete a row V V V
the planning area
Add a tappet point icon V
Add tappet point
on the curve
V
Display CAM table Display CAM table
Display tappet V
Display tappet point table
point table
Click to add new point then click on the diagram for the added key point position. Meanwhile,
the section below will automatically add the key point data or select in the planning section and
input master axis data as 180 (see below). To add several key points, click and then click
several times on the diagram to add the key points data.
21-12
Users can click then select the key point to delete on the diagram and the section below will
automatically delete the key point data or select in the planning section to delete the key point
data (see below). To delete several key points, click and then continuously click on the key
points to delete.
21-13
During E-CAM execution, the CAM may trigger corresponding action in certain specific position and
this requires a close/open state setting regarding the assigned position of CAM. When CAM moves
to that position, the close/open state change can control the corresponding action and the
close/open state is called CAM-tappet.
The CAM-tappet can set in any position of CAM and one CAM can set up a maximum of 128
CAM-tappet. When CAM moves across in positive or negative direction, the tappet state can be
configured into (close, set, reset, reverse). The tappet state can be obtained through the
corresponding command of CAM-tappet in the controller program. The following chart describes the
CAM-tappet state:
When CAM passes the corresponding position of tappet, the tappet state does not
Close
change.
When CAM passes the corresponding position of tappet, the tappet state is set to
Set
TRUE.
When CAM passes the corresponding position of tappet, the tappet state is set to
Reset
FALSE.
When CAM passes the corresponding position of tappet, the tappet state switch
Reverse once between TRUE and FALSE. ( If TRUE then change to FALSE, if FALSEthen
change to TRUE).
Note: CAM-tappet state will reset once the next CAM cycle starts.
Use the add tappet point icon on the toolbar or right-click on the diagram to choose add a
tappet point (see below).
21-14
Each key point data in the planning section allows users to setup a CAM curve section. Then,
several rows of key points data form the CAM curve and all the created key points data forms a
E-CAM cycle. For each key point data, users can input the master and slave axis relations. The
descriptions are shown below.
Name Function Description AS AHxxEMC DVPxxMC

Record E-CAM motion
Key Point Max.721 Max.40 Max.40
coordinates
CAM Curve
Constant speed V
Const Speed
CAM Curve
Constant acceleration V
Const Acc.
CAM Curve
Single Hypothesis V
Single Hypot.
CAM Curve
Cycloid V
Cycloid
CAM Curve
Polynomial V V V
Polynomial
CAM Curve
B- Spline V
B-Spline
Used data points of the
Resolution Auto-configuration Max. 2047 Auto-configuration
current section.
Click Setting or to open other setting windows. Explanations are as followed.
21-15
 Master position: Setting main axis display range in the diagram.

 Slave position: Setting slave axis display range in the diagram.
 Resolution: Setting the E-CAM table, the total interval curve resolution
Click add line segment or and click on the position to add in the diagram and the section
below will automatically add the linesegment containing two key points data. When the line segment
is added, the function of the CAM curve with line segment added is fixed in Polynomial mode. On
the left of the line segment, item ID appears and on the right, Line Start and Line End shows.
To set the interval line segment to into a line n Polynomial mode, right-click the key point in the
diagram and then select Become A Line.
21-16
21-17
When setting to Become A Line, please take note:

 The previous and current section has to be polynomial to use this function.
 The key points of Line Start and Line End cannot share line property with other line intervals.
To remove the created line property, right-click the key point of Line Start or Line End of the
polynomial interval line sections in the diagram and then choose Remove A Line.
21-18
When using Remove A Line function, please take note:

 Property regarding Line Start or Line End key points can use this function.
Click the upper toolbar icon to export planning table data. However, the file format to export is
different based on the project PLC types and cannot be in common use.
To import planning table data, click the icon to import the selected files.
To download slave data, users need to setup connection between ISPSoft and AS series PLCs first.
The following example demonstrates by opening an E-CAM table and increase up to 8 key points.
Then, select Download Slave Data [PC=> Data Register/Servo] and choose to download to file
register (FR) or servo from the pop-up window. The E-CAM area number is set to save the curve
area. Here, we download 8 key points which equals to 7 curve area. When changing the start
position or E-CAM area number, the system automatically calculates the ending position. Click
Transfer and a pop-up window appears when transfer is complete.
21-19
Click Servo to download the files to the servo. First, users need to select a corresponding servo
number, then setup the start position. When Synchronization Data to PLC is selected, the current
E-CAM data will synchronize into PLC, however, the E-CAM number and item ID need to be the
same as in PLC for data synchronization.
Click Upload Slave Data [PC=> Data Register/Servo] and in the pop-up window, we can upload 6
key points, so the E-CAM area number is changed to 5 and click Transfer to finish uploading. The
following diagram shows that 6 key points are re-drawn on the E-CAM table.
21-20
When in File Mode, users need to export E-CAM table for edit. Right-click on the E-CAM item and
choose Export. Select a path and file name, then click Save to complete exporting.
21-21
Input E-CAM master position (X) and slave position (Y) and format as 0 for the export file in csv
format; input maximum of 2048 sets of XY position points and at least 2 sets of XY position points.
When input is complete, click save and return to ISPSoft to execute import.
Master Position
Slave Position
Once return to ISPSoft, right-click on the selected E-CAM item and choose Import. Then, select on
the file to open and a pop-up window indicating successful import appears. Click OK to complete
importing.
When importing is complete, the corresponding E-CAM diagram is shown to view graphic data
regarding imported files.
21-22
When finish programming E-CAM Editor, it can be used together with motion control commands or
function blocks in POU. E.g. MC_Camin command enables assigned E-CAM item according to
E-CAM Editor item ID. For more information on using MC_Camin command, please refer to the
programming manuals of related PLC types.
21-23
E-CAM Item ID
When switching to E-CAM graphic mode, click OK and an Information window appears asking “If the
E-CAM mode is changed, the previous data will be initialized. Do you wish to continue? ” Choose
Yes and all E-CAM data is initialized.
21-24
Chapter 22 Wizard Tool
Table of Contents
22.1 Position Planning Table ..................................................................... 22-2
22.1.1 About the Position Planning Table .................................................. 22-2
22.1.2 Setting the Position Planning Table................................................. 22-2
22.1.3 Positioning Table Simulation .......................................................... 22-6
22.1.4 Upload and Download Position Planning Table .................................. 22-8
22.1.5 Control Mode – Single axis point-to-point motion ............................. 22-8
22.1.6 Control Mode – Single axis multi-segment ....................................... 22-9
22.1.7 Control Mode - 2-axis linear interpolation motion ............................ 22-10
22.1.8 Control Mode - 2-axis Arc Interpolation Motion ............................... 22-11
22.2 Data Tracer ..................................................................................... 22-12
22.2.1 About Data Tracer ....................................................................... 22-12
22.2.2 Opening the Data Tracer Window .................................................. 22-12
22.2.4 Sampling Modes ......................................................................... 22-16
22.2.5 Measurement ............................................................................. 22-18
22.3 Data Logger ..................................................................................... 22-21
22.3.1 About Data Logger ...................................................................... 22-21
22.3.2 Opening the Data Logger Window ................................................. 22-22
22.3.4 Watch and Record ....................................................................... 22-26
22.3.5 Measurement ............................................................................. 22-29
22.4 High Speed Counter ......................................................................... 22-32
22.4.1 About High Speed Counter ........................................................... 22-32
22.4.2 Using High Speed Counter............................................................ 22-32
22-1
22.1 Position Planning Table

22.1.1 About the Position Planning Table
ISPSoft provides an easy table for users to set up the single-axis or 2-axis motion control. It is not
required for users to know the complicated motion control rules to complete the setup. Create and
download a position planning table and then along with the instructions, the PLC can output axis
motions in the set number and order accordingly.
22.1.2 Setting the Position Planning Table

Click Wizard (!) > Position Planning Table on the tool bar to open the Position Planning Table
window which is categorized into 3 sections as shown in the image shown below.
 Icon toolbar: Provide buttons for various functions with function description explained
below.
 Parameter setting area: Settings regarding axis control. Upload password protection
is used for password setting. Provides axis control mode and motion path setting in
the position table.
 Setting for Simulator: Use relative mode (symbol/address) or absolute mode
(symbol/address) to simulate for the objective position.
Icon toolbar description:

Icon Name Function Description
Import Import *.pnt to the current position planning table.
Export Export positioning table to *.pnt.

Upload Read positioning table settings via hosts.
Positioning Table
22-2
Ch a pt er 2 2 W izar d To o l
Icon Name Function Description

Download
Write positioning table settings in hosts.
Positioning Table
In Axis Settings page, users can setup each axis control output. The number of axis shown varies
according to the supported PLC types. When executing 2-axis interpolation movement, do NOT
choose Pulse for Output instead choose Pulse/Dir or AB phase. Then click Enable next to the
Output and input self-defined Value Setting and Unit Name as well as the Value Setting of Pulses
for one motor rotation. The follow image shows that the setups of Axis 1 for 100 mm can output
1000 pulses in one motor rotation. Click Default Setting to restore the initial setup for the unit
setting page.
In Upload Password Settings page, the passwords are set to protect during uploading for position
planning table downloaded to the host. After typing in the Password and again for Confirmation,
click OK and when successful, a hint indicating ‘password protection activated’ is shown below. To
remove the password setting, input the Password in the box to click OK and when successful a hint
indicating ‘password protection is not activated’ is shown below.
Please note that Upload Password Settings only provides password for uploading the position
planning table. When other planning table is downloaded to hosts with Upload Password Settings,
the position planning table will be covered.
22-3
In Positioning Settings page, the edit section provides functions to add, modify or delete. When data
are added, it will appear in the list section.
Edit
List
To add data, first input settings in each column of the edit section and click Add so the data is added
to the corresponding axis control mode page (see below) based on Control Mode.
To modify, select the data in the list section then edit its content in the edit section and click Modify
to update this data in the list section (see below).
22-4
To delete, select the data in the list section and click Delete in the edit section. This data is deleted
from the list section.
Every number in the list section can move up or down by click / . But please note that
Completion action, No. of next section and Completion flag (I/M) will not move (see below).
Will not move
When completing the positioning table data, click Export data to *.pnt (see below). Then, click
Import and choose *.pnt file to import the positioning data.
22-5
22.1.3 Positioning Table Simulation

Select a row in the list section for simulation then click Assigned Number Diagram to view
a pop-up window that contains a complete graph-based path planning (see below) that begins with
No.17.
Simulation toolbar description:
Figure Function
Select to show all axes or choose an axis from the
drop-down list.
Select a No. in the graph to be in bold type or change
and choose a color in the right-side.
Select to view the arrow indicating motion direction.
Adjust the graphs to appropriate fit.
Enlarge the graph in X direction.
Narrow the graph in X direction.
Enlarge the graph in Y direction.
Narrow the graph in Y direction.
Enlarge the graph.
Narrow the graph.
By clicking 2-axis arc interpolation in the list section, then click 2-axis simulation mode (see
below), both 2-axis linear interpolation and arc interpolation are shown on the same simulation
graph with a mixture image of both continuous paths.
22-6
By clicking Single-axis point-to-point motion page, then click single axis simulation mode , the
single-axis point-to-point and multi-segment simulation graphs only shows the same mode path.
Also, right-click on an empty spot in the single simulation graph window and a pop-up list appears
for switching the scroll wheel direction (see below).
For Target Simulation functions, users need to declare symbols in DWORD or DINT type in global
symbols. Then, select either Absolute (Symbol/Address) or Relative (Symbol/Address) for
ABS/REL mode in edit section, and type in symbol or device for Objective position (see below).
For Objective position in the position planning table, the smallest unit is DWORD. So, please
be aware that D100 is estimated to occupy the length of D100 and D101.
22-7
When completed, click Add in the target simulation section to automatically add this data.
Meanwhile, type a value in Objective Position (Simulator) item list, users can check the simulation
path in Single simulation mode or 2-Axis simulation mode.
22.1.4 Upload and Download Position Planning Table

When uploading or downloading position planning table, users need to connect ISPSoft to a host
and select Upload for the position planning table saved in the host. When the table contains upload
password protection, a window referring to password appears. Input the correct password to upload
the position planning table (see below).
Choose the Download icon for downloading the position planning table to the host.
22.1.5 Control Mode – Single axis point-to-point motion

Description regarding single axis point-to-point mode setting.
 No.：The number is generated by the system and the maximum No. is 200.
 Control Mode: A motion type. Choose Single-axis point-to-point motion.
 Axis No.: An axis controlled by the data.
22-8
 ABS/REL mode:
Relative Mode increases or decreases based on the current coordinates.
Absolute Mode increases or decreases based on the absolute coordinates as target position.
Relative mode (Symbol/Address) increases or decreases based on the current coordinate
address, symbol or address are allowed.
Absolute mode (Symbol/Address) increases or decreases based on the absolute
coordinates as target position, symbol or address are allowed.
 Target position: Target coordinate. For ABS/REL mode, the options include symbol/address.
 Target speed：Maximum speed of the target.
 Bias speed: The start and ending speed.
 Acceleration time: The time to reach target speed.
 Deceleration time: The time to reach stop.
 Completion action:
Go to next segment to complete the data and continue to the next.
Completion refers to an end once data is complete.
 Completion flag (I/M): When the data execution is complete, set the register to ON. The
register range is set as M0~M8191 or I510~I519 only when Completion action is set to
Completion.
 No. of next segment: Continue with the next data number, not limited to the same assigned
axis number. But, take note that the same axis number cannot output more than 2 numbers
from the table or output position command at the same time. When Completion action is set
to Completion, the number is automatically continued to the next segment
Notice for table input:

1. The target speed cannot be set to 0. The objective position also cannot be set to 0 in the relative
mode.
2. I number can be used more than once. Users must determine through which row number the I
number can be completely outputted.
3. The instruction which the start table outputs is API2718 TPO. API2719 TPWS can be used to
modify the output parameters while PLC is running.
22.1.6 Control Mode – Single axis multi-segment

Description regarding single axis multi-segment mode setting.
 No.：The number is generated by the system and the maximum No. is 200.
 Control Mode: A motion type. Choose Single-axis multi-segment motion.
 ABS/REL mode:
 ACC/DEC time: The time to reach target speed and stop.
 Abort signal (I/M): When execution of the table is not yet complete and the register of abort
signal is set ON, the next segment of position planning is executed. Users can input I for abort
number or M for register bane. For information on supported abort numbers, please refer to
related product programming manuals.
22-9
Completion.

1. The objective position cannot be set to 0 in the relative mode. The objective positions of two
adjacent row numbers cannot be set to the same value in the absolute mode.
2. If the value in the ACC/DEC time is not 0, the acceleration/deceleration is fixed to 1ms. If the
value in the ACC/DEC time is set to 0, it means there is no acceleration or deceleration.
4. The instruction which the start table outputs is API2718 TPO. API2719 TPWS can be used to
22.1.7 Control Mode - 2-axis linear interpolation motion

Description regarding 2-axis linear interpolation mode performs the motion on XY plane. Two data
are used for this mode.
 No.：The number is generated by the system, the 2-axis mode occupies two data. The second
data No. will add a T in front of the number. Under 2-axis mode, the maximum No. is 100 and
T100, a total of 100 set.
 Control Mode: A motion type. Choose 2-axis linear interpolation motion.
 Coord: The X or Y coordinates in the simulation graph.
 ABS/REL mode:
 ACC/DEC time: The time to reach target speed and stop.
Completion.
22-10

1. The PLC will automatically run at the set speed when the target speed or the Acc\Dec time is set
to 0. The objective position cannot be set to 0 in the relative mode. The objective positions of
two adjacent row numbers cannot be set to the same value in the absolute mode.
3. The instruction which the start table outputs is API2718 TPO. API2720 TPWL can be used to
22.1.8 Control Mode - 2-axis Arc Interpolation Motion

Description regarding 2-axis arc interpolation mode performs the motion on XY plane. Two data are
used for this mode.
 No.：The number is generated by the system, the 2-axis mode occupies two data. The second
data No. will add a T in front of the number. Under 2-axis mode, the maximum No. is 100 and
T100, a total of 100 set.
 Control Mode: A motion type. Choose 2-axis arc interpolation motion.
 Coord: The X or Y coordinates in the simulation graph.
 ABS/REL mode:
 Tangential speed (Hz): Movement in a circular path in three dimensions and the magnitude of
that vector is the tangential speed.
 Center shift value: The distance from the center of the line between the arc target point and
start point to the center of a circle, such as S in the following figures. From point A to point B, a
clockwise rotation will generate an arc less than 180 ° if S>0 and an arc more than 180 ° if S<0.
 Direction: Users can select CW clockwise motion or CCW counter clockwise motion.
2 2 - 11

Completion.

1. The PLC automatically calculates the output speed in this function. The objective position
cannot be set to 0 in the relative mode. The objective positions of two adjacent row numbers
cannot be set to the same value in the absolute mode.
3. The instruction which the start table outputs is API2718 TPO. API2721 TPWL can be used to
22.2 Data Tracer

22.2.1 About Data Tracer
Data Tracer is used once a triggering condition is reached to collect real-time symbol variables or
status and using waveform graphs to analyze the value trends.
22.2.2 Opening the Data Tracer Window

Please compile the current project before using the function. Click Wizard > Data Tracer on the tool
bar to open the Data Tracer setup window as the image shown below.
22-12
 Icon toolbar: Provides functions in icons and explanation below.

 Waveform display area: Displays real-time symbol variables or waveform of the
device.
 Parameter setting area: Sample Parameter page is for setting the sample source and
trigger condition. Measurement page is for displaying the values and adjusted
waveform colors and proportions through measuring equipment.
Explanation of icon toolbar:

Icon Name Function
The sample settings and curve data results are saved to
Save All
the specified path.
Export Sampling
The sample settings are exported to the specified path.
Config
Import Sampling
The sample settings are imported from the specified path.
Config
The sample curve data are exported in the format of.bmp
Export Curve Data
and .csv to the specified path.
The colors of curves in the data tracer and environment can
Configuration
be set.
Separate Curves Multiple curves are separated automatically.
Overlap Curves Multiple curves are overlapped with the center line.
Show Grid Line Show or Hide the grid line.

Horizontal There will be two horizontal lines in the curve display area
Measuring Lines for users to measure the curve.
Vertical Measuring There will be one vertical line in the curve display area for
Lines users to measure the curve.
Vertical Measuring There will be two vertical lines in the curve display area for
Connect/Disconnect Connect or disconnect the PC and PLC.
Upload Sampling The sample settings in the data tracer are read from the
Config from PLC PLC.
Download Sampling The sample settings in the data tracer are written to the
Config to PLC PLC.
Real Time Monitor The PC reads the curve of the source from the PLC in real
time.
After the trigger condition is met, a total 200 points of curve
One-Shot Trigger data, including pre- and post- of the triggered point will be
read from the PLC.
Whenever the trigger condition is met, a total 200 points of

Continuous Trigger curve data, including pre- and post- of the triggered point
will be read from the PLC.
22-13
22.2.3 Sample Parameter Settings

For sample setting page, the following chart shows that the items may differ based on different PLC
types. The Sample Period is for setting sample time period. While Trigger Setting is for trigger
position and condition settings. When trigger condition is reached, the host maintains a total of 200
data and reflected in the Waveform area.
Name Desc AS AHxxEMC AH5x1

System Cycle Time Host scan time V V V
ECAT Cycle Time ECAT scan cycle Max. 1000
Multiples
User-defined Time User-defined time Max.1000 Max.1000
Trigger Position Triggering Max. 200 Max. 10000 Max. 200

position on the
Supports Global
Symbol, Local
Triggering Supports Symbol, Axis Supports
Symbol/Device
device/ symbol Global Symbol Symbol, ECAT Global Symbol
Symbol, STRUCT
Symbol
Max. value for
Triggered Points Max. 10000
trigger position
When selecting symbol variables or device in BOOL for Symbol/Device column, the compare
condition will auto-select BOOL (see below). Or choose ON, OFF, rising edge-triggered, falling
edge-triggered, rising or falling edge-triggered from the drop-down list. When the symbol or
device fulfills the setting condition, the trigger will show on the data tracer.
When choosing Word, DWord or Real as symbol variables or devices for Symbol/Device column,
the system auto-selects Word (see below) or select DWord or Real from the drop-down list and
select conditions by choosing >, <, =, != ( not equal), ~ (a range) or !~ (out of a range) together
with the numbers in front and back of the setting. When the setting symbol or device fulfills the
condition, the trigger is shown on the data tracer. The following image shows value in D100 is 0 > 0
and fulfills trigger condition; when setting is 10 !~ 100, this means D100 is no more than 10 or
exceeds 100 to fulfill trigger condition.
22-14
To add sample symbols, click button in Symbol Name and a pop-up Add Sample Source window
appears. Then click the button to select the added symbol variables or type the device name in
the window and click Add to the sample source list (see below).
Symbols that are declared in global symbols and compiled in projects, are selected here. Manual
device settings or identifier comments are also included.
22-15
To delete the sample source which has been added, select the deleted item and click Delete.
When sample parameter settings are complete, click Export or from the icon toolbar and save
the sample parameter settings in .dtr format. Then, users can choose Import or to restore
sample parameter settings in new projects.
22.2.4 Sampling Modes

When sample parameter setting for data tracer is complete, download parameter setting during
connection mode and use the icon toolbar to switch and view the waveforms from the following
three modes.
Continuous trigger
One-shot trigger
Real-time watch
 Real-time watch: According to the set sample period, the curves for variable symbol or device
value or state in the sample source are constantly drawn to the data tracer. The curve chart will
keep the latest 200 pieces of data while moving leftward.
22-16
 One-shot trigger: According to the trigger position setting, the sample data to the right of the
trigger position will be displayed in waveforms when the trigger condition is met and the trigger
is done once only. The following diagram shows that the trigger position is set to 50. When
trigger condition M10 is ON, the sample source drawing ranges from 50~200 based on sample
period. The following red vertical line represents the trigger position in the waveform.
 Continuous trigger: The data tracer will keep the state of constant reading according to the
trigger position setting. The sample data of the pre- and post- triggered points will be displayed
in the data tracer whenever the trigger condition is met.
To view the curve chart, the state of the continuous trigger button must be restored from OFF
to ON. As the following example shows the trigger position is set to 50 and thus the curves for
the sample source according to the sample period setting will be drawn 200 pieces including
49 pieces of the pre-triggered points and 150 pieces of the post-triggered points whenever the
trigger condition M10=ON is met. Where the red vertical line is represents the trigger position
in the wave shape chart.
22-17
22.2.5 Measurement
In Measurement, the page provides adjustment regarding the waveform shape of the data tracer for
enhanced display effect. The following image shows the points of each scale in adjusting the
horizontal coordinate for X Axis Proportion modification.
In Measurement, the page offers the values of mean, maximum and minimum regarding waveform
information of selected device in Y axis. Each waveform has different color, proportion and shift
settings. The Proportion refers to the proportion of vertical coordinate and the following diagram
shows proportion of each scale set in 50 and 20 for comparison.
22-18
Shift can be set to modify the position of the curve in the display as shown in the following figures.
22-19
Offset: 0
Offset: 5
Drag the two horizontal measuring lines Y1 and Y2 and adjust to the measured position together
with horizontal measuring lines. The parameter setting area displays every value regarding
horizontal measuring lines. The Y1 value refers to Y1 column, Y2 value refers to Y2 column and
differences between Y1 and Y2 refers to I ∆ Y I column.
Drag the vertical measuring line Xc to match with other vertical measuring lines. The Y value column
below shows an intersected corresponding value regarding each sample resource and measuring
line Xc.
22-20
The following diagram measures the time value of data tracer by matching two vertical measuring
lines. Click from the toolbar to start the two vertical measuring lines and use the mouse to drag
the two vertical lines, X1 and X2 in adjusting to the measured position. Time value is shown in the
following I ∆ X1 column. (t value: the communication time between a PC and PLC)
22.3 Data Logger

22.3.1 About Data Logger
Data logger is used long-term recording of symbol variables or device values and status that uses
waveforms for diagram display. The data are saved in the hosts and memory card for convenient
value trend analysis. .
22-21
22.3.2 Opening the Data Logger Window

Please compile the current project before using the function. And then click Wizard> Data Logger
to open the Data Logger window as below.
 Icon toolbar: Provides function buttons for operating the data logger with function
descriptions below.
 Waveform display area: Displays real-time symbol variables or waveform of the
device.
 Parameter Setting area: Sample Parameter page is for setting sample source and
parameters. Measurement page is for displaying the values and adjusted waveform
colors and proportions through measuring equipment.
Explanation of icon buttons on the icon toolbar
Icon Name Function
The sample settings and curve data result are saved to the
Save All
specified path.
Export Sampling
The sample settings are exported to the specified path.
Config
Import Sampling
The sample settings are imported from the specified path.
Config
The sample curve data are exported in the format of.bmp
Export Curve Data
and .csv to the specified path.
The colors of curves in the data tracer and environment are
Configuration
set.
22-22
Icon Name Function
Separate Curves Multiple curves are separated automatically.
Overlap Curves Multiple curves are overlapped with the center line.
Show Grid Line Show or Hide grids
Horizontal There will be two horizontal lines in the curve display area
Measuring Lines for users to measure the curve.
Vertical Measuring There will be one vertical line in the curve display area for
Vertical Measuring There will be two vertical lines in the curve display area for
Connect/Disconnect The PC and PLC are connected or disconnected.
Upload Sampling The sample settings in the data tracer are read from the
Download Sampling The sample settings in the data tracer are written to the
Config to PLC PLC.
The PC reads the curve of the source from the PLC in real
Real Time Monitor
time.
Click this button to start recording or cancel the clicking of
Record Data
the button to stop recording.
Upload Sampling The recorded data in the data logger are read from the
Write to Memory
Write the data recorded in the PLC to the memory card.
Card
22.3.3 Sample Parameter Settings

In sample parameter page, the Sample Points are used to setup the number of samples; Sampling
Method can be categorized into Periodical Sampling and Triggered Sampling. When using
Periodical Sampling, users need to setup cycle time once every week; when using Triggered
Sampling, users need to setup triggered device. When triggered device is ON, the sampling takes
place, however, the triggered device is auto-switched to OFF once sampling is complete. When the
number of sample points has reached, users can select either Stop Recording or Continue
Recording (Replace old data). To add sample symbols, click button in Symbol Name and a
pop-up Add Sample Source window appears. Then click the button to select the added symbol
variables or type the device name in the window and click Add to the sample source list (see below).
22-23
Symbols that are declared in global symbols and compiled in projects, are selected here. Manual
device settings or identifier comments are also included.
22-24
To delete the sample source which has been added, select the deleted item and click Delete.
When sample parameter settings are complete, click Export or from the icon toolbar and save
the sample parameter settings in .dlg format. Then, users can choose Import or to restore
sample parameter settings in new projects.
22-25
22.3.4 Watch and Record

When sample parameter setting for data logger is complete, download parameter setting during
connection mode and use the icon toolbar to switch and watch or record real-time data.
Record Data
Real-time Watch
 Real-time Watch: According to the set sample period, the curves for the variable symbol or
device value or state of the sample source are constantly drawn to the data logger. The screen
will be adjusted to the appropriate range based on the curve shape and only the data of the
latest sample points are kept. The PLC does not record the sample source in this mode.
 Record Data: To record symbol variables or device value status of sample sources and save
in the internal memory of hosts. Click Record Data to start recording. Use When Sample
Points Reach to Stop Recording, a pop-up window appears to confirm whether or not to
upload records. Click OK and a confirmation window pops-up to confirm whether data
recording need to be continued, select cancel and the uploaded data appear in the waveform
display area.
22-26
When the sample points reach to Continue Recording (Replace the old data), the hosts will
continue to record sample resource data and keep the latest sample point range data. Click
record Record Data and once recording stops then click Upload PLC records or directly click
Upload PLC records during non-stop recording in the pop-up window to confirm recording
again. Click Cancel to display recording data from hosts in the waveform display area.
22-27
Whether recording data or not, users can click Write in Memory Card or so that recording data
from hosts can write in the memory card & content\ PLC
CARD\Type\Log\DATA_LOGGER_YMD_HMS.
22-28
22.3.5 Measurement
In Measurement, the page offers the values of mean, maximum and minimum regarding waveform
information of selected device in Y axis. Each waveform has different color, proportion and shift
settings. The Proportion refers to the proportion of vertical coordinate and the following diagram
shows proportion of each scale set in 100 and 50 for comparison.
To set Shift, users can adjust the position of the waveforms in the screen (see below).
22-29
Offset：0
Offset：5
The waveform values in the data logger can be measured by using horizontal and vertical
measuring lines after the Measurement tab is clicked. Click to open the horizontal measuring
line and to open the vertical measuring line.
Drag the two horizontal measuring lines Y1 and Y2 and adjust to the measured position together
with horizontal measuring lines. The parameter setting area displays every value regarding
horizontal measuring lines. The Y1 value refers to Y1 column, Y2 value refers to Y2 column and
differences between Y1 and Y2 refers to I ∆ Y I column.
22-30
Drag the vertical measuring line Xc to match with other vertical measuring lines. The Y value column
below shows an intersected corresponding value regarding each sample resource and measuring
line Xc.
The following diagram measures the time value of data logger by matching two vertical measuring
lines. Click from the toolbar to start the two vertical measuring lines and use the mouse to drag
the two vertical lines, X1 and X2 in adjusting to the measured position. Time value is shown in the
following I ∆ X1 column.
22-31
22.4 High Speed Counter

22.4.1 About High Speed Counter
The high speed counter tool enables users to select the register number of the corresponding high
speed counter based on the type of the high speed counter, format of the value to be counted and
input point number so that DCNT instruction can be set quickly.
22.4.2 Using High Speed Counter

Double-click DCNT instruction in the ladder diagram to open the High Speed Counter Setting
window as follows.
22-32
Firstly, select the type of the high speed counter such as Hardware-1 Phase 1 Input, Hardware 1
Phase 2 Input and so on. Then select Input Point or Counter device (see below).
Set the arrival value with options including Decimal, Hex or D device from the drop-down menu and
input the value or D device number on the right.
Click OK and the high speed counter number and setting values are put in DCNT instruction.
22-33
MEMO
22-34
Appendix A USB Connection
Table of Contents
A.1 Installing the USB Driver for an AS Series CPU module ..................A-2
A.1.1 Installing the USB Driver in Windows XP with SP3........................... A-2
A.1.2 Installing the USB Driver in Windows 7.......................................... A-5
A.1.3 Installing the USB Driver in Windows 8.1 ..................................... A-10
A.1.4 Installing the USB Driver in Windows 10 ...................................... A-13
A.2 Create USB Driver in COMMGR ...................................................... A-16
A.3 Setting the USB Port on a DVP-SX2 Series PLC .............................A-18
A-1
A.1 Installing the USB Driver for an AS Series CPU

module
A.1.1 Installing the USB Driver in Windows XP with SP3
The installation of the USB driver for a PLC on Windows XP is introduced below. If users want to
install the USB driver for a PLC on another operating system, they have to refer to the instructions in
the operating system for more information about the installation of new hardware.
(1) Make sure that the PLC is supplied with power normally. Connect the PLC to a USB port on
the computer with a USB cable. Select the No, not this time option button in the Found New
Hardware Wizard window, and then click Next.
(2) The name of the USB device detected is displayed in the window. The device name shown in
the figure below is the name of an AH500 series CPU module. Different models have different
names. Please select the Install from a lost or specific location (Advanced) option button.
(3) The Delta PLCs which are equipped with built-in USB interfaces are listed in the tabled below.
After ISPSoft version 2.00 or above is installed, the drivers for DVP-SX2 series PLCs, DVP-SE
series PLCs, and AH500 series CPU modules will be in the folders denoted by the paths in the
table.
A-2
A pp e nd ix A U S B C o n nec t io n
Model Path
DVP-SX2,
Installation path of ISPSoft\drivers\SX2_USB_Driver\
AH560EN2
DVP-SE Installation path of ISPSoft\drivers\Delta_PLC_USB_Driver\
AH500 Installation path of ISPSoft\drivers\Delta_PLC_USB_Driver\
*. The default installation path of ISPSoft is C:\Program Files(x86)\Delta Industrial Automation\ISPSoftx.xx.
Specify a path according to the PLC which is connected. If the driver for a PLC is gotten in
another way, users have to specify the corresponding path. Click Next to carry on the
installation.
A-3
(4) After the correct driver is found in the folder denoted by the path, the system will install the
driver. If the Hardware Installation window appears during the installation, please click
Continue Anyway.
(5) Click Finish after the installation is finished.
A-4
(6) Open the Device Manager window after the installation is finished. If the name of the USB
device connected is under Ports (COM&LPT), the installation of the driver is successful. The
operating system assigns a communication port number to the USB device.
*. The device name shown in the figure above is the name of an AH500 series CPU module. Different models
have different names.
Additional remark
 If the PLC is connected to another USB port on the computer, the system may ask users to install
the driver again. The users can follow the steps above, and install the driver again. After the
driver is installed, the communication port number that the operating system assigns to the USB
device may be different.
 If Windows XP SP3 has not been installed on the computer, an error message will appear during
the installation. Users can deal with the problem in either way below.
(a) Cancel the installation, install Windows XP SP3, and reinstall the driver according to the steps
above.
(b) Get the file needed, and specify the path pointing to the file in the Files Needed window.
A.1.2 Installing the USB Driver in Windows 7

The installation of the USB driver for an AS series CPU module on Windows 7 is introduced below. If
users want to install the USB driver for an AS series CPU module on another operating system, they
have to refer to the instructions in the operating system for more information about the installation of
new hardware.
 Make sure that the AS series CPU module is supplied with power normally. Connect the AS
series CPU module to a USB port on the computer with a USB cable.
 The name of the USB device detected will be displayed in the Control Panel > Device Manager
window. Please select and double-click AS300.
A-5
 Click Update Driver…. in the AS300 Properties window.
A-6
 Click Browse my computer for driver software.
 After ISPSoft version 3.00 or above is installed, the driver for the AS series CPU module will be
in the folder denoted by the path Installation path of ISPSoft \drivers\Delta_PLC_USB_Driver\.
 Specify the correct path. If the driver for the AS series CPU module is gotten in another way,
users have to specify the corresponding path. Click Next to carry on the installation.
A-7
 After the correct driver is found in the folder denoted by the path, the system will install the driver.
If the Windows Security window appears during the installation, please click Install this driver
software anyway.
A-8
 Click Close after the installation is finished.
 Open the Device Manager window after the installation is finished. If the name of the USB
device connected is under Ports (COM&LPT), the installation of the driver is successful. The
operating system assigns a communication port number to the USB device.
A-9
Additional remark
 If the PLC is connected to another USB port on the computer, the system may ask users to
install the driver again. The users can follow the steps above, and install the driver again. After
the driver is installed, the communication port number that the operating system assigns to the
USB device may be different.
A.1.3 Installing the USB Driver in Windows 8.1

Windows 8.1 driver signature enforcement provides a way to improve the security of the operating
system by validating the integrity of a driver or system file each time it is loaded into memory.
However since Delta PLC USB driver does not include the driver signature, this section will help
users to disable driver signature enforcement functionality in Windows 8.1 to ensure a success
Delta PLC USB installation. This act is only valid for a single time. The setting will return to its
original state after restarting.
Steps to disable driver signature enforcement in Windows 8:
1. Press the button 【WIN】+【I】 on the keyboard to see the Setting interface. Click “Change
PC settings”.
A-10
2. The PC settings window will appear. Select “General” and then “Restart now” under “Advanced
startup”.
A - 11
3. After the computer is restarted, select “Troubleshoot”under “Choose an option”. And then
select “Advanced options”.
4. From the Advanced options page, select “Startup Settings” to see the Startup Settings. From
this page select “Restart” to restart the computer.
5. Press “7” or “F7” to choose “Disable driver signature enforcement” and the system will direct you
to the Windows 8 operating page. Users can then install the Delta PLC USB driver now.
6. For the Delta USB drive installation, please refer to installation in Windows 7 section.
A-12
A.1.4 Installing the USB Driver in Windows 10

Windows 10 driver signature enforcement provides a way to improve the security of the operating
system by validating the integrity of a driver or system file each time it is loaded into memory.
However since Delta PLC USB driver does not include the driver signature, this section will help
users to disable driver signature enforcement functionality in Windows 10 to ensure a success Delta
PLC USB installation. This act is only valid for a single time. The setting will return to its original
state after restarting.
Steps to disable driver signature enforcement in Windows 10:
1. Click Start and then Settings. Then, press SHIFT key and click Restart
SHIFT +
2. After the computer is restarted, select Troubleshoot, then choose “Advanced options”.
A-13
3. Select Startup Settings from the Advanced options page, then click “Restart” .
4. In Startup Setting page, press 7 or F7 to execute “Disable driver signature enforcement” and the
system will restart once completed.
A-14
5. To install Delta USB drive, right-click Start and select Device Manager.
A-15
6. Please refer to A1.2 for installing USB drive (Delta_PLC_USB_Driver) in Window 7.
A.2 Create USB Driver in COMMGR

The steps of creating a driver whose connection type is USB in COMMGR are as follows.
(1) Make sure that the PLC is supplied with power normally. Connect the PLC to a USB port on
the computer with a USB cable.
(2) Make sure that COMMGR is started, and the icon representing COMMGR is displayed on the
system tray. If the icon representing COMMGR is not displayed on the system tray, users can
start COMMGR by clicking the shortcut on the Start menu (Start>Programs>Delta Industrial
Automation>Communication>COMMGR).
A-16
(3) Double-click the icon representing COMMGR on the system tray, and then click Add in the
COMMGR window.
(4) Type a driver name in the Driver Name box, and then select USB (Virtual COM) in the Type
drop-down list box in the Connection Setup section. If the PLC connected is a DVP-SX2
series PLC, RS232 in the Type drop-down list box must be selected. Please refer to the
following section for more information.
(5) Select a device name which corresponds to the PLC connected in the COM Port drop-down
list box in the Communication Port section, select the number of times the sending of a
command is retried if a connection error occurs in the Time of Auto-retry box, and select an
interval of retrying the sending of a command in the Time Interval of Auto-retry box. Click
OK.
A-17
If the device name corresponding to the PLC connected does not appear in the COM Port
drop-down list box, users have to check whether the device name of the PLC connected is
under Ports (COM&LPT). If the device name of the PLC connected is not under Ports
(COM&LPT), the users have to check whether the PLC is correctly connected to the computer
with the USB cable, and check whether the driver for the PLC is corrected installed on the
computer. After the users make the checks, they have to close the Driver Properties window,
and open the window again.
(6) Click the driver created in the COMMGR window, and then click Start.
*. Please refer to section 2.4 for more information about subsequent tests and the operation of COMMFR.
A.3 Setting the USB Port on a DVP-SX2 Series PLC

The operation of the USB port on a DVP-SX2 series PLC differs from the operation of the USB ports
on other models in that a circuit which converts USB to RS-232 is installed in the DVP-SX2 series
PLC. As a result, the operation inside the DVP-SX2 series PLC adopts RS-232 although the port on
the PLC is a USB port. Users must select RS232 in the Type drop-down list box in the Driver
Properties window if they want to create a driver in COMMGR. The setting of the communication
protocol for exchanging data through the USB port is the same as the setting of the communication
protocol for exchanging data through a general RS-232 port.
Users can set the communication protocol for exchanging data through the USB port on a DVP-SX2
PLC by means of writing a value into D1109. Please refer to the programming manual for DVP-SX2
series PLCs for more information. If users want to create the driver in COMMGR, they have to make
sure that the communication protocol for exchanging data through the driver is the same as the
communication protocol for exchanging data through the USB port on a DVP-SX2.
A-18
Appendix B Notification for PLC Types
Table of Contents
B.1 Device Addresses for PLC Types ........................................................ B-2
B.1.1 AH/AS Series Device Types ............................................................. B-2
B.1.2 The X/Y/D/L Device Address Format in AH/AS Series .......................... B-3
B.1.3 Real-time Access of X/Y Contact in AH/AS Series ............................... B-4
B.1.4 DVPxxMC Device Types................................................................... B-5
B.1.5 DVPxxMC Series Device Address Format ........................................... B-6
B.1.6 DVPxxMC Retentive Devices ............................................................ B-6
B.2 Device Resources for PLC Types ........................................................ B-7
B.2.9 AHCPU560-EN2 ........................................................................... B-11
B.2.10 AHxxEMC .................................................................................... B-11
B.2.11 AS200/AS300 .............................................................................. B-11
B.2.12 DVPxxMC .................................................................................... B-12
B.3 Compile & Uploading/Downloading Time ........................................ B-12
B-1
AH/AS series PLCs are slightly different from DVP series PLCs. Users have to read the manuals for
different models before they develop projects. The points to which users have to pay attention when
they develop a project for an AH/AS series CPU module are described in appendix B.
B.1 Device Addresses for PLC Types

B.1.1 AH/AS Series Device Types
The device types of AH/AS series CPU modules are listed in the following table.
Device type Access property Description
Input relay
X Bit/Word
It represents the state of a digital input. (*1)
Output relay
Y Bit/Word
It represents the state of a digital output. (*1)
Auxiliary relay
M Bit
The state of a bit is stored in an auxiliary relay.
Stepping relay
S Bit It is used as a state flag for a step in a sequential function
chart.
Data register
D Bit/Word
Operation data is stored in a data register. (*1)
Link register
L Bit/Word
A link register is used for data exchange. (*1) (*2)
Timer
If a timer is used as a bit device, the timer is ON when the
Bit time interval which is measured conforms to the setting
value, and the timer is OFF when the time interval which
T is measured does not conform to the setting value.
Timer
Word If a timer is used as a word device, the value stored in the
timer is the present value of the timer.
Counter
If a counter is used as a bit device, the counter is ON
when the number of times a particular event or process
Bit has occurred conforms to the setting value, and the
counter is OFF when the number of times a particular
C event or process has occurred does not conform to the
setting value.
Counter
Word If a counter is used as a word device, the value stored in
the counter is the present value of the counter.
32-bit counter
If a 32-bit counter is used as a bit device, the 32-bit
counter is ON when the number of times a particular
Bit event or process has occurred conforms to the setting
value, and the 32-bit counter is OFF when the number of
HC times a particular event or process has occurred does not
conform to the setting value.
32-bit counter
Word If a 32-bit counter is used as a word device, the value
stored in the 32-bit counter is the present value of the
32-bit counter.
B-2
A pp e nd ix B N ot if ic a t i on f or P LC Typ e s
Device type Access property Description

Index register
E Word The value stored in an index register indicates the offset
for a device modified. (*3)
Special auxiliary relay
SM Bit It is used as a state flag for a special function of the
system. (*4)
Special data register
SR Word It is used as a data register for a special function of the
system. (*4)
*1. AH/AS series CPU modules support the manipulation of the bits in the input relays, the output relays, the data
registers, and the link registers. For example, X0.1 indicates that bit 1 in X0 is manipulated, Y0.1 indicates that bit
1 in Y0 is manipulates, D0.1 indicates that bit 1 in D0 is manipulates, and L0.1 indicates that bit 1 in L0 is
manipulated. Please refer to the following sections for more information.
*2. A link register is used for data exchange, but it can also be used as a general data register. There is no link
register for AS series PLC.
*3. The index registers that AH/AS series CPU modules have are E devices. AH500 series CPU modules do not have
F devices.
*4. AH/AS series PLCs are different from DVP series PLCs in that the special auxiliary relays and the special data
registers in AH500 series PLCs are called SM devices and SR devices.
Please refer to Programming Manual or PLC Instructions and Special Registers Reference in a
project for a CPU module in ISPSoft for more information.
B.1.2 The X/Y/D/L Device Address Format in AH/AS Series

The X/Y devices in DVP series PLCs are represented by X0, Y1, and etc. The X/Y devices which
are used as bit devices in AH/AS series CPU modules are represented by X0.0, Y0.0, and etc. The
X/Y devices which are used as word devices in AH/AS series CPU modules are represented by X0,
Y0, and etc. X0.0 represents the first bit (the lowest bit) in X0, and X0.15 represents the last bit (the
highest bit) in X0.
After the value in D0 is moved to Y1, the states of Y1.0~Y1.15 will change.
B-3
The bits in the X/Y devices in AH/AS series CPU modules can be manipulated. The bits in the D/L
devices in AH500 series CPU modules can also be manipulated in the same way. Please refer to
the following example. The state of M0 is sent to D0.2. Suppose the initial value in D0 is 0. When M0
is ON, the value in D0 becomes 4.
If the bits in the X/Y/D/L devices which are word devices in an AH500 series CPU module are
manipulated, the memory blocks that the X/Y/D/L devices occupy are manipulated. However, the
memory blocks that the T/C/HC devices used as bit devices occupy are different from the memory
blocks that the T/C/HC devices used as word devices occupy. If a timer is used as a bit device, the
timer is ON when the time interval which is measured conforms to the setting value, and the timer is
OFF when the time interval which is measured does not conform to the setting value. If a timer is
used as a word device, the value stored in the timer is the present value of the timer. If a counter is
used as a bit device, the counter is ON when the number of times a particular event or process has
occurred conforms to the setting value, and the counter is OFF when the number of times a
particular event or process has occurred does not conform to the setting value. If a counter is used
as a word device, the value stored in the counter is the present value of the counter.
B.1.3 Real-time Access of X/Y Contact in AH/AS Series

The way in which the input/output in an AH/AS series CPU module is updated is similar to the way in
which the input/output in a DVP series PLC is updated in that the input/output in either model will be
updated after the program in the model is scanned. However, an AH/AS series CPU module
supports a special modification. If the X device or the Y device in the network in a program is
modified by “D”, the system updates the state of the device when the network is executed. Only X
devices and Y devices can be modified by “D”. Symbols can not be modified by “D”.
When network 1 is executed, the system reads the state of X0.0. Likewise, the system sends the
state of M1 to Y0.0 when network 2 is executed.
The instructions which support the modification by “D” are listed in the following table. If an X device
which is modified by “D” or a Y device which is modified by “D” is used in an instruction which is not
listed in the table below, the system will regard it as incorrect syntax, and an error will occur after the
B-4
program is compiled. Besides, only the bits in the X devices which are word devices and the bits in
the Y devices which are word devices can be modified by “D”, and the operands in the applied
instructions can not be modified by “D”.
Device type Instruction
X LD/LDI/LDP/LDF/OR/ORI/ORP/ORF/AND/ANI/ANDP/ANDF
Y OUT/SET/RST/PLS/PLF
The figure below is an example of applying the modification by “D” legally.
The figure below is an example of applying the modification by “D” illegally. The Y device is modified
by “D”. It can not be used as an input contact.
B.1.4 DVPxxMC Device Types
 Device Name Explanation

Unlike AH/AS or DVP series, DVPxxMC series adopts standard IEC (see below).
 Device List used in DVPxxMC Software

No. Item Content
1 Prefix 1 symbol I Q M
Input Output Intermediate
2 Prefix 1 name
device device device
3 Prefix 2 symbol X B W D L
4 Data type of prefix 2 BIT BYTE WORD DWORD QWORD
5 %IX0.0 %IB0 %IW0 %ID0 %IL0
6 Device example %QX0.0 %QB0 %QW0 %QD0 %QL0
7 %MX0.0 %MB0 %MW0 %MD0 %ML0
B-5
B.1.5 DVPxxMC Series Device Address Format
 The Corresponding Relationships of Devices

The table below shows %ML0 includes %MB0~%MB7, %MD0 includes %MB0~%MB3 and %MW0
includes %MB0~%MB1.
Corresponding relationships
Device The 1st WORD The 2nd WORD The 3rd WORD The 4th WORD
name Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
... … ... … ... … ... …
0 7 8 15 0 7 8 15 0 7 8 15 0 7 8 15
%MX %MX0.0~0.7 %MX1.0~1.7 %MX2.0~2.7 %MX3.0~3.7 %MX4.0~4.7 %MX5.0~5.7 %MX6.0~6.7 %MX7.0~7.7
%MB %MB0 %MB1 %MB2 %MB3 %MB4 %MB5 %MB6 %MB7
%MW %MW0 %MW1 %MW2 %MW3
%MD %MD0 %MD1
%ML %ML0
Below, the table shows %ML1 includes %MB8~%MB15, %MD2 includes %MB8~%MB11, %MW4
includes %MB8~%MB9 and %MB8 includes %MX8.0~8.7.
Corresponding relationships
Device The 5th WORD The 6th WORD The 7th WORD The 8th WORD
name Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
... … ... … ... … ... …
0 7 8 15 0 7 8 15 0 7 8 15 0 7 8 15
%MX10.0~10. %MX11.0~11. %MX12.0~12. %MX13.0~13. %MX14.0~14. %MX15.0~15.

%MX %MX8.0~8.7 %MX9.0~9.7
7 7 7 7 7 7
%MB %MB8 %MB9 %MB10 %MB11 %MB12 %MB13 %MB14 %MB15
%MW %MW4 %MW5 %MW6 %MW7
%MD %MD2 %MD3
%ML %ML
B.1.6 DVPxxMC Retentive Devices

The retentive devices include %MW0~%MW999. Also, variables in the software can set to retentive
or non-retentive. The retentive volume is 100K byte.
B-6
B.2 Device Resources for PLC Types

B.2.1 AHCPU500-EN/AHCPU500-RS2
Device type Address range
X Word: X0~X63 Bit: X0.0~X63.15
Y Word: Y0~Y63 Bit: Y0.0~Y63.15
D Word: D0~D16383 Bit: D0.0~D16383.15
L Word: L0~L16383 Bit: L0.0~L16383.15
M M0~M8191
S S0~S2047
C C0~C2047
HC HC0~HC63
T T0~T2047
E E0~E31
SR SR0~SR2047
SM SM0~SM2047
Number of memory blocks
which can be assigned to 64
function block instances
B-7
X Word: X0~X127 Bit: X0.0~X127.15
Y Word: Y0~Y127 Bit: Y0.0~Y127.15
D Word: D0~D32767 Bit: D0.0~D32767.15
L Word: L0~L32767 Bit: L0.0~L32767.15
M M0~M8191
S S0~S2047
C C0~C2047
HC HC0~HC63
T T0~T2047
E E0~E31
SR SR0~SR2047
SM SM0~SM2047
X Word: X0~X255 Bit: X0.0~X255.15
Y Word: Y0~Y255 Bit: Y0.0~Y255.15
D Word: D0~D65535 Bit: D0.0~D65535.15
L Word: L0~L65535 Bit: L0.0~L65535.15
M M0~M8191
S S0~S2047
C C0~C2047
HC HC0~HC63
T T0~T2047
E E0~E31
SR SR0~SR2047
SM SM0~SM2047
X Word: X0~X511 Bit: X0.0~X511.15
Y Word: Y0~Y511 Bit: Y0.0~Y511.15
D Word: D0~D65535 Bit: D0.0~D65535.15
L Word: L0~L65535 Bit: L0.0~L65535.15
M M0~M8191
S S0~S2047
C C0~C2047
HC HC0~HC63
B-8

T T0~T2047
E E0~E31
SR SR0~SR2047
SM SM0~SM2047
X Word: X0~X127 Bit: X0.0~X127.15

Y Word: Y0~Y127 Bit: Y0.0~Y127.15
D Word: D0~D24575 Bit: D0.0~D24575.15
L Word: L0~L24575 Bit: L0.0~L24575.15
M M0~M8191
S S0~S2047
C C0~C2047
HC HC0~HC63
T T0~T2047
E E0~E31
SR SR0~SR2047
SM SM0~SM2047
X Word: X0~X255 Bit: X0.0~X255.15

Y Word: Y0~Y255 Bit: Y0.0~Y255.15
D Word: D0~D49151 Bit: D0.0~D49151.15
L Word: L0~L49151 Bit: L0.0~L49151.15
M M0~M8191
S S0~S2047
C C0~C2047
HC HC0~HC63
T T0~T2047
E E0~E31
B-9
SR SR0~SR4096
SM SM0~SM4096
X Word: X0~X511 Bit: X0.0~X511.15

Y Word: Y0~Y511 Bit: Y0.0~Y511.15
D Word: D0~D98303 Bit: D0.0~D98303.15
L Word: L0~L98303 Bit: L0.0~L98303.15
M M0~M8191
S S0~S2047
C C0~C2047
HC HC0~HC63
T T0~T2047
E E0~E31
SR SR0~SR2047
SM SM0~SM2047

X Word: X0~X1023 Bit: X0.0~X1023.15
Y Word: Y0~Y1023 Bit: Y0.0~Y1023.15

D Word: D0~D131071 Bit: D0.0~D131071.15
L Word: L0~L131071 Bit: L0.0~L131071.15
M M0~M8191
S S0~S2047
C C0~C2047
HC HC0~HC63
T T0~T2047
E E0~E31
SR SR0~SR4095
SM SM0~SM4095
B-10
B.2.9 AHCPU560-EN2

X Word: X0~X4095 Bit: X0.0~X4095.15
Y Word: Y0~Y4095 Bit: Y0.0~Y4095.15
D Word: D0~D262143 Bit: D0.0~D262143.15

L Word: L0~L262143 Bit: L0.0~L262143.15
M M0~M8191
S S0~S4095
C C0~C2047
HC HC0~HC63
T T0~T2047
E E0~E31
SR SR0~SR4095
SM SM0~SM4095
B.2.10 AHxxEMC

X Word: X0~X511 Bit: X0.0~X511.15
Y Word: Y0~Y511 Bit: Y0.0~Y511.15
D Word: D0~D65535 Bit: D0.0~D65535.15
L Word: L0~L65535 Bit: L0.0~L65535.15
M M0~M8191
S S0~S2047
C C0~C2047
HC HC0~HC63
T T0~T2047
E E0~E31
SR SR0~SR2047
SM SM0~SM2047
B.2.11 AS200/AS300

X Word: X0~X63 Bit: X0.0~X63.15
Y Word: Y0~Y63 Bit: Y0.0~Y63.15
B - 11
D Word: D0~D29999 Bit: D0.0~D29999.15

M M0~M8191
S S0~S2047
C C0~C511
HC HC0~HC255
T T0~T511
E E0~E14
SR SR0~SR2047
SM SM0~SM4095
B.2.12 DVPxxMC
%IX %IX0.0~%IX127.7
%QX %QX0.0~%QX127.7
%MX %MX0.0~%MX131071.7
%IB %IB0~%IB127
%QB %QB0~%QB127
%MB %MB0~%MB131071
%IW %IW0~%IW63
%QW %QW0~%QW63
%MW %MW0~%MW65535
%ID %ID0~%ID31
%QD %QD0~%QD31
%MD %MD0~%MD32767
%IL %IL0~%IL15
%QL %QL0~%QL15
%ML %ML0~%ML16383
B.3 Compile & Uploading/Downloading Time

The duration for ISPSoft to compile programs is involved with the size, quantity of the programs and
the variable symbols and the condition of the computer. The duration to upload/download is involved
with the size of the project, the connection type and the communication speed. The following
information is listed for reference.
Operation System on the computer: CPU Intel(R) I7, RAM 4GB, Windows 7 32-bit
Project contents: 2 variable symbols and a basic ladder diagram with a total of 5000 networks; each
B-12
network contains 1 contact and 1 output coil.

Program compilation time: about 2 seconds
Program capacity: 10K STEP
Time for uploading: about 4.9 seconds via USB port
Time for downloading: about 4.6 seconds via USB port
B-13
MEMO
B-14
Appendix C Print Management Tool
Table of Contents
C.1 Introduction of the Environment................................................................ C-2
C.2 Introduction of the Setting Area ................................................................ C-3
C-1
C.1 Introduction of the Environment

The print management tool provides a convenient operation interface. Users can set a print format,
and preview the document which will be printed in the Print Preview window.
 Print button: After the setting is complete, users can click the Print button to start the printing of
the document.
 Setting area: There are two tabs in the setting area. One is the View Settings tab, and the other
is the Print Settings tab.
 Preview area: The document which will be printed is displayed in this area.
If users move the mouse cursor to the preview area and click the left mouse button, the pointer will
become a magnifying glass. After the left mouse button is clicked, ISPSoft will zoom in on the
preview area. After the right mouse button is clicked, ISPSoft will zoom out on the preview area.
C-2
A pp e nd ix C Pr i nt Ma na g em ent Too l
C.2 Introduction of the Setting Area

After users click the View Settings tab, they can adjust the display state of the preview area.
 If the print area does not fit the printed page, the system will divide the print area into
several pages. After One Page is clicked, one page will be displayed. After Overview is
clicked, all the pages will be displayed. The number of pages into which the print area is
divided is under the Overview button.
 Users can select a page which will be displayed by clicking Page Up or Page Down.
The present page number and the total number of pages are under the buttons.
 The graphic representations show the relative positions of all the pages. The red block
represents the present page.
 One page
 Overview
C-3
After users click the Print Setting tab, they can set the print format.
 After Paper Settings is clicked, the Print Setup window will appear.
 Users can scale the document by selecting a percentage in the Print Ratio box. The
users can also insert page numbers and a page title in the document.
 User can set document margins they want.
After the setting is complete, users can click the Print button to start the printing of the document.
C-4

DELTA IA-PLC ISPSoft UM EN 20190614 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DELTA IA-PLC ISPSoft UM EN 20190614 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DELTA IA-PLC ISPSoft UM EN 20190614 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ISPSoft User Manual

Industrial Automation Headquarters

Delta Greentech (China) Co., Ltd.

Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc.

Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.

ISPSoft User Manual

Delta Electronics Int’l (S) Pte Ltd.

Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd.

Delta Greentech (Brasil) S.A.

Chapter 1 Introducing ISPSoft

1.1 Introduction of ISPSoft and System Requirements............................ 1-2

1.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................... 1-2

1.2 Introduction of COMMGR ................................................................... 1-8

1.2.1 Operating Mode of COMMGR ............................................................ 1-8

1.3 ISPSoft for PLC Devices ................................................................... 1-14

1.3.1 ISPSoft - List of Programming Languages........................................ 1-14

Chapter 2 Starting and Setting ISPSoft

2.1 Guidelines and Environment ............................................................. 2-4

Chapter 3 PLC System Configuration & Settings

3.1 Parameter Setting for DVP Series PLC ............................................... 3-4

3.2 Hardware Configuration Tool ─ HWCONFIG ..................................... 3-10

3.3 Parameter Settings for AH500 Series PLC ........................................ 3-54

3.4 Parameter Settings for AHxxEMC Series PLC ................................... 3-82

3.5 Parameter Settings for AS Series PLC .............................................. 3-94

3.6 Parameter Settings for DVPxxMC Series PLC ................................. 3-128

3.7 Parameter Settings for Modules ..................................................... 3-138

3.8 HWCONFIG Parameter Management and Online Diagnosis ............ 3-146

3.9 Setting a RTC ............................................................................... 3-165

3.10 Setting the Memory in a PLC ........................................................ 3-166

Chapter 4 Quick Start

4.1 Quick Start ........................................................................................ 4-2

4.2 Procedure for Creating a Project in ISPSoft ....................................... 4-3

4.3 Creating a Project .............................................................................. 4-4

4.5 Creating a Program ......................................................................... 4-10

4.6 Testing and Debugging a Program................................................... 4-26

5.1 Program Organization Units and Tasks .............................................. 5-2

5.2 Program Organization Units .............................................................. 5-3

5.3 Tasks ................................................................................................. 5-5

5.4 Managing a POU .............................................................................. 5-14

5.5 Task Management ............................................................................ 5-24

5.6 Example ........................................................................................... 5-33

Chapter 6 Symbol Variables

6.1 Introduction of Symbols .................................................................... 6-2

6.2 Symbol Variable Management in ISPSoft ......................................... 6-13

6.3 Example .......................................................................................... 6-32

Chapter 7 Function Block and Library

7.1 Knowing Function Blocks ............................................................... 7-2

7.2 Structure of the Function Blocks in ISPSoft.................................... 7-3

7.3 Using a Function Block ................................................................. 7-25

7.4 Instance ....................................................................................... 7-29

7.5 Knowing the Library ..................................................................... 7-39

Chapter 8 Data Unit Type

8.1 User-defined Data Type/Data Unit Type ............................................. 8-2

8.2 Structure ............................................................................................ 8-2

8.2.1 Definition of a Structure ................................................................. 8-2

8.3 Enumeration ....................................................................................... 8-8

Chapter 10 Ladder Diagram

10.1 Introduction of a Ladder Diagram ................................................ 10-2